Order Code RL31339
CRS Report for Congress
Received through the CRS Web Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-Saddam Governance Updated February 23, 2004 Kenneth Katzman Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-Saddam Governance Summary Operation Iraqi Freedom accomplished a long-standing objective, the overthrow and capture of Saddam Hussein, but replacing that regime with a stable, moderate, democratic political structure has run into difficulty. Past U.S. efforts to change the regime failed because of limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the Iraqi opposition, and the efficiency and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping security services. Previous U.S. Administrations had ruled out major U.S. military action to change Iraq’s regime, believing such action would be risky and not necessarily justified by the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament.
In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to verifiably abandon its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs and the potential for it to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. In September 2002, the President told the U.N.
General Assembly that unless Iraq fully disarmed in cooperation with United Nations weapons inspectors, the United States would lead a coalition to achieve that disarmament militarily, making clear that this would include the ouster of Iraq’s President Saddam Hussein’s regime. After a November 2002 - March 2003 round of U.N. inspections in which Iraq’s cooperation was mixed, on March 19, 2003 the United States launched Operation Iraqi Freedom to disarm Iraq and change its regime. The regime fell on April 9, 2003.
In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change through U.S.-led military action would yield benefits beyond disarmament and reduction of support for terrorism; benefits such as liberation of the Iraqi people from an oppressive regime and promotion of stability and democracy throughout the Middle East. However, escalating resistance to the U.S.-led occupation has complicated U.S. efforts to restore stability, accomplish economic reconstruction, and build and transfer authority to Iraqi political and security bodies. Formerly exiled opposition groups form the core of a U.S.-appointed 25-seat “governing council” as well as a 25-person cabinet; these bodies are relatively representative of Iraq’s ethnic and political factions but not viewed widely within Iraq as effective or legitimate institutions. Recent legislation (H.R. 3289, P.L. 108-106) provides over $18.7 billion in supplemental FY2004 funding for military costs and reconstruction in Iraq (and Afghanistan).
See also CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Reconstruction Assistance, and CRS Report RL32090, FY2004 Supplemental Appropriations for Iraq, Afghanistan, and the Global War on Terrorism: Military Operations & Reconstruction Assistance. This report will be updated as warranted by major developments.
Contents
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda/Zarqawi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Sadr Movement/Moqtada Al Sadr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Iraq Liberation Act and Clinton Administration Relations With the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 The First ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Monarchists/Sharif Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Continued Doubts About Opposition Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 The Opposition Positions Itself Before War/Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Adnan Pachachi/Iraqi Independent Democrats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Post-Saddam Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Formation of the Major Party Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 The Governing Council and Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Iraqi Communist Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Handover of Sovereignty/November 2003 Transition Plan . . . . . . . . . 25 Local Governance and Civil Society Promotion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Iraqi Resistance and U.S. Security Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 The Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 With Signs of Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 The Capture of Saddam Hussein . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 “Iraqification”/Building Security Institutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Faction-Based Militias/Domestic Intelligence Apparatus . . . . . . . . . . 34 Internationalization/U.N. Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Restarting Iraq’s Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 CPA Budget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Supplemental Funding Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Funds Available/FY2005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Easing of U.S. Sanctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Termination of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Debt Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Searching for Former Regime Violations and Officials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Congressional Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-Saddam Governance The United States did not remove Iraq’s Saddam Hussein from power in the course of the 1991 Persian Gulf war, and his regime, contrary to U.S. expectations, survived post-war uprisings by Iraq’s Shiites and Kurds. Subsequently, the United States sought to remove Saddam from power by supporting dissidents inside Iraq, although changing Iraq’s regime was not declared policy until 1998. In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United States would seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A regime change policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, October 31, 1998). Bush Administration officials emphasized regime change as the cornerstone of U.S. policy toward Iraq shortly after the September 11, 2001, attacks. Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003, and had effectively removed Saddam Hussein from power by April 9, 2003. Saddam Hussein was captured alive on December 13, 2003.
The Bush Administration’s stated goal is to transform Iraq into a democracy that could be a model for the rest of the region. Iraq has not had experience with a democratic form of government, although parliamentary elections were held during the period of British rule under a League of Nations mandate (1920-1932). Iraq, which became independent in 1932, was governed by kings from the Hashemite dynasty during 1921-1958, although with substantial British direction and influence.1 Members of the Hashemite dynasty continue to rule in neighboring Jordan. Iraq’s first Hashemite king was Faysal bin Hussein, son of Sharif Hussein of Mecca, who led the Arab revolt against the Ottoman Empire. Faysal ruled Iraq as King Faysal I and was succeeded by his son, Ghazi (1933-1939). Ghazi was succeeded by his son, Faysal II, who ruled until the military coup of Abd al-Karim al-Qasim in 1958. He was ousted in February 1963 by an alliance of the Baath Party and military officers.
One of the Baath Party’s allies in the February 1963 coup was Abd al-Salam al- Arif. In November 1963, Arif purged the Baath, including Baathist Prime Minister Ahmad Hasan al-Bakr, and instituted direct military rule. Arif was killed in a helicopter crash in 1966 and was replaced by his elder brother, Abd al-Rahim al-Arif, who ruled until the Baath Party coup of July 1968. Following the Baath seizure, Ahmad Hasan al-Bakr, a military figure, returned to government as President of Iraq and Saddam Hussein, a civilian, became the second most powerful leader as Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council. In that position, Saddam developed and oversaw a system of overlapping security services to monitor loyalty among the population and within Iraq’s institutions, including the military. On July 1 See Eisenstadt, Michael and Eric Mathewson, eds. U.S. Policy in Post-Saddam Iraq:
Lessons From the British Experience. The Washington Institute for Near East Policy, 2003.
CRS-2
17, 1979, the aging al-Bakr resigned at Saddam’s urging, and Saddam became President of Iraq.
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions. The revolt in southern Iraq reached the suburbs of Baghdad, but the Republican Guard forces, composed mainly of regime loyalists, had survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from battle prior to the U.S. ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid- March 1991. Many Shiites blamed the United States for standing aside as the regime retaliated against those who participated in the rebellion. Kurds, benefitting from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991, drove Iraqi troops out of much of northern Iraq and subsequently remained relatively autonomous.
According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that purpose. The Administration apparently believed — and this view apparently was shared by many experts and U.S. officials — that a coup by elements within the current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq.
Many observers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria.
Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This opposition coalition was seen as providing a vehicle for the United States to build a viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.2 The following sections discuss organizations and personalities that were part of the U.S. effort to change Iraq’s regime during the 1990s and some that were not directly associated with those efforts but are emerging as major players in post- Saddam Iraq.
2 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2, 1992.
CRS-3
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi After 1991, the growing exile opposition coalition took shape in an organization called the Iraqi National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two main Kurdish militias, the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic Union of Kurdistan (PUK), participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens of opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came into the coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq.
The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests, including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq.3 However, many observers doubted its commitment to democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies. The INC’s first Executive Committee consisted of KDP leader Masud Barzani, ex-Baath Party and military official Hassan Naqib, and moderate Shiite cleric Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum. (Barzani and Bahr al-Ulum are now on the 25-member post-war Governing Council and both are part of its nine member rotating presidency.) Ahmad Chalabi. When the INC was formed, its Executive Committee selected Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 59 years old and is a secular Shiite Muslim from a prominent banking family, to run the INC on a daily basis. Chalabi was educated in the United States (Massachusetts Institute of Technology, MIT) as a mathematician. He fled Iraq to Jordan in 1958, when the Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military coup. This coup occurred 10 years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July 1968). In 1978, he founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian authorities on charges of embezzlement and he left Jordan, possibly with some help from members of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989.
In 1992, he was convicted in absentia of embezzling $70 million from the bank and sentenced to 22 years in prison. The Jordanian government subsequently repaid depositors a total of $400 million. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government was pressured by Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to the Jordanian government. In April 2003, senior Jordanian officials, including King Abdullah, called Chalabi “divisive” and stopped just short of saying he would be unacceptable to Jordan as leader of Iraq. Chalabi’s critics acknowledge that, despite allegations about his methods, he was single-minded in his determination to overthrow Saddam Hussein, and he is said to be favored by those Administration officials, particularly in the Department of Defense, who most supported changing Iraq’s regime by force.
3 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by INC representatives, February 1993.
CRS-4
Since Chalabi returned to Iraq, there have been no large public demonstrations supportive of him or the INC, indicating that he might not have a large following inside Iraq. However, anecdotal press reporting suggest that he has attracted some support from those Iraqis who most welcomed the U.S. military removal of Saddam Hussein and who want to comprehensively purge and exclude former Baath Party members from post-Saddam governance and security institutions. On April 6, 2003, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters (“Free Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by the U.S.
military from their base in the north to the Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs in southern Iraq, later deploying to Baghdad and other parts of Iraq.
After establishing his headquarters in Baghdad, Chalabi tried to build support by searching for fugitive members of the former regime and arranging for U.S. military forces in Iraq to provide security or other benefits to his potential supporters.
However, the Free Iraqi Forces accompanying Chalabi were disbanded following the U.S. decision in mid-May 2003 to disarm independent militias.
Chalabi is part of a grouping of five leaders of major exile parties that held a series of planning meetings shortly prior to the 2003 war. The major-party grouping was hoping to become the core of a successor regime, and the major parties are represented on the Governing Council. Chalabi is a member of the Governing Council and one of the nine that will rotate its presidency. He was president of the Council during the month of September 2003 and represented Iraq at the U.N.
General Assembly meetings that month.
A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book, Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq, detailing alleged Iraqi regime human rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracy for Iraq, including full rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he taught Middle Eastern politics at Brandeis University prior to returning to Iraq after the fall of Saddam. In August 2003, the Governing Council tapped Makiya to head a 25-person committee that was to propose a process for drafting a new constitution (see below).
On November 23, 2003, the Governing Council announced the appointment of a pro-INC Iraqi-American woman, Rend Rahim Francke, as representative of Iraq to the United States. Since the 1991 Gulf war, she headed an opposition group called the Iraq Foundation, which has an office in Washington and received some U.S.
democratization funds since the early 1990s. She is working out of Bahrain’s embassy in Washington, at least temporarily.
The Kurds/KDP and PUK. The Kurds, among the most pro-U.S. of all the groups in Iraq, do not have ambitions to play a major role in governing Arab Iraq, but Iraq’s neighbors have always been fearful that the Kurds might still seek outright independence. In committing to the concept of federalism, the 1992 INC platform assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq. Turkey, which has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War I. In 1961, the KDP, then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP leader Masud
CRS-5
Barzani’s father, began an insurgency that has continued until today, although interrupted by periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud Barzani’s brother, Idris, commanded Kurdish forces against Baghdad during the Iran-Iraq war but was killed in that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from the KDP in 1965; the PUK’s members are generally more well-educated, urbane, and left-leaning than those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000- 60,000 fighters, some of whom are trained in conventional military tactics.
In the aftermath of the 1991 Gulf war, the KDP and the PUK agreed in May 1992 to share power after parliamentary and executive elections. In May 1994, tensions between them flared into clashes, and the KDP turned to Baghdad for backing. In August 1996, Iraqi forces, at the KDP’s invitation, militarily helped the KDP capture PUK-held Irbil, seat of the Kurdish regional government. With U.S.
mediation, the Kurdish parties agreed on October 23, 1996, to a cease-fire and the establishment of a 400-man peace monitoring force composed mainly of Turkomens (75% of the force). The United States funded the force with FY1997 funds of $3 million for peacekeeping (Section 451 of the Foreign Assistance Act), plus about $4 million in DOD drawdowns (vehicles and communications gear), under Section 552 of the FAA. Also set up was a peace supervisory group consisting of the United States, Britain, Turkey, the PUK, the KDP, and Iraqi Turkomens.
A tenuous cease-fire held after November 1997, and the KDP and PUK leaders signed an agreement in Washington in September 1998 to work toward resolving the main outstanding issues (sharing of revenues and control over the Kurdish regional government). Reconciliation efforts showed substantial progress in 2002 as the Kurds perceived that the United States might act to overthrow the regime of Saddam Hussein. On October 4, 2002, the two Kurdish factions jointly reconvened the Kurdish regional parliament for the first time since their 1994 clashes. In June 2002, the United States gave the Kurds $3.1 million in new assistance to further the reconciliation process.
In post-Saddam Iraq, both Barzani and Talabani were part of the major-party grouping that has now been incorporated into the Governing Council, and both are part of the Council’s rotating presidency. Talabani was Council president during November 2003. The KDP and PUK are said to be increasingly combining their political resources and efforts to re-establish the joint governance of the Kurdish regions that was in place during 1992-1994. The Kurdish parties are also negotiating with U.S. authorities to maintain substantial autonomy in northern Iraq in a sovereign, post-occupation Iraq, although clashes have flared in December 2003- January 2004 between Arabs and Kurds in the city of Kirkuk as Kurdish leaders seek to politically incorporate that city into the Kurdish regions. The resolve of the major Kurdish parties to seek full autonomy reportedly was strengthened in the wake of a February 1, 2004, twin suicide bombing in Irbil at both party headquarters; over 100 Kurds, including some senior political officials, were killed in those attacks.
Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda/Zarqawi. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties enjoyed good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaikh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in Halabja, Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical attack on that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998.
CRS-6
A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam (Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam).
This Ansar faction was led by Mullah Krekar, an Islamist Kurd who reportedly had once studied under Shaikh Abdullah al-Azzam, an Islamic theologian of Palestinian origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama bin Laden. Ansar reportedly associated itself with Al Qaeda and agreed to host in its northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters, mostly of Arab origin, who had fled the U.S.-led war in Afghanistan in 2001. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, during which its base was captured, about 600 primarily Arab fighters lived in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, near the town of Khurmal.4 Ansar fighters clashed with the PUK around Halabja in December 2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedly responsible for an assassination attempt against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002. Possibly because his Ansar movement was largely taken over by Arab fighters from Afghanistan, Krekar left northern Iraq for Europe. He was detained in Norway in August 2002 and was arrested again in early January 2004.
The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials to be Abu Musab al-Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in Afghanistan. U.S. officials have said since August 2003 that some Ansar fighters, possibly at the direction of Zarqawi, might have remained in or re-entered Iraq and are participating in the resistance to the U.S. occupation, possibly including organizing acts of terrorism such as recent suicide bombings (see below). For more information on Ansar and alleged Iraq-Al Qaeda linkages, see CRS Report RL32217, Iraq and Al Qaeda: Allies or Not?
Shiite Islamist Organizations Some U.S. officials and outside experts have had concerns about the potential strength and ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups in post-Saddam Iraq. Many U.S. officials and experts perceive these factions as aligned with Iran, while others believe that Iraq’s Shiite clerics consult with but do not answer to Iran and do not seek to model Iraq after Iran’s Islamic republic. The United States sought to work with some Shiite Islamist opposition factions during the 1990s but had few if any contacts with others. Shiite Islamist factions hold at least five seats on the Governing Council unveiled July 13, 2003.
Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah. The revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al- Sistani, who is about 75 and is based in Najaf, was repressed during Saddam’s rule but is emerging as a major political as well as religious force in post-Saddam Iraq.
He is the most senior of the Shiite clerics that lead the Najaf-based “Hawza al- Ilmiya,” a grouping of seminaries and Shiite clerics, and numerous assessments say many Iraqi Shiites follow him and respond to his pronouncements and his calls for public demonstrations. The United States had no contact with Sistani when Saddam was in power and has had only limited contact with him since; he reportedly refuses to meet with U.S. representatives. Other senior Hawza clerics include Ayatollah Mohammad Sa’id Al Hakim, uncle of the slain SCIRI leader Mohammad Baqr, 4 Chivers, C.J. New York Times, December 6, 2002.
Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.”
CRS-7
Ayatollah Mohammad Isaac Fayadh, and Ayatollah Bashir al-Najafi. Other major Shiite Islamist groupings, including the Supreme Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI) and the Da’wa Party, are aligning themselves with Sistani in the post- Saddam power struggle. On the other hand, many Sunnis oppose Sistani, who, according to conflicting accounts, might have been a target of a failed assassination attempt on February 5, 2004. Some accounts, including from the U.S. military in southern Iraq, say there was no assassination attempt against Sistani.
Sistani, who was born in Mashhad, Iran, and studied in Qom, Iran, before relocating to Najaf,5 is considered to be in the tradition of his mentor, the late Grand Ayatollah Abol Qasem Musavi-Khoi, in opposing a direct role for clerics in governmental affairs. Sistani became head of the Hawza when Khoi died in 1992, and Sistani spent most of the 1990s lecturing and writing and trying to avoid scrutiny from Saddam Hussein’s regime. However, in early July 2003, Sistani began to take a more active role in Iraq’s post-war decision-making by issuing a statement that the drafters of a new constitution should be elected, not appointed. That statement, according to some Iraqi officials, caused a deadlock in the effort to develop a roadmap to the writing of a constitution; Shiites on the Governing Council reportedly insisted that Sistani’s directive be followed. Sistani subsequently opposed the November 15, 2003, agreement on a political transition (see below), viewing that as tantamount to an appointed government, and insisted instead on a process consisting of direct elections. In January 2004, hundreds of thousands of Sistani supporters demonstrated in Baghdad and throughout southern Iraq to support his call for elections.
Sistani reportedly wants Shiite Muslims to emerge dominant in Iraq, and although he might not support direct clerical participation in government, he also wants Iraq to maintain its Islamic culture and not become secular and westernized, according to press accounts. He favors modest dress for women and curbs on alcohol consumption and Western-style music and entertainment. On the other hand, his career and his statements do not suggest that he wants a strongly centralized, repressive regime that excludes Sunnis, Kurds, and other minorities from government.
SCIRI/Badr Corps. One overtly political and well-established Shiite faction is the Supreme Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member of the INC in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC banner. SCIRI was set up in 1982, composed mainly of ex-Da’wa Party members (see below), to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition groups in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s long-time leader, Ayatollah Muhammad Baqr al-Hakim, died in a car bomb by unknown assailants in Najaf on August 29, 2003.
Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim, who had been a Da’wa Party activist before forming SCIRI, was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head an Islamic Republic of Iraq. Baqr Al Hakim and his family had fled Iraq to Iran in 1980, during 5 For more information on Sistani, see Shadid, Anthony. Call of History Draws Iraqi Cleric to the Political Fore. Washington Post, February 1, 2004.
CRS-8
a major crackdown on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam feared that Iraqi Shiite Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution in Iran in 1979, posed a major threat to his regime. Mohammed Baqr was the son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a prominent Shiite leader in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini when Khomeini was in exile in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. Baqr Al Hakim had returned to Iraq on May 10, 2003, welcomed by crowds in Basra and Najaf. His younger brother, Abd al-Aziz, has taken over the leadership of the movement in the wake of his elder brother’s death. (Another Hakim brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan in 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s security services.) Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim’s key aide is Adel Abd-al Mahdi.
Until August 2002, when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures for meetings in Washington, D.C., SCIRI had refused to work openly with the United States or accept U.S. assistance, although it was part of the INC and did have contacts with the United States prior to the 2003 war effort. Unlike some other Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI has had good working relations with some Iraqi Sunni Arab factions and most Kurdish parties. In post-Saddam Iraq, SCIRI leaders have participated in U.S.-led efforts to establish a post-war government and counseled their followers to tolerate, at least temporarily, the U.S. occupation as a necessary vehicle for building an Iraq in which Shiites are adequately represented. Abd al-Aziz al Hakim met with other opposition leaders in late April 2003 at a post-war governance planning session in Iraq, sponsored by U.S. officials. Abd al-Aziz later helped constitute the major-party core of the Governing Council, and he is part of the nine-person rotating Council presidency. (He headed the Council during December 2003.) At the same time, SCIRI has called for the rapid restoration of Iraqi sovereignty and has said it does not seek to establish an Iranian-style Islamic republic. Nonetheless, U.S. officials are said to be mistrustful of SCIRI’s goals and its ties to Iran.
In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about 10,000-15,000 fighters/activists organized into a “Badr Brigades” (named after a major battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from Iran into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. Iran’s Revolutionary Guard, which is politically aligned with Iran’s hard line civilian officials, has been the key patron of the Badr Brigades, providing it with weapons, funds, and other assistance; the Brigades fought alongside the Guard against Iraqi forces during the Iran-Iraq war. However, many Iraqi Shiites view SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr Brigade operations in southern Iraq prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark broad popular unrest against the Iraqi regime. Badr Brigade fighters have deployed in Najaf and other southern cities since the bombing.
A variety of press reports say that some other individual militias now providing security in many towns in southern Iraq are linked to the Badr Brigades. One such militia is derived from the fighters who challenged Saddam Hussein’s forces in the marsh areas of southern Iraq, around the town of Amara, north of Basra. It goes by the name Hizbollah (Party of God)-Amara, and it is headed by marsh guerrilla leader Abdul Karim Muhammadawi, nicknamed “Prince of the Marshes” who was named to the Governing Council. He is widely perceived as an ally of SCIRI and is considered by observers to have substantial Shiite support north of Basra.
CRS-9
Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, Iraq’s oldest organized Shiite Islamist grouping, continues to exist as a separate group, but many Da’wa activists appear to be at least loosely allied with SCIRI and Sistani. The party was founded in 1957 by a revered Iraqi Shiite cleric, Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of Ayatollah Khomeini. It was the most active Shiite opposition movement in the few years following Iran’s Islamic revolution in February 1979; Da’wa activists conducted guerrilla attacks against the Baathist regime and attempted assassinations of senior Iraqi leaders, including Tariq Aziz. Baqr Al Sadr and his sister were hung by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the unrest, and many other Da’wa activists were killed or imprisoned. After the Iraqi crackdown, many surviving Da’wa leaders moved into Iran; some subsequently joined SCIRI, but others rejected Iranian control of Iraq’s Shiite opposition movement and continued to affiliate only with Da’wa.
In post-Saddam Iraq, Da’wa’s current leader, Ibrahim Jafari, and its leader in Basra, Abd al Zahra Othman, are on the Governing Council, as is a former Da’wa activist turned human rights activist, Muwaffaq Al-Ruba’i. Jafari is one of the nine members of the Council that is rotating the presidency; he was first to hold that post- August 2003.) The Kuwaiti branch of the Da’wa Party allegedly was responsible for a May 1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The Hizballah organization in Lebanon was founded by Lebanese clerics loyal to Ayatollah Baqr Al Sadr and the late Ayatollah Khomeini, and there continue to be personal and ideological linkages between Hizballah and the Da’wa Party. The Hizballah activists who held U.S.
hostages in that country during the 1980s often attempted to link release of the Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party prisoners held by Kuwait for those attacks in the 1980s. Some Iraqi Da’wa members look to Lebanon’s senior Shiite cleric Mohammed Hossein Fadlallah, who was a student and protege of Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, for spiritual guidance; Fadlallah also reportedly perceives himself a rival of Sistani as a pre-eminent Shiite authority figure. The linkages between Iraqi and Lebanese Shiites could explain reports that security personnel and other activists from Lebanese Hizballah have entered Iraq since the fall of Saddam Hussein, although other explanations include an effort by Iran to work through Lebanese Hizballah to build leverage in southern Iraq.6 Sadr Movement/Moqtada Al Sadr.7 Members of the clan of the late Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq.
The Sadr clan, based in Iraq during Saddam Hussein’s rule, was repressed and not politically active during that time. The United States had no contact with this grouping prior to the 2003 war and did not attempt to enlist it in any overthrow efforts during 1991-2002. Although the Sadr clan has been closely identified with the Da’wa Party (see above), it appears that members of the clan and their followers 6 Risen, James. “Hezbollah, in Iraq, Refrains from Attacks on Americans.” New York Times, November 24, 2003.
7 See also White, Jeffrey. “To the Brink: Muqtada Al Sadr Challenges the United States.” Washington Institute for Near East Policy, Policywatch 794. October 17, 2003.
CRS-10
currently are operating in post-war Iraq as a separate movement. Another revered member of the clan, Mohammed Sadiq Al Sadr, and two of his sons, were killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999. A surviving son of Mohammad Sadiq, Moqtada Al Sadr, who is about 30 years old, has attempted to rally his followers to attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite politics. He and his clan apparently have a large following in the poorer Shiite neighborhoods of Baghdad, which, after the fall of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr City,” from the former name of “Saddam City.” However, Moqtada is viewed by many Iraqi Shiites as a young radical who lacks religious and political weight. To compensate for his lack of religious credentials, he has sought spiritual authority for his actions from exiled Iraqi senior cleric, Ayatollah Kazem Haeri, who is living in Qom, Iran.
Moqtada’s reputation was tarnished in early April 2003 when his supporters allegedly killed Abd al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Abdol Qasem Musavi-Khoi, shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al- Majid Khoi headed the Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq after U.S.-led forces took Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political doctrines of Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran. Moqtada has also been highly critical of Sistani, possibly because his father, Mohammad Sadiq Al Sadr, had been a rival of Sistani for pre-eminent Shiite religious authority in Iraq.
The Sadr grouping is not represented in the Governing Council. Moqtada has used his Friday prayer sermons in Kufa (near Najaf) and other forums to denounce the Council as a puppet of the U.S. occupation. In July 2003, Moqtada and his aides began recruiting for an Islamic army, for now unarmed, that Sadr says must challenge the U.S. occupation, although he has thus far stopped short of openly calling for armed attacks on American forces. He is openly calling for a cleric-led Islamic state similar to that of Iran. One report says that Sunni Islamists, led by Shaikh Ahmad Qubaysi, who returned in April 2003 from exile in the UAE, is assisting the Sadr faction in opposing the occupation.8 If true, this could represent the emergence of a Sunni-Shiite Islamist anti-occupation coalition.
Later in October 2003, and amid assessments that Moqtada’s popularity is low and waning further, his supporters stepped up the challenge to the United States. He named an alternate “government” for Iraq, and some of his followers formed armed militias and attempted unsuccessfully to seize control of some mosques in Najaf.
Pro-Sadr militants also ambushed some U.S. forces. Press reports say U.S.
commanders have debated how to control Moqtada Al Sadr, with the option of arresting him apparently under consideration. Possibly to head off any U.S. action against him, Moqtada tempered some of his statements in October 2003. Another possible explanation for his apparent moderation is that Moqtada might be trying to position his movement for involvement in the transition regime that is to replace the Governing Council; his involvement would probably require the acquiescence of U.S. authorities in Iraq.
8 Shadid, Anthony. “Iraqi Clerics Unite in Rare Alliance.” Washington Post, August 17, 2003.
CRS-11
Islamic Amal. Another Shiite Islamist organization, the Islamic Amal (Action) Organization, has traditionally been allied with SCIRI. In the early 1980s, Islamic Amal was under the SCIRI umbrella but later broke with it. It is headed by Mohammed Taqi Modarassi, a Shiite cleric, who returned to Iraq from exile in Iran in April 2003, after Saddam Hussein’s regime fell. Islamic Amal, which has a following among Shiite Islamists mainly in Karbala, conducted attacks against Saddam Hussein’s regime in the 1980s. However, it does not appear to have a following nearly as large as SCIRI or the other Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s brother, Abd al-Hadi, headed the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, which tried to stir up Shiite unrest against the Bahrain regime in the 1980s and 1990s.
Since returning to Iraq in April 2003, Mohammad Taqi has argued against violent opposition to the U.S. occupation, saying that such a challenge would plunge Iraq into civil warfare. On November 14, 2003, Modarassi criticized the United States for not holding elections to any of the political bodies formed thus far.
Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups Differences among the various anti-Saddam organizations led to the near collapse of the U.S. regime change effort the mid-1990s. As noted above, in May 1994, the KDP and the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs revenues levied at border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s government based in Irbil. The infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC offensive against Iraqi troops in March 1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at the last minute. Although it was repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of the less well-trained and poorly motivated Iraqi units facing the Kurds. Some INC leaders point to the battle as an indication that the INC could have succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. intervention, had it received more U.S. funding and training in the 1990s.
The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition in the mid-1990s caused the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by renewing ties to a non-INC group, Iraq National Accord (INA).9 The INA, originally founded in 1990 with Saudi support, consisted of defectors from Iraq’s Baath Party, military, and security services who were perceived as having ties to disgruntled officials in those organizations. It is headed by Dr. Iyad al-Alawi, himself a former Baathist who fell out with Saddam Hussein in the 1960s and went to Europe. He became a physican and was president of the Iraqi Student Union in Europe. He is a secular Shiite Muslim, but most of the members of the INA are Sunni Muslims. The INA’s prospects appeared to brighten in August 1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al-Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons of mass destruction programs — defected to Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip on the military and security services was weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate from there. The INA was ultimately penetrated by Iraq’s intelligence services and, in June 1996, Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by arresting or executing over 100 INA sympathizers in the military.
9 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997.
CRS-12
Baghdad went on the offensive against both the INA, as well as the INC, in mid- 1996, culminating with the August 1996 incursion into northern Iraq, at the invitation of the KDP. Iraq not only helped the KDP capture Irbil from the PUK, but Saddam’s forces took advantage of their presence in northern Iraq to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout the north. In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists, mostly from the INC.
Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA had been rebuilt and was operating throughout Iraq. Although it was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war, there is a history of friction between the two groups.
Chalabi and the INC have argued for comprehensive purging of former Baathists from Iraq’s institutions, while the INA, which has ex-Baathists in it, has argued for retaining some members of the former regime in official positions. Like the INC, the INA does not appear to have a mass following in Iraq, but it has close ties to some agencies of the U.S. government. In post-Saddam Iraq, Alawi has taken the lead in pushing for the establishment of an internal security service for post-war Iraq, dominated by the major exile factions. Alawi was part of the major-party grouping that became the core of the Governing Council, and Alawi has been named a member of that Council and one of its nine-member rotating presidency; he was president in October 2003.
Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks For the two years following the opposition’s 1996 setbacks, the Clinton Administration had little contact with the opposition. In those two years, the INC, INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations and their ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998, then Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations” about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish.
Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam Hussein, although virtually no one in Congress or outside was advocating a U.S.-led military invasion to accomplish that goal. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with an FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, signed May 1, 1998) that, among other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October 1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions.
The remaining $2 million was used to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes, and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix.
CRS-13
Some of the war crimes funding went to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues.
Iraq Liberation Act and Clinton Administration Relations With the Opposition A clear indication of congressional support for a more active U.S. overthrow effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998: the Iraq Liberation Act (ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998). The ILA gave the President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles and services (and authorized $2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be designated by the Administration. The Act’s passage was widely interpreted as an expression of congressional support for the concept, advocated by Chalabi and some U.S. experts, of promoting an insurgency by using U.S. air-power to expand opposition-controlled territory. President Clinton signed the legislation despite reported widespread doubts within the Clinton Administration about the chances of success in promoting an opposition insurgency.
The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq. No specific language in the Act provides for its termination after Saddam Hussein is removed from power.
The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were withdrawn, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December 16-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) The First ILA Designations. Further steps to promote regime change followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, a career diplomat, Frank Ricciardone, was named as a State Department “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999, after consultations with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13) that the major anti- Saddam organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance under the Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the pro-monarchist Movement for Constitutional Monarchy (MCM). (Because of its possible role in the eventual formation of Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001, although it was not formally taken off the ILA eligibility list.)
CRS-14
Monarchists/Sharif Ali. One of the designated groups, the Movement for Constitutional Monarchy, is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a relative of the Hashemite monarchs (he is a cousin of King Faysal II, the last Iraqi monarch) that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. Sharif Ali, who is about 48 and was a banker in London, claims to be the leading heir to the former Hashemite monarchy, although there are other claimants, mostly based in Jordan. The MCM was considered a small movement that could not contribute much to the pre-war overthrow effort, although it was part of the INC and the United States had contacts with it. In the post-Saddam period, Sharif Ali returned to Iraq on June 10, 2003. He did not participate directly in negotiations with the U.S.-led occupation authority on the formation of the Governing Council, and neither Sharif Ali nor any of his followers was appointed to the Governing Council. He left Iraq for London in June 2003, reportedly somewhat disillusioned at the pace of transition to Iraqi self-rule.
In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and “non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999-2000, about 150 opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses providing civil affairs training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers, communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. The Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficiently organized to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. (The Hurlburt trainees were not brought into Operation Iraqi Freedom or into the Free Iraqi Forces that deployed to Iraq toward the end of the active combat phase of the war.) Continued Doubts About Opposition Capabilities. During 1999- 2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end the debate within the Clinton Administration over regime change in Iraq. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Some took those decisions as an indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical about the opposition’s capabilities. The Clinton Administration maintained that the Iraqi opposition would not succeed unless backed by direct U.S.
military involvement and that direct U.S. military action was not justified by the degree of threat posed by Iraq. Clinton Administration officials added that supporting the opposition militarily could draw the United States into long-term military involvement in Iraq. Others suggested the Clinton Administration should focus instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq by threatening major use of force, or by launching repeated air strikes, unless and until Iraq re-admitted the U.N.
weapons inspectors that left Iraq in December 1998.
As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the Iraqi people,” of which at least $12 million was for the INC to distribute humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million
CRS-15
was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000, the Clinton Administration reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop an aid distribution plan and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that noted that any INC effort to distribute humanitarian aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and to any relief distributors with which the INC would contract.10 Bush Administration Policy Bush Administration policy toward Iraq started out similar to that of the previous administration, but changed dramatically after the September 11, 2001 terrorist attacks, even though no significant evidence linking Iraq to those attacks came to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in President Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he characterized Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea.
Pre-September 11 Policy
Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq, which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist regional support for a “smart sanctions” plan — modification of the U.N. sanctions regime and “oil-for-food” program to improve international enforcement of the U.N.
ban on exports of weapons-related technology to Iraq. The plan offered to relax U.N. restrictions on exports to Iraq of purely civilian equipment.11 The Administration believed that the “smart sanctions” proposal, by easing the suffering of the Iraqi people, would cause Iraq’s neighbors and other countries to cease unilateral violations of the sanctions regime. Secretary Powell, who had openly expressed skepticism about the opposition’s prospects, barely raised the regime change issue during his trip or in his March 7, 2001, testimony before the House International Relations Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.12 After 10 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.” January 17, 2001.
11 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food Program, Sanctions, and U.S. Policy.
12 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times, March 2, 2001.
CRS-16
about a year of Security Council negotiations, the major feature of the smart sanctions plan — new procedures that virtually eliminated U.N. review of civilian exports to Iraq — was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Resolution 1409).
Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime change policy, many of the persistent questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy were debated early in the Bush Administration.13 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush Administration did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first year. During his confirmation hearings as Deputy Secretary of Defense, a leading advocate of overthrowing Iraq’s regime, Paul Wolfowitz, said that he did not yet see a “plausible plan” for changing the regime.
Like its predecessor, the Bush Administration initially declined to provide the opposition with lethal aid, combat training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the separate State Department position of “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” further casting doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy.
On February 2, 2001, the Bush Administration confirmed that, shortly after President Bush took office, the Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted the INC a license to proceed with information gathering inside Iraq only, and not actual distribution of humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the Administration amounted to withholding U.S. backing for the INC plan to rebuild its presence inside Iraq.
Many in Congress, on the other hand, continued to support the INC as the primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional sentiment, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the FY2001 ESF appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an estimated additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.14 Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime Bush Administration policy toward Iraq became notably more assertive after the September 11, 2001, attacks, stressing regime change and asserting that containment was failing or, at best, inadequate. Almost immediately after the U.S.- led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in Afghanistan began in early October 2001, speculation began building that the Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use of military force as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism.
Some U.S. officials, reportedly led by deputy Defense Secretary Wolfowitz, believed that the United States needed to respond to the September 11, 2001 attacks by ending any or all regimes that support terrorist groups, including Iraq. (Iraq was a designated state sponsor of terrorism during 1979-82, and was again designated after the 1990 invasion of Kuwait. Iraq remains on the list, despite the change of regime, although it is expected it will be removed.) As noted above, in his January 29, 2002 State of the Union message, President Bush named Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along 13 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh, Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002.
14 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001.
CRS-17
with North Korea and Iran. Vice President Cheney visited the Middle East in March 2002 reportedly to consult regional countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq militarily, although the countries visited reportedly urged greater U.S. attention to the Arab-Israeli dispute and opposed confrontation with Iraq.
The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for confronting Iraq were (1) its purported refusal to end its WMD programs, and (2) its ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. Most senior officials did not specifically assert that Iraq was an imminent or immediate threat to U.S. security, but they did assert that Iraq was a “grave and gathering” threat that was best blunted before the threat became imminent. U.S. officials said the September 11, 2001, attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to gather before acting but must instead act preemptively or preventively. The Administration added that regime change would have the further benefit of liberating the Iraqi people and promoting stability in the Middle East, possibly facilitating a resolution to the Arab- Israeli dispute.
Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax mailings, senior U.S. officials said in the runup to the war that there was evidence of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. (For a discussion of this issue, see CRS Report RL32217, Iraq and Al Qaeda: Allies or Not?) WMD Threat Perception. Senior U.S. officials asserted the following about Iraq’s WMD:
! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8, 2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs.
! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the 1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings of retaliation and did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war.
! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of this view cited presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in October 2002, portions of which were released publicly, stating the CIA view that Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to terrorists if the United States were to attack Iraq. At that point, according to that argument,
CRS-18
Saddam Hussein would be left with little incentive not to cooperate with terrorist groups capable of striking at U.S. interests.
Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action against Iraq, the Bush Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002, President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups — the INC, the INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM — to Washington for meetings with senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S.
government, which reportedly tended to favor different opposition groups.
Numerous press reports indicated that the Defense Department and office of Vice President Cheney believed the INC might be able to lead a post-Saddam regime, while the State Department and Central Intelligence Agency (CIA) believed the INC had little popularity inside Iraq.
In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August 15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in FY2001 ESF to the Iraqi National Congress (INC), funds that had been held up due to differences between the State Department and the INC over what activities would be funded.
Under the agreement, the State Department-provided $8 million was to be used to fund the INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its offices in Washington, London, Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate its Al Mutamar newspaper and Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund the information gathering portion of the INC’s activities (about $4 million); the State Department had refused to fund those activities, which were to be conducted inside Iraq, in part because of questions about the INC’s credibility in Iraq and its use of U.S. funds.
At the same time, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic-based groups. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had increasing contact during this period included the following:
1) the Iraqi National Movement, formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib (who was part of an early leadership body of the INC) and Hatim Mukhlis, who claimed support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan. Mukhlis has returned to Iraq and reportedly is active politically.
2) the Iraqi National Front, another ex-military group, founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and participated in the post-1991 Gulf war anti-Saddam uprisings. He has been active politically in Iraq since the fall of Saddam.
CRS-19
3) the Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement, established in 1996 by ex-officer Najib al-Salhi. Salhi, who served in the Republican Guard, defected in 1995.
He and his party have been active politically in Iraq since the fall of Saddam.
4) the Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was established in August 2002, headed by Wafiq al-Samarra’i, a former head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of staff of Iraq’s military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was based in Denmark since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member.
He is under investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of chemical weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities said on March 17, 2003, that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his home there,15 although his current whereabouts are unknown;
5) the Iraqi Turkmen Front, a small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping, generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq. Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq;
6) the Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another Shiite Islamic Party, headed by Jamil Wakil — a follower of Ayatollah Shirazi. (Shirazi is an Iranian cleric who was the spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, IFLB, see above under Islamic Amal). The group has not appeared active in Iraq since the fall of Saddam Hussein; and
7) the Assyrian Democratic Movement, headed by Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq, but there is a strong diaspora in the United States. The Bush Administration formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002. (Kanna is on the Governing Council.) The Opposition Positions Itself Before War/Second ILA Designations. The Bush Administration applauded efforts during 2001 and 2002 by the ex-military led groups to coordinate with each other and with the INC and other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London and jointly run with the INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers. As U.S. military action against Iraq approached, President Bush issued a determination (December 9, 2002) to draw down the remaining $92 million authorized for defense articles and services under the Iraq Liberation Act for the INA, the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi opposition groups designated by me under the Act before or after this determination.” That same day, the Bush Administration made six of the ex-military led factions discussed above (except the Higher Council for National Salvation) eligible to receive draw downs under the ILA. The announcement appeared to be part of reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists in tasks that could assist U.S. forces, possibly including combat units.16 An initial group of 3,000 was selected, but only about 70 of them completed training at an air 15 “‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper.” Agence France Press, April 7, 2003.
16 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.” Washington Post, October 19, 2002.
CRS-20
base (Taszar) in Hungary, according to press reports.17 These recruits served with U.S. forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom as translators and mediators between U.S.
forces and local leaders, and most did not stay in Iraq, according to observers.
As 2002 drew to a close, the opposition began planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002, with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in London. The conference was organized by the same six exile groups whose leaders visited Washington in August 2002, but included other groups as well, and they discussed whether the opposition should declare a provisional government. The Administration opposed that step on the grounds that doing so would give the impression that the United States was backing the exile groups in their efforts to dominate post-war Iraq politically. The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65-member follow-up committee, which some criticized as weighted heavily toward Shiite Islamist groups such as SCIRI.
The opposition met again during February 24-27, 2003, in northern Iraq, and formed, against the urging of U.S. representatives at the meeting, a six-seat committee to prepare for a transition regime. The six-person committee included PUK leader Talabani, KDP leader Barzani, SCIRI leader Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign minister Adnan Pachachi. (A member from each of these groups is on the Governing Council, as is Pachachi.) Adnan Pachachi/Iraqi Independent Democrats. Adnan Pachachi, who is about 80, served as foreign minister and ambassador to the United Nations during the 1960s, under the military governments of Abd al-Salam and then Abd al-Rahman Arif (“the Arif brothers”). Pachachi lived in exile in the UAE during Saddam Hussein’s rule and heads a small party called the “Iraqi Independent Democrats.” He is one of the rotating presidents of the Governing Council and was president during January 2004.
Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if that country wanted to avert military action. In a probable effort to garner international support for any U.S.-led war effort against Iraq, the Administration had downplayed the goal of regime change in President Bush’s September 12, 2002, speech before the United Nations General Assembly, stressing instead the need to enforce U.N. resolutions that required Iraqi disarmament. However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change goal after February 2003 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course.
In mid-March 2003, U.N. diplomacy over whether the U.N. Security Council should authorize war against Iraq broke down. The impasse followed several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by the director of the U.N. inspection body UNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification, and Inspection Commission) Hans Blix and the director of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), Mohammad al- Baradei, most recently on March 7, 2003. The briefings, based on WMD inspections that resumed November 27, 2002, under Resolution 1441, were generally critical of 17 Williams, Daniel. “U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles.” Washington Post, December 18, 2002.
CRS-21
Iraq for failing to pro-actively cooperate to clear up outstanding questions about Iraq’s WMD program. However, the latter two briefings (February 24 and March 7, 2003) noted progress in clearing up some outstanding questions. The Blix/Baradei briefings said Iraq had not accounted for its past WMD, but the two did not state that they were certain that Iraq had retained WMD, or that they had uncovered any banned WMD. Iraq declared short range ballistic missiles that were determined by Blix to be of prohibited ranges, and Blix ordered Iraq to destroy them. Iraq began the destruction prior to the launching of the U.S.-led war. (For more detail on the issue of Iraq’s WMD pre- and post-war, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117: Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that inspections should be given more time. They noted that Iraq was well contained by sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones. Those who agreed with this view maintained that, as long as Iraq allowed access to U.N. weapons inspections, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national security. The inspectors reported few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700 inspections of about 400 different sites. Others experts believed that, even if Iraq were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could have been deterred by U.S. overall strategic superiority, presumably including the U.S. nuclear arsenal.
The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq had not fundamentally decided to disarm. The Administration asserted on March 17, 2003, that diplomatic options to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full attention to military action. That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and his sons, Uday and Qusay, an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war.
They refused the ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003.
In the war, Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the Iraqi military, at times, put up stiff resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi military commanders or Baathist political figures came forward to try to establish a post-Saddam government, but regime leaders fled Baghdad, and the whereabouts of some of the top leadership, including Izzat Ibrahim al-Duri, are unknown. No WMD was used, although Iraq did fire some ballistic missiles into Kuwait. It is not clear whether those missiles were of prohibited ranges (greater than 150 km).
CRS-22
Post-Saddam Governance Issues Since Saddam Hussein’s regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, there has been increasing debate about the effectiveness of U.S. policy toward Iraq. The outcome of the debate might depend on such factors as the pace and costs of reconstruction; the degree of continued resistance to the U.S.-led occupation; the amount of WMD ultimately found, if any; and whether a post-Saddam government is stable and democratic. The same U.S. concerns about fragmentation of and instability in Iraq that existed in prior years are present in the current debate over how to establish a post-Saddam regime. Some experts believe that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall under the control of pro-Iranian Shiite Islamist forces who are asserting growing control over areas inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites. Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s population but have been under-represented in every Iraqi government since modern Iraq’s formation in 1920. (For further information on economic reconstruction and its funding, see CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Reconstruction Assistance.) The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA). After the fall of the regime, the United States set up an occupation structure, a decision reportedly based on Administration concerns that immediate sovereignty for Iraq would likely result in infighting among established opposition factions. The Bush Administration initially tasked Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) to direct civilian reconstruction, working through a staff of U.S. diplomats and other U.S. government personnel who served as advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various ministries. He headed the Office of Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance (ORHA), within the Department of Defense, created by a January 20, 2003 executive order. Garner and some of his staff of about 200 deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003, to begin work.
Press reports said that senior U.S. officials were dissatisfied with the slow pace of reconstruction and lax control of post-war Iraqi politics under Garner, and on May 6, 2003, the Administration appointed former ambassador L. Paul Bremer to lead the overall effort, with a focus on political reconstruction. He arrived on May 12, 2003, to head the CPA, which subsumed ORHA. The Administration stated that it was always envisioned that a civilian would eventually take over the U.S. effort and denied the personnel shift indicated high-level dissatisfaction with Garner. U.S.
officials refer to the CPA as an occupying authority legitimized by U.N. Security Council Resolution 1483 of May 22, 2003. (Among other provisions, Resolution 1483 lifted U.N. sanctions on Iraq.) Another alteration of the U.S. post-war structure was made public in early October 2003; the White House announced that an “Iraq Stabilization Group” under the direction of National Security Adviser Condoleezza Rice would coordinate interagency support to the CPA in Iraq. The move has been widely viewed as a diminution in Defense Department control over post-war governance. The Washington Times reported on January 6, 2004, that the military side of U.S.
operations might soon change with the potential appointment of a four-star U.S.
general as U.S. military commander for Iraq; current operations in Iraq are headed by a three-star officer, Lt. Gen. Ricardo Sanchez.
CRS-23
Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule The Administration says that U.S. forces will stay in Iraq until there is a stable, democratic successor regime that is at peace with its neighbors. However, there has been some debate between U.S. authorities and key anti-Saddam groups over the pace and the means to move Iraq to self-government. This debate took on increasing urgency as resistance attacks on U.S. forces and international organizations in Iraq escalated in 2003.
Shortly after the regime fell, ORHA director Jay Garner began a process to establish a successor regime. Senior U.S. officials, including deputy Defense Secretary Paul Wolfowitz, said in early April 2003 that they hoped to have a successor regime in place within six months of the fall of the regime. The Administration organized a meeting in Nasiriyah (April 15, 2003) of about 100 Iraqis of varying ideologies; many of the attendees were representatives of Iraqi tribal groupings and emerging political movements. SCIRI, along with several Shiite clerics, boycotted and called for an Islamic state. A follow-up meeting of about 250 delegates was held in Baghdad on April 26, ending in agreement to hold a broader meeting, within a month, to name an interim Iraqi administration. However, in mid- May 2003, U.S. officials, apparently fearing that existing major groups could not form a stable regime, or that Shiite Islamists would dominate a successor authority, ended this process.
Formation of the Major Party Grouping. In parallel with the April 26 meeting in Baghdad, the five most prominent exiled opposition groups met, with U.S. envoys present: SCIRI, the INC, the INA, the PUK, and the KDP. On May 9, 2003, the five major parties agreed to expand their grouping to seven, adding to their ranks the little known Nasir al-Chadirchy, head of a party called the National Democratic Party of Iraq, as well as the Da’wa Party (see above). The major-party grouping criticized the U.S. decision in May 2003 to delay the formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority. In June 2003, with U.S. casualties in Iraq mounting and a growing sense of resentment among the Iraqi population, the CPA began tilting back toward the views of the major Iraqi exile parties. Bremer said on June 23, 2003, that the planned 25- to 30-member body would have “real authority” from its first days and would not be purely advisory. He said it would nominate ministry heads, recommend policies, and convene a “constitutional conference” to draft a new constitution,18 although it would not assume sovereignty.
The Governing Council and Cabinet. On July 13, 2003, a Governing Council was unveiled to the Iraqi public, appointed by the U.S.-led CPA but reflecting the influence of the major-party grouping. It also contained prominent Iraqis who were never in exile and were not affiliated with the exiled opposition.
Prior to the assassination on September 20, 2003, of Council member Akila al- Hashimi (a Shiite woman and former foreign ministry official) the Council had 25 members, of which 3 were women and 13 were Shiite Muslims. Of the 12 Shiite Muslims still on the Council, one seat is held by SCIRI directly (Abd al-Aziz Al 18 Transcript: “Bremer Reviews Progress, Plans for Iraq Reconstruction.” Washington File, June 23, 2003.
CRS-24
Hakim, younger brother of Mohammad Baqr), one is held by a guerrilla affiliated with SCIRI (Abdul Karim al-Muhammadawi), two are Da’wa Party (Ibrahim al-Jafari and Abdul Zahra Othman) leaders, and considered allies of SCIRI, and one is a former Da’wa activist (Muwaffaq al-Ruba’i). Also on the Council is a moderate Shiite cleric, Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum, who is not affiliated with SCIRI or Da’wa.
He headed the Ahl al-Bayt charity center in London since the 1980s. The remaining Shiite Muslims, such as Chalabi and Iyad al-Alawi, are secular. One Sunni Muslim Islamist was appointed — Muhsin Abdul Hamid — who heads the Iraqi Islamic Party; he does not have a clear relationship with the Shiite Islamists on the Council.
(Akila Hashimi’s vacant Council seat was filled on December 8 by Salama al- Khufaji, a Shiite women who is a dentist and teaches at Baghdad University.) The Council includes five Kurds, including the two main Kurdish leaders Jalal Talabani and Masud Barzani. The Kurds are generally considered the most pro-U.S.
of all Iraqi factions and are generally reluctant to openly criticize the CPA.
Although not a cohesive bloc, the Council includes exiles and non-exiles who generally want a liberal democracy and could be considered generally pro-U.S. Most prominent among them is Chalabi, but this grouping includes National Democratic Party leader Nasir al-Chadirchy and Adnan Pachachi, both of whom are Sunni Muslims. Others most likely to affiliate with this bloc include Sunni businessman Samir Shakir al-Sumaidy; Sunni tribal member and civil engineer Ghazi al-Yawar, who is president of Saudi-based Hicap Technology; the Shiite coordinator for the Human Rights Association of Babel, Ahmad al-Barak; and the two other women Council members, Songul Chapouk, a member of the Turkomen minority, who heads the Iraqi Women’s Association, and Raja al-Khuza’i, a Shiite who heads the maternity hospital in Diwaniyah.
A member of the Assyrian Christian community is on the Council. Yonadam Kanna, the secretary-general of the Democratic Assyrian Movement, is on the body.
It is not known with what other members of the Council, if any, he might be aligned.
Iraqi Communist Party. Also unclear is whether Council member Hamid al-Musa, the 61-year-old head of the Iraqi Communist Party and a Shiite Muslim, is allied with anyone else on the Council. The Iraqi Communist Party had been allied with Saddam Hussein’s Baath Party in the 1950s and 1960s but was purged and repressed by the Baathists after the party took power (for the second time) in 1968.
The Communist Party has resumed open activities in post-Saddam Iraq and is said to be attracting adherents.19 It is also part of a new alliance of non-Islamic parties, which includes the KDP, PUK, and the Arab Socialist Movement.
The major factions not directly represented on the Council are varied. They include the Sadr movement; the Baath Party or other Sunni elements of the former regime; and the Movement for Constitutional Monarchy. The Shiite Islamists on the Council consult with Ayatollah Sistani, but Sistani is not represented directly on the Council. Some key tribes do not have members on the Council either. Partly in 19 Constable, Pamela. Iraqi Communists Make a Comeback. Washington Post, January 29, 2004.
CRS-25
response to their exclusion from the U.S.-supported political process, in December 2003 some Sunni Arabs formed a “shura” (consultative council) to possibly negotiate with the CPA and other factions on behalf of Sunni Arabs. However, some U.S. officials reportedly are suspicious of the new shura as a potential front for the resistance, and it is not clear to what extent the CPA might negotiate with it. In some of the above cases, the CPA did not want to include a particular faction; in other cases, a faction might not have wanted to be associated with the occupation.
As noted previously, in late July 2003, the Council decided that nine Council members will rotate as chairpersons, each for one month. Those who rotate that post are Ibrahim Jafari (Da’wa Party), Chalabi, Alawi of the INA, Talabani (PUK), Hakim (SCIRI), Pachachi, Barzani (KDP), Bahr al-Ulum, and Abdul Hamid, the Sunni Islamist.
Among its first actions, the Council authorized the establishment of an Iraqi war crimes tribunal for Saddam and associates accused of major human rights abuses.
It empowered a three-member delegation to seek formal U.N. recognition; Chalabi, Pachachi, and Akila Hashimi, traveled to the United Nations in July 2003, and the Council was granted a seat at the United Nations (although not formally recognized as Iraq’s official representative body) in September 2003. Some governments in the region, including that of Iran and Turkey, have recognized the Council. The Council helped develop a plan, announced in September 2003, to open Iraq’s economy to foreign investment and its companies to foreign ownership. In early December 2003, the Council decided to expel from Iraqi territory any members of an exiled Iranian opposition group called the People’s Mojahedin, a signal of goodwill toward neighboring Iran. U.S. forces say they might expel Mojahedin activists to third countries but have said these activists will not be handed over to Iran.
Cabinet. The Council has filled out a governmental structure, and on September 3, 2003, a 25-member cabinet was sworn in. Its composition has roughly the same factional and ethnic balance of the Council itself. Two “ministers” — Ibrahim Bahr al-Ulum (oil ministry) and Ali al-Alawi (trade ministry) — are close relatives of Council members. Another, “foreign minister” Hoshyar Zibari, is a longtime close aide to KDP chief Masud Barzani. Zibari served during most of the 1990s as KDP representative in Washington. Longtime PUK activist Abdul-Latif Rashid is the “minister” of water resources. No “defense minister” was named, because U.S.-led military forces are responsible for defense. The “interior minister” is Nuri Badran, an INA activist.
Handover of Sovereignty/November 2003 Transition Plan. Press reports began to appear in late August 2003 that U.S. authorities were dissatisfied at the relatively low level of activity of the Governing Council, and were pressing it to take a more prominent and public role in post-war political decision-making. Several Council members said that the Council could not do so unless and until the U.S.-led coalition transferred greater authority to it.20 Friction also emerged in October 2003 over a time-frame for a return to Iraqi sovereignty; the major exile parties on the 20 Filkins, Dexter and Neil MacFarquhar. “U.S. Official Tells Iraqis To Assert More Authority.” New York Times, August 21, 2003.
CRS-26
Council want an early restoration of Iraqi sovereignty. Other tensions emerged over U.S. acceptance of Turkey’s offer to send peacekeeping troops to Iraq; most Iraqi resent Turkey as the successor of the Ottoman Empire that ruled Iraq for the 400 years prior to World War I.
Differences also appeared over the Council’s failure to agree on a process for drafting a new constitution and holding national elections. The Bush Administration had linked completion of these steps to the end of the U.S. occupation and a restoration of full Iraqi sovereignty. In early August 2003, the Governing Council tapped INC activist Kanaan Makiya to head a 25-person committee that will determine the process for drafting the constitution. That committee deadlocked, with some arguing for an appointed constitutional drafting commission and others, such as Ayatollah Sistani, saying the drafters should be elected. Secretary of State Powell said in late September 2003 that the Iraqis should be able to draft a constitution within six months, although Iraqi officials subsequently said it would be very difficult to meet that deadline. U.N. Security Council Resolution 1511, of October 16, 2003, invited the Council to develop a timetable by December 15, 2003, for drafting a constitution.
In mid-November 2003, with popular resistance to the occupation appearing to grow, as outlined in a reported CIA assessment,21 CPA administrator Bremer consulted with President Bush and other senior officials. The product of those meetings and meetings with the Governing Council was a new plan to accelerate the transfer of political sovereignty to Iraqis, to be completed by June 30, 2004. On November 15, 2003, the CPA and the Governing Council announced they had reached agreement on the following plan:
! the writing of a provisional constitution, or set of “Basic Laws,” to be completed by February 28, 2004. Versions of a draft constitution, worked up by a committee working under Governing Council member Adnan Pachachi, have been circulated. Most drafts contain provisions that are being hotly debated on the status of Islamic law, the degree of autonomy of the Kurdish regions, the role of women, and a future governing structure. Among the provisions of one draft, the interim constitution leaves open the possibility of a multi- person presidency, possibly to include one Shiite Muslim, one Sunni Muslim, and one Kurd.22 In February 2004, major Kurdish groups were said to be pushing for a high degree of autonomy in the draft, allowing the Kurds to maintain an independent militia and reserve the right to reject some laws made by Baghdad. Bremer said on February 20 that he reserved the right to reject a draft that makes Islam the main source of law, implying that such a move would deprive women of many rights. In late February 2004, several press 21 Landay, Jonathan. “CIA Has A Bleak Analysis of Iraq.” Philadelphia Inquirer, November 12, 2003.
22 Interim Iraqi Constitution, January 2004 Draft, Translation and Commentary. Nathan Brown, George Washington University.
CRS-27
reports said the draft constitution would likely not be completed by the February 28, 2004, target date.
! By the end of March 2004, there is to be agreement on the future relationship between a sovereign Iraqi government and U.S. forces.
However, it is conceivable that a sovereign Iraqi government might want to review any agreement on U.S. forces made prior to the restoration of sovereignty. Partly for that reason, some Governing Council members reportedly want to postpone formalizing an arrangement on the future status of U.S. troops, leaving that decision to the sovereign government in power after June 30, 2004.
! the establishment of 15-person committees in each of Iraq’s 18 provinces, who will in turn select participants for broader local caucuses. The 15-person committees were to be established by January 21, 2004, but that deadline has not been met. Of the 15 in each committee, five will be appointed by the Governing Council, five by provincial councils, and five by town councils. By the end of May 2004, the caucuses are to select members of a 250-member national assembly. As discussed below, this plan to hold provincial caucuses was abandoned by the CPA in late February 2004.
! By June 30, 2004, the selection by the 250 member national assembly of members of an executive branch, including designation of a provisional leader of Iraq. This new provisional government is to assume sovereignty that day. As of late February 2004, the CPA insists that a handover of sovereignty will take place by this date, although it is not yet determined how an interim government will be chosen.
! By March 15, 2005, elections of drafters of a permanent constitution.
The elections are to be managed by the transition government.
! By December 31, 2005, the holding of national elections for a permanent government. As noted below, many Iraqis, most notably the Shiites, want elections far earlier than this.
When it was announced, the November 2003 agreement attracted mixed reviews both abroad and within Iraq. Some believed that it could lead to a relatively rapid restoration of sovereignty that should calm resistance. Others believe it represented a U.S. effort to draw down its presence in Iraq to minimize further U.S. casualties, and that the political process outlined will not ensure formation of a genuine democracy, but rather a coalition of individual factions. When it was announced, some members of the Governing Council said that the Council should remain in existence as part of a transition government; this suggested that some Governing Council figures fear they might not be selected to be part of a new governing body under the agreed upon process.
The transition process immediately ran into difficulty due in part to opposition by Grand Ayatollah Sistani. He called for direct elections for a transition regime,
CRS-28
reportedly maintaining that the November 2003 roadmap is tantamount to an appointive process. In part to address his concerns, the CPA invited the United Nations to conduct an assessment of the feasibility of holding elections in advance of the June 30, 2004, deadline to restore sovereignty to Iraqis. A U.N. election team led by senior U.N. adviser Lakhdar Brahimi conducted its assessment during February 7-16, 2004, and met with Sistani. Based on the assessment, U.N. Secretary General Annan announced on February 18, 2004, that elections for a new government could not be completed by June 30, 2004, and he issued a report on February 23, 2004, that elections could possibly be organized by the end of 2004 or by early 2005, a time frame that appears to be somewhat at odds with Sistani’s preference that any pre-election government only be in power for a few months, at most.
The CPA has asked for U.N. recommendations on how to choose an interim government that will run Iraq from June 30, 2004, until elections are held. A number of options are under consideration; among them are the following:
! Holding a traditional assembly along the lines of Afghanistan’s loya jirga, which would choose a transition government.
! Handing sovereignty to the existing Governing Council or an expanded council. Some press reports say that the Council could be expanded to 100 or more. Under some versions of this option, according to observers, the 100 or more members of the new Council might then choose a smaller executive.
! Holding provincial or town councils to elect delegates rather than select them.
Local Governance and Civil Society Promotion. Although the governance transition at the national level has run into difficulty, the Administration says there has been substantial progress on democratization, particularly at the local level. Administration officials say Iraqis are freer than at any time in the past 30 years, with a free press and the ability to organize politically. Elections for some new local leaders, to replace those appointed by U.S.-led forces in the immediate aftermath of the fall of the regime, began in some towns, including Basra, in December 2003. A total of about 320 local governing councils are operating. Some Iraqi women are becoming more politically active, and among other grassroots activities, more than 700 tribal leaders formed a “farmers’ union” in January 2004.
A U.S. funded “Community Action Program (CAP)” is providing local leaders with grant money for specific community projects.23 In January 2004, the Administration said it would reallocate additional funds, appropriated in the FY2004 supplemental appropriations (P.L. 108-106) for local governance and civil society promotion. As of January 2004, the Administration plans to spend $468 million for these activities.
Some of these funds are going to U.S. democratization organizations, such as National Democratic Institute (NDI) and the International Republican Institute (IRI) 23 Iraqi Groups Build Democracy at Grassroots Level. Department of State Washington File, January 16, 2004.
CRS-29
to do training and capacity building at the local level, as well as work with emerging and established national political organizations.24 As part of the governance planning process that took place before the war, the U.S. State Department supported a group of Iraqi exiles to address issues that would confront a successor government.25 The State Department working group (the “Future of Iraq Project”) does not appear to have significant influence on any post- war regime decision-making in Iraq, although some Iraqis who participated are now in various Iraqi official bodies. Some experts believe the Defense Department was promoting a competing or separate group of exiles.26 The State Department project, which cost $5 million, consisted of working groups that discussed (1) transitional justice; (2) public finance; (3) public and media outreach; (4) democratic principles;
(5) water, agriculture, and the environment; (6) health and human services; (7) economy and infrastructure; (8) education; (9) refugees, internally-displaced persons, and migration policy; (10) foreign and national security policy; (11) defense institutions and policy; (12) free media; (13) civil society capacity-building; (14) anti- corruption measures; and (15) oil and energy.
Iraqi Resistance and U.S. Security Operations Experts note that the U.S. policy debate has intensified since September 2003 because of the apparently escalating Iraqi resistance, an increasing number of U.S.
casualties taken, and the slow rate of establishing a moderate and representative successor regime. At present, about 155,000 foreign troops are in Iraq; of those, about 130,000 are U.S. personnel, about 12,000 are U.K. forces, and about 12,000 more are from a total of 31 other countries. The United States is in the process of rotating its forces and reducing them to about 110,000, and some press reports say that Defense Department officials want to try to reduce U.S. forces to 100,000 by mid-2004 and to 50,000 by 2005.27 U.S. forces in Baghdad are in the process of redeploying to bases around the city and turning over peacekeeping in the city itself to Iraqi security forces.
The Resistance. U.S. commanders in Iraq said in early October 2003 that the sophistication and capabilities of the armed resistance to the U.S. governance of Iraq is growing. Centcom commander John Abizaid had said on July 17, 2003, that the United States faces a “classic guerrilla war” led by “mid-level Baath Party activists organized regionally.” On the other hand, subsequent to Saddam’s capture in mid- December 2003, some U.S. commanders have said the United States has substantially reduced the number of resistance attacks (by as much as 50%) and has “turned the 24 Conversations with USAID, IRI, and others involved in U.S. democratization activities in Iraq. November 2003 - February 2004.
25 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,” Washington File, December 11, 2002.
26 Fineman, Mark, Robin Wright, and Doyle McManus. “Preparing for War, Stumbling to Peace.” Los Angeles Times, July 18, 2003.
27 Ricks, Thomas. “Reduction in U.S. Troops Eyed for ‘04.” Washington Post, October 19, 2003.
CRS-30
corner” against the resistance. Others said in January 2004 that there is progress but that defeating the resistance might still take up to a year. On average, there are about 30 attacks on U.S. forces per day, down from more than 40 per day prior to Saddam’s capture in December 2003, although the pace of U.S. casualties has not appeared to diminish since Saddam’s capture.
As of February 8, 2004, about 530 U.S. forces have died in Operation Iraqi Freedom, and resistance attacks have killed about 350 U.S. military personnel since President Bush declared an end to “major combat operations” in Iraq on May 1, 2003; about 50 of those have come subsequent to Saddam’s capture. The most lethal incident, the November 15, 2003, collision of two Blackhawks killing 17 American soldiers, appeared to have been caused by some ground fire. Some elements of the resistance appear to want to restore the old regime, while others appear to be motivated by opposition to foreign rule or the goal of forming an Islamic state. Other resistance fighters appear to be motivated by the difficulty the U.S. and British authorities have had in restoring civilian services or to avenge the accidental killing of Iraqi civilians during U.S. operations.
U.S. military operations are focused on hunting down guerrilla resistance leaders and their suspected Baathist financiers. U.S. forces have conducted at least six sweep operations since mid-June 2003 to search for Baath and other oppositionists; these operations were given the names Peninsula Strike (June 9-15); Desert Scorpion (June
15-August 1); Sidewinder (June 29-July 7); Soda Mountain (July 12-17); Ivy Serpent (July 12 - early September); Ivy Focus (September 10 - ongoing); Ivy Cyclone and Ivy Cyclone II (November 4-ongoing); Iron Hammer; and Iron Grip. Iron Hammer, which was launched as response to growing resistance attacks, began on November 12; it has included air attacks on insurgent positions near Baghdad and nearby towns.
Some resistance factions have identified themselves as distinct groups, scribbling warnings and faxing statements to the Arab satellite television network Al Jazeera, UAE-based Al Arabiya TV, and other outlets. Suggesting a mix of nationalist and Islamist factions, they are identifying themselves with names such as:
! Al Awda (the Return), believed to be one of the largest and most active resistance group;
! Saddam’s Fedayeen, remnants of the paramilitary force that were the most tenacious of Iraqi forces during the 2003 major combat;
! Saddam’s Jihad;
! the Movement of the Victorious Sect;
! Iraq’s Revolutionaries - Al Anbar’s Armed Brigades;
! The Popular Resistance for the Liberation of Iraq;
! the Salafist Jihad Group (Salafi is a Sunni extremist Islamic movement);
! Armed Islamic Movement for Al Qaeda - Falluja Branch. Actual linkages to Al Qaeda, if any, are not known;
! Jaysh (Army) of Mohammad, said to be a highly active group particularly in and around Fallujah, publishing leaflets threatening Iraqis who collaborate with the U.S. occupation;
! Black Banners Group;
! Nasirite Organization; and
CRS-31
! Armed Vanguard of the Second Mohammad Army. Claimed responsibility for U.N. headquarters bombing and threatened attacks on any Arab countries that participate in Iraq peacekeeping. The credibility of the claim is not known.
The continuing resistance has complicated the U.S. mission. In addition to targeting U.S. forces, resistance fighters have assassinated Iraqis who are cooperating with the United States and attacked Iraqi oil export pipelines and water and other infrastructure facilities, as well as symbols of the international presence, including U.N. headquarters. By attacking these targets, the resistance appears to be hoping to cause international relief workers and peacekeeping forces to leave Iraq, slow reconstruction, and turn the Iraqi populace against the occupation.
An apparent suicide “terrorism” dimension to the resistance began to emerge in August 2003 with car and truck bombings in Baghdad of the embassy of Jordan (August 7) and U.N. headquarters at the Canal Hotel (August 19). The latter bombing killed 23 persons including the U.N. representative in Iraq, Sergio Vieira de Mello, and prompted some drawdown in U.N. and non-governmental organization personnel in Iraq. The August 29, 2003, car bombing in Najaf that killed Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim may have killed over 100 persons, according to news reports.
Smaller suicide bombings have occurred since at Iraqi police facilities, the U.N.
compound, and other sites. As noted above, the February 1, 2004, bombings at Kurdish political headquarters in Irbil killed over 100. On October 25, 2003, the resistance rocketed the hotel at which visiting deputy Defense Secretary Wolfowitz was staying; he was unhurt. The next day, there were four suicide car bombings at various sites in Baghdad, including the headquarters of the International Committee of the Red Cross. A November 12, 2003 resistance suicide attack killed 17 Italian peacekeepers at their headquarters in Nasiriyah. The use of these tactics, which has been a hallmark of major terrorist groups such as Hamas or Al Qaeda, has prompted a debate over the role, if any, of Al Qaeda or other non-Iraqi fighters in the resistance.
Some believe Iraq is becoming an arena for an Islamic “jihad” against the United States, while others believe that a foreign role in the resistance might reflect a pre- existing alliance between Baathist Iraq and Al Qaeda. For more information, see CRS Report RL32217, Iraq and Al Qaeda: Allies or Not?
With Signs of Progress. On the other hand, the Administration maintains that the resistance is not derailing the U.S. mission to bring about economic reconstruction and that the insurgency can and will be defeated. Administration fact sheets and statements say that life is, for the most part, returning to normal throughout Iraq. Electricity is nearly back to pre-war levels (4,400 Megawatts, pre- war). A new currency has been introduced and has begun circulation. Schools and hospitals have reopened throughout Iraq, and about 3 million Iraqi children have been vaccinated since Saddam fell.
The Capture of Saddam Hussein. On December 13, 2003, U.S. forces captured Saddam Hussein in the town of Ad Dur, nine miles south of his hometown, Tikrit, in Iraq’s predominately Sunni tribal area north of Baghdad. Saddam, who had been hiding in a tiny cellar on a farm with $750,000 and a pistol, surrendered to soldiers of the Fourth Infantry Division without a fight. He is being held at an undisclosed location where he is being interrogated for information on the location
CRS-32
of resistance leaders and members of his former regime. According to unnamed U.S.
officials, Saddam has provided some information that has led to the arrests of several high-ranking ex-Iraqi officials. The Bush Administration announced that it intends to hand Hussein over to Iraqi officials to face an Iraqi-run tribunal and charges of genocide and crimes against humanity, although it has classified him as a prisoner-of- war. (For more information on options for trying Saddam Hussein, see CRS Report RS21705, Options for Trying Saddam Hussein for International Crimes.) “Iraqification”/Building Security Institutions. An option for improving security conditions that has been pursued by the Administration is to try to increasingly transfer security responsibilities to Iraqi institutions. Some in the Administration appear to prefer this option to alternatives, advocated by some in and outside the Administration, that involve turning over greater responsibility to the international community in exchange for donations of peacekeeping forces. This initiative is an attempt to improve security in Iraq, generate better intelligence on resistance factions, and free up U.S. forces for counter-insurgency missions. It is hoped that these institutions could eventually take over the security function from the United States. As of early January 2004, about 205,000 Iraqis have been recruited to these institutions, and the goal is to have about 225,000 Iraqis serving in these institutions by mid-2004. However, there are concerns about the loyalty and dedication of the new recruits, in the absence of Iraqi sovereignty and a clearly defined governing structure. Some Iraqi forces have fought crime and the resistance and helped put down protests, but others have sometimes abandoned their posts and allowed their facilities to be attacked or fought poorly in defense. Some military recruits have deserted, and some police have been absentees.
On November 21, 2003, the Bush Administration issued a determination repealing a U.S. ban on arms exports to Iraq so that the United States can supply weapons to the new Iraqi security institutions. Authority to repeal this ban was requested and granted in an FY2003 emergency supplemental appropriations (P.L.
108-11) for the costs of the war. The provision (Section 1504) gives the President the authority to export to Iraq non-lethal military equipment and to export military equipment to a reconstituted or interim Iraqi military if the President determines that doing so is in the national interest. (Section 1503 requires the President to submit regular reports to Congress on any export licenses granted for the exportation of dual use items to Iraq.) The following, based on a variety of press and Administration reports,28 are the pillars of the Iraqi security institutions:
! New Army. The CPA formally disbanded the former Iraqi army following Bremer’s arrival in Baghdad. Some criticized the move as a factor that is now contributing to resistance activity, but others believe the move was necessary to ensure that Iraq moves toward democracy. As part of U.S. efforts to build new Iraqi security institutions, the CPA is in the process of training recruits for a 28 Derived from DOD unclassified “draft working paper,” entitled “Iraq Status.” January 2004.
CRS-33
planned 40,000 person New Iraqi Army, about 10% the size of the pre-war Iraqi force. The force is expected to be at or near full strength by mid-2004, although some experts believe that this is too rapid a pace to ensure proper training and ensure the loyalty of all recruits. Recruits are paid $60 per month and receive nine weeks of training. Former Defense Department official Walter Slocombe is in charge of forming the new Iraqi army; according to him, many soldiers of the former army are being recruited, but former members who were at the top four ranks of the Baath Party are not eligible for recruitment. The first 700 recruits were graduated in early October 2003, but nearly half deserted due to low pay, according to a recent press report.29 Another 700 recruits graduated in early January 2004.
The Administration requested about $2 billion to train and equip the new army in its FY2004 supplemental funding request; that level of funding is provided by the FY2004 supplemental appropriation (P.L.
108-106).
! Police. The CPA is also trying to turn policing functions over to Iraqis. Overall, about 71,000 Iraqi policemen have been recruited, approximately the total goal for the force. The police are undergoing training in Hungary, and Jordan has begun training the first of what will be 32,000 Iraqi police to train there. Police are paid $60 per month, and must pass a background check ensuring they do not have a record of human rights violations or criminal activity. The Administration has requested about $1 billion to train and equip an Iraqi police force in its FY2004 supplemental funding request; $950 million was appropriated in P.L. 108-106.
! Civil Defense. The paramilitary “Civil Defense Corps,” deployed in each of Iraq’s provinces, is assisting in maintaining order and combating insurgents. Thus far, about 16,000 have been deployed;
the goal is for a total force of 40,000. Recruits are paid $50 per month and cannot have served in Iraq’s former army at a level of colonel or higher. Some units of the Corps began patrols on their own, without direct U.S. assistance, in late December 2003.
! Facilities. A separate “Facilities Protection Service” is being deployed to guard installations such as oil pumping stations, electricity substations, and government buildings. About 98,000, more than the original goal of 50,000, have been deployed, but training is said to be minimal and some are unarmed. About 15,000 members of this force are devoted to protecting Iraq’s oil pipelines.
The Administration has requested about $140 million to train and equip the Civil Defense Corps and Facilities Protection Service in the FY2004 supplemental funding request; that amount was appropriated in P.L. 108-106.
29 Spolar, Christine. “Iraqi Soldiers Deserting Army.” Chicago Tribune, December 9, 2003.
CRS-34
! Border Concerns. The CPA has thus far recruited 12,000 Iraqis into a customs and border protection force, about half the goal of 25,000.
Members of this force receive a few weeks of U.S. training.
Faction-Based Militias/Domestic Intelligence Apparatus. The United States has also apparently agreed to allow established Iraqi factions to participate in maintaining security, hoping that Iraqis can more easily identify and root out insurgents and foreign fighters than can U.S. forces. In early December 2003, the CPA reportedly agreed to a proposal by the major Iraqi parties on the Governing Council to deploy individual militia fighters to help augment security.30 About 800 militiamen drawn from the five major parties on the Governing Council (INA, INC, SCIRI, PUK, KDP) are to work side by side with the new security institutions, particularly the Civil Defense Corps.31 Many of these party-based militiamen have substantial training and knowledge of Iraqi society, skills that could benefit efforts to maintain security. The potential risks of the plan are that the party-based militiamen would likely retain loyalties to their party leaders, not necessarily to an Iraqi government. Another risk is that there might be tensions among the various militias that might erupt into internecine violence. The INA and Interior Minister Nuri Badran (INA activist) are attempting to build on the INA’s contacts among ex- Baathists and ex-military people to develop a new domestic intelligence and national police network.32 Recruitment of ex-regime members has reportedly raised suspicions of other Governing Council members, such as Ahmad Chalabi, who have been seeking to exclude virtually all former regime members from a role in post- Saddam Iraq. An INA-led intelligence force of up to 2,000, which will have personnel from other factions, is reportedly being built with the help of U.S.
intelligence; its mission will be to search out anti-U.S. insurgents.33 Some fear the new intelligence services will become instruments of political repression, much as similar bodies did under Saddam Hussein’s regime.
Internationalization/U.N. Role.34 Some believe that enlisting greater international participation in peacekeeping would be more effective than the rapid recruitment of Iraqi security institutions, or other options such as increasing the number of U.S. troops in Iraq. Very few commentators or U.S. politicians advocate an immediate pullout of U.S. forces from Iraq, on the grounds that doing so could yield chaos in Iraq. Some in the Bush Administration reportedly have not wanted to cede control over post-war governance to the United Nations or other nations; they maintain that doing so would confuse the post-war command structure and possibly 30 Tyler, Patrick. “Iraqi Factions Seek to Take Over Security Duties.” New York Times, September 20, 2003.
31 Chandrasekaran, Rajiv. “U.S. to Form Iraqi Paramilitary Force.” Washington Post, December 3, 2003.
32 Williams, Daniel. “New Ministry to Recruit Paramilitary Force in Iraq.” Washington Post, September 2, 2003.
33 Wong, Edward. “New Iraq Agency to Hunt Rebels.” New York Times, January 31, 2004.
34 For additional information on international contributions to Iraq peacekeeping and reconstruction, see CRS Report RL32105, Post-War Iraq: A Table and Chronology of Foreign Contributions.
CRS-35
lead to the formation of a government in Iraq that is not committed to democracy and not necessarily pro-U.S. The position of U.N. Secretary General Kofi Annan appears to be close to that of France; he has cut U.N. staff in Iraq because of security concerns and said the United Nations should play a larger role in Iraq’s transition to sovereignty. As of January 2004, as the U.S. plan for transition has run into difficulty, the Administration has been shifting to give the United Nations a greater role in post-Saddam governance. As noted above, the Administration solicited U.N.
participation in assessing the feasibility of holding early national elections for a transition regime.
Since the fall of Saddam Hussein, the Administration has sought some U.N.
backing for its post-war efforts, particularly peacekeeping and security. Resolution 1483 (adopted unanimously) provided for a U.N. special representative to coordinate the activities of U.N. personnel in Iraq and to help establish a successor government;
it also “calls on” governments to contribute forces for stabilization. The Secretary General subsequently (May 27, 2003) appointed de Mello (see above) for that post.
The resolution also gave the United Nations a monitoring role over the Development Fund for Iraq, the account controlled by the CPA for reconstruction. The resolution did not authorize a return to Iraq of U.N. weapons inspectors, although the resolution provided for deliberations on that issue. On August 14, 2003, the U.N. Security Council adopted a compromise resolution, Resolution 1500, that “welcomed,” but did not “endorse,” the formation of the Governing Council, an apparent nod to U.S.
requests. The resolution also enhanced U.N. authority in Iraq somewhat by establishing a “U.N. Assistance Mission for Iraq,” but the resolution did not dilute U.S. authority over post-war governance.
These resolutions did not satisfy the requirements of several major nations, such as France, that wanted to quickly phase out the U.S.-led occupation in favor of a U.N.-led governance process. The United States obtained agreement on Resolution 1511 (adopted unanimously on October 16, 2003) that authorized a “multinational force under unified command.” However, the resolution did not meet the core demands of France and did not attract new troop pledges from either France, Germany, Russia, India, or Pakistan. (France has said, as of early 2004, that it might help train new Iraqi security institutions.) During negotiations on Resolution 1511, a number of different formulas were discussed for broadening peacekeeping duties in Iraq. Deputy Secretary of State Richard Armitage told journalists in late August 2003 that one idea under discussion was for a multinational force, under U.N. leadership, that would be commanded by a U.S. military official.35 Another possibility was for NATO to command a multilateral force. The United States had some discussions with NATO on whether the organization would take on Iraq as a fifth peacekeeping mission, and Defense Secretary Rumsfeld said at a December 1, 2003, NATO meeting that the United States would welcome more NATO involvement in Iraq. (NATO currently provides some logistical support to the international forces in Iraq led by Poland.) The issue was discussed again at a NATO meeting in February 2004, although without a NATO 35 Jehl, Douglas. “U.S. Now Signals It Might Consider U.N. Force in Iraq.” New York Times, August 28, 2003.
CRS-36
commitment to expand its participation in Iraq. On July 10, 2003, the Senate adopted an amendment, by a vote of 97-0, to a State Department authorization bill (S. 925) calling on the Administration to formally ask NATO to lead a peacekeeping force for Iraq. A related bill (H.R. 2112) was introduced in the House on May 15, 2003. (For more information on this possibility, see CRS Report RL32068, An Enhanced European Role in Iraq?) Several nations have responded to U.S. requests to play a role in post-Saddam peacekeeping in Iraq. As noted above, 33 countries (in addition to the United States) are providing forces to help secure Iraq. The United Kingdom and Poland are leading multinational divisions in southern Iraq and central Iraq, respectively. The UK-led force numbers about 14,000, of which all but 2,000 are British forces. The Polish-led force numbers about 9,200, of which 2,300 are Polish. After some earlier hesitation due to security concerns, Japan and South Korea are deploying forces to Iraq. In February 2004, Japan began deploying nearly 1,000 troops to Samawah, in southern Iraq. South Korea is sending 3,000 troops to help patrol in and around the city of Kirkuk, in the north. On October 7, the Turkish parliament approved a government recommendation to send up to 10,000 peacekeeping forces, but the pledge drew criticism from Iraq’s Governing Council that Turkey would likely use the deployment to meddle in Iraq’s internal affairs. Turkey subsequently informed the United States that Iraqi opposition made the deployment unworkable at this time.
(For a list of foreign force contributions, which includes contributions of support or medical personnel, see CRS Report RL32105.) Restarting Iraq’s Economy One of the major functions of the CPA is to accomplish economic reconstruction. By all accounts, restoring Iraq’s economy depends, in large part, on rehabilitating Iraq’s energy infrastructure.36 The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction. As the driver of Iraq’s economy, the rebuilding of the oil industry is receiving substantial U.S. attention. It has been widely assumed that Iraq’s vast oil reserves, believed second only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be used to fund much of the costs of reconstruction. Then presidential spokesman Ari Fleischer said on February 18, 2003, referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a variety of means ... to shoulder much of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.” Many observers had been concerned that an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could destroy its own oil fields, but coalition forces quickly secured Iraq’s southern oil fields after combat began. Only about 9 oil wells were set on fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that region, and all were put out quickly.
The northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul were not set afire.
In early May 2003, the U.S.-led coalition set up an advisory board, headed by former Shell executive Phillip Carroll, to oversee the rebuilding of Iraq’s oil sector.
36 For information on Iraq’s oil industry and its reconstruction, see CRS Report RS21626, Iraq Oil: Reserves, Production, and Potential Revenues. For information on U.S. and other funding for Iraq’s reconstruction, see CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Reconstruction Assistance.
CRS-37
An Iraqi oil industry professional, Thamer Ghadhban, was named to serve as head of the interim management team that has run Iraq’s oil ministry and reported to the advisory board. The first exports began in late June 2003, but exports were running at only about 800,000 barrels per day as of late September 2003 due to sabotage and the slow pace of sector reconstruction. Iraq was exporting over 1 million barrels per day as of early October 2003, and exports are said to be about 1.7 million barrels per day as of January 2004. Iraq’s pre-war oil export rate was about 2.2 million barrels per day, a level that U.S. and Iraqi officials say they hope to reach by late 2004. The FY2004 supplemental appropriations request asked for $1.2 billion to repair Iraq’s oil infrastructure, plus $900 million to import refined energy products that Iraq’s infrastructure cannot currently produce until it is repaired. P.L. 108-106 provided the requested amount for infrastructure, but only about $700 million for imports of energy products. In January 2004, the Administration said some funds for energy importation might be redirected to local governance.
A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other countries.
CPA Budget. The CPA-produced budget for Iraq for calendar 2003, which was based on the planned levels of oil exports, assumed that oil revenues would yield about $3.5 billion through the end of 2003, and provide about half of the approximately $6.6 billion budget for Iraq for the period. At inception, the Development Fund for Iraq (DFI) contained about $7 billion when it was established in June 2003, consisting of captured Iraqi assets, Iraqi assets abroad, the monies transferred from the oil-for-food account, and U.S. funds available for reconstruction (FY2003 supplemental, P.L. 108-11, which appropriated about $2.5 billion for reconstruction).
In order to accelerate reconstruction, the DFI was deemed to require international donations, such as those pledged at the October 23-24 donors’ conference in Madrid, additional U.S. appropriations, and funds remaining after the U.N.-run “oil for food program” terminated on November 21, 2003 (see below). A World Bank estimate, released in early October 2003, said Iraq reconstruction would require about $56 billion during 2004-2007, including the $20 billion in U.S. funding requested by the Administration in September 2003. At the Madrid donors conference, donors pledged about $4 billion in grants and $9 billion in credits, in addition to the $20 billion to be provided by the United States. (For additional information on international pledges, see CRS Report RL32015, Post-War Iraq: A Table and Chronology of Foreign Contributions.)
CRS-38
Supplemental Funding Needs.37 Partly because oil revenues lagged behind projections, in late August 2003 Bremer visited Washington to talk to other Administration officials about the need to ask Congress for immediate supplemental funds for reconstruction needs. On September 8, 2003, President Bush stated that he would request supplemental funding for FY2004 for the “war on terrorism,” in the amount of $87 billion, of which over $70 billion would be for military operations in and reconstruction of Iraq. Of that amount, about $50 billion would be for military costs and about $20 billion for reconstruction of Iraq.
The FY2004 supplemental appropriation (conf. report H.Rept. 108-337, P.L.
108-106) provided the following funds for Iraq reconstruction (total $18.7 billion):
! $3.243 billion for security and law enforcement, including the New Iraqi Army. border enforcement and other security functions;
! $1.32 billion for justice and civil society and democracy development, including programs for women and youth, and the formation of an independent human rights commission, ! $5.56 billion for electricity infrastructure rehabilitation, ! $1.89 billion for rehabilitating the energy infrastructure, ! $4.332 billion to repair water and sewage systems;
! $500 million for repair of transportation and telecommunications infrastructure, ! $370 million to upgrade housing, roads, and bridges, ! $800 million to construct and equip hospitals and clinics, and ! $453 million for education, jobs training, and private sector initiatives.
Funds Available/FY2005. No new funds for Iraq reconstruction were requested in the Administration’s budget for FY2005, released on February 2, 2004.
According to unclassified Administration working papers released on January 4, 2004, a total of $58 billion have been made available for Iraq reconstruction from all sources: international donations, U.S. appropriated funds, a balance remaining from the oil-for-food program termination (see below), assets captured in Iraq, and former regime assets held abroad and now seized. Of the amounts available, $23.5 billion in funds have been committed to specific projects, leaving about $35 billion available for further reconstruction projects.
In late October 2003, a multilateral board to monitor the Development Fund for Iraq (DFI), mandated by Resolution 1483, was established (the International Advisory and Monitoring Board). The DFI is held in the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, not Iraq’s Central Bank, as outlined in Resolution 1483.
37 For information on the status of legislative consideration of the request for supplemental funding, see CRS Report RL32090, FY2004 Supplemental Appropriations for Iraq, Afghanistan, and the Global War on Terrorism: Military Operations & Reconstruction Assistance.
CRS-39
Easing of U.S. Sanctions. The Bush Administration has substantially eased U.S. sanctions on Iraq, beginning with the issuing on March 24, 2003, of Presidential Determination 2003-18. That determination asserted that providing direct assistance to Iraq is important to the national security interests of the United States, an authority provided for in Section 507 of P.L. 108-7, the consolidated appropriations for FY2003. That section bars direct assistance to Iraq as well as the other six countries on the terrorism list (Syria, Libya, Iran, Cuba, North Korea, and Sudan), beginning with a May 7, 2003, executive order that exercises the sanctions easing authorities provided to the President in Sections 1501-1504 of the FY2003 supplemental appropriations bill (P.L. 108-11). The President had requested that authority in his request to Congress for FY2003 supplemental funding to pay for the costs of the war, submitted March 25, 2003.
Post-1990 Iraqi Sanctions Regulations implemented Executive Orders No.
12722 (August 2, 1990) and 12724 (August 9, 1990), issued after Iraq’s August 2, 1990, invasion of Kuwait. The executive orders imposed a ban on U.S. trade with and investment in Iraq and froze Iraq’s assets in the United States. The Iraq Sanctions Act of 1990 (Section 586 of P.L. 101-513, signed November 5, 1990) reinforced those executive orders. In the aftermath of Iraq’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990, Iraq was again placed on the U.S. list of state sponsors of terrorism under
Section 6(j) of the Export Administration Act (P.L. 96-72). Iraq had been removed from the list in 1982. Countries on the terrorism list are barred from receiving U.S.
foreign assistance, votes in favor of international loans, and sales of munitions list items (arms and related equipment and services). Exports of dual use items (items that can have military applications) are subject to strict licensing procedures.
As noted above, the FY2003 supplemental granted the President the authority to lift or render inapplicable most U.S sanctions in Iraq, authorities that were exercised in the May 7, 2003, executive order. The authority is available until September 2004, according to P.L. 108-11. The following represent the U.S.
sanctions that have now been eased:
! The President’s exercise of the authorities suspends the application of the Iraq Sanctions Act (Section 586 of P.L. 101-513), mentioned above, but the provisions of the Iran-Iraq Arms Non-Proliferation Act (P.L. 102-484) remain in effect. That act imposes sanctions on persons or governments that export technology that would contribute to Iraq’s advanced conventional arms capability or weapons of mass destruction programs.
! The executive order “makes inapplicable” the sanctions imposed on Iraq as a consequence of its place on the terrorism list.
! The President has rendered inapplicable to Iraq any U.S. laws that direct the U.S. government to vote against or oppose international lending to Iraq.
! the President has rendered inapplicable to Iraq Section 307 of the Foreign Assistance Act of 1961. That provision requires cuts in U.S.
CRS-40
contributions to international programs that work in Iraq (and other countries named in that section).
! Authority was requested that would enable the President to authorize the export to (post-war) Iraq dual use items or arms if the President determines that doing so is in the national interest. (Section 1504 of P.L. 108-11 gave the President the authority to export to Iraq non- lethal military equipment and to export military equipment to a reconstituted or interim Iraqi military. Section 1503 requires the President to submit regular reports to Congress on any export licenses granted for the exportation of dual use items to Iraq.) Termination of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program.
The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various aspects of the program departed Iraq. (See CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) On March 28, 2003, the U.N. Security Council unanimously adopted Resolution 1472 that restarted the program’s operations and empowered the United Nations, for a 45-day period (until May 12), to take direct control of all aspects of the program.
Under the new resolution, the United Nations is setting priorities for and directing the delivery of already contracted supplies. The enhanced U.N. authority was extended on April 25, 2003, to last at least until the six-month phase of the program expired on June 3, 2003.
On April 17, 2003, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions against Iraq, signaling that the Administration wanted to focus on restoring normal international commerce with Iraq rather than extending the oil-for-food program.
Resolution 1483 lifted sanctions and provided for the phasing out of the oil for food program within six months after adoption of that resolution on May 22; the program terminated on November 21, 2003. The resolution also provided for the United Nations to transfer to the new DFI $1 billion in funds held by the oil-for-food program escrow fund. As of the start of the war, the program’s escrow account had about $11 billion to fund imports of humanitarian and other goods. Since then, the program had set priorities for about $8.2 billion in contracts, leaving about $2 billion in unallocated funds remaining, after subtracting the $1 billion already transferred to the DFI in May 2003. In anticipation of the surplus funds as the program was about to terminate, the oil-for-food program transferred $2 billion to the DFI in October and November 2003.
Some press reports suggest that U.N. officials believed the program should have been extended in order to facilitate an orderly phase-out of the program. The United States and Britain opposed another extension and, as of its termination on November 21, have taken over its functions. On November 24, 2003, the U.N. Security Council adopted a resolution to continue its “Sanctions Committee” that has monitored the U.N. economic embargo on Iraq since 1990, but to end, subject to later review, that Committee’s mandate to monitor the U.N. embargo on arms sales to Iraq. Part of the
CRS-41
Committee’s economic sanctions mandate will include ensuring that assets of the former regime remain frozen. (For more information, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, International Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) Debt Relief. The Administration is attempting to relieve Iraq’s debt burden built up during the regime of Saddam Hussein. The debt is estimated to total about $116 billion, not including reparations dating to the first Persian Gulf war. On December 5, 2003, President Bush appointed former Secretary of State James Baker as an envoy to try to persuade other governments to forgive Iraq’s debt. In visits during December 2003 to countries in Europe and Asia, including France and Germany, Baker obtained pledges for reduction of a “substantial” portion (widely interpreted as about two thirds) of Iraq’s estimated $41.5 billion in debt to the “Paris Club” nations. Of the Paris Club nations, the largest Iraq debt is held by Japan, Russia, France, Germany, the United States, Italy, and Britain. Approximately $45 billion in Iraqi debt is to Middle Eastern and Persian Gulf countries, and $9 billion is held by other major countries including China. The remainder of the debt is held by private creditors. (For more information, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq:
Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) Searching for Former Regime Violations and Officials Organs of the CPA and the U.S. government are attempting to uncover evidence of gross human rights abuses and other violations of the regime of Saddam Hussein, including evidence of WMD. A 1,500 person “Iraq Survey Group,” headed by a U.S.
military commander (Maj. Gen. Keith Dayton) but composed of many civilian technical experts led by former U.N. weapons inspector David Kay, is attempting to uncover alleged WMD. The Survey Group is also searching for mass graves of victims of the former regime. (For information on the results of Iraq Survey Group activities and the debate over pre-war intelligence on Iraq WMD, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is the future trial of Saddam Hussein and his associates on charges of war crimes and crimes against humanity. In the year prior to the war, the Administration was gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those it had sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay (killed after discovery by and a firefight with U.S. forces in Mosul on July 22, 2003); Ali Hassan al-Majid, for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (captured August 21, 2003); Muhammad Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered in mid-April 2003); Taha Yasin Ramadan; first Vice President and number three in the regime (captured August 19, 2003); Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council and formally number two in the regime; Barzan al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother (captured in mid-April 2003);
Watban al-Tikriti (captured in April 2003) and Sabawi al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam and former leaders of regime intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputy Prime Minister and foremost regime spokesman (surrendered in May 2003);
and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait during Iraq’s occupation of that country (captured May 2003).
Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured
CRS-42
or surrendered. As of late September 2003, 43 of the Iraqis on the list of 55 are now in custody or were killed. Others not on the list of 55 have been apprehended as well: Amir al-Saadi, chief science adviser to Saddam; Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti, a son-in-law of Saddam; Vice President Taha Muhi ad-Din Ma’ruf; and suspected WMD manager Hoda Mahdi Salih al-Ammash.
The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29, 1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137 (passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March 13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October 31, 1998).
A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993, after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the United States has supported INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer, said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established, focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds) and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations.
In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war crimes is formed.
The FY2004 supplemental request contains a request for funding of a “Truth and Reconciliation Commission,” and the establishment of a human rights commission. The requests also asks for funding for further investigations into the human rights abuses committed by the former regime, as well as some memorials to the victims of those abuses. In the FY2004 supplemental request, about $25 million is requested for these and related activities, such as women and youth civic education programs.
Congressional Reactions
Congress, like the Administration, had divergent views on the mechanisms for promoting regime change, although there was widespread agreement in Congress that regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S. policy. There was substantial disagreement over whether a major military offensive was the most desirable option for achieving that objective. On December 20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75, by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a “mounting threat” to the United States. The resolution did not call for new U.S. steps
CRS-43
to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few Members called for the overthrow of Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in support of the resolution.
In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq, some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members — Senators John McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr.
— wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter, Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S.
assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.” As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002, Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result.
Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243).
The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. Prior to the war, it held several hearings on the progress of post-war reconstruction. During the war and in its aftermath, several Members applauded the performance of the U.S. military and the overthrow of the regime. Some Members, however, have criticized the Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war period in light of major looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the regime. Criticism of post-war planning has escalated as attacks on U.S. occupation forces have mounted, although the Administration and others say U.S. casualties are relatively light and that the resistance is not jeopardizing overall U.S. objectives for Iraq. Several Committees are conducting inquiries into why substantial amounts of WMD have not been found in Iraq to date.
Some Members of both parties have also expressed concern about the costs of the U.S. occupation, particularly in light of the Administration’s September 2003 request for an additional $87 billion in funding, and several Members have called on the Administration to take greater steps to persuade other countries to share the burden of peacekeeping in and reconstruction of Iraq. Others have called for an increase in the number of U.S. troops in Iraq or re-evaluation of the mix of U.S.
forces to ensure that the skill set of the U.S. force matches the needs of reconstruction. Some Members who have visited Iraq in recent months — and a
CRS-44
reported one third of Members have visited Iraq since the fall of Saddam — say reconstruction is proceeding well and that Iraq is more stable than that portrayed in the press.38 38 Chaddock, Gail Russell. “Trips to Iraq Reshape War Views On Hill.” Christian Science Monitor, January 6, 2004.
CRS-45
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.) to the Opposition (Figures in millions of dollars) INC War Crimes Broadcasting Unspecified Opposition Activities Total FY 1998 (P.L. 105-174)
2.0 5.0
(RFE/RL)
3.0 10.0
FY 1999
(P.L. 105-277)
3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0
FY 2000
(P.L. 106-113)
2.0 8.0 10.0
FY 2001
(P.L. 106-429)
12.0
(aid
distribution
inside Iraq)
2.0 6.0
(INC radio)
5.0 25.0
FY 2002
(P.L. 107-115)
25.0 25.0
Total,
FY1998-FY2002
15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0
FY2003
(no earmark)
3.1
(announced
April 2003)
6.9
(remaining
to be
allocated)
10.0
FY2004
(request)
0 0
Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97 million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent, as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided, the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N.
programs. ESF transfers to the INC for its operations continued until August 2003.
Another version (English): 7 January 2004 — RL31339_2004-01-07.pdf
Order Code RL31339
CRS Report for Congress
Received through the CRS Web
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-Saddam Governance
Updated January 7, 2004
Kenneth Katzman
Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs
Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division
Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-Saddam Governance
Summary
Operation Iraqi Freedom accomplished a long-standing objective, the overthrow
and capture of Saddam Hussein, but replacing that regime with a stable, moderate,
democratic political structure has run into difficulty. Past U.S. efforts to change the
regime failed because of limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the Iraqi
opposition, and the efficiency and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping security
services. Previous U.S. Administrations had ruled out major U.S. military action to
change Iraq’s regime, believing such action would be risky and not necessarily
justified by the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament.
In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized
Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to verifiably
abandon its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs and the potential for it
to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. In September 2002, the President told the U.N.
General Assemblythat unless Iraq fullydisarmed in cooperation with United Nations
weapons inspectors, the United States would lead a coalition to achieve that
disarmament militarily, making clear that this would include the ouster of Iraq’s
President Saddam Hussein’s regime. After a November 2002 - March 2003 round
of U.N. inspections in which Iraq’s cooperation was mixed, on March 19, 2003 the
United States launched Operation Iraqi Freedom to disarm Iraq and change its
regime. The regime fell on April 9, 2003.
In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change
through U.S.-led military action would yield benefits beyond disarmament and
reduction of support for terrorism; benefits such as liberation of the Iraqi people
from an oppressive regime and promotion of stability and democracy throughout the
Middle East. However, escalating resistance to the U.S.-led occupation has
contributed to Administration implementation of several options, including attempts
to recruit more foreign participation to post-war peacekeeping, building Iraqi
institutions that can maintain security, and, as of November 2003, accelerating
transfer of authorityto Iraqi political bodies. Formerlyexiled opposition groups form
the core of a U.S.-appointed 25-seat “governing council” as well as a 25-person
cabinet; these bodies are relatively representative of Iraq’s ethnic and political
factions but not viewed widely within Iraq as effective or legitimate institutions.
Congress has passed legislation (H.R. 3289, P.L. 108-106) that provides
supplemental FY2004 funding for military costs and reconstruction in Iraq (and
Afghanistan).
See also CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Reconstruction
Assistance, and CRS Report RL32090, FY2004 Supplemental Appropriations for
Iraq, Afghanistan, and the Global War on Terrorism: Military Operations &
Reconstruction Assistance. This report will be updated as warranted by major
developments.
Contents
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda/Zarqawi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Sadr Movement/Moqtada Al Sadr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
The First ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Monarchists/Sharif Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups . . . 14
Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
The Opposition Positions Itself Before War/Second ILA
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Post-Saddam Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Formation of the Major Party Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
The Governing Council and Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Roadmap to Sovereignty/November 2003 Transition Plan . . . . . . . . . 26
Iraqi Resistance and U.S. Security Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
The Capture of Saddam Hussein . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
The Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
“Iraqification”/Building Security Institutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Internationalization/U.N. Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Restarting Iraq’s Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
CPA Budget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Supplemental Funding Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
DFI Current Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Termination of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Debt Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Searching for Former Regime Violations and Officials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Congressional Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-Saddam Governance
The United States did remove Iraq’s Saddam Hussein from power in the course
of the 1991 Persian Gulf war, and his regime, contrary to U.S. expectations, survived
post-war uprisings by Iraq’s Shiites and Kurds. Subsequently, the United States
sought to remove Saddam from power by supporting dissidents inside Iraq, although
changing Iraq’s regime was not declared policy until 1998. In November 1998, amid
a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections, the
Clinton Administration stated that the United States would seek to go beyond
containment to promoting a change of regime. A regime change policy was endorsed
by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, October 31, 1998). Bush Administration
officials emphasized regime change as the cornerstone of U.S. policy toward Iraq
since shortly after the September 11, 2001, attacks. Operation Iraqi Freedom was
launched on March 19, 2003, and had effectively removed Saddam Hussein from
power by April 9, 2003. Saddam Hussein was captured alive on December 13, 2003.
The Bush Administration’s stated goal is to transform Iraq into a democracy
that could be a model for the rest of the region. Iraq has not had experience with a
democratic form of government, although parliamentary elections were held during
the period of British rule under a League of Nations mandate (1920-1932). Iraq,
which became independent in 1932, was governed by kings from the Hashemite
dynastyduring 1921-1958, although with substantial British direction and influence.1
Members of the Hashemite dynasty continue to rule in neighboring Jordan. Iraq’s
first Hashemite king was Faysal bin Hussein, son of Sharif Hussein of Mecca, who
led the Arab revolt against the Ottoman Empire. Faysal ruled Iraq as King Faysal I
and was succeeded by his son, Ghazi (1933-1939). Ghazi was succeeded by his son,
Faysal II, who ruled until the military coup of Abd al-Karim al-Qasim in 1958. He
was ousted in February 1963 by an alliance of the Baath Party and military officers.
One of the Baath Party’s allies in the February 1963 coup was Abd al-Salam al-
Arif. In November 1963, Arif purged the Baath, including Baathist Prime Minister
Ahmad Hasan al-Bakr, and instituted direct military rule. Arif was killed in a
helicopter crash in 1966 and was replaced by his elder brother, Abd al-Rahim al-Arif,
who ruled until the Baath Party coup of July 1968. Following the Baath seizure,
Ahmad Hasan al-Bakr, a military figure, returned to government as President of Iraq
and Saddam Hussein, a civilian, became the second most powerful leader as Vice
Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council. In that position, Saddam
developed and oversaw a system of overlapping security services to monitor loyalty
among the population and within Iraq’s institutions, including the military. On July
1 See Eisenstadt, Michael and Eric Mathewson, eds. U.S. Policy in Post-Saddam Iraq:
Lessons From the British Experience. The Washington Institute for Near East Policy, 2003.
CRS-2
17, 1979, the aging al-Bakr resigned at Saddam’s urging, and Saddam became
President of Iraq.
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam
Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an
operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George
H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end
of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and
Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope
of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions. The revolt in southern Iraq reached
the suburbs of Baghdad, but the Republican Guard forces, composed mainly of
regime loyalists, had survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from
battle prior to the U.S. ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid-
March 1991. ManyShiites blamed the United States for not supporting their uprising
and standing aside as the regime retaliated against those who participated in the
rebellion. Kurds, benefitting from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991,
drove Iraqi troops out of much of northern Iraq and subsequently remained free of
Baghdad’s rule.
According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite
uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding
stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup
against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that
purpose. The Administration apparently believed — and this view apparently was
shared by many experts and U.S. officials — that a coup by elements within the
current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq.
Manyobservers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and
Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and
tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria.
Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition
Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that
the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment
within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision
was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the
diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the
Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and
diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This
opposition coalition was seen as providing a vehicle for the United States to build a
viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert
support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.2
2 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2,
1992.
CRS-3
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi
The growing opposition coalition took shape in an organization called the Iraqi
National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two main
Kurdish militias, the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic Union of
Kurdistan (PUK), participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens of
opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came into the
coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq.
The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi
ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military
officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC
with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups
publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests,
including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the
preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. Security
Council resolutions on Iraq.3 However, many observers doubted its commitment to
democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and
because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies. The
INC’s first Executive Committee consisted of KDP leader Masud Barzani, ex-Baath
Party and military official Hassan Naqib, and moderate Shiite cleric Mohammad
Bahr al-Ulum. (Barzani and Bahr al-Ulum are now on the 25-member post-war
Governing Council and both are part of its nine member rotating presidency.)
Ahmad Chalabi. When the INC was formed, its Executive Committee
selected Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 59 years old and is a secular Shiite Muslim
from a prominent banking family, to run the INC on a daily basis. Chalabi was
educated in the United States (Massachusetts Institute of Technology, MIT) as a
mathematician. He fled Iraq to Jordan in 1958, when the Hashemite monarchy was
overthrown in a military coup. This coup occurred 10 years before the Baath Party
took power in Iraq (July 1968). In 1978, he founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but
later ran afoul of Jordanian authorities on charges of embezzlement and he left
Jordan, possibly with some help from members of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989.
In 1992, he was convicted in absentia of embezzling $70 million from the bank and
sentenced to 22 years in prison. The Jordanian government subsequently repaid
depositors a total of $400 million. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government
was pressured by Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties
to the Jordanian government. In April 2003, senior Jordanian officials, including
King Abdullah, called Chalabi “divisive” and stopped just short of saying he would
be unacceptable to Jordan as leader of Iraq. Chalabi’s critics acknowledge that,
despite allegations about his methods, he was single-minded in his determination to
overthrow Saddam Hussein, and he is said to be favored by those Administration
officials, particularly in the Department of Defense, who most supported changing
Iraq’s regime by force.
3 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by
INC representatives, February 1993.
CRS-4
Since Chalabi returned to Iraq, there have been no large public demonstrations
supportive of him or the INC, indicating that he might not have a large following
inside Iraq. However, anecdotal press reporting suggest that he has attracted some
support from those Iraqis that most welcomed the U.S. military offensive against Iraq
and subsequent occupation. On April 6, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters (“Free
Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by the U.S. military from their base in the north to the
Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs in southern Iraq, later
deploying to Baghdad and other parts of Iraq. After establishing his headquarters in
Baghdad, Chalabi tried to build support by searching for fugitive members of the
former regime and arranging for U.S. military forces in Iraq to provide security or
other benefits to his potential supporters. However, the Free Iraqi Forces
accompanying Chalabi were disbanded following the U.S. decision in mid-May2003
to disarm independent militias.
Chalabi is part of a grouping of five leaders of major exile parties that held a
series of planning meetings shortly prior to the 2003 war. The major-party grouping
was hoping to become the core of a successor regime, and the major parties are
represented on the Governing Council. Chalabi is a member of the Governing
Council and one of the nine that will rotate its presidency. He was president of the
Council during the month of September 2003 and represented Iraq at the U.N.
General Assembly meetings that month.
A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book,
Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq, detailing alleged Iraqi regime human
rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracy for Iraq, including full
rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he taught Middle
Eastern politics at Brandeis University prior to returning to Iraq after the fall of
Saddam. In August 2003, Makiya was tapped by the Governing Council to head a
25-person committee that was to propose a process for drafting a new constitution
(see below).
On November 23, 2003, the Governing Council announced the appointment of
a pro-INC Iraqi-American woman, Rend Rahim Francke, as representative of Iraq to
the United States. Since the 1991 Gulf war, she headed an opposition group called
the Iraq Foundation, which has an office in Washington and received some U.S.
democratization funds since the early 1990s. She is working out of Bahrain’s
embassy in Washington, at least temporarily.
The Kurds/KDP and PUK. The Kurds, among the most pro-U.S. of all the
groups in Iraq, do not have ambitions to play a major role in governing Arab Iraq, but
Iraq’s neighbors have always been fearful that the Kurds might still seek outright
independence. In committing to the concept of federalism, the INC platform
assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq. Turkey, which
has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly
fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into
a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy
since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War
I. In 1961, the KDP, then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP
leader Masud Barzani’s father, began an insurgency that has continued until today,
although interrupted by periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud
CRS-5
Barzani’s brother, Idris, commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the Iran-Iraq
war but was killed in that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from
the KDP in 1965; the PUK’s members are generally more well-educated, urbane, and
left-leaning than those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000-
60,000 fighters, some of which are trained in conventional military tactics.
In the aftermath of the 1991 Gulf war, the KDP and the PUK agreed in May
1992 to share power after parliamentary and executive elections. In May 1994,
tensions between them flared into clashes, and the KDP turned to Baghdad for
backing. In August 1996, Iraqi forces helped the KDP capture Irbil, seat of the
Kurdish regional government; Iraqi forces acted at the KDP’s invitation. With U.S.
mediation, the Kurdish parties agreed on October 23, 1996, to a cease-fire and the
establishment of a 400-man peace monitoring force composed mainly of Turkomens
(75% of the force). The United States funded the force with FY1997 funds of $3
million for peacekeeping (Section 451 of the Foreign Assistance Act), plus about
$4 million in DOD drawdowns for vehicles and communications gear (Section 552
of the FAA). Also set up was a peace supervisory group consisting of the United
States, Britain, Turkey, the PUK, the KDP, and Iraqi Turkomens.
A tenuous cease-fire held after November 1997, and the KDP and PUK leaders
signed an agreement in Washington in September 1998 to work toward resolving the
main outstanding issues (sharing of revenues and control over the Kurdish regional
government). Reconciliation efforts showed substantial progress in 2002 as the
Kurds perceived that the United States might act to overthrow the regime of Saddam
Hussein. On October 4, 2002, the two Kurdish factions jointly reconvened the
Kurdish regional parliament for the first time since their 1994 clashes. In June 2002,
the United States gave the Kurds $3.1 million in new assistance to further the
reconciliation process.
In post-Saddam Iraq, both Barzani and Talabani were part of the major-party
grouping that has now been incorporated into the Governing Council, and both are
part of the Council’s rotating presidency. Talabani was Council president during
November 2003. The KDP and PUK are said to be increasingly combining their
political resources and efforts to re-establish the joint governance of the Kurdish
regions that was in place during 1992-1994. The Kurdish parties are also negotiating
with U.S. authorities to maintain substantial autonomy in northern Iraq in a
sovereign, post-occupation Iraq, although clashes have flared in December 2003-
January 2004 between Arabs and Kurds in the city of Kirkuk as Kurdish leaders
have sought to politically incorporate that city into the Kurdish regions.
Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda/Zarqawi. In the mid-1990s, the two main
Kurdish parties enjoyed good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the
Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaikh Ali Abd-al
Aziz. Based in Halabja, Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March
1988 chemical attack on that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998.
A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam
(Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam).
This Ansar faction was led by Mullah Krekar, an Islamist Kurd who reportedly had
once studied under Shaikh Abdullah al-Azzam, an Islamic theologian of Palestinian
CRS-6
origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama bin Laden. Ansar reportedly
associated itself with Al Qaeda and agreed to host in its northern Iraq enclave Al
Qaeda fighters, mostly of Arab origin, who had fled the U.S.-led war in Afghanistan
in 2001. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, during which its base was captured,
about 600 primarily Arab fighters lived in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, near the town
of Khurmal.4 Ansar fighters clashed with the PUK around Halabja in December
2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedly responsible for an assassination attempt
against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002. Possibly because his Ansar
movement was largely taken over by the Arab fighters from Afghanistan, Krekar left
northern Iraq for northern Europe. He was detained in Norway in August 2002 and
was arrested again in early January 2004.
The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials
to be Abu Musab al-Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in
Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the
December 1999 millennium celebration, the assassination in Jordan of U.S. diplomat
Lawrence Foley (2002), and to reported attempts in 2002 to spread the biological
agent ricin in London and possibly other places in Europe. In a presentation to the
U.N. Security Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied Zarqawi
and Ansar to Saddam Hussein’s regime, which might have viewed Ansar al-Islam as
a means of pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents. Although Zarqawi reportedly
received medical treatment in Baghdad in May 2002 after fleeing Afghanistan, many
experts believed Baghdad-Ansar links were tenuous or even non-existent; Baghdad
did not control northern Iraq even before Operation Iraqi Freedom.5 Zarqawi’s
current whereabouts are unknown, although some unconfirmed press reports indicate
he might have fled to Iran after the fall of the Ansar camp to U.S.-led forces. Some
recent press accounts say Iran might have him in custody.6 U.S. officials have said
since August 2003 that some Ansar fighters, possibly at the direction of Zarqawi,
might have remained in or re-entered Iraq and are participating in the resistance to
the U.S. occupation, possibly including organizing acts of terrorism such as recent
car/truck bombings (see below). One press report quotes U.S. intelligence as
assessing the number of Ansar fighters inside Iraq at 150.7 Ansar al-Islam is not
listed by the State Department as Foreign Terrorist Organization (FTO).
Shiite Islamist Organizations
Some U.S. officials and outside experts have had concerns about the potential
strength and ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups
in post-Saddam Iraq. Many perceive these factions as aligned with Iran. Others
4 Chivers, C.J. Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.”
New York Times, December 6, 2002.
5 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire,
March 18, 2002.
6 Finn, Peter and Susan Schmidt. “Al Qaeda Plans a Front in Iraq.” Washington Post,
September 7, 2003.
7 Schmitt, Eric. “Cheney Theme of Qaeda Ties to Bombings in Iraq Is Questioned by Some
in Administration.” New York Times, November 11, 2003.
CRS-7
believe that Iraq’s Shiite clerics consult with but do not answer to Iran and do not
seek to model a post-war Iraqi state after Iran’s Islamic republic. The United States
sought to work with some Shiite Islamist opposition factions during the 1990s but
had few if any contacts with others. Shiite Islamist factions hold at least five seats
on the Governing Council unveiled July 13, 2003.
SCIRI/Badr Corps. The most well known among these Shiite factions is the
Supreme Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member
of the INC in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC
banner. SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition
groups in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad
Baqr al-Hakim, died in a car bomb by unknown assailants in Najaf on August 29,
2003.
Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head
an Islamic Republic of Iraq, a vision that, if realized, might conflict with U.S. plans
to forge a democratic Iraq. Baqr Al Hakim and his family fled Iraq to Iran in 1980,
during a major crackdown on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam
feared that Iraqi Shiite Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution
in Iran in 1979, posed a major threat to his regime. Prior to the formation of SCIRI,
Hakim and his family were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party (see below).
Mohammed Baqr was the son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a
prominent Shiite leader in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini
when Khomeini was in exile in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. Baqr Al Hakim had
returned to Iraq on May 10, 2003, welcomed by crowds in Basra and Najaf.
Until August 2002, when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures
for meetings in Washington, D.C., SCIRI had publicly refused to work openly with
the United States or accept U.S. assistance, although it was part of the INC and did
have contacts with the United States prior to the 2003 war effort. Unlike some other
Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI has had good working relations with some Iraqi Sunni
Arab factions and most Kurdish parties.
In post-Saddam Iraq, SCIRI leaders have participated in U.S.-led efforts to
establish a post-war government and counseled their followers to tolerate, at least
temporarily, the U.S. occupation as a necessary vehicle for building an Iraq in which
Shiites are adequately represented. At the same time, SCIRI has called for the rapid
restoration of Iraqi sovereignty. After he returned to Iraq, Mohammed Baqr Al
Hakim had said he was for a democracy and would not seek to establish an Iranian-
style Islamic republic. Abd al-Aziz al Hakim met with other opposition leaders in
late April 2003 at a post-war governance planning session in Iraq, sponsored by U.S.
officials. Abd al-Aziz later helped constitute the major-party core of the Governing
Council, and he is part of the nine-person rotating Council presidency. (He will head
the Council during December 2003.) Nonetheless, U.S. officials are said to be
mistrustful of SCIRI’s goals and its ties to Iran.
In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about
10,000-15,000 fighters/activists organized into a “Badr Brigades” (named after a
major battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from
Iran into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. The Badr Brigades are
CRS-8
headed by Mohammed Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim, who returned
to Iraq on April 20, 2003, to pave the way for Mohammed Baqr’s return. Abd al-
Aziz has taken over the leadership of the movement in the wake of his elder
brother’s death on August 29. (Another Hakim brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan
in 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s security services.) Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim’s key
aide is Adel Abd-al Mahdi.
Iran’s Revolutionary Guard, which is politically aligned with Iran’s hard line
civilian officials, has been the key patron of the Badr Brigades, providing it with
weapons, funds, and other assistance; the Brigades fought alongside the Guard
against Iraqi forces during the Iran-Iraq war. However, many Iraqi Shiites view
SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr Brigade operations in southern Iraq
prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark broad popular unrest against the Iraqi
regime. Some Badr fighters deployed inside northern Iraq on the eve of Operation
Iraqi Freedom, and the rest have since entered Iraq. Asserting that the United States
failed to create a secure environment that might have prevented the August 29, 2003,
bombing that killed Ayatollah Al Hakim, some Brigade fighters have deployed
throughout Najaf since the bombing.
A variety of press reports say that some other individual militias now providing
security in many towns in southern Iraq are linked to the Badr Brigades. One such
militia is derived from the fighters who challenged Saddam Hussein’s forces in the
marsh areas of southern Iraq, around the town of Amara, north of Basra. It goes by
the name Hizbollah (Party of God)-Amara, and it is headed by marsh guerrilla leader
Abdul Karim Muhammadawi, nicknamed “Prince of the Marshes” who was named
to the Governing Council. He is widely perceived as an ally of SCIRI and is
considered by observers to have substantial Shiite support north of Basra.
Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, Iraq’s oldest organized Shiite Islamist
grouping, continues to exist as a separate group, but many Da’wa activists appear to
be at least loosely allied with SCIRI. The party was founded in 1957 by a revered
Iraqi Shiite cleric, Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of
Ayatollah Khomeini. It was the most active Shiite opposition movement in the few
years following Iran’s Islamic revolution in February 1979; Da’wa activists
conducted guerrilla attacks against the Baathist regime and attempted assassinations
of senior Iraqi leaders, including Tariq Aziz. Baqr Al Sadr and his sister were hung
by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the unrest, and many other Da’wa activists were killed
or imprisoned. After the Iraqi crackdown, many surviving Da’wa leaders moved into
Iran; some subsequently joined SCIRI, but others rejected Iranian control of Iraq’s
Shiite opposition movement and continued to affiliate only with Da’wa.
In post-Saddam Iraq, Da’wa’s current leader, Ibrahim Jafari, and its leader in
Basra, Abd al Zahra Othman, are on the Governing Council, as is a former Da’wa
activist turned human rights activist, Muwaffaq Al-Ruba’i. Ruba’i is reputed to be
personally and politically close to Ayatollah Ali al-Sistani (see below). Jafari is one
of the nine members of the Council that is rotating the presidency; he was first to
hold that post-August 2003.)
The Kuwaiti branch of the Da’wa Party allegedly was responsible for a May
1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks
CRS-9
on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The Hizballah organization in Lebanon
was founded by Lebanese clerics loyal to Ayatollah Baqr Al Sadr and the late
Ayatollah Khomeini, and there continue to be personal and ideological linkages
between Hizballah and the Da’wa Party. The Hizballah activists who held U.S.
hostages in that country during the 1980s often attempted to link release of the
Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party prisoners held by Kuwait for those
attacks in the 1980s. Some Iraqi Da’wa members look to Lebanon’s senior Shiite
cleric Mohammed Hossein Fadlallah, who was a student and protege of Ayatollah
Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, for spiritual guidance. These linkages could explain
reports that security personnel and other activists from Lebanese Hizballah have
entered Iraq since the fall of Saddam Hussein, although other explanations include
an effort by Iran to work through Lebanese Hizballah to build leverage in southern
Iraq.8
Sadr Movement/Moqtada Al Sadr.9 Members of the clan of the late
Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq.
The Sadr clan, based in Iraq during Saddam Hussein’s rule, was repressed and not
politically active during that time. The United States had no contact with this
grouping prior to the 2003 war and did not attempt to enlist it in any overthrow
efforts during 1991-2002. Although the Sadr clan has been closely identified with
the Da’wa Party (see above), it appears that members of the clan and their followers
currently are operating in post-war Iraq as a movement separate from Da’wa.
Another revered member of the clan, Mohammed Sadiq Al Sadr, and two of his sons,
were killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999. A surviving son of Mohammad
Sadiq, Moqtada Al Sadr, who is about 30 years old, has attempted to rally his
followers to attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite politics. He and his clan
apparently have a large following in the poorer Shiite neighborhoods of Baghdad,
which, after the fall of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr City,”
from the former name of “Saddam City.” However, Moqtada is viewed by many
Iraqi Shiites as a young radical who lacks religious and political weight. To
compensate for his lack of religious credentials, he has sought spiritual authority for
his actions from exiled Iraqi senior cleric, Ayatollah Kazem Haeri, who is living in
Qom, Iran. An alternate interpretation by some experts is that Haeri is acting at the
direction of Iran’s leadership to keep Moqtada Sadr under a measure of control.
Moqtada’s reputation was tarnished in early April 2003 when his supporters
allegedly killed Abd al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Abdol
Qasem Musavi-Khoi, shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al-
Majid Khoi headed the Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq
after U.S.-led forces took Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political
doctrines of Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran.
The Sadr grouping is not represented in the Governing Council. Moqtada has
used his Friday prayer sermons in Kufa (near Najaf) and other forums to denounce
8 Risen, James. “Hezbollah, in Iraq, Refrains from Attacks on Americans.” New York
Times, November 24, 2003.
9 See also White, Jeffrey. “To the Brink: Muqtada Al Sadr Challenges the United States.”
Washington Institute for Near East Policy, Policywatch 794. October 17, 2003.
CRS-10
the Council as a puppet of the U.S. occupation. In July 2003, Moqtada and his aides
began recruiting for an Islamic army, for now unarmed, that Sadr says must
challenge the U.S. occupation, although he has thus far stopped short of openly
calling for armed attacks on American forces. He is openly calling for a cleric-led
Islamic state similar to that of Iran. In August 2003, Shiites in Basra and in Baghdad
rioted against British and U.S. occupation forces over fuel shortages and perceived
slights, and there was speculation that Moqtada was helping fuel the riots. Several
days of anti-U.S. demonstrations by pro-Sadr Shiites broke out in Baghdad in early
October 2003. One report says that Sunni Islamists, led by Shaikh Ahmad Qubaysi,
who returned in April 2003 from exile in the UAE, is assisting the Sadr faction in
opposing the occupation.10 If true, this could represent the emergence of a Sunni-
Shiite Islamist anti-occupation coalition.
Later in October 2003, and amid assessments that Moqtada’s popularity is low
and waning further, his supporters stepped up the challenge to the United States. He
named an alternate “government” for Iraq, and some of his followers formed armed
militias and attempted unsuccessfully to seize control of some mosques in Najaf.
Pro-Sadr militants also ambushed some U.S. forces. Press reports say U.S.
commanders are debating how to control Moqtada Al Sadr, with the option of
arresting him apparently under consideration. Possibly to head off any U.S. action
against him, Moqtada tempered some of his statements in October 2003. Another
possible explanation is that Moqtada might be trying to position his movement for
involvement in the transition regime that is to replace the Governing Council; his
involvement would probably require the acquiescence of U.S. authorities in Iraq.
Despite his expressions of moderation, U.S. forces arrested at least one of his top
aides in November 2003.
Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah. The revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al-
Sistani, based in Najaf, was repressed during Saddam’s rule and is emerging as a
major political as well as religious force in post-Saddam Iraq. The United States had
no contact with Sistani when Saddam was in power and has had only limited contact
with him since; he reportedly refuses to meet with representatives of the U.S.
occupation. He is the most senior of the Shiite clerics that lead the Najaf-based
“Hawza al-Ilmiya,” a major grouping of seminaries and Shiite clerics, and numerous
assessments say many Iraqi Shiites follow him and respond to his pronouncements.
Other senior clerics include Ayatollah Mohammad Sa’id Al Hakim, uncle of the slain
SCIRI leader Mohammad Baqr, Ayatollah Mohammad Isaac Fayadh, and Ayatollah
Bashir al-Najafi. The Hawza, which is well funded through donations, is becoming
an important source of political authority in the Shiite regions of Iraq, hiring Iraqis
to perform functions performed by the former regime and issuing directives, often
obeyed, to some Iraqi civil servants. Sistani and the Hawza are generally allied with
SCIRI in the intra-Shiite power struggle, seeking to contain Moqtada Al Sadr, whom
Sistani and SCIRI both view as radical and impulsive.
Sistani, who is of Iranian ethnicity, is considered to be in the tradition of
Ayatollah Khoi in opposing a direct role for clerics in governmental affairs, and
10 Shadid, Anthony. “Iraqi Clerics Unite in Rare Alliance.” Washington Post, August 17,
2003.
CRS-11
Sistani and the Hawza have spoken against a direct role for the clerics in governing
post-war Iraq. However, in early July 2003, Sistani began to take a more active role
in Iraq’s post-war decision-making by issuing a statement that the drafters of a new
constitution should be elected, not appointed. That statement, according to some
Iraqi officials, caused a deadlock in the effort to develop a roadmap to the writing of
a constitution; Shiites on the Governing Council reportedly insisted that Sistani’s
directive be followed. Sistani has indicated to other Shiite leaders and Western press
organs that he does not fully support the November 15, 2003 agreement on a political
transition (see below), preferring instead a process consisting of direct elections.
Islamic Amal. Another Shiite Islamist organization, the Islamic Amal
(Action) Organization, has traditionally been allied with SCIRI. In the early 1980s,
Islamic Amal was under the SCIRI umbrella but later broke with it. It is headed by
Mohammed Taqi Modarassi, a Shiite cleric, who returned to Iraq from exile in Iran
in April 2003, after Saddam Hussein’s regime fell. Islamic Amal, which has a
following among Shiite Islamists mainly in Karbala, conducted attacks against
Saddam Hussein’s regime in the 1980s. However, it does not appear to have a
following nearly as large as SCIRI or the other Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s
brother, Abd al-Hadi, headed the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, which
tried to stir up Shiite unrest against the Bahrain regime in the 1980s and 1990s.
Since returning to Iraq in April 2003, Mohammad Taqi has argued against violent
opposition to the U.S. occupation, saying that such a challenge would plunge Iraq
into civil warfare. On November 14, 2003, Modarassi criticized the United States
for not holding elections to any of the political bodies formed thus far.
Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups
The differences among the various anti-Saddam organizations led to the near
collapse of the U.S. regime change effort the mid-1990s. As noted above, in May
1994, the KDP and the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs
revenues levied at border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s
government based in Irbil. The infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC
offensive against Iraqi troops in March 1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at
the last minute. Although it was repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of
the less well-trained and poorly motivated Iraqi units facing the Kurds. Some INC
leaders point to the battle as an indication that the INC could have succeeded
militarily, without direct U.S. military help, had it been given additional resources
and training in the 1990s.
The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition in the
mid-1990s caused the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by
renewing ties to a non-INC group, Iraq National Accord (INA).11 The INA, originally
founded in 1990 with Saudi support, consisted of defectors from Iraq’s Baath Party,
military, and security services who were perceived as having ties to disgruntled
officials in those organizations. It is headed by Dr. Iyad al-Alawi, former president
11 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret
War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997.
CRS-12
of the Iraqi Student Union in Europe and a physician by training. He is a secular
Shiite Muslim, but most of the members of the INA are Sunni Muslims. The INA’s
prospects appeared to brighten in August 1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein
Kamil al-Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons of mass destruction programs —
defected to Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip on the military and security
services was weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate
from there. The INA was ultimately penetrated by Iraq’s intelligence services and,
in June 1996, Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by arresting or executing over 100
INA sympathizers in the military.
Baghdad’s offensive against the opposition accelerated with its August 1996
incursion into northern Iraq, at the invitation of the KDP. Iraq not only helped the
KDP capture Irbil from the PUK, but Saddam’s forces took advantage of their
presence in northern Iraq to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in
northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout the north. In
the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred
oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated
from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists,
mostly from the INC.
Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA was operating
throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt its presence in Iraq to some extent after
the June 1996 arrests. Although it was cooperating with the INC at the start of the
U.S.-led 2003 war, there is a history of friction between the two groups. Chalabi and
the INC have argued for comprehensive purging of former Baathists from Iraq’s
institutions, while the INA, which has ex-Baathists in it, has argued for retaining
some members of the former regime in official positions. Like the INC, the INA
does not appear to have a mass following in Iraq, but it has close ties to the U.S.
government and does have a constituency among pro-Western Iraqis. In post-
Saddam Iraq, Alawi has also taken the lead in pushing for the establishment of an
internal security service for post-war Iraq, dominated by the major exile factions.
Alawi was part of the major-party grouping that became the core of the Governing
Council, and Alawi has been named a member of that Council and one of its nine-
member rotating presidency; he was president in October 2003.
Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks
For the two years following the opposition’s 1996 setbacks, the Clinton
Administration had little contact with the opposition. In those two years, the INC,
INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations and their
ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998, then
Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations
subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations”
about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish.
Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections
during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam
Hussein, although virtually no one in Congress or outside was advocating a U.S.-led
military invasion to accomplish that goal. A formal congressional push for a regime
change policy began with an FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174,
CRS-13
signed May 1, 1998) that, among other provisions, earmarked $5 million in
Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free
Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio
service began broadcasting in October 1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million
was devoted to an overt program to coordinate and promote cohesion among the
various opposition factions, and to highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions.
The remaining $2 million was used to translate and publicize documented evidence
of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north,
placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes, and translated and analyzed by experts under
contract to the U.S. government. In subsequent years, Congress has appropriated
funding for the Iraqi opposition and for war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix.
Some of the war crimes funding went to the opposition-led INDICT (International
Campaign to Indict Iraqi War Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war
crimes issues.
Iraq Liberation Act
A clear indication of congressional support for a more active U.S. overthrow
effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998: the Iraq Liberation Act
(ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998). The ILA gave the
President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles and services (and
authorized $2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be
designated by the Administration. The Act’s passage was widely interpreted as an
expression of congressional support for the concept of promoting an insurgency by
using U.S. air-power to expand opposition-controlled territory. This idea was
advocated by Chalabi and some U.S. experts, such as General Wayne Downing, who
subsequentlybecame a National Security Council official on counter-terrorism in the
first two years of the George W. Bush Administration. President Clinton signed the
legislation despite reported widespread doubts within the Clinton Administration
about the chances of success in promoting an opposition insurgency.
The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting
regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it
should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime
headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly
articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq. No
specific language in the Act provides for its termination after Saddam Hussein is
removed from power.
The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the
height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in
which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United
Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were
withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign
against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December
16-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq:
Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.)
The First ILA Designations. Further steps to promote regime change
followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, a career diplomat, Frank
CRS-14
Ricciardone, was named as a State Department’s “Coordinator for the Transition in
Iraq,” the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999, after consultations
with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13) that the major anti-
Saddam organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance under the
Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the Islamic
Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the pro-monarchist Movement for
Constitutional Monarchy (MCM). (Because of its possible role in contributing to the
formation of Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001,
although it was not formally taken off the ILA eligibility list.)
Monarchists/Sharif Ali. The Movement for Constitutional Monarchy is led
by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a relative of the Hashemite monarchs (he is a cousin of
King Faysal II, the last Iraqi monarch) that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I
until 1958. Sharif Ali, who is about 47 and was a banker in London, claims to be the
leading heir to the former Hashemite monarchy, although there are other claimants,
mostly based in Jordan. The MCM was considered a small movement that could not
contribute much to the pre-war overthrow effort, although it was part of the INC and
the United States had contacts with it. In the post-Saddam period, Sharif Ali returned
to Iraq on June 10, 2003, to a small but apparently enthusiastic welcome. He did not
participate extensively in the negotiations with the U.S.-led occupation authority on
the formation of the Governing Council, and neither Sharif Ali nor any of his
followers was appointed to the Governing Council. He left Iraq for London in June
2003, reportedly somewhat disillusioned at the pace of transition to Iraqi self-rule.
In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton
Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and
“non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999-2000, about 150
opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in
Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses providing civil affairs
training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers,
communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However,
the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficientlyorganized
to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This
restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the
effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United
States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The Hurlburt trainees
were not brought into Operation Iraqi Freedom or into the Free Iraqi Forces that
deployed to Iraq toward the end of the active combat phase of the war.
Continued Doubts About the Capabilities
of the Anti-Saddam Groups
During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end
the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of
Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed
disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the
opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an
indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical about the opposition’s
capabilities. The Clinton Administration maintained that the Iraqi opposition would
CRS-15
not succeed unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement and that direct U.S.
military action was not justified by the degree of threat posed by Iraq. Clinton
Administration officials added that supporting the opposition militarily could draw
the United States into long-term military involvement in Iraq. Others suggested the
Clinton Administration should focus instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq by
threatening major use of force, or by launching repeated air strikes, unless and until
Iraq re-admitted the U.N. weapons inspectors that left Iraq in December 1998.
As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a
provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed
November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the
Iraqi people,” of which at least $12 million was for the INC to distribute
humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million
was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million
could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive
assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC
distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000, the Clinton Administration
reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in
FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop a humanitarian aid
distribution plan and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However,
three days before it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to
Congress that noted that any INC effort to distribute humanitarian aid in areas of Iraq
under Baghdad’s control would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi
recipients of such aid, and to any relief distributors with which the INC would
contract.12
Bush Administration Policy
Bush Administration policy toward Iraq started out similar to that of the
previous administration, but changed dramatically after the September 11, 2001
terrorist attacks, even though no significant evidence linking Iraq to those attacks
came to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in
President Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he
characterized Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea.
Pre-September 11 Policy
Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic
elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus
within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow
strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq,
which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its
taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist
regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan: a modification of the U.N.
sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technology reached Iraq. His
12 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.”
January 17, 2001.
CRS-16
plan offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N.
restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military
technology.13
The Administration believed that the “smart sanctions” proposal, by easing the
suffering of the Iraqi people, would cause Iraq’s neighbors and other countries to
cease unilateral violations of the sanctions regime. Powell, who had openly
expressed skepticism about the opposition’s prospects, barely raised the regime
change issue during his trip or in his March 7, 2001, testimony before the House
International Relations Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.14 After
about a year of negotiations among the Security Council permanent members, the
major feature of the smart sanctions plan — new procedures that virtually eliminate
U.N. review of civilian exports to Iraq — was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N.
Security Council Resolution 1409).
Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime
change policy, many of the persistent questions about the wisdom and difficulty of
that strategy were debated early in the Bush Administration.15 Aside from restating
the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush Administration did little to promote that
outcome throughout most of its first year. During his confirmation hearings as
DeputySecretaryof Defense, a leading advocate of overthrowing Iraq’s regime, Paul
Wolfowitz, said that he did not yet see a “plausible plan” for changing the regime.
Like its predecessor, the Bush Administration initially declined to provide the
opposition with lethal aid, combat training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military
help. It eliminated the separate State Department position of “Coordinator for the
Transition in Iraq,” further casting doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy.
On February 2, 2001, the Bush Administration confirmed that, shortly after President
Bush took office, the Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control
(OFAC) granted the INC a license to proceed with information gathering inside Iraq
only, and not actual distribution of humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the
Administration amounted to withholding U.S. backing for the INC plan to rebuild
its presence inside Iraq.
Many in Congress, on the other hand, continued to support the INC as the
primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional
sentiment, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite
doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television
broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the
FY2001 ESF appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an
estimated additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.16
13 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food
Program, Sanctions, and U.S. Policy.
14 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times,
March 2, 2001.
15 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh,
Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002.
16 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001.
CRS-17
Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime
Bush Administration policy toward Iraq became notably more assertive after
the September 11, 2001, attacks, stressing regime change and asserting that
containment was failing or, at best, inadequate. Almost immediately after the U.S.-
led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in Afghanistan began in early October 2001,
speculation began building that the Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime
through direct use of military force as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism.
Some U.S. officials, reportedlyled bydeputy Defense Secretary Wolfowitz, believed
that the United States needed to respond to the September 11, 2001 attacks by ending
any or all regimes that support terrorist groups, including Iraq. (Iraq was a designated
state sponsor of terrorism during 1979-82, and was again designated after the 1990
invasion of Kuwait. Iraq remains on the list, despite the change of regime, although
it is expected it will be removed.) As noted above, in his January 29, 2002 State of
the Union message, President Bush named Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along
with North Korea and Iran. Vice President Cheney visited the Middle East in March
2002 reportedlyto consult regional countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq
militarily, although the countries visited reportedlyurged greater U.S. attention to the
Arab-Israeli dispute and opposed confrontation with Iraq.
The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for
confronting Iraq were (1) its purported refusal to end its WMD programs, and (2) its
ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of
conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. Most senior officials did not
specifically assert that Iraq was an imminent or immediate threat to U.S. security, but
they did assert that Iraq was a “grave and gathering” threat that was best blunted
before the threat became imminent. U.S. officials said the September 11, 2001,
attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to gather before
acting but must instead act preemptively or preventively. The Administration added
that regime change would have the further benefit of liberating the Iraqi people and
promoting stability in the Middle East, possibly facilitating a resolution to the Arab-
Israeli dispute.
Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s
regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax
mailings, senior U.S. officials said in the runup to the war that there was evidence
of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. (On September 19, 2003, President Bush, in response
to a journalist’s question, said there is no evidence linking Saddam Hussein’s regime
to the September 11 attacks but there is evidence linking that regime to Al Qaeda.)
Secretary of State Powell, as noted above, cited intelligence information that Ansar
al-Islam and its leader, Abu Musab al-Zarqawi, had links to Saddam Hussein’s
regime.17 (See section above on Ansar al-Islam for more information on that
organization and its reputed links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.) Other senior
officials cited intelligence information that Iraq provided advice and training to Al
Qaeda in the manufacture and use of chemical weapons, although Administration
information appears to date to the early 1990s when Iraq, largely isolated after the
first Gulf war, was politically close to Sudan. Al Qaeda founder Osama Bin Laden
17 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002.
CRS-18
was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996). The Bush Administration did not
extensively cite reports that Czech intelligence believed that Iraqi intelligence had
met with lead September 11 hijacker Mohammad Atta in Prague in spring 2001,
suggesting official skepticism of those reports. Some outside commentators
believed that those reports indicated a direct Iraqi connection to the September 11
attacks. A Defense Department memo to the Senate, excerpted in the Weekly
Standard (November 24, 2003, issue), purports to contain intelligence information
that the Administration believes demonstrates a long-standing relationship between
Iraq and Al Qaeda.18
Some outside observers express skepticism about Saddam-Al Qaeda
connections because of the ideological differences between Saddam Hussein’s
secular regime and Al Qaeda’s Islamist character. Others noted that bin Laden
sought to raise an Islamic army to fight Saddam’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990,
arguing against the need for U.S. troops, and that he was more an enemy of Saddam
Hussein than an ally. Those differences were evident in a February 12, 2003, bin
Laden statement referring to Saddam Hussein’s regime as socialist and infidel,
although the statement exhorted Iraq to resist impending U.S. military action. In the
Administration view, the two shared similar anti-U.S. goals, which outweighed
ideological differences and propelled them into tactical or strategic cooperation.
WMD Threat Perception. Senior U.S. officials asserted the following about
Iraq’s WMD:
! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years
since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply
with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8,
2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs.
! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and
against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not
necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States
or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against
adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of
destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of
massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the
1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings of
retaliation and did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war.
! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who
could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths
in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of this view cited
presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in October 2002,
portions of which were released publicly, stating the CIA view that
Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to terrorists if the United States
were to attack Iraq. At that point, according to that argument,
18 Hayes, Steven. “Case Closed.” The Weekly Standard, November 24, 2003.
CRS-19
Saddam Hussein would be left with little incentive not to cooperate
with terrorist groups capable of striking at U.S. interests.
Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam
As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action against Iraq, the
Bush Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its
capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002,
President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special
operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and
Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups — the INC, the
INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM — to Washington for meetings with
senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were
held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S.
government, which reportedly tended to favor different opposition groups.
Numerous press reports indicated that the Defense Department and office of Vice
President Cheney believed the INC might be able to lead a post-Saddam regime,
while the State Department believed the INC had little popularity inside Iraq.
In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August
15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in FY2001 ESF to the
Iraqi National Congress (INC), funds that had been held up due to differences
between the State Department and the INC over what activities would be funded.
Under the agreement, the State Department-provided $8 million was to be used to
fund the INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its offices in Washington,
London, Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate its Al Mutamar
newspaper and Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund the information
gathering portion of the INC’s activities (about $4 million); the State Department had
refused to fund those activities, which were to be conducted inside Iraq, because of
strains between the INC and other opposition groups and questions about INC use of
U.S. funds.
In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and
to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic-
based groups. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had
increasing contact during this period included the following:
1) the Iraqi National Movement, formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the INC. Its
leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib (who was part of an early
leadership body of the INC) and Hatim Mukhlis, who claimed support of some in
Saddam’s Tikriti clan. Mukhlis has returned to Iraq and reportedly is active
politically.
2) the Iraqi National Front, another ex-military group, founded in March 2000 by
Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s
military academy and participated in the post-1991 Gulf war anti-Saddam uprisings.
He has been active politically in Iraq since the fall of Saddam.
CRS-20
3) the Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement, established in 1996 by ex-officer
Najib al-Salhi. Salhi, who served in the Republican Guard, defected in 1995. He and
his party have been active politically in Iraq since the fall of Saddam.
4) the Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was established
in August 2002, headed by Wafiq al-Samarra’i, a former head of Iraqi military
intelligence. Ex-chief of staff of Iraq’s military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who
was based in Denmark since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member. He is under
investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of chemical weapons against
the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities said on March 17, 2003, that Khazraji had
unexpectedly left his home there,19 although his current whereabouts are unknown;
5) the Iraqi Turkmen Front, a small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping, generally
considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq. Turkomens number about 350,000
and live mainly in northern Iraq;
6) the Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another Shiite Islamic
Party, headed by Jamil Wakil — a follower of Ayatollah Shirazi. (Shirazi is an
Iranian cleric who was the spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the
Liberation of Bahrain, IFLB, see above under Islamic Amal); and
7) the Assyrian Democratic Movement, headed by Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s
Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq, but there is a strong diaspora
in the United States. The Bush Administration formally began incorporating the
Assyrian Democratic Movement into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in
September 2002. (Kanna is on the Governing Council.)
The Opposition Positions Itself Before War/Second ILA
Designations. The Bush Administration applauded efforts during 2001 and 2002
by the ex-military led groups to coordinate with each other and with the INC and
other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London and jointly run with the
INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers.
As a decision whether to launch military action approached, President Bush
issued a determination (December 9, 2002) to draw down the remaining $92 million
authorized for defense articles and services under the Iraq Liberation Act for the
INA, the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi
opposition groups designated by me under the Act before or after this
determination.” That same day, the Bush Administration made six of the ex-military
led factions discussed above (except the Higher Council for National Salvation)
eligible to receive draw downs under the ILA. The announcement appeared to be
part of reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists in tasks that could assist U.S.
forces, possibly including combat units.20 An initial group of 3,000 was selected, but
only about 70 oppositionists completed training at an air base (Taszar) in Hungary,
19 “‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper.” Agence France Press, April 7, 2003.
20 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.”
Washington Post, October 19, 2002.
CRS-21
according to press reports.21 These oppositionists served with U.S. forces in
Operation Iraqi Freedom as translators and mediators between U.S. forces and local
leaders, and most did not stay in Iraq, according to observers.
As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began
planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002,
with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in
London. The conference was organized by the same six exile groups whose leaders
visited Washington in August 2002, but included other groups as well, and they
discussed whether the opposition should declare a provisional government. The
Administration opposed that step on the grounds that doing so would give the
impression that the United States was backing the exile groups in their efforts to
dominate post-war Iraq politically. The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65-
member follow-up committee, which some criticized as weighted heavily toward
Shiite Islamist groups such as SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24-
27, 2003, in northern Iraq, and formed, against the urging of U.S. representatives at
the meeting, a six-seat committee to prepare for a transition regime. The six-person
committee included PUK leader Talabani, KDP leader Barzani, SCIRI leader
Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign
minister Adnan Pachachi. (A member from each of these groups is on the
Governing Council, as is Pachachi.)
Adnan Pachachi, who is about 80, served as foreign minister and ambassador
to the United Nations during the 1960s, under the military governments of Abd al-
Salam and then Abd al-Rahman Arif (“the Arif brothers”). Pachachi lived in exile
in the UAE during Saddam Hussein’s rule, and heads a small party called the “Iraqi
Independent Democrats.”
Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the
new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete
disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if that country wanted to avert military
action. In a probable effort to garner international support for any U.S.-led war effort
against Iraq, the Administration had downplayed the goal of regime change in
President Bush’s September 12, 2002, speech before the United Nations General
Assembly, stressing instead the need to enforce U.N. resolutions that required Iraqi
disarmament. However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change
goal after February 2003 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course.
The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March 2003
breakdown of U.N. diplomacy over whether the U.N. Security Council should
authorize war against Iraq for failing to comply with Resolution 1441. The
diplomatic breakdown followed several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by
the director of the U.N. inspection body UNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification,
and Inspection Commission) Hans Blix and the director of the International Atomic
Energy Agency (IAEA), Mohammad al-Baradei, most recently on March 7, 2003.
The briefings, based on WMD inspections that resumed November 27, 2002, under
21 Williams, Daniel. “U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles.” Washington Post, December
18, 2002.
CRS-22
Resolution 1441, were generally critical of Iraq for failing to pro-actively cooperate
to clear up outstanding questions about Iraq’s WMD program. However, the latter
two briefings (February 24 and March 7, 2003) noted progress in clearing up
outstanding WMD questions. The Blix/Baradei briefings said Iraq had not accounted
for its past WMD, but the two did not state that they were certain that Iraq had
retained WMD, or that they had uncovered any banned WMD. Iraq declared short
range ballistic missiles that were determined by Blix to be of prohibited ranges, and
Blix ordered Iraq to destroy them. Iraq began the destruction prior to the launching
of the U.S.-led war. (For more detail on the final round of inspections and evidence
of WMD programs found in the post-war period, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117: Iraq:
Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.)
Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and
Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that
inspections should be given more time. They noted that Iraq was well contained by
sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones. Those who agreed with this
view maintained that, as long as Iraq allowed access to U.N. weapons inspections
under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national
security. The inspectors reported few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700
inspections of about 400 different sites. Others experts believed that, even if Iraq
were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could have been deterred by U.S.
overall strategic superiority, presumably including the U.S. nuclear arsenal.
The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq
had not fundamentally decided to disarm. The Administration asserted on March 17,
2003, that diplomatic options to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full
attention to military action. That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and
his sons, Uday and Qusay, an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war.
They refused the ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March
19, 2003.
In the war, Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and
British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the Iraqi military, at times, put
up stiff resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi militarycommanders
or Baathist political figures came forward to try to establish a post-Saddam
government, but senior regime leaders fled Baghdad, and the whereabouts of some
of the top leadership, including Saddam Hussein, are unknown. No WMD was used,
although Iraq did fire some ballistic missiles into Kuwait. It is not clear whether
those missiles were of ranges prohibited bythe United Nations (greater than 150 km).
Post-Saddam Governance Issues
Since Saddam Hussein’s regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, there has
been increasing debate about the effectiveness of U.S. policy toward Iraq. The
outcome of the debate might depend on such factors as the pace and costs of
reconstruction; the degree of resistance to the U.S.-led occupation; the amount of
WMD ultimately found, if any; and whether a post-Saddam government is stable and
democratic. The same U.S. concerns about fragmentation of and instability in Iraq
CRS-23
that existed in prior years are present in the current debate over how to establish a
post-Saddam regime. Some experts believe that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall
under the control of pro-Iranian Shiite Islamist forces who are asserting growing
control over areas inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites. Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s
population but have been under-represented in every Iraqi government since modern
Iraq’s formation in 1920. (For further information on economic reconstruction and
its funding, see CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Reconstruction
Assistance.)
The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA). After the fall of the regime,
the United States set up an occupation structure. The Bush Administration initially
tasked Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) to direct civilian reconstruction, working through
a staff of U.S. diplomats and other U.S. government personnel who served as
advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various ministries. He headed the Office of
Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance (ORHA), within the Department of
Defense, created by a January 20, 2003 executive order. After spending the combat
phase of the war in neighboring Kuwait, Garner and some of his staff of about 200
deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003, to begin work.
Press reports said that senior U.S. officials were dissatisfied with the slow pace
of reconstruction under Garner, and on May 6, 2003, the Administration appointed
former ambassador L. Paul Bremer to lead the overall reconstruction effort, with a
focus on political reconstruction. He arrived on May 12, 2003, to head the CPA,
which subsumed ORHA. The appointment represented an apparent adjustment from
the original structure of the U.S. reconstruction effort, although the Administration
stated that it was always envisioned that a civilian would eventually take over the
U.S. effort and denied it was an indication of high-level dissatisfaction with the
effort. U.S. officials now refer to the CPA as an occupying authority legitimized by
U.N. Security Council Resolution 1483 of May 22, 2003. Among other provisions,
Resolution 1483 lifted U.N. sanctions on Iraq.
Another alteration of the U.S. post-war structure was made public in early
October 2003; the White House announced that an “Iraq Stabilization Group” under
the direction of National Security Adviser Condoleezza Rice would coordinate
interagency support to the CPA in Iraq. The move has been widely viewed as a
diminution in Defense Department control over post-war governance and
reconstruction. The Washington Times reported on January 6, 2004, that the military
side of U.S. operations might soon change with the potential appointment of a four-
star U.S. general as U.S. military commander for Iraq; current operations in Iraq are
headed by a three-star officer, Lt. Gen. Ricardo Sanchez.
Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule
The Administration says that U.S. forces will stay in Iraq until there is a stable,
democratic successor regime that is at peace with its neighbors. However, there has
been some debate between U.S. authorities and key anti-Saddam groups over the
pace and the means to move Iraq to self-government. This debate took on increasing
urgency as resistance attacks on U.S. forces and international organizations in Iraq
escalated in 2003.
CRS-24
Shortly after the regime fell, ORHA director Jay Garner began a process to
establish a successor regime. Senior U.S. officials, including deputy Defense
Secretary Paul Wolfowitz, said in early April 2003 that they hoped to have a
successor regime in place within six months of the fall of the regime. The
Administration organized a meeting in Nasiriyah (April 15, 2003) of about 100 Iraqis
of varying ideologies, present by U.S. invitation. Many of the attendees were
representatives of Iraqi tribal groupings that had not been politically active before.
SCIRI, along with several Shiite clerics, boycotted and called for an Islamic state.
A follow-up meeting of about 250 delegates was held in Baghdad on April 26,
ending in agreement to hold a broader meeting, within a month, to name an interim
Iraqi administration. However, in mid-May 2003, U.S. officials, apparently fearing
that existing major groups could not form a stable regime, or that Shiite Islamists
would dominate a successor authority, cut this process off and abandoned public
deadlines for transferring sovereignty to an Iraqi government.
Formation of the Major Party Grouping. In parallel with the April 26
meeting in Baghdad, the five most prominent exiled opposition groups met, with
U.S. envoys present: SCIRI, the INC, the INA, the PUK, and the KDP. On May 9,
2003, the five major parties agreed to expand their grouping to seven, adding to their
ranks the little known Nasir al-Chadirchy, head of a party called the National
Democratic Party of Iraq, as well as the Da’wa Party (see above). The major-party
grouping criticized the U.S. decision in May 2003 to delay the formation of an Iraqi
self-rule authority and to instead form a purely advisory body of 25 to 30 Iraqis.
With U.S. casualties in Iraq mounting and a growing sense of resentment among
the Iraqi population, the U.S.-led occupation authority (Coalition Provisional
Authority, CPA) began tilting back toward the views of the major Iraqi exile parties.
U.S. administrator for Iraq Paul Bremer (see below) said on June 23, 2003, that the
planned 25- to 30-member body would have “real authority” from its first days and
would not be purely advisory. He said it would nominate ministryheads, recommend
policies, and convene a “constitutional conference” to draft a new constitution,22
although it would not assume sovereignty.
The Governing Council and Cabinet. On July 13, 2003, a Governing
Council was unveiled to the Iraqi public, appointed by the U.S.-led CPA but
reflecting the influence of the major-party grouping. It also contained prominent
Iraqis who were never in exile and were not affiliated with the exiled opposition.
Prior to the assassination on September 20, 2003, of Council member Akila al-
Hashimi (a Shiite woman and former foreign ministry official) the Council had 25
members, of which 3 were women and 13 were Shiite Muslims. Of the 12 Shiite
Muslims still on the Council, one seat is held by SCIRI directly (Abd al-Aziz Al
Hakim, younger brother of Mohammad Baqr), one is held by a guerrilla affiliated
with SCIRI(Abdul Karim al-Muhammadawi), two are Da’wa Party(Ibrahim al-Jafari
and Abdul Zahra Othman) leaders, and considered allies of SCIRI, and one is a
former Da’wa activist (Muwaffaq al-Ruba’i). Also on the Council is a moderate
Shiite cleric, Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum, who is not affiliated with SCIRI or Da’wa.
22 Transcript: “Bremer Reviews Progress, Plans for Iraq Reconstruction.” Washington File,
June 23, 2003.
CRS-25
He headed the Ahl al-Bayt charity center in London since the 1980s. The remaining
Shiite Muslims, such as Chalabi and Iyad al-Alawi, are secular. One Sunni Muslim
Islamist was appointed — Muhsin Abdul Hamid — who heads the Iraqi Islamic
Party; he does not have a clear relationship with the Shiite Islamists on the Council.
(Akila Hashimi’s vacant Council seat was filled on December 8 by Salama al-
Khufaji, a Shiite women who is a dentist and teaches at Baghdad University.)
The Council includes five Kurds, including the two main Kurdish leaders Jalal
Talabani and Masud Barzani. The Kurds are generally considered the most pro-U.S.
of all Iraqi factions and are generally reluctant to openly criticize the CPA.
Although not a cohesive bloc, the Council includes exiles and non-exiles who
generally want a liberal democracy and could be considered generally pro-U.S. Most
prominent among them is Chalabi, but this grouping includes National Democratic
Party leader Nasir al-Chadirchy and Adnan Pachachi, both of whom are Sunni
Muslims. Others most likely to affiliate with this bloc include Sunni businessman
Samir Shakir al-Sumaidy; Sunni tribal member and civil engineer Ghazi al-Yawar,
who is president of Saudi-based Hicap Technology; the Shiite coordinator for the
Human Rights Association of Babel, Ahmad al-Barak; and the two other women
Council members, Songul Chapouk, a member of the Turkomen minority, who heads
the Iraqi Women’s Association, and Raja al-Khuza’i, a Shiite who heads the
maternity hospital in Diwaniyah.
A member of the Assyrian Christian community is on the Council. Yonadam
Kanna, the secretary-general of the Democratic Assyrian Movement, is on the body.
It is not known with what other members of the Council, if any, he might be aligned.
Also unclear is whether Hamid al-Musa, the Shiite head of the Iraqi Communist
Party, is allied with anyone else on the Council.
The major factions not directly represented on the Council are varied. They
include the Sadr movement; the Baath Party or other Sunni elements of the former
regime; and the Movement for Constitutional Monarchy. The Shiite Islamists on the
Council consult with Ayatollah Sistani, but Sistani is not represented directly on the
Council. Some key tribes do not have members on the Council either. Partly in
response to their exclusion from the U.S.-supported political process, in December
some Sunni Arabs formed a “shura” (consultative council) to possibly negotiate with
the CPA and other factions on behalf of Sunni Arabs. However, some U.S. officials
reportedly are suspicious of the new shura as a potential front for the resistance, and
it is not clear to what extent the CPA might negotiate with it. In some of the above
cases, the CPA did not want to include a particular faction; in other cases, a faction
might not have wanted to be associated with the occupation.
In late July 2003, the Council decided that nine Council members will rotate as
chairpersons, each for one month. Those who rotate that post are Ibrahim Jafari
(Da’wa Party), Chalabi, Alawi of the INA, Talabani (PUK), Hakim (SCIRI),
Pachachi, Barzani (KDP), Bahr al-Ulum, and Abdul Hamid, the Sunni Islamist.
Among its first actions, the Council authorized the establishment of an Iraqi
war crimes tribunal for Saddam and associates accused of major human rights abuses.
It empowered a three-member delegation to seek formal U.N. recognition; Chalabi,
CRS-26
Pachachi, and Akila Hashimi, traveled to the United Nations in July 2003 and
received a supportive statement from Secretary General Kofi Annan. No decision
on seating the Governing Council at the United Nations was announced, although
some governments in the region, including that of Iran, have recognized the Council.
The Council helped develop a plan, announced September 21, 2003, to open Iraq’s
economy to foreign investment and many of its companies to foreign ownership. In
early December 2003, the Council decided to expel from Iraqi territory any members
of an exiled Iranian opposition group called the People’s Mojahedin, a signal of
goodwill toward neighboring Iran.
Cabinet. The Council has filled out a governmental structure, and on
September 3, 2003, a 25-member cabinet was sworn in. Its composition has roughly
the same factional and ethnic balance of the Council itself. Two “ministers” —
Ibrahim Bahr al-Ulum (oil ministry) and Ali al-Alawi (trade ministry) — are close
relatives of Council members. Another, “foreign minister” Hoshyar Zibari, is a
longtime close aide to KDP chief Masud Barzani. Zibari served during most of the
1990s as KDP representative in Washington. Longtime PUK activist Abdul-Latif
Rashid is the “minister” of water resources. No “defense minister” was named,
because U.S.-led military forces are responsible for defense.
The “interior minister” is Nuri Badran, an INA activist. Badran is attempting
to build on the INA’s contacts among ex-Baathists and ex-military people to develop
a new domestic intelligence and national police network,23 although recruitment of
such categories of Iraqis has raised suspicions of other Governing Council members,
such as Ahmad Chalabi. Chalabi has been the most vocal of all major post-Saddam
figures in calling for the complete dismissal and isolation of all those with ties to the
former regime.
Roadmap to Sovereignty/November 2003 Transition Plan. Press
reports began to appear in late August 2003 that U.S. authorities were dissatisfied at
the relatively low level of activity of the Governing Council, and were pressing it to
take a more prominent and public role in post-war political decision-making. Several
Council members said that the Council could not do so unless and until the U.S.-led
coalition begins transferring greater authority to it.24 Friction also emerged in
October 2003 over a time-frame for a return to Iraqi sovereignty; the major exile
parties on the Council want an early restoration of Iraqi sovereignty. Other tensions
emerged over U.S. acceptance of Turkey’s offer to send peacekeeping troops to Iraq;
most Iraqi resent Turkey as the successor of the Ottoman Empire that ruled Iraq for
the 400 years prior to World War I.
Differences also appeared over the Council’s failure to agree on a process for
drafting a new constitution and holding national elections. The Bush Administration
had linked completion of these steps to the end of the U.S. occupation and a
restoration of full Iraqi sovereignty. In early August 2003, the Governing Council
23 Williams, Daniel. “New Ministry to Recruit Paramilitary Force in Iraq.” Washington
Post, September 2, 2003.
24 Filkins, Dexter and Neil MacFarquhar. “U.S. Official Tells Iraqis To Assert More
Authority.” New York Times, August 21, 2003.
CRS-27
tapped INC activist Kanaan Makiya to head a 25-person committee that will
determine the process for drafting the constitution. However, the committee
deadlocked, with some arguing for an appointed constitutional drafting commission
and others, such as Ayatollah Sistani, saying the drafters should be elected. Secretary
of State Powell said in late September 2003 that the Iraqis should be able to draft a
constitution within six months, although Iraqi officials subsequently said it would
be very difficult to meet that deadline. U.N. Security Council Resolution 1511, of
October 16, 2003, invited the Council to develop a timetable by December 15, 2003,
for drafting a constitution.
In mid-November, with popular resistance to the occupation appearing to grow
and resistance attacks becoming more effective, as outlined in a reported CIA
assessment,25 CPA administrator Bremer flew to Washington to consult with
President Bush and other members of the national security team. According to press
accounts, President Bush authorized Bremer to discuss with the Governing Council
a new plan to accelerate the transfer of political sovereignty to Iraqis. On November
15, the CPA and the Governing Council announced they had reached agreement on
a plan that, according to several press reports, includes the following:
! the writing of a provisional constitution, or set of “Basic Laws,” to
be completed by February 28, 2004. By the end of March 2004,
there is to be agreement on the future relationship between a
sovereign Iraqi government and U.S. forces.
! the establishment of 15-person committees in each of Iraq’s 18
provinces, who will in turn select participants for broader local
caucuses. The 15-person committees are to be established by
January 21, 2004; of the 15 in each committee, five will be
appointed by the Governing Council, five by provincial councils,
and five by town councils. By the end of May 2004, the caucuses
are to select members of a 250-member national assembly. It is
reportedly these procedures that could be modified to satisfy
Ayatollah Sistani’s demands (see below) for elections; some reports
say there might be a decision to allow the provincial or town
councils to elect delegates rather than select them.
! By July 1, 2004, the selection by the 250 member national assembly
of members of an executive branch, including designation of a
provisional leader of Iraq. This new provisional government is to
assume sovereignty. According to Bremer, there is to be an
agreement between the transition government and the United States
on the continuation of the U.S. military presence.
! By March 15, 2005, elections of drafters of a permanent
constitution. The elections are to be managed by the transition
government.
25 Landay, Jonathan. “CIA Has A Bleak Analysis of Iraq.” Philadelphia Inquirer, November
12, 2003.
CRS-28
! By December 31, 2005, the holding of national elections for a
permanent government.
The agreement has attracted mixed reviews both abroad and within Iraq. Some
believe that it will lead to a relatively rapid restoration of sovereignty that should
calm resistance. Others believe it represents a U.S. effort to draw down its presence
in Iraq to minimize further U.S. casualties, and that the political process outlined will
not ensure formation of a genuine democracy, but rather a coalition of individual
factions. Others believe that the process outlined is relatively vague and that much
infighting will result at each stage of the process, including the selection of caucus
participants, the naming of assembly members, the selection of a transition
government, and the naming of a leader of the transition government. Some believe
the process will favor the well-organized former exile parties, although others believe
the plan provides sufficient opportunity for newly enfranchised groups and
individuals in Iraq to gain some say in the political transition. Some members of the
Governing Council say that the Council should remain in existence as part of a
transition government after that government is established; this suggests that some
Governing Council figures fear they might not be selected to be part of a new
governing body under the agreed upon process.
As part of the governance planning process that took place before the war, the
U.S. State Department supported a group of Iraqi exiles to address issues that would
confront a successor government.26 The State Department working group (the
“Future of Iraq Project”) does not appear to have significant influence on any post-
war regime decision-making in Iraq, although some Iraqis who participated are now
in various Iraqi official bodies. Some experts believe the Defense Department was
promoting a competing or separate group of exiles.27 The State Department project,
which cost $5 million, consisted of working groups that discussed (1) transitional
justice; (2) public finance; (3) public and media outreach; (4) democratic principles;
(5) water, agriculture, and the environment; (6) health and human services; (7)
economyand infrastructure; (8) education; (9) refugees, internally-displaced persons,
and migration policy; (10) foreign and national security policy; (11) defense
institutions and policy; (12) free media; (13) civil societycapacity-building; (14) anti-
corruption measures; and (15) oil and energy.
Iraqi Resistance and U.S. Security Operations
Experts note that the U.S. policy debate has intensified since September 2003
because of the apparently escalating Iraqi resistance, an increasing number of U.S.
casualties taken, and the slow rate at which such U.S. initiatives such as the
establishment of a democratic successor regime is moving forward. At present, about
145,000 U.S. and British troops are in Iraq; of those, about 130,000 are U.S.
personnel and about 12,000 are British. There are an additional 16,000 foreign
forces, deploying in accordance with international commitments to post-war
26 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,”
Washington File, December 11, 2002.
27 Fineman, Mark, Robin Wright, and Doyle McManus. “Preparing for War, Stumbling to
Peace.” Los Angeles Times, July 18, 2003.
CRS-29
peacekeeping (see below). Earlier press reports said the Administration wanted to
draw the U.S. force level down to about 35,000 by the end of 2003, but continued
unrest and insecurity in Iraq appear to have made that goal untenable, and some press
reports say that Defense Department officials estimate that over 100,000 U.S. troops
might still be in Iraq in the summer of 2004, and perhaps that many as late as 2006.
Other reports says the Administration wants to try to reduce U.S. forces to 100,000
by mid-2004 and to 50,000 by 2005.28
The Capture of Saddam Hussein. On December 13, 2003, U.S. forces
captured Saddam Hussein in the town of Ad Dur, nine miles south of his hometown,
Tikrit, in Iraq’s predominately Sunni tribal area north of Baghdad. Saddam, who had
been hiding in a tiny cellar on a farm with $750,000 and a pistol, surrendered to
soldiers of the Fourth Infantry Division without a fight. He is being held at an
undisclosed location where he is being interrogated for information on the location
of resistance leaders and members of his former regime. According to unnamed U.S.
officials, Saddam has provided some information that has led to the arrests of several
high-ranking ex-Iraqi officials. The Bush Administration has announced that it
intends to hand Hussein over to Iraqi officials to face an Iraqi-run tribunal and
charges of genocide and crimes against humanity.
In an address to the nation a day after Saddam Hussein’s arrest, President Bush
cautioned Americans that Saddam’s capture does not mean the end of violence in
Iraq. Saddam Hussein’s role in the Iraqi resistance movement is unclear. Some
analysts believe that Hussein made general provisions for guerrilla warfare prior to
the start of hostilities in March 2003 but had little direct influence over day-to-day
activities of guerilla cells. Many observers have questioned what kind of impact
Hussein’s arrest will have on the Iraqi resistance. Some speculate that Hussein’s
arrest will motivate more Iraqis to actively oppose the U.S. occupation since some
Iraqis oppose the U.S. occupation but did not want to associate themselves with
Saddam Hussein. Others note that Hussein’s arrest could weaken the motivation of
his former supporters to continue fighting. Finally, some analysts note that there are
several strands of Iraqi resistance, one directly under the control of Hussein
supporters and another, more decentralized movement, led by former Iraqi army
members and Islamic fundamentalists.
The Resistance. U.S. commanders in Iraq said in early October 2003 that the
sophistication and capabilities of the armed resistance to the U.S. governance of Iraq
is growing. Centcom commander John Abizaid had said on July 17, 2003, that the
United States faces a “classic guerrilla war” led by “mid-level Baath Party activists
organized regionally.” Some elements of the resistance appear to want to restore the
old regime, while others appear to be motivated by opposition to foreign rule or the
goal of forming an Islamic state. Other resistance fighters appear to be motivated by
the difficulty the U.S. and British authorities have had in restoring civilian services
or to avenge the accidental killing of Iraqi civilians during U.S. operations. On
average, there are about 20 attacks on U.S. forces per day, down from more than 40
per day prior to Saddam’s capture. Resistance attacks have killed about 250 U.S.
28 Ricks, Thomas. “Reduction in U.S. Troops Eyed for ‘04.” Washington Post, October 19,
2003.
CRS-30
military personnel since President Bush declared an end to “major combat
operations” in Iraq on May 1, 2003, and about 15 of those have come subsequent to
Saddam’s capture. The most lethal resistance attack was the November 2 shoot-
down of a U.S. Chinook helicopter, killing 15 American forces. Another incident,
the November 15 collision of two Blackhawks killing 17 American soldiers might
have been the result of one helicopter trying to avoid ground fire.
U.S. militaryoperations are focused on hunting down guerrilla resistance leaders
and their suspected Baathist financiers. U.S. forces have conducted at least six sweep
operations since mid-June 2003 to search for Baath and other oppositionists; these
operations were given the names Peninsula Strike (June 9-15); Desert Scorpion (June
15-August 1); Sidewinder (June 29-July7); Soda Mountain (July12-17); IvySerpent
(July 12 - early September); Ivy Focus (September 10 - ongoing); Ivy Cyclone and
Ivy Cyclone II (November 4-ongoing); Iron Hammer; and Iron Grip. Iron Hammer,
which was launched as response to growing resistance attacks, began on November
12; it has included air attacks on insurgent positions near Baghdad and nearby towns.
The Bush Administration says resistance comes not only from remnants of the
Baath Party but also from Arab volunteers, possibly linked to or supportive of Al
Qaeda, who have come to Iraq from other countries to fight the U.S. occupation.
U.S. military officials say they have arrested about 200 foreign fighters in recent
sweep operations, although several commanders have said the foreign fighters are not
a large factor in the resistance activity. Resistance attacks are more frequent in the
Sunni areas of central Iraq, where support for Saddam Hussein’s regime was
traditionally stronger than elsewhere, but there have been several deadly attacks in
the Shiite south.
Some U.S. military officials, including Gen. Abizaid,29 put the resistance
numbers at about 5,000, although they do not explain precisely how they arrive at
that figure. The resistance has operated in relatively small cells, although some U.S.
commanders believe that members of Saddam’s inner circle who are still at large
might be coordinating some resistance elements. Since November 2003, U.S.
commanders have said they believe the resistance is acquiring a more nationwide
structure. Some resistance factions have identified themselves as distinct groups,
scribbling warnings and faxing statements to the Arab satellite television network Al
Jazeera, UAE-based Al Arabiya TV, and other outlets. Suggesting a mix of
nationalist and Islamist factions, they are identifying themselves with names such as:
! Al Awda (the Return), believed to be one of the largest and most
active resistance group;
! Saddam’s Fedayeen, remnants of the paramilitaryforce that were the
most tenacious of Iraqi forces during the 2003 major combat;
! Saddam’s Jihad;
! the Movement of the Victorious Sect;
! Iraq’s Revolutionaries - Al Anbar’s Armed Brigades;
! The Popular Resistance for the Liberation of Iraq;
29 Press briefing by Gen. Abizaid, November 13, 2003.
CRS-31
! the Salafist Jihad Group (Salafi is a Sunni extremist Islamic
movement);
! Armed Islamic Movement for Al Qaeda - Falluja Branch. Actual
linkages to Al Qaeda, if any, are not known;
! Jaysh (Army) of Mohammad, said to be a highly active group;
! Black Banners Group;
! Nasirite Organization; and
! Armed Vanguard of the Second Mohammad Army. Claimed
responsibility for U.N. headquarters bombing and threatened attacks
on any Arab countries that participate in Iraq peacekeeping. The
credibility of the claim is not known.
The continuing resistance has complicated the U.S. mission. In addition to
targeting U.S. forces, resistance fighters have assassinated Iraqis who are
cooperating with the United States and attacked Iraqi oil export pipelines and water
and other infrastructure facilities, as well as symbols of the international presence,
including U.N. headquarters. By attacking these targets, the resistance appears to be
hoping to cause international relief workers and peacekeeping forces to leave Iraq,
slow reconstruction, and turn the Iraqi populace against the occupation.
An apparent suicide “terrorism” dimension to the resistance began to emerge in
August 2003 with car and truck bombings in Baghdad of the embassy of Jordan
(August 7) and U.N. headquarters at the Canal Hotel (August 19). The latter
bombing killed 23 persons including the U.N. representative in Iraq, Sergio Vieira
de Mello, and prompted some drawdown in U.N. and non-governmental organization
personnel in Iraq. The August 29, 2003, car bombing in Najaf that killed Mohammad
Baqr Al Hakim may have killed over 100 persons, according to news reports.
Smaller suicide bombings have occurred since at Iraqi police facilities, the U.N.
compound, and other sites. On October 25, 2003, the resistance rocketed the hotel
at which visiting deputy Defense Secretary Wolfowitz was staying; he was unhurt.
The next day, there were four suicide car bombings at various sites in Baghdad,
including the headquarters of the International Committee of the Red Cross. A
November 12 resistance suicide attack killed 17 Italian peacekeepers at their
headquarters in Nasiriyah.
On the other hand, the Administration maintains that the resistance is not
derailing the U.S. mission to bring about reconstruction and that the insurgency can
and will be defeated. Administration fact sheets and statements say that life is, for
the most part, returning to normal throughout Iraq. Electricity is nearly back to pre-
war levels (4,400 Megawatts, pre-war). A new currency has been introduced and has
begun circulation. Schools and hospitals have reopened throughout Iraq, and about
3 million Iraqi children have been vaccinated since Saddam fell. Administration
officials also say Iraqis are freer than at any time in the past 30 years, with a free
press and the ability to organize politically. Elections for some new local leaders, to
replace those appointed by U.S.-led forces in the immediate aftermath of the fall of
the regime, began in some towns, including Basra, in December 2003.
“Iraqification”/Building Security Institutions. An option for improving
security conditions that has been pursued by the Administration is to try to
increasingly transfer security responsibilities to Iraqi institutions. Some in the
CRS-32
Administration appear to prefer this option to alternatives, advocated by some in and
outside the Administration, that involve turning over greater responsibility to the
international community in exchange for donations of peacekeeping forces. This
initiative is an attempt to improve security in Iraq, generate better intelligence on
resistance factions, and free up U.S. forces for counter-insurgency missions. It is
hoped that these institutions could eventually take over the security function from the
United States. As of late December, about 130,000 Iraqis have been recruited to
these institutions, and the goal is to have about 220,000 Iraqis serving in these
institutions by 2004. However, there are concerns about the loyalty and dedication
of the new recruits, in the absence of Iraqi sovereignty and a clearly defined
governing structure. Some Iraqi forces have fought crime and the resistance and
helped put down protests, but others have sometimes abandoned their posts and
allowed their facilities to be attacked or fought poorly in defense. Some military
recruits have deserted, and some police have been absentees.
On November 21, 2003, the Bush Administration issued a determination
repealing a U.S. ban on arms exports to Iraq so that the United States can supply
weapons to the new Iraqi security institutions. Authority to repeal this ban was
requested and granted in an FY2003 emergency supplemental appropriations (P.L.
108-11) for the costs of the war. The provision (Section 1504) gives the President
the authority to export to Iraq non-lethal military equipment and to export military
equipment to a reconstituted or interim Iraqi military if the President determines that
doing so is in the national interest. (Section 1503 requires the President to submit
regular reports to Congress on any export licenses granted for the exportation of dual
use items to Iraq.)
A related issue is the apparent U.S. agreement in early December 2003 to a
proposal by the major Iraqi parties on the Governing Council to deploy their
individual militia fighters to help augment security.30 About 800 militiamen drawn
from the five major parties on the Governing Council (INA, INC, SCIRI, PUK, KDP)
are to work side by side with the new security institutions, particularly the Civil
Defense Corps.31 Manyof these party-based militiamen have substantial training and
knowledge of Iraqi society, skills that could benefit efforts to maintain security. The
potential risks of the plan are that the party-based militias would likely retain
loyalties to their party leaders, not necessarily to an Iraqi government. Another risk
is that there might be tensions among the various militias that might erupt into
internecine violence.
The following, based on a variety of press reports, are the pillars of the Iraqi
security institutions:
! New Army. The CPA formally disbanded the former Iraqi army
following Bremer’s arrival in Baghdad. Some criticized the move
as a factor that is now contributing to resistance activity, but others
30 Tyler, Patrick. “Iraqi Factions Seek to Take Over Security Duties.” New York Times,
September 20, 2003.
31 Chandrasekaran, Rajiv. “U.S. to Form Iraqi Paramilitary Force.” Washington Post,
December 3, 2003.
CRS-33
believe the move was necessary to ensure that Iraq moves toward
democracy. As part of U.S. efforts to build new Iraqi security
institutions, the CPA is in the process of training recruits for a
planned 40,000 person New Iraqi Army, about 10% the size of the
pre-war Iraqi force. The force is expected to be at or near full
strength by mid-2004, although some experts believe that this is too
rapid a pace to ensure proper training and ensure the loyalty of all
recruits. Recruits are paid $60 per month and receive nine weeks of
training. Former Defense Department official Walter Slocombe is
in charge of forming the new Iraqi army; according to him, many
soldiers of the former army are being recruited, but former members
who were at the top four ranks of the Baath Party are not eligible for
recruitment. The first 700 recruits were graduated in early October
2003, but nearly half deserted due to low pay, according to a recent
press report.32 Another 700 recruits graduated in earlyJanuary2004.
The Administration requested about $2 billion to train and equip the
new army in its FY2004 supplemental funding request; that level of
funding is provided bythe FY2004 supplemental appropriation (P.L.
108-106).
! Police. The CPA is also trying to turn policing functions over to
Iraqis. Overall, about 62,000 Iraqi policemen have returned to their
jobs, near the total goal of about 85,000. The police are undergoing
training in Hungary, and Jordan has begun training the first of what
will be 32,000 Iraqi police to train there. Police are paid $60 per
month, and must pass a background check ensuring they do not have
a record of human rights violations or criminal activity. The
Administration has requested about $1 billion to train and equip an
Iraqi police force in its FY2004 supplemental funding request; $950
million was appropriated in P.L. 108-106.
! The CPA has is also building a paramilitary “Civil Defense Corps,”
deployed in each of Iraq’s provinces, to assist in maintaining order
and combating insurgents. As of December 2003, about 8,500 have
been deployed; the goal is for a Corps of 40,000. Recruits are paid
$50 per month and cannot have served in Iraq’s former army at a
level of colonel or higher. Some units of the Corps began patrols on
their own, without direct U.S. assistance, in late December 2003.
! A separate “Facilities Protection Service” is being deployed to guard
installations such as oil pumping stations, electricitysubstations, and
government buildings. About 48,000 (near the goal) have been
deployed, but training is said to be minimal and some are unarmed.
The Administration has requested about $140 million to train and
equip the Civil Defense Corps and Facilities Protection Service in
the FY2004 supplemental funding request; that amount was
appropriated in P.L. 108-106.
32 Spolar, Christine. “Iraqi Soldiers Deserting Army.” Chicago Tribune, December 9, 2003.
CRS-34
! The CPA has thus far recruited 12,000 Iraqis into a customs and
border protection force. Members of this force receive a few weeks
of U.S. training.
Internationalization/U.N. Role.33 Some believe that enlisting greater
international participation in peacekeeping would be more effective than the rapid
recruitment of Iraqi security institutions, or other options such as increasing the
number of U.S. troops in Iraq. Very few commentators or U.S. politicians advocate
an immediate pullout of U.S. forces from Iraq on the grounds that doing so could
yield chaos in Iraq. At times over the past six months, it appeared that the
Administration had decided or was about to decide on a strategy of greater
international participation in post-Saddam security, although it appears the
Administration is still de-emphasizing this option.
Thus far, 29 countries (in addition to the United States and Britain) have
committed forces to help secure Iraq. The United Kingdom and Poland are leading
multinational divisions in southern Iraq and central Iraq, respectively. The UK-led
force numbers about 14,000, of which all but 2,000 are British forces. The Polish-led
force numbers about 9,200, of which 2,300 are Polish. About 30,000 non-U.S.
troops are or will soon be on the ground in Iraq (including 12,000 British).
Confirmed force pledges include those in Table 1, below. For a more thorough list,
which includes contributions of support or medical personnel, see CRS Report
RL32105.
After some earlier hesitation due to security concerns, Japan and South Korea,
are deploying forces to Iraq. In November, Japan formally approved a deployment
of nearly 1,000 troops in a non-combat role on December 10. South Korea is sending
3,000 troops to help patrol in and around the city of Kirkuk, in the north. On October
7, the Turkish parliament approved a government recommendation to send up to
10,000 peacekeeping forces, but the pledge drew criticism from Iraq’s Governing
Council that Turkey would likely use the deployment to meddle in Iraq’s internal
affairs. Turkey subsequently informed the United States that Iraqi opposition made
the deployment unworkable at this time.
Since the fall of Saddam Hussein, the Administration has sought U.N. backing
for its post-war efforts. Resolution 1483 (adopted unanimously) provided for a U.N.
special representative to coordinate the activities of U.N. personnel in Iraq and to
help establish a successor government. The SecretaryGeneral subsequently(May27,
2003) appointed de Mello (see above) for that post. The resolution also gave the
United Nations a monitoring role over the Development Fund for Iraq, the account
controlled by the CPA for reconstruction. The resolution did not authorize a return
to Iraq of U.N. weapons inspectors, although the resolution provided for deliberations
on that issue. Some International Atomic Energy Agency inspectors returned to Iraq
in June 2003 on a limited nuclear mission in Baghdad. On August 14, 2003, the U.N.
33 For additional information on international contributions to Iraq peacekeeping and
reconstruction, see CRS Report RL32105, Post-War Iraq: A Table and Chronology of
Foreign Contributions.
CRS-35
Security Council adopted a compromise resolution, Resolution 1500, that
“welcomed,” but did not “endorse,” the formation of the Governing Council, an
apparent nod to U.S. requests. The resolution also enhanced U.N. authority in Iraq
somewhat by establishing a “U.N. Assistance Mission for Iraq.” The resolution did
not formally authorize an international peacekeeping force for Iraq ; Resolution 1483
already “calls on” governments to contribute forces for stabilization) and did not
measurably dilute U.S. authority over post-war governance in Iraq.
These resolutions did not satisfythe requirements of several major nations, such
as France, that want to phase out the U.S.-led occupation in favor of a U.N.-led
governance process. The United States obtained agreement on Resolution 1511
(adopted unanimously on October 16, 2003) that authorized a “multinational force
under unified command.” However, the resolution did not meet the core demands
of France and did not attract new troop pledges from either France, Germany, Russia,
India, or Pakistan.
Some in the Bush Administration reportedly have not wanted to cede control
over post-war governance to the United Nations or other nations; they maintain that
doing so would confuse the post-war command structure and possibly lead to the
formation of a government in Iraq that is not committed to democracy and not
necessarily pro-U.S. The position of U.N. Secretary General Kofi Annan appears to
be close to that of France; he has cut U.N. staff in Iraq because of security concerns
and said the United Nations should play a larger role in Iraq’s transition to
sovereignty. On the other hand, suggesting that the Administration is revisiting its
former stance to keep U.N. involvement circumscribed, Secretary of State Powell
said in November 2003 that the United States might seek formal U.N. backing for the
November 15, 2003, transition governance plan (see above). The move reportedly
would also include giving the United Nations a major role in assisting the transition
and recognizing the sovereign transition government.
During negotiations on Resolution 1511, a number of different formulas were
discussed for broadening peacekeeping duties in Iraq. Deputy Secretary of State
Richard Armitage told journalists in late August 2003 that one idea under discussion
was for a multinational force, under U.N. leadership, that would be commanded by
a U.S. military official.34 Another possibility was for NATO to command a
multilateral force. The United States had some discussions with NATO on whether
the organization would take on Iraq as a fifth peacekeeping mission, and Defense
Secretary Rumsfeld said at a December 1, 2003, NATO meeting that the United
States would welcome more NATO involvement in Iraq. (NATO currently provides
some logistical support to the international forces in Iraq led by Poland.) On July 10,
2003, the Senate adopted an amendment, by a vote of 97-0, to a State Department
authorization bill (S. 925) calling on the Administration to formally ask NATO to
lead a peacekeeping force for Iraq. A related bill (H.R. 2112) was introduced in the
House on May 15, 2003. (For more information on this possibility, see CRS Report
RL32068, An Enhanced European Role in Iraq?)
34 Jehl, Douglas. “U.S. Now Signals It Might Consider U.N. Force in Iraq.” New York
Times, August 28, 2003.
CRS-36
Table 1. Multinational Division Force Pledges
Albania 70
Armenia 13
Australia 850
Azerbaijan 150
Bulgaria 500
Czech Republic 400
Denmark 380
Dominican Republic 300
Estonia 47
Georgia 70
Honduras 370
Hungary 300
Italy 3,000
Japan 1,000
Kazakhstan 27
Latvia 150
Lithuania 130
Macedonia 38
Mongolia 180
Netherlands 1,100
Nicaragua 230
Norway 150
Poland 2,300
Portugal 120
Romania 734
Singapore 192
Slovakia 85
South Korea 3,000
Spain 1,300
Thailand 443
Ukraine 1,650
Total (non-U.S., non-
U.K.) Pledged
19,279
CRS-37
Restarting Iraq’s Economy
One of the major functions of the CPA is to accomplish economic
reconstruction. By all accounts, restoring Iraq’s economy depends, in large part, on
rehabilitating Iraq’s energy infrastructure.35
The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction. As the driver of Iraq’s
economy, the rebuilding of the oil industry is receiving substantial U.S. attention. It
has been widely assumed that Iraq’s vast oil reserves, believed second only to those
of Saudi Arabia, would be used to fund much of the costs of reconstruction. Then
presidential spokesman Ari Fleischer said on February 18, 2003, referring to Iraq’s
oil reserves, that Iraq has “a variety of means ... to shoulder much of the burden for
[its] own reconstruction.” Many observers had been concerned that an Iraqi regime
on the verge of defeat could destroy its own oil fields, but coalition forces quickly
secured Iraq’s southern oil fields after combat began. Only about 9 oil wells were set
on fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that region, and all were put out quickly.
The northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul were not set afire.
In early May 2003, the U.S.-led coalition set up an advisory board, headed by
former Shell executive Phillip Carroll, to oversee the rebuilding of Iraq’s oil sector.
An Iraqi oil industry professional, Thamer Ghadhban, was named to serve as head
of the interim management team that has run Iraq’s oil ministry and reported to the
advisory board. The first exports began in late June 2003, but exports were running
at only about 800,000 barrels per day as of late September 2003 due to sabotage and
the slow pace of sector reconstruction. Iraq’s new “Oil Minister,” Ibrahim Bahr al-
Ulum, said Iraq was exporting over 1 million barrels per day as of early October, and
exports are said to be about 1.5 million barrels per day as of late November. Iraq’s
pre-war export rate was about 2.2 million barrels per day, a level that U.S. and Iraqi
officials say they hope to reach in the first quarter of 2004. The FY2004
supplemental appropriations request asked for $1.2 billion to repair Iraq’s oil
infrastructure, plus $900 million to import refined energy products that Iraq’s
infrastructure cannot currently produce until it is repaired. P.L. 108-106 provided the
requested amount for infrastructure, but only about $700 million for imports of
energy products.
A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which
foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s
vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will
seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other
countries.
CPA Budget. The CPA-produced budget for Iraq for calendar 2003, which
is based on the planned levels of oil exports, assumed that oil revenues would yield
about $3.5 billion through the end of 2003, and provide about half of the
35 For information on Iraq’s oil industry and its reconstruction, see CRS Report RS21626,
Iraq Oil: Reserves, Production, and Potential Revenues. For information on U.S. and other
funding for Iraq’s reconstruction, see CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in
Reconstruction Assistance.
CRS-38
approximately $6.6 billion budget for Iraq for the period. At inception, the DFI Iraq
contained about $7 billion when it was established in June 2003, consisting of
captured Iraqi assets, Iraqi assets abroad, the monies transferred from the oil-for-food
account, and U.S. funds available for reconstruction (FY2003 supplemental, P.L.
108-11, which appropriated about $2.5 billion for reconstruction).
In order to accelerate reconstruction, the DFI was deemed to require
international donations, such as those pledged at the October 23-24 donors’
conference in Madrid, additional U.S. appropriations, and funds remaining after the
U.N.-run “oil for food program” terminated on November 21, 2003 (see below). A
World Bank estimate, released in early October 2003, said Iraq reconstruction would
require about $56 billion during 2004-2007, including the $20 billion in U.S. funding
requested by the Administration in September 2003. At the Madrid donors
conference, donors pledged about $4 billion in grants and $9 billion in credits, in
addition to the $20 billion to be provided by the United States. (For additional
information on international pledges, see CRS Report RL32015, Post-War Iraq: A
Table and Chronology of Foreign Contributions.)
Supplemental Funding Needs.36 Partly because oil revenues have lagged
behind projections, in late August 2003 Bremer visited Washington to talk to other
Administration officials about the need to ask Congress for immediate supplemental
funds for reconstruction needs, which Bremer estimates will run into the “several
tens of billions” over the next year. On September 8, 2003, President Bush stated
that he would request supplemental funding for FY2004 for the “war on terrorism,”
in the amount of $87 billion, of which over $70 billion would be for military
operations in and reconstruction of Iraq. Of that amount, about $50 billion would be
for military costs and about $20 billion for reconstruction of Iraq.
The FY2004 supplemental appropriation (conf. report H.Rept. 108-337, P.L.
108-106) provided the following funds for Iraq reconstruction (total $18.7 billion):
! $3.243 billion for security and law enforcement, including the New
Iraqi Army. border enforcement and other security functions;
! $1.32 billion for justice and civil society and democracy
development, including programs for women and youth, and the
formation of an independent human rights commission,
! $5.56 billion for electricity infrastructure rehabilitation,
! $1.89 billion for rehabilitating the energy infrastructure,
! $4.332 billion to repair water and sewage systems;
! $500 million for repair of transportation and telecommunications
infrastructure,
! $370 million to upgrade housing, roads, and bridges,
! $800 million to construct and equip hospitals and clinics, and
36 For information on the status of legislative consideration of the request for supplemental
funding, see RL32090, FY2004 Supplemental Appropriations for Iraq, Afghanistan, and the
Global War on Terrorism: Military Operations & Reconstruction Assistance.
CRS-39
! $453 million for education, jobs training, and private sector
initiatives.
DFI Current Balance. As of December 3, 2003, and prior to transfers of
monies appropriated by the supplemental (P.L. 108-106), the Development Fund for
Iraq (DFI), set up by Resolution 1483, had a balance of $4.98 billion. (During
October and November, an additional $2 billion was transferred to the DFI from the
oil-for-food escrow account.)
In late October 2003, a multilateral board to monitor the DFI, mandated by
Resolution 1483, was established (the International Advisoryand Monitoring Board).
The DFI is held in the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, not Iraq’s Central Bank,
as outlined in Resolution 1483.
Termination of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have
been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program.
The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put
in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was
suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various
aspects of the program departed Iraq. (See CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food
Program, Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.)
On March 28, 2003, the U.N. SecurityCouncil unanimouslyadopted Resolution
1472 that restarted the program’s operations and empowered the United Nations, for
a 45-day period (until May 12), to take direct control of all aspects of the program.
Under the new resolution, the United Nations is setting priorities for and directing the
delivery of already contracted supplies. The enhanced U.N. authority was extended
on April 25, 2003, to last at least until the six-month phase of the program expired
on June 3, 2003.
On April 17, 2003, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions
against Iraq, signaling that the Administration wanted to focus on restoring normal
international commerce with Iraq rather than extending the oil-for-food program.
Resolution 1483 lifted sanctions and provided for the phasing out of the oil for food
program within six months after adoption of that resolution on May 22; the program
terminated on November 21, 2003. The resolution also provided for the United
Nations to transfer to the new DFI $1 billion in funds held by the oil-for-food
program escrow fund. As of the start of the war, the program’s escrow account had
about $11 billion to fund imports of humanitarian and other goods. Since then, the
program had set priorities for about $8.2 billion in contracts, leaving about $2 billion
in unallocated funds remaining, after subtracting the $1 billion already transferred to
the DFI in May 2003. In anticipation of the surplus funds as the program was about
to terminate, the oil-for-food program transferred $2 billion to the DFI in October
and November 2003.
Some press reports suggest that U.N. officials believed the program should
have been extended in order to facilitate an orderly phase-out of the program. The
United States and Britain opposed another extension and, as of its termination on
November 21, have taken over its functions. On November 24, 2003, the U.N.
SecurityCouncil adopted a resolution to continue its “Sanctions Committee” that has
CRS-40
monitored the U.N. economic embargo on Iraq since 1990, but to end, subject to later
review, that Committee’s mandate to monitor the U.N. embargo on arms sales to
Iraq. Part of the Committee’s economic sanctions mandate will include ensuring that
assets of the former regime remain frozen. (For more information, see CRS Report
RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, International Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.)
Debt Relief. The Administration is attempting to relieve Iraq’s debt burden
built up during the regime of Saddam Hussein. The debt is estimated to total about
$116 billion, not including reparations dating to the first Persian Gulf war. On
December 5, 2003, President Bush appointed former Secretary of State James Baker
as an envoy to try to persuade other governments to forgive Iraq’s debt. In visits
during December 2003 to countries in Europe and Asia, including France and
Germany, Baker obtained pledges for reduction of a “substantial” portion (widely
interpreted as about two thirds) of Iraq’s estimated $41.5 billion in debt to the “Paris
Club” nations. Of the Paris Club nations, the largest Iraq debt is held by Japan,
Russia, France, Germany, the United States, Italy, and Britain. Approximately $45
billion in Iraqi debt is to Middle Eastern and Persian Gulf countries, and $9 billion
is held by other major countries including China. The remainder of the debt is held
by private creditors. (For more information, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq:
Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.)
Searching for Former Regime Violations and Officials
Organs of the CPA and the U.S. government are attempting to uncover evidence
of gross human rights abuses and other violations of the regime of Saddam Hussein,
including evidence of WMD. A 1,500 person “Iraq Survey Group,” headed by a U.S.
military commander (Maj. Gen. Keith Dayton) but composed of many civilian
technical experts led by former U.N. weapons inspector David Kay, is attempting to
uncover alleged WMD. The Survey Group is also searching for mass graves of
victims of the former regime. In early October 2003, Kay released an interim report
on the Survey Group’s WMD investigation. The report said the Group had not found
actual weapons of mass destruction in Iraq, but it had found “dozens of WMD-related
program activities and significant amounts of equipment that Iraq concealed from the
United Nations during the inspections that began in late 2002.”37 The
Administration, according to press reports, has requested an additional $600 million
to fund the Survey Group for another six months, and about $300 million has been
spent on the search as of early October 2003.38 Kay reportedly has told
Administration officials he is leaving before the Survey Group’s work is completed,
possibly by February 2004; the resignation came amid reports that some Survey
Group staff has been diverted from the WMD search to gathering information on
Iraqi insurgents.
Thus far, the Survey Group has found over 500 mass graves, some with
hundreds of corpses. Most appear to contain bodies of Kurdish and Shiite opponents
37 Testimony of David Kay before the House and Senate Intelligence Committees, and the
Defense Subcommittee of the House Appropriations Committee. October 2, 2003.
38 “Politics Aside, Iraqi Weapons Report Raises Crucial Questions.” USA Today, October
8, 2003.
CRS-41
of the former regime, but some contain some of the bodies of about 600 Kuwaitis
missing from the first Gulf war. (WMD issues and the fate of the missing Kuwaitis
are discussed in CRS Issue Brief IB92117.)
An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is the future trial of
Saddam Hussein and his associates on charges of war crimes and crimes against
humanity. In the year prior to the war, the Administration was gathering data for a
potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those it had sought for trial
include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay (killed after discovery by and a
firefight with U.S. forces in Mosul on July 22, 2003); Ali Hassan al-Majid, for
alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (captured August 21, 2003); Muhammad
Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered in mid-April 2003); Taha Yasin Ramadan; first Vice
President and number three in the regime (captured August 19, 2003); Izzat Ibrahim,
Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council and formally number two
in the regime; Barzan al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother (captured in mid-April 2003);
Watban al-Tikriti (captured in April 2003) and Sabawi al-Tikriti, both other half
brothers of Saddam and former leaders of regime intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz,
deputy Prime Minister and foremost regime spokesman (surrendered in May 2003);
and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait during Iraq’s occupation of that country
(captured May 2003).
According to Iraqi political leaders, an Iraqi-run tribunal could begin
proceedings against former president Saddam Hussein on charges of genocide and
crimes against humanity in the spring of 2004. Possible charges against Hussein
include the use of chemical weapons against ethnic Kurds in 1988, the execution of
prominent Shiite Muslim clerics, and the killing of hundreds of Sunni Muslim
tribesmen after a coup attempt.
Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials
sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured
or surrendered. As of late September 2003, 43 of the Iraqis on the list of 55 are now
in custody or were killed. Others not on the list of 55 have been apprehended as
well: Amir al-Saadi, chief science adviser to Saddam; Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti, a
son-in-law of Saddam; Vice President Taha Muhi ad-Din Ma’ruf; and suspected
WMD manager Hoda Mahdi Salih al-Ammash.
The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and
the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29,
1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related
atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for
FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress
that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal
for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137
(passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March
13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October
31, 1998).
A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993,
after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the United States has supported
INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the
CRS-42
arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the
Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer,
said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established,
focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical
weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds)
and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which
an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against
Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes
against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations.
In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a
U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war
crimes is formed.
The FY2004 supplemental request contains a request for funding of a “Truth
and Reconciliation Commission,” and the establishment of a human rights
commission. The requests also asks for funding for further investigations into the
human rights abuses committed by the former regime, as well as some memorials to
the victims of those abuses. In the FY2004 supplemental request, about $25 million
is requested for these and related activities, such as women and youth civic education
programs.
Congressional Reactions
Congress, like the Administration, had divergent views on the mechanisms for
promoting regime change, although there was widespread agreement in Congress that
regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S. policy. There was substantial
disagreement over whether a major military offensive was the most desirable option
for achieving that objective. On December 20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75,
by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a
“mounting threat” to the United States. The resolution did not call for new U.S. steps
to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few Members called for the overthrow of
Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in support of the resolution.
In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq,
some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint
appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on
Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations
Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the
opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an
option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In
early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members — Senators John
McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and
Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr.
— wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for
operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter,
Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S.
assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish
areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and
CRS-43
other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to
accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.”
As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002,
Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result.
Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force
against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce
U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on
October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote
of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243).
The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. Prior to the war, it held
several hearings on the progress of post-war reconstruction. During the war and in
its aftermath, several Members applauded the performance of the U.S. military and
the overthrow of the regime. Some Members, however, have criticized the
Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war period in light of major
looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the regime. Criticism of post-war
planning has escalated as attacks on U.S. occupation forces have mounted, although
the Administration and others say U.S. casualties are relatively light and that the
resistance is not jeopardizing overall U.S. objectives for Iraq. Several Committees
are conducting inquiries into why substantial amounts of WMD have not been found
in Iraq to date. Some Members of both parties have also expressed concern about the
costs of the U.S. occupation, particularly in light of the Administration’s September
2003 request for an additional $87 billion in funding, and several Members have
called on the Administration to take greater steps to persuade other countries to share
the burden of peacekeeping in and reconstruction of Iraq. Others have called for an
increase in the number of U.S. troops in Iraq or re-evaluation of the mix of U.S.
forces to ensure that the skill set of the U.S. force matches the needs of
reconstruction. Some Members who have visited Iraq in recent months — and a
reported one third of Members have visited Iraq since the fall of Saddam — say
reconstruction is proceeding well and that Iraq is more stable than that portrayed in
the press.39
39 Chaddock, Gail Russell. “Trips to Iraq Reshape War Views On Hill.” Christian Science
Monitor, January 6, 2004.
CRS-44
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition
Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.)
to the Opposition
(Figures in millions of dollars)
INC War
Crimes Broadcasting
Unspecified
Opposition
Activities
Total
FY 1998
(P.L. 105-174)
2.0 5.0
(RFE/RL)
3.0 10.0
FY 1999
(P.L. 105-277)
3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0
FY 2000
(P.L. 106-113)
2.0 8.0 10.0
FY 2001
(P.L. 106-429)
12.0
(aid
distribution
inside Iraq)
2.0 6.0
(INC radio)
5.0 25.0
FY 2002
(P.L. 107-115)
25.0 25.0
Total,
FY1998-FY2002
15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0
FY2003
(no earmark)
3.1
(announced
April 2003)
6.9
(remaining
to be
allocated)
10.0
FY2004
(request)
0 0
Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq
Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97
million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent,
as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided,
the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and
FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be
used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N.
programs. ESF transfers to the INC for its operations continued until August 2003.
Another version (English): 25 November 2003 — RL31339_2003-11-25.pdf
Order Code RL31339
CRS Report for Congress
Received through the CRS Web
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-Saddam Governance
Updated November 25, 2003
Kenneth Katzman
Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs
Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division
Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-Saddam Governance
Summary
Operation Iraqi Freedom accomplished a long-standing objective, the overthrow
of Saddam Hussein, but replacing that regime with a stable, moderate, democratic
political structure has run into substantial difficulty. Past U.S. efforts to change the
regime failed because of limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the Iraqi
opposition, and the efficiency and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping security
services. Previous U.S. Administrations had ruled out major U.S. military action to
change Iraq’s regime, believing such action would be risky and not necessarily
justified by the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament.
In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized
Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to verifiably
abandon its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs and the potential for it
to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. In September 2002, the President told the U.N.
General Assemblythat unless Iraq fullydisarmed in cooperation with United Nations
weapons inspectors, the United States would lead a coalition to achieve that
disarmament militarily, making clear that this would include the ouster of Iraq’s
President Saddam Hussein’s regime. After a November 2002 - March 2003 round
of U.N. inspections in which Iraq’s cooperation was mixed, on March 19, 2003 the
United States launched Operation Iraqi Freedom to disarm Iraq and change its
regime. The regime fell on April 9, 2003.
In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change
through U.S.-led military action would yield benefits beyond disarmament and
reduction of support for terrorism; benefits such as liberation of the Iraqi people
from an oppressive regime and promotion of stability and democracy throughout the
Middle East. However, escalating resistance to the U.S.-led occupation has
contributed to Administration implementation of several options, including attempts
to recruit more foreign participation to post-war peacekeeping, building Iraqi
institutions that can maintain security, and, as of November 2003, accelerating
transfer of authorityto Iraqi political bodies. Formerlyexiled opposition groups form
the core of a U.S.-appointed 25-seat “governing council” as well as a 25-person
cabinet; these bodies are relatively representative of Iraq’s ethnic and political
factions, but they have not established themselves as effective institutions. Congress
has passed legislation (H.R. 3289, P.L. 108-106) that provides supplemental FY2004
funding for military costs and reconstruction in Iraq (and Afghanistan).
See also CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Reconstruction
Assistance, and CRS Report RL32090, FY2004 Supplemental Appropriations for
Iraq, Afghanistan, and the Global War on Terrorism: Military Operations &
Reconstruction Assistance. This report will be updated as warranted by major
developments.
Contents
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda/Zarqawi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Sadr Movement/Moqtada Al Sadr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
The First ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Monarchists/Sharif Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups . . . 14
Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
The Opposition Positions Itself Before War/Second ILA
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Post-Saddam Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Formation of the Major Party Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
The Governing Council and Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Debate Over Council Authority/November 2003 Transition Plan . . . . 26
Iraqi Resistance and U.S. Security Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
The Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
“Iraqification”/Building Security Institutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Internationalization/U.N. Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Restarting Iraq’s Economic Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Supplemental Funding Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Termination of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Searching for Former Regime Violations and Officials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Congressional Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-Saddam Governance
The United States sought to remove Iraq’s Saddam Hussein from power after
the 1991 Persian Gulf war, although achieving this goal was not declared policy until
1998. In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass
destruction (WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United
States would seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A
regime change policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338,
October 31, 1998). Bush Administration officials emphasized regime change as the
cornerstone of U.S. policy toward Iraq since shortly after the September 11, 2001,
attacks. Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003, and had
effectively removed Saddam Hussein from power by April 9, 2003.
The Bush Administration’s stated goal is to transform Iraq into a democracy
that could be a model for the rest of the region. Iraq has not had experience with a
democratic form of government, although parliamentary elections were held during
the period of British rule under a League of Nations mandate (1920-1932). Iraq,
which became independent in 1932, was governed by kings from the Hashemite
dynastyduring 1921-1958, although with substantial British direction and influence.1
Members of the Hashemite dynasty continue to rule in neighboring Jordan. Iraq’s
first Hashemite king was Faysal bin Hussein, son of Sharif Hussein of Mecca, who
led the Arab revolt against the Ottoman Empire. Faysal ruled Iraq as King Faysal I
and was succeeded by his son, Ghazi (1933-1939). Ghazi was succeeded by his son,
Faysal II, who ruled until the military coup of Abd al-Karim al-Qasim in 1958. He
was ousted in February 1963 by an alliance of the Baath Party and military officers.
One of the Baath Party’s allies in the February 1963 coup was Abd al-Salam al-
Arif. In November 1963, Arif purged the Baath, including Baathist Prime Minister
Ahmad Hasan al-Bakr, and instituted direct military rule. Arif was killed in a
helicopter crash in 1966 and was replaced by his elder brother, Abd al-Rahim al-Arif,
who ruled until the Baath Party coup of July 1968. Following the Baath seizure,
Ahmad Hasan al-Bakr, a military figure, returned to government as President of Iraq
and Saddam Hussein, a civilian, became the second most powerful leader as Vice
Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council. In that position, Saddam
developed and oversaw a system of overlapping security services to monitor loyalty
among the population and within Iraq’s institutions, including the military. On July
17, 1979, the aging al-Bakr resigned at Saddam’s urging, and Saddam became
President of Iraq.
1 See Eisenstadt, Michael and Eric Mathewson, eds. U.S. Policy in Post-Saddam Iraq:
Lessons From the British Experience. The Washington Institute for Near East Policy, 2003.
CRS-2
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam
Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an
operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George
H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end
of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and
Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope
of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions. The revolt in southern Iraq reached
the suburbs of Baghdad, but the Republican Guard forces, composed mainly of
regime loyalists, had survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from
battle prior to the U.S. ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid-
March 1991. Many Shiites blamed the United States for not supporting their uprising
and standing aside as the regime retaliated against those who participated in the
rebellion. Kurds, benefitting from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991,
drove Iraqi troops out of much of northern Iraq and subsequently remained free of
Baghdad’s rule.
According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite
uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding
stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup
against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that
purpose. The Administration apparently believed — and this view apparently was
shared by many experts and U.S. officials — that a coup by elements within the
current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq.
Manyobservers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and
Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and
tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria.
Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition
Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that
the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment
within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision
was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the
diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the
Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and
diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This
opposition coalition was seen as providing a vehicle for the United States to build a
viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert
support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.2
2 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2,
1992.
CRS-3
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi
The growing opposition coalition took shape in an organization called the Iraqi
National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two main
Kurdish militias, the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic Union of
Kurdistan (PUK), participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens of
opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came into the
coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq.
The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi
ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military
officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC
with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups
publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests,
including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the
preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. Security
Council resolutions on Iraq.3 However, many observers doubted its commitment to
democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and
because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies. The
INC’s first Executive Committee consisted of KDP leader Masud Barzani, ex-Baath
Party and military official Hassan Naqib, and moderate Shiite cleric Mohammad
Bahr al-Ulum. (Barzani and Bahr al-Ulum are now on the 25-member post-war
Governing Council and both are part of its nine member rotating presidency.)
Ahmad Chalabi. When the INC was formed, its Executive Committee
selected Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 59 years old, a secular Shiite Muslim from
a prominent banking family, to run the INC on a daily basis. Chalabi was educated
in the United States (Massachusetts Institute of Technology, MIT) as a
mathematician. He fled Iraq to Jordan in 1958, when the Hashemite monarchy was
overthrown in a military coup. This coup occurred 10 years before the Baath Party
took power in Iraq (July 1968). In 1978, he founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but
later ran afoul of Jordanian authorities on charges of embezzlement and he left
Jordan, possibly with some help from members of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989.
In 1992, he was convicted in absentia of embezzling $70 million from the bank and
sentenced to 22 years in prison. The Jordanian government subsequently repaid
depositors a total of $400 million. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government
was pressured by Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties
to the Jordanian government. In April 2003, senior Jordanian officials, including
King Abdullah, called Chalabi “divisive” and stopped just short of saying he would
be unacceptable to Jordan as leader of Iraq. Chalabi’s critics acknowledge that,
despite allegations about his methods, he was single-minded in his determination to
overthrow Saddam Hussein, and he is said to be favored by those Administration
officials, particularly in the Department of Defense, who most supported changing
Iraq’s regime by force.
3 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by
INC representatives, February 1993.
CRS-4
Since Chalabi returned to Iraq, there have been no large public demonstrations
supportive of him or the INC, indicating that he might not have a large following
inside Iraq. However, anecdotal press reporting suggest that he has attracted some
support from those Iraqis that most welcomed the U.S. military offensive against Iraq
and subsequent occupation. On April 6, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters (“Free
Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by the U.S. military from their base in the north to the
Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs in southern Iraq, later
deploying to Baghdad and other parts of Iraq. After establishing his headquarters in
Baghdad, Chalabi tried to build support by searching for fugitive members of the
former regime and arranging for U.S. military forces in Iraq to provide security or
other benefits to his potential supporters. However, the Free Iraqi Forces
accompanying Chalabi were disbanded following the U.S. decision in mid-May2003
to disarm independent militias.
Chalabi is part of a grouping of five leaders of major exile parties that held a
series of planning meetings shortly prior to the 2003 war. The major-party grouping
was hoping to become the core of a successor regime, and the major parties are
represented on the Governing Council. Chalabi is a member of the Governing
Council and one of the nine that will rotate its presidency. He was president of the
Council during the month of September 2003 and represented Iraq at the U.N.
General Assembly meetings that month.
A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book,
Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq, detailing alleged Iraqi regime human
rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracy for Iraq, including full
rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he taught Middle
Eastern politics at Brandeis University prior to returning to Iraq after the fall of
Saddam. In August 2003, Makiya was tapped by the Governing Council to head a
25-person committee that was to propose a process for drafting a new constitution
(see below).
On November 23, 2003, the Governing Council announced the appointment of
a pro-INC Iraqi-American woman, Rend Rahim Francke, as “Ambassador” to the
United States. Since the 1991 Gulf war, she headed an opposition group called the
Iraq Foundation, which has an office in Washington and received some U.S.
democratization funds since the early1990s. She will work out of Bahrain’s embassy
in Washington, at least temporarily.
The Kurds/KDP and PUK. The Kurds, among the most pro-U.S. of all the
groups in Iraq, do not have ambitions to play a major role in governing Arab Iraq, but
Iraq’s neighbors have always been fearful that the Kurds might still seek outright
independence. In committing to the concept of federalism, the INC platform
assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq. Turkey, which
has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly
fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into
a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy
since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War
I. In 1961, the KDP, then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP
leader Masud Barzani’s father, began an insurgency that has continued until today,
although interrupted by periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud
CRS-5
Barzani’s brother, Idris, commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the Iran-Iraq
war but was killed in that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from
the KDP in 1965; the PUK’s members are generally more well-educated, urbane, and
left-leaning than those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000-
60,000 fighters, some of which are trained in conventional military tactics.
In the aftermath of the 1991 Gulf war, the KDP and the PUK agreed in May
1992 to share power after parliamentary and executive elections. In May 1994,
tensions between them flared into clashes, and the KDP turned to Baghdad for
backing. In August 1996, Iraqi forces helped the KDP capture Irbil, seat of the
Kurdish regional government; Iraqi forces acted at the KDP’s invitation. With U.S.
mediation, the Kurdish parties agreed on October 23, 1996, to a cease-fire and the
establishment of a 400-man peace monitoring force composed mainly of Turkomens
(75% of the force). The United States funded the force with FY1997 funds of $3
million for peacekeeping (Section 451 of the Foreign Assistance Act), plus about
$4 million in DOD drawdowns for vehicles and communications gear (Section 552
of the FAA). Also set up was a peace supervisory group consisting of the United
States, Britain, Turkey, the PUK, the KDP, and Iraqi Turkomens.
A tenuous cease-fire held after November 1997, and the KDP and PUK leaders
signed an agreement in Washington in September 1998 to work toward resolving the
main outstanding issues (sharing of revenues and control over the Kurdish regional
government). Reconciliation efforts showed substantial progress in 2002 as the
Kurds perceived that the United States might act to overthrow the regime of Saddam
Hussein. On October 4, 2002, the two Kurdish factions jointly reconvened the
Kurdish regional parliament for the first time since their 1994 clashes. In June 2002,
the United States gave the Kurds $3.1 million in new assistance to further the
reconciliation process.
In post-Saddam Iraq, both Barzani and Talabani were part of the major-party
grouping that has now been incorporated into the Governing Council, and both are
part of the Council’s rotating presidency. Talabani was Council president during
November 2003.
Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda/Zarqawi. In the mid-1990s, the two main
Kurdish parties enjoyed good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the
Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaikh Ali Abd-al
Aziz. Based in Halabja, Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March
1988 chemical attack on that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998.
A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam
(Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam).
This Ansar faction was led by Mullah Krekar, an Islamist Kurd who reportedly had
once studied under Shaikh Abdullah al-Azzam, an Islamic theologian of Palestinian
origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama bin Laden. Ansar reportedly
associated itself with Al Qaeda and agreed to host in its northern Iraq enclave Al
Qaeda fighters, mostly of Arab origin, who had fled the U.S.-led war in Afghanistan
in 2001. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, during which its base was captured,
about 600 primarily Arab fighters lived in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, near the town
CRS-6
of Khurmal.4 Ansar fighters clashed with the PUK around Halabja in December
2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedly responsible for an assassination attempt
against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002. Possibly because his Ansar
movement was largely taken over by the Arab fighters from Afghanistan, Krekar left
northern Iraq for northern Europe. He was detained in Norway in August 2002 and
now lives there under varying degrees of official restriction.
The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials
to be Abu Musab al-Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in
Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the
December 1999 millennium celebration, the assassination in Jordan of U.S. diplomat
Lawrence Foley (2002), and to reported attempts in 2002 to spread the biological
agent ricin in London and possibly other places in Europe. In a presentation to the
U.N. Security Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied Zarqawi
and Ansar to Saddam Hussein’s regime, which might have viewed Ansar al-Islam as
a means of pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents. Although Zarqawi reportedly
received medical treatment in Baghdad in May 2002 after fleeing Afghanistan, many
experts believed Baghdad-Ansar links were tenuous or even non-existent; Baghdad
did not control northern Iraq even before Operation Iraqi Freedom.5 Zarqawi’s
current whereabouts are unknown, although some unconfirmed press reports indicate
he might have fled to Iran after the fall of the Ansar camp to U.S.-led forces. Some
recent press accounts say Iran might have him in custody.6 U.S. officials have said
since August 2003 that some Ansar fighters, possibly at the direction of Zarqawi,
might have remained in or re-entered Iraq and are participating in the resistance to
the U.S. occupation, possibly including organizing acts of terrorism such as recent
car/truck bombings (see below). One press report quotes U.S. intelligence as
assessing the number of Ansar fighters inside Iraq at 150.7 Ansar al-Islam is not
listed by the State Department as Foreign Terrorist Organization (FTO).
Shiite Islamist Organizations
Some U.S. officials and outside experts have had concerns about the potential
strength and ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups
in post-Saddam Iraq. Many perceive these factions as aligned with Iran. Others
believe that Iraq’s Shiite clerics consult with but do not answer to Iran and do not
seek to model a post-war Iraqi state after Iran’s Islamic republic. The United States
sought to work with some Shiite Islamist opposition factions during the 1990s but
had few if any contacts with others. Shiite Islamist factions hold at least five seats
on the Governing Council unveiled July 13, 2003.
4 Chivers, C.J. Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.”
New York Times, December 6, 2002.
5 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire,
March 18, 2002.
6 Finn, Peter and Susan Schmidt. Al Qaeda Plans a Front in Iraq. Washington Post,
September 7, 2003.
7 Schmitt, Eric. Cheney Theme of Qaeda Ties to Bombings in Iraq Is Questioned by Some
in Administration. New York Times, November 11, 2003.
CRS-7
SCIRI/Badr Corps. The most well known among these Shiite factions is the
Supreme Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member
of the INC in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC
banner. SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition
groups in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad
Baqr al-Hakim, died in a car bomb by unknown assailants in Najaf on August 29,
2003.
Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head
an Islamic Republic of Iraq, a vision that, if realized, might conflict with U.S. plans
to forge a democratic Iraq. Baqr Al Hakim and his family fled Iraq to Iran in 1980,
during a major crackdown on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam
feared that Iraqi Shiite Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution
in Iran in 1979, posed a major threat to his regime. Prior to the formation of SCIRI,
Hakim and his family were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party (see below).
Mohammed Baqr was the son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a
prominent Shiite leader in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini
when Khomeini was in exile in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. Baqr Al Hakim had
returned to Iraq on May 10, 2003, welcomed by crowds in Basra and Najaf.
Until August 2002, when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures
for meetings in Washington, D.C., SCIRI had publicly refused to work openly with
the United States or accept U.S. assistance, although it was part of the INC and did
have contacts with the United States prior to the 2003 war effort. Unlike some other
Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI has had good working relations with some Iraqi Sunni
Arab factions and most Kurdish parties.
In post-Saddam Iraq, SCIRI leaders have participated in U.S.-led efforts to
establish a post-war government and counseled their followers to tolerate, at least
temporarily, the U.S. occupation as a necessary vehicle for building an Iraq in which
Shiites are adequately represented. At the same time, SCIRI has called for the rapid
restoration of Iraqi sovereignty. After he returned to Iraq, Mohammed Baqr Al
Hakim had said he was for a democracy and would not seek to establish an Iranian-
style Islamic republic. Abd al-Aziz al Hakim met with other opposition leaders in
late April 2003 at a post-war governance planning session in Iraq, sponsored by U.S.
officials. Abd al-Aziz later helped constitute the major-party core of the Governing
Council, and he is part of the nine-person rotating Council presidency. (He will head
the Council during December 2003.) Nonetheless, U.S. officials are said to be
mistrustful of SCIRI’s goals and its ties to Iran.
In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about
10,000-15,000 fighters/activists organized into a “Badr Brigades” (named after a
major battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from
Iran into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. The Badr Brigades are
headed by Mohammed Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim, who returned
to Iraq on April 20, 2003, to pave the way for Mohammed Baqr’s return. Abd al-
Aziz has taken over the leadership of the movement in the wake of his elder
brother’s death on August 29. (Another Hakim brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan
in 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s security services.) Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim’s key
aide is Adel Abd-al Mahdi.
CRS-8
Iran’s Revolutionary Guard, which is politically aligned with Iran’s hard line
civilian officials, has been the key patron of the Badr Brigades, providing it with
weapons, funds, and other assistance; the Brigades fought alongside the Guard
against Iraqi forces during the Iran-Iraq war. However, many Iraqi Shiites view
SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr Corps operations in southern Iraq prior
to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark broad popular unrest against the Iraqi
regime. Some Badr fighters deployed inside northern Iraq on the eve of Operation
Iraqi Freedom, and the rest have since entered Iraq. Asserting that the United States
failed to create a secure environment that might have prevented the August 29, 2003,
bombing that killed Ayatollah Al Hakim, some Brigade fighters have deployed
throughout Najaf since the bombing.
A variety of press reports say that some other individual militias now providing
security in many towns in southern Iraq are linked to the Badr Brigades. One such
militia is derived from the fighters who challenged Saddam Hussein’s forces in the
marsh areas of southern Iraq, around the town of Amara, north of Basra. It goes by
the name Hizbollah (Party of God)-Amara, and it is headed by marsh guerrilla leader
Abdul Karim Muhammadawi, nicknamed “Prince of the Marshes” who was named
to the Governing Council. He is widely perceived as an ally of SCIRI and is
considered by observers to have substantial Shiite support north of Basra.
Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, Iraq’s oldest organized Shiite Islamist
grouping, continues to exist as a separate group, but many Da’wa activists appear to
be at least loosely allied with SCIRI. The party was founded in 1957 by a revered
Iraqi Shiite cleric, Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of
Ayatollah Khomeini. It was the most active Shiite opposition movement in the few
years following Iran’s Islamic revolution in February 1979; Da’wa activists
conducted guerrilla attacks against the Baathist regime and attempted assassinations
of senior Iraqi leaders, including Tariq Aziz. Baqr Al Sadr and his sister were hung
by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the unrest, and many other Da’wa activists were killed
or imprisoned. After the Iraqi crackdown, many surviving Da’wa leaders moved into
Iran; some subsequently joined SCIRI, but others rejected Iranian control of Iraq’s
Shiite opposition movement and continued to affiliate only with Da’wa.
In post-Saddam Iraq, Da’wa’s current leader, Ibrahim Jafari, and its leader in
Basra, Abd al Zahra Othman, are on the Governing Council, as is a former Da’wa
activist turned human rights activist, Muwaffaq Al-Ruba’i. Jafari is one of the nine
members of the Council that is rotating the presidency; he was first to hold that post -
August 2003.)
The Kuwaiti branch of the Da’wa Party allegedly was responsible for a May
1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks
on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The Hizballah organization in Lebanon
was founded by Lebanese clerics loyal to Ayatollah Baqr Al Sadr and the late
Ayatollah Khomeini, and there continue to be personal and ideological linkages
between Hizballah and the Da’wa Party. The Hizballah activists who held U.S.
hostages in that country during the 1980s often attempted to link release of the
Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party prisoners held by Kuwait for those
attacks in the 1980s. Some Iraqi Da’wa members look to Lebanon’s senior Shiite
cleric Mohammed Hossein Fadlallah, who was a student and protege of Ayatollah
CRS-9
Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, for spiritual guidance. These linkages could explain
reports that security personnel and other activists from Lebanese Hizballah have
entered Iraq since the fall of Saddam Hussein, although other explanations include
an effort by Iran to work through Lebanese Hizballah to build leverage in southern
Iraq.8
Sadr Movement/Moqtada Al Sadr.9 Members of the clan of the late
Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq.
The Sadr clan, based in Iraq during Saddam Hussein’s rule, was repressed and not
politically active during that time. The United States had no contact with this
grouping prior to the 2003 war and did not attempt to enlist it in any overthrow
efforts during 1991-2002. Although the Sadr clan has been closely identified with
the Da’wa Party (see above), it appears that members of the clan and their followers
currently are operating in post-war Iraq as a movement separate from Da’wa.
Another revered member of the clan, Mohammed Sadiq Al Sadr, and two of his sons,
were killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999. A surviving son of Mohammad
Sadiq, Moqtada Al Sadr, who is about 28 years old, has attempted to rally his
followers to attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite politics. He and his clan
apparently have a large following in the poorer Shiite neighborhoods of Baghdad,
which, after the fall of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr City,”
from the former name of “Saddam City.” However, Moqtada is viewed by many
Iraqi Shiites as a young radical who lacks religious and political weight. To
compensate for his lack of religious credentials, he has sought spiritual authority for
his actions from exiled Iraqi senior cleric, Ayatollah Kazem Haeri, who is living in
Qom, Iran. An alternate interpretation by some experts is that Haeri is acting at the
direction of Iran’s leadership to keep Moqtada Sadr under a measure of control.
Moqtada’s reputation was tarnished in early April 2003 when his supporters
allegedly killed Abd al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Abdol
Qasem Musavi-Khoi, shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al-
Majid Khoi headed the Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq
after U.S.-led forces took Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political
doctrines of Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran.
The Sadr grouping is not represented in the Governing Council. Moqtada has
used his Friday prayer sermons in Kufa (near Najaf) and other forums to denounce
the Council as a puppet of the U.S. occupation. In July 2003, Moqtada and his aides
began recruiting for an Islamic army, for now unarmed, that Sadr says must
challenge the U.S. occupation, although he has thus far stopped short of openly
calling for armed attacks on American forces. He is openly calling for a cleric-led
Islamic state similar to that of Iran. In August 2003, Shiites in Basra and in Baghdad
rioted against British and U.S. occupation forces over fuel shortages and perceived
slights, and there was speculation that Moqtada was helping fuel the riots. Several
days of anti-U.S. demonstrations by pro-Sadr Shiites broke out in Baghdad in early
8 Risen, James. Hezbollah, in Iraq, Refrains from Attacks on Americans. New York Times,
November 24, 2003.
9 See also, White, Jeffrey. To the Brink: Muqtada Al Sadr Challenges the United States.
Washington Institute for Near East Policy, Policywatch 794. October 17, 2003.
CRS-10
October 2003. One report says that Sunni Islamists, led by Shaikh Ahmad Qubaysi,
who returned in April 2003 from exile in the UAE, is assisting the Sadr faction in
opposing the occupation.10 If true, this could represent the emergence of a Sunni-
Shiite Islamist anti-occupation coalition.
Later in October 2003, and amid assessments that Moqtada’s popularity is low
and waning further, his supporters stepped up the challenge to the United States. He
named an alternate “government” for Iraq, and some of his followers formed armed
militias and attempted unsuccessfully to seize control of some mosques in Najaf.
Pro-Sadr militants also ambushed some U.S. forces. Press reports say U.S.
commanders are debating how to control Moqtada Al Sadr, with the option of
arresting him apparently under consideration. Possibly to head off any U.S. action
against him, Moqtada tempered some of his statements in October 2003. Another
possible explanation is that Moqtada might be trying to position his movement for
involvement in the transition regime that is to replace the Governing Council; his
involvement would probably require the acquiescence of U.S. authorities in Iraq.
Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah. The revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al-
Sistani, based in Najaf, was repressed during Saddam’s rule and is emerging as a
major potential force in post-Saddam Iraq. The United States had no contact with
Sistani when Saddam was in power and has had only limited contact with him since;
he reportedly refuses to meet with representatives of the U.S. occupation. He is the
most senior of the Shiite clerics that lead the Najaf-based “Hawza al-Ilmiya,” a major
grouping of seminaries and Shiite clerics, and numerous assessments say many Iraqi
Shiites follow him and respond to his pronouncements. Other senior clerics include
Ayatollah Mohammad Sa’id Al Hakim, uncle of the slain SCIRI leader Mohammad
Baqr, Ayatollah Mohammad Isaac Fayadh, and Ayatollah Bashir al-Najafi. The
Hawza, which is well funded through donations, is becoming an important source of
political authority in the Shiite regions of Iraq, hiring Iraqis to perform functions
performed by the former regime and issuing directives, often obeyed, to some Iraqi
civil servants. Sistani and the Hawza are generally allied with SCIRI in the intra-
Shiite power struggle, seeking to contain Moqtada Al Sadr, whom Sistani and SCIRI
both view as radical and impulsive.
Sistani, who is of Iranian ethnicity, is considered to be in the tradition of
Ayatollah Khoi in opposing a direct role for clerics in governmental affairs, and
Sistani and the Hawza have spoken against a direct role for the clerics in governing
post-war Iraq. However, in early July 2003, Sistani began to take a more active role
in Iraq’s post-war decision-making by issuing a statement that the drafters of a new
constitution should be elected, not appointed. That statement, according to some
Iraqi officials, caused a deadlock in the effort to develop a roadmap to the writing of
a constitution; Shiites on the Governing Council reportedly insisted that Sistani’s
directive be followed. Sistani has not himself commented on whether or not he
supports the November 15, 2003 agreement on a political transition (see below),
although several Shiite activists claim he supports it.
10 Shadid, Anthony. Iraqi Clerics Unite in Rare Alliance. Washington Post, August 17,
2003.
CRS-11
Islamic Amal. Another Shiite Islamist organization, the Islamic Amal
(Action) Organization, has traditionally been allied with SCIRI. In the early 1980s,
Islamic Amal was under the SCIRI umbrella but later broke with it. It is headed by
Mohammed Taqi Modarassi, a Shiite cleric, who returned to Iraq from exile in Iran
in April 2003, after Saddam Hussein’s regime fell. Islamic Amal, which has a
following among Shiite Islamists mainly in Karbala, conducted attacks against
Saddam Hussein’s regime in the 1980s. However, it does not appear to have a
following nearly as large as SCIRI or the other Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s
brother, Abd al-Hadi, headed the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, which
tried to stir up Shiite unrest against the Bahrain regime in the 1980s and 1990s.
Since returning to Iraq in April 2003, Mohammad Taqi has argued against violent
opposition to the U.S. occupation, saying that such a challenge would plunge Iraq
into civil warfare. On November 14, 2003, Modarassi criticized the United States
for not holding elections to any of the political bodies formed thus far.
Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups
The differences among the various anti-Saddam organizations led to the near
collapse of the U.S. regime change effort the mid-1990s. As noted above, in May
1994, the KDP and the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs
revenues levied at border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s
government based in Irbil. The infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC
offensive against Iraqi troops in March 1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at
the last minute. Although it was repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of
the less well-trained and poorly motivated Iraqi units facing the Kurds. Some INC
leaders point to the battle as an indication that the INC could have succeeded
militarily, without direct U.S. military help, had it been given additional resources
and training in the 1990s.
The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition in the
mid-1990s caused the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by
renewing ties to a non-INC group, Iraq National Accord (INA).11 The INA, originally
founded in 1990 with Saudi support, consisted of defectors from Iraq’s Baath Party,
military, and security services who were perceived as having ties to disgruntled
officials in those organizations. It is headed by Dr. Iyad Alawi, former president of
the Iraqi Student Union in Europe and a physician by training. He is a secular Shiite
Muslim, but most of the members of the INA are Sunni Muslims. The INA’s
prospects appeared to brighten in August 1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein
Kamil al-Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons of mass destruction programs —
defected to Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip on the military and security
services was weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate
from there. The INA was ultimately penetrated by Iraq’s intelligence services and,
in June 1996, Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by arresting or executing over 100
INA sympathizers in the military.
11 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret
War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997.
CRS-12
Baghdad’s offensive against the opposition accelerated with its August 1996
incursion into northern Iraq, at the invitation of the KDP. Iraq not only helped the
KDP capture Irbil from the PUK, but Saddam’s forces took advantage of their
presence in northern Iraq to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in
northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout the north. In
the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred
oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated
from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists,
mostly from the INC.
Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA was operating
throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt its presence in Iraq to some extent after
the June 1996 arrests. However, it does not appear to have a large following in Iraq.
Although it was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war, there
is a history of friction between the two groups. Chalabi and the INC have argued for
comprehensive purging of former Baathists from Iraq’s institutions, while the INA,
which has ex-Baathists in it, has argued for retaining some members of the former
regime in official positions. In post-Saddam Iraq, Alawi has also taken the lead in
pushing for the establishment of an internal security service for post-war Iraq,
dominated by the major exile factions. Alawi was part of the major-party grouping
that became the core of the Governing Council, and Alawi has been named a
member of that Council and one of its nine-member rotating presidency; he was
president in October 2003.
Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks
For the two years following the opposition’s 1996 setbacks, the Clinton
Administration had little contact with the opposition. In those two years, the INC,
INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations and their
ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998, then
Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations
subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations”
about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish.
Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections
during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam
Hussein, although virtually no one in Congress or outside was advocating a U.S.-led
military invasion to accomplish that goal. A formal congressional push for a regime
change policy began with an FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174,
signed May 1, 1998) that, among other provisions, earmarked $5 million in
Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free
Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio
service began broadcasting in October 1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million
was devoted to an overt program to coordinate and promote cohesion among the
various opposition factions, and to highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions.
The remaining $2 million was used to translate and publicize documented evidence
of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north,
placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes, and translated and analyzed by experts under
contract to the U.S. government. In subsequent years, Congress has appropriated
funding for the Iraqi opposition and for war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix.
CRS-13
Some of the war crimes funding has gone to the opposition-led INDICT
(International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War Criminals) organization for publicizing
Iraqi war crimes issues.
Iraq Liberation Act
A clear indication of congressional support for a more active U.S. overthrow
effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998: the Iraq Liberation Act
(ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998). The ILA gave the
President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles and services (and
authorized $2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be
designated by the Administration. The Act’s passage was widely interpreted as an
expression of congressional support for the concept of promoting an insurgency by
using U.S. air-power to expand opposition-controlled territory. This idea was
advocated by Chalabi and some U.S. experts, such as General Wayne Downing, who
subsequentlybecame a National Security Council official on counter-terrorism in the
first two years of the George W. Bush Administration. President Clinton signed the
legislation despite reported widespread doubts within the Clinton Administration
about the chances of success in promoting an opposition insurgency.
The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting
regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it
should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime
headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly
articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq. No
specific language in the Act provides for its termination after Saddam Hussein is
removed from power.
The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the
height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in
which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United
Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were
withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign
against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December
16-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq:
Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.)
The First ILA Designations. Further steps to promote regime change
followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, a career diplomat, Frank
Ricciardone, was named as a State Department’s “Coordinator for the Transition in
Iraq,” the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999, after consultations
with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13) that the major anti-
Saddam organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance under the
Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the Islamic
Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the pro-monarchist Movement for
Constitutional Monarchy (MCM). (Because of its possible role in contributing to the
formation of Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001,
although it was not formally taken off the ILA eligibility list.)
CRS-14
Monarchists/Sharif Ali. The Movement for Constitutional Monarchy is led
by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a relative of the Hashemite monarchs (he is a cousin of
King Faysal II, the last Iraqi monarch) that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I
until 1958. Sharif Ali, who is about 47 and was a banker in London, claims to be the
leading heir to the former Hashemite monarchy, although there are other claimants,
mostly based in Jordan. The MCM was considered a small movement that could not
contribute much to the pre-war overthrow effort, although it was part of the INC and
the United States had contacts with it. In the post-war period, Sharif Ali returned to
Iraq on June 10, 2003, to a small but apparently enthusiastic welcome. He did not
participate in the major-party grouping that negotiated with the U.S.-led occupation
authority on the formation of the Governing Council, and neither Sharif Ali nor any
of his followers was appointed to the Governing Council.
In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton
Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and
“non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999-2000, about 150
opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in
Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses providing civil affairs
training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers,
communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However,
the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficientlyorganized
to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This
restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the
effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United
States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The Hurlburt trainees
were not brought into Operation Iraqi Freedom or into the Free Iraqi Forces that
deployed to Iraq toward the end of the active combat phase of the war.
Continued Doubts About the Capabilities
of the Anti-Saddam Groups
During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end
the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of
Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed
disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the
opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an
indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical about the opposition’s
capabilities. The Clinton Administration maintained that the Iraqi opposition would
not succeed unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement and that direct U.S.
military action was not justified by the degree of threat posed by Iraq. Clinton
Administration officials added that supporting the opposition militarily could draw
the United States into long-term military involvement in Iraq. Others suggested the
Clinton Administration should focus instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq by
threatening major use of force, or by launching repeated air strikes, unless and until
Iraq re-admitted the U.N. weapons inspectors that left Iraq in December 1998.
As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a
provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed
November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the
CRS-15
Iraqi people,” of which at least $12 million was for the INC to distribute
humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million
was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million
could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive
assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC
distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000, the Clinton Administration
reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in
FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop a humanitarian aid
distribution plan and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However,
three days before it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to
Congress that noted that any INC effort to distribute humanitarian aid in areas of Iraq
under Baghdad’s control would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi
recipients of such aid, and to any relief distributors with which the INC would
contract.12
Bush Administration Policy
Bush Administration policy toward Iraq started out similar to that of the
previous administration, but changed dramatically after the September 11, 2001
terrorist attacks, even though no significant evidence linking Iraq to those attacks
came to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in
President Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he
characterized Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea.
Pre-September 11 Policy
Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic
elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus
within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow
strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq,
which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its
taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist
regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan: a modification of the U.N.
sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technology reached Iraq. His
plan offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N.
restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military
technology.13
The Administration believed that the “smart sanctions” proposal, by easing the
suffering of the Iraqi people, would cause Iraq’s neighbors and other countries to
cease unilateral violations of the sanctions regime. Powell, who had openly
expressed skepticism about the opposition’s prospects, barely raised the regime
12 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.”
January 17, 2001.
13 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food
Program, Sanctions, and U.S. Policy.
CRS-16
change issue during his trip or in his March 7, 2001, testimony before the House
International Relations Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.14 After
about a year of negotiations among the Security Council permanent members, the
major feature of the smart sanctions plan — new procedures that virtually eliminate
U.N. review of civilian exports to Iraq — was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N.
Security Council Resolution 1409).
Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime
change policy, many of the persistent questions about the wisdom and difficulty of
that strategy were debated early in the Bush Administration.15 Aside from restating
the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush Administration did little to promote that
outcome throughout most of its first year. During his confirmation hearings as
DeputySecretaryof Defense, a leading advocate of overthrowing Iraq’s regime, Paul
Wolfowitz, said that he did not yet see a “plausible plan” for changing the regime.
Like its predecessor, the Bush Administration initially declined to provide the
opposition with lethal aid, combat training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military
help. It eliminated the separate State Department position of “Coordinator for the
Transition in Iraq,” further casting doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy.
On February 2, 2001, the Bush Administration confirmed that, shortly after President
Bush took office, the Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control
(OFAC) granted the INC a license to proceed with information gathering inside Iraq
only, and not actual distribution of humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the
Administration amounted to a withholding of U.S. backing for the INC plan to
rebuild its presence inside Iraq.
Many in Congress, on the other hand, continued to support the INC as the
primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional
sentiment, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite
doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television
broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the
FY2001 ESF appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an
estimated additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.16
Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime
Bush Administration policy toward Iraq became notably more assertive after
the September 11, 2001, attacks, stressing regime change and asserting that
containment was failing or, at best, inadequate. Almost immediately after the U.S.-
led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in Afghanistan began in early October 2001,
speculation began building that the Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime
through direct use of military force as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism.
Some U.S. officials, reportedly led bydeputyDefense Secretary Wolfowitz, believed
14 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times,
March 2, 2001.
15 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh,
Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002.
16 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001.
CRS-17
that the United States needed to respond to the September 11, 2001 attacks by ending
anyor all regimes that support terrorist groups, including Iraq. (Iraq was a designated
state sponsor of terrorism during 1979-82, and was again designated after the 1990
invasion of Kuwait. Iraq remains on the list, despite the change of regime, although
it is expected it will be removed.) As noted above, in his January 29, 2002 State of
the Union message, President Bush named Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along
with North Korea and Iran. Vice President Cheney visited the Middle East in March
2002 reportedlyto consult regional countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq
militarily, although the countries visited reportedlyurged greater U.S. attention to the
Arab-Israeli dispute and opposed confrontation with Iraq.
The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for
confronting Iraq were (1) its purported refusal to end its WMD programs, and (2) its
ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of
conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. Most senior officials did not
specifically assert that Iraq was an imminent or immediate threat to U.S. security, but
they did assert that Iraq was a “grave and gathering” threat that was best blunted
before the threat became imminent. U.S. officials said the September 11, 2001,
attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to gather before
acting but must instead act preemptively or preventively. The Administration added
that regime change would have the further benefit of liberating the Iraqi people and
promoting stability in the Middle East, possibly facilitating a resolution to the Arab-
Israeli dispute.
Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s
regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax
mailings, senior U.S. officials said in the runup to the war that there was evidence
of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. (On September 19, 2003, President Bush, in response
to a journalist’s question, said there is no evidence linking Saddam Hussein’s regime
to the September 11 attacks but there is evidence linking that regime to Al Qaeda.)
Secretary of State Powell, as noted above, cited intelligence information that Ansar
al-Islam and its leader, Abu Musab al-Zarqawi, had links to Saddam Hussein’s
regime.17 (See section above on Ansar al-Islam for more information on that
organization and its reputed links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.) Other senior
officials cited intelligence information that Iraq provided advice and training to Al
Qaeda in the manufacture and use of chemical weapons, although Administration
information appears to date to the early 1990s when Iraq, largely isolated after the
first Gulf war, was politically close to Sudan. Al Qaeda founder Osama Bin Laden
was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996). The Bush Administration did not
extensively cite reports that Czech intelligence believed that Iraqi intelligence had
met with lead September 11 hijacker Mohammad Atta in Prague in spring 2001,
suggesting official skepticism of those reports. Some outside commentators
believed that those reports indicated a direct Iraqi connection to the September 11
attacks. A Defense Department memo to the Senate, excerpted in the Weekly
Standard (November 24, 2003, issue), purports to contain intelligence information
17 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002.
CRS-18
that the Administration believes demonstrates a long-standing relationship between
Iraq and Al Qaeda.18
Some outside observers express skepticism about Saddam-Al Qaeda
connections because of the ideological differences between Saddam Hussein’s
secular regime and Al Qaeda’s Islamist character. Others noted that bin Laden
sought to raise an Islamic army to fight Saddam’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990,
arguing against the need for U.S. troops, and that he was more an enemy of Saddam
Hussein than an ally. Those differences were evident in a February 12, 2003, bin
Laden statement referring to Saddam Hussein’s regime as socialist and infidel,
although the statement exhorted Iraq to resist impending U.S. military action. In the
Administration view, the two shared similar anti-U.S. goals, which outweighed
ideological differences and propelled them into tactical or strategic cooperation.
WMD Threat Perception. Senior U.S. officials asserted the following about
Iraq’s WMD:
! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years
since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply
with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8,
2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs.
! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and
against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not
necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States
or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against
adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of
destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of
massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the
1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings of
retaliation and did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war.
! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who
could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths
in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of this view cited
presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in October 2002,
portions of which were released publicly, stating the CIA view that
Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to terrorists if the United States
were to attack Iraq. At that point, according to that argument,
Saddam Hussein would be left with little incentive not to cooperate
with terrorist groups capable of striking at U.S. interests.
18 Hayes, Steven. “Case Closed” [http://weeklystandard.com/Content/Public/Articles].
CRS-19
Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam
As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action against Iraq, the
Bush Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its
capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002,
President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special
operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and
Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups — the INC, the
INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM — to Washington for meetings with
senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were
held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S.
government, which reportedly tended to favor different opposition groups.
Numerous press reports indicated that the Defense Department and office of Vice
President Cheney believed the INC might be able to lead a post-Saddam regime,
while the State Department believed the INC had little popularity inside Iraq.
In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August
15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in FY2001 ESF to the
Iraqi National Congress (INC), funds that had been held up due to differences
between the State Department and the INC over what activities would be funded.
Under the agreement, the State Department-provided $8 million was to be used to
fund the INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its offices in Washington,
London, Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate its Al Mutamar
newspaper and Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund the information
gathering portion of the INC’s activities (about $4 million); the State Department had
refused to fund those activities, which were to be conducted inside Iraq, because of
strains between the INC and other opposition groups and questions about INC use of
U.S. funds.
In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and
to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic-
based groups. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had
increasing contact during this period include the following:
! Iraqi National Movement. It formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the
INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib
(who was part of an early leadership body of the INC); and Hatim
Mukhlis, who claimed support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan.
! Iraqi National Front. Another grouping of ex-military officers,
founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite
Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and
participated in the post-1991 Gulf war anti-Saddam uprisings.
! Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement. Established in 1996 by
ex-military officer Najib al-Salhi, this group was close to the INC.
Salhi, who defected in 1995, served in the Republican Guard.
! Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was
established in August 2002, headed by Wafiq al-Samarra’i, a former
CRS-20
head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of staff of Iraq’s
military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was based in Denmark
since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member. Khazraji was
placed under travel restrictions by Danish officials in late November
2002 after saying he wanted to leave Denmark. He is under
investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of chemical
weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities said on
March 17, 2003, that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his home
there,19 although his current whereabouts are unknown.
! Iraqi Turkmen Front. A small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping,
generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq.
Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq.
! The Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another
Shiite Islamic Party, but it is considered substantially less pro-
Iranian than SCIRI or the Da’wa Party. It is headed by Jamil Wakil,
a follower of Ayatollah Shirazi, an Iranian cleric who was the
spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation
of Bahrain (IFLB, see above under Islamic Amal).
! The Assyrian Democratic Movement, an ethnic-based movement
headed by Secretary-General Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s
Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq. There is a
strong diaspora presence in the United States as well. After building
ties to this group over the past year, the Bush Administration
formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement
into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002.
(Kanna is on the Governing Council.)
The Opposition Positions Itself Before War/Second ILA
Designations. The Bush Administration applauded efforts during 2001 and 2002
by the ex-military led groups to coordinate with each other and with the INC and
other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London and jointly run with the
INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers. However, since the regime vacated
Baghdad on April 9, 2003, virtually none of the ex-military groups or figures listed
above, with the possible exception of Tawfiq al-Yasseri, has become prominent
politically.
As a decision whether to launch military action approached, President Bush
issued a determination (December 9, 2002) to draw down the remaining $92 million
authorized for defense articles and services under the Iraq Liberation Act for the
INA, the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi
opposition groups designated by me under the Act before or after this
determination.” That same day, the Bush Administration made six of the ex-military
led factions discussed above (except the Higher Council for National Salvation)
eligible to receive draw downs under the ILA. The announcement appeared to be
19 ‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper. Agence France Press, April 7, 2003.
CRS-21
part of reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists in tasks that could assist U.S.
forces, possibly including combat units.20 An initial group of 3,000 was selected, but
only about 70 oppositionists completed training at an air base (Taszar) in Hungary,
according to press reports.21 These oppositionists served with U.S. forces in
Operation Iraqi Freedom as translators and mediators between U.S. forces and local
leaders, and most did not stay in Iraq, according to observers.
As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began
planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002,
with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in
London. The conference was organized by the same six exile groups whose leaders
visited Washington in August 2002, but included other groups as well, and they
discussed whether the opposition should declare a provisional government. The
Administration opposed that step on the grounds that doing so would give the
impression that the United States was backing the exile groups in their efforts to
dominate post-war Iraq politically. The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65-
member follow-up committee, which some criticized as weighted heavily toward
Shiite Islamist groups such as SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24-
27, 2003, in northern Iraq, and formed, against the urging of U.S. representatives at
the meeting, a six-seat committee to prepare for a transition regime. The six-person
committee included PUK leader Talabani, KDP leader Barzani, SCIRI leader
Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign
minister Adnan Pachachi. (A member from each of these groups is on the
Governing Council, as is Pachachi.)
Adnan Pachachi, who is about 80, served as foreign minister and ambassador
to the United Nations during the 1960s, under the military governments of Abd al-
Salam and then Abd al-Rahman Arif (“the Arif brothers”). Pachachi lived in exile
in the UAE during Saddam Hussein’s rule, and heads a small party called the “Iraqi
Independent Democrats.”
Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the
new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete
disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if that country wanted to avert military
action. In a probable effort to garner international support for any U.S.-led war effort
against Iraq, the Administration had downplayed the goal of regime change in
President Bush’s September 12, 2002, speech before the United Nations General
Assembly, stressing instead the need to enforce U.N. resolutions that required Iraqi
disarmament. However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change
goal after February 2003 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course.
The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March 2003
breakdown of U.N. diplomacy over whether the U.N. Security Council should
authorize war against Iraq for failing to comply with Resolution 1441. The
20 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.”
Washington Post, October 19, 2002.
21 Williams, Daniel. “U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles.” Washington Post, December
18, 2002.
CRS-22
diplomatic breakdown followed several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by
the director of the U.N. inspection body UNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification,
and Inspection Commission) Hans Blix and the director of the International Atomic
Energy Agency (IAEA), Mohammad al-Baradei, most recently on March 7, 2003.
The briefings, based on WMD inspections that resumed November 27, 2002, under
Resolution 1441, were generally critical of Iraq for failing to pro-actively cooperate
to clear up outstanding questions about Iraq’s WMD program. However, the latter
two briefings (February 24 and March 7, 2003) noted progress in clearing up
outstanding WMD questions. The Blix/Baradei briefings said Iraq had not accounted
for its past WMD, but the two did not state that they were certain that Iraq had
retained WMD, or that they had uncovered any banned WMD. Iraq declared short
range ballistic missiles that were determined by Blix to be of prohibited ranges, and
Blix ordered Iraq to destroy them. Iraq began the destruction prior to the launching
of the U.S.-led war. (For more detail on the final round of inspections and evidence
of WMD programs found in the post-war period, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117: Iraq:
Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.)
Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and
Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that
inspections should be given more time. They noted that Iraq was well contained by
sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones. Those who agreed with this
view maintained that, as long as Iraq allowed access to U.N. weapons inspections
under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national
security. The inspectors reported few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700
inspections of about 400 different sites. Others experts believed that, even if Iraq
were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could have been deterred by U.S.
overall strategic superiority, presumably including the U.S. nuclear arsenal.
The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq
had not fundamentally decided to disarm. The Administration asserted on March 17,
2003, that diplomatic options to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full
attention to military action. That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and
his sons, Uday and Qusay, an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war.
They refused the ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March
19, 2003.
In the war, Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and
British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the Iraqi military, at times, put
up stiff resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi military commanders
or Baathist political figures came forward to try to establish a post-Saddam
government, but senior regime leaders fled Baghdad, and the whereabouts of some
of the top leadership, including Saddam Hussein, are unknown. No WMD was used,
although Iraq did fire some ballistic missiles into Kuwait. It is not clear whether
those missiles were of ranges prohibited bythe United Nations (greater than 150 km).
CRS-23
Post-Saddam Governance Issues
Since Saddam Hussein’s regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, there has
been increasing debate about the effectiveness of U.S. policy toward Iraq. The
outcome of the debate might depend on such factors as the pace and costs of
reconstruction; the degree of future resistance to the U.S.-led occupation; the amount
of WMD ultimately found, if any; and whether a new government is stable and
democratic. The same U.S. concerns about fragmentation of and instability in Iraq
that existed in prior years are present in the current debate over how to establish a
post-war regime. Although some Iraqi civilians welcomed U.S. and British troops,
other Iraqis now want U.S. and British forces to leave Iraq. Some experts believe
that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall under the control of pro-Iranian Shiite Islamist
forces who are asserting growing control over areas inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites.
Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s population but have been under-represented
in every Iraqi government since modern Iraq’s formation in 1920. (For further
information on economic reconstruction and its funding, see CRS Report RL31833,
Iraq: Recent Developments in Reconstruction Assistance.)
The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA). After the fall of the regime,
the United States set up an occupation structure. The Bush Administration initially
tasked Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) to direct civilian reconstruction, working through
a staff of U.S. diplomats and other U.S. government personnel who served as
advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various ministries. He headed the Office of
Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance (ORHA), within the Department of
Defense, created by a January 20, 2003 executive order. After spending the combat
phase of the war in neighboring Kuwait, Garner and some of his staff of about 200
deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003, to begin work.
Press reports said that senior U.S. officials were dissatisfied with the slow pace
of reconstruction under Garner, and on May 6, 2003, the Administration appointed
former ambassador L. Paul Bremer to lead the overall reconstruction effort, with a
focus on political reconstruction. He arrived on May 12, 2003, to head the CPA,
which subsumed ORHA. The appointment represented an apparent adjustment from
the original structure of the U.S. reconstruction effort, although the Administration
stated that it was always envisioned that a civilian would eventually take over the
U.S. effort and denied it was an indication of high-level dissatisfaction with the
effort. U.S. officials now refer to the CPA as an occupying authority legitimized by
U.N. Security Council Resolution 1483 of May 22, 2003. Among other provisions,
Resolution 1483 lifted U.N. sanctions on Iraq.
Another alteration of the U.S. post-war structure was made public in early
October 2003; the White House announced that an “Iraq Stabilization Group” under
the direction of National Security Adviser Condoleezza Rice would coordinate
interagency support to the CPA in Iraq. The move was widely viewed as a
diminution in Defense Department control over post-war governance and
reconstruction.
CRS-24
Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule
The Administration says that U.S. forces will stay in Iraq until there is a stable,
democratic successor regime that is at peace with its neighbors. However, there has
been some debate between U.S. authorities and key anti-Saddam groups over the
pace and the means to move Iraq to self-government. This debate has taken on new
urgencysince resistance attacks on U.S. forces and international organizations in Iraq
have escalated since September 2003.
Shortly after the regime fell, the United States began a process of establishing
a successor regime. Senior U.S. officials, including deputy Defense Secretary Paul
Wolfowitz, said in early April 2003 that they hoped to have a successor regime in
place within six months of the fall of the regime. The Administration organized an
meeting in Nasiriyah (April 15, 2003) of about 100 Iraqis of varying ideologies,
present by U.S. invitation. Many of the attendees were representatives of Iraqi tribal
groupings that had not been politically active before. SCIRI, along with several
Shiite clerics, boycotted and called for an Islamic state. A follow-up meeting of
about 250 delegates was held in Baghdad on April 26, ending in agreement to hold
a broader meeting, within a month, to name an interim Iraqi administration.
However, in mid-May 2003, U.S. officials, apparently fearing that existing major
groups could not form a stable regime, or that Shiite Islamists would dominate a
successor authority, cut this process off and abandoned any public deadlines for
transferring sovereignty to an Iraqi government.
Formation of the Major Party Grouping. In parallel with the April 26
meeting, the five most prominent exiled opposition groups met, with U.S. envoys
present: SCIRI, the INC, the INA, the PUK, and the KDP. On May 9, 2003, the five
major parties agreed to expand their grouping to seven, adding to their ranks the little
known Nasir al-Chadirchy, head of a party called the National Democratic Party of
Iraq, as well as the Da’wa Party (see above). The major-party grouping criticized
the U.S. decision in May 2003 to delay the formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority
and to instead form an advisory body of 25 to 30 Iraqis.
With U.S. casualties in Iraq mounting and a growing sense of resentment among
the Iraqi population, the U.S.-led occupation authority (Coalition Provisional
Authority, CPA) began tilting back toward the views of the major Iraqi exile parties.
U.S. administrator for Iraq Paul Bremer (see below) said on June 23, 2003, that the
planned 25- to 30-member body would have “real authority” from its first days and
would not be purelyadvisory. He said it would nominate ministryheads, recommend
policies, and convene a “constitutional conference” to draft a new constitution,22
although it would not assume sovereignty.
The Governing Council and Cabinet. On July 13, 2003, a Governing
Council was unveiled to the Iraqi public, appointed by the U.S.-led CPA but
reflecting the influence of the major-party grouping, as well as prominent Iraqis who
were never in exile and were not affiliated with the exiled opposition. Prior to the
22 Transcript: Bremer Reviews Progress, Plans for Iraq Reconstruction. Washington File,
June 23, 2003.
CRS-25
assassination on September 20, 2003, of Council member Akila al-Hashimi (a Shiite
woman and former foreign ministry official) the Council had 25 members, of which
3 were women and 13 were Shiite Muslims. Of the 12 Shiite Muslims still on the
Council, one seat is held by SCIRI directly (Abd al-Aziz Al Hakim, younger brother
of Mohammad Baqr), one is held by a guerrilla affiliated with SCIRI (Abdul Karim
al-Muhammadawi), two are Da’wa Party (Ibrahim al-Jafari and Abdul Zahra
Othman) leaders, and considered allies of SCIRI, and one is a former Da’wa activist
(Muwaffaq al-Ruba’i). Also on the Council is a moderate Shiite cleric, Mohammad
Bahr al-Ulum, who is not affiliated with SCIRI or Da’wa. He headed the Ahl al-Bayt
charity center in London since the 1980s. The remaining Shiite Muslims, such as
Chalabi and Iyad al-Alawi, are secular. One Sunni Muslim Islamist was appointed
— Muhsin Abdul Hamid — who heads the Iraqi Islamic Party; he does not have a
clear relationship with the Shiite Islamists on the Council.
The Council includes five Kurds, including the two main Kurdish leaders Jalal
Talabani and Masud Barzani. The Kurds are generally considered the most pro-U.S.
of all Iraqi factions and are generally reluctant to openly criticize the CPA.
Although not a cohesive bloc, the Council includes exiles and non-exiles who
generally want a liberal democracy and could be considered generally pro-U.S. Most
prominent among them is Chalabi, but this grouping includes National Democratic
Party leader Nasir al-Chadirchy and Adnan Pachachi, both of whom are Sunni
Muslims. Others most likely to affiliate with this bloc include Sunni businessman
Samir Shakir al-Sumaidy; Sunni civil engineer Ghazi al-Yawar, who is president of
Saudi-based Hicap Technology; the Shiite coordinator for the Human Rights
Association of Babel, Ahmad al-Barak; and the two other women Council members,
Songul Chapouk, a member of the Turkomen minority, who heads the Iraqi Women’s
Association, and Raja al-Khuza’i, a Shiite who heads the maternity hospital in
Diwaniyah.
A member of the Assyrian Christian community is on the Council. Yonadam
Kanna, the secretary-general of the Democratic Assyrian Movement, is on the body.
It is not known what other members of the Council, if any, he might be aligned with,
although it is reasonable to believe that he might have an affinity for fellow residents
of northern Iraq, the Kurds. Also unclear is whether or not Hamid al-Musa, the
Shiite head of the Iraqi Communist Party, is allied with anyone else on the Council.
The major factions not directly represented on the Council are varied. They
include the Sadr movement; the Hawza of Ayatollah Sistani; the Baath Party or other
Sunni elements of the former regime; and the Movement for Constitutional
Monarchy. Some key tribes do not have members on the Council either. In some of
the above cases, the CPA did not want to include a particular faction; in other cases,
a faction might not have wanted to be associated with the occupation.
In late July 2003, the Council decided that nine Council members will rotate as
chairpersons, each for one month. Those who rotate that post are Ibrahim Jafari
(Da’wa Party), Chalabi, Alawi of the INA, Talabani (PUK), Hakim (SCIRI),
Pachachi, Barzani (KDP), Bahr al-Ulum, and Abdul Hamid, the Sunni Islamist.
CRS-26
Among its first actions, the Council authorized the establishment of an Iraqi
war crimes tribunal for Saddam and associates accused of major human rights abuses.
It empowered a three-member delegation to seek formal U.N. recognition; Chalabi,
Pachachi, and Akila Hashimi, traveled to the United Nations in July 2003 and
received a supportive statement from Secretary General Kofi Annan. No decision
on seating the Governing Council at the United Nations was announced. The
Council helped develop a plan, announced September 21, 2003, to open Iraq’s
economy to foreign investment and many of its companies to foreign ownership.
Cabinet. The Council also completed work on a governmental structure. On
September 3, 2003, a 25-member cabinet was sworn in. Its composition has roughly
the same factional and ethnic balance of the Council itself. Two “ministers” —
Ibrahim Bahr al-Ulum (oil ministry) and Ali al-Alawi (trade ministry) — are close
relatives of Council members. Another, “foreign minister” Hoshyar Zibari, is a
longtime close aide to KDP chief Masud Barzani. Zibari served during most of the
1990s as KDP representative in Washington. Longtime PUK activist Abdul-Latif
Rashid is the “minister” of water resources. No “defense minister” was named,
because U.S.-led military forces are responsible for defense.
The “interior minister” is Nuri Badran, an INA activist. Badran is attempting
to build on the INA’s contacts among ex-Baathists and ex-military people to develop
a new domestic intelligence and national police network,23 although recruitment of
such categories of Iraqis has raised suspicions of other Governing Council members,
such as Ahmad Chalabi. Chalabi has been the most vocal of all major post-Saddam
figures in calling for the complete dismissal and isolation of all those with ties to the
former regime.
Debate Over Council Authority/November 2003 Transition Plan.
Press reports began to appear in late August 2003 said that U.S. authorities were
dissatisfied at the relatively low level of activity of the Governing Council, and were
pressing it to take a more prominent and public role in post-war political decision-
making. Several Council members said that the Council could not do so unless and
until the U.S.-led coalition begins transferring greater authority to it.24 Friction also
emerged in October 2003 over a time-frame for a return to Iraqi sovereignty; the
major exile parties on the Council want an early restoration of Iraqi sovereignty.
Other tensions emerged over U.S. acceptance of Turkey’s offer to send peacekeeping
troops to Iraq; most Iraqi resent Turkey as the successor of the Ottoman Empire that
ruled Iraq for the 400 years prior to World War I.
Differences also appeared over the Council’s failure to agree on a process for
drafting a new constitution and holding national elections. The Bush Administration
had linked completion of these steps to the end of the U.S. occupation and a
restoration of full Iraqi sovereignty. In early August 2003, the Governing Council
tapped INC activist Kanaan Makiya to head a 25-person committee that will
23 Williams, Daniel. New Ministry to Recruit Paramilitary Force in Iraq. Washington Post,
September 2, 2003.
24 Filkins, Dexter and Neil MacFarquhar. U.S. Official Tells Iraqis To Assert More
Authority. New York Times, August 21, 2003.
CRS-27
determine the process for drafting the constitution. However, the committee
deadlocked, with some arguing for an appointed constitutional drafting commission
and others, such as Ayatollah Sistani, saying the drafters should be elected. Secretary
of State Powell said in late September 2003 that the Iraqis should be able to draft a
constitution within six months, although Iraqi officials subsequently said it would
be very difficult to meet that deadline. U.N. Security Council Resolution 1511, of
October 16, 2003, invited the Council to develop a timetable by December 15, 2003,
for drafting a constitution.
In mid-November, with popular resistance to the occupation appearing to grow
and resistance attacks becoming more effective, as outlined in a reported CIA
assessment,25 CPA administrator Bremer flew urgentlyto Washington to consult with
President Bush and other members of the national security team. According to press
accounts, President Bush authorized Bremer to discuss with the Governing Council
a new plan to accelerate the transfer of political sovereignty to Iraqis. On November
15, the CPA and the Governing Council announced they had reached agreement on
a plan that, according to several press reports, includes the following:
! the writing of a provisional constitution, or set of “Basic Laws.”
! the establishment of 15-person committees in each of Iraq’s 18
provinces, who will in turn select participants for broader local
caucuses. The 15-person committees are to be established by
January 21, 2004; of the 15 in each committee, five will be
appointed by the Governing Council, five by provincial councils,
and five by town councils. By the end of May 2004, the caucuses
are to select members of a 250-member national assembly.
! By July 1, 2004, the selection by the 250 member national assembly
of members of an executive branch, including designation of a
provisional leader of Iraq. This new provisional government is to
assume sovereignty. According to Bremer, there is to be an
agreement between the transition government and the United States
on the continuation of the U.S. military presence.
! By March 15, 2005, elections of drafters of a permanent
constitution. The elections are to be managed by the transition
government.
! By December 31, 2005, the holding of national elections for a
permanent government.
The agreement has attracted mixed reviews both abroad and within Iraq. Some
believe that it will lead to a relatively rapid restoration of sovereignty that should
calm resistance. Others believe it represents a U.S. effort to draw down its presence
in Iraq to minimize further U.S. casualties, and that the political process outlined will
25 Landay, Jonathan. “CIA Has A Bleak Analysis of Iraq.” Philadelphia Inquirer, November
12, 2003.
CRS-28
not ensure formation of a genuine democracy, but rather a coalition of individual
factions. Others believe that the process outlined is relatively vague and that much
infighting will result at each stage of the process, including the selection of caucus
participants, the naming of assembly members, the selection of a transition
government, and the naming of a leader of the transition government. Some believe
the process will favor the well-organized former exile parties, although others believe
the plan provides sufficient opportunity for newly enfranchised groups and
individuals in Iraq to gain some say in the political transition. Press reports in late
November say some members of the Governing Council want the Council to remain
in existence as part of a transition government after that government is established;
this suggests that some Governing Council figures fear they might not be selected to
be part of a new governing body under the agreed upon process.
As part of the governance planning process that took place before the war, the
U.S. State Department supported a group of Iraqi exiles to address issues that would
confront a successor government.26 The State Department working group (the
“Future of Iraq Project”) does not appear to have significant influence on any post-
war regime decision-making in Iraq, although some Iraqis who participated are now
in various Iraqi official bodies. Some experts believe the Defense Department was
promoting a competing or separate group of exiles.27 The State Department project,
which cost $5 million, consisted of working groups that discussed (1) transitional
justice; (2) public finance; (3) public and media outreach; (4) democratic principles;
(5) water, agriculture, and the environment; (6) health and human services; (7)
economyand infrastructure; (8) education; (9) refugees, internally-displaced persons,
and migration policy; (10) foreign and national security policy; (11) defense
institutions and policy; (12) free media; (13) civil societycapacity-building; (14) anti-
corruption measures; and (15) oil and energy.
Iraqi Resistance and U.S. Security Operations
Experts note that the U.S. policy debate has intensified since September 2003
because of the apparently escalating Iraqi resistance, an increasing number of U.S.
casualties taken, and the slow rate at which such U.S. initiatives such as the
establishment of a democratic successor regime is moving forward. At present, about
145,000 U.S. and British troops are in Iraq; of those, about 130,000 are U.S.
personnel and about 12,000 are British. There are an additional 16,000 foreign
forces, deploying in accordance with international commitments to post-war
peacekeeping (see below). Earlier press reports said the Administration wanted to
draw the U.S. force level down to about 35,000 by the end of 2003, but continued
unrest and insecurity in Iraq appear to have made that goal untenable, and some press
reports say that Defense Department officials estimate that over 100,000 U.S. troops
might still be in Iraq in the summer of 2004, and perhaps that many as late as 2006.
26 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,”
Washington File, December 11, 2002.
27 Fineman, Mark, Robin Wright, and Doyle McManus. Preparing for War, Stumbling to
Peace. Los Angeles Times, July 18, 2003.
CRS-29
Other reports says the Administration wants to try to reduce U.S. forces to 100,000
by mid-2004 and to 50,000 by 2005.28
The Resistance. U.S. commanders in Iraq said in early October 2003 that the
sophistication and capabilities of the armed resistance to the U.S. governance of Iraq
is growing. Centcom commander John Abizaid had said on July 17, 2003, that the
United States faces a “classic guerrilla war” led by “mid-level Baath Party activists
organized regionally.” Some elements of the resistance appear to want to restore the
old regime, while others appear to be motivated by opposition to foreign rule or the
goal of forming an Islamic state. Other resistance fighters appear to be motivated by
the difficulty the U.S. and British authorities have had in restoring civilian services
or to avenge the accidental killing of Iraqi civilians during U.S. operations. On
average, there are about 30 attacks on U.S. forces per day. Resistance attacks have
killed about 185 U.S. military personnel since President Bush declared an end to
“major combat operations” in Iraq on May 1, 2003. The most lethal resistance attack
was the November 2 shoot-down of a U.S. Chinook helicopter, killing 15 American
forces. Another incident, the November 15 collision of two Blackhawks killing 17
American soldiers might have been the result of one helicopter trying to avoid ground
fire.
U.S. militaryoperations are focused on hunting down guerrilla resistance leaders
and their suspected Baathist financiers, as well as finding former leader Saddam
Hussein. U.S. forces have conducted at least six sweep operations since mid-June
2003 to search for Baath and other oppositionists; these operations were given the
names Peninsula Strike (June 9-15); Desert Scorpion (June 15-August 1);
Sidewinder (June 29-July 7); Soda Mountain (July 12-17); Ivy Serpent (July 12 -
early September); Ivy Focus (September 10 - ongoing); Ivy Cyclone and Ivy Cyclone
II (November 4-ongoing); and Iron Hammer (November 12 -). Iron Hammer, which
was launched as response to growing resistance attacks, began on November 12; it
has included air attacks on insurgent positions near Baghdad and nearby towns.
The Bush Administration says resistance comes not only from remnants of the
Baath Party but also from Arab volunteers, possibly linked to or supportive of Al
Qaeda, who have come to Iraq from other countries to fight the U.S. occupation.
U.S. military officials say they have arrested about 200 foreign fighters in recent
sweep operations, although some commanders say the foreign fighters are not a large
factor in the resistance activity. Resistance attacks are more frequent in the Sunni
areas of central Iraq, where support for Saddam Hussein’s regime was traditionally
stronger than elsewhere, but there have been recent fatal attacks in the Shiite south.
Some U.S. military officials, including Gen. Abizaid,29 put the resistance
numbers at about 5,000, although they do not explain precisely how they arrive at
that figure. The resistance appears to be operating in relatively small cells, some of
which have broadcast photos of armed fighters, although some U.S. commanders
believe that Saddam and members of his inner circle who are still at large might be
28 Ricks, Thomas. Reduction in U.S. Troops Eyed for ‘04. Washington Post, October 19,
2003.
29 Press briefing by Gen. Abizaid, November 13, 2003.
CRS-30
coordinating some resistance elements. Some reports say U.S. commanders believe
the resistance is acquiring a more nationwide structure. Some resistance factions
have identified themselves as distinct groups, scribbling graffiti warnings and faxing
statements to the Arab satellite television network Al Jazeera, UAE-based Al Arabiya
TV, and other outlets. Suggesting a mix of nationalist and Islamist factions, they are
identifying themselves with names such as:
! Al Awda (the Return), believed to be the largest and most active
resistance group;
! Saddam’s Jihad;
! the Movement of the Victorious Sect;
! Iraq’s Revolutionaries - Al Anbar’s Armed Brigades;
! The Popular Resistance for the Liberation of Iraq;
! the Salafist Jihad Group (Salafi is a Sunni extremist Islamic
movement);
! Armed Islamic Movement for Al Qaeda - Falluja Branch. Actual
linkages to Al Qaeda, if any, are not known;
! Jaysh (Army) of Mohammad, said to be a highly active group;
! Black Banners Group;
! Nasirite Organization; and
! Armed Vanguard of the Second Mohammad Army. Claimed
responsibility for U.N. headquarters bombing and threatened attacks
on any Arab countries that participate in Iraq peacekeeping. The
credibility of the claim is not known.
The continuing resistance has complicated the U.S. mission. In addition to
targeting U.S. forces, resistance fighters have assassinated Iraqis who are
cooperating with the United States and attacked Iraqi oil export pipelines and water
and other infrastructure facilities, as well as symbols of the international presence,
including U.N. headquarters. By attacking these targets, the resistance appears to be
hoping to cause international relief workers and peacekeeping forces to leave Iraq,
slow reconstruction, and turn the Iraqi populace against the occupation.
An apparent suicide terrorism dimension to the resistance began to emerge in
August 2003 with car and truck bombings in Baghdad of the embassy of Jordan
(August 7) and U.N. headquarters at the Canal Hotel (August 19). The latter
bombing killed 23 persons including the U.N. representative in Iraq, Sergio Vieira
de Mello, and prompted some drawdown in U.N. and non-governmental organization
personnel in Iraq. The August 29, 2003, car bombing in Najaf that killed Mohammad
Baqr Al Hakim may have killed over 100 persons, according to news reports.
Smaller suicide bombings have occurred since at Iraqi police facilities, the U.N.
compound, and other sites. On October 25, 2003, the resistance rocketed the hotel
at which visiting deputy Defense Secretary Wolfowitz was staying; he was unhurt.
The next day, there were four suicide car bombings at various sites in Baghdad,
including the headquarters of the International Committee of the Red Cross. A
November 12 resistance suicide attack killed 17 Italian peacekeepers at their
headquarters in Nasiriyah.
On the other hand, the Administration maintains that the resistance is not
derailing the U.S. mission to bring about reconstruction and that the insurgency can
CRS-31
and will be defeated. Administration fact sheets and statements say that life is, for
the most part, returning to normal throughout Iraq. Electricity is virtually back to
pre-war levels. A new currency has been introduced. Schools and hospitals have
reopened throughout Iraq. Administration officials also say Iraqis are freer than at
any time in the past 30 years, with a free press and the ability to organize politically.
“Iraqification”/Building Security Institutions. An option for improving
security conditions that has been pursued by the Administration is to try to
increasingly transfer security responsibilities to Iraqi institutions. Some in the
Administration appear to prefer this option to alternatives, advocated by some in and
outside the Administration, that involve turning over greater responsibility to the
international community in exchange for donations of peacekeeping forces. This
initiative is an attempt to improve security in Iraq, generate better intelligence on
resistance factions, and free up U.S. forces for counter-insurgency missions. It is
hoped that these institutions could eventually take over the security function from the
United States. As of mid-November 2003, about 130,000 Iraqis have been recruited
to these institutions, and the goal is to have about 220,000 Iraqis serving in these
institutions by 2004. However, there are concerns about the loyalty and dedication
of the new recruits, in the absence of Iraqi sovereignty and a clearly defined
governing structure. Some Iraqi forces have fought crime and the resistance and
helped put down protests, but others have sometimes abandoned their posts and
allowed their facilities to be attacked or fought poorly in defense.
On November 21, 2003, the Bush Administration issued a determination
repealing a U.S. ban on arms exports to Iraq so that the United States can supply
weapons to the new Iraqi security institutions. Authority to repeal this ban was
requested and granted in an FY2003 emergency supplemental appropriations (P.L.
108-11) for the costs of the war. The provision (Section 1504) gives the President
the authority to export to Iraq non-lethal military equipment and to export military
equipment to a reconstituted or interim Iraqi military if the President determines that
doing so is in the national interest. (Section 1503 requires the President to submit
regular reports to Congress on any export licenses granted for the exportation of dual
use items to Iraq.)
A related issue is whether the United States will agree to a proposal by the
major Iraqi parties on the Governing Council to deploy their individual militia
fighters to help augment security.30 The militias could provide additional forces,
many of whom have substantial training, that could benefit efforts to maintain
security. The potential risks of the proposal are that the party-based militias would
likely retain loyalties to their party leaders, not necessarily to an Iraqi government.
Another risk is that there might be tensions among the various militias that might
erupt into internecine violence.
The following, based on a variety of press reports, are the pillars of the Iraqi
security institutions:
30 Tyler, Patrick. Iraqi Factions Seek to Take Over Security Duties. New York Times,
September 20, 2003.
CRS-32
! New Army. The CPA formally disbanded the former Iraqi army
following Bremer’s arrival in Baghdad. Some criticized the move
as a factor that is now contributing to resistance activity, but others
believe the move was necessary to ensure that Iraq moves toward
democracy. As part of U.S. efforts to build new Iraqi security
institutions, the CPA is in the process of training recruits for a
planned 40,000 person New Iraqi Army, about 10% the size of the
pre-war Iraqi force. The force is expected to be at or near full
strength by mid-2004, although some experts believe that this is too
rapid a pace to ensure proper training and ensure the loyalty of all
recruits. Recruits are paid $60 per month and receive nine weeks of
training. Former Defense Department official Walter Slocombe is
in charge of forming the new Iraqi army; according to him, many
soldiers of the former army are being recruited, but former members
who were at the top four ranks of the Baath Party are not eligible for
recruitment. The first 700 recruits were graduated in early October
2003. The Administration requested about $2 billion to train and
equip the new army in its FY2004 supplemental funding request;
that level of funding is provided by the FY2004 supplemental
appropriation (P.L. 108-106).
! Police. The CPA is also trying to turn policing functions over to
Iraqis. Overall, about 62,000 Iraqi policemen have returned to their
jobs, near the total goal. About 30,000 of the police will undergo
training in Hungary, and Jordan has offered to train about 30,000
Iraqi police. Police are paid $60 per month, and must pass a
background check ensuring they do not have a record of human
rights violations or criminal activity. The Administration has
requested about $1 billion to train and equip an Iraqi police force in
its FY2004 supplemental funding request; $950 million was
appropriated in P.L. 108-106.
! The CPA has is also building a paramilitary “Civil Defense Corps,”
deployed in each of Iraq’s provinces, to assist in maintaining order
and combating insurgents. As of late November, 8,500 have been
deployed; the goal is for a Corps of 40,000. Recruits are paid $50
per month and cannot have served in Iraq’s former army at a level of
colonel or higher.
! A separate “Facilities Protection Service” is being deployed to guard
installations such as oil pumping stations, electricitysubstations, and
government buildings. About 48,000 (near the goal) have been
deployed, but training is said to be minimal and some are unarmed.
The Administration has requested about $140 million to train and
equip the Civil Defense Corps and Facilities Protection Service in
the FY2004 supplemental funding request; that amount was
appropriated in P.L. 108-106.
CRS-33
! The CPA has thus far recruited 12,000 Iraqis into a customs and
border protection force. Members of this force receive a few weeks
of U.S. training.
Internationalization/U.N. Role.31 Some believe that enlisting greater
international participation in peacekeeping would be more effective than the rapid
recruitment of Iraqi security institutions. At times over the past few months, it
appeared that the Administration had decided or was about to decide on this strategy,
although it appears the Administration is de-emphasizing this option in favor of
those involving greater U.S. control over post-war governance. In his speech on Iraq
of September 7, 2003, President Bush said he had authorized Secretary of State
Powell to negotiate a Security Council resolution that would authorize a
multinational peacekeeping force in Iraq, and thereby perhaps trigger additional
pledges of force contributions.
Thus far, 29 countries (in addition to the United States and Britain) have
committed forces to help secure Iraq. The United Kingdom and Poland are leading
multinational divisions in southern Iraq and central Iraq, respectively. The UK-led
force numbers about 14,000, of which all but 2,000 are British forces. The Polish-led
force numbers about 9,200, of which 2,300 are Polish. About 27,000 non-U.S.
troops are now on the ground (including 12,000 British). Confirmed force pledges
include those in Table 1, below. For a more thorough list, which includes
contributions of support or medical personnel, see CRS Report RL32105.
The commitments of several large nations, including Germany and France, are
contingent on a restructuring of post-war governance to restore Iraqi sovereignty.
Others, including Japan and South Korea, have expressed willingness to commit
substantial numbers of troops but have hesitated on actual deployments due to
security conditions. On October 7, the Turkish parliament approved a government
recommendation to send up to 10,000 peacekeeping forces, but the pledge drew
criticism from Iraq’s Governing Council that Turkey will likely use the deployment
to meddle in Iraq’s internal affairs. Turkey subsequently informed the United States
that Iraqi opposition made the deployment unworkable at this time. The position of
U.N. Secretary General Kofi Annan appears to be close to that of France; he has cut
U.N. staff in Iraq because of security concerns and said the United Nations should
only play a larger role in Iraq if there is a road map to an early restoration of Iraqi
sovereignty.
Since the fall of Saddam Hussein, the Administration has sought U.N. backing
for its post-war efforts. Resolution 1483 (adopted unanimously) provided for a U.N.
special representative to coordinate the activities of U.N. personnel in Iraq and to
help establish a successor government. The SecretaryGeneral subsequently(May27,
2003) appointed de Mello (see above) for that post. The resolution also gave the
United Nations a monitoring role over the Development Fund for Iraq, the account
controlled by the CPA for reconstruction. The resolution did not authorize a return
31 For additional information on international contributions to Iraq peacekeeping and
reconstruction, see CRS Report RL32105, Post-War Iraq: A Table and Chronology of
Foreign Contributions.
CRS-34
to Iraq of U.N. weapons inspectors, although the resolution provided for deliberations
on that issue. Some International Atomic Energy Agency inspectors returned to Iraq
in June 2003 on a limited nuclear mission in Baghdad. On August 14, 2003, the U.N.
Security Council adopted a compromise resolution, Resolution 1500, that
“welcomed,” but did not “endorse,” the formation of the Governing Council, an
apparent nod to U.S. requests. The resolution also enhanced U.N. authority in Iraq
somewhat by establishing a “U.N. Assistance Mission for Iraq.” The resolution did
not formally authorize an international peacekeeping force for Iraq ; Resolution 1483
already “calls on” governments to contribute forces for stabilization) and did not
measurably dilute U.S. authority over post-war governance in Iraq.
These resolutions did not satisfy the requirements of many nations that want to
phase out the U.S.-led occupation in favor of a U.N.-led governance process. The
United States obtained agreement on Resolution 1511 (adopted unanimously on
October 16, 2003) that authorized a “multinational force under unified command”
and “invited” the Governing Council to develop, by December 15, 2003, a timetable
for drafting a constitution. However, the resolution did not meet the core demands
of such countries as France and has not attracted new troop pledges from the major
countries such as France and Germany. Some in the Bush Administration reportedly
have not wanted to cede control over post-war governance to the United Nations or
other nations; they maintain that doing so would confuse the post-war command
structure and possibly lead to the formation of a government in Iraq that is not
committed to democracy and not necessarily pro-U.S. On the other hand, suggesting
that the Administration is revisiting its former stance to keep U.N. involvement
circumscribed, Secretary of State Powell said in November 2003 that the United
States might seek formal U.N. backing for the November 15, 2003, transition
governance plan (see above). The move reportedly would also include giving the
United Nations a major role in assisting the transition and recognizing the sovereign
transition government.
During negotiations on Resolution 1511, a number of different formulas were
discussed for broadening peacekeeping duties in Iraq. Deputy Secretary of State
Richard Armitage told journalists in late August 2003 that one idea under discussion
was for a multinational force, under U.N. leadership, that would be commanded by
a U.S. military official.32 Another possibility was for NATO to command a
multilateral force. The United States had some discussions with NATO on whether
the organization would take on Iraq as a fifth peacekeeping mission. On July 10,
2003, the Senate adopted an amendment, by a vote of 97-0, to a State Department
authorization bill (S. 925) calling on the Administration to formally ask NATO to
lead a peacekeeping force for Iraq. A related bill (H.R. 2112) was introduced in the
House on May 15, 2003. (For more information on this possibility, see CRS Report
RL32068, An Enhanced European Role in Iraq?)
32 Jehl, Douglas. U.S. Now Signals It Might Consider U.N. Force in Iraq. New York Times,
August 28, 2003.
CRS-35
Table 1. Multinational Division Force Pledges
Albania 70
Armenia 13
Australia 850
Azerbaijan 150
Bulgaria 500
Czech Republic 400
Denmark 380
Dominican Republic 300
Estonia 47
Georgia 70
Honduras 370
Hungary 300
Italy 3,000
Kazakhstan 27
Latvia 150
Lithuania 130
Macedonia 38
Mongolia 180
Netherlands 1,100
Nicaragua 230
Norway 150
Poland 2,300
Portugal 120
Romania 734
Singapore 192
Slovakia 85
Spain 1,300
Thailand 443
Ukraine 1,650
Total (non-U.S., non-
U.K.) Pledged
15,279
CRS-36
Restarting Iraq’s Economic Engine
One of the major functions of the CPA is to accomplish economic
reconstruction. By all accounts, restoring Iraq’s economy depends, in large part, on
rehabilitating Iraq’s energy infrastructure.33
The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction. As the driver of Iraq’s
economy, the rebuilding of the oil industry is receiving substantial U.S. attention. It
has been widely assumed that Iraq’s vast oil reserves, believed second only to those
of Saudi Arabia, would be used to fund much of the costs of reconstruction. Then
presidential spokesman Ari Fleischer said on February 18, 2003, referring to Iraq’s
oil reserves, that Iraq has “a variety of means ... to shoulder much of the burden for
[its] own reconstruction.” Many observers had been concerned that an Iraqi regime
on the verge of defeat could destroy its own oil fields, but coalition forces quickly
secured Iraq’s southern oil fields after combat began. Only about 9 oil wells were set
on fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that region, and all were put out quickly.
The northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul were not set afire.
In early May 2003, the U.S.-led coalition set up an advisory board, headed by
former Shell executive Phillip Carroll, to oversee the rebuilding of Iraq’s oil sector.
An Iraqi oil industry professional, Thamer Ghadhban, was named to serve as head
of the interim management team that has run Iraq’s oil ministry and reported to the
advisory board. The first exports began in late June 2003, but exports were running
at only about 800,000 barrels per day as of late September 2003, far less than the 1.5
million barrels per day originally estimated, due to sabotage and the slow pace of
sector reconstruction. Iraq’s new “Oil Minister,” Ibrahim Bahr al-Ulum, said Iraq
was exporting at somewhat higher levels (just over 1 million barrels per day) as of
early October, and exports are said to be about 1.1 million barrels per day as of late
October. Iraq’s pre-war export rate was about 2.2 million barrels per day, a level that
U.S. officials and Iraqi oil appointees had hoped to reach by the end of 2003. The
FY2004 supplemental appropriations request asks for $1.2 billion to repair Iraq’s oil
infrastructure, plus $900 million to import refined energy products that Iraq’s
infrastructure cannot currentlyproduce until it is repaired. P.L. 108-106 provided the
requested amount for infrastructure, but only about $700 million for imports of
energy products.
The CPA-produced budget for Iraq for calendar 2003, which is based on the
planned levels of oil exports, assumed that oil revenues would yield about $3.5
billion through the end of 2003, and provide about half of the approximately $6.6
billion budget for Iraq for the period. However, about $1.4 billion in oil revenues
were received by the end of October, somewhat less than anticipated. At inception,
the DFI Iraq contained about $7 billion when it was established in June 2003,
consisting of captured Iraqi assets, Iraqi assets abroad, the monies transferred from
the oil-for-food account, and U.S. funds available for reconstruction (FY2003
33 For information on Iraq’s oil industry and its reconstruction, see CRS Report RS21626,
Iraq Oil: Reserves, Production, and Potential Revenues. For information on U.S. and other
funding for Iraq’s reconstruction, see CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in
Reconstruction Assistance.
CRS-37
supplemental, P.L. 108-11, which appropriated about $2.5 billion for reconstruction).
As of late October 2003, the Development Fund for Iraq (DFI), set up by Resolution
1483, had a balance of about $2.3 billion. (During October and November, an
additional $2 billion was transferred to the DFI from the oil-for-food escrow
account.)
In order to accelerate reconstruction, the DFI was deemed to require
international donations, such as those pledged at the October 23-24 donors’
conference in Madrid, additional U.S. appropriations, and funds remaining after the
U.N.-run “oil for food program” terminated on November 21, 2003 (see below). A
World Bank estimate, released in early October 2003, said Iraq reconstruction would
require about $56 billion during 2004-2007, including the $20 billion in U.S. funding
requested by the Administration in September 2003. At the Madrid donors
conference, donors pledged about $4 billion in grants and $9 billion in credits, in
addition to the $20 billion to be provided by the United States. (For additional
information on international pledges, see CRS Report RL32015, Post-War Iraq: A
Table and Chronology of Foreign Contributions.)
In late October 2003, a multilateral board to monitor the DFI, mandated by
Resolution 1483, was established (the International Advisoryand Monitoring Board).
The DFI is held in the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, not Iraq’s Central Bank,
as outlined in Resolution 1483.
A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which
foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s
vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will
seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other
countries.
Supplemental Funding Needs.34 Partly because oil revenues have lagged
behind projections, in late August 2003 Bremer visited Washington to talk to other
Administration officials about the need to ask Congress for immediate supplemental
funds for reconstruction needs, which Bremer estimates will run into the “several
tens of billions” over the next year. On September 8, 2003, President Bush stated
that he would request supplemental funding for FY2004 for the “war on terrorism,”
in the amount of $87 billion, of which over $70 billion would be for military
operations in and reconstruction of Iraq. Of that amount, about $50 billion would be
for military costs and about $20 billion for reconstruction of Iraq.
The FY2004 supplemental appropriation (conf. report H.Rept. 108-337, P.L.
108-106) provided the following funds for Iraq reconstruction (total $18.7 billion):
34 For information on the status of legislative consideration of the request for supplemental
funding, see RL32090, FY2004 Supplemental Appropriations for Iraq, Afghanistan, and the
Global War on Terrorism: Military Operations & Reconstruction Assistance.
CRS-38
! $3.243 billion for security and law enforcement, including the New
Iraqi Army. border enforcement and other security functions;
! $1.32 billion for justice and civil society and democracy
development, including programs for women and youth, and the
formation of an independent human rights commission,
! $5.56 billion for electricity infrastructure rehabilitation,
! $1.89 billion for rehabilitating the energy infrastructure,
! $4.332 billion to repair water and sewage systems;
! $500 million for repair of transportation and telecommunications
infrastructure,
! $370 million to upgrade housing, roads, and bridges,
! $800 million to construct and equip hospitals and clinics, and
! $453 million for education, jobs training, and private sector
initiatives.
Termination of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have
been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program.
The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put
in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was
suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various
aspects of the program departed Iraq. (See CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food
Program, Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.)
On March 28, 2003, the U.N. SecurityCouncil unanimouslyadopted Resolution
1472 that restarted the program’s operations and empowered the United Nations, for
a 45-day period (until May 12), to take direct control of all aspects of the program.
Under the new resolution, the United Nations is setting priorities for and directing the
delivery of already contracted supplies. The enhanced U.N. authority was extended
on April 25, 2003, to last at least until the six-month phase of the program expired
on June 3, 2003.
On April 17, 2003, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions
against Iraq, signaling that the Administration wanted to focus on restoring normal
international commerce with Iraq rather than extending the oil-for-food program.
Resolution 1483 lifted sanctions and provided for the phasing out of the oil for food
program within six months after adoption of that resolution on May 22; the program
terminated on November 21, 2003. The resolution also provided for the United
Nations to transfer to the new DFI $1 billion in funds held by the oil-for-food
program escrow fund. As of the start of the war, the program’s escrow account had
about $11 billion to fund imports of humanitarian and other goods. Since then, the
program had set priorities for about $8.2 billion in contracts, leaving about $2 billion
in unallocated funds remaining, after subtracting the $1 billion already transferred to
the DFI in May 2003. In anticipation of the surplus funds as the program was about
to terminate, the oil-for-food program transferred $2 billion to the DFI in October
and November 2003.
Some press reports suggest that U.N. officials believed the program should
have been extended in order to facilitate an orderly phase-out of the program. The
United States and Britain opposed another extension and, as of its termination on
November 21, have taken over its functions. On November 24, 2003, the U.N.
CRS-39
Security Council adopted a resolution to continue its “Sanctions Committee” that has
monitored the U.N. economic embargo on Iraq since 1990, but to end, subject to later
review, that Committee’s mandate to monitor the U.N. embargo on arms sales to
Iraq. Part of the Committee’s economic sanctions mandate will include ensuring that
assets of the former regime remain frozen. (For more information, see CRS Report
RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, International Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.)
Searching for Former Regime Violations and Officials
Organs of the CPA and the U.S. government are attempting to uncover evidence
of gross human rights abuses and other violations of the regime of Saddam Hussein,
including evidence of WMD. A 1,500 person “Iraq Survey Group,” headed by a U.S.
military commander (Maj. Gen. Keith Dayton) but composed of many civilian
technical experts led by former U.N. weapons inspector David Kay, is attempting to
uncover alleged WMD. The Survey Group is also searching for mass graves of
victims of the former regime. In early October 2003, Kay released an interim report
on the Survey Group’s WMD investigation. The report said the Group had not found
actual weapons of mass destruction in Iraq, but it had found “dozens of WMD-related
program activities and significant amounts of equipment that Iraq concealed from the
United Nations during the inspections that began in late 2002.”35 The
Administration, according to press reports, has requested an additional $600 million
to fund the Survey Group for another six months, and about $300 million has been
spent on the search as of early October 2003.36
Thus far, the Survey Group has found at least 40 mass graves, some with
hundreds of corpses. Most appear to contain bodies of Kurdish and Shiite opponents
of the former regime, but some contain some of the bodies of about 600 Kuwaitis
missing from the first Gulf war. (WMD issues and the fate of the missing Kuwaitis
are discussed in CRS Issue Brief IB92117.)
An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is whether Saddam
Hussein and his associates should be prosecuted for war crimes and crimes against
humanity, if and when they are caught. The Administration said in early April 2003
that Saddam and his inner circle should be tried by Iraqis if they are captured,
although others might be tried by a U.S.-led process for any crimes committed in the
course of the 2003 war. In the year prior to the war, the Administration was
gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those it had
sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay (killed after discovery
by and a firefight with U.S. forces in Mosul on July 22, 2003); Ali Hassan al-Majid,
for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (captured August 21, 2003);
Muhammad Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered in mid-April 2003); Taha Yasin
Ramadan; first Vice President and number three in the regime (captured August 19,
2003); Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council and
formally number two in the regime; Barzan al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother
35 Testimony of David Kay before the House and Senate Intelligence Committees, and the
Defense Subcommittee of the House Appropriations Committee. October 2, 2003.
36 Politics Aside, Iraqi Weapons Report Raises Crucial Questions. USA Today, October 8,
2003.
CRS-40
(captured in mid-April 2003); Watban al-Tikriti (captured in April 2003) and Sabawi
al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam and former leaders of regime
intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputy Prime Minister and foremost regime
spokesman (surrendered in May 2003); and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait
during Iraq’s occupation of that country (captured May 2003).
Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials
sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured
or surrendered. As of late September 2003, 43 of the Iraqis on the list of 55 are now
in custody or were killed. Others not on the list of 55 have been apprehended as
well: Amir al-Saadi, chief science adviser to Saddam; Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti, a
son-in-law of Saddam; Vice President Taha Muhi ad-Din Ma’ruf; and suspected
WMD manager Hoda Mahdi Salih al-Ammash.
The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and
the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29,
1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related
atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for
FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress
that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal
for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137
(passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March
13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October
31, 1998).
A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993,
after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the United States has supported
INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the
arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the
Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer,
said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established,
focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical
weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds)
and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which
an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against
Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes
against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations.
In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a
U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war
crimes is formed.
The FY2004 supplemental request contains a request for funding of a “Truth
and Reconciliation Commission,” and the establishment of a human rights
commission. The requests also asks for funding for further investigations into the
human rights abuses committed by the former regime, as well as some memorials to
the victims of those abuses. In the FY2004 supplemental request, about $25 million
is requested for these and related activities, such as women and youth civic education
programs.
CRS-41
Congressional Reactions
Congress, like the Administration, had divergent views on the mechanisms for
promoting regime change, although there was widespread agreement in Congress that
regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S. policy. There was substantial
disagreement over whether a major military offensive was the most desirable option
for achieving that objective. On December 20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75,
by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a
“mounting threat” to the United States. The resolution did not call for new U.S. steps
to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few Members called for the overthrow of
Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in support of the resolution.
In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq,
some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint
appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on
Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations
Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the
opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an
option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In
early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members — Senators John
McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and
Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr.
— wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for
operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter,
Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S.
assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish
areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and
other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to
accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.”
As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002,
Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result.
Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force
against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce
U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on
October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote
of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243).
The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. Prior to the war, it held
several hearings on the progress of post-war reconstruction. During the war and in
its aftermath, several Members applauded the performance of the U.S. military and
the overthrow of the regime. Some Members, however, have criticized the
Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war period in light of major
looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the regime. Criticism of post-war
planning has escalated as attacks on U.S. occupation forces have mounted, although
the Administration and others say U.S. casualties are relatively light and that the
resistance is not jeopardizing overall U.S. objectives for Iraq. Several Committees
are conducting inquiries into why substantial amounts of WMD have not been found
in Iraq to date. Some Members of both parties have also expressed concern about the
CRS-42
costs of the U.S. occupation, particularly in light of the Administration’s September
2003 request for an additional $87 billion in funding, and several Members have
called on the Administration to take greater steps to persuade other countries to share
the burden of peacekeeping in and reconstruction of Iraq. Others have called for an
increase in the number of U.S. troops in Iraq or re-evaluation of the mix of U.S.
forces to ensure that the skill set of the U.S. force matches the needs of
reconstruction. Some Members who have visited Iraq in recent months say
reconstruction is proceeding well and that Iraq is more stable than that portrayed in
the press.
CRS-43
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition
Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.)
to the Opposition
(Figures in millions of dollars)
INC War
Crimes Broadcasting
Unspecified
Opposition
Activities
Total
FY 1998
(P.L. 105-174)
2.0 5.0
(RFE/RL)
3.0 10.0
FY 1999
(P.L. 105-277)
3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0
FY 2000
(P.L. 106-113)
2.0 8.0 10.0
FY 2001
(P.L. 106-429)
12.0
(aid
distribution
inside Iraq)
2.0 6.0
(INC radio)
5.0 25.0
FY 2002
(P.L. 107-115)
25.0 25.0
Total,
FY1998-FY2002
15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0
FY2003
(no earmark)
3.1
(announced
April 2003)
6.9
(remaining
to be
allocated)
10.0
FY2004
(request)
0 0
Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq
Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97
million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent,
as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided,
the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and
FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be
used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N.
programs. ESF transfers to the INC for its operations continued until August 2003.
Another version (English): 18 November 2003 — RL31339_2003-11-18.pdf
Order Code RL31339
CRS Report for Congress
Received through the CRS Web
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-Saddam Governance
Updated November 18, 2003
Kenneth Katzman
Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs
Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division
Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-Saddam Governance
Summary
Operation Iraqi Freedom accomplished a long-standing objective, the overthrow
of Saddam Hussein, but U.S. officials acknowledge that restoring security to post-
war Iraq has proved more difficult than anticipated. Past U.S. efforts to change the
regime failed because of limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the Iraqi
opposition, and the efficiency and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping security
services. Previous U.S. Administrations had ruled out major U.S. military action to
change Iraq’s regime, believing such action would be risky and not necessarily
justified by the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament.
In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized
Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to verifiably
abandon its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs and the potential for it
to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. In September 2002, the President told the U.N.
General Assembly that unless Iraq fully disarmed in cooperation with United Nations
weapons inspectors, the United States would lead a coalition to achieve that
disarmament militarily, making clear that this would include the ouster of Iraq’s
President Saddam Hussein’s regime. After a November 2002 - March 2003 round
of U.N. inspections in which Iraq’s cooperation was mixed, on March 19, 2003 the
United States launched Operation Iraqi Freedom to disarm Iraq and change its
regime. The regime fell on April 9, 2003.
In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change
through U.S.-led military action would yield benefits beyond disarmament and
reduction of support for terrorism; benefits such as liberation of the Iraqi people
from an oppressive regime and promotion of stability and democracy throughout the
Middle East. However, escalating resistance to the U.S.-led occupation has
contributed to Administration implementation of several options, including attempts
to recruit more foreign participation in post-war peacekeeping, building Iraqi
institutions that can maintain security, and accelerating transfer of authority to Iraqi
political bodies. Formerly exiled opposition groups form the core of a U.S.-
appointed 25-seat “governing council” as well as a 25-person cabinet; these bodies
are relatively representative of Iraq’s ethnic and political factions but have not yet
clearly established themselves as legitimate and effective Iraqi institutions that could
assume sovereignty. Congress has passed legislation (H.R. 3289, P.L. 108-106) that
provides supplemental FY2004 funding for military costs and reconstruction in Iraq
(and Afghanistan).
See also CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Reconstruction
Assistance, and CRS Report RL32090, FY2004 Supplemental Appropriations for
Iraq, Afghanistan, and the Global War on Terrorism: Military Operations &
Reconstruction Assistance. This report will be updated as warranted by major
developments.
Contents
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda/Zarqawi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Sadr Movement/Moqtada Al Sadr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
The First ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Monarchists/Sharif Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups . . . 14
Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
The Opposition Positions Itself Before War/Second
ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Post-Saddam Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Formation of the Major Party Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
The Governing Council and Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
New Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Debate Over Council Authority/November Transition Plan . . . . . . . . 25
Iraqi Resistance and U.S. Security Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
The Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
“Iraqification”/Building Security Institutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Internationalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Restarting Iraq’s Economic Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Supplemental Funding Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Searching for Former Regime Violations and Officials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Congressional Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-Saddam Governance
The United States sought to remove Iraq’s Saddam Hussein from power after
the 1991 Persian Gulf war, although achieving this goal was not declared policy until
1998. In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass
destruction (WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United
States would seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A
regime change policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338,
October 31, 1998). Bush Administration officials emphasized regime change as the
cornerstone of U.S. policy toward Iraq since shortly after the September 11, 2001,
attacks. Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003, and had
effectively removed Saddam Hussein from power by April 9, 2003.
The Bush Administration’s stated goal is to transform Iraq into a democracy
that could be a model for the rest of the region. Iraq has not had experience with a
democratic form of government, although parliamentary elections were held during
the period of British rule under a League of Nations mandate (1920-1932). Iraq,
which became independent in 1932, was governed by kings from the Hashemite
dynasty during 1921-1958, although with substantial British direction and influence.1
Members of the Hashemite dynasty continue to rule in neighboring Jordan. Iraq’s
first Hashemite king was Faysal bin Hussein, son of Sharif Hussein of Mecca, who
led the Arab revolt against the Ottoman Empire. Faysal ruled Iraq as King Faysal
I and was succeeded by his son, Ghazi (1933-1939). Ghazi was succeeded by his
son, Faysal II, who ruled until the military coup of Abd al-Karim al-Qasim in 1958.
He was ousted in February 1963 by an alliance of the Baath Party and military
officers. One of the Baath Party’s allies in the February 1963 coup was Abd al-
Salam al-Arif, but Arif purged the Baath in November 1963 and instituted direct
military rule. He was killed in a helicopter crash in 1966 and was replaced by his
elder brother, Abd al-Rahim al-Arif, who ruled until the Baath Party coup of July
1968. Following that seizure, Saddam Hussein became the second most powerful
leader of Iraq as Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council. In that
position, he developed and oversaw a system of overlapping security services to
monitor loyalty among the population and within Iraq’s institutions, including the
military. On July 17, 1979, Iraq’s aging President, Ahmad Hasan al-Bakr, resigned
at Saddam’s urging, and Saddam became President of Iraq.
1 See Eisenstadt, Michael and Eric Mathewson, eds. U.S. Policy in Post-Saddam Iraq:
Lessons From the British Experience. The Washington Institute for Near East Policy, 2003.
CRS-2
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam
Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an
operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George
H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end
of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and
Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope
of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions. The revolt in southern Iraq reached
the suburbs of Baghdad, but the Republican Guard forces, composed mainly of
regime loyalists, had survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from
battle prior to the U.S. ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid-
March 1991. Many Shiites blamed the United States for not supporting their uprising
and standing aside as the regime retaliated against those who participated in the
rebellion. Kurds, benefitting from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991,
drove Iraqi troops out of much of northern Iraq and subsequently remained free of
Baghdad’s rule.
According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite
uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding
stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup
against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that
purpose. The Administration apparently believed — and this view apparently was
shared by many experts and U.S. officials — that a coup by elements within the
current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq.
Many observers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and
Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and
tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria.
Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition
Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that
the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment
within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision
was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the
diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the
Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and
diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This
opposition coalition was seen as providing a vehicle for the United States to build a
viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert
support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.2
2 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2,
1992.
CRS-3
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi
The growing opposition coalition took shape in an organization called the Iraqi
National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two main
Kurdish militias, the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic Union of
Kurdistan (PUK), participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens of
opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came into the
coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq.
The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi
ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military
officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC
with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups
publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests,
including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the
preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. Security
Council resolutions on Iraq.3 However, many observers doubted its commitment to
democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and
because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies. The
INC’s first Executive Committee consisted of KDP leader Masud Barzani, ex-Baath
Party and military official Hassan Naqib, and moderate Shiite cleric Mohammad
Bahr al-Ulum. (Barzani and Bahr al-Ulum are now on the 25-member post-war
Governing Council and both are part of its nine member rotating presidency.)
Ahmad Chalabi. When the INC was formed, its Executive Committee
selected Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 59 years old, a secular Shiite Muslim from
a prominent banking family, to run the INC on a daily basis. Chalabi was educated
in the United States (M.I.T) as a mathematician. He fled Iraq to Jordan in 1958,
when the Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military coup. This coup
occurred 10 years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July 1968). In 1978, he
founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian authorities on
charges of embezzlement and he left Jordan, possibly with some help from members
of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989. In 1992, he was convicted in absentia of
embezzling $70 million from the bank and sentenced to 22 years in prison. The
Jordanian government subsequently repaid depositors a total of $400 million.
Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government was pressured by Iraq to turn
against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to the Jordanian government.
In April 2003, senior Jordanian officials, including King Abdullah, called Chalabi
“divisive” and stopped just short of saying he would be unacceptable to Jordan as
leader of Iraq. Chalabi’s critics acknowledge that, despite allegations about his
methods, he was single-minded in his determination to overthrow Saddam Hussein,
and he is said to be favored by those Administration officials, particularly in the
Department of Defense, who most supported changing Iraq’s regime by force.
Since Chalabi returned to Iraq, there have been no large public demonstrations
supportive of him or the INC, indicating that he might not have a large following
3 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by
INC representatives, February 1993.
CRS-4
inside Iraq. However, anecdotal press reporting suggest that he has attracted some
support from those Iraqis that most welcomed the U.S. military offensive against Iraq
and subsequent occupation. On April 6, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters (“Free
Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by the U.S. military from their base in the north to the
Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs in southern Iraq, later
deploying to Baghdad and other parts of Iraq. After establishing his headquarters in
Baghdad, Chalabi tried to build support by searching for fugitive members of the
former regime and arranging for U.S. military forces in Iraq to provide security or
other benefits to his potential supporters. However, the Free Iraqi Forces
accompanying Chalabi were disbanded following the U.S. decision in mid-May 2003
to disarm independent militias.
Chalabi is part of a grouping of five leaders of major exile parties that held a
series of planning meetings shortly prior to the 2003 war. The major-party grouping
was hoping to become the core of a successor regime, and the major parties are
represented on the Governing Council. Chalabi is a member of the Governing
Council and one of the nine that will rotate its presidency. He was president of the
Council during the month of September 2003 and represented Iraq at the U.N.
General Assembly meetings that month.
A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book,
Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq, detailing alleged Iraqi regime human
rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracy for Iraq, including full
rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he taught Middle
Eastern politics at Brandeis University prior to returning to Iraq after the fall of
Saddam. In August 2003, Makiya was tapped by the Governing Council to head a
25-person committee that is to propose a process for drafting a new constitution.
Another INC activist, Mohammed al-Zubaidi, declared himself in charge of Baghdad
in April, but U.S. officials did not recognize him as mayor and ousted him.
The Kurds/KDP and PUK. The Kurds, among the most pro-U.S. of all the
groups in Iraq, do not have ambitions to play a major role in governing Arab Iraq, but
Iraq’s neighbors have always been fearful that the Kurds might still seek outright
independence. In committing to the concept of federalism, the INC platform
assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq. Turkey, which
has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly
fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into
a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy
since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War
I. In 1961, the KDP, then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP
leader Masud Barzani’s father, began an insurgency that has continued until today,
although interrupted by periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud
Barzani’s brother, Idris, commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the Iran-Iraq
war but was killed in that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from
the KDP in 1965; the PUK’s members are generally more well-educated, urbane, and
left-leaning than those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000-
60,000 fighters, some of which are trained in conventional military tactics. (Both
Barzani and Talabani were part of the major-party grouping that has now been
incorporated into the Governing Council, and both are part of the Council’s rotating
presidency.)
CRS-5
In the aftermath of the 1991 Gulf war, the KDP and the PUK agreed in May
1992 to share power after parliamentary and executive elections. In May 1994,
tensions between them flared into clashes, and the KDP turned to Baghdad for
backing. In August 1996, Iraqi forces helped the KDP capture Irbil, seat of the
Kurdish regional government; Iraqi forces acted at the KDP’s invitation. With U.S.
mediation, the Kurdish parties agreed on October 23, 1996, to a cease-fire and the
establishment of a 400-man peace monitoring force composed mainly of Turkomens
(75% of the force). The United States funded the force with FY1997 funds of $3
million for peacekeeping (Section 451 of the Foreign Assistance Act), plus about
$4 million in DOD drawdowns for vehicles and communications gear (Section 552
of the FAA). Also set up was a peace supervisory group consisting of the United
States, Britain, Turkey, the PUK, the KDP, and Iraqi Turkomens.
A tenuous cease-fire held after November 1997, and the KDP and PUK leaders
signed an agreement in Washington in September 1998 to work toward resolving the
main outstanding issues (sharing of revenues and control over the Kurdish regional
government). Reconciliation efforts showed substantial progress in 2002 as the
Kurds perceived that the United States might act to overthrow the regime of Saddam
Hussein. On October 4, 2002, the two Kurdish factions jointly reconvened the
Kurdish regional parliament for the first time since their 1994 clashes. In June 2002,
the United States gave the Kurds $3.1 million in new assistance to further the
reconciliation process.
Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda/Zarqawi. In the mid-1990s, the two main
Kurdish parties enjoyed good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the
Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaikh Ali Abd-al
Aziz. Based in Halabja, Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March
1988 chemical attack on that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998.
A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam
(Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam).
This Ansar faction was led by Mullah Krekar, an Islamist Kurd who reportedly had
once studied under Shaikh Abdullah al-Azzam, an Islamic theologian of Palestinian
origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama bin Laden. Ansar reportedly
associated itself with Al Qaeda and agreed to host in its northern Iraq enclave Al
Qaeda fighters, mostly of Arab origin, who had fled the U.S.-led war in Afghanistan
in 2001. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, during which its base was captured,
about 600 primarily Arab fighters lived in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, near the town
of Khurmal.4 Ansar fighters clashed with the PUK around Halabja in December
2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedly responsible for an assassination attempt
against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002. Possibly because his Ansar
movement was largely taken over by the Arab fighters from Afghanistan, Krekar left
northern Iraq for northern Europe. He was detained in Norway in August 2002 and
now lives there under varying degrees of official restriction.
4 Chivers, C.J. New York Times, December 6, 2002.
Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.”
CRS-6
The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials
to be Abu Musab al-Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in
Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the
December 1999 millennium celebration, the assassination in Jordan of U.S. diplomat
Lawrence Foley (2002), and to reported attempts in 2002 to spread the biological
agent ricin in London and possibly other places in Europe. In a presentation to the
U.N. Security Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied Zarqawi
and Ansar to Saddam Hussein’s regime, which might have viewed Ansar al-Islam as
a means of pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents. Although Zarqawi reportedly
received medical treatment in Baghdad in May 2002 after fleeing Afghanistan, many
experts believed Baghdad-Ansar links were tenuous or even non-existent; Baghdad
did not control northern Iraq even before Operation Iraqi Freedom.5 Zarqawi’s
current whereabouts are unknown, although some unconfirmed press reports indicate
he might have fled to Iran after the fall of the Ansar camp to U.S.-led forces. Some
recent press accounts say Iran might have him in custody.6 U.S. officials have said
since August 2003 that some Ansar fighters, possibly at the direction of Zarqawi,
might have remained in or re-entered Iraq and are participating in the resistance to
the U.S. occupation, possibly including organizing acts of terrorism such as recent
car/truck bombings (see below). One press report quotes U.S. intelligence as
assessing the number of Ansar fighters inside Iraq at 150.7 Ansar al-Islam is not
listed by the State Department as Foreign Terrorist Organization (FTO).
Shiite Islamist Organizations
Some U.S. officials and outside experts have had concerns about the potential
strength and ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups
in post-Saddam Iraq. Many perceive these factions as aligned with Iran. Others
believe that Iraq’s Shiite clerics consult with but do not answer to Iran and do not
seek to model a post-war Iraqi state after Iran’s Islamic republic. The United States
sought to work with some Shiite Islamist opposition factions during the 1990s but
had few if any contacts with others. Shiite Islamist factions hold at least five seats
on the Governing Council unveiled July 13, 2003.
SCIRI/Badr Corps. The most well known among these Shiite factions is the
Supreme Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member
of the INC in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC
banner. SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition
groups in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad
Baqr al-Hakim, died in a car bomb by unknown assailants in Najaf on August 29,
2003, an act that could accelerate a schism within the Shiite Islamist community.
5 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire,
March 18, 2002.
6 Finn, Peter and Susan Schmidt. Al Qaeda Plans a Front in Iraq. Washington Post,
September 7, 2003.
7 Schmitt, Eric. Cheney Theme of Qaeda Ties to Bombings in Iraq Is Questioned by Some
in Administration. New York Times, November 11, 2003.
CRS-7
Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head
an Islamic Republic of Iraq, a vision that, if realized, might conflict with U.S. plans
to forge a democratic Iraq. Baqr Al Hakim and his family fled Iraq to Iran in 1980,
during a major crackdown on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam
feared that Iraqi Shiite Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution
in Iran in 1979, posed a major threat to his regime. Prior to the formation of SCIRI,
Hakim and his family were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party (see below).
Mohammed Baqr was the son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a
prominent Shiite leader in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini
when Khomeini was in exile in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. Baqr Al Hakim had
returned to Iraq on May 10, 2003, welcomed by crowds in Basra and Najaf.
Until August 2002, when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures
for meetings in Washington, D.C., SCIRI had publicly refused to work openly with
the United States or accept U.S. assistance, although it was part of the INC and did
have contacts with the United States prior to the 2003 war effort. Unlike some other
Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI has had good working relations with some Iraqi Sunni
Arab factions and most Kurdish parties.
Since the fall of the regime, SCIRI leaders have participated in U.S.-led efforts
to establish a post-war government and counseled their followers to tolerate, at least
temporarily, the U.S. occupation as a necessary vehicle for building an Iraq in which
Shiites are adequately represented. At the same time, SCIRI has called for the rapid
restoration of Iraqi sovereignty. After he returned to Iraq, Mohammed Baqr Al
Hakim had said he was for a democracy and would not seek to establish an Iranian-
style Islamic republic. Abd al-Aziz al Hakim met with other opposition leaders in
late April 2003 at a post-war governance planning session in Iraq, sponsored by U.S.
officials. Abd al-Aziz later helped constitute the major-party core of the Governing
Council, and he is part of the nine-person rotating Council presidency. Nonetheless,
U.S. officials are said to be mistrustful of SCIRI’s ultimate goals and its longstanding
ties to Iran.
In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about
10,000-15,000 fighters/activists organized into a “Badr Brigades” (named after a
major battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from
Iran into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. The Badr Brigades are
headed by Mohammed Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim, who returned
to Iraq on April 20, 2003, to pave the way for Mohammed Baqr’s return. Abd al-
Aziz has taken over the leadership of the movement in the wake of his elder
brother’s death on August 29. (Another Hakim brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan
in 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s security services.) Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim’s key
aide is Adel Abd-al Mahdi.
Iran’s Revolutionary Guard, which is politically aligned with Iran’s hard line
civilian officials, has been the key patron of the Badr Brigades, providing it with
weapons, funds, and other assistance; the Brigades fought alongside the Guard
against Iraqi forces during the Iran-Iraq war. However, many Iraqi Shiites view
SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr Corps operations in southern Iraq prior
to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark broad popular unrest against the Iraqi
regime. Some Badr fighters deployed inside northern Iraq on the eve of Operation
CRS-8
Iraqi Freedom, and the rest have since entered Iraq. Asserting that the United States
failed to create a secure environment that might have prevented the August 29, 2003,
bombing that killed Ayatollah Al Hakim, some Brigade fighters have deployed
throughout Najaf since the bombing.
A variety of press reports say that some other individual militias now providing
security in many towns in southern Iraq are linked to the Badr Brigades. One such
militia is derived from the fighters who challenged Saddam Hussein’s forces in the
marsh areas of southern Iraq, around the town of Amara, north of Basra. It goes by
the name Hizbollah (Party of God)-Amara, and it is headed by marsh guerrilla leader
Abdul Karim Muhammadawi, nicknamed “Prince of the Marshes” who was named
to the Governing Council. He is widely perceived as an ally of SCIRI and is
considered by observers to have substantial Shiite support north of Basra.
Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, Iraq’s oldest organized Shiite Islamist
grouping, continues to exist as a separate group, but many Da’wa activists appear to
be at least loosely allied with SCIRI. The party was founded in 1957 by a revered
Iraqi Shiite cleric, Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of
Ayatollah Khomeini. It was the most active Shiite opposition movement in the few
years following Iran’s Islamic revolution in February 1979; Da’wa activists
conducted guerrilla attacks against the Baathist regime and attempted assassinations
of senior Iraqi leaders, including Tariq Aziz. Baqr Al Sadr and his sister were hung
by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the unrest, and many other Da’wa activists were killed
or imprisoned. After the Iraqi crackdown, many surviving Da’wa leaders moved
into Iran; some subsequently joined SCIRI, but others rejected Iranian control of
Iraq’s Shiite opposition movement and continued to affiliate only with Da’wa.
Da’wa’s current leader, Ibrahim Jafari, and its leader in Basra, Abd al Zahra
Othman, are on the Governing Council, as is a former Da’wa activist turned human
rights activist, Muwaffaq Al-Ruba’i. Jafari is one of the nine members of the
Council that is rotating the presidency; he was first to hold that post.
The Kuwaiti branch of the Da’wa Party allegedly was responsible for a May
1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks
on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The Hizballah organization in Lebanon
was founded by Lebanese clerics loyal to Ayatollah Baqr Al Sadr and the late
Ayatollah Khomeini, and there continue to be personal and ideological linkages
between Hizballah and the Da’wa Party. The Hizballah activists who held U.S.
hostages in that country during the 1980s often attempted to link release of the
Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party prisoners held by Kuwait for those
attacks in the 1980s. Some Iraqi Da’wa members look to Lebanon’s senior Shiite
cleric Mohammed Hossein Fadlallah, who was a student and protege of Ayatollah
Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, for spiritual guidance.
Sadr Movement/Moqtada Al Sadr.8 Members of the clan of the late
Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq.
The Sadr clan, based in Iraq during Saddam Hussein’s rule, was repressed and not
8 See also, White, Jeffrey. To the Brink: Muqtada Al Sadr Challenges the United States.
Washington Institute for Near East Policy, Policywatch 794. October 17, 2003.
CRS-9
politically active during that time. The United States had no contact with this
grouping prior to the 2003 war and did not attempt to enlist it in any overthrow
efforts during 1991-2002. Although the Sadr clan has been closely identified with
the Da’wa Party (see above), it appears that members of the clan and their followers
currently are operating in post-war Iraq as a movement separate from Da’wa.
Another revered member of the clan, Mohammed Sadiq Al Sadr, and two of his sons,
were killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999. A surviving son of Mohammad
Sadiq, Moqtada Al Sadr, who is about 28 years old, has attempted to rally his
followers to attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite politics. He and his clan
apparently have a large following in the poorer Shiite neighborhoods of Baghdad,
which, after the fall of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr City,”
from the former name of “Saddam City.” However, Moqtada is viewed by many
Iraqi Shiites as a young radical who lacks religious and political weight. To
compensate for his lack of religious credentials, he has sought spiritual authority for
his actions from exiled Iraqi senior cleric, Ayatollah Kazem Haeri, who is living in
Qom, Iran. An alternate interpretation by some experts is that Haeri is acting at the
direction of Iran’s leadership to keep Moqtada Sadr under a measure of control.
Moqtada’s reputation was tarnished in early April 2003 when his supporters
allegedly killed Abd al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Abdol
Qasem Musavi-Khoi, shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al-
Majid Khoi headed the Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq
after U.S.-led forces took Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political
doctrines of Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran.
The Sadr grouping is not represented in the Governing Council. Moqtada has
used his Friday prayer sermons in Kufa (near Najaf) and other forums to denounce
the Council as a puppet of the U.S. occupation. In July 2003, Moqtada and his aides
began recruiting for an Islamic army, for now unarmed, that Sadr says must
challenge the U.S. occupation, although he has thus far stopped short of openly
calling for armed attacks on American forces. He is openly calling for a cleric-led
Islamic state similar to that of Iran. In August 2003, Shiites in Basra and in Baghdad
rioted against British and U.S. occupation forces over fuel shortages and perceived
slights, and there was speculation that Moqtada was helping fuel the riots. Several
days of anti-U.S. demonstrations by pro-Sadr Shiites broke out in Baghdad in early
October 2003.
Later in October 2003, and amid assessments that Moqtada’s popularity is low
and waning further, his supporters stepped up the challenge to the United States. He
named an alternate “government” for Iraq, and some of his followers formed armed
militias and attempted unsuccessfully to seize control of some mosques in Najaf.
Pro-Sadr militants also ambushed some U.S. forces. Press reports say U.S.
commanders are debating how to control Moqtada Al Sadr, with the option of
arresting him apparently under consideration. Possibly to head off any U.S. action
against him, Moqtada tempered some of his statements in October.
Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah. The revered Grand Ayatollah Ali
al-Sistani, based in Najaf, was repressed during Saddam’s rule and is emerging as a
major potential force in post-war Iraq. The United States had no contact with Sistani
when Saddam was in power and has had only limited contact with him since; he
CRS-10
reportedly refuses to meet with representatives of the U.S. occupation. He is the
most senior of the Shiite clerics that lead the Najaf-based “Hawza al-Ilmiya,” a major
grouping of seminaries and Shiite clerics, and numerous assessments say many Iraqi
Shiites follow him and respond to his pronouncements. Other senior clerics include
Ayatollah Mohammad Sa’id Al Hakim, uncle of the slain SCIRI leader Mohammad
Baqr, Ayatollah Mohammad Isaac Fayadh, and Ayatollah Bashir al-Najafi. The
Hawza, which is well funded through donations, is becoming an important source of
political authority in the Shiite regions of Iraq, hiring Iraqis to perform functions
performed by the former regime and issuing directives, often obeyed, to some Iraqi
civil servants. Sistani and the Hawza are generally allied with SCIRI in the intra-
Shiite power struggle, seeking to contain Moqtada Al Sadr, whom Sistani and SCIRI
both view as radical and impulsive.
Sistani, who is of Iranian ethnicity, is considered to be in the tradition of
Ayatollah Khoi in opposing a direct role for clerics in governmental affairs, and
Sistani and the Hawza have spoken against a direct role for the clerics in governing
post-war Iraq. However, in early July 2003, Sistani began to take a more active role
in Iraq’s post-war decision-making by issuing a statement that the drafters of a new
constitution should be elected, not appointed. That statement, according to some
Iraqi officials, caused a deadlock in the effort to develop a roadmap to the writing of
a constitution; Shiites on the Governing Council reportedly insisted that Sistani’s
directive be followed. Sistani has not himself commented on whether or not he
supports the November 15, 2003 agreement on a political transition (see below),
although some Shiite activists claim he supports it.
Islamic Amal. Another Shiite Islamist organization, the Islamic Amal
(Action) Organization, has traditionally been allied with SCIRI. In the early 1980s,
Islamic Amal was under the SCIRI umbrella but later broke with it. It is headed by
Mohammed Taqi Modarassi, a Shiite cleric, who returned to Iraq from exile in Iran
in April 2003, after Saddam Hussein’s regime fell. Islamic Amal, which has a
following among Shiite Islamists mainly in Karbala, conducted attacks against
Saddam Hussein’s regime in the 1980s. However, it does not appear to have a
following nearly as large as SCIRI or the other Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s
brother, Abd al-Hadi, headed the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, which
tried to stir up Shiite unrest against the Bahrain regime in the 1980s and 1990s.
Since returning to Iraq in April 2003, Mohammad Taqi has argued against violent
opposition to the U.S. occupation, saying that such a challenge would plunge Iraq
into civil warfare. On November 14, 2003, Modarassi criticized the United States
for not holding elections to any of the political bodies formed thus far.
Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups
The differences among the various anti-Saddam organizations led to the near
collapse of the U.S. regime change effort the mid-1990s. As noted above, in May
1994, the KDP and the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs
revenues levied at border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s
government based in Irbil. The infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC
offensive against Iraqi troops in March 1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at
CRS-11
the last minute. Although it was repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of
the less well-trained and poorly motivated Iraqi units facing the Kurds. Some INC
leaders point to the battle as an indication that the INC could have succeeded
militarily, without direct U.S. military help, had it been given additional resources
and training in the 1990s.
The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition in the
mid-1990s caused the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by
renewing ties to a non-INC group, Iraq National Accord (INA).9 The INA, originally
founded in 1990 with Saudi support, consisted of defectors from Iraq’s Baath Party,
military, and security services who were perceived as having ties to disgruntled
officials in those organizations. It is headed by Dr. Iyad Alawi, former president of
the Iraqi Student Union in Europe and a physician by training. He is a secular Shiite
Muslim, but most of the members of the INA are Sunni Muslims. The INA’s
prospects appeared to brighten in August 1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein
Kamil al-Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons of mass destruction programs —
defected to Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip on the military and security
services was weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate
from there. The INA was ultimately penetrated by Iraq’s intelligence services and,
in June 1996, Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by arresting or executing over 100
INA sympathizers in the military.
Baghdad’s offensive against the opposition accelerated with its August 1996
incursion into northern Iraq, at the invitation of the KDP. Iraq not only helped the
KDP capture Irbil from the PUK, but Saddam’s forces took advantage of their
presence in northern Iraq to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in
northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout the north. In
the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred
oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated
from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists,
mostly from the INC.
Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA was operating
throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt its presence in Iraq to some extent after
the June 1996 arrests. However, it does not appear to have a large following in Iraq.
Although it was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war, there
is a history of friction between the two groups. Chalabi and the INC have argued
for comprehensive purging of former Baathists from Iraq’s institutions, while the
INA, which has ex-Baathists in it, has argued for retaining some members of the
former regime in official positions. Alawi has also taken the lead in pushing for the
establishment of an internal security service for post-war Iraq, dominated by the
major exile factions. Alawi was part of the major-party grouping that became the
core of the Governing Council, and Alawi has been named a member of that Council
and one of its nine-member rotating presidency. He is president during October
2003.
9 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret
War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997.
CRS-12
Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks
For the two years following the opposition’s 1996 setbacks, the Clinton
Administration had little contact with the opposition. In those two years, the INC,
INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations and their
ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998, then
Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations
subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations”
about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish.
Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections
during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam
Hussein, although virtually no one in Congress or outside was advocating a U.S.-led
military invasion to accomplish that goal. A formal congressional push for a regime
change policy began with an FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174,
signed May 1, 1998) that, among other provisions, earmarked $5 million in
Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free
Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio
service began broadcasting in October 1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million
was devoted to an overt program to coordinate and promote cohesion among the
various opposition factions, and to highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions.
The remaining $2 million was used to translate and publicize documented evidence
of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north,
placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes, and translated and analyzed by experts under
contract to the U.S. government. In subsequent years, Congress has appropriated
funding for the Iraqi opposition and for war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix.
Some of the war crimes funding has gone to the opposition-led INDICT
(International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War Criminals) organization for publicizing
Iraqi war crimes issues.
Iraq Liberation Act
A clear indication of congressional support for a more active U.S. overthrow
effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998: the Iraq Liberation Act
(ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998). The ILA gave the
President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles and services (and
authorized $2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be
designated by the Administration. The Act’s passage was widely interpreted as an
expression of congressional support for the concept of promoting an insurgency by
using U.S. air-power to expand opposition-controlled territory. This idea was
advocated by Chalabi and some U.S. experts, such as General Wayne Downing, who
subsequently became a National Security Council official on counter-terrorism in the
first two years of the George W. Bush Administration. President Clinton signed the
legislation despite reported widespread doubts within the Clinton Administration
about the chances of success in promoting an opposition insurgency.
The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting
regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that
it should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime
CRS-13
headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly
articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq. No
specific language in the Act provides for its termination after Saddam Hussein is
removed from power.
The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the
height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in
which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United
Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were
withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign
against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December
16-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq:
Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.)
The First ILA Designations. Further steps to promote regime change
followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, a career diplomat, Frank
Ricciardone, was named as a State Department’s “Coordinator for the Transition in
Iraq,” the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999, after consultations
with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13) that the major anti-
Saddam organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance under the
Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the Islamic
Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the pro-monarchist Movement for
Constitutional Monarchy (MCM). (Because of its possible role in contributing to
the formation of Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001,
although it was not formally taken off the ILA eligibility list.)
Monarchists/Sharif Ali. The Movement for Constitutional Monarchy is led
by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a relative of the Hashemite monarchs (he is a cousin of
King Faysal II, the last Iraqi monarch) that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I
until 1958. Sharif Ali, who is about 47 and was a banker in London, claims to be the
leading heir to the former Hashemite monarchy, although there are other claimants,
mostly based in Jordan. The MCM was considered a small movement that could not
contribute much to the pre-war overthrow effort, although it was part of the INC and
the United States had contacts with it. In the post-war period, Sharif Ali returned to
Iraq on June 10, 2003, to a small but apparently enthusiastic welcome. He did not
participate in the major-party grouping that negotiated with the U.S.-led occupation
authority on the formation of the Governing Council, and neither Sharif Ali nor any
of his followers was appointed to the Governing Council.
In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton
Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and
“non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999-2000, about 150
opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in
Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses providing civil affairs
training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers,
communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However,
the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficiently organized
to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This
restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the
effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United
CRS-14
States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The Hurlburt trainees
were not brought into Operation Iraqi Freedom or into the Free Iraqi Forces that
deployed to Iraq toward the end of the active combat phase of the war.
Continued Doubts About the Capabilities
of the Anti-Saddam Groups
During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end
the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of
Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed
disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the
opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an
indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical about the opposition’s
capabilities. The Clinton Administration maintained that the Iraqi opposition would
not succeed unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement and that direct U.S.
military action was not justified by the degree of threat posed by Iraq. Clinton
Administration officials added that supporting the opposition militarily could draw
the United States into long-term military involvement in Iraq. Others suggested the
Clinton Administration should focus instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq by
threatening major use of force, or by launching repeated air strikes, unless and until
Iraq re-admitted the U.N. weapons inspectors that left Iraq in December 1998.
As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a
provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed
November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the
Iraqi people,” of which at least $12 million was for the INC to distribute
humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million
was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million
could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive
assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC
distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000, the Clinton Administration
reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in
FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop a humanitarian aid
distribution plan and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However,
three days before it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to
Congress that noted that any INC effort to distribute humanitarian aid in areas of Iraq
under Baghdad’s control would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi
recipients of such aid, and to any relief distributors with which the INC would
contract.10
10 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.”
January 17, 2001.
CRS-15
Bush Administration Policy
Bush Administration policy toward Iraq started out similar to that of the
previous administration, but changed dramatically after the September 11, 2001
terrorist attacks, even though no significant evidence linking Iraq to those attacks
came to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in
President Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he
characterized Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea.
Pre-September 11 Policy
Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic
elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus
within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow
strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq,
which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its
taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist
regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan: a modification of the U.N.
sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technology reached Iraq. His
plan offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N.
restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military
technology.11
The Administration believed that the “smart sanctions” proposal, by easing the
suffering of the Iraqi people, would cause Iraq’s neighbors and other countries to
cease unilateral violations of the sanctions regime. Powell, who had openly
expressed skepticism about the opposition’s prospects, barely raised the regime
change issue during his trip or in his March 7, 2001, testimony before the House
International Relations Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.12 After
about a year of negotiations among the Security Council permanent members, the
major feature of the smart sanctions plan — new procedures that virtually eliminate
U.N. review of civilian exports to Iraq — was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N.
Security Council Resolution 1409).
Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime
change policy, many of the persistent questions about the wisdom and difficulty of
that strategy were debated early in the Bush Administration.13 Aside from restating
the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush Administration did little to promote that
outcome throughout most of its first year. During his confirmation hearings as
Deputy Secretary of Defense, a leading advocate of overthrowing Iraq’s regime, Paul
Wolfowitz, said that he did not yet see a “plausible plan” for changing the regime.
11 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food
Program, Sanctions, and U.S. Policy.
12 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times,
March 2, 2001.
13 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh,
Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002.
CRS-16
Like its predecessor, the Bush Administration initially declined to provide the
opposition with lethal aid, combat training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military
help. It eliminated the separate State Department position of “Coordinator for the
Transition in Iraq,” further casting doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy.
On February 2, 2001, the Bush Administration confirmed that, shortly after President
Bush took office, the Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control
(OFAC) granted the INC a license to proceed with information gathering inside Iraq
only, and not actual distribution of humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the
Administration amounted to a withholding of U.S. backing for the INC plan to
rebuild its presence inside Iraq.
Many in Congress, on the other hand, continued to support the INC as the
primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional
sentiment, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite
doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television
broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the
FY2001 ESF appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an
estimated additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.14
Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime
Bush Administration policy toward Iraq became notably more assertive after
the September 11, 2001, attacks, stressing regime change and asserting that
containment was failing or, at best, inadequate. Almost immediately after the U.S.-
led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in Afghanistan began in early October 2001,
speculation began building that the Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime
through direct use of military force as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism.
Some U.S. officials, reportedly led by deputy Defense Secretary Wolfowitz, believed
that the United States needed to respond to the September 11, 2001 attacks by ending
any or all regimes that support terrorist groups, including Iraq. (Iraq was a designated
state sponsor of terrorism during 1979-82, and was again designated after the 1990
invasion of Kuwait. Iraq remains on the list, despite the change of regime, although
it is expected it will be removed.) As noted above, in his January 29, 2002 State of
the Union message, President Bush named Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along
with North Korea and Iran. Vice President Cheney visited the Middle East in March
2002 reportedly to consult regional countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq
militarily, although the countries visited reportedly urged greater U.S. attention to the
Arab-Israeli dispute and opposed confrontation with Iraq.
The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for
confronting Iraq were (1) its purported refusal to end its WMD programs, and (2) its
ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of
conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. Most senior officials did not
specifically assert that Iraq was an imminent or immediate threat to U.S. security, but
they did assert that Iraq was a “grave and gathering” threat that was best blunted
before the threat became imminent. U.S. officials said the September 11, 2001,
attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to gather before
14 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001.
CRS-17
acting but must instead act preemptively or preventively. The Administration added
that regime change would have the further benefit of liberating the Iraqi people and
promoting stability in the Middle East, possibly facilitating a resolution to the Arab-
Israeli dispute.
Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s
regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax
mailings, senior U.S. officials said in the runup to the war that there was evidence
of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. (On September 19, 2003, President Bush, in response
to a journalist’s question, said there is no evidence linking Saddam Hussein’s regime
to the September 11 attacks but there is evidence linking that regime to Al Qaeda.)
Secretary of State Powell, as noted above, cited intelligence information that Ansar
al-Islam and its leader, Abu Musab al-Zarqawi, had links to Saddam Hussein’s
regime.15 (See section above on Ansar al-Islam for more information on that
organization and its reputed links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.) Other senior
officials cited intelligence information that Iraq provided advice and training to Al
Qaeda in the manufacture and use of chemical weapons, although Administration
information appears to date to the early 1990s when Iraq, largely isolated after the
first Gulf war, was politically close to Sudan. Al Qaeda founder Osama Bin Laden
was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996). The Bush Administration did not
extensively cite reports that Czech intelligence believed that Iraqi intelligence had
met with lead September 11 hijacker Mohammad Atta in Prague in spring 2001,
suggesting official skepticism of those reports. Some outside commentators
believed that those reports indicated a direct Iraqi connection to the September 11
attacks.
Some outside observers expressed skepticism about Iraq-Al Qaeda connections
because of the ideological differences between Saddam Hussein’s secular regime and
Al Qaeda’s Islamist character. Others noted that bin Laden sought to raise an Islamic
army to fight Saddam’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990, arguing against the need for U.S.
troops, and that he was more an enemy of Saddam Hussein than an ally. Those
differences were evident in a February 12, 2003, bin Laden statement referring to
Saddam Hussein’s regime as socialist and infidel, although the statement exhorted
Iraq to resist impending U.S. military action. In the Administration view, the two
shared similar anti-U.S. goals, which outweighed ideological differences and
propelled them into tactical or strategic cooperation.
WMD Threat Perception. Senior U.S. officials asserted the following about
Iraq’s WMD:
! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years
since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply
with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8,
2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs.
! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and
against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not
15 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002.
CRS-18
necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States
or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against
adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of
destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of
massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the
1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings of
retaliation and did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war.
! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who
could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths
in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of this view cited
presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in October 2002,
portions of which were released publicly, stating the CIA view that
Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to terrorists if the United States
were to attack Iraq. At that point, according to that argument,
Saddam Hussein would be left with little incentive not to cooperate
with terrorist groups capable of striking at U.S. interests.
Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam
As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action against Iraq, the
Bush Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its
capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002,
President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special
operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and
Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups — the INC, the
INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM — to Washington for meetings with
senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were
held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S.
government, which reportedly tended to favor different opposition groups.
Numerous press reports indicated that the Defense Department and office of Vice
President Cheney believed the INC might be able to lead a post-Saddam regime,
while the State Department believed the INC had little popularity inside Iraq.
In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August
15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in FY2001 ESF to the
Iraqi National Congress (INC), funds that had been held up due to differences
between the State Department and the INC over what activities would be funded.
Under the agreement, the State Department-provided $8 million was to be used to
fund the INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its offices in Washington,
London, Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate its Al Mutamar
newspaper and Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund the information
gathering portion of the INC’s activities (about $4 million); the State Department had
refused to fund those activities, which were to be conducted inside Iraq, because of
strains between the INC and other opposition groups and questions about INC use of
U.S. funds.
In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and
to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic-
CRS-19
based groups. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had
increasing contact during this period include the following:
! Iraqi National Movement. It formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the
INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib
(who was part of an early leadership body of the INC); and Hatim
Mukhlis, who claimed support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan.
! Iraqi National Front. Another grouping of ex-military officers,
founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite
Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and
participated in the post-1991 Gulf war anti-Saddam uprisings.
! Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement. Established in 1996 by
ex-military officer Najib al-Salhi, this group was close to the INC.
Salhi, who defected in 1995, served in the Republican Guard.
! Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was
established in August 2002, headed by Wafiq al-Samarra’i, a former
head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of staff of Iraq’s
military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was based in Denmark
since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member. Khazraji was
placed under travel restrictions by Danish officials in late November
2002 after saying he wanted to leave Denmark. He is under
investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of chemical
weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities said on
March 17, 2003, that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his home
there,16 although his current whereabouts are unknown.
! Iraqi Turkmen Front. A small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping,
generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq.
Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq.
! The Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another
Shiite Islamic Party, but it is considered substantially less pro-
Iranian than SCIRI or the Da’wa Party. It is headed by Jamil Wakil,
a follower of Ayatollah Shirazi, an Iranian cleric who was the
spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation
of Bahrain (IFLB, see above under Islamic Amal).
! The Assyrian Democratic Movement, an ethnic-based movement
headed by Secretary-General Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s
Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq. There is a
strong diaspora presence in the United States as well. After building
ties to this group over the past year, the Bush Administration
formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement
16 ‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper. Agence France Press, April 7, 2003.
CRS-20
into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002.
(Kanna is on the Governing Council.)
The Opposition Positions Itself Before War/Second ILA
Designations. The Bush Administration applauded efforts during 2001 and 2002
by the ex-military led groups to coordinate with each other and with the INC and
other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London and jointly run with the
INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers. However, since the regime vacated
Baghdad on April 9, 2003, virtually none of the ex-military led groups listed above
has openly sought a major role in post-Saddam Iraq or attracted major followings.
As a decision whether to launch military action approached, President Bush
issued a determination (December 9, 2002) to draw down the remaining $92 million
authorized for defense articles and services under the Iraq Liberation Act for the
INA, the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi
opposition groups designated by me under the Act before or after this
determination.” That same day, the Bush Administration made six of the ex-military
led factions discussed above (except the Higher Council for National Salvation)
eligible to receive draw downs under the ILA. The announcement appeared to be
part of reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists in tasks that could assist U.S.
forces, possibly including combat units.17 An initial group of 3,000 was selected, but
only about 70 oppositionists completed training at an air base (Taszar) in Hungary,
according to press reports.18 These oppositionists served with U.S. forces in
Operation Iraqi Freedom as translators and mediators between U.S. forces and local
leaders, and most did not stay in Iraq, according to observers.
As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began
planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002,
with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in
London. The conference was organized by the same six exile groups whose leaders
visited Washington in August 2002, but included other groups as well, and they
discussed whether the opposition should declare a provisional government. The
Administration opposed that step on the grounds that doing so would give the
impression that the United States was backing the exile groups in their efforts to
dominate post-war Iraq politically. The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65-
member follow-up committee, which some criticized as weighted heavily toward
Shiite Islamist groups such as SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24-
27, 2003, in northern Iraq, and formed, against the urging of U.S. representatives at
the meeting, a six-seat committee to prepare for a transition regime. The six-person
committee included PUK leader Talabani, KDP leader Barzani, SCIRI leader
Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign
minister Adnan Pachachi. (A member from each of these groups is on the
Governing Council, as is Pachachi.)
17 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.”
Washington Post, October 19, 2002.
18 Williams, Daniel. “U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles.” Washington Post, December
18, 2002.
CRS-21
Adnan Pachachi, who is about 80, served as foreign minister and ambassador
to the United Nations during the 1960s, under the military governments of Abd al-
Salam and then Abd al-Rahman Arif (“the Arif brothers”). Pachachi lived in exile
in the UAE during Saddam Hussein’s rule, and heads a small party called the “Iraqi
Independent Democrats.”
Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the
new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete
disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if that country wanted to avert military
action. In a probable effort to garner international support for any U.S.-led war effort
against Iraq, the Administration had downplayed the goal of regime change in
President Bush’s September 12, 2002, speech before the United Nations General
Assembly, stressing instead the need to enforce U.N. resolutions that required Iraqi
disarmament. However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change
goal after February 2003 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course.
The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March 2003
breakdown of U.N. diplomacy over whether the U.N. Security Council should
authorize war against Iraq for failing to comply with Resolution 1441. The
diplomatic breakdown followed several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by
the director of the U.N. inspection body UNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification,
and Inspection Commission) Hans Blix and the director of the International Atomic
Energy Agency (IAEA), Mohammad al-Baradei, most recently on March 7, 2003.
The briefings, based on WMD inspections that resumed November 27, 2002, under
Resolution 1441, were generally critical of Iraq for failing to pro-actively cooperate
to clear up outstanding questions about Iraq’s WMD program. However, the latter
two briefings (February 24 and March 7, 2003) noted progress in clearing up
outstanding WMD questions. The Blix/Baradei briefings said Iraq had not accounted
for its past WMD, but the two did not state that they were certain that Iraq had
retained WMD, or that they had uncovered any banned WMD. Iraq declared short
range ballistic missiles that were determined by Blix to be of prohibited ranges, and
Blix ordered Iraq to destroy them. Iraq began the destruction prior to the launching
of the U.S.-led war. (For more detail on the final round of inspections and evidence
of WMD programs found in the post-war period, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117: Iraq:
Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.)
Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and
Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that
inspections should be given more time. They noted that Iraq was well contained by
sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones. Those who agreed with this
view maintained that, as long as Iraq allowed access to U.N. weapons inspections
under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national
security. The inspectors reported few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700
inspections of about 400 different sites. Others experts believed that, even if Iraq
were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could have been deterred by U.S.
overall strategic superiority, presumably including the U.S. nuclear arsenal.
The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq
had not fundamentally decided to disarm. The Administration asserted on March 17,
2003, that diplomatic options to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full
CRS-22
attention to military action. That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and
his sons, Uday and Qusay, an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war.
They refused the ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March
19, 2003.
In the war, Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and
British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the Iraqi military, at times, put
up stiff resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi military commanders
or Baathist political figures came forward to try to establish a post-Saddam
government, but senior regime leaders fled Baghdad, and the whereabouts of some
of the top leadership, including Saddam Hussein, are unknown. No WMD was used,
although Iraq did fire some ballistic missiles into Kuwait. It is not clear whether
those missiles were of ranges prohibited by the United Nations (greater than 150 km).
Post-Saddam Governance Issues
Since Saddam Hussein’s regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, there has
been increasing debate about the effectiveness of U.S. policy toward Iraq. The
outcome of the debate might depend on such factors as the pace and costs of
reconstruction; the degree of resistance to the U.S.-led occupation; the amount of
WMD ultimately found, if any; and whether a new government is stable and
democratic. The same U.S. concerns about fragmentation of and instability in Iraq
that existed in prior years are present in the current debate over how to establish a
post-war regime. Although some Iraqi civilians have welcomed U.S. and British
troops in areas captured, other Iraqis now want U.S. and British forces to leave Iraq.
Some experts believe that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall under the control of
pro-Iranian Shiite Islamist forces who are asserting growing control over areas
inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites. Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s population but
have been under-represented in every Iraqi government since modern Iraq’s
formation in 1920. (For further information on economic reconstruction and its
funding, see CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Reconstruction
Assistance.)
The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA). After the fall of the regime,
the United States set up an occupation structure. The Bush Administration initially
tasked Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) to direct civilian reconstruction, working through
a staff of U.S. diplomats and other U.S. government personnel who are serving as
advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various ministries. He headed the Office of
Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance (ORHA), within the Department of
Defense, created by a January 20, 2003 executive order. After spending the combat
phase of the war in neighboring Kuwait, Garner and some of his staff of about 200
deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003, to begin work.
Press reports said that senior U.S. officials were dissatisfied with the slow pace
of reconstruction under Garner, and on May 6, 2003, the Administration appointed
former ambassador L. Paul Bremer to lead the overall reconstruction effort, with a
focus on political reconstruction. He arrived on May 12, 2003, to head the CPA,
which subsumed ORHA. The appointment represented an apparent adjustment from
CRS-23
the original structure of the U.S. reconstruction effort, although the Administration
stated that it was always envisioned that a civilian would eventually take over the
U.S. effort and denied it was an indication of high-level dissatisfaction with the
effort. U.S. officials now refer to the CPA as an occupying authority legitimized by
U.N. Security Council Resolution 1483 of May 22, 2003. Among other provisions,
the resolution lifted U.N. sanctions on Iraq. Another alteration of the U.S. post-war
structure was made public in early October 2003; the White House announced that
an “Iraq Stabilization Group” under the direction of National Security Adviser
Condoleezza Rice would coordinate interagency support to the CPA in Iraq. The
move was widely viewed as a diminution in Defense Department control over post-
war governance and reconstruction. In press interviews, Secretary of Defense
Rumsfeld said he was not informed of the restructuring in advance.
Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule
The Administration says that U.S. forces will stay in Iraq until there is a stable,
democratic successor regime that is at peace with its neighbors. However, there has
been some debate between U.S. authorities and key anti-Saddam groups over the
pace and the means to move Iraq to self-government. This debate has taken on new
urgency since resistance attacks on U.S. forces and international organizations in Iraq
have escalated since September 2003.
Shortly after the regime fell, the United States began a process of establishing
a successor regime. Senior U.S. officials, including deputy Defense Secretary Paul
Wolfowitz, said in early April 2003 that they hoped to have a successor regime in
place within six months of the fall of the regime. The Administration organized an
April 15 meeting, in Nasiriyah, of about 100 Iraqis of varying ideologies, present by
U.S. invitation. Many of the attendees were representatives of Iraqi tribal groupings
that had not been politically active before. SCIRI, along with several Shiite clerics,
boycotted and called for an Islamic state. Another meeting of about 250 delegates
was held in Baghdad on April 26, ending in agreement to hold a broader meeting,
within a month, to name an interim Iraqi administration. However, in mid-May
2003, U.S. officials, apparently fearing that existing major groups could not form a
stable regime, or that Shiite Islamists would dominate a successor authority, cut this
process off and abandoned any public deadlines for transferring sovereignty to an
Iraqi government.
Formation of the Major Party Grouping. In parallel with the April 26
meeting, the five most prominent exiled opposition groups met, with U.S. envoys
present: SCIRI, the INC, the INA, the PUK, and the KDP. On May 9, 2003, the five
major parties agreed to expand their grouping to seven, adding to their ranks the little
known Nasir al-Chadirchy, head of a party called the National Democratic Party of
Iraq, as well as the Shiite Islamist Da’wa Party. The major-party grouping later
criticized the U.S. decision in May 2003 to delay the formation of an Iraqi self-rule
authority and to instead form an advisory body of 25 to 30 Iraqis.
With U.S. casualties in Iraq mounting and a growing sense of resentment among
the Iraqi population, the U.S.-led occupation authority (Coalition Provisional
Authority, CPA) began tilting back toward the views of the major Iraqi exile parties.
U.S. administrator for Iraq Paul Bremer (see below) said on June 23, 2003, that the
CRS-24
planned 25- to 30-member body would have “real authority” from its first days and
would not be purely advisory. He said it would nominate ministry heads, recommend
policies, and convene a “constitutional conference” to draft a new constitution.19
The Governing Council and Cabinet. On July 13, 2003, a Governing
Council was unveiled to the Iraqi public, appointed by the U.S.-led CPA but
reflecting the influence of the major-party grouping, as well as prominent Iraqis who
were never in exile and were not affiliated with the exiled opposition. The Council
has 25 members, of which 3 are women and 13 are Shiite Muslims. Of the 13 Shiite
Muslims on the Council, one seat is held by SCIRI directly (Abd al-Aziz Al Hakim,
younger brother of Mohammad Baqr), one is held by a guerrilla affiliated with SCIRI
(Abdul Karim al-Muhammadawi), two are Da’wa Party (Ibrahim al-Jafari and Abdul
Zahra Othman) leaders, and considered allies of SCIRI, and one is a former Da’wa
activist (Muwaffaq al-Ruba’i). Also on the Council is a moderate Shiite cleric,
Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum, who is not affiliated with SCIRI or the Da’wa. He
headed the Ahl al-Bayt charity center in London since the 1980s. The remaining
Shiite Muslims, such as Chalabi and Iyad al-Alawi, are mostly considered secular.
Appointed to the Council was one Sunni Muslim Islamist, Muhsin Abdul Hamid,
who heads the Iraqi Islamic Party, but he does not have a clear relationship with the
Shiite Islamists on the Council.
The Council includes five Kurds, including the two main Kurdish leaders Jalal
Talabani and Masud Barzani. The Kurds are generally considered the most pro-U.S.
of all Iraqi factions and are generally reluctant to openly criticize the CPA.
Although not a cohesive bloc, the Council includes exiles and non-exiles who
generally want a liberal democracy and could be considered generally pro-U.S. Most
prominent among them is Chalabi, but this grouping includes National Democratic
Party leader Nasir al-Chadirchy and Adnan Pachachi, both of whom are Sunni
Muslims. Another, former foreign ministry official Akila al-Hashimi, a Shiite
woman, was killed in an assassination attempt on September 20, 2003. Others most
likely to affiliate with this bloc include Sunni businessman Samir Shakir al-
Sumaidy; Sunni civil engineer Ghazi al-Yawar, who is president of Saudi-based
Hicap Technology; the Shiite coordinator for the Human Rights Association of
Babel, Ahmad al-Barak; and the two other women Council members, Songul
Chapouk, a member of the Turkomen minority, who heads the Iraqi Women’s
Association, and Raja al-Khuza’i, a Shiite who heads the maternity hospital in
Diwaniyah.
A member of the Assyrian Christian community is on the Council. Yonadam
Kanna, the secretary-general of the Democratic Assyrian Movement, is on the body.
It is not known what other members of the Council, if any, he might be aligned with,
although it is reasonable to believe that he might have an affinity for fellow residents
of northern Iraq, the Kurds. Also unclear is whether or not Hamid al-Musa, the
Shiite head of the Iraqi Communist Party, is allied with anyone else on the Council.
19 Transcript: Bremer Reviews Progress, Plans for Iraq Reconstruction. Washington File,
June 23, 2003.
CRS-25
The major factions not directly represented on the Council are varied. They
include the Sadr movement; the Hawza of Ayatollah Sistani; the Baath Party or other
Sunni elements of the former regime; and the Movement for Constitutional
Monarchy. Some key tribes do not have members on the Council either. In some
of the above cases, the CPA did not want to include a particular faction; in other
cases, a faction might not have wanted to be associated with the occupation.
In late July 2003, the Council decided that nine Council members will rotate as
chairpersons, each for one month. Those who rotate that post are Chalabi, Alawi of
the INA, Hakim of SCIRI, Pachachi, Barzani of the KDP, Talabani of the PUK,
Ibrahim Jafari (Da’wa Parrty), Bahr al-Ulum, and Abdul Hamid, the Sunni Islamist.
Among its first actions, the Council authorized the establishment of an Iraqi
war crimes tribunal for Saddam and associates accused of major human rights abuses.
It empowered a three-member delegation to seek formal U.N. recognition; Chalabi,
Pachachi, and Akila Hashimi, traveled to the United Nations in July 2003 and
received a supportive statement from Secretary General Kofi Annan. No decision
on seating the Governing Council at the United Nations was announced. The
Council helped develop a plan, announced September 21, 2003, to open Iraq’s
economy to foreign investment and many of its companies to foreign ownership.
New Cabinet. The Council also completed work on a governmental structure.
On September 3, 2003, a 25-member cabinet was sworn in. Its composition has
roughly the same factional and ethnic balance of the Council itself. Two “ministers”
— Ibrahim Bahr al-Ulum (oil ministry) and Ali al-Alawi (trade ministry) — are close
relatives of Council members. Another, “foreign minister” Hoshyar Zibari, is a
longtime close aide to KDP chief Masud Barzani. Zibari served during most of the
1990s as KDP representative in Washington. Longtime PUK activist Abdul-Latif
Rashid is the “minister” of water resources. No “defense minister” was named,
because U.S.-led military forces are responsible for defense.
The “interior minister” is Nuri Badran, an INA activist. Badran is attempting
to build on the INA’s contacts among ex-Baathists and ex-military people to develop
a new domestic intelligence and national police network,20 although recruitment of
such categories of Iraqis has raised suspicions of other Governing Council members,
such as Ahmad Chalabi. Chalabi has been the most vocal of all major post-Saddam
figures in calling for the complete dismissal and isolation of all those with ties to the
former regime.
Debate Over Council Authority/November Transition Plan. Press
reports began to appear in late August 2003 said that U.S. authorities were
dissatisfied at the relatively low level of activity of the Governing Council, and were
pressing it to take a more prominent and public role in post-war political decision-
making. Several Council members said that the Council could not do so unless and
20 Williams, Daniel. New Ministry to Recruit Paramilitary Force in Iraq. Washington Post,
September 2, 2003.
CRS-26
until the U.S.-led coalition begins transferring greater authority to it.21 Friction also
emerged in October 2003 over a time-frame for a return to Iraqi sovereignty; the
major exile parties on the Council want an early restoration of Iraqi sovereignty.
Other tensions emerged over U.S. acceptance of Turkey’s offer to send peacekeeping
troops to Iraq; most Iraqi resent Turkey as the successor of the Ottoman Empire that
ruled Iraq for the 400 years prior to World War I.
Differences also appeared over the Council’s failure to agree on a process for
drafting a new constitution and holding national elections. The Bush Administration
had linked completion of these steps to the end of the U.S. occupation and a
restoration of full Iraqi sovereignty. In early August 2003, the Governing Council
tapped INC activist Kanaan Makiya to head a 25-person committee that will
determine the process for drafting the constitution. However, the committee
deadlocked, with some arguing for an appointed constitutional drafting commission
and others, such as Ayatollah Sistani, saying the drafters should be elected. Secretary
of State Powell said in late September 2003 that the Iraqis should be able to draft a
constitution within six months, although Iraqi officials subsequently said it would
be very difficult to meet that deadline. U.N. Security Council Resolution 1511, of
October 16, 2003, invited the Council to develop a timetable by December 15, 2003,
for drafting a constitution.
In mid-November, with popular resistance to the occupation appearing to grow
and resistance attacks becoming more effective, as outlined in a reported CIA
assessment,22 CPA administrator Bremer flew urgently to Washington to consult with
President Bush and other members of the national security team. According to press
accounts, President Bush authorized Bremer to discuss with the Governing Council
a new plan to accelerate the transfer of political sovereignty to Iraqis. On November
15, the CPA and the Governing Council announced they had reached agreement on
a plan that, according to several press reports, includes the following:
! the writing of a provisional constitution, or set of “Basic Laws.”
! the establishment of 15 person committees in each of Iraq’s 18
provinces who will select participants for local caucuses. By the
end of May 2004, the caucuses should select members of a 250-
member national assembly.
! By July 1, 2004, the selection by the 250 member national assembly
of members of an executive branch, including designation of a
provisional leader of Iraq. This new provisional government is to
assume sovereignty. According to Bremer, there is to be an
agreement between the transition government and the United States
on the continuation of the U.S. military presence.
21 Filkins, Dexter and Neil MacFarquhar. U.S. Official Tells Iraqis To Assert More
Authority. New York Times, August 21, 2003.
22 Landay, Jonathan. “CIA Has A Bleak Analysis of Iraq.” Philadelphia Inquirer,
November 12, 2003.
CRS-27
elections of drafters of a permanent
The elections are to be managed by the transition
! By March 15, 2005, constitution. government.
! By December 31, 2005, the holding of national elections for a
permanent government.
The agreement has attracted mixed reviews both abroad and within Iraq. Some
believe that it will lead to a relatively rapid restoration of sovereignty that should
calm resistance. Others believe it represents a U.S. effort to draw down its presence
in Iraq to minimize further U.S. casualties, and that the political process outlined will
not ensure formation of a genuine democracy, but rather a coalition of individual
factions. Others believe that the process outlined is relatively vague and that much
infighting will result at each stage of the process, including the selection of caucus
participants, the naming of assembly members, the selection of a transition
government, and the naming of a leader of the transition government. Some believe
the process will favor the well-organized former exile parties, although others believe
the plan provides sufficient opportunity for newly enfranchised groups and
individuals in Iraq to gain some say in the political transition.
As part of the governance planning process that took place before the war,
the U.S. State Department supported a group of Iraqi exiles to address issues that
would confront a successor government.23 The State Department working group (the
“Future of Iraq Project”) does not appear to have significant influence on any post-
war regime decision-making in Iraq, although some Iraqis who participated are now
in various Iraqi official bodies. Some experts believe the Defense Department was
promoting a competing or separate group of exiles.24 The State Department project,
which cost $5 million, consisted of working groups that discussed (1) transitional
justice; (2) public finance; (3) public and media outreach; (4) democratic principles;
(5) water, agriculture, and the environment; (6) health and human services; (7)
economy and infrastructure; (8) education; (9) refugees, internally-displaced persons,
and migration policy; (10) foreign and national security policy; (11) defense
institutions and policy; (12) free media; (13) civil society capacity-building; (14) anti-
corruption measures; and (15) oil and energy.
Iraqi Resistance and U.S. Security Operations
Experts note that the U.S. policy debate has intensified since September 2003
because of the apparently escalating Iraqi resistance, an increasing number of U.S.
casualties taken, and the slow rate at which such U.S. initiatives such as the
establishment of a democratic successor regime is moving forward. At present,
about 145,000 U.S. and British troops are in Iraq; of those, about 130,000 are U.S.
personnel and about 12,000 are British. There are an additional 10,000 foreign
forces, deploying in accordance with international commitments to post-war
23 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,”
Washington File, December 11, 2002.
24 Fineman, Mark, Robin Wright, and Doyle McManus. Preparing for War, Stumbling to
Peace. Los Angeles Times, July 18, 2003.
CRS-28
peacekeeping (see below). Earlier press reports said the Administration wanted to
draw the U.S. force level down to about 35,000 by the end of 2003, but continued
unrest and insecurity in Iraq appear to have made that goal untenable, and some press
reports say that Defense Department officials estimate that over 100,000 U.S. troops
might still be in Iraq in the summer of 2004. Another report says the Administration
wants to try to reduce U.S. forces to 100,000 by mid-2004 and to 50,000 by 2005.25
The Resistance. U.S. commanders in Iraq said in early October 2003 that
the sophistication and capabilities of the armed resistance to the U.S. governance of
Iraq is growing. Centcom commander John Abizaid had said on July 17, 2003, that
the United States faces a “classic guerrilla war” led by “mid-level Baath Party
activists organized regionally.” Some elements of the resistance appear to want to
restore the old regime, while others appear to be motivated by opposition to foreign
rule or the goal of forming an Islamic state. Other resistance fighters appear to be
motivated by the difficulty the U.S. and British authorities have had in restoring
civilian services or to avenge the accidental killing of Iraqi civilians during U.S.
operations. On average, there are about 30 attacks on U.S. forces per day.
Resistance attacks have killed about 160 U.S. military personnel since President
Bush declared an end to “major combat operations” in Iraq on May 1, 2003. The
most lethal resistance attack was the November 2 shoot-down of a U.S. Chinook
helicopter, killing 15 American forces. Another incident, the November 15 collision
of two Blackhawks killing 17 American soldiers might have been the result of one
helicopter trying to avoid ground fire, although the cause of the collision has not been
announced.
U.S. military operations are focused on hunting down guerrilla resistance leaders
and their suspected Baathist financiers, as well as finding former leader Saddam
Hussein. U.S. forces have conducted at least six sweep operations since mid-June
2003 to search for Baath and other oppositionists; these operations were given the
names Peninsula Strike (June 9-15); Desert Scorpion (June 15-August 1);
Sidewinder (June 29-July 7); Soda Mountain (July 12-17); Ivy Serpent (July 12 -
early September); Ivy Focus (September 10 - ongoing); Ivy Cyclone and Ivy Cyclone
II (November 4-ongoing); and Iron Hammer (November 12 -). Iron Hammer, which
was launched as response to growing resistance attacks, began on November 12; it
has included air attacks on insurgent positions near Baghdad and nearby towns.
The Bush Administration says resistance comes not only from remnants of the
Baath Party but also from Arab volunteers, possibly linked to or supportive of Al
Qaeda, who have come to Iraq from other countries to fight the U.S. occupation.
U.S. military officials say they have arrested about 200 foreign fighters in recent
sweep operations. Resistance attacks are more frequent in the Sunni areas of central
Iraq, where support for Saddam Hussein’s regime was traditionally stronger than
elsewhere, but there have been recent fatal attacks on other foreign forces in the
Shiite areas of Baghdad (“Sadr City”) and in southern Iraq. Some of the Shiite riots
and demonstrations have been influenced by pro-Sadr activists. One report says that
Sunni Islamists, led by Shaikh Ahmad Qubaysi, who returned in April 2003 from
25 Ricks, Thomas. Reduction in U.S. Troops Eyed for ‘04. Washington Post, October 19,
2003.
CRS-29
exile in the UAE, is assisting the Sadr faction.26 If true, this could represent the
emergence of a Sunni-Shiite Islamist anti-occupation coalition.
Some U.S. military officials, including Gen. Abizaid,27 put the resistance
numbers at about 5,000, although they do not explain precisely how they arrive at
that figure. The resistance appears to be operating in relatively small cells, some of
which have broadcast photos of armed fighters, although some U.S. commanders
believe that Saddam and members of his inner circle who are still at large might be
coordinating some resistance elements. Some reports say U.S. commanders believe
the resistance is acquiring a more nationwide structure. Some resistance factions
have identified themselves as distinct groups, scribbling graffiti warnings and faxing
statements to the Arab satellite television network Al Jazeera, UAE-based Al Arabiya
TV, and other outlets. Suggesting a mix of nationalist and Islamist factions, they are
identifying themselves with names such as:
! Al Awda (the Return), believed to be the largest and most active
resistance group;
! Saddam’s Jihad;
! the Movement of the Victorious Sec;t
! Iraq’s Revolutionaries - Al Anbar’s Armed Brigades;
! The Popular Resistance for the Liberation of Iraq
! the Salafist Jihad Group (Salafi is a Sunni extremist Islamic
movement)
! Armed Islamic Movement for Al Qaeda - Falluja Branch. Actual
linkages to Al Qaeda, if any, are not known.
! Jaysh (Army) of Mohammad, said to be a highly active group
! Black Banners Group
! Nasirite Organization
! Armed Vanguard of the Second Mohammad Army. Claimed
responsibility for U.N. headquarters bombing and threatened attacks
on any Arab countries that participate in Iraq peacekeeping. The
credibility of the claim is not known.
The continuing resistance has complicated the U.S. mission. In addition to
targeting U.S. forces, resistance fighters have assassinated Iraqis who are
cooperating with the United States and attacked Iraqi oil export pipelines and water
and other infrastructure facilities, as well as symbols of the international presence,
including U.N. headquarters. By attacking these targets, the resistance appears to be
hoping to cause international relief workers and peacekeeping forces to leave Iraq,
slow reconstruction, and turn the Iraqi populace against the occupation.
On the other hand, the Administration maintains that reconstruction is
proceeding apace and has logged a number of major accomplishments, as discussed
in a White House fact sheet and in Administration statements, and that life is, for the
26 Shadid, Anthony. Iraqi Clerics Unite in Rare Alliance. Washington Post, August 17,
2003.
27 Press briefing by Gen. Abizaid, November 13, 2003.
CRS-30
most part, returning to normal throughout Iraq. (“White House Notes Successful
Results of Iraq Liberation,” August 8, 2003.)
An apparent terrorist component to the resistance began to emerge in August
2003 with car and truck bombings in Baghdad of the embassy of Jordan (August 7)
and U.N. headquarters at the Canal Hotel (August 19). The latter bombing killed 23
persons including the U.N. representative in Iraq, Sergio Vieira de Mello, and
prompted some drawdown in U.N. and non-governmental organization personnel in
Iraq. The August 29, 2003, car bombing in Najaf that killed Mohammad Baqr Al
Hakim may have killed over 100 persons, according to news reports. Smaller suicide
bombings have occurred since at Iraqi police facilities, the U.N. compound, and other
sites. On October 25, 2003, the resistance rocketed the hotel at which visiting deputy
Defense Secretary Wolfowitz was staying; he was unhurt. The next day, there were
four suicide car bombings at various sites in Baghdad, including the headquarters of
the International Committee of the Red Cross. A November 12 resistance suicide
attack killed 18 Italian peacekeepers at their headquarters in Nasiriyah.
“Iraqification”/Building Security Institutions. An option for improving
security conditions that has been pursued by the Administration is to try to
increasingly transfer security responsibilities to Iraqi institutions. Some in the
Administration appear to prefer this option to alternatives, advocated by some in and
outside the Administration, that involve turning over greater responsibility to the
international community in exchange for donations of peacekeeping forces. This
initiative is an attempt to improve security in Iraq, generate better intelligence on
resistance factions, and free up U.S. forces for counter-insurgency missions. It is
hoped that these institutions could eventually take over the security function from the
United States. As of mid-November 2003, about 120,000 Iraqis have been recruited
to these institutions, and the goal is to have about 220,000 Iraqis serving in these
institutions by 2004. However, there are concerns about the loyalty and dedication
of the new recruits, in the absence of Iraqi sovereignty and a clearly defined
governing structure. Some Iraqi forces have fought crime and the resistance and
helped put down protests, but others have sometimes abandoned their posts and
allowed their facilities to be attacked. Some are now key targets of the resistance.
A related issue is whether or not the United States will agree to a proposal by
the major Iraqi parties on the Governing Council to deploy their individual militia
fighters to help augment security.28 The militias could provide additional forces,
many of whom have substantial training, that could benefit efforts to maintain
security. The potential risks of the proposal are that the party-based militias would
likely retain loyalties to their party leaders, not necessarily to an Iraqi government.
Another risk is that there might be tensions among the various militias that might
erupt into internecine violence.
The CPA formally disbanded the former Iraqi army following Bremer’s arrival
in Baghdad. Some criticized the move as a factor that is now contributing to
resistance activity, but others believe the move was necessary to ensure that Iraq
28 Tyler, Patrick. Iraqi Factions Seek to Take Over Security Duties. New York Times,
September 20, 2003.
CRS-31
moves toward democracy. As part of U.S. efforts to build new Iraqi security
institutions, the CPA is in the process of training recruits for a planned 40,000
person New Iraqi Army, about 10% the size of the pre-war Iraqi force. The force is
expected to be at or near full strength by mid-2004, although some experts believe
that this is too rapid a pace to ensure proper training and ensure the loyalty of all
recruits. Former Defense Department official Walter Slocombe is in charge of
forming the new Iraqi army. According to Slocombe, many soldiers of the former
army are being recruited, but former members who were at the top four ranks of the
Baath Party are not eligible for recruitment. The first 700 recruits were graduated
in early October 2003. The Administration requested about $2 billion to train and
equip the new army in its FY2004 supplemental funding request; that level of
funding is provided by the FY2004 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 108-106).
The CPA is also trying to turn policing functions over to Iraqis. Overall, about
80,000 Iraqi policemen have returned to their jobs, near the total goal. About 30,000
of the police will undergo training in Hungary, and Jordan has offered to train about
30,000 Iraqi police. The Administration has requested about $1 billion to train and
equip an Iraqi police force in its FY2004 supplemental funding request; $950 million
was appropriated in P.L. 108-106.
The CPA is also recruiting a 22,000-man, paramilitary “Civil Defense Corps,”
deployed in each of Iraq’s provinces, to assist in maintaining order. A separate
20,000-person “Facilities Protection Service” is envisioned to guard installations
such as oil pumping stations, electricity substations, and like facilities. The
Administration has requested about $140 million to train and equip these civil
defense forces in the FY2004 supplemental funding request; that amount was
appropriated in P.L. 108-106.
Internationalization.29 Some believe that enlisting greater international
participation in peacekeeping would be more effective than the rapid recruitment of
Iraqi security institutions. At times over the past few months, it appeared that the
Administration had decided or was about to decide on this strategy, although it
appears the Administration is de-emphasizing this option in favor of those involving
greater U.S. control over post-war governance. In his speech on Iraq of September
7, 2003, President Bush said he had authorized Secretary of State Powell to negotiate
a Security Council resolution that would authorize a multinational peacekeeping
force in Iraq, and thereby perhaps trigger additional pledges of force contributions.
Thus far, 29 countries (in addition to the United States and Britain) have
committed forces to help secure Iraq. The United Kingdom and Poland are leading
multinational divisions in southern Iraq and central Iraq, respectively. The UK-led
force numbers about 14,000, of which all but 2,000 are British forces. The Polish-led
force numbers about 9,200, of which 2,300 are Polish. About 27,000 non-U.S.
troops are now on the ground (including 12,000 British). Confirmed force pledges
29 For additional information on international contributions to Iraq peacekeeping and
reconstruction, see CRS Report RL32105. Post-War Iraq: A Table and Chronology of
Foreign Contributions.
CRS-32
include those in Table 1, below. For a more thorough list, which includes
contributions of support or medical personnel, see CRS Report RL32105.
The commitments of several large nations, including Germany and France, are
contingent on a restructuring of post-war governance to restore Iraqi sovereignty.
Others, including Japan and South Korea, have expressed willingness to commit
substantial numbers of troops but have hesitated on actual deployments due to
security conditions. On October 7, the Turkish parliament approved a government
recommendation to send up to 10,000 peacekeeping forces, but the pledge drew
criticism from Iraq’s Governing Council that Turkey will likely use the deployment
to meddle in Iraq’s internal affairs. Turkey subsequently informed the United States
that Iraqi opposition made the deployment unworkable at this time. The position of
U.N. Secretary General Kofi Annan appears to be close to that of France; he has cut
U.N. staff in Iraq because of security concerns and said the United Nations should
only play a larger role in Iraq if there is a road map to an early restoration of Iraqi
sovereignty.
Since the fall of Saddam Hussein, the Administration has sought U.N. backing
for its post-war efforts. Resolution 1483 (adopted unanimously) provided for a U.N.
special representative to coordinate the activities of U.N. personnel in Iraq and to
help establish a successor government. The Secretary General subsequently (May
27, 2003) appointed de Mello (see above) for that post. The resolution also gave the
United Nations a monitoring role over the Development Fund for Iraq, the account
controlled by the CPA for reconstruction. The resolution did not authorize a return
to Iraq of U.N. weapons inspectors, although the resolution provided for deliberations
on that issue. Some International Atomic Energy Agency inspectors returned to Iraq
in June 2003 on a limited nuclear mission in Baghdad. On August 14, 2003, the
U.N. Security Council adopted a compromise resolution, Resolution 1500, that
“welcomed,” but did not “endorse,” the formation of the Governing Council, an
apparent nod to U.S. requests. The resolution also enhanced U.N. authority in Iraq
somewhat by establishing a “U.N. Assistance Mission for Iraq.” The resolution did
not formally authorize an international peacekeeping force for Iraq ; Resolution 1483
already “calls on” governments to contribute forces for stabilization) and did not
measurably dilute U.S. authority over post-war governance in Iraq.
These resolutions did not satisfy the requirements of many nations that want to
phase out the U.S.-led occupation in favor of a U.N.-led governance process. The
United States obtained agreement on Resolution 1511 (adopted unanimously on
October 16, 2003) that authorized a “multinational force under unified command”
and “invited” the Governing Council to develop, by December 15, 2003, a timetable
for drafting a constitution. However, the resolution did not meet the core demands
of such countries as France and has not attracted new troop pledges from the major
countries such as France and Germany. Some in the Bush Administration reportedly
do not want to cede control over post-war governance to the United Nations or other
nations; they maintain that doing so would confuse the post-war command structure
and possibly lead to the formation of a government in Iraq that is not committed to
democracy and not necessarily pro-U.S.
During negotiations on Resolution 1511, a number of different formulas were
discussed for broadening peacekeeping duties in Iraq. Deputy Secretary of State
CRS-33
Richard Armitage told journalists in late August 2003 that one idea under discussion
was for a multinational force, under U.N. leadership, that would be commanded by
a U.S. military official.30 Another possibility was for NATO to command a
multilateral force. The United States had some discussions with NATO on whether
the organization would take on Iraq as a fifth peacekeeping mission. On July 10,
2003, the Senate adopted an amendment, by a vote of 97-0, to a State Department
authorization bill (S. 925) calling on the Administration to formally ask NATO to
lead a peacekeeping force for Iraq. A related bill (H.R. 2112) was introduced in the
House on May 15, 2003. (For more information on this possibility, see CRS Report
RL32068, An Enhanced European Role in Iraq?)
Table 1. Multinational Division Force Pledges
Albania 70
Armenia 13
Australia 850
Azerbaijan 150
Bulgaria 500
Czech Republic 400
Denmark 380
Dominican Republic 300
Estonia 47
Georgia 70
Honduras 370
Hungary 300
Italy 3,000
Kazakhstan 27
Latvia 150
Lithuania 130
Macedonia 38
Mongolia 180
Netherlands 1,100
Nicaragua 230
Norway 150
Poland 2,300
30 Jehl, Douglas. U.S. Now Signals It Might Consider U.N. Force in Iraq. New York Times,
August 28, 2003.
CRS-34
Portugal 120
Romania 734
Singapore 192
Slovakia 85
Spain 1,300
Thailand 443
Ukraine 1,650
Total (non-U.S. non-
U.K.) Pledged
15,279
Restarting Iraq’s Economic Engine
One of the major functions of the CPA is to accomplish economic
reconstruction. By all accounts, restoring Iraq’s economy depends, in large part, on
rehabilitating Iraq’s energy infrastructure.31
The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction. As the driver of Iraq’s
economy, the rebuilding of the oil industry is receiving substantial U.S. attention. It
has been widely assumed that Iraq’s vast oil reserves, believed second only to those
of Saudi Arabia, would be used to fund much of the costs of reconstruction. Then
presidential spokesman Ari Fleischer said on February 18, 2003, referring to Iraq’s
oil reserves, that Iraq has “a variety of means ... to shoulder much of the burden for
[its] own reconstruction.” Many observers had been concerned that an Iraqi regime
on the verge of defeat could destroy its own oil fields, but coalition forces quickly
secured Iraq’s southern oil fields after combat began. Only about 9 oil wells were set
on fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that region, and all were put out quickly.
The northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul were not set afire.
In early May 2003, the U.S.-led coalition set up an advisory board, headed by
former Shell executive Phillip Carroll, to oversee the rebuilding of Iraq’s oil sector.
An Iraqi oil industry professional, Thamer Ghadhban, was named to serve as head
of the interim management team that has run Iraq’s oil ministry and reported to the
advisory board. The first exports began in late June 2003, but exports were running
at only about 800,000 barrels per day as of late September 2003, far less than the 1.5
million barrels per day originally estimated, due to sabotage and the slow pace of
sector reconstruction. Iraq’s new “Oil Minister,” Ibrahim Bahr al-Ulum, said Iraq
was exporting at somewhat higher levels (just over 1 million barrels per day) as of
early October, and exports are said to be about 1.5 million barrels per day as of mid
November. Iraq’s pre-war export rate was about 2.2 million barrels per day, a level
that U.S. officials and Iraqi oil appointees have hoped to reach by late 2003. The
31 For information on U.S. and other funding for Iraq’s reconstruction, see CRS Report
RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Reconstruction Assistance.
CRS-35
FY2004 supplemental appropriations request asks for $1.2 billion to repair Iraq’s oil
infrastructure, plus $900 million to import refined energy products that Iraq’s
infrastructure cannot currently produce until it is repaired. P.L. 108-106 provided
the requested amount for infrastructure, but only about $700 million for imports of
energy products.
The CPA-produced budget for Iraq for calendar 2003, which is based on the
planned levels of oil exports, assumed that oil revenues would yield about $3.5
billion through the end of 2003, and provide about half of the approximately $6.6
billion budget for Iraq for the period. However, about $1.4 billion in oil revenues
were received by the end of October, somewhat less than anticipated. At inception,
the DFI Iraq contained about $7 billion when it was established in June 2003,
consisting of captured Iraqi assets, Iraqi assets abroad, the monies transferred from
the oil-for-food account, and U.S. funds available for reconstruction (FY2003
supplemental, P.L. 108-11, which appropriated about $2.5 billion for reconstruction).
As of late October 2003, the Development Fund for Iraq (DFI), set up by Resolution
1483, had a balance of about $2.3 billion.
In order to accelerate reconstruction, the DFI was deemed to require
international donations, such as those pledged at the October 23-24 donors’
conference in Madrid, additional U.S. appropriations, and funds remaining after the
U.N.-run “oil for food program” terminates on November 22, 2003 (see below). A
World Bank estimate, released in early October 2003, said Iraq reconstruction would
require about $56 billion during 2004-2007, including the $20 billion in U.S. funding
requested by the Administration in September 2003. At the Madrid donors
conference, donors pledged about $4 billion in grants and $9 billion in credits, in
addition to the $20 billion to be provided by the United States. (For additional
information on international pledges, see CRS Report RL32015, Post-War Iraq: A
Table and Chronology of Foreign Contributions.)
In late October 2003, a multilateral board to monitor the DFI, mandated by
Resolution 1483, was established (the International Advisory and Monitoring Board).
The DFI is held in the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, not Iraq’s Central Bank,
as outlined in Resolution 1483.
A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which
foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s
vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will
seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other
countries.
Supplemental Funding Needs.32 Partly because oil revenues have lagged
behind projections, in late August 2003 Bremer visited Washington to talk to other
Administration officials about the need to ask Congress for immediate supplemental
32 For information on the status of legislative consideration of the request for supplemental
funding, see RL32090, FY2004 Supplemental Appropriations for Iraq, Afghanistan, and the
Global War on Terrorism: Military Operations & Reconstruction Assistance.
CRS-36
funds for reconstruction needs, which Bremer estimates will run into the “several
tens of billions” over the next year. On September 8, 2003, President Bush stated
that he would request supplemental funding for FY2004 for the “war on terrorism,”
in the amount of $87 billion, of which over $70 billion would be for military
operations in and reconstruction of Iraq. Of that amount, about $50 billion would be
for military costs and about $20 billion for reconstruction of Iraq.
The FY2004 supplemental appropriation (conf. report H.Rept. 108-337, P.L.
108-106) provided the following funds for Iraq reconstruction (total $18.7 billion):
! $3.243 billion for security and law enforcement, including the New
Iraqi Army. border enforcement and other security functions;
! $1.32 billion for justice and civil society and democracy
development, including programs for women and youth, and the
formation of an independent human rights commission,
! $5.56 billion for electricity infrastructure rehabilitation,
! $1.89 billion for rehabilitating the energy infrastructure,
! $4.332 billion to repair water and sewage systems;
! $500 million for repair of transportation and telecommunications
infrastructure,
! $370 million to upgrade housing, roads, and bridges,
! $800 million to construct and equip hospitals and clinics, and
! $453 million for education, jobs training, and private sector
initiatives.
Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have
been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program.
The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put
in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was
suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various
aspects of the program departed Iraq. (See CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food
Program, Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.)
On March 28, 2003, the U.N. Security Council unanimously adopted Resolution
1472 that restarted the program’s operations and empowered the United Nations, for
a 45-day period (until May 12), to take direct control of all aspects of the program.
Under the new resolution, the United Nations is setting priorities for and directing the
delivery of already contracted supplies. The enhanced U.N. authority was extended
on April 25, 2003, to last at least until the six-month phase of the program expired
on June 3, 2003.
On April 17, 2003, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions
against Iraq, signaling that the Administration wanted to focus on restoring normal
international commerce with Iraq rather than extending the oil-for-food program.
Resolution 1483 lifted sanctions and provided for the phasing out of the oil for food
program within six months after adoption of that resolution on May 22; the program
terminates on November 21, 2003. The resolution also provided for the United
Nations to transfer to the new DFI $1 billion in funds held by the oil-for-food
program escrow fund. As of the start of the war, the program’s escrow account had
about $11 billion to fund imports of humanitarian and other goods. Since then, the
CRS-37
program has set priorities for about $8.5 billion in contracts, leaving about $1.5
billion in unallocated funds remaining, after subtracting the $1 billion already
transferred to the DFI in May 2003. Some press reports suggest that U.N. officials
believe the program should be extended in order to facilitate an orderly phase-out of
the program. The United States and Britain are said to oppose another extension and
say they are preparing to take over its functions. (For more information, see CRS
Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, International Sanctions, and Illicit
Trade.)
Searching for Former Regime Violations and Officials
Organs of the CPA and the U.S. government are attempting to uncover evidence
of gross human rights abuses and other violations of the regime of Saddam Hussein,
including evidence of WMD. A 1,500 person “Iraq Survey Group,” headed by a
U.S. military commander (Maj. Gen. Keith Dayton) but composed of many civilian
technical experts led by former U.N. weapons inspector David Kay, is attempting to
uncover alleged WMD. The Survey Group is also searching for mass graves of
victims of the former regime. In early October 2003, Kay released an interim report
on the Survey Group’s WMD investigation. The report said the Group had not found
actual weapons of mass destruction in Iraq, but it had found “dozens of WMD-related
program activities and significant amounts of equipment that Iraq concealed from the
United Nations during the inspections that began in late 2002.”33 The
Administration, according to press reports, has requested an additional $600 million
to fund the Survey Group for another six months, and about $300 million has been
spent on the search as of early October 2003.34
Thus far, the Survey Group has found at least 40 mass graves, some with
hundreds of corpses. Most appear to contain bodies of Kurdish and Shiite opponents
of the former regime, but some contain some of the bodies of about 600 Kuwaitis
missing from the first Gulf war. (WMD issues and the fate of the missing Kuwaitis
are discussed in CRS Issue Brief IB92117.)
An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is whether Saddam
Hussein and his associates should be prosecuted for war crimes and crimes against
humanity, if and when they are caught. The Administration said in early April 2003
that Saddam and his inner circle should be tried by Iraqis if they are captured,
although others might be tried by a U.S.-led process for any crimes committed in the
course of the 2003 war. In the year prior to the war, the Administration was
gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those it had
sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay (killed after discovery
by and a firefight with U.S. forces in Mosul on July 22, 2003); Ali Hassan al-Majid,
for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (captured August 21, 2003);
Muhammad Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered in mid-April 2003); Taha Yasin
33 Testimony of David Kay before the House and Senate Intelligence Committees, and the
Defense Subcommittee of the House Appropriations Committee. October 2, 2003.
34 Politics Aside, Iraqi Weapons Report Raises Crucial Questions. USA Today, October 8,
2003.
CRS-38
Ramadan; first Vice President and number three in the regime (captured August 19,
2003); Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council and
formally number two in the regime; Barzan al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother
(captured in mid-April 2003); Watban al-Tikriti (captured in April 2003) and Sabawi
al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam and former leaders of regime
intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputy Prime Minister and foremost regime
spokesman (surrendered in May 2003); and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait
during Iraq’s occupation of that country (captured May 2003).
Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials
sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured
or surrendered. As of late September 2003, 43 of the Iraqis on the list of 55 are now
in custody or were killed. Others not on the list of 55 have been apprehended as
well: Amir al-Saadi, chief science adviser to Saddam; Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti, a
son-in-law of Saddam; Vice President Taha Muhi ad-Din Ma’ruf; and suspected
WMD manager Hoda Mahdi Salih al-Ammash.
The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and
the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29,
1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related
atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for
FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress
that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal
for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137
(passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March
13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October
31, 1998).
A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993,
after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the United States has supported
INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the
arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the
Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer,
said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established,
focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical
weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds)
and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which
an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against
Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes
against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations.
In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a
U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war
crimes is formed.
The FY2004 supplemental request contains a request for funding of a “Truth
and Reconciliation Commission,” and the establishment of a human rights
commission. The requests also asks for funding for further investigations into the
human rights abuses committed by the former regime, as well as some memorials to
the victims of those abuses. In the FY2004 supplemental request, about $25 million
CRS-39
is requested for these and related activities, such as women and youth civic education
programs.
Congressional Reactions
Congress, like the Administration, had divergent views on the mechanisms for
promoting regime change, although there was widespread agreement in Congress that
regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S. policy. There was substantial
disagreement over whether a major military offensive was the most desirable option
for achieving that objective. On December 20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75,
by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a
“mounting threat” to the United States. The resolution did not call for new U.S. steps
to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few Members called for the overthrow of
Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in support of the resolution.
In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq,
some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint
appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on
Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations
Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the
opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an
option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In
early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members — Senators John
McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and
Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr.
— wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for
operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter,
Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S.
assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated
Kurdish areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded
conferences, offices and other intellectual exercises that have done little
more than expose the INC to accusations of being “limousine insurgents”
and “armchair guerrillas.”
As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002,
Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result.
Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force
against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce
U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on
October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote
of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243).
The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. Prior to the war, it held
several hearings on the progress of post-war reconstruction. During the war and in
its aftermath, several Members applauded the performance of the U.S. military and
the overthrow of the regime. Some Members, however, have criticized the
Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war period in light of major
looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the regime. Criticism of post-war
planning has escalated as attacks on U.S. occupation forces have mounted, although
CRS-40
the Administration and others say U.S. casualties are relatively light and that the
resistance is not jeopardizing overall U.S. objectives for Iraq. Several Committees
are conducting inquiries into why substantial amounts of WMD have not been found
in Iraq to date. Some Members of both parties have also expressed concern about the
costs of the U.S. occupation, particularly in light of the Administration’s September
2003 request for an additional $87 billion in funding, and several Members have
called on the Administration to take greater steps to persuade other countries to share
the burden of peacekeeping in and reconstruction of Iraq. Others have called for an
increase in the number of U.S. troops in Iraq or re-evaluation of the mix of U.S.
forces to ensure that the skill set of the U.S. force matches the needs of
reconstruction. Some Members who have visited Iraq in recent months say
reconstruction is proceeding well and that Iraq is more stable than that portrayed in
the press.
CRS-41
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition
Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.)
to the Opposition
(Figures in millions of dollars)
INC War
Crimes Broadcasting
Unspecified
Opposition
Activities
Total
FY 1998
(P.L. 105-174)
2.0 5.0
(RFE/RL)
3.0 10.0
FY 1999
(P.L. 105-277)
3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0
FY 2000
(P.L. 106-113)
2.0 8.0 10.0
FY 2001
(P.L. 106-429)
12.0
(aid
distribution
inside Iraq)
2.0 6.0
(INC radio)
5.0 25.0
FY 2002
(P.L. 107-115)
25.0 25.0
Total,
FY1998-FY2002
15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0
FY2003
(no earmark)
3.1
(announced
April 2003)
6.9
(remaining
to be
allocated)
10.0
FY2004
(request)
0 0
Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under
the Iraq Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth
of services, out of the $97 million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the
opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent, as of late December 2002. The
figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided, the amounts of
which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and
FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes
Commission” fund, to be used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were
drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N. programs.
Another version (English): 10 October 2003 — RL31339_2003-10-10.pdf
Order Code RL31339
CRS Report for Congress
Received through the CRS Web
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
Updated October 10, 2003
Kenneth Katzman
Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs
Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division
Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
Summary
Operation Iraqi Freedom accomplished a long-standing objective, the overthrow
of Saddam Hussein, but the post-war period has, by almost all accounts, proved more
difficult than the Administration had anticipated. Past U.S. efforts to change the
regime failed because of limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the Iraqi
opposition, and the efficiency and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping security
services. Previous U.S. Administrations had ruled out major U.S. military action to
change Iraq’s regime, believing such action would be risky and not necessarily
justified by the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament.
In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized
Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to verifiably
abandon its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs and the potential for it
to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. In September 2002, the President told the U.N.
General Assembly that unless Iraq fully disarmed in cooperation with United Nations
weapons inspectors, the United States would lead a coalition to achieve that
disarmament militarily, making clear that this would include the ouster of Iraq’s
President Saddam Hussein’s regime. After a November 2002 - March 2003 round
of U.N. inspections in which Iraq’s cooperation was mixed, on March 19, 2003 the
United States launched Operation Iraqi Freedom to disarm Iraq and change its
regime. The regime fell on April 9, 2003.
In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change
through U.S.-led military action would yield benefits beyond disarmament and
reduction of support for terrorism; benefits such as liberation of the Iraqi people
from an oppressive regime and promotion of stability and democracy throughout the
Middle East. However, escalating resistance to the U.S.-led occupation, punctuated
by the August 19, 2003, truck bombing of the U.N. headquarters in Baghdad, has
contributed to Administration consideration of an attempt to enlist increased foreign
participation in post-war peacekeeping and reconstruction. Some in the
Administration apparently prefer to focus on the building of Iraqi institutions that
can maintain security. Formerly exiled opposition groups form the core of a U.S.-
appointed 25-seat “governing council” that was unveiled on July 13, 2003. The
Administration hopes that the formation of the council and subsequent appointment
of a cabinet will signal that Iraq is moving toward self rule and calm some of the
resistance to U.S. forces in Iraq.
See also CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Reconstruction
Assistance, and CRS Report RL32090, FY2004 Supplemental Appropriations for
Iraq, Afghanistan, and the Global War on Terrorism: Military Operations &
Reconstruction Assistance. This report will be updated as warranted by major
developments.
Contents
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Sadr Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
The First ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Monarchists/Sharif Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups . . . 12
Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Post-War Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
The Governing Council and Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
New Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Prospects for Elections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Post-War U.S. Operations and the Coalition Provisional Authority . . . . . . 24
The Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Building Security Institutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Searching for Regime Violations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Supplemental Funding Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
International Role in Peacekeeping and Governance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Financial Pledges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Fate of the Deposed Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Congressional Reactions Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
The United States has sought to remove Iraq’s Saddam Hussein from power
since the 1991 Persian Gulf war, although achieving this goal was not declared policy
until 1998. In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass
destruction (WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United
States would seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A
regime change policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338,
October 31, 1998). Bush Administration officials emphasized regime change as the
cornerstone of U.S. policy toward Iraq since shortly after the September 11, 2001,
attacks. Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003, and had
effectively removed Saddam Hussein from power by April 9, 2003.
The Bush Administration’s stated goal is to transform Iraq from dictatorship to
a democracy that could be a model for the rest of the region. Iraq has not had
experience with a democratic form of government, although parliamentary elections
were held during the period of British rule under a League of Nations mandate (1920-
1932). Iraq, which became independent in 1932, was governed by kings from the
Hashemite dynasty during 1921-1958, although with substantial British direction and
influence.1 Its first king was Faysal bin Hussein, son of Sharif Hussein of Mecca,
who led the Arab revolt against the Ottoman Empire. Faysal ruled Iraq as King
Faysal I and was succeeded by his son, Ghazi (1933-1939). Ghazi was succeeded by
his son, Faysal II, who ruled until the military coup of Abd al-Karim al-Qasim in
1958. During 1958-1968, Iraq had a succession of military governments, with a brief
period of Baathist rule during 1963. The Baath Party regained power in 1968, and
Saddam Hussein became the second most powerful leader of Iraq as Vice Chairman
of the Revolutionary Command Council. Iraq’s President, Ahmad Hasan al-Bakr,
resigned at Saddam’s urging, and Saddam became President of Iraq on July 17, 1979.
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam
Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an
operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George
H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end
of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and
Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope
of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions. The revolt in southern Iraq reached
the suburbs of Baghdad, but the Republican Guard forces, composed mainly of
1 See Eisenstadt, Michael and Eric Mathewson, eds. U.S. Policy in Post-Saddam Iraq:
Lessons From the British Experience. The Washington Institute for Near East Policy, 2003.
CRS-2
regime loyalists, had survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from
battle prior to the U.S. ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid-
March 1991. Many Shiites blamed the United States for not supporting their uprising
and standing aside as the regime retaliated against those who participated in the
rebellion. Kurds, benefitting from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991,
drove Iraqi troops out of much of northern Iraq and subsequently remained free of
Baghdad’s rule.
According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite
uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding
stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup
against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that
purpose. The Administration apparently believed — and this view apparently was
shared by many experts and U.S. officials — that a coup by elements within the
current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq.
Many observers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and
Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and
tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria.
Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition
Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that
the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment
within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision
was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the
diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the
Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and
diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This
opposition coalition was seen as providing a vehicle for the United States to build a
viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert
support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.2
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi
The growing opposition coalition took shape in an organization called the Iraqi
National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two main
Kurdish militias, the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic Union of
Kurdistan (PUK), participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens of
opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came into the
coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq.
The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi
ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military
officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC
with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups
2 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2,
1992.
CRS-3
publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests,
including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the
preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. Security
Council resolutions on Iraq.3 However, many observers doubted its commitment to
democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and
because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies. The
INC’s first Executive Committee consisted of KDP leader Masud Barzani, ex-Baath
Party and military official Hassan Naqib, and moderate Shiite cleric Mohammad
Bahr al-Ulum. (Barzani and Bahr al-Ulum are now on the 25-member post-war
Governing Council and both are part of its nine member rotating presidency.
Ahmad Chalabi. When the INC was formed, its Executive Committee
selected Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 59 years old, a secular Shiite Muslim from
a prominent banking family, to run the INC on a daily basis. Chalabi was educated
in the United States (M.I.T) as a mathematician. He fled Iraq to Jordan in 1958,
when the Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military coup. This coup
occurred 10 years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July 1968). In 1978, he
founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian authorities on
charges of financial malfeasance (embezzlement) and he left Jordan, possibly with
some help from members of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989. In 1992, he was
convicted in absentia of embezzling $70 million from the bank and sentenced to 22
years in prison. The Jordanian government subsequently repaid depositors a total of
$400 million. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government was pressured by
Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to the Jordanian
government. In April 2003, senior Jordanian officials, including King Abdullah,
called Chalabi “divisive” and stopped just short of saying he would be unacceptable
to Jordan as leader of Iraq. Chalabi’s critics acknowledge that, despite allegations
about his methods, he was single-minded in his determination to overthrow Saddam
Hussein, and he is said to be the favorite of those Administration officials,
particularly in the Department of Defense, that were the most supportive of changing
Iraq’s regime by force.
Since Chalabi returned to Iraq, there have been no large public demonstrations
supportive of him or the INC, indicating that he might not have a large following
inside Iraq. However, anecdotal press reporting suggest that he has attracted some
support from those Iraqis that most welcomed the U.S. military offensive against Iraq
and subsequent occupation. On April 6, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters (“Free
Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by the U.S. military from their base in the north to the
Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs in southern Iraq, later
deploying to Baghdad and other parts of Iraq. After establishing his headquarters in
Baghdad, Chalabi tried to build support by searching for fugitive members of the
former regime and arranging for U.S. military forces in Iraq to provide security or
other benefits to his potential supporters. However, the Free Iraqi Forces
accompanying Chalabi were disbanded following the U.S. decision in mid-May 2003
to disarm independent militias.
3 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by
INC representatives, February 1993.
CRS-4
Chalabi is part of a grouping of five leaders of major exile parties that held a
series of planning meetings shortly prior to the 2003 war. The major-party grouping
was hoping to become the core of a successor regime, and the major parties are
represented on the Governing Council. Chalabi is a member of the Governing
Council and one of the nine that will rotate its presidency. He was president of the
Council during the month of September 2003 and represented Iraq at the U.N.
General Assembly meetings that month.
A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book,
Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq, detailing alleged Iraqi regime human
rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracy for Iraq, including full
rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he taught Middle
Eastern politics at Brandeis University prior to returning to Iraq after the fall of
Saddam. In August 2003, Makiya was tapped by the Governing Council to head a
25-person committee that will decide how to draft a new constitution. Another INC
activist, Mohammed al-Zubaidi, declared himself in charge of Baghdad in mid-April,
but U.S. officials did not recognize him as mayor and detained him in April 2003.
The Kurds/KDP and PUK. The Kurds, among the most pro-U.S. of all the
groups in Iraq, do not have ambitions to play a major role in governing Arab Iraq, but
Iraq’s neighbors have always been fearful that the Kurds might still seek outright
independence. In committing to the concept of federalism, the INC platform
assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq. Turkey, which
has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly
fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into
a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy
since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War
I. In 1961, the KDP, then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP
leader Masud Barzani’s father, began an insurgency that has continued until today,
although interrupted by periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud
Barzani’s brother, Idris, commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the Iran-Iraq
war but was killed in that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from
the KDP in 1965; the PUK’s members are generally more well-educated, urbane, and
left-leaning than those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000-
60,000 fighters, some of which are trained in conventional military tactics. Both
Barzani and Talabani were part of the major-party grouping that has now been
incorporated into the Governing Council, and both are part of the Council’s rotating
presidency.
Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties
enjoyed good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement
of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaikh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in
Halabja, Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical
attack on that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998.
A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam
(Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam).
This faction, led by Mullah Krekar (who was detained in Europe in August 2002 and
now lives in Norway), reportedly associated itself with Al Qaeda and hosted in its
northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters, mostly of Arab origin, who had fled the
CRS-5
U.S.-led war in Afghanistan. Mullah Krekar reportedly studied under Shaikh
Abdullah al-Azzam, an Islamic theologian of Palestinian origin who was the spiritual
mentor of Osama bin Laden. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, during which its base
was captured, about 600 fighters in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, located near the town
of Khurmal.4 Ansar fighters clashed with the PUK around Halabja in December
2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedly responsible for an assassination attempt
against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002.
The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials
to be Abu Musab Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in
Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the
December 1999 millennium celebration, the assassination in Jordan of U.S. diplomat
Lawrence Foley (2002), and to reported attempts in 2002 to spread the biological
agent ricin in London and possibly other places in Europe. In a presentation to the
U.N. Security Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied Zarqawi
and Ansar to Saddam Hussein’s regime, which might have viewed Ansar al-Islam as
a means of pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents. Although Zarqawi reportedly
received medical treatment in Baghdad in May 2002 after fleeing Afghanistan, many
experts believed Baghdad-Ansar links were tenuous or even non-existent; Baghdad
did not control northern Iraq even before Operation Iraqi Freedom.5 Zarqawi’s
current whereabouts are unknown, although some unconfirmed press reports indicate
he might have fled to Iran after the fall of the Ansar camp to U.S.-led forces. Some
recent press accounts say Iran might have him in custody.6 U.S. officials said in
August that some Ansar fighters, possibly at the direction of Zarqawi, might have
remained in or re-entered Iraq and are participating in the resistance to the U.S.
occupation, possibly including organizing acts of terrorism such as recent car/truck
bombings (see below). Ansar al-Islam is not listed by the State Department as
Foreign Terrorist Organization (FTO).
Shiite Islamist Organizations
Some outside experts have had concerns about the potential strength and
ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups in post-
Saddam Iraq. The United States sought to work with some Shiite Islamist opposition
factions during the 1990s but had few if any contacts with others. Shiite Islamist
factions hold at least five seats on the Governing Council unveiled July 13, 2003.
SCIRI/Badr Corps. The most well known among these is called the Supreme
Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member of the INC
in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC banner.
SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition groups
4 Chivers, C.J. Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.”
New York Times, December 6, 2002.
5 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire,
March 18, 2002.
6 Finn, Peter and Susan Schmidt. Al Qaeda Plans a Front in Iraq. Washington Post,
September 7, 2003.
CRS-6
in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad Baqr al-
Hakim, died in a car bomb by unknown assailants in Najaf on August 29, 2003, an
act that could reflect or accelerate a schism within the Shiite Islamist community.
Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head
an Islamic Republic of Iraq, a vision that, if realized, might conflict with U.S. plans
to forge a democratic Iraq. Baqr Al Hakim and his family fled Iraq to Iran in 1980,
during a major crackdown on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam
feared that Iraqi Shiite Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution
in Iran in 1979, posed a major threat to his regime. Prior to the formation of SCIRI,
Hakim and his family were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party (see below).
Mohammed Baqr is the son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a
prominent Shiite leader in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini
when Khomeini was in exile in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. Baqr Al Hakim had
returned to Iraq on May 10, 2003, welcomed by crowds in Basra and Najaf, where
he is now based.
In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about
10,000-15,000 fighters/activists organized into a “Badr Brigades” (named after a
major battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from
Iran into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. The Badr Brigades are
headed by Mohammed Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim, who returned
to Iraq on April 20, 2003, to pave the way for Mohammed Baqr’s return. Abd al-
Aziz has taken over the leadership of the movement in the wake of his elder
brother’s death on August 29. (Another Hakim brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan
in 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s security services.) Iran’s Revolutionary Guard,
which is politically aligned with Iran’s hard line civilian officials, has been the key
patron of the Badr Brigades, providing it with weapons, funds, and other assistance;
the Brigades fought alongside the Guard against Iraqi forces during the Iran-Iraq
war. However, many Iraqi Shiites view SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr
Corps operations in southern Iraq prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark
broad popular unrest against the Iraqi regime. Some Badr fighters deployed inside
northern Iraq on the eve of Operation Iraqi Freedom, and the rest have since entered
Iraq. Asserting that the United States failed to create a secure environment that might
have prevented the August 29, 2003, bombing that killed Ayatollah Al Hakim, some
Brigade fighters have deployed throughout Najaf since the bombing.
A variety of press reports say that some other individual militias now providing
security in many towns in southern Iraq are linked to the Badr Brigades. One such
militia is derived from the fighters who challenged Saddam Hussein’s forces in the
marsh areas of southern Iraq, around the town of Amara, north of Basra. It goes by
the name Hizbollah (Party of God)-Amara, and it is headed by marsh guerrilla leader
Abdul Karim Muhammadawi, nicknamed “Prince of the Marshes” who was named
to the Governing Council. He is widely perceived as an ally of SCIRI and is
considered by observers to have substantial Shiite support north of Basra.
Until August 2002 when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures
for meetings in Washington, D.C., SCIRI had publicly refused to work openly with
the United States or accept U.S. assistance, although it was part of the INC and did
have contacts with the United States prior to the 2003 war effort. Since the fall of the
CRS-7
regime, SCIRI leaders have criticized what they called an illegitimate U.S.
occupation of Iraq and have called for the rapid establishment of an Iraqi self-rule
authority, while at the same time publicly opposing the use of violence against the
occupation. Even though Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim said he was for a democracy
and would not seek to establish an Iranian-style Islamic republic, U.S. officials are
said to be mistrustful of SCIRI’s ultimate goals. Suggesting that SCIRI sees its
interests in a degree of at least temporary cooperation with the occupation, Abd al-
Aziz al Hakim met with other opposition leaders in late April 2003 at a post-war
governance planning session sponsored by U.S. officials. He later helped constitute
the major-party core of the Governing Council, and Abd al-Aziz is part of the nine-
person rotating Council presidency. Unlike some other Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI
has had good working relations with some Sunni oppositionists and the Kurds.
Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, Iraq’s oldest organized Shiite Islamist
grouping, continues to exist as a separate group, but many Da’wa activists appear to
be at least loosely allied with SCIRI. The party was founded in 1957 by a revered
Iraqi Shiite cleric, Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of
Ayatollah Khomeini. Baqr Al Sadr was hung by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the
Da’wa’s alleged responsibility in fomenting Shiite anti-regime unrest following
Iran’s 1979 Islamic revolution. That unrest included an attempted assassination of
senior Iraqi leader Tariq Aziz. Da’wa’s spokesman, Ibrahim Jafari, and its leader in
Basra, Abd al Zahra Othman, are on the Governing Council, as is a former Da’wa
activist turned human rights activist, Muwaffaq Al-Ruba’i. Jafari is one of the nine
members of the Council that is rotating the presidency; he was first to hold that post.
The Kuwaiti branch of the Da’wa Party allegedly was responsible for a May
1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks
on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The Hizballah organization in Lebanon
was founded by Lebanese clerics loyal to Ayatollah Baqr Al Sadr and the late
Ayatollah Khomeini, and there continue to be personal and ideological linkages
between Hizballah and the Da’wa Party. The Hizballah activists who held U.S.
hostages in that country during the 1980s often attempted to link release of the
Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party prisoners held by Kuwait for those
offenses. Some Iraqi Da’wa members look to Lebanon’s senior Shiite cleric
Mohammed Hossein Fadlallah, who was a student and protege of Ayatollah
Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, for spiritual guidance.
Sadr Movement. Members of the clan of the late Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr
Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq. The Sadr clan, based in Iraq
during Saddam Hussein’s rule, was repressed and not politically active during that
time. The United States had no contact with this grouping prior to the 2003 war and
did not attempt to enlist it in any overthrow efforts during 1991-2002. Although the
Al Sadr clan has been closely identified with the Da’wa Party, it appears that
members of the clan and their followers currently are operating in post-war Iraq as
a movement separate from Da’wa. Another revered member of the clan, Mohammed
Sadiq Al Sadr, and two of his sons, were killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999.
A surviving son, Moqtada Al Sadr, who is about 27 years old, has attempted to rally
his followers to attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite politics. He and his
clan apparently have a large following in the poorer Shiite neighborhoods of
Baghdad, which, after the fall of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr
CRS-8
City,” from the former name of “Saddam City.” However, Moqtada is viewed by
Iran and many Iraqi Shiites as a young radical who lacks religious and political
weight. To compensate for his lack of religious credentials, he has sought spiritual
authority for his actions from exiled Iraqi senior cleric, Ayatollah Kazem Haeri, who
is living in Qom, Iran. An alternate interpretation by some experts is that Haeri is
acting at the direction of Iran’s leadership to keep Moqtada Sadr under a measure of
control.
Moqtada’s reputation may have been tarnished in early April when Moqtada al
Sadr reportedly killed Abd al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Abdol
Qasem Musavi-Khoi, shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al-
Majid Khoi headed the Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq
after U.S.-led forces took Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political
doctrines of Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran.
The Sadr grouping is not represented in the Governing Council. Moqtada has
used his Friday prayer sermons in Najaf and other forums to denounce the Council
as a puppet of the U.S. occupation. In July 2003, Moqtada and his aides began
recruiting for an Islamic army, for now unarmed, that Sadr says must challenge the
U.S. occupation, although he has thus far stopped short of openly calling for armed
attacks on American forces. He is openly calling for a cleric-led Islamic state similar
to that of Iran. In August 2003, Shiites in Basra and in Baghdad rioted against British
and U.S. occupation forces over fuel shortages and perceived slights, and there was
speculation that Moqtada was helping fuel the riots. Several days of anti-U.S.
demonstrations by pro-Sadr Shiites broke out in Baghdad in early October 2003.
Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah. The revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al-
Sistani, based in Najaf, was repressed during Saddam’s rule and is emerging as a
major potential force in post-war Iraq. The United States had no contact with Sistani
when Saddam was in power and has had only limited contact with him since; he
reportedly refuses to meet with representatives of the U.S. occupation. He is the
most senior of the Shiite clerics that lead the Najaf-based “Hawza al-Ilmiya,” a major
grouping of seminaries and Shiite clerics. Other senior clerics include Ayatollah
Mohammad Sa’id Al Hakim, uncle of the slain SCIRI leader Mohammad Baqr, and
Isaac Fayadh. The Hawza, which is well funded through donations, is becoming an
important source of political authority in the Shiite regions of Iraq, hiring Iraqis to
perform functions performed by the former regime and issuing directives, often
obeyed, for some Iraqi civil servants to return to work. Sistani and the Hawza are
generally allied with SCIRI in the intra-Shiite power struggle, seeking to contain
Moqtada Al Sadr, whom Sistani and SCIRI both view as radical and impulsive.
Sistani, who is of Iranian ethnicity, is considered to be in the tradition of
Ayatollah Khoi in opposing a direct role for clerics in governmental affairs, and
Sistani and the Hawza have spoken against a direct role for the clerics in governing
post-war Iraq. However, in early July 2003, Sistani began to take a more active role
in Iraq’s post-war decision-making by issuing a statement that the drafters of a new
constitution should be elected, not appointed.
Islamic Amal. Another Shiite Islamist organization called the Islamic Amal
(Action) Organization has traditionally been allied with SCIRI. In the early 1980s,
CRS-9
Islamic Amal was under the SCIRI umbrella but later broke with it. It is headed by
Mohammed Taqi Modarassi, who returned to Iraq from exile in Iran in April 2003,
after Saddam Hussein’s regime fell. Islamic Amal, which has a following among
Shiite Islamists mainly in Karbala, conducted attacks against Saddam Hussein’s
regime in the 1980s. However, it does not appear to have a following nearly as large
as SCIRI or the other Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s brother, Abd al-Hadi,
headed the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, which tried to stir up Shiite
unrest against the Bahrain regime in the 1980s and 1990s (see below). Since
returning to Iraq in April 2003, Mohammad Taqi has argued against violent
opposition to the U.S. occupation, saying that such a challenge would plunge Iraq
into civil warfare.
Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups
The differences among the various anti-Saddam organizations led to the near
collapse of the U.S. regime change effort the mid-1990s. In May 1994, the KDP and
the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs revenues levied at
border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s government based in
Irbil. The PUK lined up support from Iran while the KDP sought and received
countervailing backing from its erstwhile nemesis, the Baghdad government. The
infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC offensive against Iraqi troops in March
1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at the last minute. Although it was
repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of the less well-trained and poorly
motivated Iraqi units facing the Kurds. Some INC leaders point to the battle as an
indication that the INC could have succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. military
help, had it been given additional resources and training in the 1990s.
The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition in the
mid-1990s caused the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by
renewing ties to a non-INC group, Iraq National Accord (INA).7 The INA, originally
founded in 1990 with Saudi support, consists of Iraqi military and security defectors
who were perceived as having ties to disgruntled officials in those organizations. It
is headed by Dr. Iyad Alawi, former president of the Iraqi Student Union in Europe
and a physician by training. He is a secular Shiite Muslim, but most of the members
of the INA are Sunni Muslims. The INA’s prospects appeared to brighten in August
1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al-Majid — architect of Iraq’s
weapons of mass destruction programs — defected to Jordan, suggesting that
Saddam’s grip on the military and security services was weakening. Jordan’s King
Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate from there. The INA was ultimately
penetrated by Iraq’s intelligence services and, in June 1996, Baghdad dealt it a
serious setback by arresting or executing over 100 INA sympathizers in the military.
Iraq’s counteroffensive against the opposition was expanded two months after
the arrests of the INA sympathizers. In late August 1996, the KDP asked Baghdad
to provide armed support for its capture of Irbil from the rival PUK. Iraq took
7 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret
War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997.
CRS-10
advantage of the request to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in
northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout northern Iraq.
In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred
oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated
from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists,
mostly from the INC.
Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA continued to
operate throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt itself to some extent since the
June 1996 arrests. However, it does not appear to have a large following in Iraq.
Although it has was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war,
there is a history of friction between the two groups; the INA reportedly bombed an
INC facility in northern Iraq in October 1995. In addition, Chalabi and the INC have
argued for comprehensive purging of former Baathists from Iraq’s institutions, while
the INA, which has ex-Baathists in it, has argued for retaining some members of the
former regime in official positions. Alawi was part of the major-party grouping that
became the core of the Governing Council, and Alawi has been named a member of
that Council and one of its nine-member rotating presidency. He is president during
October 2003.
Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks
For the two years following the anti-Saddam opposition groups’ 1996 setbacks,
the Clinton Administration had little contact with these groups. In those two years,
the INC, INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations
and their ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998,
then Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations
subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations”
about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish.
Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections
during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam
Hussein. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with an
FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, signed May 1, 1998) that, among
other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the
opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free
Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October
1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to
coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to
highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions. The remaining $2 million was used
to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the
documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes,
and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In
subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for
war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix. Some of the war crimes funding has
gone to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War
Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues.
CRS-11
Iraq Liberation Act
A clear indication of congressional support for a more active U.S. overthrow
effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998: the Iraq Liberation Act
(ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998). The ILA gave the
President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles (and authorized
$2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be designated by the
Administration. The Act’s passage was widely interpreted as an expression of
congressional support for the concept of promoting an insurgency by using U.S. air-
power to expand opposition-controlled territory. This idea was advocated by Chalabi
and some U.S. experts, such as General Wayne Downing, who subsequently became
a National Security Council official on counter-terrorism in the first two years of the
George W. Bush Administration. President Clinton signed the legislation despite
reported widespread doubts within the Clinton Administration about the chances of
success in promoting an opposition insurgency.
The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting
regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it
should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime
headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly
articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq. No
specific language in the Act provides for its termination after Saddam Hussein is
removed from power.
The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the
height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in
which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United
Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were
withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign
against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December
16-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq:
Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.)
The First ILA Designations. Further steps to promote regime change
followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, a career diplomat, Frank
Ricciardone, was named as a State Department’s “Coordinator for the Transition in
Iraq,” the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999, after consultations
with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13) that the following
organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance under the Iraq
Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the Islamic Movement
of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the pro-monarchist Movement for Constitutional
Monarchy (MCM). Because of its possible role in contributing to the formation of
Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001, although it was not
formally taken off the ILA eligibility list.
Monarchists/Sharif Ali. The MCM, which was an original designee of
eligibility to receive assistance under the ILA, is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a
relative of the Hashemite monarchs (he is a cousin of King Faysal II, the last Iraqi
monarch) that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. Sharif Ali, who is
about 47 and was a banker in London, claims to be the leading heir to the former
CRS-12
Hashemite monarchy, although there are other claimants, mostly based in Jordan.
The MCM was considered a small movement that could not contribute much to the
pre-war overthrow effort, although it was part of the INC and the United States had
contacts with it. In the post-war period, Sharif Ali returned to Iraq on June 10, 2003,
to a small but apparently enthusiastic welcome. He did not participate in the seven-
party grouping that negotiated with the U.S.-led occupation authority on the
formation of the Governing Council, and neither Sharif Ali nor any of his followers
was appointed to the Governing Council.
In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton
Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and
“non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999 - 2000, about 150
opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in
Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses providing civil affairs
training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers,
communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However,
the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficiently organized
to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This
restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the
effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United
States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The trainees during
1999-2000 are not believed to have been brought into the Operation Iraqi Freedom
effort against the regime, or into the Free Iraqi Forces that deployed to Iraq toward
the end of the active combat phase of the war.
Continued Doubts About the Capabilities
of the Anti-Saddam Groups
During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end
the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of
Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed
disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the
opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an
indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical about the opposition’s
capabilities. The Clinton Administration maintained that the Iraqi opposition would
not succeed unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement, and that direct U.S.
military action was risky and not justified by the degree of threat posed by Iraq.
Others suggested the Clinton Administration should focus instead on rebuilding
containment of Iraq by threatening force if Iraq refused to permit re-entry into Iraq
of the U.N. weapons inspectors that left Iraq in December 1998.
As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a
provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed
November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the
Iraqi people,” of which at least $12 million was for the INC to distribute
humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million
was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million
could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive
assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC
CRS-13
distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000, the Clinton Administration
reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in
FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop an aid distribution plan
and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before
it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that
noted that any INC effort to distribute aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control
would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and
to any relief distributors with which the INC contracts.8
Bush Administration Policy
Bush Administration policy toward Iraq changed after the September 11, 2001
terrorist attacks, even though no significant evidence linking Iraq to those attacks
came to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in
President Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he
characterized Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea.
Pre-September 11 Policy
Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic
elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus
within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow
strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq,
which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its
taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist
regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan: a modification of the U.N.
sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technology reached Iraq. His
plan offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N.
restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military
technology.9
The Administration believed that the proposal, by easing the suffering of the
Iraqi people, would cause Iraq’s neighbors and other countries to cease unilateral
violations of the sanctions regime. Powell, who had openly expressed skepticism
about the opposition’s prospects, barely raised the regime change issue during his trip
or in his March 7, 2001, testimony before the House International Relations
Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.10 After about a year of
negotiations among the Security Council permanent members, the major feature of
the smart sanctions plan — new procedures that virtually eliminate U.N. review of
8 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.”
January 17, 2001.
Program.
March 2, 2001.
9 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food
10 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times,
CRS-14
civilian exports to Iraq — was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Security Council
Resolution 1409).
Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime
change policy, many of the questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy
that had faced previous administrations were debated early in the Bush
Administration.11 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush
Administration did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first year.
During his confirmation hearings as Deputy Secretary of Defense, a leading advocate
of overthrowing Iraq’s regime, Paul Wolfowitz, said that he did not yet see a
“plausible plan” for changing the regime. Like its predecessor, the Bush
Administration initially declined to provide the opposition with lethal aid, combat
training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the separate
State Department position of “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” further casting
doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy. On February 2, 2001, the Bush
Administration confirmed that, shortly after President Bush took office, the Treasury
Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted the INC a license to
proceed with information gathering inside Iraq only, and not actual distribution of
humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the Administration amounted to a
withholding of U.S. backing for the INC plan to rebuild its presence inside Iraq.
Many in Congress, on the other hand, continued to support the INC as the
primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional
sentiment, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite
doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television
broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the
ESF aid appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an estimated
additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.12
Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime
Bush Administration policy toward Iraq became notably more assertive after
the September 11, 2001, attacks, stressing regime change and asserting that
containment was inadequate. Almost immediately after the U.S.-led war on the
Taliban and Al Qaeda in Afghanistan began in early October 2001, speculation began
building that the Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use
of military force as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism. Some U.S.
officials reportedly believed that the United States needed to respond to the
September 11, 2001 attacks by ending any or all regimes that support terrorist groups,
including Iraq. As noted above, in his January 29, 2002 State of the Union message,
President Bush named Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with North Korea and
Iran. Vice President Cheney visited the Middle East in March 2002 reportedly to
consult regional countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq militarily,
although the countries visited reportedly urged greater U.S. attention to the Arab-
Israeli dispute and opposed confrontation with Iraq.
11 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh,
Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002.
12 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001.
CRS-15
The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for
confronting Iraq were (1) its purported refusal to end its WMD programs, and (2) its
ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of
conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. The Administration added that
regime change would have the further benefit of liberating the Iraqi people and
promoting stability in the Middle East, possibly facilitating a resolution to the Arab-
Israeli dispute.
Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s
regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax
mailings, senior U.S. officials said in the runup to the war that there was evidence
of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. (On September 19, 2003, President Bush, in response
to a journalist’s question, said there is no evidence linking Saddam Hussein’s regime
to the September 11 attacks but there is evidence linking that regime to Al Qaeda.)
Secretary of State Powell, as noted above, cited intelligence information that Ansar
al-Islam and its enclave leader Abu Musab al-Zarqawi had links to Saddam Hussein’s
regime.13 (See section above on Ansar al-Islam for more information on that
organization and its reputed links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.) Other senior
officials cited intelligence information that Iraq provided advice and training to Al
Qaeda in the manufacture and use of chemical weapons, although Administration
information appears to date to the early 1990s when Iraq, largely isolated after the
first Gulf war, was politically close to Sudan. Al Qaeda founder Osama Bin Laden
was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996). The Bush Administration did not
extensively cite reports that Czech intelligence believed that Iraqi intelligence had
met with lead September 11 hijacker Mohammad Atta in Prague in spring 2001,
suggesting official skepticism of those reports. Some outside commentators
believed that those reports indicated a direct Iraqi connection to the September 11
attacks.
Some outside observers expressed skepticism about Iraq-Al Qaeda connections
because of the ideological differences between Saddam Hussein’s secular regime and
Al Qaeda’s Islamist character. Others noted that bin Laden sought to raise an Islamic
army to fight Saddam’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990, arguing against the need for U.S.
troops, and that he was more an enemy of Saddam Hussein than an ally. Those
differences were evident in a February 12, 2003, bin Laden statement referring to
Saddam Hussein’s regime as socialist and infidel, although the statement exhorted
Iraq to resist impending U.S. military action. In the Administration view, the two
shared similar anti-U.S. goals, which outweighed ideological differences and
propelled them into tactical or strategic cooperation.
WMD Threat Perception. In arguing for military action, U.S. officials
maintained that Iraq’s purported commitment to developing WMD — coupled with
its support for terrorist groups to which Iraq might transfer WMD — constituted an
unacceptable potential threat to the United States and that major U.S. military action
was justified if Iraq refused to disarm voluntarily. U.S. officials said the September
11, 2001 attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to
13 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002.
CRS-16
gather before acting, but must instead act preemptively or preventively. Senior U.S.
officials asserted a WMD threat as follows:
! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years
since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply
with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8,
2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs.
However, statements by U.N. weapons inspectors after inspections
resumed November 27, 2002 indicated they believed Iraq did not
have an active nuclear weapons program, and that inspections on
other weapons categories were making progress.
! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and
against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not
necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States
or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against
adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of
destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of
massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the
1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings of
retaliation and did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war.
! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who
could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths
in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of this view cited
presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in October 2002,
portions of which were released publicly, stating the CIA view that
Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to terrorists if the United States
were to attack Iraq. At that point, according to that argument,
Saddam Hussein would be left with little incentive not to cooperate
with terrorist groups capable of striking at U.S. interests. No WMD
was used against Iraq during Operation Iraqi Freedom, and no actual
WMD have thus far been found, although the Administration asserts
that it has found evidence of WMD programs and that actual
weapons themselves might still be found in Iraq.
Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam
As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action against Iraq, the
Bush Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its
capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002,
President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special
operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and
Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups — the INC, the
INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM — to Washington for meetings with
senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were
held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S.
government, which reportedly tended to favor different opposition groups.
CRS-17
In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August
15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in ESF to the Iraqi
National Congress (INC), funds that had been held up due to differences between the
State Department and the INC over what activities would be funded. The $8 million
was to be used to fund the INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its
offices in Washington, London, Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate
its Al Mutamar newspaper and Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund
the information gathering portion of the INC’s activities; the State Department had
refused to fund those activities, which are conducted inside Iraq, because of strains
between the INC and other opposition groups and questions about INC use of U.S.
funds.
In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and
to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic-
based groups. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had
increasing contact during this period include the following:
! Iraqi National Movement. It formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the
INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib
(who was part of an early leadership body of the INC); and Hatim
Mukhlis, who claimed support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan.
! Iraqi National Front. Another grouping of ex-military officers,
founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite
Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and
participated in the post-1991 Gulf war anti-Saddam uprisings.
! Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement. Established in 1996 by
ex-military officer Najib al-Salhi, this group was close to the INC.
Salhi, who defected in 1995, served in the Republican Guard.
! Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was
established in August 2002, headed by Wafiq al-Samarra’i, a former
head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of staff of Iraq’s
military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was based in Denmark
since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member. Khazraji was
placed under travel restrictions by Danish officials in late November
2002 after saying he wanted to leave Denmark. He is under
investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of chemical
weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities said on
March 17, 2003, that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his home
there,14 although his current whereabouts are unknown.
! Iraqi Turkmen Front. A small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping,
generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq.
Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq.
14 ‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper. Agence France Press, April 7, 2003.
CRS-18
! The Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another
Shiite Islamic Party, but it is considered substantially less pro-
Iranian than SCIRI or the Da’wa Party. It is headed by Jamil Wakil,
a follower of Ayatollah Shirazi, an Iranian cleric who was the
spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation
of Bahrain (IFLB, see above under Islamic Amal). The IFLB
allegedly attempted to overthrow Bahrain’s regime in the early
1980s.
! The Assyrian Democratic Movement, an ethnic-based movement
headed by Secretary-General Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s
Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq. There is a
strong diaspora presence in the United States as well. After building
ties to this group over the past year, the Bush Administration
formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement
into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002.
(Kanna is on the Governing Council.)
Second ILA Designations. The Bush Administration applauded efforts
during 2001 and 2002 by the ex-military led groups to coordinate with each other
and with the INC and other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London and
jointly run with the INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers. However, since the
regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, virtually none of the ex-military led
groups listed above has openly sought a major role in post-Saddam Iraq or attracted
major followings.
As a decision whether to launch military action approached, President Bush
issued a determination (December 9, 2002) to draw down the remaining $92 million
in defense articles and services authorized under the Iraq Liberation Act for the INA,
the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi
opposition groups designated by me under the Act before or after this
determination.” That same day, the Bush Administration made six of the ex-military
led factions discussed above (except the Higher Council for National Salvation)
eligible to receive draw downs under the ILA. The announcement appeared to be
part of reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists in tasks that could assist U.S.
forces, possibly including combat units.15 An initial group of 3,000 was selected, but
only about 70 oppositionists completed training at an air base (Taszar) in Hungary,
according to press reports.16 These oppositionists served with U.S. forces in
Operation Iraqi Freedom as translators and mediators between U.S. forces and local
leaders, and most did not stay in Iraq, according to observers.
As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began
planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002,
with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in
15 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.”
Washington Post, October 19, 2002.
16 Williams, Daniel. “U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles.” Washington Post, December
18, 2002.
CRS-19
London. The conference was organized by the same six exile groups whose leaders
visited Washington in August 2002, but included other groups as well, and they
discussed whether the opposition should declare a provisional government. The
Administration opposed that step on the grounds that doing so would give the
impression that the United States was backing the exile groups in their efforts to
dominate post-war Iraq politically. The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65-
member follow-up committee, which some criticized as weighted heavily toward
Shiite Islamist groups such as SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24-
27, 2003, in northern Iraq, and formed, against the urging of U.S. representatives at
the meeting, a six-seat committee to prepare for a transition regime. The six-person
committee included PUK leader Talabani, KDP leader Barzani, SCIRI leader
Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign
minister Adnan Pachachi. (A member from each of these groups is on the
Governing Council, as is Pachachi.)
Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the
new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete
disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if that country wanted to avert military
action. In a probable effort to garner international support for any U.S.-led war effort
against Iraq, the Administration had downplayed the goal of regime change in
President Bush’s September 12, 2002, speech before the United Nations General
Assembly, stressing instead the need to enforce U.N. resolutions that required Iraqi
disarmament. However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change
goal after February 2003 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course.
The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March 2003
breakdown of U.N. diplomacy over whether the U.N. Security Council should
authorize war against Iraq for failing to comply with Resolution 1441. The
diplomatic breakdown followed several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by
the director of the U.N. inspection body UNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification,
and Inspection Commission) Hans Blix and the director of the International Atomic
Energy Agency (IAEA), Mohammad al-Baradei, most recently on March 7, 2003.
The briefings were generally critical of Iraq for failing to pro-actively cooperate to
clear up outstanding questions about Iraq’s WMD program, but the latter two
briefings (February 24 and March 7, 2003) noted progress in clearing up outstanding
WMD questions. The Blix/Baradei briefings said Iraq had not accounted for its past
WMD, but the two did not state that they were certain that Iraq had retained WMD,
or that they had uncovered any banned WMD. Iraq declared short range ballistic
missiles that were determined by Blix to be of prohibited ranges, and Blix ordered
Iraq to destroy them. Iraq began the destruction prior to the launching of the U.S.-led
war. (For more detail on the final round of inspections and evidence of WMD
programs found in the post-war period, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117: Iraq: Weapons
Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.)
Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and
Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that
inspections should be given more time. They noted that Iraq was well contained by
sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones. Those who agreed with this
view maintained that, as long as Iraq allowed access to U.N. weapons inspections
under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national
CRS-20
security. The inspectors reported few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700
inspections of about 400 different sites. Others experts believed that, even if Iraq
were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could have been deterred by U.S.
overall strategic superiority, presumably including the U.S. nuclear arsenal.
The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq
had not fundamentally decided to disarm. The Administration asserted on March 17,
2003, that diplomatic options to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full
attention to military action. That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and
his sons, Uday and Qusay, an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war.
They refused the ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March
19, 2003.
In the war, Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and
British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the Iraqi military, at times, put
up stiff resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi military commanders
or Baathist political figures came forward to try to establish a post-Saddam
government, but senior regime leaders fled Baghdad, and the whereabouts of some
of the top leadership, including Saddam Hussein, are unknown. The outcome of a
post-war debate on the results of the war might depend on such factors as the pace
and costs of reconstruction; the degree of resistance to the U.S.-led occupation; the
amount of WMD ultimately found, if any; and whether a new government is stable
and democratic.
Post-War Governance Issues
Since Saddam Hussein’s regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, there has
been increasing debate about governing post-war Iraq. The same U.S. concerns
about fragmentation of and instability in Iraq that existed in prior years are present
in the current debate over how to establish a post-war regime. Although some Iraqi
civilians have welcomed U.S. and British troops in areas captured, other Iraqis now
want U.S. and British forces to leave Iraq. Some experts believe that a post-war Iraq
will inevitably fall under the control of pro-Iranian Shiite Islamist forces who are
asserting growing control over areas inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites. Shiites constitute
about 60% of Iraq’s population but have been under-represented in every Iraqi
government since modern Iraq’s formation in 1920. (For further information on
economic reconstruction and its funding, see CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent
Developments in Humanitarian and Reconstruction Assistance.)
Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule
The Administration says that U.S. forces will stay in Iraq until there is a stable,
democratic successor regime that is at peace with its neighbors. However, there has
been some debate between U.S. authorities and key anti-Saddam groups over how
the pace and the means to move Iraq to self-government. Senior U.S. officials,
including deputy Defense Secretary Paul Wolfowitz, had said in early April 2003 that
they hoped to have a successor regime in place within six months of the fall of the
regime. However, in mid-May 2003, U.S. officials, apparently fearing that existing
CRS-21
major groups could not form a stable regime, or that Shiite Islamists would dominate
a successor authority, backed away from that deadline.
Shortly after the war, the United States began a process of establishing a
successor regime. The Administration organized an April 15 meeting, in Nasiriyah,
of about 100 Iraqis of varying ideologies, present by U.S. invitation. Many of the
attendees were representatives of Iraqi tribal groupings that had not been politically
active before. However, SCIRI, along with several Shiite clerics, boycotted and
called for an Islamic state. Another meeting of about 250 delegates was held in
Baghdad on April 26, ending in agreement to hold a broader meeting, within a
month, to name an interim Iraqi administration. This process was cut short in May
2003 when the Bush Administration decided it would not produce an acceptable Iraqi
government.
In parallel with the April 26 meeting, the five most prominent exiled opposition
groups met, with U.S. envoys present: SCIRI, the INC, the INA, the PUK, and the
KDP. On May 9, 2003, the five agreed to expand their grouping to seven, adding to
their ranks the little known Nasir al-Chadirchy, head of a party called the National
Democratic Party of Iraq, as well as the Shiite Islamist Da’wa Party. The major
parties later criticized the U.S. decision in May 2003 to delay the formation of an
Iraqi self-rule authority and to instead form an advisory body of 25 to 30 Iraqis.
With U.S. casualties in Iraq mounting and a growing sense of resentment among
the Iraqi population, the U.S.-led occupation authority (Coalition Provisional
Authority, CPA) began tilting back toward the views of the major Iraqi exile parties.
U.S. administrator for Iraq Paul Bremer (see below) said on June 23, 2003, that the
planned 25- to 30-member body would have “real authority” from its first days and
would not be purely advisory. He said it would nominate ministry heads, recommend
policies, and convene a “constitutional conference” to draft a new constitution.17
The Governing Council and Cabinet. On July 13, 2003, a Governing
Council was unveiled to the Iraqi public, appointed by the U.S.-led CPA but
reflecting the influence of the seven-party grouping, as well as prominent Iraqis who
were never in exile and were not affiliated with the exiled opposition. The Council
has 25 members, of which 3 are women and 13 are Shiite Muslims. Of the 13 Shiite
Muslims on the Council, one seat is held by SCIRI directly (Abd al-Aziz Al Hakim,
younger brother of Mohammad Baqr), one is held by a guerrilla affiliated with SCIRI
(Abdul Karim al-Muhammadawi), two are Da’wa Party (Ibrahim al-Jafari and Abdul
Zahra Othman) leaders, and considered allies of SCIRI, and one is a former Da’wa
activist (Muwaffaq al-Ruba’i). Also on the Council is a moderate Shiite cleric,
Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum, who is not affiliated with SCIRI or the Da’wa. He
headed the Ahl al-Bayt charity center in London since the 1980s. The remaining
Shiite Muslims, such as Chalabi and Iyad al-Alawi, are mostly considered secular.
Appointed to the Council was one Sunni Muslim Islamist, Muhsin Abdul Hamid,
who heads the Iraqi Islamic Party, but he does not have a clear relationship with the
Shiite Islamists on the Council.
17 Transcript: Bremer Reviews Progress, Plans for Iraq Reconstruction. Washington File,
June 23, 2003.
CRS-22
The Council includes five Kurds, including the two main Kurdish leaders Jalal
Talabani and Masud Barzani. The Kurds are generally considered pro-U.S. and
might be expected to vote the way the U.S.-led coalition wants.
Although not a cohesive bloc, the Council includes exiles and non-exiles who
generally want a liberal democracy and could be considered generally pro-U.S. Most
prominent among them is Chalabi, but this grouping includes National Democratic
Party leader Nasir al-Chadirchy and former foreign minister Adnan Pachachi, both
of whom are Sunni Muslims. Another, former foreign ministry official Akila al-
Hashimi, a Shiite woman, was killed in an assassination attempt on September 20,
2003. Others most likely to affiliate with this bloc include Sunni businessman Samir
Shakir al-Sumaidy; Sunni civil engineer Ghazi al-Yawar, who is president of Saudi-
based Hicap Technology; the Shiite coordinator for the Human Rights Association
of Babel, Ahmad al-Barak; and the two other women Council members, Songul
Chapouk, a member of the Turkomen minority, who heads the Iraqi Women’s
Association, and Raja al-Khuza’i, a Shiite who heads the maternity hospital in
Diwaniyah.
A member of the Assyrian Christian community is on the Council. Yonadam
Kanna, the secretary-general of the Democratic Assyrian Movement, is on the body.
It is not known what other members of the Council, if any, he might be aligned with,
although it is reasonable to believe that he might have an affinity for fellow residents
of northern Iraq, the Kurds. Also unclear is whether or not Hamid al-Musa, the
Shiite head of the Iraqi Communist Party, is allied with anyone else on the Council.
In late July 2003, the Council decided that nine Council members will rotate as
chairpersons, each for one month. Those who rotate that post are Chalabi, Alawi of
the INA, Hakim of SCIRI, Pachachi, Barzani of the KDP, Talabani of the PUK,
Ibrahim Jafari (Da’wa Parrty), Bahr al-Ulum, and Abdul Hamid, the Sunni Islamist.
Among its first actions, the Council authorized the establishment of an Iraqi
war crimes tribunal for Saddam and associates accused of major human rights abuses.
It empowered a three-member delegation to seek formal U.N. recognition; Chalabi,
Pachachi, and Akila Hashimi, traveled to the United Nations in July 2003 and
received a supportive statement from Secretary General Kofi Annan. No decision
on seating the Governing Council at the United Nations was announced. The
Council helped develop a plan, announced September 21, 2003, to open Iraq’s
economy to foreign investment and many of its companies to foreign ownership.
Press reports in late August 2003 said that U.S. authorities are pressing the
Governing Council to take a more prominent and public role in post-war political
decision-making, although some Council members say that the Council cannot do so
unless and until the U.S.-led coalition begins transferring greater authority to it.18
Friction also emerged in October 2003 over a time-frame for a return to Iraqi
sovereignty; the major exile parties on the Council want an early restoration of Iraqi
sovereignty. Other tensions emerged over U.S. acceptance of Turkey’s offer to send
18 Filkins, Dexter and Neil MacFarquhar. U.S. Official Tells Iraqis To Assert More
Authority. New York Times, August 21, 2003.
CRS-23
peacekeeping troops to Iraq; most Iraqi resent Turkey as the successor of the Ottoman
Empire that ruled Iraq for the 400 years prior to World War I.
New Cabinet. The Council has completed work on a governmental structure.
On September 3, 2003, a 25-member cabinet was sworn in. Its composition has
roughly the same factional and ethnic balance of the Council itself. Two “ministers”
— Ibrahim Bahr al-Ulum (oil ministry) and Ali al-Alawi (trade ministry) — are
close relatives of Council members. Another, “foreign minister” Hoshyar Zibari, is
a longtime close aide to KDP chief Masud Barzani. Zibari served during most of the
1990s as KDP representative in Washington. Longtime PUK activist Abdul-Latif
Rashid is the “minister” of water resources. No “defense minister” was named.
The “interior minister” is Nuri Badran, an INA activist. Badran is attempting
to build on the INA’s contacts among ex-Baathists and ex-military people to develop
a new domestic intelligence and national police network,19 although recruitment of
such categories of Iraqis might raise suspicions of other Governing Council
members, such as Ahmad Chalabi. Chalabi has been the most vocal of all major
post-Saddam figures in calling for the complete dismissal and isolation of all those
with ties to the former regime.
Prospects for Elections. The Bush Administration has hailed the formation
of the Council and the cabinet as major steps toward restoring Iraq’s sovereignty.
Other major benchmarks will be the drafting of a constitution and the holding of
national elections, which the Bush Administration is saying might be held as soon as
mid-2004, if the Iraqis complete the necessary preparatory work such as the adoption
of a constitution. These steps would, according to the Administration, pave the way
for an end to the U.S. occupation and a restoration of full Iraqi sovereignty. Secretary
of State Powell said in late September 2003 that the Iraqis should be able to draft a
constitution within six months, although Iraqi officials subsequently said it would
be very difficult to meet that deadline. As noted above, in early August 2003, the
Governing Council tapped INC activist Kanaan Makiya to head a 25-person
committee that will determine the process for drafting the constitution. The
committee reportedly deadlocked, with some arguing for an appointed constitutional
drafting commission and others saying the drafters should be elected. The timetable
for these steps might be affected by the debate between the United States and its
allies over the structure of international participation in post-war Iraq (see below).
As part of the governance planning process that took place before the war, the
U.S. State Department supported a group of Iraqi exiles to address issues that would
confront a successor government.20 However, the State Department working group
(the “Future of Iraq Project”) does not appear to have significant influence on any
post-war regime decision-making in Iraq. Some experts believe the Defense
19 Williams, Daniel. New Ministry to Recruit Paramilitary Force in Iraq. Washington Post,
September 2, 2003.
20 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,”
Washington File, December 11, 2002.
CRS-24
Department was promoting a competing or separate group of exiles.21 The State
Department project, which cost $5 million, consisted of working groups that
discussed (1) transitional justice; (2) public finance; (3) public and media outreach;
(4) democratic principles; (5) water, agriculture, and the environment; (6) health and
human services; (7) economy and infrastructure; (8) education; (9) refugees,
internally-displaced persons, and migration policy; (10) foreign and national security
policy; (11) defense institutions and policy; (12) free media; (13) civil society
capacity-building; (14) anti-corruption measures; and (15) oil and energy.
Post-War U.S. Operations and the
Coalition Provisional Authority
Experts note that projections about U.S. operations in post-war Iraq, including
the duration of the U.S. military occupation and the numbers of occupation troops,
are largely dependent on the amount of continuing Iraqi resistance, the number of
U.S. casualties taken, and the rate at which such U.S. objectives as the establishment
of a stable and democratic successor regime are accomplished. At present, about
145,000 U.S. and British troops are in Iraq; of those, about 130,000 are U.S.
personnel and about 12,000 are British. There are an additional 10,000 foreign
forces, deploying in accordance with international commitments to post-war
peacekeeping (see below). Earlier press reports said the Administration wanted to
draw the U.S. force level down to about 35,000 by the end of 2003, but continued
unrest and insecurity in Iraq appear to have made that goal untenable, and some press
reports say that Defense Department officials estimate that over 100,000 U.S. troops
might still be in Iraq in the summer of 2004.
The Resistance. U.S. commanders in Iraq said in early October 2003 that the
sophistication and capabilities of the armed resistance to the U.S. governance of Iraq
is growing. Centcom commander John Abizaid had said on July 17, 2003, that the
United States faces a “classic guerrilla war” led by “mid-level Baath Party activists
organized regionally.” Some elements of the resistance appear to want to restore the
old regime, while others appear to be motivated by opposition to foreign rule or the
goal of forming an Islamic state. Other resistance fighters appear to be motivated by
the difficulty the U.S. and British authorities have had in restoring civilian services.
On average, there are about 15-25 attacks on U.S. forces per day.
U.S. military operations are focused on hunting down guerrilla resistance leaders
and their suspected Baathist financiers, as well as finding former leader Saddam
Hussein. U.S. forces have conducted at least five sweep operations since mid-June
2003 to search for Baath and other oppositionists; these operations were given the
names Peninsula Strike (June 9-15); Desert Scorpion (June 15-August 1); Operation
Sidewinder (June 29-July 7); Operation Soda Mountain (July 12-17); and Operation
Ivy Serpent (begun July 12, ongoing). Such attacks have killed about 85 U.S.
military personnel since President Bush declared an end to “major combat
operations” in Iraq on May 1, 2003.
21 Fineman, Mark, Robin Wright, and Doyle McManus. Preparing for War, Stumbling to
Peace. Los Angeles Times, July 18, 2003.
CRS-25
The Bush Administration says resistance comes not only from remnants of the
Baath Party but also from Arab volunteers, possibly linked to or supportive of Al
Qaeda, who have come to Iraq from other countries to fight the U.S. occupation.
U.S. military officials say they have arrested about 200 foreign fighters in recent
sweep operations. Resistance attacks are more frequent in the Sunni areas of central
Iraq, where support for Saddam Hussein’s regime was traditionally stronger than
elsewhere, but there have been recent fatal attacks on U.S., British, and Danish forces
in the Shiite areas of Baghdad (“Sadr City”) and in and around Basra. Some of the
Shiite riots and demonstrations have been influenced by pro-Sadr activists. One
report says that Sunni Islamists, led by Shaikh Ahmad Qubaysi, who returned in
April 2003 from exile in the UAE, is assisting the Sadr faction.22 This represents the
possible emergence of a Sunni-Shiite Islamist anti-occupation coalition.
U.S. military officials put the resistance numbers at about 5,000, although they
do not explain precisely how they arrive at that figure. The resistance appears to be
operating in relatively small cells, some of which have broadcast photos of armed
fighters. Resistance factions have begun identifying themselves as distinct groups,
scribbling graffiti warnings and faxing statements to the Arab satellite television
network Al Jazeera, UAE-based Al Arabiya TV, and other outlets. Suggesting a mix
of nationalist and Islamist factions, they are using such names as
! Al Awda (the Return)
! the Movement of the Victorious Sect
! Iraq’s Revolutionaries - Al Anbar’s Armed Brigades;
! The Popular Resistance for the Liberation of Iraq
! the Salafist Jihad Group (Salafi is a Sunni extremist Islamic
movement)
! Armed Islamic Movement for Al Qaeda - Falluja Branch. Actual
linkages to Al Qaeda, if any, are not known.
! Jaysh (Army) of Mohammad
! Black Banners Group
! Nasirite Organization
! Armed Vanguard of the Second Mohammad Army. Claimed
responsibility for U.N. headquarters bombing and threatened attacks
on any Arab countries that participate in Iraq peacekeeping. The
credibility of the claim is not known.
The continuing resistance has complicated the U.S. mission. In addition to
targeting U.S. forces, resistance fighters have assassinated Iraqis who are
cooperating with the United States and attacked Iraqi oil export pipelines and water
and other infrastructure facilities, as well as symbols of the international presence,
including U.N. headquarters. By attacking these targets, the resistance appears to be
hoping to cause international relief workers to leave Iraq, slow reconstruction, and
turn the Iraqi populace against the occupation. On the other hand, the Administration
maintains that reconstruction is proceeding apace and has logged a number of major
accomplishments, as discussed in a White House fact sheet and in Administration
22 Shadid, Anthony. Iraqi Clerics Unite in Rare Alliance. Washington Post, August 17,
2003.
CRS-26
statements, and that life is, for the most part, returning to normal throughout Iraq.
(“White House Notes Successful Results of Iraq Liberation,” August 8, 2003.)
An apparent terrorist component to the resistance emerged in August 2003 with
car and truck bombings in Baghdad of the embassy of Jordan (August 7) and U.N.
headquarters at the Canal Hotel (August 19). The latter bombing killed 23 persons
including the U.N. representative in Iraq, Sergio Vieira de Mello, and prompted some
drawdown in U.N. and non-governmental organization personnel in Iraq. The
August 29, 2003, car bombing in Najaf that killed Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim may
have killed over 100 persons, according to news reports. Smaller suicide bombings
have occurred since at Iraqi police facilities, the U.N. compound, and other sites.
The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA). The Bush Administration
initially tasked Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) to direct civilian reconstruction, working
through a staff of U.S. diplomats and other U.S. government personnel who are
serving as advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various ministries. He headed the
Office of Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance (ORHA), within the
Department of Defense, created by a January 20, 2003 executive order. After
spending the combat phase of the war in neighboring Kuwait, Garner and some of his
staff of about 200 deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003, to begin work.
Press reports said that senior U.S. officials were dissatisfied with the slow pace
of reconstruction under Garner, and on May 6, 2003, the Administration appointed
former ambassador L. Paul Bremer to lead the overall reconstruction effort, with a
focus on political reconstruction. He arrived on May 12, 2003, to head the CPA,
which subsumed ORHA. The appointment represented an apparent adjustment from
the original structure of the U.S. reconstruction effort, although the Administration
stated that it was always envisioned that a civilian would eventually take over the
U.S. effort and denied it was an indication of high-level dissatisfaction with the
effort. U.S. officials now refer to the CPA as an occupying authority legitimized by
U.N. Security Council Resolution 1483 of May 22, 2003. Among other provisions,
the resolution lifted U.N. sanctions on Iraq. Another alteration of the U.S. post-war
structure was made public in early October 2003; the White House announced that
an “Iraq Stabilization Group” under the direction of National Security Adviser
Condoleezza Rice would coordinate interagency support to the CPA in Iraq. The
move was widely viewed as a diminution in Defense Department control over post-
war governance and reconstruction. In press interviews, Secretary of Defense
Rumsfeld said he was not informed of the restructuring in advance.
Building Security Institutions. In an attempt to improve security in Iraq
and free up U.S. forces for counter-insurgency missions in Iraq, the CPA is building
new Iraqi institutions that, it is hoped, could eventually take over the security
function from the United States. However, there are concerns about the loyalty and
dedication of the new recruits, in the absence of Iraqi sovereignty and a clearly
defined governing structure. Some Iraqi forces have fought crime and the resistance
and helped put down protests, but others have sometimes abandoned their posts and
allowed their facilities to be attacked. Some are now key targets of the resistance.
The United States is in the process of training recruits for a planned 40,000
person Iraqi army, about 10% the size of the pre-war Iraqi force. About 12,000 are
CRS-27
expected to be in the force by mid-2004. Former Defense Department official Walter
Slocombe is in charge of forming the new Iraqi army. The first 700 recruits were
graduated in early October 2003. The Administration has requested about $2 billion
to train and equip the new army in its FY2004 supplemental funding request.
The CPA is also trying to turn policing functions over to Iraqis. Overall, about
40,000 Iraqi policemen have returned to their jobs, more than half the total goal. The
CPA official responsible for the new police force, former New York City police
commissioner Bernard Kerik, says it will take about 18 months (end of 2004) to
reach the goal of 65,000 policemen nationwide.23 (Kerik announced his resignation
in early September 2003.) About 30,000 of the police will undergo training in
Hungary, and Jordan has offered to train about 30,000 Iraqi police. The
Administration has requested about $1 billion to train and equip an Iraqi police force
in its FY2004 supplemental funding request.
The CPA is also recruiting a 7,000-man, all-Iraqi “Civil Defense Corps” to
guard installations such as oil pumping stations, electricity substations, and like
facilities. The Administration has requested about $75 million to train and equip this
civil defense force in the FY2004 supplemental funding request.
Despite its complaints about lack of authority, the five major parties on the
Council - the INC, the INA, SCIRI, the PUK, and the KDP - appear to be trying to
move ahead on assuming more responsibility for security, apart from the institutions
being established by the CPA. The five are reportedly pressing the United States to
allow Iraqi militias, most of which are controlled by these five parties, to play a
greater role in maintaining security and for U.S. forces in Iraq to largely withdraw
from street patrols into garrisons.24
Searching for Regime Violations. Organs of the CPA and the U.S.
government are attempting to uncover abuses and violations of the regime of Saddam
Hussein, including evidence of WMD. A 1,500 person “Iraq Survey Group,” headed
by a U.S. military commander (Maj. Gen. Keith Dayton) but composed of many
civilian technical experts led by former U.N. weapons inspector David Kay, is
attempting to uncover alleged WMD. The Survey Group is also searching for mass
graves of victims of the former regime. In early October 2003, Kay released an
interim report on the Survey Group’s WMD investigation. The report said the Group
had not found actual weapons of mass destruction in Iraq, but it had found “dozens
of WMD-related program activities and significant amounts of equipment that Iraq
concealed from the United Nations during the inspections that began in late 2002.”25
23 Schmitt, Eric. Wolfowitz on Visit to Iraq to Assess Rebuilding Effort. New York Times,
July 18, 2003.
24 Tyler, Patrick. Iraqi Factions Seek to Take Over Security Duties. New York Times,
September 20, 2003.
25 Testimony of David Kay before the House and Senate Intelligence Committees, and the
Defense Subcommittee of the House Appropriations Committee. October 2, 2003.
CRS-28
The Administration, according to press reports, has requested an additional $600
million to fund the Survey Group for another six months.26
Thus far, the Survey Group has found at least 60 mass graves, some with
hundreds of corpses. Most appear to contain bodies of Kurdish and Shiite opponents
of the former regime, but some contain some of the bodies of about 600 Kuwaitis
missing from the first Gulf war. (WMD issues and the fate of the missing Kuwaitis
are discussed in CRS Issue Brief IB92117.)
The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction.27 As the driver of
Iraq’s economy, the rebuilding of the oil industry is receiving substantial U.S.
attention. Bremer said in a press interview on July 31, 2003, that it could take $50 -
$100 billion to reconstruct Iraq, and a $1.6 billion plan to rehabilitate Iraq’s oil
industry was agreed in late July 2003. It has been widely assumed that Iraq’s vast oil
reserves, believed second only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be used to fund much
of the costs of reconstruction. Then presidential spokesman Ari Fleischer said on
February 18, 2003, referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a variety of means
... to shoulder much of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.” Many observers had
been concerned that an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could destroy its own oil
fields, but coalition forces quickly secured Iraq’s southern oil fields after combat
began. Only about 9 oil wells were set on fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that
region, and all were put out quickly. The northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul
were not set afire.
In early May 2003, the U.S.-led coalition set up an advisory board, headed by
former Shell executive Phillip Carroll, to oversee the rebuilding of Iraq’s oil sector.
An Iraqi oil industry professional, Thamer Ghadhban, was named to serve as head
of the interim management team that has run Iraq’s oil ministry and reported to the
advisory board. The first exports began in late June 2003, but exports were running
at only about 800,000 barrels per day as of late September 2003, far less than the 1.5
million barrels per day originally estimated, due to sabotage and the slow pace of
sector reconstruction. Iraq’s new “Oil Minister,” Ibrahim Bahr al-Ulum, said Iraq
was exporting at somewhat higher levels (just over 1 million barrels per day) as of
early October. Iraq’s pre-war export rate was about 2.2 million barrels per day, a
level that U.S. officials and Iraqi oil appointees had hoped to reach by late 2003.
The CPA-produced budget for Iraq for calendar 2003, which is based on the
planned levels of oil exports, assumed that oil revenues would yield about $3.5
billion through the end of 2003, and provide about half of the approximately $6.6
billion budget for Iraq for the period. However, because oil revenues are less than
what was predicted, the budget deficit is likely to be more than $4 billion, far more
than the $2.2 billion deficit projected in June The higher deficit means that the
Development Fund for Iraq, set up by the post-war Resolution 1483 (see below), will
run out of money by the end of 2003, unless additional funds are received through
26 Politics Aside, Iraqi Weapons Report Raises Crucial Questions. USA Today, October 8,
2003.
27 For information on the prospects for Iraq’s post-war economy, see CRS Report RL31944.
Iraq’s Economy: Past, Present, Future.
CRS-29
donations, such as pledges at a planned October 23-24 donors’ conference in Madrid,
or U.S. appropriations (see below). The Development Fund for Iraq contained about
$7 billion when it was established in June 2003, consisting of captured Iraqi assets,
Iraqi assets abroad, the monies transferred from the oil-for-food account, and U.S.
funds available for reconstruction (FY2003 supplemental, P.L. 108-11, which
appropriated about $2.5 billion for reconstruction). A World Bank estimate, released
in early October 2003, said Iraq reconstruction would require about $56 billion
during 2004-2007, including the $20 billion in U.S. funding requested by the
Administration in September 2003 (see below).
A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which
foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s
vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will
seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other
countries.
Supplemental Funding Needs.28 Partly because oil revenues are lagging
behind projections, in late August 2003 Bremer visited Washington to talk to other
Administration officials about the need to ask Congress for immediate supplemental
funds for reconstruction needs, which Bremer estimates will run into the “several
tens of billions” over the next year. On September 8, 2003, President Bush stated
that he would request supplemental funding for FY2004 for the “war on terrorism,”
in the amount of $87 billion, of which over $70 billion would be for military
operations in and reconstruction of Iraq. Of that amount, about $50 billion would be
for military costs and about $20 billion for reconstruction of Iraq.
The supplemental request asks for the following for Iraq reconstruction:
! $2.1 billion for border enforcement and other security functions,
! $2.1 billion for establishing Iraqi security and civil defense
institutions (see above),
! $900 million for justice and civil society development, including
programs for women and youth, and the formation of an independent
human rights commission,
! $6 billion for electricity infrastructure rehabilitation,
! $2.1 billion for rehabilitating the energy infrastructure,
! $3.7 billion to repair water and sewage systems,
! $900 million for water conservation facilities,
! $800 million for repair of transportation and telecommunications
infrastructure,
! $500 million to upgrade housing, roads, and bridges,
! $900 million to construct and equip hospitals and clinics, and
! $300 million for jobs training and private sector initiatives.
28 For information on the status of legislative consideration of the request for supplemental
funding, see RL32090, FY2004 Supplemental Appropriations for Iraq, Afghanistan, and the
Global War on Terrorism: Military Operations & Reconstruction Assistance.
CRS-30
Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have
been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program.
The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put
in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was
suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various
aspects of the program departed Iraq. As of the start of the war, about $9 billion
worth of humanitarian goods were in the process of being delivered or in production.
(See CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, Sanctions, and Illicit
Trade.)
On March 28, 2003, the U.N. Security Council unanimously adopted Resolution
1472 that restarted the program’s operations and empowered the United Nations, for
a 45-day period (until May 12), to take direct control of all aspects of the program.
Under the new resolution, the United Nations is setting priorities for and directing the
delivery of already contracted supplies. The enhanced U.N. authority was extended
on April 25, 2003, to last at least until the six-month phase of the program expired
on June 3, 2003.
On April 17, 2003, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions
against Iraq, signaling that the Administration wanted to focus on restoring normal
international commerce with Iraq rather than extending the oil-for-food program.
Resolution 1483 lifted sanctions and provided for the phasing out of the oil for food
program within six months after adoption of that resolution on May 22; the program
terminates on November 22, 2003. The resolution also provided for the United
Nations to transfer to the new Development Fund for Iraq $1 billion in funds held
by the oil-for-food program escrow fund. (For more information, see CRS Report
RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, International Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.)
International Role in Peacekeeping and Governance29
The relatively slow pace of establishing Iraqi security institutions, coupled with
ongoing resistance that is causing continued U.S. casualties, has led to calls from
Members of Congress and others for the Administration to expand its efforts to
enlist other countries to help with the stabilization of Iraq. In his speech on Iraq of
September 7, 2003, President Bush said he has authorized Secretary of State Powell
to negotiate a Security Council resolution that would authorize a multinational
peacekeeping force in Iraq, and thereby perhaps trigger additional pledges of force
contributions. Thus far, over 30 countries have made commitments of forces to help
secure Iraq, but the commitments of several large nations, including Germany and
France appear to be contingent on U.N. authorization and a restructuring of post-war
governance to allow for a greater U.N. role. The position of U.N. Secretary General
Kofi Annan appears to be close to that of France; he has cut U.N. staff in Iraq
because of security concerns and said the United Nations should only play a larger
role in Iraq if there is a road map to an early restoration of Iraqi sovereignty.
29 For additional information on international contributions to Iraq peacekeeping and
reconstruction, see CRS Report RL31843. Iraq: Foreign Contributions to Operation Iraqi
Freedom, Peacekeeping Operations, and Post-War Reconstruction.
CRS-31
Since the fall of Saddam Hussein, the Administration has sought U.N. backing
for its post-war efforts. Resolution 1483 (May 22, 2003), which was adopted
unanimously, provided for a U.N. special representative to coordinate the activities
of U.N. personnel in Iraq and to help establish a successor government. The
Secretary General subsequently (May 27, 2003) appointed de Mello (see above) for
that post. The resolution also gave the United Nations a monitoring role over the
Development Fund for Iraq, a fund that will handle Iraq’s oil revenues until there is
a successor government. The resolution did not authorize a return to Iraq of U.N.
weapons inspectors, although the resolution provided for deliberations on that issue.
Some International Atomic Energy Agency inspectors returned to Iraq in June 2003
on a limited nuclear mission in Baghdad. On August 14, 2003, the U.N. Security
Council adopted a compromise resolution, Resolution 1500, that “welcomed,” but
did not “endorse,” the formation of the Governing Council, an apparent nod to U.S.
requests. The resolution also enhanced U.N. authority in Iraq somewhat by
establishing a “U.N. Assistance Mission for Iraq.” The resolution did not formally
authorize an international peacekeeping force for Iraq (Resolution 1483 already
“calls on” governments to contribute forces for stabilization) and did not measurably
dilute U.S. authority over post-war governance in Iraq.
These resolutions did not satisfy the requirements of many nations that want the
United Nations to play the lead role in rebuilding Iraq politically. The United States
has circulated a draft resolution that would enhance the U.N. role in post-war
governance and authorize a multinational force. However, the U.S. draft reportedly
does not offer to meet key demands of such countries as France to end the U.S.
occupation of Iraq in favor of a U.N. led process that leads to an early restoration of
Iraqi sovereignty. Press reports in early October said the United States might
withdraw the draft. Some in the Bush Administration reportedly do not want to cede
control over post-war governance to the United Nations or other nations; they
maintain that doing so would confuse the post-war command structure and possibly
lead to the formation of a government in Iraq that is not committed to democracy and
not necessarily pro-U.S. Those in the Administration who take this view reportedly
want to accelerate the training and equipping of Iraqi security forces and believe that
additional U.S. and international forces might not be needed to stabilize Iraq.
A number of different formulas have been discussed for broadening peackeeping
duties in Iraq. Deputy Secretary of State Richard Armitage told journalists in late
August 2003 that one idea under discussion could be for a multinational force, under
U.N. leadership, which would be commanded by a U.S. military official.30 This
option appears to still be under consideration, as are others, such as the possibility
that NATO might command a multilateral force. The United States has had some
discussions with NATO on whether the organization would take on Iraq as a fifth
peacekeeping mission. On July 10, 2003, the Senate adopted an amendment, by a
vote of 97-0, to a State Department authorization bill (S. 925) calling on the
Administration to formally ask NATO to lead a peacekeeping force for Iraq. A
related bill (H.R. 2112) was introduced in the House on May 15, 2003. (For more
30 Jehl, Douglas. U.S. Now Signals It Might Consider U.N. Force in Iraq. New York Times,
August 28, 2003.
CRS-32
information on this possibility, see CRS Report RL32068, An Enhanced European
Role in Iraq?)
The Administration maintains that, even without additional pledges, the
peacekeeping function is already mostly multilateral. The United Kingdom and
Poland are leading multinational divisions in southern Iraq and central Iraq,
respectively. The United States and Poland reached agreement in late July 2003 for
the United States to fund the deployment of the Polish force, support valued at about
$250 million. The UK-led force is to number about 14,000, of which all but 2,000
are British forces. The Polish-led force is to number about 9,200, of which 2,300
will be Polish. The pledged forces listed below have begun deploying to Iraq as of
early October 2003, and there are now about 22,000 non-U.S. troops on the ground
(including 12,000 British). Confirmed pledges include those in Table 1, but, for a
more thorough list, see CRS Report RL31843.
On October 7, the Turkish parliament approved a government recommendation
to send up to 10,000 peacekeeping forces to Iraq. The pledge drew criticism from
Iraq’s Governing Council that Turkey will likely use the deployment to meddle in
Iraq’s internal affairs. The CPA and the Governing Council are discussing conditions
under which the deployment might move forward.
Financial Pledges. Other countries have agreed to provide funding for
reconstruction. Pledges are discussed in CRS Report RL31843, referenced above.
The Administration is reportedly hoping for at least $10 billion in new contributions
at the late October donor’s conference in Madrid, but outside experts say pledges will
likely come in well below that figure. On the other hand, Japan reportedly will
pledge about $5 billion for Iraq reconstruction.
Table 1. CRS-33
Multinational Division Force Pledges
Azerbaijan 150
Bulgaria 500
Czech Republic 400
Denmark 380
Dominican Republic 300
El Salvador 300
Estonia 55
Georgia 100
Honduras 300
Hungary 300
Italy 3,000 (mostly military police)
Japan 1,000 (logistics and combat support).
(Implementation placed on hold after
U.N. HQ bombing )
Latvia 150
Lithuania 85
Macedonia 28
Mongolia 200
Netherlands 1,100
Nicaragua 300
Norway 150
Philippines 500
Poland 2,300
Portugal 120
Romania 150
Slovakia 85
South Korea 700 (mostly medical)
Spain 1,300
Thailand 500
Ukraine 1650
Total Pledged 17,100
CRS-34
Fate of the Deposed Regime
An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is whether Saddam
Hussein and his associates should be prosecuted for war crimes and crimes against
humanity, if and when they are caught. The Administration said in early April 2003
that Saddam and his inner circle should be tried by Iraqis if they are captured,
although others might be tried by a U.S.-led process for any crimes committed in the
course of the 2003 war. In the year prior to the war, the Administration was
gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those it had
sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay (killed after discovery
by and a firefight with U.S. forces in Mosul on July 22, 2003); Ali Hassan al-Majid,
for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (captured August 21, 2003);
Muhammad Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered in mid-April 2003); Taha Yasin
Ramadan; first Vice President and number three in the regime (captured August 19,
2003); Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council and
formally number two in the regime; Barzan al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother
(captured in mid-April 2003); Watban al-Tikriti (captured in April 2003) and Sabawi
al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam and former leaders of regime
intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputy Prime Minister and foremost regime
spokesman (surrendered in May 2003); and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait
during Iraq’s occupation of that country (captured May 2003).
Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials
sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured
or surrendered. As of late September 2003, 43 of the Iraqis on the list of 55 are now
in custody or were killed. Others not on the list of 55 have been apprehended as
well: Amir al-Saadi, chief science adviser to Saddam; Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti, a
son-in-law of Saddam; Vice President Taha Muhi ad-Din Ma’ruf; and suspected
WMD manager Hoda Mahdi Salih al-Ammash.
The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and
the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29,
1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related
atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for
FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress
that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal
for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137
(passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March
13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October
31, 1998).
A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993,
after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the United States has supported
INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the
arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the
Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer,
said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established,
focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical
weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds)
and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which
CRS-35
an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against
Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes
against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations.
In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a
U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war
crimes is formed.
The FY2004 supplemental request contains a request for funding of a “Truth
and Reconciliation Commission.” The requests also asks for funding for further
investigations into the human rights abuses committed by the former regime, as well
as some memorials to the victims of those abuses.
Congressional Reactions
Congress, like the Administration, had divergent views on the mechanisms for
promoting regime change, although there was widespread agreement in Congress that
regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S. policy. There was substantial
disagreement over whether a major military offensive was the most desirable option
for achieving that objective. On December 20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75,
by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a
“mounting threat” to the United States. The resolution did not call for new U.S. steps
to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few Members called for the overthrow of
Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in support of the resolution.
In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq,
some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint
appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on
Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations
Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the
opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an
option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In
early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members — Senators John
McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and
Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr.
— wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for
operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter,
Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S.
assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish
areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and
other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to
accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.”
As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002,
Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result.
Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force
against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce
U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on
October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote
of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243).
CRS-36
The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. Prior to the war, it held
several hearings on the progress of post-war reconstruction. During the war and in
its aftermath, several Members applauded the performance of the U.S. military and
the overthrow of the regime. Some Members, however, have criticized the
Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war period in light of major
looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the regime. Criticism of post-war
planning has escalated as attacks on U.S. occupation forces have mounted, although
the Administration and others say U.S. casualties are relatively light and that the
resistance is not jeopardizing overall U.S. objectives for Iraq. Several Committees
are conducting inquiries into why substantial amounts of WMD have not been found
in Iraq to date. Some Members of both parties have also expressed concern about the
costs of the U.S. occupation, particularly in light of the Administration’s September
2003 request for an additional $87 billion in funding, and several Members have
called on the Administration to take greater steps to persuade other countries to share
the burden of peacekeeping in and reconstruction of Iraq. Others have called for an
increase in the number of U.S. troops in Iraq or re-evaluation of the mix of U.S.
forces to ensure that the skill set of the U.S. force matches the needs of
reconstruction. Some Members who have visited Iraq in recent months say
reconstruction is proceeding well and that Iraq is more stable than that portrayed in
the press.
CRS-37
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition
Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.)
to the Opposition
(Figures in millions of dollars)
INC War
Crimes Broadcasting
Unspecified
Opposition
Activities
Total
FY 1998
(P.L. 105-174)
2.0 5.0
(RFE/RL)
3.0 10.0
FY 1999
(P.L. 105-277)
3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0
FY 2000
(P.L. 106-113)
2.0 8.0 10.0
FY 2001
(P.L. 106-429)
12.0
(aid
distribution
inside Iraq)
2.0 6.0
(INC radio)
5.0 25.0
FY 2002
(P.L. 107-115)
25.0 25.0
Total,
FY1998-FY2002
15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0
FY2003
(no earmark)
3.1
(announced
April 2003)
6.9
(remaining
to be
allocated)
10.0
FY2004
(request)
0 0
Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq
Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97
million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent,
as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided,
the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and
FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be
used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N.
programs.
Another version (English): 22 September 2003 — RL31339_2003-09-22.pdf
Order Code RL31339
CRS Report for Congress
Received through the CRS Web
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
Updated September 22, 2003
Kenneth Katzman
Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs
Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division
Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
Summary
The United States has attempted since the early 1990s to oust Saddam Hussein
from power in Iraq. Past efforts to change the regime failed because of limited U.S.
commitment, disorganization of the Iraqi opposition, and the efficiency and
ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping security services. Previous U.S.
Administrations ruled out major U.S. military action to change Iraq’s regime,
believing such action would be risky and not necessarily justified by the level of
Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament. Operation Iraqi Freedom
accomplished that objective, but the post-war period has, by almost all accounts,
proved more difficult than the Administration had anticipated.
In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized
Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to verifiably
abandon its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs and the potential for it
to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. In September 2002, the President told the U.N.
General Assembly that unless Iraq fullydisarmed in cooperation with United Nations
weapons inspectors, the United States would lead a coalition to achieve that
disarmament militarily, making clear that this would include the ouster of Iraq’s
President Saddam Hussein’s regime. After a November 2002 - March 2003 round
of U.N. inspections in which Iraq’s cooperation was mixed, on March 19, 2003 the
United States launched Operation Iraqi Freedom to disarm Iraq and change its
regime. The regime fell on April 9, 2003.
In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change
through U.S.-led military action would yield benefits beyond disarmament and
reduction of support for terrorism; benefits such as liberation of the Iraqi people
from an oppressive regime and promotion of stabilityand democracy throughout the
Middle East. However, escalating resistance to the U.S.-led occupation, punctuated
by the August 19, 2003, truck bombing of the U.N. headquarters in Baghdad, has
contributed to an Administration decision to try to enlist increased foreign
participation in post-war peacekeeping and reconstruction and to accelerate the
building of Iraqi institutions that can maintain security. Formerly exiled opposition
groups form the core of a U.S.-appointed 25-seat “governing council” that was
unveiled on July 13, 2003. The Administration hopes that the formation of the
council and subsequent appointment of a cabinet will signal that Iraq is moving
toward self rule and calm some of the resistance against U.S. occupation forces in
Iraq.
See also CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Humanitarian
and Reconstruction Assistance. This report will be updated as warranted by major
developments.
Contents
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Sadr Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
The First ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Monarchists/Sharif Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups . . . 12
Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Post-War Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
The Governing Council and Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
New Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Prospects for Elections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Post-War U.S. Operations and theCoalition Provisional Authority . . . . . . . 24
The Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Building Security Institutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Searching for Regime Violations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Supplemental Funding Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
International Role in Peacekeeping and Governance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
U.N. Role in Post-War Iraq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Fate of the Deposed Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Congressional Reactions Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
The United States has sought to remove Iraq’s Saddam Hussein from power
since the 1991 Persian Gulf war, although achieving this goal was not declared policy
until 1998. In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass
destruction (WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United
States would seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A
regime change policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338,
October 31, 1998). Bush Administration officials emphasized regime change as the
cornerstone of U.S. policy toward Iraq since shortly after the September 11, 2001,
attacks. Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003, and had
effectively removed Saddam Hussein from power by April 9, 2003.
The Bush Administration’s stated goal is to transform Iraq from dictatorship to
a democracy that could be a model for the rest of the region. Iraq has not had
experience with a democratic form of government, although parliamentary elections
were held during the period of British rule under a League of Nations mandate (1920-
1932). Iraq, which became independent in 1932, was governed by kings from the
Hashemite dynastyduring 1921-1958, although with substantial British direction and
influence.1 Its first king was Faysal bin Hussein, son of Sharif Hussein of Mecca,
who led the Arab revolt against the Ottoman Empire. Faysal ruled Iraq as King
Faysal I and was succeeded by his son, Ghazi (1933-1939). Ghazi was succeeded by
his son, Faysal II, who ruled until the military coup of Abd al-Karim al-Qasim in
1958. During 1958-1968, Iraq had a succession of military governments, with a brief
period of Baathist rule during 1963. The Baath Party regained power in 1968, and
Saddam Hussein became the second most powerful leader of Iraq as Vice Chairman
of the Revolutionary Command Council. Iraq’s President, Ahmad Hasan al-Bakr,
resigned at Saddam’s urging, and Saddam became President of Iraq on July 17, 1979.
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam
Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an
operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George
H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end
of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and
Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope
of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions. The revolt in southern Iraq reached
the suburbs of Baghdad, but the well-trained and loyal Republican Guard forces had
1 See Eisenstadt, Michael and Eric Mathewson, eds. U.S. Policy in Post-Saddam Iraq:
Lessons From the British Experience. The Washington Institute for Near East Policy, 2003.
CRS-2
survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from battle prior to the U.S.
ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid-March 1991. Many Shiites
blamed the United States for not supporting their uprising and standing aside as the
regime retaliated against those who participated in the rebellion. Kurds, benefitting
from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991, drove Iraqi troops out of
much of northern Iraq and subsequently remained free of Baghdad’s rule.
According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite
uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding
stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup
against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that
purpose. The Administration apparently believed — and this view apparently was
shared by many experts and U.S. officials — that a coup by elements within the
current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq.
Manyobservers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and
Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and
tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria.
Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition
Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that
the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment
within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision
was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the
diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the
Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and
diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This
opposition coalition was seen as providing a vehicle for the United States to build a
viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert
support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.2
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi
The growing opposition coalition took shape in an organization called the Iraqi
National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two main
Kurdish militias, the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic Union of
Kurdistan (PUK), participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens of
opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came into the
coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq.
The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi
ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military
officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC
with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups
publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests,
2 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2,
1992.
CRS-3
including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the
preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. Security
Council resolutions on Iraq.3 However, many observers doubted its commitment to
democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and
because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies. The
INC’s first Executive Committee consisted of KDP leader Masud Barzani, ex-Baath
Party and military official Hassan Naqib, and moderate Shiite cleric Mohammad
Bahr al-Ulum. (Barzani and Bahr al-Ulum are now on the 25-member post-war
Governing Council, inaugurated July 13, 2003, and both are part of its nine member
rotating presidency. Bahr al-Ulum “suspended” his Council membership following
the August 29, 2003, bombing in Najaf that killed a major Shiite figure; see below.)
Ahmad Chalabi. When the INC was formed, its Executive Committee
selected Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 58 years old, a secular Shiite Muslim from
a prominent banking family, to run the INC on a daily basis. Chalabi was educated
in the United States (M.I.T) as a mathematician. He fled Iraq to Jordan in 1958,
when the Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military coup. This coup
occurred 10 years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July 1968). In 1978, he
founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian authorities on
charges of financial malfeasance (embezzlement) and he left Jordan, possibly with
some help from members of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989. In 1992, he was
convicted in absentia of embezzling $70 million from the bank and sentenced to 22
years in prison. The Jordanian government subsequently repaid depositors a total of
$400 million. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government was pressured by
Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to the Jordanian
government. In April 2003, senior Jordanian officials, including King Abdullah,
called Chalabi “divisive” and stopped just short of saying he would be unacceptable
to Jordan as leader of Iraq. Chalabi’s critics acknowledge that, despite allegations
about his methods, he was single-minded in his determination to overthrow Saddam
Hussein, and he is said to be the favorite of those Administration officials,
particularly in the Department of Defense, that were the most supportive of changing
Iraq’s regime by force.
Since Chalabi returned to Iraq, there have been no large public demonstrations
supportive of him or the INC, indicating that he might not have a large following
inside Iraq. However, anecdotal press reporting suggest that he has attracted some
support from those Iraqis that most welcomed the U.S. militaryoffensive against Iraq
and subsequent occupation. On April 6, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters (“Free
Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by the U.S. military from their base in the north to the
Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs in southern Iraq, later
deploying to Baghdad and other parts of Iraq. After establishing his headquarters in
Baghdad, Chalabi tried to build support by searching for fugitive members of the
former regime and arranging for U.S. military forces in Iraq to provide security or
other benefits to his potential supporters. However, the Free Iraqi Forces
accompanying Chalabi were disbanded following the U.S. decision in mid-May2003
to disarm independent militias.
3 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by
INC representatives, February 1993.
CRS-4
Chalabi is part of a grouping of seven major party leaders that began meeting
shortly prior to the 2003 war. The seven-party leadership grouping was hoping to
become the core of a successor regime, and the seven parties are represented on the
Governing Council. Chalabi is a member of the Governing Council and one of the
nine that will rotate its presidency. He is president of the Council during the month
of September 2003.
A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book,
Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq, detailing alleged Iraqi regime human
rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracy for Iraq, including full
rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he teaches Middle
Eastern politics at Brandeis University. In August 2003, Makiya was tapped by the
Governing Council to head a 25-person committee that will decide how to draft a
new constitution. Another INC activist, Mohammed al-Zubaidi, declared himself in
charge of Baghdad in mid-April, but U.S. officials did not recognize him as mayor
and detained him in April 2003.
The Kurds/KDP and PUK. The Kurds, among the most pro-U.S. of all the
groups in Iraq, do not have ambitions to play a major role in governing Arab Iraq, but
Iraq’s neighbors have always been fearful that the Kurds might still seek outright
independence. In committing to the concept of federalism, the INC platform
assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq. Turkey, which
has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly
fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into
a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy
since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War
I. In 1961, the KDP, then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP
leader Masud Barzani’s father, began an insurgency that has continued until today,
although interrupted by periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud
Barzani’s brother, Idris, commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the Iran-Iraq
war but was killed in that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from the
KDP in 1965; the PUK’s members are generally more well-educated, urbane, and
left-leaning than those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000-
60,000 fighters, some of which are trained in conventional military tactics. Both
Barzani and Talabani were part of the major party grouping that has now been
incorporated into the Governing Council, and both are part of the Council’s rotating
presidency.
Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties
enjoyed good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement
of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaikh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in
Halabja, Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical
attack on that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998.
A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam
(Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam).
This faction, led by Mullah Krekar (who was detained in Europe in August 2002 and
now lives in Norway), reportedly associated itself with Al Qaeda and hosted in its
northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters, mostly of Arab origin, who had fled the
U.S.-led war in Afghanistan. Mullah Krekar reportedly studied under Shaikh
CRS-5
Abdullah al-Azzam, an Islamic theologian of Palestinian origin who was the spiritual
mentor of Osama bin Laden. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, during which its base
was captured, about 600 fighters in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, located near the town
of Khurmal.4 Ansar fighters clashed with the PUK around Halabja in December
2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedly responsible for an assassination attempt
against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002.
The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials
to be Abu Musab Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in
Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the
December 1999 millennium celebration, the assassination in Jordan of U.S. diplomat
Lawrence Foley (2002), and to reported attempts in 2002 to spread the biological
agent ricin in London and possibly other places in Europe. In a presentation to the
U.N. Security Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied Zarqawi
and Ansar to Saddam Hussein’s regime, which might have viewed Ansar al-Islam as
a means of pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents. Although Zarqawi reportedly
received medical treatment in Baghdad in May 2002 after fleeing Afghanistan, many
experts believed Baghdad-Ansar links were tenuous or even non-existent; Baghdad
did not control northern Iraq even before Operation Iraqi Freedom.5 Zarqawi’s
current whereabouts are unknown, although some unconfirmed press reports indicate
he might have fled to Iran after the fall of the Ansar camp to U.S.-led forces. Some
recent press accounts say Iran might have him in custody.6 U.S. officials said in
August that some Ansar fighters, possibly at the direction of Zarqawi, might have
remained in or re-entered Iraq and are participating in the resistance to the U.S.
occupation, possibly including organizing acts of terrorism such as recent car/truck
bombings (see below). Ansar al-Islam is not listed by the State Department as
Foreign Terrorist Organization (FTO).
Shiite Islamist Organizations
Some outside experts have had concerns about the potential strength and
ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups in post-
Saddam Iraq. The United States sought to work with some Shiite Islamist opposition
factions during the 1990s but had few if any contacts with others. Shiite Islamist
factions hold at least five seats on the Governing Council unveiled July 13, 2003.
SCIRI/Badr Corps. The most well known among these is called the Supreme
Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member of the INC
in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC banner.
SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition groups
in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad Baqr al-
4 Chivers, C.J. Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.”
New York Times, December 6, 2002.
5 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire,
March 18, 2002.
6 Finn, Peter and Susan Schmidt. Al Qaeda Plans a Front in Iraq. Washington Post,
September 7, 2003.
CRS-6
Hakim, died in a car bomb by unknown assailants in Najaf on August 29, 2003, an
act that could reflect or accelerate a schism within the Shiite Islamist community.
Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head
an Islamic Republic of Iraq, a vision that, if realized, might conflict with U.S. plans
to forge a democratic Iraq. Baqr Al Hakim and his family fled Iraq to Iran in 1980,
during a major crackdown on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam
feared that Iraqi Shiite Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution
in Iran in 1979, posed a major threat to his regime. Prior to the formation of SCIRI,
Hakim and his family were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party (see below).
Mohammed Baqr is the son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a
prominent Shiite leader in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini
when Khomeini was in exile in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. Baqr Al Hakim had
returned to Iraq on May 10, 2003, welcomed by crowds in Basra and Najaf, where
he is now based.
In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about
10,000-15,000 fighters/activists organized into a “Badr Brigades” (named after a
major battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from
Iran into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. The Badr Brigades are
headed by Mohammed Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim, who returned
to Iraq on April 20, 2003, to pave the way for Mohammed Baqr’s return. Abd al-
Aziz has taken over the leadership of the movement in the wake of his elder
brother’s death on August 29. (Another Hakim brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan
in May 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s security services.) Iran’s Revolutionary
Guard, which is politically aligned with Iran’s hard line civilian officials, has been
the key patron of the Badr Brigades, providing it with weapons, funds, and other
assistance; the Brigades fought alongside the Guard against Iraqi forces during the
Iran-Iraq war. However, many Iraqi Shiites view SCIRI as an Iranian creation and
SCIRI/Badr Corps operations in southern Iraq prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did
not spark broad popular unrest against the Iraqi regime. Some Badr fighters deployed
inside northern Iraq on the eve of Operation Iraqi Freedom, and the rest have since
entered Iraq. Asserting that the United States failed to create a secure environment
that might have prevented the August 29 bombing that killed Ayatollah Al Hakim,
Brigade fighters have deployed throughout Najaf since the bombing; U.S. forces
have not moved to disarm or combat these militiamen.
A variety of press reports say that some other individual militias now providing
security in many towns in southern Iraq are linked to the Badr Brigades. One such
militia is derived from the fighters who challenged Saddam Hussein’s forces in the
marsh areas of southern Iraq, around the town of Amara, north of Basra. It goes by
the name Hizbollah (Party of God)-Amara, and it is headed by marsh guerrilla leader
Abdul Karim Muhammadawi, nicknamed “Prince of the Marshes” who was named
to the Governing Council. He is widely perceived as an ally of SCIRI.
Until August 2002 when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures
for meetings in Washington, D.C., SCIRI had publicly refused to work openly with
the United States or accept U.S. assistance, although it was part of the INC and did
have contacts with the United States prior to the 2003 war effort. Since the fall of the
regime on April 9, SCIRI leaders have criticized what they called an illegitimate U.S.
CRS-7
occupation of Iraq and have called for the rapid establishment of an Iraqi self-rule
authority, while at the same time publicly opposing the use of violence against the
occupation. Even though Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim said he was for a democracy
and would not seek to establish an Iranian-style Islamic republic, U.S. officials are
said to be mistrustful of SCIRI and have been seeking to disarm its fighters.
Suggesting that SCIRI sees its interests in a degree of cooperation with the
occupation, Abd al-Aziz al Hakim did meet with other opposition leaders in late
April 2003 at a post-war governance planning session sponsored by U.S. officials.
He later helped constitute the seven-party core of the Governing Council, and Abd
al-Aziz is part of the nine-person rotating Council presidency. Unlike some other
Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI has had good working relations with some Sunni
oppositionists and the Kurds.
SCIRI might get additional support from the family of the late Ayatollah
Khomeini. In July 2003, Khomeini’s grandson, Hossein Khomeini, who is about 45,
relocated from Qom, Iran to Najaf. Khomeini is believed to be an opponent of the
more militant Shiite clerics such as Moqtada Al Sadr (see below), who is also
considered a rival of SCIRI.
Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, perhaps Iraq’s oldest Shiite Islamist grouping,
continues to exist as a separate group, but many Da’wa activists appear to be at least
loosely allied with SCIRI. The party was founded in 1957 by a revered Iraqi Shiite
cleric, Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of Ayatollah
Khomeini. Baqr Al Sadr was hung by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the Da’wa’s
alleged responsibility in fomenting Shiite anti-regime unrest following Iran’s 1979
Islamic revolution. That unrest included an attempted assassination of senior Iraqi
leader Tariq Aziz. Da’wa’s spokesman, Ibrahim Jafari, and its leader in Basra, Abd
al Zahra Othman, are on the Governing Council, as is a former Da’wa activist turned
human rights activist, Muwaffaq Al-Ruba’i. Jafari is one of the nine members of the
Council that is rotating the presidency, and Jafari was the first to take that post.
The Kuwaiti branch of the Da’wa Party allegedly was responsible for a May
1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks
on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The Hizballah organization in Lebanon
was founded by Lebanese clerics loyal to Ayatollah Baqr Al Sadr and the late
Ayatollah Khomeini, and there continue to be personal and ideological linkages
between Hizballah and the Da’wa Party. The Hizballah activists who held U.S.
hostages in that country during the 1980s often attempted to link release of the
Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party prisoners held by Kuwait for those
offenses. Some Iraqi Da’wa members look to Lebanon’s senior Shiite cleric
Mohammed Hossein Fadlallah, who was a student and protege of Ayatollah
Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, for spiritual guidance.
Sadr Movement. Members of the clan of the late Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr
Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq. The Sadr clan, based in Iraq
during Saddam Hussein’s rule, was repressed and not politically active during that
time. The United States had no contact with this grouping prior to the 2003 war and
did not attempt to enlist it in any overthrow efforts during 1991-2002. Although the
Al Sadr clan has been closely identified with the Da’wa Party, it appears that
members of the clan and their followers currently are operating in post-war Iraq as
CRS-8
a movement separate from Da’wa. Another revered member of the clan, Mohammed
Sadiq Al Sadr, and two of his sons, were killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999.
A surviving son, Moqtada Al Sadr, who is about 27 years old, has attempted to rally
his followers to attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite politics. He and his
clan apparently have a large following in the poorer Shiite neighborhoods of
Baghdad, which, after the fall of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr
City,” from the former name of “Saddam City.” However, Moqtada is viewed by
Iran and many Iraqi Shiites as a young radical who lacks religious and political
weight. To compensate for his lack of religious credentials, he has sought spiritual
authority for his actions from exiled Iraqi senior cleric, Ayatollah Kazem Haeri, who
is living in Qom, Iran. An alternate interpretation by some experts is that Haeri is
acting at the direction of Iran’s leadership to keep Moqtada Sadr under a measure of
control.
Moqtada’s reputation may have been tarnished in early April when Moqtada al
Sadr reportedly killed Abd al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Abdol
Qasem Musavi-Khoi, shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al-
Majid Khoi headed the Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq
after U.S.-led forces took Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political
doctrines of Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran.
The Sadr grouping has not been included in the Governing Council. Moqtada
has used his Friday prayer sermons in Najaf and other forums to denounce the
Council as a puppet of the U.S. occupation. In July 2003, Moqtada and his aides
began recruiting for an Islamic army, for now unarmed, that Sadr says must
challenge the U.S. occupation, although he has thus far stopped short of openly
calling for armed attacks on American forces. He is openly calling for a cleric-led
Islamic state similar to that of Iran. In August 2003, Shiites in Basra and in Baghdad
rioted against British and U.S. occupation forces over fuel shortages and perceived
slights, and there was speculation that Moqtada was helping fuel the riots.
Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah. The revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al-
Sistani, based in Najaf, was repressed during Saddam’s rule and is emerging as a
major potential force in post-war Iraq. The United States had no contact with Sistani
when Saddam was in power. He is the most senior of the Shiite clerics that lead the
Najaf- based “Hawza al-Ilmiya,” a major grouping of seminaries and Shiite clerics.
Other senior clerics include Ayatollah Mohammad Sa’id Al Hakim, uncle of the slain
SCIRI leader Mohammad Baqr, and Isaac Fayadh. The Hawza, which is well funded
through donations, is becoming an important source of political authority in the
Shiite regions of Iraq, hiring Iraqis to perform functions performed by the former
regime and issuing directives, often obeyed, for some Iraqi civil servants to return to
work.
Sistani, who is of Iranian ethnicity, is considered to be in the tradition of
Ayatollah Khoi in opposing a direct role for clerics in governmental affairs, and
Sistani and the Hawza have spoken against a direct role for the clerics in governing
post-war Iraq. However, in early July 2003, Sistani began to take a more active role
in Iraq’s post-war decision-making by issuing a statement that only elected Iraqis —
not a U.S.-appointed governing council — should draft a constitution. Sistani and
the Hawza are generally allied with SCIRI in the intra-Shiite power struggle, seeking
CRS-9
to contain Moqtada Al Sadr, whom Sistani and SCIRI both view as radical and
impulsive.
Islamic Amal. Another Shiite Islamist organization called the Islamic Amal
(Action) Organization has traditionally been allied with SCIRI. In the early 1980s,
Islamic Amal was under the SCIRI umbrella but later broke with it. It is headed by
Mohammed Taqi Modarassi, who returned to Iraq from exile in Iran in April 2003,
after Saddam Hussein’s regime fell. Islamic Amal, which has a following among
Shiite Islamists mainly in Karbala, conducted attacks against Saddam Hussein’s
regime in the 1980s. However, it does not appear to have a following nearly as large
as SCIRI or the other Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s brother, Abd al-Hadi,
headed the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, which tried to stir up Shiite
unrest against the Bahrain regime in the 1980s and 1990s (see below). Since
returning to Iraq in April 2003, Mohammad Taqi has argued against violent
opposition to the U.S. occupation, saying that such a challenge would plunge Iraq
into civil warfare.
Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups
The differences among the various anti-Saddam organizations led to the near
collapse of the U.S. regime change effort the mid-1990s. In May 1994, the KDP and
the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs revenues levied at
border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s government based in
Irbil. The PUK lined up support from Iran while the KDP sought and received
countervailing backing from its erstwhile nemesis, the Baghdad government. The
infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC offensive against Iraqi troops in March
1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at the last minute. Although it was
repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of the less well-trained and poorly
motivated Iraqi units facing the Kurds. Some INC leaders point to the battle as an
indication that the INC could have succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. military
help, had it been given additional resources and training in the 1990s.
The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition in the
mid-1990s caused the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by
renewing ties to a non-INC group, Iraq National Accord (INA).7 The INA, originally
founded in 1990 with Saudi support, consists of military and security defectors who
were perceived as having ties to disgruntled officials currently serving within their
former organizations. It is headed by Dr. Iyad Alawi, former president of the Iraqi
Student Union in Europe and a physician by training. He is a secular Shiite Muslim,
but most of the members of the INA are Sunni Muslims. The INA’s prospects
appeared to brighten in August 1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al-
Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons of mass destruction programs — defected to
Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip on the military and security services was
weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate from there.
The INA was ultimately penetrated by Iraq’s intelligence services and, in June 1996,
7 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret
War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997.
CRS-10
Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by arresting or executing over 100 INA
sympathizers in the military.
Iraq’s counteroffensive against the opposition was expanded two months after
the arrests of the INA sympathizers. In late August 1996, the KDP asked Baghdad
to provide armed support for its capture of Irbil from the rival PUK. Iraq took
advantage of the request to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in
northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout northern Iraq.
In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred
oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated
from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists,
mostly from the INC.
Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA continued to
operate throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt itself to some extent since the
June 1996 arrests. However, it does not appear to have a large following in Iraq.
Although it has was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war,
there is a history of friction between the two groups; the INA reportedly bombed an
INC facility in northern Iraq in October 1995. Alawi was part of the seven-party
grouping that became the core of the Governing Council, and Alawi has been named
a member of that Council and one of its nine-member rotating presidency.
Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks
For the two years following the anti-Saddam opposition groups’ 1996 setbacks,
the Clinton Administration had little contact with these groups. In those two years,
the INC, INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations
and their ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998,
then Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations
subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations”
about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish.
Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections
during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam
Hussein. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with an
FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, signed May1, 1998) that, among
other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the
opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free
Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October
1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to
coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to
highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions. The remaining $2 million was used
to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the
documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes,
and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In
subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for
war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix. Some of the war crimes funding has
gone to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War
Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues.
CRS-11
Iraq Liberation Act
A clear indication of congressional support for a more active U.S. overthrow
effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998: the Iraq Liberation Act
(ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998). The ILA gave the
President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles (and authorized
$2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be designated by the
Administration. The Act’s passage was widely interpreted as an expression of
congressional support for the concept of promoting an insurgency by using U.S. air-
power to expand opposition-controlled territory. This idea was advocated byChalabi
and some U.S. experts, such as General Wayne Downing, who subsequently became
a National Security Council official on counter-terrorism in the first two years of the
George W. Bush Administration. President Clinton signed the legislation despite
reported widespread doubts within the Clinton Administration about the chances of
success in promoting an opposition insurgency.
The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting
regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it
should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime
headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly
articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq. No
specific language in the Act provides for its termination after Saddam Hussein is
removed from power.
The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the
height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in
which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United
Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were
withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign
against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December
16-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq:
Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.)
The First ILA Designations. Further steps to promote regime change
followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, a career diplomat, Frank
Ricciardone, was named as a State Department’s “Coordinator for the Transition in
Iraq,” the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999, after consultations
with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13) that the following
organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance under the Iraq
Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the Islamic Movement
of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the Movement for Constitutional Monarchy (MCM).
Because of its possible role in contributing to the formation of Ansar al-Islam, the
IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001, although it was not formally taken off
the ILA eligibility list.
Monarchists/Sharif Ali. The MCM, which was an original designee of
eligibility to receive assistance under the ILA, is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a
relative of the Hashemite monarchs (he is a cousin of King Faysal II, the last Iraqi
monarch) that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. Sharif Ali, who is
about 47 and was a banker in London, claims to be the leading heir to the former
CRS-12
Hashemite monarchy, although there are other claimants, mostly based in Jordan.
The MCM was considered a small movement that could not contribute much to the
pre-war overthrow effort, although it was part of the INC and the United States had
contacts with it. In the post-war period, Sharif Ali returned to Iraq on June 10, 2003,
to a small but apparently enthusiastic welcome. He did not participate in the seven-
party grouping that negotiated with the U.S.-led occupation authority on the
formation of the Governing Council, and neither Sharif Ali nor any of his followers
was appointed to the Governing Council.
In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton
Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and
“non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999 - 2000, about 150
opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in
Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses providing civil affairs
training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers,
communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However,
the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficientlyorganized
to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This
restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the
effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United
States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The trainees during
1999-2000 are not believed to have been brought into the Operation Iraqi Freedom
effort against the regime, or into the Free Iraqi Forces that deployed to Iraq toward
the end of the active combat phase of the war.
Continued Doubts About the Capabilities
of the Anti-Saddam Groups
During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end
the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of
Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed
disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the
opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an
indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical about the opposition’s
capabilities. The Clinton Administration maintained that the Iraqi opposition would
not succeed unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement, and that direct U.S.
military action was risky and not justified by the degree of threat posed by Iraq.
Others suggested the Clinton Administration should focus instead on rebuilding
containment of Iraq by threatening force if Iraq refused to permit re-entry into Iraq
of the U.N. weapons inspectors that left Iraq in December 1998.
As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a
provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed
November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the
Iraqi people,” of which at least $12 million was for the INC to distribute
humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million
was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million
could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive
assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC
CRS-13
distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000, the Clinton Administration
reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in
FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop an aid distribution plan
and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before
it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that
noted that any INC effort to distribute aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control
would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and
to any relief distributors with which the INC contracts.8
Bush Administration Policy
Bush Administration policy toward Iraq changed after the September 11, 2001
terrorist attacks, even though no significant evidence linking Iraq to those attacks
came to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in
President Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he
characterized Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea.
Pre-September 11 Policy
Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic
elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus
within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow
strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq,
which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its
taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist
regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan: a modification of the U.N.
sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technology reached Iraq. His
plan offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N.
restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military
technology.9
The Administration believed that the proposal, by easing the suffering of the
Iraqi people, would cause Iraq’s neighbors and other countries to cease unilateral
violations of the sanctions regime. Powell, who had openly expressed skepticism
about the opposition’s prospects, barelyraised the regime change issue during his trip
or in his March 7, 2001, testimony before the House International Relations
Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.10 After about a year of
negotiations among the Security Council permanent members, the major feature of
the smart sanctions plan — new procedures that virtually eliminate U.N. review of
8 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.”
January 17, 2001.
Program.
March 2, 2001.
9 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food
10 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times,
CRS-14
civilian exports to Iraq — was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Security Council
Resolution 1409).
Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime
change policy, many of the questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy
that had faced previous administrations were debated early in the Bush
Administration.11 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush
Administration did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first year.
During his confirmation hearings as DeputySecretaryof Defense, a leading advocate
of overthrowing Iraq’s regime, Paul Wolfowitz, said that he did not yet see a
“plausible plan” for changing the regime. Like its predecessor, the Bush
Administration initially declined to provide the opposition with lethal aid, combat
training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the separate
State Department position of “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” further casting
doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy. On February 2, 2001, the Bush
Administration confirmed that, shortly after President Bush took office, the Treasury
Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted the INC a license to
proceed with information gathering inside Iraq only, and not actual distribution of
humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the Administration amounted to a
withholding of U.S. backing for the INC plan to rebuild its presence inside Iraq.
Many in Congress, on the other hand, continued to support the INC as the
primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional
sentiment, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite
doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television
broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the
ESF aid appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an estimated
additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.12
Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime
Bush Administration policy toward Iraq became notably more assertive after
the September 11, 2001, attacks, stressing regime change and asserting that
containment was inadequate. Almost immediately after the U.S.-led war on the
Taliban and Al Qaeda in Afghanistan began in earlyOctober 2001, speculation began
building that the Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use
of military force as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism. Some U.S.
officials reportedly believed that the United States needed to respond to the
September 11, 2001 attacks by ending any or all regimes that support terrorist groups,
including Iraq. As noted above, in his January 29, 2002 State of the Union message,
President Bush named Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with North Korea and
Iran. Vice President Cheney visited the Middle East in March 2002 reportedly to
consult regional countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq militarily,
although the countries visited reportedly urged greater U.S. attention to the Arab-
Israeli dispute and opposed confrontation with Iraq.
11 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh,
Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002.
12 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001.
CRS-15
The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for
confronting Iraq were (1) its purported refusal to end its WMD programs, and (2) its
ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of
conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. The Administration added that
regime change would have the further benefit of liberating the Iraqi people and
promoting stability in the Middle East, possibly facilitating a resolution to the Arab-
Israeli dispute.
Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s
regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax
mailings, senior U.S. officials said in the runup to the war that there was evidence
of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. (On September 19, 2003, President Bush, in response
to a journalist’s question, said there is no evidence linking Saddam Hussein’s regime
to the September 11 attacks but there is evidence linking that regime to Al Qaeda.)
Secretary of State Powell, as noted above, cited intelligence information that Ansar
al-Islam and its enclave leader Abu Musab al-Zarqawi had links to Saddam Hussein’s
regime.13 (See section above on Ansar al-Islam for more information on that
organization and its reputed links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.) Other senior
officials cited intelligence information that Iraq provided advice and training to Al
Qaeda in the manufacture and use of chemical weapons, although Administration
information appears to date to the early 1990s when Iraq, largely isolated after the
first Gulf war, was politically close to Sudan. Al Qaeda founder Osama Bin Laden
was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996). The Bush Administration did not
extensively cite reports that Czech intelligence believed that Iraqi intelligence had
met with lead September 11 hijacker Mohammad Atta in Prague in spring 2001,
suggesting official skepticism of those reports. Some outside commentators
believed that those reports indicated a direct Iraqi connection to the September 11
attacks.
Some outside observers expressed skepticism about Iraq-Al Qaeda connections
because of the ideological differences between Saddam Hussein’s secular regime and
Al Qaeda’s Islamist character. Others noted that bin Laden sought to raise an Islamic
army to fight Saddam’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990, arguing against the need for U.S.
troops, and that he was more an enemy of Saddam Hussein than an ally. Those
differences were evident in a February 12, 2003, bin Laden statement referring to
Saddam Hussein’s regime as socialist and infidel, although the statement exhorted
Iraq to resist impending U.S. military action. In the Administration view, the two
shared similar anti-U.S. goals, which outweighed ideological differences and
propelled them into tactical or strategic cooperation.
WMD Threat Perception. In arguing for military action, U.S. officials
maintained that Iraq’s purported commitment to developing WMD — coupled with
its support for terrorist groups to which Iraq might transfer WMD — constituted an
unacceptable potential threat to the United States and that major U.S. military action
was justified if Iraq refused to disarm voluntarily. U.S. officials said the September
11, 2001 attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to
13 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002.
CRS-16
gather before acting, but must instead act preemptively or preventively. Senior U.S.
officials asserted a WMD threat as follows:
! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years
since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply
with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8,
2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs.
However, statements by U.N. weapons inspectors after inspections
resumed November 27, 2002 indicated they believed Iraq did not
have an active nuclear weapons program, and that inspections on
other weapons categories were making progress.
! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and
against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not
necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States
or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against
adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of
destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of
massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the
1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings of
retaliation and did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war.
! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who
could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths
in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of this view cited
presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in October 2002,
portions of which were released publicly, stating the CIA view that
Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to terrorists if the United States
were to attack Iraq. At that point, according to that argument,
Saddam Hussein would be left with little incentive not to cooperate
with terrorist groups capable of striking at U.S. interests. No WMD
was used against Iraq during Operation Iraqi Freedom, and little
evidence of actual WMD have thus far been found, although the
Administration asserts that WMD programs, and perhaps actual
weapons themselves, will eventually be found in Iraq.
Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam
As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action against Iraq, the
Bush Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its
capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002,
President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special
operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and
Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups — the INC, the
INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM — to Washington for meetings with
senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were
held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S.
government, which reportedly tended to favor different opposition groups.
CRS-17
In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August
15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in ESF to the Iraqi
National Congress (INC), funds that had been held up due to differences between the
State Department and the INC over what activities would be funded. The $8 million
was to be used to fund the INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its
offices in Washington, London, Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate
its Al Mutamar newspaper and Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund
the information gathering portion of the INC’s activities; the State Department had
refused to fund those activities, which are conducted inside Iraq, because of strains
between the INC and other opposition groups and questions about INC use of U.S.
funds.
In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and
to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic-
based groups. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had
increasing contact during this period include the following:
! Iraqi National Movement. It formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the
INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib
(who was part of an early leadership body of the INC); and Hatim
Mukhlis, who claimed support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan.
! Iraqi National Front. Another grouping of ex-military officers,
founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite
Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and
participated in the post-1991 Gulf war anti-Saddam uprisings.
! Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement. Established in 1996 by
ex-military officer Najib al-Salhi, this group was close to the INC.
Salhi, who defected in 1995, served in the Republican Guard.
! Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was
established in August 2002, headed by Wafiq al-Samarra’i, a former
head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of staff of Iraq’s
military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was based in Denmark
since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member. Khazraji was
placed under travel restrictions by Danish officials in late November
2002 after saying he wanted to leave Denmark. He is under
investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of chemical
weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities said on
March 17, 2003, that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his home
there,14 although his current whereabouts are unknown.
! Iraqi Turkmen Front. A small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping,
generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq.
Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq.
14 ‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper. Agence France Press, April 7, 2003.
CRS-18
! The Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another
Shiite Islamic Party, but it is considered substantially less pro-
Iranian than SCIRI or the Da’wa Party. It is headed by Jamil Wakil,
a follower of Ayatollah Shirazi, an Iranian cleric who was the
spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation
of Bahrain (IFLB, see above under Islamic Amal). The IFLB
allegedly attempted to overthrow Bahrain’s regime in the early
1980s.
! The Assyrian Democratic Movement, an ethnic-based movement
headed by Secretary-General Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s
Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq. There is a
strong diaspora presence in the United States as well. After building
ties to this group over the past year, the Bush Administration
formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement
into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002.
(Kanna is on the Governing Council.)
Second ILA Designations. The Bush Administration applauded efforts
during 2001 and 2002 by the ex-military led groups to coordinate with each other
and with the INC and other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London and
jointly run with the INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers. However, since the
regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, virtually none of the ex-military led
groups listed above has openly sought a major role in post-Saddam Iraq.
As a decision whether to launch military action approached, President Bush
issued a determination (December 9, 2002) to draw down the remaining $92 million
in defense articles and services authorized under the Iraq Liberation Act for the INA,
the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi
opposition groups designated by me under the Act before or after this
determination.” That same day, the Bush Administration made six of the ex-military
led factions discussed above (except the Higher Council for National Salvation)
eligible to receive draw downs under the ILA. The announcement appeared to be
part of reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists in tasks that could assist U.S.
forces, possibly including combat units.15 An initial group of 3,000 was selected, but
only about 70 oppositionists completed training at an air base (Taszar) in Hungary,
according to press reports.16 These oppositionists served with U.S. forces in
Operation Iraqi Freedom as translators and mediators between U.S. forces and local
leaders, and most did not stay in Iraq, according to observers.
As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began
planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002,
with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in
London. In advance of the meeting, the Bush Administration appointed NSC official
15 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.”
Washington Post, October 19, 2002.
16 Williams, Daniel. “U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles.” Washington Post, December
18, 2002.
CRS-19
Zalmay Khalilzad to be a liaison to the Iraqi opposition. The conference was
organized by the same six groups whose leaders visited Washington in August 2002,
but included other groups as well, and they discussed whether the opposition should
declare a provisional government. The Administration opposed that step on the
grounds that doing so was premature and would give the impression that outside
powers were determining Iraq’s political structure.
The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65-member follow-up committee,
which some criticized as weighted heavily toward Shiite Islamist groups such as
SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24-27, 2003, in northern Iraq, and
formed, against the urging of U.S. representatives at the meeting, a six-seat
committee to prepare for a transition regime. The assembled groups did not declare
a provisional government. The six-person committee included PUK leader Jalal
Talabani, KDP leader Masud Barzani, SCIRI leader Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim,
Chalabi, INA leader Iyad Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign minister Adnan Pachachi.
(A member from each of the six groups is on the Governing Council.)
Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the
new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete
disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if that country wanted to avert military
action. In a probable effort to garner international support for any U.S.-led war effort
against Iraq, the Administration had downplayed the goal of regime change in
President Bush’s September 12, 2002, speech before the United Nations General
Assembly, stressing instead the need to enforce U.N. resolutions that required Iraqi
disarmament. However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change
goal after February 2003 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course.
The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March 2003
breakdown of U.N. diplomacy over whether the U.N. Security Council should
authorize war against Iraq for failing to comply with Resolution 1441. The
diplomatic breakdown followed several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by
the director of the U.N. inspection body UNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification,
and Inspection Commission) Hans Blix and the director of the International Atomic
Energy Agency (IAEA), Mohammad al-Baradei, most recently on March 7, 2003.
The briefings were generally critical of Iraq for failing to pro-actively cooperate to
clear up outstanding questions about Iraq’s WMD program, but the latter two
briefings (February 24 and March 7, 2003) noted progress in clearing up outstanding
WMD questions. The Blix/Baradei briefings said Iraq had not accounted for its past
WMD, but the two did not state that they were certain that Iraq had retained WMD,
or that they had uncovered any banned WMD. Iraq declared short range ballistic
missiles that were determined by Blix to be of prohibited ranges, and Blix ordered
Iraq to destroy them. Iraq began the destruction prior to the launching of the U.S.-led
war. (For more detail on the final round of inspections and evidence of WMD
programs found in the post-war period, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117: Iraq: Weapons
Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.)
Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and
Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that
inspections should be given more time. They noted that Iraq was well contained by
sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones. Those who agreed with this
CRS-20
view maintained that, as long as Iraq allowed access to U.N. weapons inspections
under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national
security. The inspectors reported few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700
inspections of about 400 different sites. Others experts believed that, even if Iraq
were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could have been deterred by U.S.
overall strategic superiority, presumably including the U.S. nuclear arsenal.
The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq
had not fundamentally decided to disarm. The Administration asserted on March 17,
2003, that diplomatic options to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full
attention to military action. That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and
his sons, Uday and Qusay, an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war.
They refused the ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March
19, 2003.
In the war, Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and
British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the Iraqi military, at times, put
up stiff resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi military commanders
or Baathist political figures came forward to try to establish a post-Saddam
government, but senior regime leaders fled Baghdad, and the whereabouts of some
of the top leadership, including Saddam Hussein, are unknown. The outcome of a
post-war debate on the results of the war might depend on such factors as the pace
and costs of reconstruction; the degree of resistance to the U.S.-led occupation; the
amount of WMD ultimately found, if any; and whether a new government is stable
and democratic.
Post-War Governance Issues
Since Saddam Hussein’s regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, there has
been increasing debate about governing post-war Iraq. The same U.S. concerns
about fragmentation of and instability in Iraq that existed in prior years are present
in the current debate over how to establish a post-war regime. Although some Iraqi
civilians have welcomed U.S. and British troops in areas captured, other Iraqis now
want U.S. and British forces to leave Iraq, and the top U.S. military commander in
the Persian Gulf theater, General John Abizaid, says that U.S. forces now face a
“classic guerrilla war.” Some experts believe that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall
under the control of pro-Iranian Shiite Islamist forces who are asserting growing
control over areas inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites. Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s
population but have been under-represented in every Iraqi government since modern
Iraq’s formation in 1920. (For further information on U.S. and international funding
for humanitarian assistance and reconstruction, see CRS Report RL31833, Iraq:
Recent Developments in Humanitarian and Reconstruction Assistance.)
Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule
The Administration says that U.S. forces will stay in Iraq until there is a stable,
democratic successor regime that is at peace with its neighbors. However, there has
been some debate between U.S. authorities and key anti-Saddam groups over how
CRS-21
the pace and the means to move Iraq to self-government. Senior U.S. officials,
including deputy Defense Secretary Paul Wolfowitz, had said in earlyApril 2003 that
they hoped to have a successor regime in place within six months of the fall of the
regime. However, in mid-May 2003, U.S. officials, apparently fearing that existing
major groups could not form a stable regime, or that Shiite Islamists would dominate
a successor authority, backed away from that deadline.
Shortly after the war, the United States began a process of establishing a
successor regime. The Administration organized an April 15 meeting, in Nasiriyah,
of about 100 Iraqis of varying ideologies, present by U.S. invitation. Many of the
attendees were representatives of Iraqi tribal groupings that had not been politically
active before. However, SCIRI, along with several Shiite clerics, boycotted and
called for an Islamic state. Another meeting of about 250 delegates was held in
Baghdad on April 26, ending in agreement to hold a broader meeting, within a
month, to name an interim Iraqi administration. This process was cut short in May
2003 when the Bush Administration decided it would not produce an acceptable Iraqi
government.
In parallel with the April 26 meeting, the five most prominent exiled opposition
groups met, with U.S. envoys present: SCIRI, the INC, the INA, the PUK, and the
KDP. On May 9, 2003, the five agreed to expand their grouping to seven, adding to
their ranks the little known Nasir al-Chadirchy, head of a party called the National
Democratic Party of Iraq, as well as the Shiite Islamist Da’wa Party. The major
parties later criticized the U.S. decision in May 2003 to delay the formation of an
Iraqi self-rule authority and to instead form an advisory body of 25 to 30 Iraqis.
With U.S. casualties in Iraq mounting and a growing sense of resentment among
the Iraqi population, the U.S.-led occupation authority (Coalition Provisional
Authority, CPA) began tilting back toward the views of the major Iraqi parties. U.S.
administrator for Iraq Paul Bremer (see below) said on June 23, 2003, that the
planned 25- to 30-member body would have “real authority” from its first days and
would not be purely advisory. He said it would nominate ministryheads, recommend
policies, and convene a “constitutional conference” to draft a new constitution.17
The Governing Council and Cabinet. On July 13, 2003, a Governing
Council was unveiled to the Iraqi public, appointed by the U.S.-led CPA but
reflecting the influence of the seven-party grouping, as well as prominent Iraqis who
were never in exile and were not affiliated with the exiled opposition. The Council
has 25 members, of which 3 are women and 13 are Shiite Muslims. Of the 13 Shiite
Muslims on the Council, one seat is held by SCIRI directly (Abd al-Aziz Al Hakim,
younger brother of Mohammad Baqr), one is held by a guerrilla affiliated with SCIRI
(Abdul Karim al-Muhammadawi), two are Da’wa Party (Ibrahim al-Jafari and Abdul
Zahra Othman) leaders, and considered allies of SCIRI, and one is a former Da’wa
activist (Muwaffaq al-Ruba’i). Also on the Council is a moderate Shiite cleric,
Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum, considered pro-U.S. and not affiliated with SCIRI or the
Da’wa. He headed the Ahl al-Bayt charity center in London since the 1980s. (He
17 Transcript: Bremer Reviews Progress, Plans for Iraq Reconstruction. Washington File,
June 23, 2003.
CRS-22
suspended his participation following the August 29 car bombing in Najaf; see
below.) The remaining Shiite Muslims, such as Chalabi and Iyad al-Alawi, are
mostly considered secular. Appointed to the Council was one Sunni Muslim
Islamist, Muhsin Abdul Hamid, who heads the Iraqi Islamic Party, but he does not
have a clear affiliation or relationship with the Shiite Islamists on the Council.
The Council includes five Kurds, including the two main Kurdish leaders Jalal
Talabani and Masud Barzani. The Kurds are generally considered pro-U.S. and
might be expected to vote the way the U.S.-led coalition wants.
Although not a cohesive bloc, the Council includes exiles and non-exiles who
generally want a liberal democracy and would be considered pro-U.S. Most
prominent among them is Chalabi, but this grouping includes National Democratic
Party leader Nasir al-Chadirchy and former foreign minister Adnan Pachachi, both
of whom are Sunni Muslims, as well as former foreign ministry official Akila al-
Hashimi, a Shiite woman. (Hashimi was seriously wounded in an assassination
attempt on September 20, 2003.) Others most likely to affiliate with this bloc include
Sunni businessman Samir Shakir al-Sumaidy; Sunni civil engineer Ghazi al-Yawar,
who is president of Saudi-based Hicap Technology; the Shiite coordinator for the
Human Rights Association of Babel, Ahmad al-Barak; and the two other women
Council members, Songul Chapouk, a member of the Turkomen minority, who heads
the Iraqi Women’s Association, and Raja al-Khuza’i, a Shiite who heads the
maternity hospital in Diwaniyah.
A member of the Assyrian Christian community is on the Council. Yonadam
Kanna, the secretary-general of the Democratic Assyrian Movement, is on the body.
It is not known what other members of the Council, if any, he might be aligned with,
although it is reasonable to believe that he might have an affinity for fellow residents
of northern Iraq, the Kurds. Also unclear is whether or not Hamid al-Musa, the
Shiite head of the Iraqi Communist Party, is allied with anyone else on the Council.
In late July 2003, the Council decided that nine Council members will rotate as
chairpersons, each for one month. Ibrahim al-Jafari of the Da’wa Party was the first
chairman, and Chalabi is chair for September 2003. The other eight who will rotate
that post are Chalabi, Alawi of the INA, Hakim of SCIRI, Pachachi, Barzani of the
KDP, Talabani of the PUK, Bahr al-Ulum, and Abdul Hamid, the Sunni Islamist
figure.
Among its first actions, the Council authorized the establishment of an Iraqi
war crimes tribunal for Saddam and associates accused of major human rights abuses.
It empowered a three-member delegation to seek formal U.N. recognition; Chalabi,
Pachachi, and Akila Hashimi, traveled to the United Nations in July 2003 and
received a supportive statement from Secretary General Kofi Annan. No decision
on seating the Governing Council at the United Nations was announced. The
Council helped develop a plan, announced September 21, 2003, to open Iraq’s
economy to foreign investment and many of its companies to foreign ownership.
Press reports in late August 2003 said that U.S. authorities are pressing the
Governing Council to take a more prominent and public role in post-war political
CRS-23
decision-making, although some Council members say that the Council cannot do so
unless and until the U.S.-led coalition begins transferring greater authority to it.18
New Cabinet. The Council has completed work on a governmental structure.
On September 3, 2003, a 25-member cabinet was sworn in. Its composition has
roughly the same factional and ethnic balance of the Council itself. Two “ministers”
— Ibrahim Bahr al-Ulum (oil ministry) and Ali al-Alawi (trade ministry) — are close
relatives of Council members. Another, “foreign minister” Hoshyar Zibari, is a close
aide to KDP chief Masud Barzani. Longtime PUK activist Abdul-Latif Rashid is the
“minister” of water resources. No “defense minister” was named.
The “interior minister” is Nuri Badran, an INA activist. Badran is attempting
to build on the INA’s contacts among ex-Baathists and ex-military people to develop
a new domestic intelligence and national police network,19 although recruitment of
such categories of Iraqis might raise suspicions of other Governing Council
members, such as Ahmad Chalabi. Chalabi has been the most vocal of all major
post-Saddam figures in calling for the complete dismissal and isolation of all those
with ties to the former regime.
Prospects for Elections. The Bush Administration has hailed the formation
of the Council and the cabinet as major steps toward restoring Iraq’s sovereignty.
Other major benchmarks will be the drafting of a constitution and the holding of
national elections, which the Bush Administration is saying might be held by mid-
2004. The Administration has linked the potential length of the U.S. occupation to
the completion of successful national elections. As noted above, in early August
2003, the Governing Council tapped INC activist Kanaan Makiya to head a 25-
person committee that will determine the process for drafting the constitution. Some
want an appointed constitutional drafting commission, while others, including
Ayatollah Sistani, say the drafters should be elected. The timetable for these steps
might be affected by the debate between the United States and its allies over the
structure of international participation in post-war Iraq (see below).
As part of the governance planning process that took place before the war, the
U.S. State Department supported a group of Iraqi exiles to address issues that would
confront a successor government.20 However, the State Department working group
(the “Future of Iraq Project”) does not appear to have significant influence on any
post-war regime decision-making in Iraq. Some experts believe the Defense
Department was promoting a competing or separate group of exiles.21 The State
Department project, which cost $5 million, consisted of working groups that
18 Filkins, Dexter and Neil MacFarquhar. U.S. Official Tells Iraqis To Assert More
Authority. New York Times, August 21, 2003.
19 Williams, Daniel. New Ministry to Recruit Paramilitary Force in Iraq. Washington Post,
September 2, 2003.
20 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,”
Washington File, December 11, 2002.
21 Fineman, Mark, Robin Wright, and Doyle McManus. Preparing for War, Stumbling to
Peace. Los Angeles Times, July 18, 2003.
CRS-24
discussed (1) transitional justice; (2) public finance; (3) public and media outreach;
(4) democratic principles; (5) water, agriculture, and the environment; (6) health and
human services; (7) economy and infrastructure; (8) education; (9) refugees,
internally-displaced persons, and migration policy; (10) foreign and national security
policy; (11) defense institutions and policy; (12) free media; (13) civil society
capacity-building; (14) anti-corruption measures; and (15) oil and energy.
Post-War U.S. Operations and the
Coalition Provisional Authority
Experts note that projections about U.S. operations in post-war Iraq, including
the duration of the U.S. military occupation and the numbers of occupation troops,
are largely dependent on the amount of continuing Iraqi resistance, the number of
U.S. casualties taken, and the rate at which such U.S. objectives as the establishment
of a stable and democratic successor regime are accomplished. At present, about
145,000 U.S. and British troops are in Iraq; of those, about 130,000 are U.S.
personnel and 11,000 are British (with 1,200 more British troops deploying as of
September 8, 2003). There are another approximately 10,000 foreign forces,
deploying in accordance with international commitments to post-war peacekeeping
(see below). Earlier press reports said the Administration wanted to draw the U.S.
force level down to about 35,000 by the end of 2003, but continued unrest and
insecurity in Iraq appear to have made that goal untenable, and some press reports say
that Defense Department officials estimate that over 100,000 U.S. troops might still
be in Iraq in the summer of 2004.
The Resistance. There are indications that resistance to the U.S. governance
of Iraq is growing, judging by the frequency of attacks on U.S. forces over the past
few weeks and the type and geographical distribution of attacks. U.S. military
operations are focused on hunting down guerrilla resistance leaders and their
suspected Baathist financiers, as well as finding former leader Saddam Hussein.
U.S. forces have conducted at least five sweep operations since mid-June 2003 to
search for Baath and other oppositionists; these operations were given the names
Peninsula Strike (June 9-15); Desert Scorpion (June 15-August 1); Operation
Sidewinder (June 29-July 7); Operation Soda Mountain (July 12-17); and Operation
Ivy Serpent (begun July 12, ongoing). Centcom commander John Abizaid said on
July 17, 2003, that the United States faces a “classic guerrilla war” led by “mid-level
Baath Party activists organized regionally.” Such attacks have killed about 70 U.S.
military personnel since President Bush declared an end to “major combat
operations” in Iraq on May 1, 2003.
An apparent terrorist component to the resistance emerged in August 2003 with
car/truck bombings in Baghdad of the embassy of Jordan (August 7) and U.N.
headquarters at the Canal Hotel (August 19). The latter bombing killed 23 persons
including the U.N. representative in Iraq, Sergio Vieira de Mello, and prompted some
drawdown in U.N. and non-governmental organization personnel in Iraq. The
August 29, 2003, car bombing in Najaf that killed Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim may
have killed over 100 persons, according to news reports.
CRS-25
The Bush Administration says resistance comes not only from remnants of the
Baath Party but also from Arab volunteers, possibly linked to or supportive of Al
Qaeda, who have come to Iraq from other countries to fight the U.S. occupation.
U.S. military officials say they have arrested about 200 foreign fighters in recent
sweep operations. Resistance attacks have been more frequent in the Sunni areas of
central Iraq, where support for Saddam Hussein’s regime was traditionally stronger
than elsewhere, but there were at least two fatal attacks on British and Danish forces
in August 2003 in the Shiite areas in and around Basra. Some elements of the
resistance appear to want to restore the old regime, while others appear to be
motivated by opposition to foreign rule or the goal of forming an Islamic state. Other
resistance fighters appear to be motivated by the difficulty the U.S. and British
authorities have had in restoring civilian services.
U.S. military officials put the resistance numbers at about 5,000, although they
do not explain precisely how they arrive at that figure. The resistance appears to be
operating in relatively small cells, some of which have broadcast photos of armed
fighters. Resistance factions have begun identifying themselves as distinct groups,
scribbling graffiti warnings and faxing statements to the Arab satellite television
network Al Jazeera, UAE-based Al Arabiya TV, and other outlets. Suggesting a mix
of nationalist and Islamist factions, they are using such names as:
! Al Awda (the Return)
! the Snakes
! the Movement of the Victorious Sect
! Iraq’s Revolutionaries - Al Anbar’s Armed Brigades;
! The Popular Resistance for the Liberation of Iraq
! the Salafist Jihad Group (Salafi is a Sunni extremist Islamic
movement)
! Armed Islamic Movement for Al Qaeda - Falluja Branch. Actual
linkages to Al Qaeda, if any, are not known.
! Jaysh (Army) of Mohammad
! Black Banners Group
! Nasirite Organization
! Armed Vanguard of the Second Mohammad Army. Claimed
responsibility for U.N. headquarters bombing and threatened attacks
on any Arab countries that participate in Iraq peacekeeping. The
credibility of the claim is not known.
As noted above, some Shiite factions are becoming more active against the
occupation. The Sadr faction has reportedly instigated riots and demonstrations that
took place against U.S. and British forces in Baghdad and Basra. One report says
that Sunni Islamists, led byShaikh Ahmad Qubaysi, who returned in April 2003 from
exile in the UAE, is assisting the Sadr faction.22 This represents the possible
emergence of a Sunni-Shiite Islamist anti-occupation coalition.
22 Shadid, Anthony. Iraqi Clerics Unite in Rare Alliance. Washington Post, August 17,
2003.
CRS-26
The continuing resistance has complicated the U.S. mission. In addition to
targeting U.S. forces, resistance fighters have assassinated Iraqis who are
cooperating with the United States. In August 2003, in a possible evolution of its
tactics, resistance fighters stepped up their attacks on Iraqi oil export pipelines and
water and other infrastructure facilities, as well as symbols of the international
presence, including U.N. headquarters. By attacking these targets, the resistance
appears to be hoping to cause international relief workers to leave Iraq, slow
reconstruction, and turn the Iraqi populace against the occupation. U.S. officials say
that the continued resistance has raised the costs of the ongoing U.S. operations in
Iraq; the United States is spending about $3.9 billion per month for military
operations there, about double what was anticipated for the occupation period. On
the other hand, the Administration maintains that reconstruction is proceeding apace
and has logged a number of major accomplishments, as discussed in a White House
fact sheet, and that life is, for the most part, returning to normal throughout Iraq.
(“White House Notes Successful Results of Iraq Liberation.” August 8, 2003. At
[http://www.usinfo.state.gov/xarchives].)
The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA). The Bush Administration
initially tasked Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) to direct civilian reconstruction, working
through a staff of U.S. diplomats and other U.S. government personnel who are
serving as advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various ministries. He headed the
Office of Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance (ORHA), within the
Department of Defense, created by a January 20, 2003 executive order. After
spending the combat phase of the war in neighboring Kuwait, Garner and some of his
staff of about 200 deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003, to begin work.
Press reports said that senior U.S. officials were dissatisfied with the slow pace
of reconstruction under Garner, and on May 6, 2003, the Administration appointed
former ambassador L. Paul Bremer to lead the overall reconstruction effort, with a
focus on political reconstruction. He arrived on May 12, 2003, to head the CPA,
which subsumed ORHA. The appointment represented an apparent adjustment from
the original structure of the U.S. reconstruction effort, although the Administration
stated that it was always envisioned that a civilian would eventually take over the
U.S. effort and denied it was an indication of high-level dissatisfaction with the
effort. U.S. officials now refer to the CPA as an occupying authority legitimized by
U.N. Security Council Resolution 1483 of May 22, 2003. Among other provisions,
the resolution lifted U.N. sanctions on Iraq.
Building Security Institutions. While attempting to restore securityto Iraq,
the CPA is beginning to build new Iraqi institutions that can eventually take over the
security function from the United States. However, there are concerns about the
loyalty and dedication of the new recruits, in the absence of Iraqi sovereignty and a
clearly defined governing structure. Some Iraqi forces have fought crime and the
resistance and helped put down protests, but others have sometimes abandoned their
posts and allowed their facilities to be attacked.
The United States is in the process of training recruits for a planned 40,000
person Iraqi army, about 10% the size of the pre-war Iraqi force. About 12,000 are
expected to be in the force by mid-2004. Former Defense Department official Walter
Slocombe is in charge of forming the new Iraqi army. The CPA is also trying to turn
CRS-27
policing functions over to Iraqis. Overall, about 40,000 Iraqi policemen have
returned to their jobs, more than half the total goal. The CPA official responsible for
the new police force, former New York City police commissioner Bernard Kerik,
says it will take about 18 months (end of 2004) to reach the goal of 65,000 policemen
nationwide.23 (Kerik announced his resignation in early September 2003.) The CPA
is also recruiting a 7,000-man, all-Iraqi civil defense force to guard installations such
as oil pumping stations, electricity substations, and like facilities. Press reports in
late August said many Iraqi security personnel might be flown to Hungary for
training there.
Despite its complaints about lack of authority, the five major parties on the
Council - the INC, the INA, SCIRI, the PUK, and the KDP - appear to be trying to
move ahead on assuming more responsibility for security, apart from the institutions
being established by the CPA. The five are reportedly pressing the United States to
allow Iraqi militias, most of which are controlled by these five parties, to play a
greater role in maintaining security and for U.S. forces in Iraq to largely withdraw
from street patrols into garrisons.24
Searching for Regime Violations. Organs of the CPA and the U.S.
government are attempting to uncover abuses and violations of the regime of Saddam
Hussein, including evidence of WMD. A 1,500 person “Iraq Survey Group,” headed
by a U.S. military commander (Maj. Gen. Keith Dayton) but composed of many
civilian technical experts, including former U.N. weapons inspector David Kay, is
attempting to uncover alleged WMD. The Survey Group is also searching for mass
graves of victims of the former regime. Kay and Dayton briefed Members of
Congress on July 30, 2003, saying they were making substantial progress in
uncovering the fate of suspected WMD programs. Thus far, the Survey Group has
found at least 60 mass graves, some with hundreds of corpses. Most appear to
contain bodies of Kurdish and Shiite opponents of the former regime, but some
contain some of the bodies of about 600 Kuwaitis missing from the first Gulf war.
(WMD issues and the fate of the missing Kuwaitis are discussed in CRS Issue Brief
IB92117.)
The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction.25 As the driver of Iraq’s
economy, the rebuilding of the oil industry is receiving substantial U.S. attention.
Bremer said in a press interview on July 31, 2003, that it could take $50 - $100
billion to reconstruct Iraq, and a $1.6 billion plan to rehabilitate Iraq’s oil industry
was agreed in late July 2003. It has been widely assumed that Iraq’s vast oil reserves,
believed second only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be used to fund much of the
costs of reconstruction. Then presidential spokesman Ari Fleischer said on February
18, 2003, referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a variety of means ... to
shoulder much of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.” Many observers had been
23 Schmitt, Eric. Wolfowitz on Visit to Iraq to Assess Rebuilding Effort. New York Times,
July 18, 2003.
24 Tyler, Patrick. Iraqi Factions Seek to Take Over Security Duties. New York Times,
September 20, 2003.
25 For information on the prospects for Iraq’s post-war economy, see CRS Report RL31944.
Iraq’s Economy: Past, Present, Future.
CRS-28
concerned that an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could destroy its own oil fields,
but coalition forces quickly secured Iraq’s southern oil fields after combat began.
Only about 9 oil wells were set on fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that region,
and all were put out quickly. The northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul were not
set afire.
In early May 2003, the U.S.-led coalition set up an advisory board, headed by
former Shell executive Phillip Carroll, to oversee the rebuilding of Iraq’s oil sector.
An Iraqi oil industry professional, Thamer Ghadhban, was named to serve as head
of the interim management team that has run Iraq’s oil ministry and reported to the
advisory board. The first exports began in late June 2003, and Ghadhban said that
Iraq would be up to about 1 million barrels per day of exports by mid-July. However,
exports are running at only about 800,000 barrels per day as of late September 2003,
due to sabotage and the slow pace of sector reconstruction. Iraq’s pre-war export rate
was about 2.2 million barrels per day, a level that U.S. officials and Iraqi oil
appointees had hoped to reach by late 2003. The CPA-produced budget for Iraq for
calendar 2003, which is based on the planned levels of oil exports, assumed that oil
revenues would yield about $3.5 billion through the end of 2003, and provide about
half of the approximately $6.6 billion budget for Iraq for the period. However,
because oil revenues are about half of what was projected, the budget deficit is likely
to be more than $4 billion, far more than the $2.2 billion projected deficit in the
budget. The higher deficit means that the Development Fund for Iraq, set up by the
post-war Resolution 1483 (see below), might run out of money by the end of 2003.
A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which
foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s
vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will
seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other
countries.
Supplemental Funding Needs. Partly because oil revenues are lagging
behind projections, in late August 2003 Bremer visited Washington to talk to other
Administration officials about the need to ask Congress for immediate supplemental
funds for reconstruction needs, which Bremer estimates will run into the “several
tens of billions” over the next year. On September 8, 2003, President Bush stated
that he would request supplemental funding for FY2004 for the “war on terrorism,”
in the amount of $87 billion, of which over $70 billion would be for military
operations in and reconstruction of Iraq. Of that amount, about $50 billion would be
for military costs and about $20 billion for reconstruction of Iraq.
The supplemental request asks for the following for Iraq reconstruction:
! $2.1 billion for border enforcement and other security functions,
! $2.1 billion for establishing Iraqi security and civil defense
institutions,
! $900 million for justice and civil society development,
! $6 billion for electricity infrastructure rehabilitation,
! $2.1 billion for rehabilitating the energy infrastructure,
! $3.7 billion to repair water and sewage systems,
! $900 million for water conservation facilities,
CRS-29
! $800 million for repair of transportation and telecommunications
infrastructure,
! $500 million to upgrade housing, roads, and bridges,
! $900 million to construct and equip hospitals and clinics, and
! $300 million for jobs training and private sector initiatives.
Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have
been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program.
The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put
in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was
suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various
aspects of the program departed Iraq. As of the start of the war, about $9 billion
worth of humanitarian goods were in the process of being delivered or in production.
(See CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, Sanctions, and Illicit
Trade.)
On March 28, 2003, the U.N. SecurityCouncil unanimouslyadopted Resolution
1472 that restarted the program’s operations and empowered the United Nations, for
a 45-day period (until May 12), to take direct control of all aspects of the program.
Under the new resolution, the United Nations is setting priorities for and directing the
delivery of already contracted supplies. The enhanced U.N. authority was extended
on April 25, 2003, to last at least until the six-month phase of the program expired
on June 3, 2003.
On April 17, 2003, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions
against Iraq, signaling that the Administration wanted to focus on restoring normal
international commerce with Iraq rather than extending the oil-for-food program.
Resolution 1483 lifted sanctions and provided for the phasing out of the oil for food
program within six months after adoption of that resolution on May 22. The
resolution also provided for the United Nations to transfer to the new Development
Fund for Iraq $1 billion in funds held by the oil-for-food program escrow fund. That
Development Fund contained about $7 billion in June 2003, consisting of captured
Iraqi assets, Iraqi assets abroad, the monies transferred from the oil-for-food account,
and U.S. funds available for reconstruction. (For more information, see CRS Report
RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, International Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.)
International Role in Peacekeeping and Governance26
The relatively slow pace of establishing Iraqi security institutions, coupled with
ongoing resistance that is causing continued U.S. casualties, has led to calls from
Members of Congress and others for the Administration to expand its efforts to
enlist other countries to help with the stabilization of Iraq. In his speech on Iraq of
September 7, 2003, President Bush said he has authorized Secretary of State Powell
to negotiate a Security Council resolution that would authorize a multinational
peacekeeping force in Iraq. It is hoped that such a U.N. authorization would trigger
26 For additional information on international contributions to Iraq peacekeeping and
reconstruction, see CRS Report RL31843. Iraq: Foreign Contributions to Operation Iraqi
Freedom, Peacekeeping Operations, and Post-War Reconstruction.
CRS-30
additional pledges of force contributions, which could allow the United States to
withdraw more of its troops. Thus far, 30 countries have made commitments of
forces to help secure Iraq, but the commitments of several large nations, including
Germany, France, India, and Turkey appear to be contingent on U.N. authorization.
Administration discussions about requesting additional foreign participation
began earlier than the President’s September 7 speech. Secretary of State Powell said
on July 16, 2003, that the United States is discussing with other countries the
possibility of seeking formal U.N. backing for a multilateral peacekeeping force.
Discussions within the Administration and between the United States and some of
its allies on a U.N. resolution that might specifically authorize a multinational force
accelerated following the August 19 U.N. headquarters bombing. Deputy Secretary
of State Richard Armitage told journalists in late August 2003 that one idea under
discussion could be for a multinational force, under U.N. leadership, which would
be commanded by a U.S. military official.27 This option appears to still be under
consideration, as are others.
The Administration has argued that the peacekeeping function is already
multilateral. The United Kingdom and Poland are leading multinational divisions in
southern Iraq and central Iraq, respectively. The United States and Poland reached
agreement in late July 2003 for the United States to fund the deployment of the
Polish force, support valued at about $250 million. The UK-led force is to number
about 14,000, of which all but 2,000 are British forces. The Polish-led force is to
number about 9,200, of which 2,300 will be Polish. The pledged forces listed below
have begun deploying to Iraq as of early August 2003, and there are now about
21,000 non-U.S. troops on the ground (including 11,000 British), as of September 9,
2003. Confirmed pledges include those in Table 1.
27 Jehl, Douglas. U.S. Now Signals It Might Consider U.N. Force in Iraq. New York Times,
August 28, 2003.
CRS-31
Table 1. Multinational Division Force Pledges
Azerbaijan 150
Bulgaria 500
Czech Republic 400
Denmark 380
Dominican Republic 300
El Salvador 300
Estonia 55
Georgia 100
Honduras 300
Hungary 300
Italy 3,000 (mostly military police)
Japan 1,000 (logistics and combat support).
(Implementation placed on hold after
U.N. HQ bombing )
Latvia 150
Lithuania 85
Macedonia 28
Mongolia 200
Netherlands 1,100
Nicaragua 300
Norway 150
Philippines 500
Poland 2,300
Portugal 120
Romania 150
Slovakia 85
South Korea 700 (mostly medical)
Spain 1,300
Thailand 500
Ukraine 1650
Total Pledged 17,100
CRS-32
Another idea said to be under discussion is for NATO to command a
multilateral force. The United States has had some discussions with NATO on
whether the organization would take on Iraq as a fifth peacekeeping mission. On
July 10, 2003, the Senate adopted an amendment, by a vote of 97-0, to a State
Department authorization bill (S. 925) calling on the Administration to formally ask
NATO to lead a peacekeeping force for Iraq. A related bill (H.R. 2112) was
introduced in the House on May 15, 2003. (For more information on this possibility,
see CRS Report RL32068, An Enhanced European Role in Iraq?)
Other countries have agreed to provide funding for reconstruction. According
to the June 30, 2003, report to Congress by the Administration, the following
countries have made financial pledges for Iraq reconstruction: United Kingdom
($177.1 million); Japan ($101.8 million); Australia ($60.5 million); UAE ($47.6
million); Canada ($41.2 million); Saudi Arabia ($36.6 million); Spain ($32.2
million); Kuwait ($27.5 million); the European Commission ($26.3 million); and
Italy ($22.4 million). A donors’ conference is to be held in the coming weeks,
although some countries are said to be reluctant to make new pledges until there is
agreement on a new structure for foreign participation in Iraq. The Administration
is reportedly hoping for $10 billion in new contributions, but outside experts say
pledges will likely come in well below that figure.
U.N. Role in Post-War Iraq. Just after the fall of Saddam Hussein’s regime,
the United States and its European allies and other countries reached a measure of
agreement on a modest U.N. role in post-war Iraq. Resolution 1483, which was
adopted unanimously, provided for a U.N. special representative to coordinate the
activities of U.N. personnel in Iraq and to help establish a successor government.
The Secretary General subsequently (May 27, 2003) appointed de Mello (see above)
for that post. The resolution also gave the United Nations a monitoring role over the
Development Fund for Iraq, a fund that will handle Iraq’s oil revenues until there is
a successor government. The resolution did not authorize a return to Iraq of U.N.
weapons inspectors, although the resolution provided for deliberations on that issue.
Some International Atomic Energy Agency inspectors returned to Iraq in June 2003
on a limited nuclear mission in Baghdad.
Some countries criticized Resolution 1483 as providing for too limited a U.N.
role in post-war Iraq and said that the United Nations, not the United States and
Britain, should take the lead role in establishing a post-war governing structure for
Iraq. The Administration opposed giving the United Nations the lead role in
governance, partly on the grounds that the United Nations might facilitate the rise to
power in Iraq of a government that is not to U.S. liking. On August 14, 2003, the
U.N. Security Council adopted a compromise resolution, Resolution 1500, that
“welcomed,” but did not “endorse,” the formation of the Governing Council, an
apparent nod to U.S. requests. The resolution also enhanced U.N. authority in Iraq
somewhat by establishing a “U.N. Assistance Mission for Iraq.” The resolution did
not formally authorize an international peacekeeping force for Iraq (Resolution 1483
already “calls on” governments to contribute forces for stabilization) and did not
measurably dilute U.S. authority over post-war governance in Iraq. The resolution
did not appear to meet the requirements of France and others for them to donate
peacekeeping forces.
CRS-33
As of late September, the United States is still circulating working papers to
other Security Council countries that it hopes will encourage greater foreign troop
contributions and donations. However, some countries, including France and
Germany, have said that their key interest is that any new U.N. resolution restructure
post-war governance into a U.N.-led operation rather than a U.S.-led operation.
France, in particular, is pushing a plan that would greatly accelerate the transfer of
power to an Iraqi-led government, perhaps in as few as several weeks. France also
has said the U.S.-led CPA should be dismantled as part of a process of shifting Iraq
from an occupation to an international reconstruction operation. The Bush
Administration has said that France’s idea for a rapid transfer of authority to Iraqis
is unrealistic, and the Bush Administration reportedly is still unwilling to cede to the
United Nations the lead role in post-war governance.
Fate of the Deposed Regime
An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is whether Saddam
Hussein and his associates should be prosecuted for war crimes and crimes against
humanity, if and when they are caught. The Administration said in early April 2003
that Saddam and his inner circle should be tried by Iraqis if they are captured,
although others might be tried by a U.S.-led process for any crimes committed in the
course of the 2003 war. In the year prior to the war, the Administration was
gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those it had
sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay (killed after discovery
by and a firefight with U.S. forces in Mosul on July 22, 2003); Ali Hassan al-Majid,
for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (captured August 21, 2003);
Muhammad Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered in mid-April 2003); Taha Yasin
Ramadan; first Vice President and number three in the regime (captured August 19,
2003); Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council and
formally number two in the regime; Barzan al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother
(captured in mid-April 2003); Watban al-Tikriti (captured in April 2003) and Sabawi
al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam and former leaders of regime
intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputy Prime Minister and foremost regime
spokesman (surrendered in May 2003); and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait
during Iraq’s occupation of that country (captured May 2003).
Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials
sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured
or surrendered. As of late September 2003, 43 of the Iraqis on the list of 55 are now
in custody or were killed. Others not on the list of 55 have been apprehended as
well: Amir al-Saadi, chief science adviser to Saddam; Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti, a
son-in-law of Saddam; Vice President Taha Muhi ad-Din Ma’ruf; and suspected
WMD manager Hoda Mahdi Salih al-Ammash.
The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and
the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29,
1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related
atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for
FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress
that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal
for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137
CRS-34
(passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March
13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October
31, 1998).
A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993,
after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the United States has supported
INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the
arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the
Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer,
said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established,
focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical
weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds)
and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which
an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against
Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes
against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations.
In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a
U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war
crimes is formed.
Congressional Reactions
Congress, like the Administration, had divergent views on the mechanisms for
promoting regime change, although there was widespread agreement in Congress that
regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S. policy. There was substantial
disagreement over whether a major military offensive was the most desirable option
for achieving that objective. On December 20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75,
by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a
“mounting threat” to the United States. The resolution did not call for new U.S. steps
to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few Members called for the overthrow of
Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in support of the resolution.
In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq,
some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint
appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on
Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations
Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the
opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an
option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In
early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members — Senators John
McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and
Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr.
— wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for
operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter,
Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S.
assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish
areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and
other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to
accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.”
CRS-35
As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002,
Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result.
Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force
against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce
U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on
October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote
of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243).
The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. Prior to the war, it held
several hearings on the progress of post-war reconstruction. During the war and in
its aftermath, several Members applauded the performance of the U.S. military and
the overthrow of the regime. Some Members, however, have criticized the
Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war period in light of major
looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the regime. Criticism of post-war
planning has escalated as attacks on U.S. occupation forces have mounted, although
the Administration and others say U.S. casualties are relatively light and that the
resistance is not jeopardizing overall U.S. objectives for Iraq. Several Committees
are conducting inquiries into why substantial amounts of WMD have not been found
in Iraq to date. Some Members of both parties have also expressed concern about the
costs of the U.S. occupation, particularly in light of the Administration’s September
2003 request for an additional $87 billion in funding, and several Members have
called on the Administration to take greater steps to persuade other countries to share
the burden of peacekeeping in and reconstruction of Iraq. Others have called for an
increase in the number of U.S. troops in Iraq or re-evaluation of the mix of U.S.
forces to ensure that the skill set of the U.S. force matches the needs of
reconstruction.
CRS-36
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition
Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.)
to the Opposition
(Figures in millions of dollars)
INC War
Crimes Broadcasting
Unspecified
Opposition
Activities
Total
FY 1998
(P.L. 105-174)
2.0 5.0
(RFE/RL)
3.0 10.0
FY 1999
(P.L. 105-277)
3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0
FY 2000
(P.L. 106-113)
2.0 8.0 10.0
FY 2001
(P.L. 106-429)
12.0
(aid
distribution
inside Iraq)
2.0 6.0
(INC radio)
5.0 25.0
FY 2002
(P.L. 107-115)
25.0 25.0
Total,
FY1998-FY2002
15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0
FY2003
(no earmark)
3.1
(announced
April 2003)
6.9
(remaining
to be
allocated)
10.0
FY2004
(request)
0 0
Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq
Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97
million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent,
as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided,
the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and
FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be
used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N.
programs.
Another version (English): 9 September 2003 — RL31339_2003-09-09.pdf
Order Code RL31339
CRS Report for Congress
Received through the CRS Web
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
Updated September 9, 2003
Kenneth Katzman
Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs
Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division
Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
Summary
In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized
Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to verifiably
abandon its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs and the potential for it
to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. In September 2002, the President told the U.N.
General Assemblythat unless Iraq fullydisarmed in cooperation with United Nations
weapons inspectors, the United States would lead a coalition to achieve that
disarmament militarily, making clear that this would include the ouster of Iraq’s
President Saddam Hussein’s regime. After a November 2002 - March 2003 round
of U.N. inspections in which Iraq’s cooperation was mixed, on March 19, 2003, the
United States launched “Operation Iraqi Freedom,” to disarm Iraq and change its
regime. The regime fell on April 9, 2003.
In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change
through U.S.-led military action would yield benefits beyond disarmament and
reduction of support for terrorism; benefits such as liberation of the Iraqi people
from an oppressive regime and promotion of stability and democracy throughout the
Middle East. The goal of regime change in Iraq had been declared U.S. policy since
November 1998, and U.S. efforts to oust Saddam had been pursued, with varying
degrees of intensity, since the end of the Gulf war in 1991. These efforts primarily
involved U.S. financial backing for opposition groups inside and outside Iraq, several
of which are now contending for power in post-Saddam Iraq. Past efforts to change
the regime failed because of limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the Iraqi
opposition, and the efficiency and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping security
services. Previous U.S. Administrations ruled out major U.S. military action to
change Iraq’s regime, believing such action would be risky and not necessarily
justified by the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament.
The leadership and precise shape of the permanent government that will replace
Saddam Hussein’s Baath Party are yet to be determined. Some Administration
officials reportedly had hoped that major military and governmental defections from
the Hussein regime would serve as the core of a successor government. However,
no senior Hussein regime figures defected, and formerly exiled opposition groups
form the core of a U.S.-appointed 25-seat “governing council” that was unveiled on
July 13, 2003. It is hoped by the Administration that the formation of the council and
subsequent appointment of a cabinet will signal that Iraq is moving toward self rule
and calm some of the resistance against U.S. occupation forces in Iraq. Escalating
resistance, punctuated by the August 19, 2003, truck bombing of the U.N.
headquarters in Baghdad, has contributed to an Administration decision to try to
enlist increased foreign participation in post-war peacekeeping and reconstruction.
See also CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Humanitarian
and Reconstruction Assistance. This report will be updated as warranted by major
developments.
Contents
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Sadr Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
The First ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Monarchists/Sharif Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups . . . 12
Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Post-War Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
The Governing Council and Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
New Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Post-War U.S. Operations and the Coalition Provisional Authority . . . . . . 23
The Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Building Security Institutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Searching for Regime Violations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Supplemental Funding Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
International Role in Peacekeeping and Governance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
U.N. Role in Post-War Iraq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Fate of the Deposed Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Congressional Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
The United States has sought to remove Iraq’s Saddam Hussein from power
since the 1991 Persian Gulf war, although achieving this goal was not declared policy
until 1998. In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass
destruction (WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United
States would seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A
regime change policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338,
October 31, 1998). Bush Administration officials emphasized regime change as the
cornerstone of U.S. policy toward Iraq since shortly after the September 11, 2001,
attacks. Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003, and had
effectively removed Saddam Hussein from power by April 9, 2003.
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam
Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an
operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George
H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end
of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and
Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope
of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions. The revolt in southern Iraq reached
the suburbs of Baghdad, but the well-trained and loyal Republican Guard forces had
survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from battle prior to the U.S.
ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid-March 1991. Many Shiites
blamed the United States for not supporting their uprising and standing aside as the
regime retaliated against those who participated in the rebellion. Kurds, benefitting
from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991, drove Iraqi troops out of
much of northern Iraq and subsequently remained free of Baghdad’s rule.
According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite
uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding
stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup
against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that
purpose. The Administration apparently believed — and this view apparently was
shared by many experts and U.S. officials — that a coup by elements within the
current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq.
Manyobservers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and
Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and
tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria.
CRS-2
Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition
Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that
the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment
within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision
was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the
diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the
Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and
diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This
opposition coalition was seen as providing a vehicle for the United States to build a
viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert
support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.1
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi
The growing opposition coalition took shape in an organization called the Iraqi
National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two main
Kurdish militias, the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic Union of
Kurdistan (PUK), participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens of
opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came into the
coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq.
The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi
ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military
officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC
with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups
publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests,
including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the
preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. Security
Council resolutions on Iraq.2 However, many observers doubted its commitment to
democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and
because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies. The
INC’s first Executive Committee consisted of KDP leader Masud Barzani, ex-Baath
Party and military official Hassan Naqib, and moderate Shiite cleric Mohammad
Bahr al-Ulum. (Barzani and Bahr al-Ulum are now on the 25-member post-war
Governing Council, inaugurated July 13, 2003, and both are part of its nine member
rotating presidency. Bahr al-Ulum “suspended” his Council membership following
the August 29, 2003, bombing in Najaf that killed a major Shiite figure; see below.)
Ahmad Chalabi. When the INC was formed, its Executive Committee
selected Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 58 years old, a secular Shiite Muslim from
a prominent banking family, to run the INC on a daily basis. Chalabi was educated
in the United States (M.I.T) as a mathematician. He fled Iraq to Jordan in 1958,
1 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2,
1992.
2 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by
INC representatives, February 1993.
CRS-3
when the Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military coup. This coup
occurred 10 years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July 1968). In 1978, he
founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian authorities on
charges of financial malfeasance (embezzlement) and he left Jordan, possibly with
some help from members of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989. In 1992, he was
convicted in absentia of embezzling $70 million from the bank and sentenced to 22
years in prison. The Jordanian government subsequently repaid depositors a total of
$400 million. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government was pressured by
Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to the Jordanian
government. In April 2003, senior Jordanian officials, including King Abdullah,
called Chalabi “divisive” and stopped just short of saying he would be unacceptable
to Jordan as leader of Iraq. Chalabi’s critics acknowledge that, despite allegations
about his methods, he was single-minded in his determination to overthrow Saddam
Hussein, and he is said to be the favorite of those Administration officials,
particularly in the Department of Defense, that were the most supportive of changing
Iraq’s regime by force.
Since Chalabi returned to Iraq, there have been no large public demonstrations
supportive of him or the INC, indicating that he might not have a large following
inside Iraq. However, anecdotal press reporting suggest that he has attracted some
support from those Iraqis that most welcomed the U.S. military offensive against Iraq
and subsequent occupation. On April 6, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters (“Free
Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by the U.S. military from their base in the north to the
Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs in southern Iraq, later
deploying to Baghdad and other parts of Iraq. After establishing his headquarters in
Baghdad, Chalabi tried to build support by searching for fugitive members of the
former regime and arranging for U.S. military forces in Iraq to provide security or
other benefits to his potential supporters. However, the Free Iraqi Forces
accompanying Chalabi were disbanded following the U.S. decision in mid-May2003
to disarm independent militias.
Chalabi is part of a grouping of seven major party leaders that began meeting
shortly prior to the 2003 war. The seven-party leadership grouping was hoping to
become the core of a successor regime, and the seven parties are represented on the
Governing Council. Chalabi is a member of the Governing Council and one of the
nine that will rotate its presidency. He is president of the Council during the month
of September 2003.
A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book,
Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq, detailing alleged Iraqi regime human
rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracy for Iraq, including full
rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he teaches Middle
Eastern politics at Brandeis University. In August 2003, Makiya was tapped by the
Governing Council to head a 25-person committee that will decide how to draft a
new constitution. Another INC activist, Mohammed al-Zubaidi, declared himself in
charge of Baghdad in mid-April, but U.S. officials did not recognize him as mayor
and detained him in April 2003.
The Kurds/KDP and PUK. The Kurds, among the most pro-U.S. of all the
groups in Iraq, do not have ambitions to play a major role in governing Arab Iraq, but
CRS-4
Iraq’s neighbors have always been fearful that the Kurds might still seek outright
independence. In committing to the concept of federalism, the INC platform
assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq. Turkey, which
has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly
fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into
a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy
since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War
I. (Iraq became an independent Kingdom in 1932, although it remained under British
influence until the 1958 fall of the British-installed monarchy.) In 1961, the KDP,
then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP leader Masud Barzani’s
father, began an insurgency that has continued until today, although interrupted by
periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud Barzani’s brother, Idris,
commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the Iran-Iraq war but was killed in
that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from the KDP in 1965; the
PUK’s members are generally more well-educated, urbane, and left-leaning than
those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000-60,000 fighters,
some of which are trained in conventional military tactics. Both Barzani and
Talabani were part of the seven-party grouping that has now been incorporated into
the Governing Council, and both are part of the Council’s rotating presidency.
Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties
enjoyed good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement
of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaikh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in
Halabja, Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical
attack on that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998.
A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam
(Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam).
This faction, led by Mullah Krekar (who was detained in Europe in August 2002 and
now lives in Norway), reportedly associated itself with Al Qaeda and hosted in its
northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters, mostly of Arab origin, who had fled the
U.S.-led war in Afghanistan. Mullah Krekar reportedly studied under Shaikh
Abdullah al-Azzam, an Islamic theologian of Palestinian origin who was the spiritual
mentor of Osama bin Laden. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, during which its base
was captured, about 600 fighters in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, located near the town
of Khurmal.3 Ansar fighters clashed with the PUK around Halabja in December
2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedly responsible for an assassination attempt
against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002.
The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials
to be Abu Musab Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in
Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the
December 1999 millennium celebration, the assassination in Jordan of U.S. diplomat
Lawrence Foley (2002), and to reported attempts in 2002 to spread the biological
agent ricin in London and possibly other places in Europe. In a presentation to the
U.N. Security Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied Zarqawi
3 Chivers, C.J. New York Times, December 6, 2002.
Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.”
CRS-5
and Ansar to Saddam Hussein’s regime, which might have viewed Ansar al-Islam as
a means of pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents. Although Zarqawi reportedly
received medical treatment in Baghdad in May 2002 after fleeing Afghanistan, many
experts believed Baghdad-Ansar links were tenuous or even non-existent; Baghdad
did not control northern Iraq even before Operation Iraqi Freedom.4 Zarqawi’s
current whereabouts are unknown, although some unconfirmed press reports indicate
he might have fled to Iran after the fall of the Ansar camp to U.S.-led forces. Some
recent press accounts say Iran might have him in custody.5 U.S. officials said in
August that some Ansar fighters, possibly at the direction of Zarqawi, might have
remained in or re-entered Iraq and are participating in the resistance to the U.S.
occupation, possibly including organizing acts of terrorism such as recent car/truck
bombings (see below). Ansar al-Islam is not listed by the State Department as
Foreign Terrorist Organization (FTO).
Shiite Islamist Organizations
Some outside experts have had concerns about the potential strength and
ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups in post-
Saddam Iraq. The United States sought to work with some Shiite Islamist opposition
factions during the 1990s but had few if any contacts with others. Shiite Islamist
factions hold at least five seats on the Governing Council unveiled July 13, 2003.
SCIRI/Badr Corps. The most well known among these is called the Supreme
Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member of the INC
in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC banner.
SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition groups
in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad Baqr al-
Hakim, died in a car bomb by unknown assailants in Najaf on August 29, 2003, an
act that could reflect or accelerate a schism within the Shiite Islamist community.
Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head
an Islamic Republic of Iraq, a vision that, if realized, might conflict with U.S. plans
to forge a democratic Iraq. Baqr Al Hakim and his family fled Iraq to Iran in 1980,
during a major crackdown on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam
feared that Iraqi Shiite Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution
in Iran in 1979, posed a major threat to his regime. Prior to the formation of SCIRI,
Hakim and his family were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party (see below).
Mohammed Baqr is the son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a
prominent Shiite leader in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini
when Khomeini was in exile in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. Baqr Al Hakim had
returned to Iraq on May 10, 2003, welcomed by crowds in Basra and Najaf, where
he is now based.
4 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire,
March 18, 2002.
5 Finn, Peter and Susan Schmidt. Al Qaeda Plans a Front in Iraq. Washington Post,
September 7, 2003.
CRS-6
In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about
10,000-15,000 fighters/activists organized into a “Badr Brigades” (named after a
major battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from
Iran into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. The Badr Brigades are
headed by Mohammed Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim, who returned
to Iraq on April 20, 2003, to pave the way for Mohammed Baqr’s return. Abd al-
Aziz has taken over the leadership of the movement in the wake of his elder
brother’s death on August 29. (Another Hakim brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan
in May 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s security services.) Iran’s Revolutionary
Guard, which is politically aligned with Iran’s hard line civilian officials, has been
the key patron of the Badr Brigades, providing it with weapons, funds, and other
assistance; the Brigades fought alongside the Guard against Iraqi forces during the
Iran-Iraq war. However, many Iraqi Shiites view SCIRI as an Iranian creation and
SCIRI/Badr Corps operations in southern Iraq prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did
not spark broad popular unrest against the Iraqi regime. Some Badr fighters deployed
inside northern Iraq on the eve of Operation Iraqi Freedom, and the rest have since
entered Iraq. Asserting that the United States failed to create a secure environment
that might have prevented the August 29 bombing that killed Ayatollah Al Hakim,
Brigade fighters have deployed throughout Najaf since the bombing; U.S. forces
have not moved to disarm or combat these militiamen.
A variety of press reports say that some other individual militias now providing
security in many towns in southern Iraq are linked to the Badr Brigades. One such
militia is derived from the fighters who challenged Saddam Hussein’s forces in the
marsh areas of southern Iraq, around the town of Amara, north of Basra. It goes by
the name Hizbollah (Party of God)-Amara, and it is headed by marsh guerrilla leader
Abdul Karim Muhammadawi, nicknamed “Prince of the Marshes” who was named
to the Governing Council. He is widely perceived as an ally of SCIRI.
Until August 2002 when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures
for meetings in Washington, D.C., SCIRI had publicly refused to work openly with
the United States or accept U.S. assistance, although it was part of the INC and did
have contacts with the United States prior to the 2003 war effort. Since the fall of the
regime on April 9, SCIRI leaders have criticized what they called an illegitimate U.S.
occupation of Iraq and have called for the rapid establishment of an Iraqi self-rule
authority, while at the same time publicly opposing the use of violence against the
occupation. Even though Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim said he was for a democracy
and would not seek to establish an Iranian-style Islamic republic, U.S. officials are
said to be mistrustful of SCIRI and have been seeking to disarm its fighters.
Suggesting that SCIRI sees its interests in a degree of cooperation with the
occupation, Abd al-Aziz al Hakim did meet with other opposition leaders in late
April 2003 at a post-war governance planning session sponsored by U.S. officials.
He later helped constitute the seven-party core of the Governing Council, and Abd
al-Aziz is part of the nine-person rotating Council presidency. Unlike some other
Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI has had good working relations with some Sunni
oppositionists and the Kurds.
SCIRI might get additional support from the family of the late Ayatollah
Khomeini. In July 2003, Khomeini’s grandson, Hassan Khomeini, who is about 45,
relocated from Qom, Iran to Najaf. Hassan Khomeini is believed to be an opponent
CRS-7
of the more militant Shiite clerics such as Moqtada Al Sadr (see below), who is also
considered a rival of SCIRI and whom some SCIRI activists blamed for a bombing
on August 24 outside the home of elder Hakim cleric Mohammad Saeed Al Hakim.
Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, perhaps Iraq’s oldest Shiite Islamist grouping,
continues to exist as a separate group, but many Da’wa activists appear to be at least
loosely allied with SCIRI. The party was founded in 1957 by a revered Iraqi Shiite
cleric, Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of Ayatollah
Khomeini. Baqr Al Sadr was hung by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the Da’wa’s
alleged responsibility in fomenting Shiite anti-regime unrest following Iran’s 1979
Islamic revolution. That unrest included an attempted assassination of senior Iraqi
leader Tariq Aziz. Da’wa’s spokesman, Ibrahim Jafari, and its leader in Basra, Abd
al Zahra Othman, are on the Governing Council, as is a former Da’wa activist turned
human rights activist, Muwaffaq Al-Ruba’i. Jafari is one of the nine members of the
Council that is rotating the presidency, and Jafari was the first to take that post.
The Kuwaiti branch of the Da’wa Party allegedly was responsible for a May
1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks
on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The Hizballah organization in Lebanon
was founded by Lebanese clerics loyal to Ayatollah Baqr Al Sadr and the late
Ayatollah Khomeini, and there continue to be personal and ideological linkages
between Hizballah and the Da’wa Party. The Hizballah activists who held U.S.
hostages in that country during the 1980s often attempted to link release of the
Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party prisoners held by Kuwait for those
offenses. Some Iraqi Da’wa members look to Lebanon’s senior Shiite cleric
Mohammed Hossein Fadlallah, who was a student and protege of Ayatollah
Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, for spiritual guidance.
Sadr Movement. Members of the clan of the late Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr
Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq. The Sadr clan, based in Iraq
during Saddam Hussein’s rule, was repressed and not politically active during that
time. The United States had no contact with this grouping prior to the 2003 war and
did not attempt to enlist it in any overthrow efforts during 1991-2002. Although the
Al Sadr clan has been closely identified with the Da’wa Party, it appears that
members of the clan and their followers currently are operating in post-war Iraq as
a movement separate from Da’wa. Another revered member of the clan, Mohammed
Sadiq Al Sadr, and two of his sons, were killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999.
A surviving son, Moqtada Al Sadr, who is about 27 years old, has attempted to rally
his followers to attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite politics. He and his
clan apparently have a large following in the poorer Shiite neighborhoods of
Baghdad, which, after the fall of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr
City,” from the former name of “Saddam City.” However, Moqtada is viewed by
Iran and many Iraqi Shiites as a young radical who lacks religious and political
weight. To compensate for his lack of religious credentials, he has sought spiritual
authority for his actions from exiled Iraqi senior cleric, Ayatollah Kazem Haeri, who
is living in Qom, Iran. An alternate interpretation by some experts is that Haeri is
acting at the direction of Iran’s leadership to keep Moqtada Sadr under a measure of
control.
CRS-8
Moqtada’s reputation may have been tarnished in early April when Moqtada al
Sadr reportedly killed Abd al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Abdol
Qasem Musavi-Khoi, shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al-
Majid Khoi headed the Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq
after U.S.-led forces took Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political
doctrines of Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran.
The Sadr grouping has not been included in the Governing Council. Moqtada
has used his Friday prayer sermons in Najaf and other forums to denounce the
Council as a puppet of the U.S. occupation. In July 2003, Moqtada and his aides
began recruiting for an Islamic army, for now unarmed, that Sadr says must
challenge the U.S. occupation, although he has thus far stopped short of openly
calling for armed attacks on American forces. He is openly calling for a cleric-led
Islamic state similar to that of Iran. In August 2003, Shiites in Basra and in Baghdad
rioted against British and U.S. occupation forces over fuel shortages and perceived
slights, and there was speculation that Moqtada was helping fuel the riots.
Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah. The revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al-
Sistani, based in Najaf, was repressed during Saddam’s rule and is emerging as a
major potential force in post-war Iraq. The United States had no contact with Sistani
when Saddam was in power. He is the most senior of the Shiite clerics that lead the
Najaf- based “Hawza al-Ilmiya,” a major grouping of seminaries and Shiite clerics.
Other senior clerics include Ayatollah Mohammad Sa’id Al Hakim, uncle of the slain
SCIRI leader Mohammad Baqr, and Isaac Fayadh. The Hawza, which is well funded
through donations, is becoming an important source of political authority in the
Shiite regions of Iraq, hiring Iraqis to perform functions performed by the former
regime and issuing directives, often obeyed, for some Iraqi civil servants to return to
work.
Sistani, who is of Iranian ethnicity, is considered to be in the tradition of
Ayatollah Khoi in opposing a direct role for clerics in governmental affairs, and
Sistani and the Hawza have spoken against a direct role for the clerics in governing
post-war Iraq. However, in early July 2003, Sistani began to take a more active role
in Iraq’s post-war decision-making by issuing a statement that only elected Iraqis —
not a U.S.-appointed governing council — should draft a constitution. Sistani and
the Hawza are generally allied with SCIRI in the intra-Shiite power struggle, seeking
to contain Moqtada Al Sadr, whom Sistani and SCIRI both view as radical and
impulsive.
Islamic Amal. Another Shiite Islamist organization called the Islamic Amal
(Action) Organization has traditionally been allied with SCIRI. In the early 1980s,
Islamic Amal was under the SCIRI umbrella but later broke with it. It is headed by
Mohammed Taqi Modarassi, who returned to Iraq from exile in Iran in April 2003,
after Saddam Hussein’s regime fell. Islamic Amal, which has a following among
Shiite Islamists mainly in Karbala, conducted attacks against Saddam Hussein’s
regime in the 1980s. However, it does not appear to have a following nearly as large
as SCIRI or the other Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s brother, Abd al-Hadi,
headed the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, which tried to stir up Shiite
unrest against the Bahrain regime in the 1980s and 1990s (see below). Since
returning to Iraq in April 2003, Mohammad Taqi has argued against violent
CRS-9
opposition to the U.S. occupation, saying that such a challenge would plunge Iraq
into civil warfare.
Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups
The differences among the various anti-Saddam organizations led to the near
collapse of the U.S. regime change effort the mid-1990s. In May 1994, the KDP and
the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs revenues levied at
border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s government based in
Irbil. The PUK lined up support from Iran while the KDP sought and received
countervailing backing from its erstwhile nemesis, the Baghdad government. The
infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC offensive against Iraqi troops in March
1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at the last minute. Although it was
repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of the less well-trained and poorly
motivated Iraqi units facing the Kurds. Some INC leaders point to the battle as an
indication that the INC could have succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. military
help, had it been given additional resources and training in the 1990s.
The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition in the
mid-1990s caused the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by
renewing ties to a non-INC group, Iraq National Accord (INA).6 The INA, originally
founded in 1990 with Saudi support, consists of military and security defectors who
were perceived as having ties to disgruntled officials currently serving within their
former organizations. It is headed by Dr. Iyad Alawi, former president of the Iraqi
Student Union in Europe and a physician by training. He is a secular Shiite Muslim,
but most of the members of the INA are Sunni Muslims. The INA’s prospects
appeared to brighten in August 1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al-
Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons of mass destruction programs — defected to
Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip on the military and security services was
weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate from there.
The INA was ultimately penetrated by Iraq’s intelligence services and, in June 1996,
Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by arresting or executing over 100 INA
sympathizers in the military.
Iraq’s counteroffensive against the opposition was expanded two months after
the arrests of the INA sympathizers. In late August 1996, the KDP asked Baghdad
to provide armed support for its capture of Irbil from the rival PUK. Iraq took
advantage of the request to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in
northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout northern Iraq.
In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred
oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated
from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists,
mostly from the INC.
6 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret
War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997.
CRS-10
Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA continued to
operate throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt itself to some extent since the
June 1996 arrests. However, it does not appear to have a large following in Iraq.
Although it has was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war,
there is a history of friction between the two groups; the INA reportedly bombed an
INC facility in northern Iraq in October 1995. Alawi was part of the seven-party
grouping that became the core of the Governing Council, and Alawi has been named
a member of that Council and one of its nine-member rotating presidency.
Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks
For the two years following the anti-Saddam opposition groups’ 1996 setbacks,
the Clinton Administration had little contact with these groups. In those two years,
the INC, INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations
and their ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998,
then Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations
subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations”
about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish.
Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections
during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam
Hussein. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with an
FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, signed May 1, 1998) that, among
other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the
opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free
Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October
1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to
coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to
highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions. The remaining $2 million was used
to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the
documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes,
and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In
subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for
war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix. Some of the war crimes funding has
gone to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War
Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues.
Iraq Liberation Act
A clear indication of congressional support for a more active U.S. overthrow
effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998: the Iraq Liberation Act
(ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998). The ILA gave the
President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles (and authorized
$2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be designated by the
Administration. The Act’s passage was widely interpreted as an expression of
congressional support for the concept of promoting an insurgency by using U.S. air-
power to expand opposition-controlled territory. This idea was advocated byChalabi
and some U.S. experts, such as General Wayne Downing, who subsequently became
a National Security Council official on counter-terrorism in the first two years of the
CRS-11
George W. Bush Administration. President Clinton signed the legislation despite
reported widespread doubts within the Clinton Administration about the chances of
success in promoting an opposition insurgency.
The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting
regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it
should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime
headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly
articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq. No
specific language in the Act provides for its termination if Saddam Hussein is
removed from power.
The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the
height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in
which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United
Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were
withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign
against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December
16-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq:
Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.)
The First ILA Designations. Further steps to promote regime change
followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, a career diplomat, Frank
Ricciardone, was named as a State Department’s “Coordinator for the Transition in
Iraq” — the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999, after
consultations with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13) that
the following organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance
under the Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the
Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the Movement for Constitutional
Monarchy (MCM). Because of its possible role in contributing to the formation of
Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001, although it was not
formally taken off the ILA eligibility list.
Monarchists/Sharif Ali. The MCM, which was an original designee of
eligibility to receive assistance under the ILA, is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a
relative of the Hashemite monarchs (he is a cousin of King Faysal II, the last Iraqi
monarch) that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. Sharif Ali, who is
about 47 and was a banker in London, claims to be the leading heir to the former
Hashemite monarchy, although there are other claimants, mostly based in Jordan.
The MCM was considered a small movement that could not contribute much to the
pre-war overthrow effort, although it was part of the INC and the United States had
contacts with it. In the post-war period, Sharif Ali returned to Iraq on June 10, 2003,
to a small but apparently enthusiastic welcome. He did not participate in the seven-
party grouping that negotiated with the U.S.-led occupation authority on the
formation of the Governing Council, and neither Sharif Ali nor any of his followers
was appointed to the Governing Council.
In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton
Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and
“non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999 - 2000, about 150
CRS-12
opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in
Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses providing civil affairs
training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers,
communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However,
the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficientlyorganized
to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This
restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the
effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United
States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The trainees during
1999-2000 are not believed to have been brought into the Operation Iraqi Freedom
effort against the regime, or into the Free Iraqi Forces that deployed to Iraq toward
the end of the active combat phase of the war.
Continued Doubts About the Capabilities
of the Anti-Saddam Groups
During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end
the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of
Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed
disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the
opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an
indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical about the opposition’s
capabilities. The Clinton Administration maintained that the Iraqi opposition would
not succeed unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement, and that direct U.S.
military action was risky and not justified by the degree of threat posed by Iraq.
Critics of the Clinton Administration policy on Iraq maintained that the potential
threat from Saddam Hussein’s regime was sufficiently grave that direct U.S. military
action should be taken. Others suggested the Clinton Administration should focus
instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq by threatening force if Iraq refused to
permit re-entry into Iraq of the U.N. weapons inspectors that left Iraq in December
1998.
As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a
provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed
November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the
Iraqi people,” of which at least $12 million was for the INC to distribute
humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million
was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million
could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive
assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC
distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000, the Clinton Administration
reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in
FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop an aid distribution plan
and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before
it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that
noted that any INC effort to distribute aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control
CRS-13
would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and
to any relief distributors with which the INC contracts.7
Bush Administration Policy
Bush Administration policy toward Iraq changed after the September 11, 2001
terrorist attacks, even though no significant evidence linking Iraq to those attacks
came to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in
President Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he
characterized Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea.
Pre-September 11 Policy
Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic
elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus
within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow
strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq,
which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its
taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist
regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan: a modification of the U.N.
sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technology reached Iraq. His
plan offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N.
restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military
technology.8
The Administration believed that the proposal, by easing the suffering of the
Iraqi people, would cause Iraq’s neighbors and other countries to cease unilateral
violations of the sanctions regime. Powell, who had openly expressed skepticism
about the opposition’s prospects, barelyraised the regime change issue during his trip
or in his March 7, 2001, testimony before the House International Relations
Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.9 After about a year of
negotiations among the Security Council permanent members, the major feature of
the smart sanctions plan — new procedures that virtually eliminate U.N. review of
civilian exports to Iraq — was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Security Council
Resolution 1409).
Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime
change policy, many of the questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy
that had faced previous administrations were debated early in the Bush
7 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.”
January 17, 2001.
8 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food
Program.
9 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times,
March 2, 2001.
CRS-14
Administration.10 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush
Administration did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first year.
During his confirmation hearings as DeputySecretaryof Defense, a leading advocate
of overthrowing Iraq’s regime, Paul Wolfowitz, said that he did not yet see a
“plausible plan” for changing the regime. Like its predecessor, the Bush
Administration initially declined to provide the opposition with lethal aid, combat
training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the separate
State Department position of “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” further casting
doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy. On February 2, 2001, the Bush
Administration confirmed that, shortly after President Bush took office, the Treasury
Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted the INC a license to
proceed with information gathering inside Iraq only, and not actual distribution of
humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the Administration amounted to a
withholding of U.S. backing for the INC plan to rebuild its presence inside Iraq.
Many in Congress, on the other hand, continued to support the INC as the
primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional
sentiment, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite
doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television
broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the
ESF aid appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an estimated
additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.11
Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime
Bush Administration policy toward Iraq became notably more assertive after
the September 11, 2001, attacks, stressing regime change and asserting that
containment was inadequate. Almost immediately after the U.S.-led war on the
Taliban and Al Qaeda in Afghanistan began in earlyOctober 2001, speculation began
building that the Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use
of military force as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism. Some U.S.
officials reportedly believed that the United States needed to respond to the
September 11, 2001 attacks by ending any or all regimes that support terrorist groups,
including Iraq. As noted above, in his January 29, 2002 State of the Union message,
President Bush named Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with North Korea and
Iran. Vice President Cheney visited the Middle East in March 2002 reportedly to
consult regional countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq militarily,
although the countries visited reportedly urged greater U.S. attention to the Arab-
Israeli dispute and opposed confrontation with Iraq.
The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for
confronting Iraq were (1) its purported refusal to end its WMD programs, and (2) its
ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of
conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. The Administration added that
regime change would have the further benefit of liberating the Iraqi people and
10 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh,
Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002.
11 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001.
CRS-15
promoting stability in the Middle East, possibly facilitating a resolution to the Arab-
Israeli dispute.
Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s
regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax
mailings, senior U.S. officials said in the runup to the war that there was evidence
of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. Secretary of State Powell, as noted above, cited
intelligence information that Ansar al-Islam and its enclave leader Abu Musab al-
Zarqawi had links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.12 (See section above on Ansar al-
Islam for more information on that organization and its reputed links to Saddam
Hussein’s regime.) Other senior officials cited intelligence information that Iraq
provided advice and training to Al Qaeda in the manufacture and use of chemical
weapons, although Administration information appears to date to the early 1990s
when Iraq, largely isolated after the first Gulf war, was politically close to Sudan. Al
Qaeda founder Osama Bin Laden was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996).
The Bush Administration did not extensively cite reports that Czech intelligence
believed that Iraqi intelligence had met with lead September 11 hijacker Mohammad
Atta in Prague in spring 2001, suggesting official skepticism of those reports. Some
outside commentators believed that those reports indicated a direct Iraqi connection
to the September 11 attacks.
Some outside observers expressed skepticism about Iraq-Al Qaeda connections
because of the ideological differences between Saddam Hussein’s secular regime and
Al Qaeda’s Islamist character. Others noted that bin Laden sought to raise an Islamic
army to fight Saddam’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990, arguing against the need for U.S.
troops, and that he was more an enemy of Saddam Hussein than an ally. Those
differences were evident in a February 12, 2003, bin Laden statement referring to
Saddam Hussein’s regime as socialist and infidel, although the statement exhorted
Iraq to resist impending U.S. military action. In the Administration view, the two
shared similar anti-U.S. goals, which outweighed ideological differences and
propelled them into tactical or strategic cooperation.
WMD Threat Perception. In arguing for military action, U.S. officials
maintained that Iraq’s purported commitment to developing WMD — coupled with
its support for terrorist groups to which Iraq might transfer WMD — constituted an
unacceptable potential threat to the United States and that major U.S. military action
was justified if Iraq refused to disarm voluntarily. U.S. officials said the September
11, 2001 attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to
gather before acting, but must instead act preemptively or preventively. Senior U.S.
officials asserted a WMD threat as follows:
! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years
since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply
with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8,
2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs.
However, statements by U.N. weapons inspectors after inspections
resumed November 27, 2002 indicated they believed Iraq did not
12 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002.
CRS-16
have an active nuclear weapons program, and that inspections on
other weapons categories were making progress.
! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and
against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not
necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States
or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against
adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of
destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of
massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the
1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings of
retaliation and did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war.
! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who
could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths
in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of this view cited
presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in October 2002,
portions of which were released publicly, stating the CIA view that
Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to terrorists if the United States
were to attack Iraq. At that point, according to that argument,
Saddam Hussein would be left with little incentive not to cooperate
with terrorist groups capable of striking at U.S. interests. No WMD
was used against Iraq during Operation Iraqi Freedom, and little
evidence of actual WMD have thus far been found, although the
Administration asserts that WMD programs, and perhaps actual
weapons themselves, will eventually be found in Iraq.
Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam
As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action against Iraq, the
Bush Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its
capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002,
President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special
operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and
Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups — the INC, the
INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM — to Washington for meetings with
senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were
held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S.
government, which reportedly tended to favor different opposition groups.
In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August
15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in ESF to the Iraqi
National Congress (INC), funds that had been held up due to differences between the
State Department and the INC over what activities would be funded. The $8 million
was to be used to fund the INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its
offices in Washington, London, Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate
its Al Mutamar newspaper and Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund
the information gathering portion of the INC’s activities; the State Department had
refused to fund those activities, which are conducted inside Iraq, because of strains
CRS-17
between the INC and other opposition groups and questions about INC use of U.S.
funds.
In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and
to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic-
based groups. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had
increasing contact during this period include the following:
! Iraqi National Movement. It formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the
INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib
(who was part of an early leadership body of the INC); and Hatim
Mukhlis, who claimed support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan.
! Iraqi National Front. Another grouping of ex-military officers,
founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite
Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and
participated in the post-1991 Gulf war anti-Saddam uprisings.
! Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement. Established in 1996 by
ex-military officer Najib al-Salhi, this group was close to the INC.
Salhi, who defected in 1995, served in the Republican Guard.
! Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was
established in August 2002, headed by Wafiq al-Samarra’i, a former
head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of staff of Iraq’s
military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was based in Denmark
since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member. Khazraji was
placed under travel restrictions by Danish officials in late November
2002 after saying he wanted to leave Denmark. He is under
investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of chemical
weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities said on
March 17, 2003, that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his home
there,13 although his current whereabouts are unknown.
! Iraqi Turkmen Front. A small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping,
generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq.
Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq.
! The Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another
Shiite Islamic Party, but it is considered substantially less pro-
Iranian than SCIRI or the Da’wa Party. It is headed by Jamil Wakil,
a follower of Ayatollah Shirazi, an Iranian cleric who was the
spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation
of Bahrain (IFLB, see above under Islamic Amal). The IFLB
allegedly attempted to overthrow Bahrain’s regime in the early
1980s.
13 ‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper. Agence France Press, April 7, 2003.
CRS-18
! The Assyrian Democratic Movement, an ethnic-based movement
headed by Secretary-General Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s
Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq. There is a
strong diaspora presence in the United States as well. After building
ties to this group over the past year, the Bush Administration
formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement
into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002.
(Kanna is on the Governing Council.)
Second ILA Designations. The Bush Administration applauded efforts
during 2001 and 2002 by the ex-military led groups to coordinate with each other
and with the INC and other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London and
jointly run with the INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers. However, since the
regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, virtually none of the ex-military led
groups listed above has openly sought a major role in post-Saddam Iraq.
As a decision whether to launch military action approached, President Bush
issued a determination (December 9, 2002) to draw down the remaining $92 million
in defense articles and services authorized under the Iraq Liberation Act for the INA,
the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi
opposition groups designated by me under the Act before or after this
determination.” That same day, the Bush Administration made six of the ex-military
led factions discussed above (except the Higher Council for National Salvation)
eligible to receive draw downs under the ILA. The announcement appeared to be
part of reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists in tasks that could assist U.S.
forces, possibly including combat units.14 An initial group of 3,000 was selected, but
only about 70 oppositionists completed training at an air base (Taszar) in Hungary,
according to press reports.15 These oppositionists served with U.S. forces in
Operation Iraqi Freedom as translators and mediators between U.S. forces and local
leaders, and most did not stay in Iraq, according to observers.
As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began
planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002,
with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in
London. In advance of the meeting, the Bush Administration appointed NSC official
Zalmay Khalilzad to be a liaison to the Iraqi opposition. The conference was
organized by the same six groups whose leaders visited Washington in August 2002,
but included other groups as well, and they discussed whether the opposition should
declare a provisional government. The Administration opposed that step on the
grounds that doing so was premature and would give the impression that outside
powers were determining Iraq’s political structure.
The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65-member follow-up committee,
which some criticized as weighted heavily toward Shiite Islamist groups such as
14 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.”
Washington Post, October 19, 2002.
15 Williams, Daniel. “U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles.” Washington Post, December
18, 2002.
CRS-19
SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24-27, 2003, in northern Iraq, and
formed, against the urging of U.S. representatives at the meeting, a six-seat
committee to prepare for a transition regime. The assembled groups did not declare
a provisional government. The six-person committee included PUK leader Jalal
Talabani, KDP leader Masud Barzani, SCIRI leader Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim,
Chalabi, INA leader Iyad Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign minister Adnan Pachachi.
(All six groups are on the Governing Council.)
Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the
new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete
disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if that country wanted to avert military
action. In a probable effort to garner international support for any U.S.-led war effort
against Iraq, the Administration had downplayed the goal of regime change in
President Bush’s September 12, 2002, speech before the United Nations General
Assembly, stressing instead the need to enforce U.N. resolutions that required Iraqi
disarmament. However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change
goal after February 2003 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course.
The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March 2003
breakdown of U.N. diplomacy over whether the U.N. Security Council should
authorize war against Iraq for failing to comply with Resolution 1441. The
diplomatic breakdown followed several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by
the director of the U.N. inspection body UNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification,
and Inspection Commission) Hans Blix and the director of the International Atomic
Energy Agency (IAEA), Mohammad al-Baradei, most recently on March 7, 2003.
The briefings were generally critical of Iraq for failing to pro-actively cooperate to
clear up outstanding questions about Iraq’s WMD program, but the latter two
briefings (February 24 and March 7) noted progress in clearing up outstanding WMD
questions. The Blix/Baradei briefings said Iraq had not accounted for its past WMD,
but the two did not state that they were certain that Iraq had retained WMD, or that
they had uncovered any banned WMD. Iraq declared short range ballistic missiles
that were determined by Blix to be of prohibited ranges, and Blix ordered Iraq to
destroy them. Iraq began the destruction prior to the launching of the U.S.-led war.
(For more detail on the final round of inspections and evidence of WMD programs
found in the post-war period, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117: Iraq: Weapons
Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.)
Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and
Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that
inspections should be given more time. They noted that Iraq was well contained by
sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones. Those who agreed with this
view maintained that, as long as Iraq allowed access to U.N. weapons inspections
under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national
security. The inspectors reported few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700
inspections of about 400 different sites, as of mid-March 2003. Others experts
believed that, even if Iraq were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could
have been deterred by U.S. overall strategic superiority, presumably including the
U.S. nuclear arsenal.
CRS-20
The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq
had not fundamentally decided to disarm. The Administration asserted on March 17,
2003, that diplomatic options to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full
attention to military action. That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and
his sons, Uday and Qusay, an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war.
They refused the ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March
19, 2003.
In the war, Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and
British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the Iraqi military, at times, put
up stiff resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi militarycommanders
or Baathist political figures came forward to try to establish a post-Saddam
government, but senior regime leaders fled Baghdad, and the whereabouts of some
of the top leadership, including Saddam Hussein, are unknown. The outcome of a
post-war debate on the results of the war might depend on such factors as the pace
and costs of reconstruction; the degree of resistance to the U.S.-led occupation; the
amount of WMD ultimately found, if any; and whether a new government is stable
and democratic.
Post-War Governance Issues
Since Saddam Hussein’s regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, there has
been increasing debate about governing post-war Iraq. The same U.S. concerns about
fragmentation of and instability in Iraq that existed in prior years are present in the
current debate over how to establish a post-war regime. Although some Iraqi
civilians have welcomed U.S. and British troops in areas captured, other Iraqis now
want U.S. and British forces to leave Iraq, and the top U.S. military commander in
the Persian Gulf theater, General John Abizaid, says that U.S. forces now face a
“classic guerrilla war.” Some experts believe that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall
under the control of pro-Iranian Shiite Islamist forces who are asserting growing
control over areas inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites. Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s
population but have been under-represented in every Iraqi government since modern
Iraq’s formation in 1920. (For further information on U.S. and international funding
for humanitarian assistance and reconstruction, see CRS Report RL31833, Iraq:
Recent Developments in Humanitarian and Reconstruction Assistance.)
Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule
The Administration says that U.S. forces will stay in Iraq until there is a stable,
democratic successor regime that is at peace with its neighbors. However, there has
been some debate between U.S. authorities and key anti-Saddam groups over how
the pace and the means to move Iraq to self-government. Senior U.S. officials,
including deputyDefense SecretaryPaul Wolfowitz, had said in early April 2003 that
they hoped to have a successor regime in place within six months of the fall of the
regime. However, in mid-May 2003, U.S. officials, apparently fearing that existing
major groups could not form a stable regime, or that Shiite Islamists would dominate
a successor authority, backed away from that deadline.
CRS-21
Shortly after the war, the United States began a process of establishing a
successor regime. The Administration organized an April 15 meeting, in Nasiriyah,
of about 100 Iraqis of varying ideologies, present by U.S. invitation. Many of the
attendees were representatives of Iraqi tribal groupings that had not been politically
active before. However, SCIRI, along with several Shiite clerics, boycotted and
called for an Islamic state. Another meeting of about 250 delegates was held in
Baghdad on April 26, ending in agreement to hold a broader meeting, within a
month, to name an interim Iraqi administration.
In parallel with the April 26 meeting, the five most prominent exiled opposition
groups met, with U.S. envoys present: SCIRI, the INC, the INA, the PUK, and the
KDP. On May 9, 2003, the five agreed to expand their grouping to seven, adding to
their ranks the little known Nasir al-Chadirchy, head of a party called the National
Democratic Party of Iraq, as well as the Shiite Islamist Da’wa Party. The “seven-
party grouping” strongly criticized the U.S. decision in mid-May 2003 to delay the
formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority and to instead form an advisory body of 25
to 30 Iraqis.
With U.S. casualties in Iraq mounting and a growing sense of resentment among
the Iraqi population, the U.S.-led occupation authority (Coalition Provisional
Authority, CPA) incorporated the views of the seven-party grouping. U.S.
administrator for Iraq Paul Bremer (see below) said on June 23, 2003, that the
planned 25- to 30-member body would have “real authority” from its first days. He
said it would nominate ministry heads, recommend policies, and convene a
“constitutional conference” to draft a new constitution.16
The Governing Council and Cabinet. On July 13, 2003, a Governing
Council was unveiled to the Iraqi public, appointed by the U.S.-led CPA but
reflecting the influence of the seven-party grouping, as well as prominent Iraqis who
were never in exile and were not affiliated with the exiled opposition. The Council
has 25 members, of which 3 are women and 13 are Shiite Muslims. Of the 13 Shiite
Muslims on the Council, one seat is held by SCIRI directly (Abd al-Aziz Al Hakim,
younger brother of Mohammad Baqr), one is held by a guerrilla affiliated with SCIRI
(Abdul Karim al-Muhammadawi), two are Da’wa Party (Ibrahim al-Jafari and Abdul
Zahra Othman) leaders, and considered allies of SCIRI, and one is a former Da’wa
activist (Muwaffaq al-Ruba’i). Also on the Council is a moderate Shiite cleric,
Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum, considered pro-U.S. and not affiliated with SCIRI or the
Da’wa. He headed the Ahl al-Bayt charity center in London since the 1980s. (He
suspended his participation following the August 29 car bombing in Najaf; see
below.) The remaining Shiite Muslims, such as Chalabi and Iyad al-Alawi, are
mostly considered secular. Appointed to the Council was one Sunni Muslim
Islamist, Muhsin Abdul Hamid, who heads the Iraqi Islamic Party, but he does not
have a clear affiliation or relationship with the Shiite Islamists on the Council.
16 Transcript: Bremer Reviews Progress, Plans for Iraq Reconstruction. Washington File,
June 23, 2003.
CRS-22
The Council includes five Kurds, including the two main Kurdish leaders Jalal
Talabani and Masud Barzani. The Kurds are generally considered pro-U.S. and
might be expected to vote the way the U.S.-led coalition wants.
Although not a cohesive bloc, the Council includes exiles and non-exiles who
generally want a liberal democracy and would be considered pro-U.S. Most
prominent among them is Chalabi, but this grouping includes National Democratic
Party leader Nasir al-Chadirchy and former foreign minister Adnan Pachachi, both
of whom are Sunni Muslims, as well as former foreign ministry official Akila al-
Hashimi, a Shiite woman. Others most likely to affiliate with this bloc include
Sunni businessman Samir Shakir al-Sumaidy; Sunni civil engineer Ghazi al-Yawar,
who is president of Saudi-based Hicap Technology; the Shiite coordinator for the
Human Rights Association of Babel, Ahmad al-Barak; and the two other women
Council members — Songul Chapouk, a member of the Turkomen minority, who
heads the Iraqi Women’s Association, and Raja al-Khuza’i, a Shiite who heads the
maternity hospital in Diwaniyah.
A member of the Assyrian Christian community is on the Council. Yonadam
Kanna, the secretary-general of the Democratic Assyrian Movement, is on the body.
It is not known what other members of the Council, if any, he might be aligned with,
although it is reasonable to believe that he might have an affinity for fellow residents
of northern Iraq, the Kurds. Also unclear is whether or not Hamid al-Musa, the
Shiite head of the Iraqi Communist Party, is allied with anyone else on the Council.
In late July 2003, the Council decided that nine Council members will rotate as
chairpersons, each for one month. Ibrahim al-Jafari of the Da’wa Party was the first
chairman, and Chalabi is chair for September 2003. The other eight who will rotate
that post are Chalabi, Alawi of the INA, Hakim of SCIRI, Pachachi, Barzani of the
KDP, Talabani of the PUK, Bahr al-Ulum, and Abdul Hamid, the Sunni Islamist
figure.
Among its first actions, the Council has authorized the establishment of an Iraqi
war crimes tribunal for Saddam and associates accused of major human rights abuses.
It empowered a three-member delegation to seek formal U.N. recognition; Chalabi,
Pachachi, and Akila Hashimi, traveled to the United Nations in July 2003 and
received a supportive statement from Secretary General Kofi Annan. No decision
on seating the Governing Council at the United Nations was announced. The
Governing Council has begun some work on a new constitution. On July 17, 2003,
CPA head Bremer said that a constitution could conceivably be drafted in time to
have national elections by summer of 2004, and he has linked the potential length of
the U.S. occupation to the completion of successful national elections and the
restoration of security in Iraq. As noted above, in early August 2003, the Governing
Council tapped INC activist Kanaan Makiya to head a 25-person committee that will
determine the process for drafting the constitution. Some want an appointed
constitutional drafting commission while others, including Ayatollah Sistani, say the
drafters should be elected.
Press reports in late August 2003 said that U.S. authorities are pressing the
Governing Council to take a more prominent and public role in post-war political
CRS-23
decision-making, although some Council members say that the Council cannot do so
unless and until the U.S.-led coalition begins transferring greater authority to it.17
At the end of August 2003, the Council was reported to be negotiating among its
members on the formation of a cabinet composed of about 25 ministries.18
New Cabinet. On September 3, 2003, a 25-member cabinet was sworn in. Its
composition has roughly the same factional and ethnic balance of the Council itself.
Two “ministers” — Ibrahim Bahr al-Ulum (oil ministry) and Ali al-Alawi (trade
ministry) — are close relatives of Council members. Another, foreign minister
Hoshyar Zibari, is a close aide to KDP chief Masud Barzani.
As part of the planning process that took place before the war, the U.S. State
Department supported a group of Iraqi exiles to address issues that would confront
a successor government.19 However, the State Department working group (the
“Future of Iraq Project”) does not appear to have significant influence on any post-
war regime decision-making in Iraq. Some experts believe the Defense Department
was promoting a competing or separate group of exiles.20 The State Department
project, which cost $5 million, consisted of working groups that discussed (1)
transitional justice; (2) public finance; (3) public and media outreach; (4) democratic
principles; (5) water, agriculture, and the environment; (6) health and human
services; (7) economy and infrastructure; (8) education; (9) refugees, internally-
displaced persons, and migration policy; (10) foreign and national security policy;
(11) defense institutions and policy; (12) free media; (13) civil society capacity-
building; (14) anti-corruption measures; and (15) oil and energy.
Post-War U.S. Operations and the
Coalition Provisional Authority
Experts note that projections about U.S. operations in post-war Iraq, including
the duration of the U.S. military occupation and the numbers of occupation troops,
are largely dependent on the amount of continuing Iraqi resistance, the number of
U.S. casualties taken, and the rate at which such U.S. objectives as the establishment
of a stable and democratic successor regime are accomplished. At present, about
145,000 U.S. and British troops are in Iraq; of those, about 130,000 are U.S.
personnel and 11,000 are British (with 1,200 more British troops deploying as of
September 8, 2003). There are another approximately 10,000 foreign forces,
deploying in accordance with international commitments to post-war peacekeeping
(see below). Earlier press reports said the Administration wanted to draw the U.S.
force level down to about 35,000 by the end of 2003, but continued unrest and
insecurity in Iraq appear to have made that goal untenable, and some press reports say
17 Filkins, Dexter and Neil MacFarquhar. U.S. Official Tells Iraqis To Assert More
Authority. New York Times, August 21, 2003.
18 Williams, Daniel. Iraqis Set to Expand Cabinet. Washington Post, August 27, 2003.
19 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,”
Washington File, December 11, 2002.
20 Fineman, Mark, Robin Wright, and Doyle McManus. Preparing for War, Stumbling to
Peace. Los Angeles Times, July 18, 2003.
CRS-24
that Defense Department officials estimate that over 100,000 U.S. troops might still
be in Iraq in the summer of 2004.
The Resistance. There are indications that resistance to the U.S. governance
of Iraq is growing, judging by the frequency of attacks on U.S. forces over the past
few weeks and the type and geographical distribution of attacks. U.S. military
operations are focused on hunting down guerrilla resistance leaders and their
suspected Baathist financiers, as well as finding former leader Saddam Hussein.
U.S. forces have conducted at least five sweep operations since mid-June 2003 to
search for Baath and other oppositionists; these operations were given the names
Peninsula Strike (June 9-15); Desert Scorpion (June 15-August 1); Operation
Sidewinder (June 29-July 7); Operation Soda Mountain (July 12-17); and Operation
Ivy Serpent (begun July 12, ongoing). Centcom commander John Abizaid said on
July 17, 2003, that the United States faces a “classic guerrilla war” led by “mid-level
Baath Party activists organized regionally.” Such attacks have killed about 70 U.S.
military personnel since President Bush declared an end to “major combat
operations” in Iraq on May 1, 2003.
An apparent terrorist component to the resistance emerged in August 2003 with
car/truck bombings in Baghdad of the embassy of Jordan (August 7) and U.N.
headquarters at the Canal Hotel (August 19). The latter bombing killed 23 persons
including the U.N. representative in Iraq, Sergio Vieira de Mello, and prompted some
drawdown in U.N. and non-governmental organization personnel in Iraq. The
August 29, 2003, car bombing in Najaf that killed Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim may
have killed over 100 persons, according to news reports.
The Bush Administration says resistance comes not only from remnants of the
Baath Party but also from Arab volunteers, possibly linked to or supportive of Al
Qaeda, who have come to Iraq from other countries to fight the U.S. occupation.
U.S. military officials say they have arrested about 200 foreign fighters in recent
sweep operations. Resistance attacks have been more frequent in the Sunni areas of
central Iraq, where support for Saddam Hussein’s regime was traditionally stronger
than elsewhere, but there were at least two fatal attacks on British and Danish forces
in August 2003 in the Shiite areas in and around Basra. Some elements of the
resistance appear to want to restore the old regime, while others appear to be
motivated by opposition to foreign rule or the goal of forming an Islamic state. Other
resistance fighters appear to be motivated by the difficulty the U.S. and British
authorities have had in restoring civilian services.
U.S. military officials put the resistance numbers at about 5,000, although they
do not explain precisely how they arrive at that figure. The resistance appears to be
operating in relatively small cells, some of which have broadcast photos of armed
fighters. Resistance factions have begun identifying themselves as distinct groups,
scribbling graffiti warnings and faxing statements to the Arab satellite television
network Al Jazeera, UAE-based Al Arabiya TV, and other outlets. They are using
such names as:
! Al Awda (the Return)
! the Snakes
! the Movement of the Victorious Sect
CRS-25
! Iraq’s Revolutionaries - Al Anbar’s Armed Brigades;
! The Popular Resistance for the Liberation of Iraq
! the Salafist Jihad Group (Salafi is a Sunni extremist Islamic
movement)
! Armed Islamic Movement for Al Qaeda - Falluja Branch. Actual
linkages to Al Qaeda, if any, are not known.
! Jaysh (Army) of Mohammad
! Black Banners Group
! Nasirite Organization
! Armed Vanguard of the Second Mohammad Army. Claimed
responsibilityfor U.N. headquarters bombing and threatened attacks
on any Arab countries that participate in Iraq peacekeeping. The
credibility of the claim is not known.
As noted above, some Shiite factions are becoming more active against the
occupation. The Sadr faction has reportedly instigated riots and demonstrations that
took place against U.S. and British forces in Baghdad and Basra. One report says
that Sunni Islamists, led by Shaikh Ahmad Qubaysi, who returned in April 2003 from
exile in the UAE, is assisting the Sadr faction.21 This represents the possible
emergence of a Sunni-Shiite Islamist anti-occupation coalition.
The continuing resistance has complicated the U.S. mission. In addition to
targeting U.S. forces, resistance fighters have assassinated Iraqis who are
cooperating with the United States. In August 2003, in a possible evolution of its
tactics, resistance fighters stepped up their attacks on Iraqi oil export pipelines and
water and other infrastructure facilities, as well as symbols of the international
presence, including U.N. headquarters. By attacking these targets, the resistance
appears to be hoping to cause international relief workers to leave Iraq, slow
reconstruction, and turn the Iraqi populace against the occupation. U.S. officials say
that the continued resistance has raised the costs of the ongoing U.S. operations in
Iraq; the United States is spending about $3.9 billion per month for military
operations there, about double what was anticipated for the occupation period. On
the other hand, the Administration maintains that reconstruction is proceeding apace
and has logged a number of major accomplishments, as discussed in a White House
fact sheet, and that life is, for the most part, returning to normal throughout Iraq.
(“White House Notes Successful Results of Iraq Liberation.” August 8, 2003. At
[http://www.usinfo.state.gov/xarchives].)
The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA). The Bush Administration
initially tasked Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) to direct civilian reconstruction, working
through a staff of U.S. diplomats and other U.S. government personnel who are
serving as advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various ministries. He headed the
Office of Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance (ORHA), within the
Department of Defense, created by a January 20, 2003 executive order. After
spending the combat phase of the war in neighboring Kuwait, Garner and some of his
staff of about 200 deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003, to begin work.
21 Shadid, Anthony. Iraqi Clerics Unite in Rare Alliance. Washington Post, August 17,
2003.
CRS-26
Press reports said that senior U.S. officials were dissatisfied with the slow pace
of reconstruction under Garner, and on May 6, 2003, the Administration appointed
former ambassador L. Paul Bremer to lead the overall reconstruction effort, with a
focus on political reconstruction. He arrived on May 12, 2003, to head the CPA,
which subsumed ORHA. The appointment represented an apparent adjustment from
the original structure of the U.S. reconstruction effort, although the Administration
stated that it was always envisioned that a civilian would eventually take over the
U.S. effort and denied it was an indication of high-level dissatisfaction with the
effort. U.S. officials now refer to the CPA as an occupying authority legitimized by
U.N. Security Council Resolution 1483 of May 22, 2003. Among other provisions,
the resolution lifted U.N. sanctions on Iraq.
Building Security Institutions. While attempting to restore securityto Iraq,
the CPA is beginning to build new Iraqi institutions that can eventually take over the
security function from the United States. The United States is in the process of
training recruits for a planned 40,000 person Iraqi army, about 10% the size of the
pre-war Iraqi force. About 12,000 are expected to be in the force by mid-2004.
Former Defense Department official Walter Slocombe is in charge of forming the
new Iraqi army. The CPA is also trying to turn policing functions over to Iraqis.
Overall, about 32,000 Iraqi policemen have returned to their jobs, about half the total
goal. The CPA official responsible for the new police force, former New York City
police commissioner Bernard Kerik, says it will take about 18 months (end of 2004)
to reach the goal of 65,000 policemen nationwide.22 (Kerik announced his
resignation in early September 2003.) The CPA is also recruiting a 7,000-man, all-
Iraqi civil defense force to guard installations such as oil pumping stations, electricity
substations, and like facilities. Press reports in late August said many Iraqi security
personnel might be flown to Hungary for training there.
Searching for Regime Violations. Organs of the CPA and the U.S.
government are attempting to uncover abuses and violations of the regime of Saddam
Hussein, including evidence of WMD. A 1,500 person “Iraq Survey Group,” headed
by a U.S. military commander (Maj. Gen. Keith Dayton) but composed of many
civilian technical experts, including former U.N. weapons inspector David Kay, is
attempting to uncover alleged WMD. The Survey Group is also searching for mass
graves of victims of the former regime. Kay and Dayton briefed Members of
Congress on July 30, 2003, saying they were making substantial progress in
uncovering the fate of suspected WMD programs. Thus far, the Survey Group has
found at least 60 mass graves, some with hundreds of corpses. Most appear to
contain bodies of Kurdish and Shiite opponents of the former regime, but some
contain some of the bodies of about 600 Kuwaitis missing from the first Gulf war.
(WMD issues and the fate of the missing Kuwaitis are discussed in CRS Issue Brief
IB92117.)
22 Schmitt, Eric. Wolfowitz on Visit to Iraq to Assess Rebuilding Effort. New York Times,
July 18, 2003.
CRS-27
The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction.23 As the driver of Iraq’s
economy, the rebuilding of the oil industry is receiving substantial U.S. attention.
Bremer said in a press interview on July 31, 2003, that it could take $50 - $100
billion to reconstruct Iraq, and a $1.6 billion plan to rehabilitate Iraq’s oil industry
was agreed in late July 2003. It has been widely assumed that Iraq’s vast oil reserves,
believed second only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be used to fund much of the
costs of reconstruction. Then presidential spokesman Ari Fleischer said on February
18, 2003, referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a variety of means ... to
shoulder much of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.” Many observers had been
concerned that an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could destroy its own oil fields,
but coalition forces quickly secured Iraq’s southern oil fields after combat began.
Only about 9 oil wells were set on fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that region,
and all were put out quickly. The northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul were not
set afire.
In early May 2003, the U.S.-led coalition set up an advisory board, headed by
former Shell executive Phillip Carroll, to oversee the rebuilding of Iraq’s oil sector.
An Iraqi oil industry professional, Thamer Ghadhban, was named to serve as head
of the interim management team that has run Iraq’s oil ministry and reported to the
advisory board. The first exports began in late June 2003, and Ghadhban said that
Iraq would be up to about 1 million barrels per day of exports by mid-July. However,
exports are running at about 700,000 barrels per day as of early September 2003, due
to sabotage and the slow pace of sector reconstruction; this is significantly below
estimates. Iraq’s pre-war export rate was about 2.2 million barrels per day, a level
that U.S. officials and Iraqi oil appointees had hoped to reach by late 2003. The
CPA-produced budget for Iraq for calendar 2003, which is based on the targeted
levels of oil exports, assumed that oil revenues would yield about $3.5 billion
through the end of 2003, and provide about half of the approximately $6.6 billion
budget for Iraq for the period. However, because oil revenues are behind projections,
the budget deficit is likely to be more than $4 billion, far more than the $2.2 billion
projected deficit in the budget. The higher deficit means that the Development Fund
for Iraq, set up by the post-war Resolution 1483 (see below), might run out of money
by the end of 2003.
A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which
foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s
vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will
seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other
countries.
Supplemental Funding Needs. However, partly because oil revenues are
lagging behind projections, in late August 2003 Bremer visited Washington to talk
to other Administration officials about the need to ask Congress for immediate
supplemental funds for reconstruction needs, which Bremer estimates will run into
the “several tens of billions” over the next year. On September 8, 2003, President
Bush stated that he would request supplemental funding for the “war on terrorism,”
23 For information on the prospects for Iraq’s post-war economy, see CRS Report RL31944.
Iraq’s Economy: Past, Present, Future.
CRS-28
in the amount of $87 billion, of which over $70 billion would be for military
operations in and reconstruction of Iraq. Of that amount, about $50 billion would be
for military costs and about $20 billion for reconstruction of Iraq.
Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have
been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program.
The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put
in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was
suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various
aspects of the program departed Iraq. As of the start of the war, about $9 billion
worth of humanitarian goods were in the process of being delivered or in production.
(See CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, Sanctions, and Illicit
Trade.)
On March 28, 2003, the U.N. SecurityCouncil unanimouslyadopted Resolution
1472 that restarted the program’s operations and empowered the United Nations, for
a 45-day period (until May 12), to take direct control of all aspects of the program.
Under the new resolution, the United Nations is setting priorities for and directing the
delivery of already contracted supplies. The enhanced U.N. authority was extended
on April 25, 2003, to last at least until the six-month phase of the program expired
on June 3, 2003.
On April 17, 2003, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions
against Iraq, signaling that the Administration wanted to focus on restoring normal
international commerce with Iraq rather than extending the oil-for-food program.
Resolution 1483 lifted sanctions and provided for the phasing out of the oil for food
program within six months after adoption of that resolution on May 22. The
resolution also provided for the United Nations to transfer to the new Development
Fund for Iraq $1 billion in funds held by the oil-for-food program escrow fund. That
Development Fund contained about $7 billion in June 2003, consisting of captured
Iraqi assets, Iraqi assets abroad, the monies transferred from the oil-for-food account,
and U.S. funds available for reconstruction. (For more information, see CRS Report
RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, International Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.)
International Role in Peacekeeping and Governance24
The relatively slow pace of establishing Iraqi security institutions, coupled with
ongoing resistance that is causing continued U.S. casualties, has led to calls from
Members of Congress and others for the Administration to expand its efforts to
enlist other countries to help with the stabilization of Iraq. In his speech on Iraq of
September 7, 2003, President Bush said he has authorized Secretary of State Powell
to negotiate a Security Council resolution that would authorize a multinational
peacekeeping force in Iraq. It is hoped that such a U.N. authorization would trigger
additional pledges of force contributions. Thus far, 29 countries have made
commitments of forces to help secure Iraq, but the commitments of several large
24 For additional information on international contributions to Iraq peacekeeping and
reconstruction, see CRS Report RL31843. Iraq: Foreign Contributions to Operation Iraqi
Freedom, Peacekeeping Operations, and Post-War Reconstruction.
CRS-29
nations, including Germany, France, India, and Turkey appear to be contingent on
U.N. authorization.
Administration discussions about requesting additional foreign participation
began earlier than the President’s September 7 speech. Secretary of State Powell said
on July 16, 2003, that the United States is discussing with other countries the
possibility of seeking formal U.N. backing for a multilateral peacekeeping force.
Discussions within the Administration and between the United States and some of
its allies on a U.N. resolution that might specifically authorize a multinational force
accelerated following the August 19 U.N. headquarters bombing. U.N. Secretary
General said on August 21 that there is no discussion of establishing a U.N.-led
peacekeeping force. Deputy Secretary of State Richard Armitage told journalists in
late August that one idea under discussion could be for a multinational force, under
U.N. leadership, which would be commanded by a U.S. military official.25 This
option appears to still be under consideration, as are others.
The United Kingdom and Poland are leading multinational divisions in southern
Iraq and central Iraq, respectively. The United States and Poland reached agreement
in late July 2003 for the United States to fund the deployment of the Polish force,
support valued at about $250 million. The UK-led force is to number about 14,000,
of which all but 2,000 are British forces. The Polish-led force is to number about
9,200, of which 2,300 will be Polish. The pledged forces listed below have begun
deploying to Iraq as of early August 2003, and there are now about 21,000 non-U.S.
troops on the ground (including 11,000 British), as of September 9, 2003. Confirmed
pledges include those in Table 1.
25 Jehl, Douglas. U.S. Now Signals It Might Consider U.N. Force in Iraq. New York Times,
August 28, 2003.
CRS-30
Table 1. Multinational Division Force Pledges
Azerbaijan 150
Bulgaria 500
Czech Republic 400
Denmark 380
Dominican Republic 300
El Salvador 300
Estonia 55
Georgia 100
Honduras 300
Hungary 300
Italy 3,000 (mostly military police)
Japan 1,000 (logistics and combat support).
(Implementation placed on hold after
U.N. HQ bombing )
Latvia 150
Lithuania 85
Macedonia 28
Mongolia 200
Netherlands 1,100
Nicaragua 300
Norway 150
Philippines 500
Poland 2,300
Portugal 120
Romania 150
Slovakia 85
South Korea 700 (mostly medical)
Spain 1,300
Thailand 500
Ukraine 1650
Total Pledged 17,100
CRS-31
Another idea said to be under discussion is for NATO to command a
multilateral force. The United States has had some discussions with NATO on
whether the organization would take on Iraq as a fifth peacekeeping mission. On
July 10, 2003, the Senate adopted an amendment, by a vote of 97-0, to a State
Department authorization bill (S. 925) calling on the Administration to formally ask
NATO to lead a peacekeeping force for Iraq. A related bill (H.R. 2112) was
introduced in the House on May 15, 2003. (For more information on this possibility,
see CRS Report RL32068, An Enhanced European Role in Iraq?)
Other countries have agreed to provide funding for reconstruction. According
to the June 30, 2003, report to Congress by the Administration, the following
countries have made financial pledges for Iraq reconstruction: United Kingdom
($177.1 million); Japan ($101.8 million); Australia ($60.5 million); UAE ($47.6
million); Canada ($41.2 million); Saudi Arabia ($36.6 million); Spain ($32.2
million); Kuwait ($27.5 million); the European Commission ($26.3 million); and
Italy ($22.4 million). A donors’ conference is to be held in the coming weeks,
although some countries are said to be reluctant to make new pledges until there is
agreement on a new structure for foreign participation in Iraq.
U.N. Role in Post-War Iraq. Just after the fall of Saddam Hussein’s regime,
the United States and its European allies and other countries reached a measure of
agreement on a modest U.N. role in post-war Iraq. Resolution 1483, which was
adopted unanimously, provided for a U.N. special representative to coordinate the
activities of U.N. personnel in Iraq and to help establish a successor government.
The Secretary General subsequently (May 27, 2003) appointed de Mello (see above)
for that post. The resolution also gave the United Nations a monitoring role over the
Development Fund for Iraq, a fund that will handle Iraq’s oil revenues until there is
a successor government. The resolution did not authorize a return to Iraq of U.N.
weapons inspectors, although the resolution provided for deliberations on that issue.
Some International Atomic Energy Agency inspectors returned to Iraq in June 2003
on a limited nuclear mission in Baghdad.
Some countries criticized Resolution 1483 as providing for too limited a U.N.
role in post-war Iraq and said that the United Nations, not the United States and
Britain, should take the lead role in establishing a post-war governing structure for
Iraq. The Administration opposed giving the United Nations the lead role in
governance, partly on the grounds that the United Nations might facilitate the rise
to power in Iraq of a government that is not to U.S. liking. On August 14, 2003, the
U.N. Security Council adopted a compromise resolution, Resolution 1500, that
“welcomed,” but did not “endorse,” the formation of the Governing Council, an
apparent nod to U.S. requests. The resolution also enhanced U.N. authority in Iraq
somewhat by establishing a “U.N. Assistance Mission for Iraq.” The resolution did
not formally authorize an international peacekeeping force for Iraq (Resolution 1483
already “calls on” governments to contribute forces for stabilization) and did not
measurably dilute U.S. authority over post-war governance in Iraq. The resolution
did not appear to meet the requirements of France and others for them to donate
peacekeeping forces.
As of September 9, the United States is circulating a working paper to other
Security Council countries that it hopes will encourage greater foreign troop
CRS-32
contributions. However, some countries, including France and Germany, have said
that their keyinterest is that anynew U.N. resolution restructure post-war governance
into a U.N.-led operation rather than a U.S.-led operation. Others, such as Russia,
have indicated they are less concerned on this issue than France or Germany.26
Fate of the Deposed Regime
An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is whether Saddam
Hussein and his associates should be prosecuted for war crimes and crimes against
humanity, if and when they are caught. The Administration said in early April 2003
that Saddam and his inner circle should be tried by Iraqis if they are captured,
although others might be tried by a U.S.-led process for any crimes committed in the
course of the 2003 war. In the year prior to the war, the Administration was
gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those it had
sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay (killed after discovery
by and a firefight with U.S. forces in Mosul on July 22, 2003); Ali Hassan al-Majid,
for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (captured August 21, 2003);
Muhammad Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered in mid-April 2003); Taha Yasin
Ramadan; first Vice President and number three in the regime (captured August 19,
2003); Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council and
formally number two in the regime; Barzan al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother
(captured in mid-April 2003); Watban al-Tikriti (captured in April 2003) and Sabawi
al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam and former leaders of regime
intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputy Prime Minister and foremost regime
spokesman (surrendered in May 2003); and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait
during Iraq’s occupation of that country (captured May 2003).
Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials
sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured
or surrendered. As of early September 2003, 42 of the Iraqis on the list of 55 are
now in custody or were killed. Others not on the list of 55 have been apprehended
as well: Amir al-Saadi, chief science adviser to Saddam; Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti,
a son-in-law of Saddam; Vice President Taha Muhi ad-Din Ma’ruf; and suspected
WMD manager Hoda Mahdi Salih al-Ammash.
The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and
the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29,
1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related
atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for
FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress
that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal
for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137
(passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March
13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October
31, 1998).
26 Isachenkov, Vladimir. Russia May Send Peacekeepers to Iraq. Moscow Times,
September 5, 2003.
CRS-33
A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993,
after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the United States has supported
INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the
arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the
Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer,
said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established,
focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical
weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds)
and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which
an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against
Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes
against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations.
In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a
U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war
crimes is formed.
Congressional Reactions
Congress, like the Administration, had divergent views on the mechanisms for
promoting regime change, although there was widespread agreement in Congress that
regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S. policy. There was substantial
disagreement over whether a major military offensive was the most desirable option
for achieving that objective. On December 20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75,
by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a
“mounting threat” to the United States. The resolution did not call for new U.S. steps
to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few Members called for the overthrow of
Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in support of the resolution.
In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq,
some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint
appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on
Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations
Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the
opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an
option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In
early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members — Senators John
McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and
Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr.
— wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for
operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter,
Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S.
assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish
areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and
other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to
accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.”
As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002,
Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result.
Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force
CRS-34
against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce
U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on
October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote
of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243).
The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. Prior to the war, it held
several hearings on the progress of post-war reconstruction. During the war and in
its aftermath, several Members applauded the performance of the U.S. military and
the overthrow of the regime. Some Members, however, have criticized the
Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war period in light of major
looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the regime. Criticism of post-war
planning has escalated as attacks on U.S. occupation forces have mounted, although
the Administration and others say U.S. casualties are relatively light and that the
resistance is not jeopardizing overall U.S. objectives for Iraq. Several Committees
are conducting inquiries into why substantial amounts of WMD have not been found
in Iraq to date. Some Members of both parties have also expressed concern about the
costs of the U.S. occupation, particularly in light of the Administration’s September
2003 request for an additional $87 billion in funding, and several Members have
called on the Administration to take greater steps to persuade other countries to share
the burden of peacekeeping in and reconstruction of Iraq. Others have called for an
increase in the number of U.S. troops in Iraq or re-evaluation of the mix of U.S.
forces to ensure that the skill set of the U.S. force matches the needs of
reconstruction.
CRS-35
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition
Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.)
to the Opposition
(Figures in millions of dollars)
INC War
Crimes Broadcasting
Unspecified
Opposition
Activities
Total
FY 1998
(P.L. 105-174)
2.0 5.0
(RFE/RL)
3.0 10.0
FY 1999
(P.L. 105-277)
3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0
FY 2000
(P.L. 106-113)
2.0 8.0 10.0
FY 2001
(P.L. 106-429)
12.0
(aid
distribution
inside Iraq)
2.0 6.0
(INC radio)
5.0 25.0
FY 2002
(P.L. 107-115)
25.0 25.0
Total,
FY1998-FY2002
15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0
FY2003
(no earmark)
3.1
(announced
April 2003)
6.9
(remaining
to be
allocated)
10.0
FY2004
(request)
0 0
Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq
Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97
million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent,
as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided,
the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and
FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be
used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N.
programs.
Another version (English): 29 August 2003 — RL31339_2003-08-29.pdf
Order Code RL31339
CRS Report for Congress
Received through the CRS Web
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
Updated August 29, 2003
Kenneth Katzman
Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs
Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division
Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
Summary
In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized
Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to abandon
its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs as required by U.N. Security
Council resolutions and the potential for it to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. In
September 2002, the President told the U.N. General Assembly that unless Iraq fully
disarmed in cooperation with United Nations weapons inspectors, the United States
would lead a coalition to achieve that disarmament militarily, making clear that this
would include the ouster of Iraq’s President Saddam Hussein’s regime. After a
November 2002 - March 2003 round of U.N. inspections in which Iraq’s cooperation
was mixed, on March 19, 2003, the United States launched “Operation Iraqi
Freedom,” to disarm Iraq and change its regime. The regime fell on April 9, 2003.
In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change
through U.S.-led military action would yield benefits beyond disarmament and
reduction of support for terrorism; benefits such as liberation of the Iraqi people
from an oppressive regime and promotion of stability and democracy throughout the
Middle East. The goal of regime change in Iraq had been declared U.S. policy since
November 1998, and U.S. efforts to oust Saddam had been pursued, with varying
degrees of intensity, since the end of the Gulf war in 1991. These efforts primarily
involved U.S. financial backing for opposition groups inside and outside Iraq, several
of which are now contending for power in post-Saddam Iraq. Past efforts to change
the regime floundered because of limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the
Iraqi opposition, and the efficiency and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping
intelligence and security forces. Previous U.S. Administrations ruled out major U.S.
military action to change Iraq’s regime, believing such action would be risky and not
necessarily justified by the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament.
The leadership and precise shape of the permanent government that will replace
Saddam Hussein’s Baath Party are yet to be determined. Some Administration
officials reportedly had hoped that major military and governmental defections from
the Hussein regime would serve as the core of a successor government. However,
no senior Hussein regime figures defected, and formerly exiled opposition groups
form the core of a U.S.-appointed 25-seat “governing council” that was unveiled on
July 13, 2003. It is hoped by the Administration that the formation of the council
will signal that Iraq is moving toward self rule and calm some of the resistance
against U.S. occupation forces in Iraq. Escalating resistance, punctuated by the
August 19, 2003, truck bombing of the U.N. headquarters in Baghdad, has apparently
prompted debate within the Administration over how to enlist increased foreign
participation in post-war peacekeeping and reconstruction.
See also CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Humanitarian
and Reconstruction Assistance. This report will be updated as warranted by major
developments.
Contents
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Sadr Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
The First ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Monarchists/Sharif Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups . . . 12
Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Post-War Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
The Governing Council . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Post-War U.S. Operations and the Coalition Provisional Authority . . . . . . 23
The Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Building Security Institutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Searching for Regime Violations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Supplemental Funding Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
International Role in Peacekeeping and Governance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
U.N. Role in Post-War Iraq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Fate of the Deposed Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Congressional Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
The United States has sought to change remove Iraq’s Saddam Hussein from
power since the 1991 Persian Gulf war, although achieving this goal was not declared
policy until 1998. In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of
mass destruction (WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the
United States would seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime.
A regime change policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338,
October 31, 1998). Bush Administration officials emphasized regime change as the
cornerstone of U.S. policy toward Iraq since shortly after the September 11, 2001,
attacks. Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003, and had
effectively removed Saddam Hussein from power by April 9, 2003.
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam
Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an
operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George
H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end
of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and
Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope
of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions. The revolt in southern Iraq reached
the suburbs of Baghdad, but the well-trained and loyal Republican Guard forces had
survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from battle prior to the U.S.
ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid-March 1991. Many Shiites
blamed the United States for not supporting their uprising and standing aside as the
regime retaliated against those who participated in the rebellion. Kurds, benefitting
from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991, drove Iraqi troops out of
much of northern Iraq and subsequently remained largely free of Baghdad’s rule.
According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite
uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding
stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup
against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that
purpose. The Administration apparently believed — and this view apparently was
shared by many experts and U.S. officials — that a coup by elements within the
current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq.
Many observers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and
Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and
tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria.
CRS-2
Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition
Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that
the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment
within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision
was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the
diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the
Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and
diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This
opposition coalition was seen as providing a vehicle for the United States to build a
viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert
support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.1
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi
The growing opposition coalition took shape in an organization called the Iraqi
National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two main
Kurdish militias, the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic Union of
Kurdistan (PUK), participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens of
opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came into the
coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq.
The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi
ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military
officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC
with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups
publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests,
including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the
preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. Security Council
resolutions on Iraq.2 However, many observers doubted its commitment to
democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and
because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies. The
INC’s first Executive Committee consisted of KDP leader Masud Barzani, ex-Baath
Party and military official Hassan Naqib, and moderate Shiite cleric Mohammad
Bahr al-Ulum. (Barzani and Bahr al-Ulum are now on the 25-member post-war
Governing Council, inaugurated July 13, 2003, and both are part of its nine member
rotating presidency.)
Ahmad Chalabi. When the INC was formed, its Executive Committee
selected Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 58 years old, a secular Shiite Muslim from
a prominent banking family, to run the INC on a daily basis. Chalabi was educated
in the United States (M.I.T) as a mathematician. He fled Iraq to Jordan in 1958,
when the Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military coup. This coup
1 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2,
1992.
2 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by
INC representatives, February 1993.
CRS-3
occurred 10 years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July 1968). In 1978, he
founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian authorities on
charges of financial malfeasance (embezzlement) and he left Jordan, possibly with
some help from members of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989. In 1992, he was
convicted in absentia of embezzling $70 million from the bank and sentenced to 22
years in prison. The Jordanian government subsequently repaid depositors a total of
$400 million. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government was pressured by
Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to the Jordanian
government. In April 2003, senior Jordanian officials, including King Abdullah,
called Chalabi “divisive” and stopped just short of saying he would be unacceptable
to Jordan as leader of Iraq. Chalabi’s critics acknowledge that, despite allegations
about his methods, he has been single-minded in his determination to overthrow
Saddam Hussein, and he is said to be the favorite of those Administration officials,
particularly in the Department of Defense, that were the most supportive of changing
Iraq’s regime by force.
Since Chalabi returned to Iraq, there have been no large public demonstrations
supportive of him or the INC, indicating that he does not have a large following
inside Iraq. However, anecdotal press reporting suggest that he has attracted some
support from those Iraqis that most welcomed the U.S. military offensive against Iraq
and subsequent occupation. On April 6, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters (“Free
Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by the U.S. military from their base in the north to the
Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs in southern Iraq, later
deploying to Baghdad and other parts of Iraq. After establishing his headquarters in
Baghdad, Chalabi tried to build support by searching for fugitive members of the
former regime and arranging for U.S. military forces in Iraq to provide security or
other benefits to his potential supporters. However, the Free Iraqi Forces
accompanying Chalabi were disbanded following the U.S. decision in mid-May 2003
to disarm independent militias.
Chalabi is part of a grouping of seven major party leaders that began meeting
shortly prior to the 2003 war. The seven-party leadership grouping was hoping to
become the core of a successor regime, and the seven parties are represented on the
Governing Council. Chalabi is a member of the Governing Council and one of the
nine that will rotate its presidency.
A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book,
Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq, detailing alleged Iraqi regime human
rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracy for Iraq, including full
rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he teaches Middle
Eastern politics at Brandeis University. In August 2003, Makiya was tapped by the
Governing Council to head a 25-person committee that will decide how to draft a
new constitution. Another INC activist, Mohammed al-Zubaidi, declared himself in
charge of Baghdad in mid-April, but U.S. officials did not recognize him as mayor
and detained him in April 2003.
The Kurds/KDP and PUK. The Kurds, among the most pro-U.S. of all the
groups in Iraq, do not have ambitions to play a major role in governing Arab Iraq, but
Iraq’s neighbors have always been fearful that the Kurds might still seek outright
independence. In committing to the concept of federalism, the INC platform
CRS-4
assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq. Turkey, which
has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly
fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into
a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy
since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War
I. (Iraq became an independent Kingdom in 1932, although it remained under British
influence until the 1958 fall of the British-installed monarchy.) In 1961, the KDP,
then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP leader Masud Barzani’s
father, began an insurgency that has continued until today, although interrupted by
periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud Barzani’s brother, Idris,
commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the Iran-Iraq war but was killed in
that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from the KDP in 1965; the
PUK’s members are generally more well-educated, urbane, and left-leaning than
those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000-60,000 fighters,
some of which are trained in conventional military tactics. Both Barzani and
Talabani were part of the seven-party grouping that has now been incorporated into
the Governing Council, and both are part of the Council’s rotating presidency.
Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties
enjoyed good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement
of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaikh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in
Halabja, Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical
attack on that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998.
A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam
(Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam).
This faction, led by Mullah Krekar (who was detained in Europe in August 2002 and
now lives in Norway), reportedly associated itself with Al Qaeda and hosted in its
northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters who had fled the U.S.-led war in
Afghanistan. Mullah Krekar reportedly studied under Shaikh Abdullah al-Azzam,
an Islamic theologian of Palestinian origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama
bin Laden. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, during which its base was captured,
about 600 fighters in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, located near the town of Khurmal.3
Ansar fighters clashed with the PUK around Halabja in December 2002, and Ansar
gunmen were allegedly responsible for an assassination attempt against PUK prime
minister Barham Salih in April 2002.
The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials
to be Abu Musab Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in
Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the
December 1999 millennium celebration, the assassination in Jordan of U.S. diplomat
Lawrence Foley (2002), and to reported attempts in 2002 to spread the biological
agent ricin in London and possibly other places in Europe. In a presentation to the
U.N. Security Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied Zarqawi
and Ansar to Saddam Hussein’s regime, which might have viewed Ansar al-Islam as
a means of pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents. Although Zarqawi reportedly
3 Chivers, C.J. New York Times, December 6, 2002.
Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.”
CRS-5
received medical treatment in Baghdad in May 2002 after fleeing Afghanistan, many
experts believed Baghdad-Ansar links were tenuous or even non-existent; Baghdad
did not control northern Iraq even before Operation Iraqi Freedom.4 Zarqawi’s
current whereabouts are unknown, although some unconfirmed press reports indicate
he might have fled to Iran after the fall of the Ansar camp to U.S.-led forces. Some
press accounts in July 2003 say Iran might have him in custody. U.S. officials said
in August that some Ansar fighters might have remained in or re-entered Iraq and are
participating in the resistance to the U.S. occupation, possibly including organizing
acts of terrorism.
Shiite Islamist Organizations
Some outside experts have had concerns about the potential strength and
ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups in post-
Saddam Iraq. The United States sought to work with some Shiite Islamist opposition
factions during the 1990s but had few if any contacts with others. Shiite Islamist
factions hold at least five seats on the Governing Council unveiled July 13, 2003.
SCIRI/Badr Corps. The most well known among these is called the Supreme
Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member of the INC
in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC banner.
SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition groups
in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad Baqr al-
Hakim, died in a car bomb by unknown assailants in Najaf on August 29, 2003, an
act that could reflect or accelerate a schism within the Shiite Islamist community.
Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head
an Islamic Republic of Iraq, a vision that, if realized, might conflict with U.S. plans
to forge a democratic Iraq. Baqr Al Hakim and his family fled Iraq to Iran in 1980,
during a major crackdown on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam
feared that Iraqi Shiite Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution
in Iran in 1979, posed a major threat to his regime. Prior to the formation of SCIRI,
Hakim and his family were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party (see below).
Mohammed Baqr is the son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a
prominent Shiite leader in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini
when Khomeini was in exile in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. Baqr Al Hakim had
returned to Iraq on May 10, 2003, welcomed by crowds in Basra and Najaf, where
he is now based.
In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about
10,000-15,000 fighters/activists organized into a “Badr Corps” (named after a major
battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from Iran
into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. The Badr Corps is headed by
Mohammed Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim, who returned to Iraq on
April 20, 2003, to pave the way for Mohammed Baqr’s return. Abd al-Aziz is likely
to take leadership of the movement in the wake of his elder brother’s death on
4 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire,
March 18, 2002.
CRS-6
August 29. (Another Hakim brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan in May 1990,
allegedly by agents of Iraq’s security services.) Iran’s Revolutionary Guard, which
is politically aligned with Iran’s hard line civilian officials, has been the key patron
of the Badr Corps, providing it with weapons, funds, and other assistance. The Badr
Corps fought alongside the Guard against Iraqi forces during the Iran-Iraq war.
However, many Iraqi Shiites view SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr
Corps operations in southern Iraq prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark
broad popular unrest against the Iraqi regime. Some Badr fighters deployed inside
northern Iraq on the eve of Operation Iraqi Freedom, and the rest have since entered
Iraq.
A variety of press reports say that individual militias now providing security in
many towns in southern Iraq are linked to the Badr Corps. One such militia is
derived from the fighters who challenged Saddam Hussein’s forces in the marsh
areas of southern Iraq, around the town of Amara, north of Basra. It goes by the
name Hizbollah (Party of God)-Amara, and it is headed by marsh guerrilla leader
Abdul Karim Muhammadawi, nicknamed “Prince of the Marshes” who was named
to the Governing Council. He is widely perceived as an ally of SCIRI.
Until August 2002 when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures
for meetings in Washington, D.C., SCIRI had publicly refused to work openly with
the United States or accept U.S. assistance, although it was part of the INC and did
have contacts with the United States prior to the 2003 war effort. Since the fall of the
regime on April 9, SCIRI leaders have criticized what they called an illegitimate U.S.
occupation of Iraq and have called for the rapid establishment of an Iraqi self-rule
authority, while at the same time publicly opposing the use of violence against the
occupation. Even though Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim says he is for a democracy and
would not seek to establish an Iranian-style Islamic republic, U.S. officials are said
to be mistrustful of SCIRI and have been seeking to disarm its fighters. Suggesting
that SCIRI sees its interests in a degree of cooperation with the occupation, Abd al-
Aziz al Hakim did meet with other opposition leaders in late April 2003 at a post-war
governance planning session sponsored by U.S. officials. He later helped constitute
the seven-party core of the Governing Council, and Abd al-Aziz is part of the nine-
person rotating Council presidency. Unlike some other Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI
has had good working relations with some Sunni oppositionists and the Kurds.
SCIRI might get additional support from the family of the late Ayatollah
Khomeini. In July 2003, Khomeini’s grandson, Hassan Khomeini, who is about 45,
relocated from Qom, Iran to Najaf. Hassan Khomeini is believed to be an opponent
of the more militant Shiite clerics such as Moqtada Al Sadr (see below), who is also
considered a rival of SCIRI and whom some SCIRI activists blamed for a bombing
on August 24 outside the home of elder Hakim cleric Mohammad Saeed Al Hakim.
Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, perhaps Iraq’s oldest Shiite Islamist grouping,
continues to exist as a separate group, but many Da’wa activists appear to be at least
loosely allied with SCIRI. The party was founded in 1957 by a revered Iraqi Shiite
cleric, Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of Ayatollah
Khomeini. Baqr Al Sadr was hung by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the Da’wa’s
alleged responsibility in fomenting Shiite anti-regime unrest following Iran’s 1979
Islamic revolution. That unrest included an attempted assassination of senior Iraqi
leader Tariq Aziz. Da’wa was part of the seven-party council grouping that is now
CRS-7
been incorporated into the Governing Council. Da’wa’s spokesman, Ibrahim Jafari,
and its leader in Basra, Abdal Zahra Othman, are on the Governing Council, as is a
former Da’wa activist turned human rights activist, Muwaffaq Al-Ruba’i. Jafari is
one of the nine members of the Council that is rotating the presidency, and Jafari is
the first to take that post.
The Kuwaiti branch of the Da’wa Party allegedly was responsible for a May
1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks
on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The Hizballah organization in Lebanon
was founded by Lebanese clerics loyal to Ayatollah Baqr Al Sadr and the late
Ayatollah Khomeini, and there continue to be linkages between Hizballah and the
Da’wa Party. The Hizballah activists who held U.S. hostages in that country during
the 1980s often linked release of the Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party
prisoners held by Kuwait for those offenses. Some Iraqi Da’wa members look to
Lebanon’s senior Shiite cleric Mohammed Hossein Fadlallah, who was a student and
protege of Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, for spiritual guidance.
Sadr Movement. Members of the clan of the late Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr
Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq. The Sadr clan, based in Iraq
during Saddam Hussein’s rule, was repressed and not politically active during that
time. The United States had no contact with this grouping prior to the 2003 war and
did not attempt to enlist it in any overthrow efforts during 1991-2002. Although the
Al Sadr clan has been closely identified with the Da’wa Party, it appears that
members of the clan and their followers currently are operating in post-war Iraq as
grouping separate from the Da’wa. Another revered member of the clan, Mohammed
Sadiq Al Sadr, and two of his sons, were killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999.
A surviving son, Moqtada Al Sadr, who is about 27 years old, has attempted to rally
his followers to attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite politics. He and his
clan apparently have a large following in the poorer Shiite neighborhoods of
Baghdad, which, after the fall of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr
City,” from the former name of “Saddam City.” However, Moqtada is viewed by
Iran and many Iraqi Shiites as a young radical who lacks religious and political
weight. To compensate for his lack of religious credentials, he has sought spiritual
authority for his actions from exiled Iraqi senior cleric, Ayatollah Kazem Haeri, who
is living in Qom, Iran. An alternate interpretation by some experts is that Haeri is
acting at the direction of Iran’s leadership to keep Moqtada Sadr under a measure of
control.
Moqtada’s reputation may have been tarnished in early April when Moqtada al
Sadr reportedly killed Abd al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Abdol
Qasem Musavi-Khoi, shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al-
Majid Khoi headed the Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq
after U.S.-led forces took Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political
doctrines of Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran.
The Sadr grouping has not been included in the Governing Council. Moqtada
has used his Friday prayer sermons in Najaf and other forums to denounce the
Council as a puppet of the U.S. occupation. In July 2003, Moqtada and his aides
began recruiting for an Islamic army, for now unarmed, that Sadr says must
challenge the U.S. occupation, although he has thus far stopped short of openly
CRS-8
calling for armed attacks on American forces. He is openly calling for a cleric-led
Islamic state similar to that of Iran. In August 2003, Shiites in Basra and in Baghdad
rioted against British and U.S. occupation forces over fuel shortages and perceived
slights, and there was speculation that Moqtada was helping fuel the riots.
Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah. The revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al-
Sistani, based in Najaf, was repressed during Saddam’s rule and is emerging as a
major potential force in post-war Iraq. The United States had no contact with Sistani
when Saddam was in power. He is the most senior of the four Shiite clerics that lead
the Najaf- based “Hawza al-Ilmiya,” a major grouping of seminaries and Shiite
clerics. The Hawza, which is well funded through donations, is becoming an
important source of political authority in the Shiite regions of Iraq, hiring Iraqis to
perform functions performed by the former regime and issuing directives, often
obeyed, for some Iraqi civil servants to return to work. Sistani himself, now free of
a long house arrest at the hands of Baghdad, has a large following of former students
throughout the Shiite portions of Iraq. Sistani and the Hawza are generally allied
with SCIRI in the intra-Shiite power struggle, seeking to contain Moqtada Al Sadr,
who Sistani and SCIRI both view as radical and impulsive. Sistani, who is of Iranian
ethnicity, is considered to be in the tradition of Ayatollah Khoi in opposing a direct
role for clerics in governmental affairs, and Sistani and the Hawza have spoken
against a direct role for the clerics in governing post-war Iraq. However, in early July
2003, Sistani began to take a more active role in Iraq’s post-war decision-making by
issuing a statement that only elected Iraqis — not a U.S.-appointed governing council
— should draft a constitution.
Islamic Amal. SCIRI has been allied with another Shiite Islamist organization
called the Islamic Amal (Action) Organization. In the early 1980s, Islamic Amal was
under the SCIRI umbrella but later broke with it. It is headed by Mohammed Taqi
Modarassi, who returned to Iraq from exile in Iran in April 2003, after Saddam
Hussein’s regime fell. Islamic Amal, which has a following among Shiite Islamists
mainly in Karbala, conducted attacks against Saddam Hussein’s regime in the 1980s.
However, it does not appear to have a following nearly as large as SCIRI or the other
Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s brother, Abd al-Hadi, headed the Islamic Front
for the Liberation of Bahrain, which tried to stir up Shiite unrest against the Bahrain
regime in the 1980s and 1990s (see below). Since returning to Iraq in April 2003,
Mohammad Taqi has argued against violent opposition to the U.S. occupation, saying
that such a challenge would plunge Iraq into civil warfare.
Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups
The differences among the various anti-Saddam organizations led to the near
collapse of the U.S. regime change effort the mid-1990s. In May 1994, the KDP and
the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs revenues levied at
border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s government based in
Irbil. The PUK lined up support from Iran while the KDP sought and received
countervailing backing from its erstwhile nemesis, the Baghdad government. The
infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC offensive against Iraqi troops in March
1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at the last minute. Although it was
CRS-9
repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of the less well-trained and poorly
motivated Iraqi units facing the Kurds. Some INC leaders point to the battle as an
indication that the INC could have succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. military
help, had it been given additional resources and training in the 1990s.
The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition in the
mid-1990s caused the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by
renewing ties to a non-INC group, Iraq National Accord (INA).5 The INA, originally
founded in 1990 with Saudi support, consists of military and security defectors who
were perceived as having ties to disgruntled officials currently serving within their
former organizations. It is headed by Dr. Iyad Alawi, former president of the Iraqi
Student Union in Europe and a physician by training. He is a secular Shiite Muslim,
but most of the members of the INA are Sunni Muslims. The INA’s prospects
appeared to brighten in August 1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al-
Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons of mass destruction programs — defected to
Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip on the military and security services was
weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate from there.
The INA was ultimately penetrated by Iraq’s intelligence services and, in June 1996,
Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by arresting or executing over 100 INA
sympathizers in the military.
Iraq’s counteroffensive against the opposition was expanded two months after
the arrests of the INA sympathizers. In late August 1996, the KDP asked Baghdad
to provide armed support for its capture of Irbil from the rival PUK. Iraq took
advantage of the request to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in
northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout northern Iraq.
In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred
oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated
from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists,
mostly from the INC.
Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA continued to
operate throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt itself to some extent since the
June 1996 arrests. However, it does not appear to have a large following in Iraq.
Although it has was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war,
there is a history of friction between the two groups; the INA reportedly bombed an
INC facility in northern Iraq in October 1995. Alawi was part of the seven-party
grouping that became the core of the Governing Council, and Alawi has been named
a member of that Council and one of its nine-member rotating presidency.
Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks
For the two years following the anti-Saddam opposition groups’ 1996 setbacks,
the Clinton Administration had little contact with these groups. In those two years,
the INC, INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations
and their ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998,
5 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret
War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997.
CRS-10
then Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations
subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations”
about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish.
Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections
during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam
Hussein. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with an
FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, signed May 1, 1998) that, among
other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the
opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free
Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October
1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to
coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to
highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions. The remaining $2 million was used
to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the
documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes,
and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In
subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for
war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix. Some of the war crimes funding has
gone to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War
Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues.
Iraq Liberation Act
A clear indication of congressional support for a more active U.S. overthrow
effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998: the Iraq Liberation Act
(ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998). The ILA gave the
President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles (and authorized
$2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be designated by the
Administration. The Act’s passage was widely interpreted as an expression of
congressional support for the concept of promoting an insurgency by using U.S. air-
power to expand opposition-controlled territory. This idea was advocated by Chalabi
and some U.S. experts, such as General Wayne Downing, who subsequently became
a National Security Council official on counter-terrorism in the first two years of the
George W. Bush Administration. President Clinton signed the legislation despite
reported widespread doubts within the Clinton Administration about the chances of
success in promoting an opposition insurgency.
The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting
regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it
should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime
headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly
articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq.
The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the
height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in
which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United
Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were
withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign
against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December
CRS-11
16-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq:
Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.)
The First ILA Designations. Further steps to promote regime change
followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, a career diplomat, Frank
Ricciardone, was named as a State Department’s “Coordinator for the Transition in
Iraq” — the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999, after
consultations with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13) that
the following organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance
under the Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the
Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the Movement for Constitutional
Monarchy (MCM). Because of its possible role in contributing to the formation of
Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001, although it was not
formally taken off the ILA eligibility list.
Monarchists/Sharif Ali. The MCM, which was an original designee of
eligibility to receive assistance under the ILA, is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a
relative of the Hashemite monarchs (he is a cousin of King Faysal II, the last Iraqi
monarch) that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. Sharif Ali, who is
about 47 and was a banker in London, claims to be the leading heir to the former
Hashemite monarchy, although there are other claimants, mostly based in Jordan.
The MCM was considered a small movement that could not contribute much to the
pre-war overthrow effort, although it was part of the INC and the United States had
contacts with it. In the post-war period, Sharif Ali returned to Iraq on June 10, 2003,
to a small but apparently enthusiastic welcome. He did not participate in the seven-
party grouping that negotiated with the U.S.-led occupation authority on the
formation of the Governing Council, and neither Sharif Ali nor any of his followers
was appointed to the Governing Council.
In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton
Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and
“non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999 - 2000, about 150
opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in
Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses providing civil affairs
training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers,
communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However,
the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficiently organized
to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This
restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the
effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United
States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The trainees during
1999-2000 are not believed to have been brought into the Operation Iraqi Freedom
effort against the regime, or into the Free Iraqi Forces that deployed to Iraq toward
the end of the active combat phase of the war.
CRS-12
Continued Doubts About the Capabilities
of the Anti-Saddam Groups
During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end
the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of
Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed
disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the
opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an
indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical about the opposition’s
capabilities. The Clinton Administration maintained that the Iraqi opposition would
not succeed unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement, and that direct U.S.
military action was risky and not justified by the degree of threat posed by Iraq.
Critics of the Clinton Administration policy on Iraq maintained that the potential
threat from Saddam Hussein’s regime was sufficiently grave that direct U.S. military
action should be taken. Others suggested the Clinton Administration should focus
instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq by threatening force if Iraq refused to
permit re-entry into Iraq of the U.N. weapons inspectors that left Iraq in December
1998.
As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a
provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed
November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the
Iraqi people,” of which at least $12 million was for the INC to distribute
humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million
was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million
could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive
assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC
distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000, the Clinton Administration
reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in
FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop an aid distribution plan
and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before
it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that
noted that any INC effort to distribute aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control
would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and
to any relief distributors with which the INC contracts.6
Bush Administration Policy
Bush Administration policy toward Iraq changed after the September 11, 2001
terrorist attacks, even though no significant evidence linking Iraq to those attacks
came to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in
President Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he
characterized Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea.
6 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.”
January 17, 2001.
CRS-13
Pre-September 11 Policy
Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic
elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus
within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow
strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq,
which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its
taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist
regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan: a modification of the U.N.
sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technology reached Iraq. His
plan offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N.
restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military
technology.7
The Administration believed that the proposal, by easing the suffering of the
Iraqi people, would cause Iraq’s neighbors and other countries to cease unilateral
violations of the sanctions regime. Powell, who had openly expressed skepticism
about the opposition’s prospects, barely raised the regime change issue during his trip
or in his March 7, 2001, testimony before the House International Relations
Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.8 After about a year of
negotiations among the Security Council permanent members, the major feature of
the smart sanctions plan — new procedures that virtually eliminate U.N. review of
civilian exports to Iraq — was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Security Council
Resolution 1409).
Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime
change policy, many of the questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy
that had faced previous administrations were debated early in the Bush
Administration.9 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush
Administration did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first year.
During his confirmation hearings as Deputy Secretary of Defense, a leading advocate
of overthrowing Iraq’s regime, Paul Wolfowitz, said that he did not yet see a
“plausible plan” for changing the regime. Like its predecessor, the Bush
Administration initially declined to provide the opposition with lethal aid, combat
training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the separate
State Department position of “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” further casting
doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy. On February 2, 2001, the Bush
Administration confirmed that, shortly after President Bush took office, the Treasury
Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted the INC a license to
proceed with information gathering inside Iraq only, and not actual distribution of
7 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food
Program.
8 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times,
March 2, 2001.
9 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh,
Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002.
CRS-14
humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the Administration amounted to a
withholding of U.S. backing for the INC plan to rebuild its presence inside Iraq.
Many in Congress, on the other hand, continued to support the INC as the
primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional
sentiment, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite
doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television
broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the
ESF aid appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an estimated
additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.10
Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime
Bush Administration policy toward Iraq became notably more assertive after the
September 11, 2001 attacks, stressing regime change far more than containment.
Almost immediately after the U.S.-led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in
Afghanistan began in early October 2001, speculation began building that the
Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use of military force
as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism. Some U.S. officials reportedly
believed that the United States needed to respond to the September 11 attacks by
ending any or all regimes that support terrorist groups, including Iraq. As noted
above, in his January 29, 2002 State of the Union message, President Bush named
Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with North Korea and Iran. Vice President
Cheney visited the Middle East in March 2002 reportedly to consult regional
countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq militarily, although the countries
visited reportedly urged greater U.S. attention to the Arab-Israeli dispute and opposed
confrontation with Iraq.
The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for
confronting Iraq were (1) its purported refusal to end its WMD programs, and (2) its
ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of
conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. The Administration added that
regime change would have the further benefit of liberating the Iraqi people and
promoting stability in the Middle East, possibly facilitating a resolution to the Arab-
Israeli dispute.
Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s
regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax
mailings, senior U.S. officials said in the runup to the war that there was evidence
of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. Secretary of State Powell, as noted above, cited
intelligence information that Ansar al-Islam and its enclave leader Abu Musab al-
Zarqawi had links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.11 (See section above on Ansar al-
Islam for more information on that organization and its reputed links to Saddam
Hussein’s regime.) Other senior officials cited intelligence information that Iraq
provided advice and training to Al Qaeda in the manufacture and use of chemical
10 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001.
11 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002.
CRS-15
weapons, although Administration information appears to date to the early 1990s
when Iraq, largely isolated after the first Gulf war, was politically close to Sudan. Al
Qaeda founder Osama Bin Laden was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996).
The Bush Administration did not extensively cite reports that Czech intelligence
believed that Iraqi intelligence had met with lead September 11 hijacker Mohammad
Atta in Prague in spring 2001, suggesting official skepticism of those reports. Some
outside commentators believed that those reports indicated a direct Iraqi connection
to the September 11 attacks.
Some outside observers expressed skepticism about Iraq-Al Qaeda connections
because of the ideological differences between Saddam Hussein’s secular regime and
Al Qaeda’s Islamist character. Others noted that bin Laden sought to raise an Islamic
army to fight Saddam’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990, arguing against the need for U.S.
troops, and that he was more an enemy of Saddam Hussein than an ally. Those
differences were evident in a February 12, 2003, bin Laden statement referring to
Saddam Hussein’s regime as socialist and infidel, although the statement exhorted
Iraq to resist impending U.S. military action. In the Administration view, the two
shared similar anti-U.S. goals, which outweighed ideological differences and
propelled them into tactical or strategic cooperation.
WMD Threat Perception. In arguing for military action, U.S. officials
maintained that Iraq’s purported commitment to developing WMD — coupled with
its support for terrorist groups to which Iraq might transfer WMD — constituted an
unacceptable potential threat to the United States and that major U.S. military action
was justified if Iraq refused to disarm voluntarily. U.S. officials said the September
11, 2001 attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to
gather before acting, but must instead act preemptively or preventively. Senior U.S.
officials asserted a WMD threat as follows:
! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years
since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply
with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8,
2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs.
However, statements by U.N. weapons inspectors after inspections
resumed November 27, 2002 indicated they believed Iraq did not
have an active nuclear weapons program, and that inspections on
other weapons categories were making progress.
! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and
against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not
necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States
or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against
adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of
destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of
massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the
1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings of
retaliation and did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war.
! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who
could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths
CRS-16
in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of this view cited
presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in October 2002,
portions of which were released publicly, stating the CIA view that
Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to terrorists if the United States
were to attack Iraq. At that point, according to that argument,
Saddam Hussein would be left with little incentive not to cooperate
with terrorist groups capable of striking at U.S. interests. No WMD
was used against Iraq during Operation Iraqi Freedom, and little
evidence of actual WMD have thus far been found, although the
Administration asserts that WMD programs, and perhaps actual
weapons themselves, will eventually be found in Iraq.
Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam
As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action against Iraq, the
Bush Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its
capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002,
President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special
operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and
Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups — the INC, the
INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM — to Washington for meetings with
senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were
held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S.
government, which reportedly tended to favor different opposition groups.
In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August
15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in ESF to the Iraqi
National Congress (INC), funds that had been held up due to differences between the
State Department and the INC over what activities would be funded. The $8 million
was to be used to fund the INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its
offices in Washington, London, Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate
its Al Mutamar newspaper and Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund
the information gathering portion of the INC’s activities; the State Department had
refused to fund those activities, which are conducted inside Iraq, because of strains
between the INC and other opposition groups and questions about INC use of U.S.
funds.
In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and
to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic-
based groups. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had
increasing contact during this period include the following:
! Iraqi National Movement. It formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the
INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib
(who was part of an early leadership body of the INC); and Hatim
Mukhlis, who claimed support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan.
! Iraqi National Front. Another grouping of ex-military officers,
founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite
CRS-17
Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and
participated in the post-1991 Gulf war anti-Saddam uprisings.
! Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement. Established in 1996 by
ex-military officer Najib al-Salhi, this group was close to the INC.
Salhi, who defected in 1995, served in the Republican Guard.
! Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was
established in August 2002, headed by Wafiq al-Samarra’i, a former
head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of staff of Iraq’s
military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was based in Denmark
since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member. Khazraji was
placed under travel restrictions by Danish officials in late November
2002 after saying he wanted to leave Denmark. He is under
investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of chemical
weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities said on
March 17, 2003, that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his home
there,12 although his current whereabouts are unknown.
! Iraqi Turkmen Front. A small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping,
generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq.
Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq.
! The Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another
Shiite Islamic Party, but it is considered substantially less pro-
Iranian than SCIRI or the Da’wa Party. It is headed by Jamil Wakil,
a follower of Ayatollah Shirazi, an Iranian cleric who was the
spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation
of Bahrain (IFLB, see above under Islamic Amal). The IFLB
allegedly attempted to overthrow Bahrain’s regime in the early
1980s.
! The Assyrian Democratic Movement, an ethnic-based movement
headed by Secretary-General Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s
Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq. There is a
strong diaspora presence in the United States as well. After building
ties to this group over the past year, the Bush Administration
formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement
into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002.
(Kanna is on the Governing Council.)
Second ILA Designations. The Bush Administration applauded efforts
during 2001 and 2002 by the ex-military led groups to coordinate with each other
and with the INC and other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London and
jointly run with the INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers. However, since the
regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, virtually none of the ex-military led
groups listed above has openly sought a major role in post-Saddam Iraq.
12 ‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper. Agence France Press, April 7, 2003.
CRS-18
As a decision whether to launch military action approached, President Bush
issued a determination (December 9, 2002) to draw down the remaining $92 million
in defense articles and services authorized under the Iraq Liberation Act for the INA,
the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi
opposition groups designated by me under the Act before or after this determination.”
That same day, the Bush Administration made six of the ex-military led factions
discussed above (except the Higher Council for National Salvation) eligible to
receive draw downs under the ILA. The announcement appeared to be part of
reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists in tasks that could assist U.S. forces,
possibly including combat units.13 An initial group of 3,000 was selected, but only
about 70 oppositionists completed training at an air base (Taszar) in Hungary,
according to press reports.14 These oppositionists served with U.S. forces in
Operation Iraqi Freedom as translators and mediators between U.S. forces and local
leaders, and most did not stay in Iraq, according to observers.
As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began
planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002,
with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in
London. In advance of the meeting, the Bush Administration appointed NSC official
Zalmay Khalilzad to be a liaison to the Iraqi opposition. The conference was
organized by the same six groups whose leaders visited Washington in August 2002,
but included other groups as well, and they discussed whether the opposition should
declare a provisional government. The Administration opposed that step on the
grounds that doing so was premature and would give the impression that outside
powers were determining Iraq’s political structure.
The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65-member follow-up committee,
which some criticized as weighted heavily toward Shiite Islamist groups such as
SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24-27, 2003, in northern Iraq, and
formed, against the urging of U.S. representatives at the meeting, a six-seat
committee to prepare for a transition regime. The assembled groups did not declare
a provisional government. The six-person committee included PUK leader Jalal
Talabani, KDP leader Masud Barzani, SCIRI leader Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim,
Chalabi, INA leader Iyad Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign minister Adnan Pachachi.
(All six groups of these personalities, or their designated representatives, are on
Governing Council.)
Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the
new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete
disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if that country wanted to avert military
action. In a probable effort to garner international support for any U.S.-led war effort
against Iraq, the Administration had downplayed the goal of regime change in
President Bush’s September 12, 2002, speech before the United Nations General
Assembly, stressing instead the need to enforce U.N. resolutions that required Iraqi
13 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.”
Washington Post, October 19, 2002.
14 Williams, Daniel. “U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles.” Washington Post, December
18, 2002.
CRS-19
disarmament. However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change
goal after February 2003 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course.
The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March 2003
breakdown of U.N. diplomacy over whether the U.N. Security Council should
authorize war against Iraq for failing to comply with Resolution 1441. The
diplomatic breakdown followed several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by
the director of the U.N. inspection body UNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification,
and Inspection Commission) Hans Blix and the director of the International Atomic
Energy Agency (IAEA), Mohammad al-Baradei, most recently on March 7, 2003.
The briefings were generally critical of Iraq for failing to pro-actively cooperate to
clear up outstanding questions about Iraq’s WMD program, but the latter two
briefings (February 24 and March 7) noted progress in clearing up outstanding WMD
questions. The Blix/Baradei briefings said Iraq had not accounted for its past WMD,
but the two did not state that they were certain that Iraq had retained WMD, or that
they had uncovered any banned WMD. Iraq declared short range ballistic missiles
that were determined by Blix to be of prohibited ranges, and Blix ordered Iraq to
destroy them. Iraq began the destruction prior to the launching of the U.S.-led war.
(For more detail on the final round of inspections and evidence of WMD programs
found in the post-war period, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117: Iraq: Weapons
Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.)
Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and
Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that
inspections should be given more time. They noted that Iraq was well contained by
sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones. Those who agreed with this
view maintained that, as long as Iraq allowed access to U.N. weapons inspections
under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national
security. The inspectors reported few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700
inspections of about 400 different sites, as of mid-March 2003. Others experts
believed that, even if Iraq were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could
have been deterred by U.S. overall strategic superiority, presumably including the
U.S. nuclear arsenal.
The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq
had not fundamentally decided to disarm, and was attempting to preserve WMD
capabilities. The Administration asserted on March 17, 2003, that diplomatic options
to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full attention to military action.
That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and his sons, Uday and Qusay,
an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war. They refused the
ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003.
In the war, Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and
British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the Iraqi military, at times, put
up stiff resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi military commanders
or Baathist political figures came forward to try to establish a post-Saddam
government, but senior regime leaders fled Baghdad, and the whereabouts of some
of the top leadership, including Saddam Hussein, are unknown. The outcome of a
post-war debate on the results of the war might depend on such factors as the pace
of reconstruction; the degree of resistance to the U.S.-led occupation; the amount
CRS-20
of WMD ultimately found, if any; and whether a new government is stable and
democratic.
Post-War Governance Issues
Since Saddam Hussein’s regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, there has
been increasing debate about governing post-war Iraq. The same U.S. concerns about
fragmentation of and instability in Iraq that existed in prior years are present in the
current debate over how to establish a post-war regime. Although some Iraqi
civilians have welcomed U.S. and British troops in areas captured, many Iraqis now
want U.S. and British forces to leave Iraq, and the top U.S. military commander in
the Persian Gulf theater, General John Abizaid, says that U.S. forces now face a
“classic guerrilla war.” Other experts fear that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall
under the control of pro-Iranian Shiite Islamist forces who are asserting growing
control over areas inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites. Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s
population but have been under-represented in every Iraqi government since modern
Iraq’s formation in 1920. (For information on U.S. and international funding for
humanitarian assistance and reconstruction, see CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent
Developments in Humanitarian and Reconstruction Assistance.)
Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule
The Administration says that U.S. forces will stay in Iraq until there is a stable,
democratic successor regime that is at peace with its neighbors. However, there has
been some debate between U.S. authorities and key anti-Saddam groups over how
to move Iraq to self-government. Senior U.S. officials, including deputy Defense
Secretary Paul Wolfowitz, had said in early April 2003 that they hoped to have a
successor regime in place within six months of the fall of the regime. However, in
mid-May 2003, U.S. officials, apparently fearing that existing major groups could not
form a stable regime, or that Shiite Islamists would dominate a successor authority,
backed away from any deadlines for establishing an Iraqi self-rule authority.
Shortly after the war, the United States began a process of establishing a
successor regime. The Administration organized an April 15 meeting, in Nasiriyah,
of about 100 Iraqis of varying ideologies, present by U.S. invitation. Many of the
attendees were representatives of Iraqi tribal groupings that had not been politically
active before. However, SCIRI, along with several Shiite clerics that have
appropriated authority throughout much of southern Iraq since the fall of the regime,
boycotted the meeting and called for an Islamic state and the withdrawal of U.S.
forces. Another meeting of about 250 delegates was held in Baghdad on April 26,
ending in agreement to hold a broader meeting, within a month, to name an interim
Iraqi administration.
In parallel with the April 26 meeting, the five most prominent exiled opposition
groups met, with U.S. envoys present: SCIRI, the INC, the INA, the PUK, and the
KDP. On May 9, 2003, the five agreed to expand their grouping to seven, adding to
their ranks the little known Nasir al-Chadirchy, head of a party called the National
Democratic Party of Iraq, as well as the Shiite Islamist Da’wa Party. The “seven-
CRS-21
party grouping” strongly criticized the U.S. decision in mid-May 2003 to delay the
formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority indefinitely and to instead form an advisory
body of 25 to 30 Iraqis. The seven-party grouping subsequently began meeting with
U.S. occupation authorities to try to reverse that decision.
With U.S. casualties in Iraq mounting and a growing sense of resentment among
the Iraqi population, the U.S.-led occupation authority (Coalition Provisional
Authority, CPA) incorporated the views of the seven-party grouping. U.S.
administrator for Iraq Paul Bremer (see below) said on June 23, 2003, that the
planned 25- to 30-member body would have “real authority” from its first days. He
said it would nominate ministry heads, recommend policies, and convene a
“constitutional conference” to draft a new constitution.15
The Governing Council. On July 13, 2003, a Governing Council was
unveiled to the Iraqi public, appointed by the U.S.-led CPA but reflecting the
influence of the seven-party grouping, as well as prominent Iraqis who were never
in exile and were not affiliated with the exiled opposition. The Council has 25
members, of which 3 are women and 13 are Shiite Muslims.
Of the 13 Shiite Muslims on the Council, one seat is held by SCIRI directly
(Abd al-Aziz Al Hakim, younger brother of Mohammad Baqr), one is held by a
guerrilla affiliated with SCIRI (Abdul Karim al-Muahmmadawi), two are Da’wa
Party (Ibrahim al-Jafari and Abdul Zahra Othman) leaders, and considered allies of
SCIRI, and one is a former Da’wa activist (Muwaffaq al-Ruba’i). Also on the
Council is a moderate Shiite cleric, Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum, considered pro-U.S.
and not affiliated with SCIRI or the Da’wa. He headed the Ahl al-Bayt charity center
in London since the 1980s. The remaining Shiite Muslims, such as Chalabi and Iyad
al-Alawi, are mostly considered secular. Appointed to the Council was one Sunni
Muslim Islamist, Muhsin Abdul Hamid, who heads the Iraqi Islamic Party, but he
does not have a clear affiliation or relationship with the Shiite Islamists on the
Council.
The Council includes five Kurds, including the two main Kurdish leaders Jalal
Talabani and Masud Barzani. The Kurds are generally considered pro-U.S. and
might be expected to vote the way the U.S.-led coalition wants.
Although not a cohesive bloc, the Council includes exiles and non-exiles who
generally want a liberal democracy and would be considered pro-U.S. Most
prominent among them is Chalabi, but this grouping includes National Democratic
Party leader Nasir al-Chadirchy and former foreign minister Adnan Pachachi, both
of whom are Sunni Muslims, as well as former foreign ministry official Akila al-
Hashimi, a Shiite woman. Others most likely to affiliate with this bloc include
Sunni businessman Samir Shakir al-Sumaidy; Sunni civil engineer Ghazi al-Yawar,
who is president of Saudi-based Hicap Technology; the Shiite coordinator for the
Human Rights Association of Babel, Ahmad al-Barak; and the two other women
Council members — Songul Chapouk, a member of the Turkomen minority, who
15 Transcript: Bremer Reviews Progress, Plans for Iraq Reconstruction. Washington File,
June 23, 2003.
CRS-22
heads the Iraqi Women’s Association, and Raja al-Khuza’i, a Shiite who heads the
maternity hospital in Diwaniyah.
A member of the Assyrian Christian community is on the Council. Yonadam
Kanna, the secretary-general of the Democratic Assyrian Movement, is on the body.
It is not known what other members of the Council, if any, he might be aligned with,
although it is reasonable to believe that he might have an affinity for fellow residents
of northern Iraq, the Kurds. Also unclear is whether or not Hamid al-Musa, the
Shiite head of the Iraqi Communist Party, is allied with anyone else on the Council.
In late July 2003, the Council decided that nine Council members will rotate as
chairpersons, each for one month. Ibrahim al-Jafari of the Da’wa Party is the first
chairman. The other eight who will rotate that post are Chalabi, Alawi of the INA,
Hakim of SCIRI, Pachachi, Barzani of the KDP, Talabani of the PUK, Bahr al-Ulum,
and Abdul Hamid, the Sunni Islamist figure.
Among its first actions, the Council has authorized the establishment of an Iraqi
war crimes tribunal for Saddam and associates accused of major human rights abuses.
It empowered a three-member delegation to seek formal U.N. recognition; Chalabi,
Pachachi, and Akila Hashimi, traveled to the United Nations in July 2003 and
received a supportive statement from Secretary General Kofi Annan. No decision
on seating the Governing Council at the United Nations was announced. The
Governing Council has begun some work on a new constitution. On July 17, 2003,
CPA head Bremer said that a constitution could conceivably be drafted in time to
have national elections by summer of 2004, and he has linked the potential length of
the U.S. occupation to the completion of successful national elections and the
restoration of security in Iraq. As noted above, in early August 2003, the Governing
Council tapped INC activist Kanaan Makiya to head a 25-person committee that will
determine the process for drafting the constitution. Press reports in late August 2003
said that U.S. authorities are pressing the Governing Council to take a more
prominent and public role in post-war political decision-making, although some
Council members say that the Council cannot do so unless and until the U.S.-led
coalition begins transferring greater authority to it.16 Some Council members visited
the Gulf monarchy states in August 2003 to expand the Council’s regional profile.
At the end of August 2003, the Council was reported to be negotiating among its
members on the formation of a cabinet composed of about 25 ministries.17
As part of the planning process that took place before the war, the U.S. State
Department supported a group of Iraqi exiles to address issues that would confront
a successor government.18 However, the State Department working group (the
“Future of Iraq Project”) does not appear to have significant influence on any post-
war regime decision-making in Iraq. Some experts believe the Defense Department
16 Filkins, Dexter and Neil MacFarquhar. U.S. Official Tells Iraqis To Assert More
Authority. New York Times, August 21, 2003.
17 Williams, Daniel. Iraqis Set to Expand Cabinet. Washington Post, August 27, 2003.
18 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,”
Washington File, December 11, 2002.
CRS-23
was promoting a competing or separate group of exiles.19 The State Department
project, which cost $5 million, consisted of working groups that discussed (1)
transitional justice; (2) public finance; (3) public and media outreach; (4) democratic
principles; (5) water, agriculture, and the environment; (6) health and human
services; (7) economy and infrastructure; (8) education; (9) refugees, internally-
displaced persons, and migration policy; (10) foreign and national security policy;
(11) defense institutions and policy; (12) free media; (13) civil society capacity-
building; (14) anti-corruption measures; and (15) oil and energy.
Post-War U.S. Operations and the
Coalition Provisional Authority
Experts note that projections about U.S. operations in post-war Iraq, including
the duration of the U.S. military occupation and the numbers of occupation troops,
are largely dependent on the amount of continuing Iraqi resistance, the number of
U.S. casualties taken, and the rate at which such U.S. objectives as the establishment
of a stable and democratic successor regime are accomplished. At present, about
150,000 U.S. and British troops remain in Iraq; of those, about 140,000 are U.S.
personnel and 11,000 are British. There are another approximately 10,000 foreign
forces, deploying in accordance with international commitments to post-war
peacekeeping (see below). Earlier press reports said the Administration wanted to
draw the U.S. force level down to about 35,000 by the end of 2003, but continued
unrest and insecurity in Iraq appears to have made that goal untenable.
The Resistance. There are indications that resistance to the U.S. governance
of Iraq is growing, judging by the frequency of attacks on U.S. forces over the past
few weeks and the type and geographical distribution of attacks. U.S. military
operations are focused on hunting down guerrilla resistance leaders and their
suspected Baathist financiers, as well as finding former leader Saddam Hussein.
U.S. forces have conducted five sweep operations since mid-June 2003 to search for
Baath and other oppositionists; these operations were given the names Peninsula
Strike (June 9-15); Desert Scorpion (June 15-August 1); Operation Sidewinder (June
29-July 7); Operation Soda Mountain (July 12-17); and Operation Ivy Serpent (begun
July 12, ongoing). The new Centcom commander John Abizaid said on July 17,
2003, that the United States faces a “classic guerrilla war” led by “mid-level Baath
Party activists organized regionally.” Such attacks have killed about 65 U.S. military
personnel since President Bush declared an end to “major combat operations” in Iraq
on May 1, 2003.
An apparent terrorist component to the resistance emerged in August 2003 with
car/truck bombings in Baghdad of the embassy of Jordan (August 7) and U.N.
headquarters at the Canal Hotel (August 19). The latter bombing killed 23 persons
including the U.N. representative in Iraq, Sergio Vieira de Mello, and prompted some
drawdown in U.N. and non-governmental organization personnel in Iraq. The
August 29 car bombing in Najaf that killed Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim may have
killed as many as 100 persons, according to news reports.
19 Fineman, Mark, Robin Wright, and Doyle McManus. Preparing for War, Stumbling to
Peace. Los Angeles Times, July 18, 2003.
CRS-24
The Bush Administration says resistance comes not only from remnants of the
Baath Party but also from Arab volunteers, possibly linked to or supportive of Al
Qaeda, who have come to Iraq from other countries to fight the U.S. occupation.
Attacks have been more frequent in the Sunni areas of central Iraq, where support for
Saddam Hussein’s regime was traditionally stronger than elsewhere, but there have
been at least two fatal attacks on British and Danish forces in August 2003 in the
Shiite areas in and around Basra. Some elements of the resistance appear to want to
restore the old regime, while others appear to be motivated by opposition to foreign
rule or the goal of forming an Islamic state. Other resistance fighters appear to be
motivated by the difficulty the U.S. and British authorities have had in restoring
civilian services.
U.S. military officials put the resistance numbers at about 5,000, although they
do not explain precisely how they arrive at that figure. The resistance appears to be
operating in relatively small cells, some of which have broadcast photos of armed
fighters. Resistance factions have begun identifying themselves as distinct groups,
scribbling graffiti warnings and faxing statements to the Arab satellite television
network Al Jazeera, UAE-based Al Arabiya TV, and other outlets. They are using
such names as:
! Al Awda (the Return)
! the Snakes
! the Movement of the Victorious Sect
! Iraq’s Revolutionaries - Al Anbar’s Armed Brigades;
! The Popular Resistance for the Liberation of Iraq
! the Salafist Jihad Group (Salafi is a Sunni extremist Islamic
movement)
! Armed Islamic Movement for Al Qaeda - Falluja Branch. Actual
linkages to Al Qaeda, if any, are not known.
! Jaysh (Army) of Mohammad
! Black Banners Group
! Nasirite Organization
! Armed Vanguard of the Second Mohammad Army. Claimed
responsibility for U.N. headquarters bombing and threatened attacks
on any Arab countries that participate in Iraq peacekeeping. The
credibility of the claim is not known.
As noted above, some Shiite factions are becoming more active against the
occupation. The Sadr faction has reportedly instigated riots and demonstrations that
took place against U.S. and British forces in Baghdad and Basra. One report says
that Sunni Islamists, led by Shaikh Ahmad Qubaysi, who returned in April 2003 from
exile in the UAE, is assisting the Sadr faction.20 This represents the possible
emergence of a Sunni-Shiite Islamist anti-occupation coalition.
The continuing resistance has complicated the U.S. mission. In addition to
targeting U.S. forces, resistance fighters have assassinated Iraqis who are
20 Shadid, Anthony. Iraqi Clerics Unite in Rare Alliance. Washington Post, August 17,
2003.
CRS-25
cooperating with the United States. In August 2003, in a possible evolution of its
tactics, resistance fighters stepped up their attacks on Iraqi oil export pipelines and
water and other infrastructure facilities, as well as the Jordan Embassy and U.N.
headquarters. By attacking these targets, the resistance appears to be hoping to slow
reconstruction and thereby turn the Iraqi populace against the occupation. U.S.
officials say that the continued resistance has raised the costs of the ongoing U.S.
operations in Iraq; the United States is spending about $3.9 billion per month for
military operations there, about double what was anticipated for the occupation
period. On the other hand, the Administration maintains that reconstruction is
proceeding apace and has logged a number of major accomplishments, as discussed
in a White House fact sheet, and that life is, for the most part, returning to normal
throughout Iraq. (“White House Notes Successful Results of Iraq Liberation.”
August 8, 2003. At [http://www.usinfo.state.gov/xarchives].)
The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA). The Bush Administration
initially tasked Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) to direct civilian reconstruction, working
through a staff of U.S. diplomats and other U.S. government personnel who are
serving as advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various ministries. He headed the
Office of Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance (ORHA), within the
Department of Defense, created by a January 20, 2003 executive order. After
spending the combat phase of the war in neighboring Kuwait, Garner and some of his
staff of about 200 deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003, to begin work.
Press reports said that senior U.S. officials were dissatisfied with the slow pace
of reconstruction under Garner, and on May 6, 2003, the Administration appointed
former ambassador L. Paul Bremer to lead the overall reconstruction effort, with a
focus on political reconstruction. He arrived on May 12, 2003, to head the CPA,
which subsumed ORHA. The appointment represented an apparent adjustment from
the original structure of the U.S. reconstruction effort, although the Administration
stated that it was always envisioned that a civilian would eventually take over the
U.S. effort and denied it was an indication of high-level dissatisfaction with the
effort. U.S. officials now refer to the CPA as an occupying authority legitimized by
U.N. Security Council Resolution 1483 of May 22, 2003. Among other provisions,
the resolution lifted U.N. sanctions on Iraq.
Building Security Institutions. While attempting to restore security to Iraq,
the CPA is beginning to build new Iraqi institutions that can eventually take over the
security function from the United States. The United States is planning to train a
40,000 person Iraqi army, about 10% the size of the pre-war Iraqi force. About
12,000 are expected to be in the force by mid-2004. Former Defense Department
official Walter Slocombe is in charge of forming the new Iraqi army. The CPA is
also trying to turn basic policing functions over to Iraqis. Overall, about 32,000 Iraqi
policemen have returned to their jobs, about half the total goal. The CPA official
responsible for the new police force, former New York City police commissioner
Bernard Kerik, says it will take about 18 months (end of 2004) to reach the goal of
65,000 policemen nationwide.21 The CPA is also recruiting a 7,000-man, all-Iraqi
21 Schmitt, Eric. Wolfowitz on Visit to Iraq to Assess Rebuilding Effort. New York Times,
(continued...)
CRS-26
civil defense force to guard installations such as oil pumping stations, electricity
substations, and like facilities. Press reports in late August said many Iraqi security
personnel might be flown to Hungary for training there.
Searching for Regime Violations. Organs of the CPA and the U.S.
government are attempting to uncover abuses and violations of the regime of Saddam
Hussein, including evidence of WMD. A 1,500 person “Iraq Survey Group,” headed
by a U.S. military commander (Maj. Gen. Keith Dayton) but composed of many
civilian technical experts, including former U.N. weapons inspector David Kay, is
attempting to uncover alleged WMD. The Survey Group is also searching for mass
graves of victims of the former regime. Kay and Dayton briefed Members of
Congress on July 30, 2003, saying they were making substantial progress in
uncovering the fate of suspected WMD programs. Thus far, the Survey Group has
found at least 60 mass graves, some with hundreds of corpses. Most appear to
contain bodies of Kurdish and Shiite opponents of the former regime, but some
contain some of the bodies of about 600 Kuwaitis missing from the first Gulf war.
(WMD issues and the fate of the missing Kuwaitis are discussed in CRS Issue Brief
IB92117.)
The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction.22 As the driver of Iraq’s
economy, the rebuilding of the oil industry is receiving substantial U.S. attention.
Bremer said in a press interview on July 31, 2003, that it could take $50 - $100
billion to reconstruct Iraq, and a $1.6 billion plan to rehabilitate Iraq’s oil industry
was agreed in late July. It has been widely assumed that Iraq’s vast oil reserves,
believed second only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be used to fund much of the
costs of reconstruction. Then presidential spokesman Ari Fleischer said on February
18, 2003, referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a variety of means ... to
shoulder much of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.” Many observers had been
concerned that an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could destroy its own oil fields,
but coalition forces quickly secured Iraq’s southern oil fields after combat began.
Only about 9 oil wells were set on fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that region,
and all were put out quickly. The northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul were not
set afire.
In early May 2003, the U.S.-led coalition set up an advisory board, headed by
former Shell executive Phillip Carroll, to oversee the rebuilding of Iraq’s oil sector.
An Iraqi oil industry professional, Thamer Ghadhban, was named to serve as head
of the interim management team that will run Iraq’s oil ministry and report to the
advisory board. The first exports began in late June 2003, and Ghadhban said that
Iraq would be up to about 1 million barrels per day of exports by mid-July. In late
July, Iraq contracted to sell oil, about 750,000 barrels per day, slightly below the
target rate. Its pre-war export rate was about 2.2 million barrels per day, a level that
U.S. officials and Iraqi oil appointees had hoped to reach by late 2003. However,
sabotage by the resistance has reduced Iraq’s oil exports to about 600,000 barrels per
21 (...continued)
July 18, 2003.
22 For information on the prospects for Iraq’s post-war economy, see CRS Report RL31944.
Iraq’s Economy: Past, Present, Future.
CRS-27
day as of August 18, 2003, below the 1 million barrel per day target figure, a
development that is apparently jeopardizing budgetary projections. The CPA-
produced budget for Iraq, which is based on the targeted levels of oil exports,
assumed that oil revenues would yield about $3.6 billion through the end of 2003,
and provide about half of the approximately $6.6 billion budget for Iraq for the
period. The deficit is to be covered from funds in the Development Fund for Iraq,
set up by the post-war Resolution 1483 (see below).
Supplemental Funding Needs. However, in late August Bremer visited
Washington to talk to other Administration officials about the need to ask Congress
for immediate supplemental funds for reconstruction needs, which Bremer estimates
will run into the “several tens of billions” over the next year. One press report said
that the Administration might ask for about $2 billion - $3 billion in additional funds
for reconstruction for the short term.23
A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which
foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s
vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will
seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other
countries.
Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have
been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program.
The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put
in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was
suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various
aspects of the program departed Iraq. As of the start of the war, about $9 billion
worth of humanitarian goods were in the process of being delivered or in production.
(See CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, Sanctions, and Illicit
Trade.)
On March 28, 2003, the U.N. Security Council unanimously adopted Resolution
1472 that restarted the program’s operations and empowered the United Nations, for
a 45-day period (until May 12), to take direct control of all aspects of the program.
Under the new resolution, the United Nations is setting priorities for and directing the
delivery of already contracted supplies. The enhanced U.N. authority was extended
on April 25, 2003, to last at least until the six-month phase of the program expired
on June 3, 2003.
On April 17, 2003, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions
against Iraq, signaling that the Administration wanted to focus on restoring normal
international commerce with Iraq rather than extending the oil-for-food program.
Resolution 1483 lifted sanctions and provided for the phasing out of the oil for food
program within six months after adoption of that resolution on May 22. The
resolution also provided for the United Nations to transfer to the new Development
Fund for Iraq $1 billion in funds held by the oil-for-food program escrow fund. That
Development Fund contained about $7 billion in June 2003, consisting of captured
23 Seized Iraqi Funds All But Gone, U.S. Says. Los Angeles Times, August 27, 2003.
CRS-28
Iraqi assets, Iraqi assets abroad, the monies transferred from the oil-for-food account,
and U.S. funds available for reconstruction. (For more information, see CRS Report
RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, International Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.)
International Role in Peacekeeping and Governance24
The relatively slow pace of establishing Iraqi security institutions, coupled with
ongoing security difficulties and continued U.S. casualties, has led to calls from
Members of Congress and others for the Administration to expand its efforts to
enlist other countries to help with the stabilization of Iraq. Negotiations with other
countries is proceeding for a possible U.N.-authorized multinational peacekeeping
force in Iraq that would spread more of the peace-keeping and stabilization burden
now borne mostly by U.S. forces. According to the Administration, more than 30
countries have made commitments or are discussing offers of forces for a
multilateral stabilization force. The countries listed below have begun implementing
pledges of troops and or police or support personnel. The commitments of several
nations, including Germany, France, India, and Turkey appear to be contingent on
whether the U.N. Security Council authorizes such a force, and several nations
appear to require U.S. or other funding in order to participate.
Secretary of State Powell said on July 16, 2003, that the United States is
discussing with other countries the possibility of seeking formal U.N. backing for a
multilateral peacekeeping force. Discussions within the Administration and between
the United States and some of its allies on a U.N. resolution that might specifically
authorize a multinational force accelerated following the August 19 U.N.
headquarters bombing. U.N. Secretary General said on August 21 that there is no
discussion of establishing a U.N.-led peacekeeping force. Deputy Secretary of State
Richard Armitage told journalists in late August that one idea under discussion could
be for a multinational force, under U.N. leadership, which would be commanded by
a U.S. military official.25
The United Kingdom and Poland have offered to lead multinational divisions
in that mission in southern Iraq and central Iraq, respectively. The United States and
Poland reached agreement in late July 2003 for the United States to fund the
deployment of the Polish force, support valued at about $250 million. The UK-led
force is to number about 14,000, of which all but 2,000 are British forces. The
Polish-led force is to number about 9,200, of which 2,300 will be Polish. The
pledged forces listed below have begun deploying to Iraq as of early August 2003,
and there are now about 21,000 non-U.S. troops on the ground (including 11,000
British), as of August 18, 2003. Confirmed pledges include those in Table 1.
24 For additional information on international contributions to Iraq peacekeeping and
reconstruction, see CRS Report RL31843. Iraq: Foreign Contributions to Operation Iraqi
Freedom, Peacekeeping Operations, and Post-War Reconstruction.
25 Jehl, Douglas. U.S. Now Signals It Might Consider U.N. Force in Iraq. New York Times,
August 28, 2003.
Table 1. CRS-29
Multinational Division Force Pledges
Azerbaijan 150
Bulgaria 500
Czech Republic 400
Denmark 380
Dominican Republic 300
El Salvador 300
Estonia 55
Georgia 100
Honduras 300
Hungary 300
Italy 3,000 (mostly military police)
Japan 1,000 (logistics and combat support).
(Implementation placed on hold after
U.N. HQ bombing )
Latvia 150
Lithuania 85
Macedonia 28
Mongolia 200
Netherlands 1,100
Nicaragua 300
Norway 150
Philippines 500
Poland 2,300
Portugal 120
Romania 150
Slovakia 85
South Korea 700 (mostly medical)
Spain 1,300
Thailand 500
Ukraine 1650
Total Pledged 17,100
CRS-30
Another idea said to be under discussion is for NATO to command a
multilateral force. The United States has had some discussions with NATO on
whether the organization would take on Iraq as a fifth peacekeeping mission.
However, on July 17, NATO secretary general George Robertson said the body had
no plans for a greater role beyond providing logistical help to the Polish-led force in
Iraq. On July 10, 2003, the Senate adopted an amendment, by a vote of 97-0, to a
State Department authorization bill (S. 925) calling on the Administration to formally
ask NATO to lead a peacekeeping force for Iraq. A related bill (H.R. 2112) was
introduced in the House on May 15, 2003.
Other countries have agreed to provide funding for reconstruction. According
to the June 30, 2003, report to Congress by the Administration, the following
countries have made financial pledges for Iraq reconstruction: United Kingdom
($177.1 million); Japan ($101.8 million); Australia ($60.5 million); UAE ($47.6
million); Canada ($41.2 million); Saudi Arabia ($36.6 million); Spain ($32.2
million); Kuwait ($27.5 million); the European Commission ($26.3 million); and
Italy ($22.4 million).
U.N. Role in Post-War Iraq. Just after the fall of Saddam Hussein’s regime,
the United States and its European allies and other countries reached a measure of
agreement on a U.N. role in post-war Iraq. Resolution 1483, which was adopted
unanimously, provided for a U.N. special representative to coordinate the activities
of U.N. personnel in Iraq and to help establish a successor government. The
Secretary General subsequently (May 27, 2003) appointed de Mello (see above) for
that post. The resolution also gave the United Nations a monitoring role over the
Development Fund for Iraq, a fund that will handle Iraq’s oil revenues until there is
a successor government. The resolution did not authorize a return to Iraq of U.N.
weapons inspectors, although the resolution provides for deliberations on that issue.
Some International Atomic Energy Agency inspectors returned to Iraq in June 2003
on a limited nuclear mission in Baghdad. As noted above, some countries are
conditioning any contribution of peacekeeping troops to Iraq on a formal U.N.
authorization, a step the Administration now appears to be weighing, as well as
elevation in U.N. authority over post-war governance and nation building in Iraq. As
noted above, the bombing of U.N. headquarters on August 19 has intensified
discussions between the United States and its allies on whether to expand U.N.
authority in Iraq. Some in the Administration oppose doing so, partly on the grounds
that the United Nations might facilitate the rise to power in Iraq of a government that
is not to U.S. liking. Others believe the United States must share authority with the
United Nations if the United States is to be able to wind down the occupation of Iraq.
The World Bank, which visited Iraq in late July 2003, said it would resume lending
to Iraq after it conducts national elections.
On August 14, 2003, the U.N. Security Council adopted a compromise
resolution. The Resolution, 1500, “welcomed,” but did not “endorse,” the formation
of the Governing Council, an apparent nod to U.S. requests. The resolution also
enhanced U.N. authority in Iraq somewhat by establishing a “U.N. Assistance
Mission for Iraq.” The resolution did not formally authorize an international
peacekeeping force for Iraq (Resolution 1483 already “calls on” governments to
contribute forces for stabilization) and did not measurably dilute U.S. authority over
CRS-31
post-war governance in Iraq. The resolution did not appear to meet the requirements
of France and others for them to donate peacekeeping forces.
Fate of the Deposed Regime
An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is whether Saddam
Hussein and his associates should be prosecuted for war crimes and crimes against
humanity, if and when they are caught. The Administration said in early April 2003
that Saddam and his inner circle should be tried by Iraqis if they are captured,
although others might be tried by a U.S.-led process for any crimes committed in the
course of the 2003 war. In the year prior to the war, the Administration was
gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those it had
sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay (killed after discovery
by and a firefight with U.S. forces in Mosul on July 22, 2003); Ali Hassan al-Majid,
for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (captured August 21, 2003);
Muhammad Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered in mid-April 2003); Taha Yasin
Ramadan; first Vice President and number three in the regime (captured August 19,
2003); Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council and
formally number two in the regime; Barzan al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother
(captured in mid-April 2003); Watban al-Tikriti (captured in April 2003) and Sabawi
al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam and former leaders of regime
intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputy Prime Minister and foremost regime
spokesman (surrendered in May 2003); and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait
during Iraq’s occupation of that country (captured May 2003).
Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials
sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured
or surrendered. As of mid-August 2003, about 45 of the Iraqis on the list of 55 are
now in custody or were killed. Others not on the list of 55 have been apprehended
as well: Amir al-Saadi, chief science adviser to Saddam; Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti,
a son-in-law of Saddam; Vice President Taha Muhi ad-Din Ma’ruf; and suspected
WMD manager Hoda Mahdi Salih al-Ammash.
The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and
the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29,
1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related
atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for
FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress
that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal
for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137
(passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March
13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October
31, 1998).
A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993,
after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the United States has supported
INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the
arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the
Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer,
said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established,
CRS-32
focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical
weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds)
and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which
an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against
Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes
against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations.
In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a
U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war
crimes is formed.
Congressional Reactions
Congress, like the Administration, had divergent views on the mechanisms for
promoting regime change, although there was widespread agreement in Congress that
regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S. policy. There was substantial
disagreement over whether a major military offensive was the most desirable option
for achieving that objective. On December 20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75,
by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a
“mounting threat” to the United States. The resolution did not call for new U.S. steps
to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few Members called for the overthrow of
Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in support of the resolution.
In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq,
some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint
appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on
Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations
Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the
opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an
option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In
early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members — Senators John
McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and
Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr.
— wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for
operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter,
Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S.
assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish
areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and
other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to
accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.”
As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002,
Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result.
Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force
against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce
U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on
October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote
of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243).
CRS-33
The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. Prior to the war, it held
several hearings on the progress of post-war reconstruction. During the war and in
its aftermath, several Members applauded the performance of the U.S. military and
the overthrow of the regime. Some Members, however, have criticized the
Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war period in light of major
looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the regime. Criticism of post-war
planning has escalated as attacks on U.S. occupation forces have mounted, although
the Administration and others say U.S. casualties are relatively light and that the
resistance is not jeopardizing overall U.S. objectives for Iraq. Several Committees
are conducting inquiries into why substantial amounts of WMD have not been found
in Iraq to date. Some Members of both parties have also expressed concern about the
costs of the U.S. occupation, and several Members have called on the Administration
to take greater steps to persuade other countries to share the burden of peacekeeping
in and reconstruction of Iraq. Others have called for an increase in the number of
U.S. troops in Iraq or re-evaluation of the mix of U.S. forces to ensure that the skill
set of the U.S. force matches the needs of reconstruction.
CRS-34
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition
Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.)
to the Opposition
(Figures in millions of dollars)
INC War
Crimes Broadcasting
Unspecified
Opposition
Activities
Total
FY 1998
(P.L. 105-174)
2.0 5.0
(RFE/RL)
3.0 10.0
FY 1999
(P.L. 105-277)
3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0
FY 2000
(P.L. 106-113)
2.0 8.0 10.0
FY 2001
(P.L. 106-429)
12.0
(aid
distribution
inside Iraq)
2.0 6.0
(INC radio)
5.0 25.0
FY 2002
(P.L. 107-115)
25.0 25.0
Total,
FY1998-FY2002
15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0
FY2003
(no earmark)
3.1
(announced
April 2003)
6.9
(remaining
to be
allocated)
10.0
FY2004
(request)
0 0
Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq
Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97
million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent,
as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided,
the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and
FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be
used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N.
programs.
Another version (English): 18 August 2003 — RL31339_2003-08-18.pdf
Order Code RL31339
CRS Report for Congress
Received through the CRS Web
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
Updated August 18, 2003
Kenneth Katzman
Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs
Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division
Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
Summary
In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized
Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to abandon
its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs as required by U.N. Security
Council resolutions and the potential for it to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. In
September 2002, the President told the U.N. General Assembly that unless Iraq fully
disarmed in cooperation with United Nations weapons inspectors, the United States
would lead a coalition to achieve that disarmament militarily, making clear that this
would include the ouster of Iraq’s President Saddam Hussein’s regime. After a
November 2002 - March 2003 round of U.N. inspections in which Iraq’s cooperation
was mixed, on March 19, 2003, the United States launched “Operation Iraqi
Freedom,” to disarm Iraq and change its regime. The regime fell on April 9, 2003.
In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change
through U.S.-led military action would yield benefits beyond disarmament and
reduction of support for terrorism; benefits such as liberation of the Iraqi people
from an oppressive regime and promotion of stability and democracy throughout the
Middle East. The goal of regime change in Iraq had been declared U.S. policy since
November 1998, and U.S. efforts to oust Saddam had been pursued, with varying
degrees of intensity, since the end of the Gulf war in 1991. These efforts primarily
involved U.S. financial backing for opposition groups inside and outside Iraq, several
of which are now contending for power in post-Saddam Iraq. Past efforts to change
the regime floundered because of limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the
Iraqi opposition, and the efficiency and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping
intelligence and security forces. Previous U.S. Administrations ruled out major U.S.
military action to change Iraq’s regime, believing such action would be risky and not
necessarily justified by the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament.
The leadership and precise shape of the permanent government that will replace
Saddam Hussein’s Baath Party are yet to be determined. Some Administration
officials reportedly had hoped that major military and governmental defections from
the Hussein regime would serve as the core of a successor government. However,
no senior Hussein regime figures defected, and formerly exiled opposition groups
form the core of a U.S.-appointed 25-seat “governing council” that was unveiled on
July 13, 2003. It is hoped by the Administration that the formation of the council
will signal that Iraq is moving toward self rule and calm some of the resistance
against U.S. occupation forces in Iraq. Continuing resistance and the slow pace of
reconstruction have apparently prompted debate within the Administration over how
to enlist increased foreign participation in post-war peacekeeping and reconstruction.
This report will be updated as warranted by major developments.
Contents
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Sadr Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
The First ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Monarchists/Sharif Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Continued Doubts About the Capabilitiesof the Anti-Saddam Groups . . . 11
Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Post-War Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
The Governing Council . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Post-War U.S. Operations and the Coalition Provisional
Authority (CPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
The Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Building Security Institutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Searching for Regime Violations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Reviving the Oil Industry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
International Role in Peacekeeping and Governance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
U.N. Role in Post-War Iraq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Fate of the Deposed Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Congressional Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
The United States has sought to change remove Iraq’s Saddam Hussein from
power since the 1991 Persian Gulf war, although achieving this goal was not declared
policy until 1998. In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of
mass destruction (WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the
United States would seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime.
A regime change policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338,
October 31, 1998). Bush Administration officials emphasized regime change as the
cornerstone of U.S. policy toward Iraq since shortly after the September 11, 2001,
attacks. Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003, and had
effectively removed Saddam Hussein from power by April 9, 2003.
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam
Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an
operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George
H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end
of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and
Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope
of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions. The revolt in southern Iraq reached
the suburbs of Baghdad, but the well-trained and loyal Republican Guard forces had
survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from battle prior to the U.S.
ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid-March 1991. Many Shiites
blamed the United States for not supporting their uprising and standing aside as the
regime retaliated against those who participated in the rebellion. Kurds, benefitting
from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991, drove Iraqi troops out of
much of northern Iraq and subsequently remained largely free of Baghdad’s rule.
According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite
uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding
stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup
against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that
purpose. The Administration apparently believed — and this view apparently was
shared by many experts and U.S. officials — that a coup by elements within the
current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq.
Manyobservers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and
Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and
tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria.
CRS-2
Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition
Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that
the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment
within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision
was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the
diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the
Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and
diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This
opposition coalition was seen as providing a vehicle for the United States to build a
viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert
support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.1
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi
The growing opposition coalition took shape in an organization called the Iraqi
National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two main
Kurdish militias, the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic Union of
Kurdistan (PUK), participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens of
opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came into the
coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq.
The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi
ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military
officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC
with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups
publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests,
including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the
preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. SecurityCouncil
resolutions on Iraq.2 However, many observers doubted its commitment to
democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and
because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies. The
INC’s first Executive Committee consisted of KDP leader Masud Barzani, ex-Baath
Party and military official Hassan Naqib, and moderate Shiite cleric Mohammad
Bahr al-Ulum. (Barzani and Bahr al-Ulum are now on the 25-member post-war
Governing Council, inaugurated July 13, 2003, and both are part of its nine member
rotating presidency.)
Ahmad Chalabi. When the INC was formed, its Executive Committee
selected Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 58 years old, a secular Shiite Muslim from
a prominent banking family, to run the INC on a daily basis. Chalabi was educated
in the United States (M.I.T) as a mathematician. He fled Iraq to Jordan in 1958,
when the Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military coup. This coup
1 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2,
1992.
2 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by
INC representatives, February 1993.
CRS-3
occurred 10 years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July 1968). In 1978, he
founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian authorities on
charges of financial malfeasance (embezzlement) and he left Jordan, possibly with
some help from members of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989. In 1992, he was
convicted in absentia of embezzling $70 million from the bank and sentenced to 22
years in prison. The Jordanian government subsequently repaid depositors a total of
$400 million. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government was pressured by
Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to the Jordanian
government. In April 2003, senior Jordanian officials, including King Abdullah,
called Chalabi “divisive” and stopped just short of saying he would be unacceptable
to Jordan as leader of Iraq. Chalabi’s critics acknowledge that, despite allegations
about his methods, he has been single-minded in his determination to overthrow
Saddam Hussein, and he is said to be the favorite of those Administration officials,
particularly in the Department of Defense, that were the most supportive of changing
Iraq’s regime by force.
Since Chalabi returned to Iraq, there have been no large public demonstrations
supportive of him or the INC, indicating that he does not have a large following
inside Iraq. However, anecdotal press reporting suggest that he has attracted some
support from those Iraqis that most welcomed the U.S. military offensive against Iraq
and subsequent occupation. On April 6, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters (“Free
Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by the U.S. military from their base in the north to the
Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs in southern Iraq, later
deploying to Baghdad and other parts of Iraq. After establishing his headquarters in
Baghdad, Chalabi tried to build support by searching for fugitive members of the
former regime and arranging for U.S. military forces in Iraq to provide security or
other benefits to his potential supporters. However, the Free Iraqi Forces
accompanying Chalabi were disbanded following the U.S. decision in mid-May2003
to disarm independent militias.
Chalabi is part of a grouping of seven major party leaders that began meeting
shortly prior to the 2003 war. The seven-party leadership grouping was hoping to
become the core of a successor regime, and the seven parties are represented on the
Governing Council. Chalabi is a member of the Governing Council and one of the
nine that will rotate its presidency.
A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book,
Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq, detailing alleged Iraqi regime human
rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracy for Iraq, including full
rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he teaches Middle
Eastern politics at Brandeis University. In August 2003, Makiya was tapped by the
Governing Council to head a 25-person committee that will decide how to draft a
new constitution. Another INC activist, Mohammed al-Zubaidi, declared himself in
charge of Baghdad in mid-April, but U.S. officials did not recognize him as mayor
and detained him in April 2003.
The Kurds/KDP and PUK. The Kurds, among the most pro-U.S. of all the
groups in Iraq, do not have ambitions to play a major role in governing Arab Iraq, but
Iraq’s neighbors have always been fearful that the Kurds might still seek outright
independence. In committing to the concept of federalism, the INC platform
CRS-4
assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq. Turkey, which
has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly
fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into
a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy
since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War
I. (Iraq became an independent Kingdom in 1932, although it remained under British
influence until the 1958 fall of the British-installed monarchy.) In 1961, the KDP,
then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP leader Masud Barzani’s
father, began an insurgency that has continued until today, although interrupted by
periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud Barzani’s brother, Idris,
commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the Iran-Iraq war but was killed in
that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from the KDP in 1965; the
PUK’s members are generally more well-educated, urbane, and left-leaning than
those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000-60,000 fighters,
some of which are trained in conventional military tactics. Both Barzani and
Talabani were part of the seven-party grouping that has now been incorporated into
the Governing Council, and both are part of the Council’s rotating presidency.
Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties
enjoyed good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement
of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaykh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in
Halabja, Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical
attack on that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998.
A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam
(Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam).
This faction, led by Mullah Krekar (who was detained in Europe in August 2002 and
now lives in Norway), reportedly associated itself with Al Qaeda and hosted in its
northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters who had fled the U.S.-led war in
Afghanistan. Mullah Krekar reportedly studied under Shaykh Abdullah al-Azzam,
an Islamic theologian of Palestinian origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama
bin Laden. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, during which its base was captured,
about 600 fighters in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, located near the town of Khurmal.3
Ansar fighters clashed with the PUK around Halabja in December 2002, and Ansar
gunmen were allegedly responsible for an assassination attempt against PUK prime
minister Barham Salih in April 2002.
The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials
to be Abu Musab Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in
Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the
December 1999 millennium celebration, the assassination in Jordan of U.S. diplomat
Lawrence Foley (2002), and to reported attempts in 2002 to spread the biological
agent ricin in London and possibly other places in Europe. In a presentation to the
U.N. Security Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied Zarqawi
and Ansar to Saddam Hussein’s regime, which might have viewed Ansar al-Islam as
a means of pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents. Although Zarqawi reportedly
3 Chivers, C.J. New York Times, December 6, 2002.
Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.”
CRS-5
received medical treatment in Baghdad in May 2002 after fleeing Afghanistan, many
experts believed Baghdad-Ansar links were tenuous or even non-existent; Baghdad
did not control northern Iraq even before Operation Iraqi Freedom.4 Zarqawi’s
current whereabouts are unknown, although some unconfirmed press reports indicate
he might have fled to Iran after the fall of the Ansar camp to U.S.-led forces. Some
press accounts in July 2003 say Iran might have him in custody. U.S. officials said
in August that some Ansar fighters might have remained in or re-entered Iraq and are
participating in the resistance to the U.S. occupation.
Shiite Islamist Organizations
Some outside experts have had concerns about the potential strength and
ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups in post-
Saddam Iraq. The United States sought to work with some Shiite Islamist opposition
factions during the 1990s but had few if any contacts with others. Shiite Islamist
factions hold at least five seats on the Governing Council unveiled July 13, 2003.
SCIRI/Badr Corps. The most well known among these is called the Supreme
Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member of the INC
in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC banner.
SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition groups
in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad Baqr al-
Hakim, was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head an Islamic Republic of
Iraq, a vision that, if realized, might conflict with U.S. plans to forge a democratic
Iraq. Baqr Al Hakim and his family fled Iraq to Iran in 1980, during a major
crackdown on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam feared that Iraqi
Shiite Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution in Iran in 1979,
posed a major threat to his regime. Prior to the formation of SCIRI, Hakim and his
family were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party (see below). Mohammed Baqr
is the son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a prominent Shiite leader
in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini when Khomeini was in exile
in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. He returned to Iraq on May 10, welcomed by
crowds in Basra and Najaf, where he is now based.
In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about
10,000-15,000 fighters/activists organized into a “Badr Corps” (named after a major
battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from Iran
into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. The Badr Corps is headed by
Mohammed Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim, who returned to Iraq on
April 20, 2003, to pave the way for Mohammed Baqr’s return. (Another Hakim
brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan in May 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s
security services.) Iran’s Revolutionary Guard, which is politically aligned with
Iran’s hard line civilian officials, has been the key patron of the Badr Corps,
providing it with weapons, funds, and other assistance. The Badr Corps fought
alongside the Guard against Iraqi forces during the Iran-Iraq war. However, many
Iraqi Shiites view SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr Corps operations in
4 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire,
March 18, 2002.
CRS-6
southern Iraq prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark broad popular unrest
against the Iraqi regime. Some Badr fighters deployed inside northern Iraq on the eve
of Operation Iraqi Freedom, and the rest have since entered Iraq.
A variety of press reports say that individual militias now providing security in
many towns in southern Iraq are linked to the Badr Corps. One such militia is
derived from the fighters who challenged Saddam Hussein’s forces in the marsh
areas of southern Iraq, around the town of Amara, north of Basra. It goes by the
name Hizbollah (Party of God)-Amara, and it is headed by marsh guerrilla leader
Abdul Karim Muhammadawi, nicknamed “Prince of the Marshes” who was named
to the Governing Council. He is widely perceived as an ally of SCIRI.
Until August 2002 when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures
for meetings in Washington, D.C., SCIRI had publicly refused to work openly with
the United States or accept U.S. assistance, although it was part of the INC and did
have contacts with the United States prior to the 2003 war effort. Since the fall of the
regime on April 9, SCIRI leaders have criticized what they called an illegitimate U.S.
occupation of Iraq and have called for the rapid establishment of an Iraqi self-rule
authority, while at the same time publicly opposing the use of violence against the
occupation. Even though Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim says he is for a democracy and
would not seek to establish an Iranian-style Islamic republic, U.S. officials are said
to be mistrustful of SCIRI and have been seeking to disarm its fighters. Suggesting
that SCIRI sees its interests in a degree of cooperation with the occupation, Abd al-
Aziz al Hakim did meet with other opposition leaders in late April 2003 at a post-war
governance planning session sponsored by U.S. officials. He later helped constitute
the seven-party core of the Governing Council, and Abd al-Aziz is part of the nine-
person rotating Council presidency. Unlike some other Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI
has had good working relations with some Sunni oppositionists and the Kurds.
SCIRI might get additional support from the family of the late Ayatollah
Khomeini. In July 2003, Khomeini’s grandson, Hassan Khomeini, who is about 45,
relocated from Qom, Iran to Najaf. Hassan Khomeini is believed to be an opponent
of the more militant Shiite clerics such as Moqtada Al Sadr (see below), who is also
considered a rival of SCIRI.
Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, perhaps Iraq’s oldest Shiite Islamist grouping,
continues to exist as a separate group, but many Da’wa activists appear to be at least
loosely allied with SCIRI. The party was founded in 1957 by a revered Iraqi Shiite
cleric, Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of Ayatollah
Khomeini. Baqr Al Sadr was hung by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the Da’wa’s
alleged responsibility in fomenting Shiite anti-regime unrest following Iran’s 1979
Islamic revolution. That unrest included an attempted assassination of senior Iraqi
leader Tariq Aziz. Da’wa was part of the seven-party council grouping that is now
been incorporated into the Governing Council. Da’wa’s spokesman, Ibrahim Jafari,
and its leader in Basra, Abdal Zahra Othman, are on the Governing Council, as is a
former Da’wa activist turned human rights activist, Muwaffaq Al-Ruba’i. Jafari is
one of the nine members of the Council that is rotating the presidency, and Jafari is
the first to take that post.
CRS-7
The Kuwaiti branch of the Da’wa Party allegedly was responsible for a May
1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks
on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The Hizballah organization in Lebanon
was founded by Lebanese clerics loyal to Ayatollah Baqr Al Sadr and the late
Ayatollah Khomeini, and there continue to be linkages between Hizballah and the
Da’wa Party. The Hizballah activists who held U.S. hostages in that country during
the 1980s often linked release of the Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party
prisoners held by Kuwait for those offenses. Some Iraqi Da’wa members look to
Lebanon’s senior Shiite cleric Mohammed Hossein Fadlallah, who was a student and
protege of Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, for spiritual guidance.
Sadr Movement. Members of the clan of the late Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr
Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq. The Sadr clan, based in Iraq
during Saddam Hussein’s rule, was repressed and not politically active during that
time. The United States had no contact with this grouping prior to the 2003 war and
did not attempt to enlist it in any overthrow efforts during 1991-2002. Although the
Al Sadr clan has been closely identified with the Da’wa Party, it appears that
members of the clan and their followers currently are operating in post-war Iraq as
grouping separate from the Da’wa. Another revered member of the clan, Mohammed
Sadiq Al Sadr, and two of his sons, were killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999.
A surviving son, Moqtada Al Sadr, who is about 27 years old, has attempted to rally
his followers to attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite politics. He and his
clan apparently have a large following in the poorer Shiite neighborhoods of
Baghdad, which, after the fall of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr
City,” from the former name of “Saddam City.” However, Moqtada is viewed by
Iran and many Iraqi Shiites as a young radical who lacks religious and political
weight. To compensate for his lack of religious credentials, he has sought spiritual
authority for his actions from exiled Iraqi senior cleric, Ayatollah Kazem Haeri, who
is living in Qom, Iran. An alternate interpretation by some experts is that Haeri is
acting at the direction of Iran’s leadership to keep Moqtada Sadr under a measure of
control. Moqtada’s reputation may have been tarnished in early April when
Moqtada al Sadr reportedly killed Abd al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand
Ayatollah Abdol Qasem Musavi-Khoi, shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in
London. Abd al-Majid Khoi headed the Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he
returned to Iraq after U.S.-led forces took Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with
the political doctrines of Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran.
The Sadr grouping has not been included in the Governing Council. Moqtada
has used his Friday prayer sermons in Najaf and other forums to denounce the
Council as a puppet of the U.S. occupation. In July 2003, Moqtada and his aides
began recruiting for an Islamic army, for now unarmed, that Sadr says must
challenge the U.S. occupation with force. He is also openly calling for a cleric-led
Islamic state similar to that of Iran. In August 2003, Shiites in Basra and in Baghdad
rioted against British and U.S. occupation forces over fuel shortages and perceived
slights, and there was speculation that Moqtada was helping fuel the riots.
Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah. The revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al-
Sistani, based in Najaf, was repressed during Saddam’s rule and is emerging as a
major potential force in post-war Iraq. The United States had no contact with Sistani
when Saddam was in power. He is the most senior of the four Shiite clerics that lead
CRS-8
the Najaf- based “Hawza al-Ilmiya,” a major grouping of seminaries and Shiite
clerics. The Hawza, which is well funded through donations, is becoming an
important source of political authority in the Shiite regions of Iraq, hiring Iraqis to
perform functions performed by the former regime and issuing directives, often
obeyed, for some Iraqi civil servants to return to work. Sistani himself, now free of
a long house arrest at the hands of Baghdad, has a large following of former students
throughout the Shiite portions of Iraq. Sistani and the Hawza are generally allied
with SCIRI in the intra-Shiite power struggle, seeking to contain Moqtada Al Sadr,
who Sistani and SCIRI both view as radical and impulsive. Sistani, who is of Iranian
ethnicity, is considered to be in the tradition of Ayatollah Khoi in opposing a direct
role for clerics in governmental affairs, and Sistani and the Hawza have spoken
against a direct role for the clerics in governing post-war Iraq. However, in early July
2003, Sistani began to take a more active role in Iraq’s post-war decision-making by
issuing a statement that onlyelected Iraqis — not a U.S.-appointed governing council
— should draft a constitution.
Islamic Amal. SCIRI has been allied with another Shiite Islamist organization
called the Islamic Amal (Action) Organization. In the early 1980s, Islamic Amal was
under the SCIRI umbrella but later broke with it. It is headed by Mohammed Taqi
Modarassi, who returned to Iraq from exile in Iran in April 2003, after Saddam
Hussein’s regime fell. Islamic Amal, which has a following among Shiite Islamists
mainly in Karbala, conducted attacks against Saddam Hussein’s regime in the 1980s.
However, it does not appear to have a following nearly as large as SCIRI or the other
Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s brother, Abd al-Hadi, headed the Islamic Front
for the Liberation of Bahrain, which tried to stir up Shiite unrest against the Bahrain
regime in the 1980s and 1990s (see below). Since returning to Iraq in April 2003,
Mohammad Taqi has argued against violent opposition to the U.S. occupation, saying
that such a challenge would plunge Iraq into civil warfare.
Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups
The differences among the various anti-Saddam organizations led to the near
collapse of the U.S. regime change effort the mid-1990s. In May 1994, the KDP and
the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs revenues levied at
border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s government based in
Irbil. The PUK lined up support from Iran while the KDP sought and received
countervailing backing from its erstwhile nemesis, the Baghdad government. The
infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC offensive against Iraqi troops in March
1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at the last minute. Although it was
repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of the less well-trained and poorly
motivated Iraqi units facing the Kurds. Some INC leaders point to the battle as an
indication that the INC could have succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. military
help, had it been given additional resources and training in the 1990s.
The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition in the
mid-1990s caused the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by
CRS-9
renewing ties to a non-INC group, Iraq National Accord (INA).5 The INA, originally
founded in 1990 with Saudi support, consists of military and security defectors who
were perceived as having ties to disgruntled officials currently serving within their
former organizations. It is headed by Dr. Iyad Alawi, former president of the Iraqi
Student Union in Europe and a physician by training. He is a secular Shiite Muslim,
but most of the members of the INA are Sunni Muslims. The INA’s prospects
appeared to brighten in August 1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al-
Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons of mass destruction programs — defected to
Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip on the military and security services was
weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate from there.
The INA was ultimately penetrated by Iraq’s intelligence services and, in June 1996,
Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by arresting or executing over 100 INA
sympathizers in the military.
Iraq’s counteroffensive against the opposition was expanded two months after
the arrests of the INA sympathizers. In late August 1996, the KDP asked Baghdad
to provide armed support for its capture of Irbil from the rival PUK. Iraq took
advantage of the request to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in
northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout northern Iraq.
In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred
oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated
from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists,
mostly from the INC.
Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA continued to
operate throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt itself to some extent since the
June 1996 arrests. However, it does not appear to have a large following in Iraq.
Although it has was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war,
there is a history of friction between the two groups; the INA reportedly bombed an
INC facility in northern Iraq in October 1995. Alawi was part of the seven-party
grouping that became the core of the Governing Council, and Alawi has been named
a member of that Council and one of its nine-member rotating presidency.
Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks
For the two years following the anti-Saddam opposition groups’ 1996 setbacks,
the Clinton Administration had little contact with these groups. In those two years,
the INC, INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations
and their ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998,
then Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations
subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations”
about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish.
Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections
during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam
Hussein. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with an
5 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret
War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997.
CRS-10
FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, signed May1, 1998) that, among
other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the
opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free
Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October
1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to
coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to
highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions. The remaining $2 million was used
to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the
documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes,
and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In
subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for
war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix. Some of the war crimes funding has
gone to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War
Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues.
Iraq Liberation Act
A clear indication of congressional support for a more active U.S. overthrow
effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998: the Iraq Liberation Act
(ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998). The ILA gave the
President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles (and authorized
$2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be designated by the
Administration. (An FY2003 supplemental appropriation, P.L. 108-11, added $86.5
million to the allowed draw-down ceiling to enable additional funds to flow to groups
helping the United States in Operation Iraqi Freedom. The supplemental brought the
total authorized under the Act to $183 million.) The Act’s passage was widely
interpreted as an expression of congressional support for the concept of promoting
an insurgency by using U.S. air-power to expand opposition-controlled territory.
This idea was advocated by Chalabi and some U.S. experts, such as General Wayne
Downing, who subsequently became a National SecurityCouncil official on counter-
terrorism in the first two years of the George W. Bush Administration. President
Clinton signed the legislation despite reported widespread doubts within the Clinton
Administration about the chances of success in promoting an opposition insurgency.
The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting
regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it
should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime
headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly
articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq.
The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the
height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in
which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United
Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were
withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign
against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December
16-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq:
Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.)
CRS-11
The First ILA Designations. Further steps to promote regime change
followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, a career diplomat, Frank
Ricciardone, was named as a State Department’s “Coordinator for the Transition in
Iraq” — the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999, after
consultations with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13) that
the following organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance
under the Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the
Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the Movement for Constitutional
Monarchy (MCM). Because of its possible role in contributing to the formation of
Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001, although it was not
formally taken off the ILA eligibility list.
Monarchists/Sharif Ali. The MCM, which was an original designee of
eligibility to receive assistance under the ILA, is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a
relative of the Hashemite monarchs (he is a cousin of King Faysal II, the last Iraqi
monarch) that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. Sharif Ali, who is
about 47 and was a banker in London, claims to be the leading heir to the former
Hashemite monarchy, although there are other claimants, mostly based in Jordan.
The MCM was considered a small movement that could not contribute much to the
pre-war overthrow effort, although it was part of the INC and the United States had
contacts with it. In the post-war period, Sharif Ali returned to Iraq on June 10, 2003,
to a small but apparently enthusiastic welcome. He did not participate in the seven-
party grouping that negotiated with the U.S.-led occupation authority on the
formation of the Governing Council, and neither Sharif Ali nor any of his followers
was appointed to the Governing Council.
In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton
Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and
“non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999 - 2000, about 150
opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in
Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses providing civil affairs
training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers,
communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However,
the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficientlyorganized
to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This
restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the
effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United
States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The trainees during
1999-2000 are not believed to have been brought into the Operation Iraqi Freedom
effort against the regime, or into the Free Iraqi Forces that deployed to Iraq toward
the end of the active combat phase of the war.
Continued Doubts About the Capabilities
of the Anti-Saddam Groups
During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end
the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of
Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed
disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the
CRS-12
opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an
indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical about the opposition’s
capabilities. The Clinton Administration maintained that the Iraqi opposition would
not succeed unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement, and that direct U.S.
military action was risky and not justified by the degree of threat posed by Iraq.
Critics of the Clinton Administration policy on Iraq maintained that the potential
threat from Saddam Hussein’s regime was sufficiently grave that direct U.S. military
action should be taken. Others suggested the Clinton Administration should focus
instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq by threatening force if Iraq refused to
permit re-entry into Iraq of the U.N. weapons inspectors that left Iraq in December
1998.
As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a
provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed
November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the
Iraqi people,” of which at least $12 million was for the INC to distribute
humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million
was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million
could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive
assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC
distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000, the Clinton Administration
reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in
FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop an aid distribution plan
and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before
it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that
noted that any INC effort to distribute aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control
would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and
to any relief distributors with which the INC contracts.6
Bush Administration Policy
Bush Administration policy toward Iraq changed after the September 11, 2001
terrorist attacks, even though no significant evidence linking Iraq to those attacks
came to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in
President Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he
characterized Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea.
Pre-September 11 Policy
Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic
elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus
within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow
strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq,
which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its
taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist
6 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.”
January 17, 2001.
CRS-13
regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan: a modification of the U.N.
sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technology reached Iraq. His
plan offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N.
restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military
technology.7
The Administration believed that the proposal, by easing the suffering of the
Iraqi people, would cause Iraq’s neighbors and other countries to cease unilateral
violations of the sanctions regime. Powell, who had openly expressed skepticism
about the opposition’s prospects, barelyraised the regime change issue during his trip
or in his March 7, 2001, testimony before the House International Relations
Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.8 After about a year of
negotiations among the Security Council permanent members, the major feature of
the smart sanctions plan — new procedures that virtually eliminate U.N. review of
civilian exports to Iraq — was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Security Council
Resolution 1409).
Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime
change policy, many of the questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy
that had faced previous administrations were debated early in the Bush
Administration.9 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush
Administration did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first year.
During his confirmation hearings as DeputySecretaryof Defense, a leading advocate
of overthrowing Iraq’s regime, Paul Wolfowitz, said that he did not yet see a
“plausible plan” for changing the regime. Like its predecessor, the Bush
Administration initially declined to provide the opposition with lethal aid, combat
training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the separate
State Department position of “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” further casting
doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy. On February 2, 2001, the Bush
Administration confirmed that, shortly after President Bush took office, the Treasury
Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted the INC a license to
proceed with information gathering inside Iraq only, and not actual distribution of
humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the Administration amounted to a
withholding of U.S. backing for the INC plan to rebuild its presence inside Iraq.
Many in Congress, on the other hand, continued to support the INC as the
primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional
sentiment, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite
doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television
broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the
7 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food
Program.
8 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times,
March 2, 2001.
9 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh,
Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002.
CRS-14
ESF aid appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an estimated
additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.10
Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime
Bush Administration policytoward Iraq became notablymore assertive after the
September 11, 2001 attacks, stressing regime change far more than containment.
Almost immediately after the U.S.-led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in
Afghanistan began in early October 2001, speculation began building that the
Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use of military force
as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism. Some U.S. officials reportedly
believed that the United States needed to respond to the September 11 attacks by
ending any or all regimes that support terrorist groups, including Iraq. As noted
above, in his January 29, 2002 State of the Union message, President Bush named
Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with North Korea and Iran. Vice President
Cheney visited the Middle East in March 2002 reportedly to consult regional
countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq militarily, although the countries
visited reportedlyurged greater U.S. attention to the Arab-Israeli dispute and opposed
confrontation with Iraq.
The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for
confronting Iraq were (1) its purported refusal to end its WMD programs, and (2) its
ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of
conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. The Administration added that
regime change would have the further benefit of liberating the Iraqi people and
promoting stability in the Middle East, possibly facilitating a resolution to the Arab-
Israeli dispute.
Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s
regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax
mailings, senior U.S. officials said in the runup to the war that there was evidence
of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. Secretary of State Powell, as noted above, cited
intelligence information that Ansar al-Islam and its enclave leader Abu Musab al-
Zarqawi had links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.11 (See section above on Ansar al-
Islam for more information on that organization and its reputed links to Saddam
Hussein’s regime.) Other senior officials cited intelligence information that Iraq
provided advice and training to Al Qaeda in the manufacture and use of chemical
weapons, although Administration information appears to date to the early 1990s
when Iraq, largely isolated after the first Gulf war, was politically close to Sudan. Al
Qaeda founder Osama Bin Laden was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996).
The Bush Administration did not extensively cite reports that Czech intelligence
believed that Iraqi intelligence had met with lead September 11 hijacker Mohammad
Atta in Prague in spring 2001, suggesting official skepticism of those reports. Some
outside commentators believed that those reports indicated a direct Iraqi connection
to the September 11 attacks.
10 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001.
11 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002.
CRS-15
Some outside observers expressed skepticism about Iraq-Al Qaeda connections
because of the ideological differences between Saddam Hussein’s secular regime and
Al Qaeda’s Islamist character. Others noted that bin Laden sought to raise an Islamic
army to fight Saddam’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990, arguing against the need for U.S.
troops, and that he was more an enemy of Saddam Hussein than an ally. Those
differences were evident in a February 12, 2003, bin Laden statement referring to
Saddam Hussein’s regime as socialist and infidel, although the statement exhorted
Iraq to resist impending U.S. military action. In the Administration view, the two
shared similar anti-U.S. goals, which outweighed ideological differences and
propelled them into tactical or strategic cooperation.
WMD Threat Perception. In arguing for military action, U.S. officials
maintained that Iraq’s purported commitment to developing WMD — coupled with
its support for terrorist groups to which Iraq might transfer WMD — constituted an
unacceptable potential threat to the United States and that major U.S. military action
was justified if Iraq refused to disarm voluntarily. U.S. officials said the September
11, 2001 attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to
gather before acting, but must instead act preemptively or preventively. Senior U.S.
officials asserted a WMD threat as follows:
! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years
since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply
with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8,
2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs.
However, statements by U.N. weapons inspectors after inspections
resumed November 27, 2002 indicated they believed Iraq did not
have an active nuclear weapons program, and that inspections on
other weapons categories were making progress.
! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and
against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not
necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States
or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against
adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of
destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of
massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the
1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings of
retaliation and did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war.
! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who
could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths
in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of this view cited
presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in October 2002,
portions of which were released publicly, stating the CIA view that
Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to terrorists if the United States
were to attack Iraq. At that point, according to that argument,
Saddam Hussein would be left with little incentive not to cooperate
with terrorist groups capable of striking at U.S. interests. No WMD
was used against Iraq during Operation Iraqi Freedom, and little
evidence of actual WMD have thus far been found, although the
CRS-16
Administration asserts that WMD programs, and perhaps actual
weapons themselves, will eventually be found in Iraq.
Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam
As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action against Iraq, the
Bush Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its
capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002,
President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special
operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and
Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups — the INC, the
INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM — to Washington for meetings with
senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were
held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S.
government, which reportedly tended to favor different opposition groups.
In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August
15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in ESF to the Iraqi
National Congress (INC), funds that had been held up due to differences between the
State Department and the INC over what activities would be funded. The $8 million
was to be used to fund the INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its
offices in Washington, London, Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate
its Al Mutamar newspaper and Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund
the information gathering portion of the INC’s activities; the State Department had
refused to fund those activities, which are conducted inside Iraq, because of strains
between the INC and other opposition groups and questions about INC use of U.S.
funds.
In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and
to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic-
based groups. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had
increasing contact during this period include the following:
! Iraqi National Movement. It formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the
INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib
(who was part of an early leadership body of the INC); and Hatim
Mukhlis, who claimed support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan.
! Iraqi National Front. Another grouping of ex-military officers,
founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite
Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and
participated in the post-1991 Gulf war anti-Saddam uprisings.
! Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement. Established in 1996 by
ex-military officer Najib al-Salh, this group was close to the INC.
Salhi, who defected in 1995, served in the Republican Guard.
! Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was
established in August 2002, headed by Wafiq al-Samarra’i, a
former head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of staff of Iraq’s
CRS-17
military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was based in Denmark
since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member. Khazraji was
placed under travel restrictions by Danish officials in late November
2002 after saying he wanted to leave Denmark. He is under
investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of chemical
weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities said on
March 17, 2003 that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his home
there,12 although his current whereabouts are unknown.
! Iraqi Turkmen Front. A small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping,
generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq.
Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq.
! The Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another
Shiite Islamic Party, but it is considered substantially less pro-
Iranian than SCIRI or the Da’wa Party. It is headed by Jamil Wakil,
a follower of Ayatollah Shirazi, an Iranian cleric who was the
spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation
of Bahrain (IFLB, see above under Islamic Amal). The IFLB
allegedly attempted to overthrow Bahrain’s regime in the early
1980s.
! The Assyrian Democratic Movement, an ethnic-based movement
headed by Secretary-General Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s
Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq. There is a
strong diaspora presence in the United States as well. After building
ties to this group over the past year, the Bush Administration
formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement
into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002.
(Kanna is on the Governing Council.)
Second ILA Designations. The Bush Administration applauded efforts
during 2001 and 2002 by the ex-military led groups to coordinate with each other
and with the INC and other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London and
jointly run with the INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers. However, since the
regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, virtually none of the ex-military led
groups listed above has openly sought a major role in post-Saddam Iraq.
As a decision whether to launch military action approached, President Bush
issued a determination (December 9, 2002) to draw down the remaining $92 million
in defense articles and services authorized under the Iraq Liberation Act for the INA,
the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi
opposition groups designated byme under the Act before or after this determination.”
That same day, the Bush Administration made six of the ex-military led factions
discussed above (except the Higher Council for National Salvation) eligible to
receive draw downs under the ILA. The announcement appeared to be part of
reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists in tasks that could assist U.S. forces,
12 ‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper. Agence France Press, April 7, 2003.
CRS-18
possibly including combat units.13 An initial group of 3,000 was selected, but only
about 70 oppositionists completed training at an air base (Taszar) in Hungary,
according to press reports.14 These oppositionists served with U.S. forces in
Operation Iraqi Freedom as translators and mediators between U.S. forces and local
leaders, and most did not stay in Iraq, according to observers.
As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began
planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002,
with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in
London. In advance of the meeting, the Bush Administration appointed NSC official
Zalmay Khalilzad to be a liaison to the Iraqi opposition. The conference was
organized by the same six groups whose leaders visited Washington in August 2002,
but included other groups as well, and they discussed whether the opposition should
declare a provisional government. The Administration opposed that step on the
grounds that doing so was premature and would give the impression that outside
powers were determining Iraq’s political structure.
The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65-member follow-up committee,
which some criticized as weighted heavily toward Shiite Islamist groups such as
SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24-27, 2003, in northern Iraq.
Against the urging of U.S. representatives at the meeting, the opposition agreed to
form a six man committee that would prepare for a transition regime, although it
stopped short of declaring a provisional government. The six-person committee
included PUK leader Jalal Talabani, KDP leader Masud Barzani, SCIRI leader
Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Iyad Alawi, and a former Iraqi
foreign minister Adnan Pachachi. (All six groups of these personalities, or their
designated representatives, are on Governing Council.)
Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the
new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete
disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if that country wanted to avert military
action. In a probable effort to garner international support for any U.S.-led war effort
against Iraq, the Administration had downplayed the goal of regime change in
President Bush’s September 12, 2002, speech before the United Nations General
Assembly, stressing instead the need to enforce U.N. resolutions that required Iraqi
disarmament. However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change
goal after February 2003 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course.
The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March 2003
breakdown of U.N. diplomacy over whether the U.N. Security Council should
authorize war against Iraq for failing to comply with Resolution 1441. The
diplomatic breakdown followed several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by
the director of the U.N. inspection body UNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification,
and Inspection Commission) Hans Blix and the director of the International Atomic
13 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.”
Washington Post, October 19, 2002.
14 Williams, Daniel. “U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles.” Washington Post, December
18, 2002.
CRS-19
Energy Agency (IAEA), Mohammad al-Baradei, most recently on March 7, 2003.
The briefings were generally critical of Iraq for failing to pro-actively cooperate to
clear up outstanding questions about Iraq’s WMD program, but the latter two
briefings (February24 and March 7) noted progress in clearing up outstanding WMD
questions. The Blix/Baradei briefings said Iraq had not accounted for its past WMD,
but the two did not state that they were certain that Iraq had retained WMD, or that
they had uncovered any banned WMD. Iraq declared short range ballistic missiles
that were determined by Blix to be of prohibited ranges, and Blix ordered Iraq to
destroy them. Iraq began the destruction prior to the launching of the U.S.-led war.
(For more detail on the final round of inspections and evidence of WMD programs
found in the post-war period, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117: Iraq: Weapons
Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.)
Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and
Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that
inspections should be given more time. They noted that Iraq was well contained by
sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones. Those who agreed with this
view maintained that, as long as Iraq allowed access to U.N. weapons inspections
under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national
security. The inspectors reported few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700
inspections of about 400 different sites, as of mid-March 2003. Others experts
believed that, even if Iraq were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could
have been deterred by U.S. overall strategic superiority, presumably including the
U.S. nuclear arsenal.
The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq
had not fundamentally decided to disarm, and was attempting to preserve WMD
capabilities. The Administration asserted on March 17, 2003, that diplomatic options
to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full attention to military action.
That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and his sons, Uday and Qusay,
an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war. They refused the
ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003.
In the war, Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and
British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the Iraqi military, at times, put
up stiff resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi militarycommanders
or Baathist political figures came forward to try to establish a post-Saddam
government, but senior regime leaders fled Baghdad, and the whereabouts of some
of the top leadership, including Saddam Hussein, are unknown. The outcome of a
post-war debate on the results of the war might depend on such factors as the pace
of reconstruction; the degree of resistance to the U.S.-led occupation; the amount
of WMD ultimately found, if any; and whether a new government is stable and
democratic.
CRS-20
Post-War Governance Issues
Since Saddam Hussein’s regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, there has
been increasing debate about governing post-war Iraq. The same U.S. concerns about
fragmentation of and instability in Iraq that existed in prior years are present in the
current debate over how to establish a post-war regime. Although some Iraqi
civilians have welcomed U.S. and British troops in areas captured, many Iraqis now
want U.S. and British forces to leave Iraq, and the top U.S. military commander in
the Persian Gulf theater, General John Abizaid, says that U.S. forces now face a
“classic guerrilla war.” Other experts fear that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall
under the control of pro-Iranian Shiite Islamist forces who are asserting growing
control over areas inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites. Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s
population but have been under-represented in every Iraqi government since modern
Iraq’s formation in 1920. (For information on U.S. and international funding for
humanitarian assistance and reconstruction, see CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent
Developments in Humanitarian and Reconstruction Assistance.)
Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule
The Administration says that U.S. forces will stay in Iraq until there is a stable,
democratic successor regime that is at peace with its neighbors. However, there has
been some debate between U.S. authorities and key anti-Saddam groups over how
to move Iraq to self-government. Senior U.S. officials, including deputy Defense
Secretary Paul Wolfowitz, had said in early April 2003 that they hoped to have a
successor regime in place within six months of the fall of the regime. However, in
mid-May2003, U.S. officials, apparentlyfearing that existing major groups could not
form a stable regime, or that Shiite Islamists would dominate a successor authority,
backed away from any deadlines for establishing an Iraqi self-rule authority.
Shortly after the war, the United States began a process of establishing a
successor regime. The Administration organized an April 15 meeting, in Nasiriyah,
of about 100 Iraqis of varying ideologies, present by U.S. invitation. Many of the
attendees were representatives of Iraqi tribal groupings that had not been politically
active before. However, SCIRI, along with several Shiite clerics that have
appropriated authority throughout much of southern Iraq since the fall of the regime,
boycotted the meeting and called for an Islamic state and the withdrawal of U.S.
forces. Another meeting of about 250 delegates was held in Baghdad on April 26,
ending in agreement to hold a broader meeting, within a month, to name an interim
Iraqi administration.
In parallel with the April 26 meeting, the five most prominent exiled opposition
groups met, with U.S. envoys present: SCIRI, the INC, the INA, the PUK, and the
KDP. On May 9, 2003, the five agreed to expand their grouping to seven, adding to
their ranks the little known Nasir al-Chadirchy, head of a party called the National
Democratic Party of Iraq, as well as the Shiite Islamist Da’wa Party. The “seven-
party grouping” strongly criticized the U.S. decision in mid-May 2003 to delay the
formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority indefinitely and to instead form an advisory
body of 25 to 30 Iraqis. The seven-party grouping subsequently began meeting with
U.S. occupation authorities to try to reverse that decision.
CRS-21
With U.S. casualties in Iraq mounting and a growing sense of resentment among
the Iraqi population, the U.S.-led occupation authority (Coalition Provisional
Authority, CPA) incorporated the views of the seven-party grouping. U.S.
administrator for Iraq Paul Bremer (see below) said on June 23, 2003, that the
planned 25- to 30-member body would have “real authority” from its first days. He
said it would nominate ministry heads, recommend policies, and convene a
“constitutional conference” to draft a new constitution.15
The Governing Council. On July 13, 2003, a Governing Council was
unveiled to the Iraqi public, appointed by the U.S.-led Coalition Provisional
Authority (CPA) but reflecting the influence of the seven-party grouping, as well as
prominent Iraqis who were never in exile and were not affiliated with the exiled
opposition. The Council has 25 members, of which 3 are women and 13 are Shiite
Muslims.
Of the 13 Shiite Muslims on the Council, one seat is held by SCIRI directly
(Abd al-Aziz Al Hakim, younger brother of Mohammad Baqr), one is held by a
guerrilla affiliated with SCIRI (Abdul Karim al-Muahmmadawi), two are Da’wa
Party (Ibrahim al-Jafari and Abdul Zahra Othman) leaders, and considered allies of
SCIRI, and one is a former Da’wa activist (Muwaffaq al-Ruba’i). Also on the
Council is a moderate Shiite cleric, Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum, considered pro-U.S.
and not affiliated with SCIRI or the Da’wa. He headed the Ahl al-Bayt charity center
in London since the 1980s. The remaining Shiite Muslims, such as Chalabi and Iyad
al-Alawi, are mostly considered secular. Appointed to the Council was one Sunni
Muslim Islamist, Muhsin Abdul Hamid, who heads the Iraqi Islamic Party, but he
does not have a clear affiliation or relationship with the Shiite Islamists on the
Council.
The Council includes five Kurds, including the two main Kurdish leaders Jalal
Talabani and Masud Barzani. The Kurds are generally considered pro-U.S. and
might be expected to vote the way the U.S.-led coalition wants.
Although not a cohesive bloc, the Council includes exiles and non-exiles who
generally want a liberal democracy and would be considered pro-U.S. Most
prominent among them is Chalabi, but this grouping includes National Democratic
Party leader Nasir al-Chadirchy and former foreign minister Adnan Pachachi, both
of whom are Sunni Muslims, as well as former foreign ministry official Akila al-
Hashimi, a Shiite woman. Others most likely to affiliate with this bloc include
Sunni businessman Samir Shakir al-Sumaidy; Sunni civil engineer Ghazi al-Yawar,
who is president of Saudi-based Hicap Technology; the Shiite coordinator for the
Human Rights Association of Babel, Ahmad al-Barak; and the two other women
Council members — Songul Chapouk, a member of the Turkomen minority, who
heads the Iraqi Women’s Association, and Raja al-Khuza’i, a Shiite who heads the
maternity hospital in Diwaniyah.
15 Transcript: Bremer Reviews Progress, Plans for Iraq Reconstruction. Washington File,
June 23, 2003.
CRS-22
A member of the Assyrian Christian community is on the Council. Yonadam
Kanna, the secretary-general of the Democratic Assyrian Movement, is on the body.
It is not known what other members of the Council, if any, he might be aligned with,
although it is reasonable to believe that he might have an affinity for fellow residents
of northern Iraq, the Kurds. Also unclear is whether or not Hamid al-Musa, the
Shiite head of the Iraqi Communist Party, is allied with anyone else on the Council.
In late July 2003, the Council decided that nine Council members will rotate as
chairpersons, each for one month. Ibrahim al-Jafari of the Da’wa Party is the first
chairman. The other eight who will rotate that post are Chalabi, Alawi of the INA,
Hakim of SCIRI, Pachachi, Barzani of the KDP, Talabani of the PUK, Bahr al-Ulum,
and Abdul Hamid, the Sunni Islamist figure.
Among its first actions, the Council has authorized the establishment of an Iraqi
war crimes tribunal for Saddam and associates accused of major human rights abuses.
It also has empowered a three member delegation to seek formal U.N. recognition.
The grouping, Chalabi, Pachachi, and Akila Hashimi, traveled to the United Nations
in July 2003 and received a supportive statement from Secretary General Kofi
Annan. No decision on seating the Governing Council at the United Nations was
announced.
The Governing Council is working on a new constitution. On July 17, 2003,
CPA head Bremer said that a constitution could conceivably be drafted in time to
have national elections by summer of 2004. He has linked the potential length of the
U.S. occupation to the completion of successful national elections and the restoration
of security in Iraq. As noted above, in early August 2003, the Governing Council
tapped INC activist Kanaan Makiya to head a 25-person committee that will
determine the process for drafting the constitution.
As part of the planning process that took place before the war, the U.S. State
Department supported a group of Iraqi exiles to address issues that would confront
a successor government.16 However, the State Department working group (the
“Future of Iraq Project”) does not appear to have significant influence on any post-
war regime decision-making in Iraq. Some experts believe the Defense Department
was promoting a competing or separate group of exiles.17 The State Department
project, which cost $5 million, consisted of working groups that discussed (1)
transitional justice; (2) public finance; (3) public and media outreach; (4) democratic
principles; (5) water, agriculture, and the environment; (6) health and human
services; (7) economy and infrastructure; (8) education; (9) refugees, internally-
displaced persons, and migration policy; (10) foreign and national security policy;
(11) defense institutions and policy; (12) free media; (13) civil society capacity-
building; (14) anti-corruption measures; and (15) oil and energy.
16 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,”
Washington File, December 11, 2002.
17 Fineman, Mark, Robin Wright, and Doyle McManus. Preparing for War, Stumbling to
Peace. Los Angeles Times, July 18, 2003.
CRS-23
Post-War U.S. Operations and the Coalition Provisional
Authority (CPA)
Experts note that projections about U.S. operations in post-war Iraq, including
the duration of the U.S. military occupation and the numbers of occupation troops,
are largely dependent on the amount of continuing Iraqi resistance, the number of
U.S. casualties taken, and the rate at which such U.S. objectives as the establishment
of a stable and democratic successor regime are accomplished. At present, about
160,000 U.S. and British troops remain in Iraq, according to a June 2003 report to
Congress mandated by P.L. 108-11. Of those, about 148,000 are U.S. personnel and
11,000 are British. There are another approximately10,000 foreign forces, deploying
in accordance with international commitments to post-war peacekeeping (see below).
Earlier press reports said the Administration wanted to draw the U.S. force level
down to about 35,000 by the end of 2003, but continued unrest and insecurity in Iraq
appears to have made that goal untenable, and some U.S. commanders do not rule out
an increase in U.S. force levels if necessary.
The Resistance. There are indications that resistance to the U.S. governance
of Iraq is growing, judging by the frequency of attacks on U.S. forces over the past
few weeks and the type and geographical distribution of attacks. U.S. military
operations are focused on hunting down guerrilla resistance leaders and their
suspected Baathist financiers, as well as finding former leader Saddam Hussein. The
new Centcom commander John Abizaid said on July 17, 2003, that the United States
faces a “classic guerrilla war” led by “mid-level Baath Party activists organized
regionally.” Such attacks have killed 60 U.S. militarypersonnel since President Bush
declared an end to “major combat operations” in Iraq on May 1, 2003.
The Bush Administration says resistance comes not only from remnants of the
Baath Party but also from Arab volunteers, possibly linked to or supportive of Al
Qaeda, who have come to Iraq from other countries to fight the U.S. occupation.
Attacks have been more frequent in the Sunni areas of central Iraq, where support for
Saddam Hussein’s regime was traditionally stronger than elsewhere, but there have
been at least two fatal attacks on British and Danish forces in August 2003 in the
Shiite areas in and around Basra. Some elements of the resistance appear to want to
restore the old regime, while others appear to be motivated by opposition to foreign
rule or the goal of forming an Islamic state. Other resistance fighters appear to be
motivated by the difficulty the U.S. and British authorities have had in restoring
civilian services. U.S. military officials put the resistance numbers at about 5,000,
although they do not explain precisely how they arrive at that figure. In June 2003,
some opponents of the occupation began identifying themselves as distinct groups,
scribbling graffiti warnings and faxing statements to the Arab satellite television
network Al Jazeera, UAE-based Al Arabiya TV, and other outlets. They are using
such names as:
! Al Awda (the Return);
! the Snakes;
! the Movement of the Victorious Sect;
! Iraq’s Revolutionaries - Al Anbar’s Armed Brigades;
! The Popular Resistance for the Liberation of Iraq;
CRS-24
! the Salafist Jihad Group (Salafi is a Sunni extremist Islamic
movement): and
! Armed Islamic Movement for Al Qaeda - Falluja Branch. Actual
linkages to Al Qaeda, if any, are not known.
! Jaysh (Army) of Mohammad
! Black Banners Group
! Nasirite Organization
As noted above, some Shiite factions are becoming more active against the
occupation. The Sadr faction has reportedly instigated riots and demonstrations that
took place against U.S. and British forces in Baghdad and Basra. One report says
that Sunni Islamists, led by Shaykh Ahmad Qubaysi, who returned in April 2003
from exile in the UAE, is assisting the Sadr faction.18 This represents the possible
emergence of a Sunni-Shiite Islamist anti-occupation coalition.
The continuing resistance has complicated the U.S. mission. In addition to
targeting U.S. forces, resistance fighters have assassinated Iraqis who are
cooperating with the United States. In August 2003, in a possible evolution of its
tactics, resistance fighters stepped up their attacks on Iraqi oil export pipelines and
water and other infrastructure facilities. In addition, U.S. officials say that the
continued resistance has raised the costs of the ongoing U.S. operations in Iraq; the
United States is spending about $3.9 billion per month for military operations there,
about double what was anticipated for the occupation period. On the other hand, the
Administration maintains that reconstruction is proceeding apace and has logged a
number of major accomplishments, as discussed in a White House fact sheet.
(“White House Notes Successful Results of Iraq Liberation.” August 8, 2003. At
[http://www.usinfo.state.gov/xarchives].)
The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA). The Bush Administration
initially tasked Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) to direct civilian reconstruction, working
through a staff of U.S. diplomats and other U.S. government personnel who are
serving as advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various ministries. He headed the
Office of Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance (ORHA), within the
Department of Defense, created by a January 20, 2003 executive order. After
spending the combat phase of the war in neighboring Kuwait, Garner and some of his
staff of about 200 deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003, to begin work.
Press reports said that senior U.S. officials were dissatisfied with the slow pace
of reconstruction under Garner, and on May 6, 2003, the Administration appointed
former ambassador L. Paul Bremer to lead the overall reconstruction effort, with a
focus on political reconstruction. He arrived on May 12 to head the Coalition
Provisional Authority(CPA), which subsumed ORHA. The appointment represented
an apparent adjustment from the original structure of the U.S. reconstruction effort,
although the Administration stated that it was always envisioned that a civilian
would eventually take over the U.S. effort and denied it was an indication of high-
level dissatisfaction with the effort. U.S. officials now refer to the CPA as an
18 Shadid, Anthony. Iraqi Clerics Unite in Rare Alliance. Washington Post, August 17,
2003.
CRS-25
occupying authority legitimized by U.N. Security Council Resolution 1483 of May
22, 2003. Among other provisions, the resolution lifted U.N. sanctions on Iraq.
Building Security Institutions. While attempting to restore securityto Iraq,
the CPA is beginning to build new Iraqi institutions that can eventually take over the
security function from the United States. The United States is planning to train a
40,000 person Iraqi army, about 10% the size of the pre-war Iraqi force. About
12,000 are expected to be in the force by mid-2004. Former Defense Department
official Walter Slocombe is in charge of forming the new Iraqi army. The CPA is
also trying to turn basic policing functions over to Iraqis. Overall, about 32,000 Iraqi
policemen have returned to their jobs, about half the total goal. The CPA official
responsible for the new police force, former New York City police commissioner
Bernard Kerik, says it will take about 18 months (end of 2004) to reach the goal of
65,000 policemen nationwide.19 The CPA is also recruiting a 7,000 man, all- Iraqi
civil defense force to guard installations such as oil pumping stations, electricity
substations, and like facilities.
Searching for Regime Violations. Organs of the CPA and the U.S.
government are attempting to uncover abuses and violations of the regime of Saddam
Hussein, including evidence of WMD. A 1,500 person “Iraq Survey Group,” headed
by a U.S. military commander (Maj. Gen. Keith Dayton) but composed of many
civilian technical experts, including former U.N. weapons inspector David Kay, is
attempting to uncover alleged WMD. The Survey Group is also searching for mass
graves of victims of the former regime. Kay and Dayton briefed Members of
Congress on July 30, 2003, saying they were making substantial progress in
uncovering the fate of suspected WMD programs. Thus far, the Survey Group has
found at least 60 mass graves, some with hundreds of corpses. Most appear to
contain bodies of Kurdish and Shiite opponents of the former regime, but some
contain some of the bodies of about 600 Kuwaitis missing from the first Gulf war.
(WMD issues and the fate of the missing Kuwaitis are discussed in CRS Issue Brief
IB92117.)
Reviving the Oil Industry.20 As the driver of Iraq’s economy, the rebuilding
of the oil industry is receiving substantial U.S. attention. Ambassador Bremer said
in a press interview on July 31, 2003, that it could take $50 - $100 billion to
reconstruct Iraq, and a $1.6 billion plan to rehabilitate Iraq’s oil industry was agreed
in late July. It has been widely assumed that Iraq’s vast oil reserves, believed second
only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be used to fund much of the costs of
reconstruction. Presidential spokesman Ari Fleischer said on February 18, 2003,
referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a variety of means ... to shoulder much
of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.” Many observers had been concerned that
an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could destroy its own oil fields, but coalition
forces quickly secured Iraq’s southern oil fields after combat began. Only about 9
19 Schmitt, Eric. Wolfowitz on Visit to Iraq to Assess Rebuilding Effort. New York Times,
July 18, 2003.
20 For information on the prospects for Iraq’s post-war economy, see CRS Report RL31944.
Iraq’s Economy: Past, Present, Future.
CRS-26
oil wells were set on fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that region, and all were
put out quickly. The northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul were not set afire.
In early May 2003, the U.S.-led coalition set up an advisory board, headed by
former Shell executive Phillip Carroll, to oversee the rebuilding of Iraq’s oil sector.
An Iraqi oil industry professional, Thamer Ghadhban, was named to serve as head
of the interim management team that will run Iraq’s oil ministry and report to the
advisory board. The first exports began in late June 2003, and Ghadhban said that
Iraq would be up to about 1 million barrels per day of exports by mid-July. In late
July, Iraq contracted to sell oil, about 750,000 barrels per day, slightly below the
target rate. Its pre-war export rate was about 2.2 million barrels per day, a level that
U.S. officials and Iraqi oil appointees had hoped to reach by late 2003. However,
sabotage by the resistance has reduced Iraq’s oil exports to about 600,000 barrels per
day as of August 18, 2003, significantly below the 1 million barrel per day target
figure, a development that could jeopardize existing budgetary projections. The
CPA-produced budget for Iraq, which is based on the targeted levels of oil exports,
assumes that oil revenues will yield about $3.6 billion through the end of 2003, and
provide about half of the approximately $6.6 billion budget for Iraq for the period.
The deficit is to be covered from funds in the Development Fund for Iraq, set up by
the post-war Resolution 1483 (see below).
A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which
foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s
vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will
seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other
countries.
Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have
been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program.
The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put
in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was
suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various
aspects of the program departed Iraq. As of the start of the war, about $9 billion
worth of humanitarian goods were in the process of being delivered or in production.
(See CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, Sanctions, and Illicit
Trade.)
On March 28, 2003, the U.N. SecurityCouncil unanimouslyadopted Resolution
1472 that restarted the program’s operations and empowered the United Nations, for
a 45-day period (until May 12), to take direct control of all aspects of the program.
Under the new resolution, the United Nations is setting priorities for and directing the
delivery of already contracted supplies. The enhanced U.N. authority was extended
on April 25, 2003, to last at least until the six-month phase of the program expired
on June 3, 2003.
On April 17, 2003, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions
against Iraq, signaling that the Administration wanted to focus on restoring normal
international commerce with Iraq rather than extending the oil-for-food program.
Resolution 1483 lifted sanctions and provided for the phasing out of the oil for food
program within six months after adoption of that resolution on May 22. The
CRS-27
resolution also provided for the United Nations to transfer to the new Development
Fund for Iraq $1 billion in funds held by the oil-for-food program escrow fund. That
Development Fund contained about $7 billion in June 2003, consisting of captured
Iraqi assets, Iraqi assets abroad, the monies transferred from the oil-for-food account,
and U.S. funds available for reconstruction. (For more information, see CRS Report
RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, International Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.)
International Role in Peacekeeping and Governance
The relatively slow pace of establishing Iraqi security institutions, coupled with
ongoing security difficulties and continued U.S. casualties, has led to calls from
Members of Congress and others for the Administration to expand its efforts to
enlist other countries to help with the stabilization of Iraq. Negotiations with other
countries is proceeding for a multinational peacekeeping force in Iraq that would
presumably spread some of the peace-keeping and stabilization burden now borne
mostly by U.S. forces. According to the Administration, more than 30 countries are
discussing offers of forces for a multilateral stabilization force, and the countries
listed below have begun implementing pledges of troops and or police or support
personnel. The commitments of several nations, including Germany, France, India,
and Turkey appear to be contingent on whether the U.N. Security Council authorizes
such a force, and several nations appear to require U.S. or other funding in order to
participate. Secretary of State Powell said on July 16, 2003, that the United States
is discussing with other countries the possibility of seeking formal U.N. backing for
a multilateral peacekeeping force.
The United Kingdom and Poland have offered to lead multinational divisions
in that mission in southern Iraq and central Iraq, respectively. The United States and
Poland reached agreement in late July 2003 for the United States to fund the
deployment of the Polish force, support valued at about $250 million. The UK-led
force is to number about 14,000, of which all but 2,000 are British forces. The
Polish-led force is to number about 9,200, of which 2,300 will be Polish. The
pledged forces listed below have begun deploying to Iraq as of early August 2003,
and there are now about 21,000 non-U.S. troops on the ground (including 11,000
British), as of August 18, 2003. Confirmed pledges include those in Table 1.
CRS-28
Table 1. Multinational Division Force Pledges
Azerbaijan 150
Bulgaria 500
Czech Republic 400
Denmark 380
Dominican Republic 300
El Salvador 300
Estonia 55
Georgia 100
Honduras 300
Hungary 300
Italy 3,000 (mostly military police)
Japan 1,000 (logistics and combat support)
Latvia 150
Lithuania 85
Macedonia 28
Mongolia 200
Netherlands 1,100
Nicaragua 300
Norway 150
Philippines 500
Poland 2,300
Portugal 120
Romania 150
Slovakia 85
South Korea 700 (mostly medical)
Spain 1,300
Ukraine 1650
Total Non-U.S./U.K 16,600
CRS-29
The United States has had some discussions with NATO on whether the
organization would take on Iraq as a fifth peacekeeping mission. However, on July
17, NATO secretary general George Robertson said the body had no plans for a
greater role beyond providing logistical help to the Polish-led force in Iraq. On July
10, 2003, the Senate adopted an amendment, by a vote of 97-0, to a State Department
authorization bill (S. 925) calling on the Administration to formally ask NATO to
lead a peacekeeping force for Iraq. A related bill (H.R. 2112) was introduced in the
House on May 15, 2003.
Other countries have also agreed to provide funding for reconstruction.
According to the June 30, 2003, report to Congress by the Administration, the
following countries have made financial pledges for Iraq reconstruction: United
Kingdom ($177.1 million); Japan ($101.8 million); Australia ($60.5 million); UAE
($47.6 million); Canada ($41.2 million); Saudi Arabia ($36.6 million); Spain ($32.2
million); Kuwait ($27.5 million); the European Commission ($26.3 million); and
Italy ($22.4 million).
U.N. Role in Post-War Iraq. Just after the fall of Saddam Hussein’s regime,
the United States and its European allies and other countries reached a measure of
agreement on a U.N. role in post-war Iraq. Resolution 1483, which was adopted
unanimously, provided for a U.N. special representative to coordinate the activities
of U.N. personnel in Iraq and to help establish a successor government. The
SecretaryGeneral subsequently(May27, 2003) appointed Brazilian diplomat Sergio
Vieira de Mello for that post. The resolution also gave the United Nations a
monitoring role over the Development Fund for Iraq, a fund that will handle Iraq’s
oil revenues until there is a successor government. The resolution did not authorize
a return to Iraq of U.N. weapons inspectors, although the resolution provides for
deliberations on that issue. Some International Atomic Energy Agency inspectors
returned to Iraq in June 2003 on a limited nuclear mission in Baghdad. As noted
above, some countries are conditioning any contribution of peacekeeping troops to
Iraq on a formal U.N. authorization, a step the Administration now appears to be
weighing. On the other hand, the Washington Post reported on August 2, 2003, that
the Administration did not want to agree to a U.N. resolution that dilutes its
prerogatives in Iraq, particularlyits authorityin determining a new political structure.
The World Bank, which visited Iraq in late July 2003, said it would resume lending
to Iraq after it conducts national elections.
On August 14, 2003, the U.N. Security Council adopted a compromise
resolution. The Resolution, 1500, welcomed, but did not “endorse,” the formation
of the Governing Council, an apparent nod to U.S. requests. The resolution also
enhanced U.N. authority in Iraq somewhat by establishing a “U.N. Assistance
Mission for Iraq,” which is headed in Iraq by de Mello. The resolution did not
formally authorize an international peacekeeping force for Iraq (Resolution 1483
already “calls on” governments to contribute forces for stabilization) and did not
measurably dilute U.S. authority over post-war governance in Iraq. The resolution
did not appear to meet the requirements of France and others for them to donate
peacekeeping forces.
CRS-30
Fate of the Deposed Regime
An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is whether Saddam
Hussein and his associates should be prosecuted for war crimes and crimes against
humanity, if and when they are caught. The Administration said in early April 2003
that Saddam and his inner circle should be tried by Iraqis if they are captured,
although others might be tried by a U.S.-led process for any crimes committed in the
course of the 2003 war. In the year prior to the war, the Administration was
gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those it had
sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay (killed after discovery
by and a firefight with U.S. forces in Mosul on July 22, 2003); Ali Hassan al-Majid,
for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (he was reported by British officers
to have died in an early April air strike on his home in Basra, although that is now in
question); Muhammad Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered in mid-April 2003); Taha
Yasin Ramadan; first Vice President and number three in the regime; Izzat Ibrahim,
Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council and formally number two
in the regime; Barzan al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother (captured in mid-April 2003);
Watban al-Tikriti (captured in April 2003) and Sabawi al-Tikriti, both other half
brothers of Saddam and former leaders of regime intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz,
deputy Prime Minister and foremost regime spokesman (surrendered in May 2003);
and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait during Iraq’s occupation of that country
(apprehended in May 2003).
Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials
sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured
or surrendered. As of mid-July 2003, according to Coalition Provisional Authority
officials, more than half of the Iraqis on the list of 55 are now in custody or are
confirmed killed. Among the others apprehended are Amir al-Saadi, chief science
adviser to Saddam; Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti, a son-in-law of Saddam; Vice President
Taha Muhi ad-Din Ma’ruf; and suspected WMD manager Hoda Mahdi Salih al-
Ammash.
The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and
the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29,
1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related
atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for
FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress
that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal
for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137
(passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March
13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October
31, 1998).
A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993,
after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the United States has supported
INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the
arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the
Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer,
said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established,
focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical
CRS-31
weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds)
and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which
an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against
Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes
against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations.
In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a
U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war
crimes is formed.
Congressional Reactions
Congress, like the Administration, had divergent views on the mechanisms for
promoting regime change, although there was widespread agreement in Congress that
regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S. policy. There was substantial
disagreement over whether a major military offensive was the most desirable option
for achieving that objective. On December 20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75,
by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a
“mounting threat” to the United States. The resolution did not call for new U.S. steps
to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few Members called for the overthrow of
Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in support of the resolution.
In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq,
some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint
appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on
Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations
Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the
opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an
option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In
early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members — Senators John
McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and
Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr.
— wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for
operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter,
Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S.
assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish
areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and
other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to
accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.”
As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002,
Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result.
Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force
against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce
U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on
October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote
of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243).
The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. Prior to the war, it held
several hearings on the progress of post-war reconstruction. During the war and in
CRS-32
its aftermath, several Members applauded the performance of the U.S. military and
the overthrow of the regime. Some Members, however, have criticized the
Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war period in light of major
looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the regime. Criticism of post-war
planning has escalated as attacks on U.S. occupation forces have mounted, although
the Administration and others say U.S. casualties are relatively light and that the
resistance is not jeopardizing overall U.S. objectives for Iraq. Several Committees
are conducting inquiries into why substantial amounts of WMD have not been found
in Iraq to date. Some Members of both parties have also expressed concern about the
costs of the U.S. occupation, and several Members have called on the Administration
to take greater steps to persuade other countries to share the burden of peacekeeping
in and reconstruction of Iraq.
CRS-33
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition
Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.)
to the Opposition
(Figures in millions of dollars)
INC War
Crimes Broadcasting
Unspecified
Opposition
Activities
Total
FY 1998
(P.L. 105-174)
2.0 5.0
(RFE/RL)
3.0 10.0
FY 1999
(P.L. 105-277)
3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0
FY 2000
(P.L. 106-113)
2.0 8.0 10.0
FY 2001
(P.L. 106-429)
12.0
(aid
distribution
inside Iraq)
2.0 6.0
(INC radio)
5.0 25.0
FY 2002
(P.L. 107-115)
25.0 25.0
Total,
FY1998-FY2002
15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0
FY2003
(no earmark)
3.1
(announced
April 2003)
6.9
(remaining
to be
allocated)
10.0
FY2004
(request)
0 0
Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq
Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97
million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent,
as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided,
the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and
FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be
used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N.
programs.
Another version (English): 4 August 2003 — RL31339_2003-08-04.pdf
Order Code RL31339
CRS Report for Congress
Received through the CRS Web
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
Updated August 4, 2003
Kenneth Katzman
Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs
Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division
Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
Summary
In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized
Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to abandon
its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs as required by U.N. Security
Council resolutions and the potential for it to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. In
September 2002, the President told the U.N. General Assembly that unless Iraq fully
disarmed in cooperation with United Nations weapons inspectors, the United States
would lead a coalition to achieve that disarmament militarily, making clear that this
would include the ouster of Iraq’s President Saddam Hussein’s regime. After a
November 2002 - March 2003 round of U.N. inspections in which Iraq’s cooperation
was mixed, on March 19, 2003, the United States launched “Operation Iraqi
Freedom,” to disarm Iraq and change its regime. The regime fell on April 9, 2003.
In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change
through U.S.-led military action would yield benefits beyond disarmament and
reduction of support for terrorism; benefits such as liberation of the Iraqi people
from an oppressive regime and promotion of stability and democracy throughout the
Middle East. The goal of regime change in Iraq had been declared U.S. policy since
November 1998, and U.S. efforts to oust Saddam had been pursued, with varying
degrees of intensity, since the end of the Gulf war in 1991. These efforts primarily
involved U.S. financial backing for opposition groups inside and outside Iraq, several
of which are now contending for power in post-Saddam Iraq. Past efforts to change
the regime floundered because of limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the
Iraqi opposition, and the efficiency and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping
intelligence and security forces. Previous U.S. Administrations ruled out major U.S.
military action to change Iraq’s regime, believing such action would be costly, risky,
and not necessarily justified by the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD
disarmament.
The leadership and precise shape of the permanent government that will replace
Saddam Hussein’s Baath Party are yet to be determined. Some Administration
officials reportedly had hoped that major military and governmental defections from
the Hussein regime would serve as the core of a successor government. However,
no senior Hussein regime figures defected, and formerly exiled opposition groups
form the core of a U.S.-appointed 25-seat “governing council” that was unveiled on
July 13, 2003. It is hoped by the Administration that the formation of the council
will signal that Iraq is moving toward self rule and calm some of the resistance
against U.S. occupation forces in Iraq; resistance has killed 54 U.S. soldiers since
President Bush declared major combat operations ended on May 1, 2003.
This report will be updated as warranted by major developments.
Contents
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Sadr Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
The First Eligibility Designations Under the ILA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Monarchists/Sharif Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups . . . 11
Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Post-War Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
The Governing Council . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Post-War U.S. Operations and the Coalition Provisional
Authority (CPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Building Security Institutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Searching for Regime Violations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Recruiting Other Peacekeepers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
U.N. Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Reviving the Oil Industry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
War Crimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Congressional Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
The United States has sought to change Iraq’s regime since the 1991 Persian
Gulf war, although achieving this goal was not declared policy until 1998. In
November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass destruction
(WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United States would
seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A regime change
policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, October 31, 1998).
Bush Administration officials have emphasized regime change as the cornerstone of
U.S. policy toward Iraq since shortly after the September 11, 2001, attacks.
Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003, and had effectively
removed Saddam Hussein from power by April 9, 2003.
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam
Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an
operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George
H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end
of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and
Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope
of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions. The revolt in southern Iraq reached
the suburbs of Baghdad, but the well-trained and loyal Republican Guard forces had
survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from battle prior to the U.S.
ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid-March 1991. Many Shiites
blamed the United States for not supporting their uprising and standing aside as the
regime retaliated against those who participated in the rebellion. Kurds, benefitting
from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991, were able to drive Iraqi
troops out of much of northern Iraq and establish an autonomous zone there and
subsequently remained largely free of Baghdad’s rule.
According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite
uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding
stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup
against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that
purpose. The Administration apparently believed — and this view apparently was
shared by many experts and U.S. officials — that a coup by elements within the
current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq.
Manyobservers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and
Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and
tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria.
CRS-2
Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition
Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that
the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment
within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision
was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the
diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the
Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and
diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This
opposition coalition was seen as providing a vehicle for the United States to build a
viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert
support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.1
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi
The growing opposition coalition took concrete shape in an organization called
the Iraqi National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two
main Kurdish militias, the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic
Union of Kurdistan (PUK), participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens
of opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came into the
coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq.
The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi
ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military
officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC
with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups
publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests,
including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the
preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. SecurityCouncil
resolutions on Iraq.2 However, many observers doubted its commitment to
democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and
because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies. The
INC’s first Executive Committee consisted of KDP leader Masud Barzani, ex-Baath
Party and military official Hassan Naqib, and moderate Shiite cleric Mohammad
Bahr al-Ulum. (Barzani and Bahr al-Ulum are now on the 25-member post-war
Governing Council, and both are part of the nine member rotating presidency of the
Council.
Ahmad Chalabi. When the INC was formed, its Executive Committee
selected Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 58 years old, a secular Shiite Muslim from
a prominent banking family, to run the INC on a daily basis. Chalabi was educated
in the United States as a mathematician. He fled Iraq to Jordan in 1958, when the
Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military coup. This coup occurred 10
1 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2,
1992.
2 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by
INC representatives, February 1993.
CRS-3
years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July 1968). In 1978, he founded the
Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian authorities on charges of
financial malfeasance and he left Jordan, possibly with some help from members of
Jordan’s royal family, in 1989. The Jordanian government subsequently re-
capitalized the bank with national funds. In 1992, he was convicted in absentia of
embezzling $70 million from the bank and sentenced to 22 years in prison. Chalabi
maintains that the Jordanian government was pressured by Iraq to turn against him,
and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to the Jordanian government. In April
2003, senior Jordanian officials, including King Abdullah, called Chalabi “divisive”
and stopped just short of saying he would be unacceptable to Jordan as leader of Iraq.
Chalabi’s critics acknowledge that, despite allegations about his methods, he has
been single-minded in his determination to overthrow Saddam Hussein, and he is
said to be the favorite of those Administration officials, particularly in the
Department of Defense, that were the most supportive of changing Iraq’s regime by
force.
Since Chalabi returned to Iraq, there have been no large public demonstrations
supportive of him or the INC, indicating that he does not have a large following
inside Iraq. However, anecdotal press reporting suggest that he has attracted some
support from those Iraqis that most welcome the U.S. military offensive against Iraq
as liberation from Saddam Hussein’s regime and who believe the U.S. presence is
needed to ensure security and facilitate reconstruction. On April 6, Chalabi and
about 700 INC fighters (“Free Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by the U.S. military from
their base in the north to the Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs
in southern Iraq. Chalabi and some Free Iraqi Forces later deployed to Baghdad and
other parts of Iraq. After establishing his headquarters in Baghdad, Chalabi tried to
build support by searching for members of the former regime and arranging for U.S.
military forces in Iraq to provide security or other benefits to his potential supporters.
However, the Free Iraqi Forces accompanying Chalabi were disbanded following the
U.S. decision in mid-May 2003 to disarm independent militias and to temporarily
delay the formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority.
A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book
“Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq,” detailing alleged Iraqi regime
human rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracyfor Iraq, including
full rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he teaches
Middle Eastern politics at Brandeis University. Another INC activist, Mohammed
al-Zubaidi, declared himself in charge of Baghdad in mid-April, but U.S. officials did
not recognize him as mayor and detained him in April 2003.
Chalabi is part of a grouping of seven major party leaders that have been
meeting since the period prior to the war. As discussed below, the seven-party
leadership grouping was hoping to become the core of a successor regime, and the
seven parties are represented on the 25 seat Governing Council unveiled on July 13,
2003. Chalabi is a member of the Governing Council and one of the nine selected
to rotate the presidency of the Council.
The Kurds/KDP and PUK. The Kurds, probably the most pro-U.S. of all
the groups in Iraq, do not have ambitions to play a major role in governing Arab Iraq,
but Iraq’s neighbors have always been fearful that the Kurds might still seek outright
CRS-4
independence. In committing to the concept of federalism, the INC platform
assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq. Turkey, which
has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly
fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into
a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy
since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War
I. (Iraq became an independent Kingdom in 1932, although it remained under British
influence until the 1958 fall of the British-installed monarchy.) In 1961, the KDP,
then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP leader Masud Barzani’s
father, began an insurgency that has continued until today, although interrupted by
periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud Barzani’s brother, Idris,
commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the Iran-Iraq war but was killed in
that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from the KDP in 1965; the
PUK’s members are generally more well-educated, urbane, and left-leaning than
those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000-60,000 fighters,
some of which are trained in conventional military tactics. Both the KDP and the
PUK are part of the seven-party grouping that has now been incorporated into the
official 25-seat U.S.-backed Governing Council unveiled on July 13, 2003. Barzani
and Talabani are both part of the nine member rotating presidency of the Council.
Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties
enjoyed good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement
of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaykh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in
Halabja, Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical
attack on that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998.
A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam
(Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam).
This faction, led by Mullah Krekar (who was detained in Europe in August 2002 and
now lives in Norway), reportedly is associated with Al Qaeda and hosted in its
northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters who fled the U.S.-led war in Afghanistan.
Mullah Krekar reportedly studied under Shaykh Abdullah al-Azzam, an Islamic
theologian of Palestinian origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama bin Laden.
Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, during which its base was captured, about 8,000
people were in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, located near the town of Khurmal. This
included about 600 fighters.3 Fighters of Ansar al-Islam clashed with the PUK
around Halabja in December 2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedlyresponsible for
an assassination attempt against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002.
The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials
to be Abu Musab Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in
Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the
millennium celebration, the assassination in Jordan of U.S. diplomat Lawrence Foley
(2002), and to reported attempts in 2002 to spread the biological agent ricin in
London and possibly other places in Europe. In a presentation to the U.N. Security
Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied Zarqawi and Ansar al-
3 Chivers, C.J. New York Times, December 6, 2002.
Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.”
CRS-5
Islam to the Iraqi regime, which might have viewed Ansar al-Islam as a means of
pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents. Many experts believed Baghdad-Ansar
links were tenuous or even non-existent; Baghdad did not control northern Iraq even
before Operation Iraqi Freedom.4 Zarqawi’s current whereabouts are unknown,
although some unconfirmed press reports indicate he might have fled to Iran after the
fall of the Ansar camp to U.S.-led forces. Some press accounts in July 2003 say Iran
might have him in custody.
Shiite Islamist Organizations
Some outside experts have had concerns about the potential strength and
ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups in post-
Saddam Iraq. Shiite Islamist factions hold at least five seats on the Governing
Council unveiled July 13, 2003.
SCIRI/Badr Corps. The most well known among these is called the Supreme
Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member of the INC
in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC banner.
SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition groups
in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad Baqr al-
Hakim, was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head an Islamic Republic of
Iraq, a vision that, if realized, might conflict with U.S. plans to forge a democratic
Iraq. Baqr Al Hakim and his family fled Iraq to Iran in 1980, during a major
crackdown on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam feared that Iraqi
Shiite Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution in Iran in 1979,
posed a major threat to his regime. Prior to the formation of SCIRI, Hakim and his
family were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party (see below). Mohammed Baqr
is the son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a prominent Shiite leader
in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini when Khomeini was in exile
in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. In early May 2003, there were press reports that
Mohammed Baqr might resign from his formal SCIRI leadership post and try to
establish himself in the Shiite holy city of Najaf, Iraq, as an overarching Shiite
authority figure in the image of the late Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran. He returned to
Iraq on May 10, welcomed by large crowds in Basra and Najaf, where he is now
based.
In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about
10,000-15,000 fighters/activists organized into a “Badr Corps” (named after a major
battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from Iran
into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. The Badr Corps is headed by
Mohammed Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim, who returned to Iraq on
April 20, 2003, to pave the way for Mohammed Baqr’s return. (Another Hakim
brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan in May 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s
security services.) Iran’s Revolutionary Guard, which is politically aligned with
Iran’s hard line civilian officials, has been the key patron of the Badr Corps,
providing it with weapons, funds, and other assistance. The Badr Corps fought
4 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire,
March 18, 2002.
CRS-6
alongside the Guard against Iraqi forces during the Iran-Iraq war. However, many
Iraqi Shiites view SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr Corps operations in
southern Iraq prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark broad popular unrest
against the Iraqi regime. Some Badr fighters deployed inside northern Iraq on the eve
of Operation Iraqi Freedom, and the New York Times reported on May 7, 2003, that
many Badr activists have infiltrated into Iraq to build support for SCIRI.
A variety of press reports say that individual militias now providing security in
many towns in southern Iraq are linked to the Badr Corps. One such militia is
derived from the fighters who challenged Saddam Hussein’s forces in the marsh
areas of southern Iraq, around the town of Amara, north of Basra. It goes by the
name Hizbollah (Party of God)-Amara, and it is headed by marsh guerrilla leader
Abdul Karim Muhammadawi, nicknamed “Prince of the Marshes” who was named
to the Governing Council on July 13, 2003. He is widely perceived as an ally of
SCIRI.
Until August 2002 when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures
for meetings in Washington, D.C., SCIRI had publicly refused to work openly with
the United States or accept U.S. assistance. Since the fall of the regime on April 9,
SCIRI leaders have criticized what they called an illegitimate U.S. occupation of Iraq
and have called for the rapid establishment of an Iraqi self-rule authority, while at the
same time opposing the use of violence against the occupation. Even though
Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim says he is for a democracy and would not seek to
establish an Iranian-style Islamic republic, U.S. officials are said to be mistrustful
of SCIRI and have been seeking to disarm its fighters. Suggesting that SCIRI sees
its interests in a degree of cooperation with the occupation, Abd al-Aziz al Hakim did
meet with other opposition leaders in late April 2003 at a post-war governance
planning session sponsored by U.S. officials. He has since helped constitute the
seven-party grouping that now constitutes a part of the 25-seat Governing Council.
Abd al-Aziz is part of the nine-person rotating presidency of the Council. Unlike
some other Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI has had good working relations with some
Sunni oppositionists and the Kurds.
SCIRI might get additional support from the family of the late Ayatollah
Khomeini. In July 2003, Khomeini’s grandson, Hassan Khomeini, who is about 45,
relocated from Qom, Iran to Najaf. Hassan Khomeini is believed to be an opponent
of the more militant Shiite clerics such as Moqtada Sadr (see below), who is also
considered a rival of SCIRI.
Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, perhaps Iraq’s oldest Shiite Islamist grouping,
continues to exist as a separate group, but many Da’wa activists appear to be at least
loosely allied with SCIRI. The party was founded in 1957 by a revered Iraqi Shiite
cleric, Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of Ayatollah
Khomeini. Baqr Al Sadr was hung by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the Da’wa’s
alleged responsibility in fomenting Shiite anti-regime unrest following Iran’s 1979
Islamic revolution. That unrest included an attempted assassination of senior Iraqi
leader Tariq Aziz. Da’wa was part of the seven-party council grouping that is now
been incorporated into the Governing Council. Da’wa’s spokesman, Ibrahim Jafari,
and its leader in Basra, Abdal Zahra Othman, are on the Governing Council, as is a
former Da’wa activist turned human rights activist, Muwaffaq Al-Ruba’i. Jafari is
CRS-7
one of the nine members of the Council that is rotating the presidency, and Jafari is
the first to take that post.
The Kuwaiti branch of the Da’wa Party allegedly was responsible for a May
1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks
on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The Hizballah organization in Lebanon
was founded by Lebanese clerics loyal to Ayatollah Baqr Al Sadr and the late
Ayatollah Khomeini, and there continue to be linkages between Hizballah and the
Da’wa Party. The Hizballah activists who held U.S. hostages in that country during
the 1980s often linked release of the Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party
prisoners held by Kuwait for those offenses. Some Iraqi Da’wa members look to
Lebanon’s senior Shiite cleric Mohammed Hossein Fadlallah, who was a student and
protege of Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, for spiritual guidance.
Sadr Movement. Members of the clan of the late Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr
Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq. Although the Al Sadr clan
has been closely identified with the Da’wa Party, it appears that members of the clan
and their followers currently are operating in post-war Iraq as grouping separate from
the Da’wa. Another revered member of the clan, Mohammed Sadiq Al Sadr, and
two of his sons, were killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999. A surviving son,
Moqtada al-Sadr, who is about 27 years old, has attempted to rally his followers to
attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite politics. He and his clan apparently
have a large following in the Shiite neighborhoods of Baghdad, which, after the fall
of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr City,” from the former name
of “Saddam City.” However, Moqtada is viewed by Iran and many Iraqi Shiites as
a young radical who lacks religious and political weight. To compensate for his lack
of religious credentials, he has sought spiritual authority for his actions from exiled
Iraqi senior cleric, Ayatollah Kazem Haeri, who is living in Qom, Iran. An alternate
interpretation by some experts is that Haeri is acting at the direction of Iran’s
leadership to keep Moqtada Sadr under a measure of control. Moqtada’s reputation
may have been tarnished in early April when Moqtada al Sadr reportedly killed Abd
al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Abdol Qasem Musavi-Khoi,
shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al-Majid Khoi headed the
Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq after U.S.-led forces took
Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political doctrines of Ayatollah
Khomeini of Iran.
The Sadr grouping was not part of the seven-party grouping that has been
incorporated into the U.S.-backed Governing Council. Neither Moqtada nor any
other known Sadr faction members are on the Governing Council. In July 2003, Sadr
began giving sermons in and around Najaf stridently opposing the U.S. occupation,
and his aides began recruiting for an “Islamic army,” for now unarmed, that Sadr says
must challenge U.S. occupation forces. He is also openly calling for a cleric-led
Islamic state similar to that of Iran.
Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah. The revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al-
Sistani, based in Najaf, is also emerging as a major potential force in post-war Iraq.
He is the most senior of the four Shiite clerics that lead the Najaf- based “Hawza al-
Ilmiya,” a major grouping of seminaries and Shiite clerics. The Hawza, which is well
funded through donations, is becoming an important source of political authority in
CRS-8
the Shiite regions of Iraq, hiring Iraqis to perform functions performed by the former
regime and issuing directives, often obeyed, for some Iraqi civil servants to return to
work. Sistani himself, now free of a long house arrest at the hands of Baghdad, has
a large following of former students throughout the Shiite portions of Iraq. During
the U.S.-led war against Iraq, Moqtada al-Sadr and his followers reportedly tried to
intimidate Sistani by surrounding his office in Najaf with armed gunmen, a tactic that
many experts say has led Sistani and the Hawza to ally with SCIRI in the intra-Shiite
power struggle. Sistani, who is of Iranian ethnicity, is considered to be in the
tradition of Ayatollah Khoi in opposing a direct role for clerics in governmental
affairs, and Sistani and the Hawza have spoken against a direct role for the clerics in
governing post-war Iraq. However, in early July 2003, Sistani began to take a more
active role in Iraq’s post-war decision-making by issuing a statement that only
elected Iraqis — not a U.S.-appointed governing council — should draft a
constitution.
Islamic Amal. SCIRI has been allied with another Shiite Islamist organization
called the Islamic Amal (Action) Organization. In the early 1980s, Islamic Amal was
under the SCIRI umbrella but later broke with it. It is headed by Mohammed Taqi
Modarassi, who returned to Iraq from exile in Iran in April 2003, after Saddam
Hussein’s regime fell. Islamic Amal, which has a following among Shiite Islamists
mainly in Karbala, conducted attacks against Saddam Hussein’s regime in the 1980s.
However, it does not appear to have a following nearly as large as SCIRI or the other
Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s brother, Abd al-Hadi, headed the Islamic Front
for the Liberation of Bahrain, which tried to stir up Shiite unrest against the Bahrain
regime in the 1980s and 1990s (see below). Since returning to Iraq, Mohammad
Taqi has argued against violent opposition to the U.S. occupation, saying that such
a challenge would plunge Iraq into civil warfare.
Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups
The differences among the various anti-Saddam organizations led to the near
collapse of the U.S. regime change effort the mid-1990s. In May 1994, the KDP and
the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs revenues levied at
border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s government based in
Irbil. The PUK lined up support from Iran while the KDP sought and received
countervailing backing from its erstwhile nemesis, the Baghdad government. The
infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC offensive against Iraqi troops in March
1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at the last minute. Although it was
repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of the less well-trained and poorly
motivated Iraqi units facing the Kurds. Some INC leaders point to the battle as an
indication that the INC could have succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. military
help, had it been given additional resources and training in the 1990s.
The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition in the
mid-1990s caused the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by
CRS-9
renewing ties to a non-INC group, Iraq National Accord (INA).5 The INA, originally
founded in 1990 with Saudi support, consists of military and security defectors who
were perceived as having ties to disgruntled officials currently serving within their
former organizations. It is headed by Dr. Iyad Alawi, former president of the Iraqi
Student Union in Europe and a physician by training. He is a secular Shiite Muslim,
but most of the members of the INA are Sunni Muslims. The INA’s prospects
appeared to brighten in August 1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al-
Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons of mass destruction programs — defected to
Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip on the military and security services was
weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate from there.
The INA was ultimately penetrated by Iraq’s intelligence services and, in June 1996,
Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by arresting or executing over 100 INA
sympathizers in the military.
Iraq’s counteroffensive against the opposition was expanded two months after
the arrests of the INA sympathizers. In late August 1996, the KDP asked Baghdad
to provide armed support for its capture of Irbil from the rival PUK. Iraq took
advantage of the request to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in
northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout northern Iraq.
In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred
oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated
from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists,
mostly from the INC.
Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA continued to
operate throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt itself to some extent since the
June 1996 arrests. However, it does not appear to have a large following in the Iraqi
regime and did not announce any key defections from the regime during Operation
Iraqi Freedom, nor has it since found or captured any former regime leaders.
Although it has was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war,
there is a history of friction between the two groups; the INA reportedly bombed an
INC facility in northern Iraq in October 1995. Iyad Alawi represented the INA in the
seven-party grouping that negotiated the formation of the U.S.-backed Governing
Council; and Alawi has been named a member of that Council. He is also one of the
nine Council members that will rotate its presidency.
Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks
For the two years following the anti-Saddam opposition groups’ 1996 setbacks,
the Clinton Administration had little contact with these groups. In those two years,
the INC, INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations
and their ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998,
then Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations
subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations”
about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish.
5 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret
War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997.
CRS-10
Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections
during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam
Hussein. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with an
FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, signed May1, 1998) that, among
other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the
opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free
Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October
1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to
coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to
highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions. The remaining $2 million was used
to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the
documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes,
and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In
subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for
war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix. Some of the war crimes funding has
gone to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War
Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues.
Iraq Liberation Act
The clearest indication of congressional support for a more active U.S.
overthrow effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998: the Iraq
Liberation Act (ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998).
The ILA gave the President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles
(and authorized $2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be
designated by the Administration. (An FY2003 supplemental appropriation, P.L.
108-11, added $86.5 million to the allowed draw-down ceiling to enable additional
funds to flow to groups helping the United States in Operation Iraqi Freedom. The
supplemental brought the total authorized under the Act to $183 million.) The Act’s
passage was widely interpreted as an expression of congressional support for the
concept of promoting an insurgency by using U.S. air-power to expand opposition-
controlled territory. This idea was advocated by Chalabi and some U.S. experts, such
as General Wayne Downing, who subsequently became a National Security Council
official on counter-terrorism in the first two years of the George W. Bush
Administration. President Clinton signed the legislation despite reported widespread
doubts within the Clinton Administration about the chances of success in promoting
an opposition insurgency inside Iraq.
The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting
regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it
should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime
headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly
articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq.
The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the
height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in
which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United
Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were
withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign
against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December
CRS-11
16-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq:
Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.)
The First Eligibility Designations Under the ILA. Further steps to
promote regime change followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, a career
diplomat, Frank Ricciardone, was named as a State Department’s “Coordinator for
the Transition in Iraq” — the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999,
after consultations with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13)
that the following organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance
under the Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the
Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the Movement for Constitutional
Monarchy (MCM). Because of its possible role in contributing to the formation of
Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001, although it was not
formally taken off the ILA eligibility list.
Monarchists/Sharif Ali. The MCM is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a
relative of the Hashemite monarchs (cousin of King Faysal II, the last Iraqi monarch)
that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. Sharif Ali claims to be the
leading heir to the former Hashemite monarchy, although there are other claimants,
mostly based in Jordan. The MCM was considered a small movement that could not
contribute much to the pre-war overthrow effort. In the post-war period, Sharif Ali
returned to Iraq on June 10, 2003, to a small but apparently enthusiastic welcome.
He did not participate in the seven-party grouping that negotiated with the U.S.-led
occupation authority on the formation of the Governing Council, and neither Sharif
Ali nor any of his followers was appointed to the Governing Council.
In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton
Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and
“non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999 - 2000, about 150
opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in
Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses providing civil affairs
training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers,
communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However,
the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficientlyorganized
to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This
restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the
effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United
States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The trainees during
1999-2000 are not believed to have been brought into the Operation Iraqi Freedom
effort against the regime, or into the Free Iraqi Forces that deployed to Iraq toward
the end of the active combat phase of the war.
Continued Doubts About the Capabilities
of the Anti-Saddam Groups
During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end
the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of
Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed
disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the
CRS-12
opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an
indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical that a renewed overthrow
effort would fare better than previous attempts. The Clinton Administration
maintained that the Iraqi opposition would not succeed unless backed by direct U.S.
military involvement, and that direct U.S. military action was risky and not justified
by the degree of threat posed by Iraq. Critics of the Clinton Administration policy
on Iraq maintained that the potential threat from Saddam Hussein’s regime was
sufficiently grave that direct U.S. military action should be taken. Others suggested
the Clinton Administration should focus instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq
by threatening force if Iraq refused to permit re-entry into Iraq of the U.N. weapons
inspectors that left Iraq in December 1998.
As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a
provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed
November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the
Iraqi people,” of which at least $12 million was for the INC to distribute
humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million
was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million
could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive
assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC
distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000, the Clinton Administration
reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in
FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop an aid distribution plan
and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before
it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that
noted that any INC effort to distribute aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control
would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and
to any relief distributors with which the INC contracts.6
Bush Administration Policy
Bush Administration policy toward Iraq changed after the September 11, 2001
terrorist attacks, even though no significant evidence linking Iraq to those attacks
came to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in
President Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he
characterized Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea.
Pre-September 11 Policy
Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic
elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus
within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow
strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq,
which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its
taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist
6 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.”
January 17, 2001.
CRS-13
regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan: a modification of the U.N.
sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technology reached Iraq. His
plan offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N.
restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military
technology.7
The Administration believed that the proposal, by easing the suffering of the
Iraqi people, would cause Iraq’s neighbors and other countries to cease unilateral
violations of the sanctions regime. Powell, who had openly expressed skepticism
about the opposition’s prospects, barelyraised the regime change issue during his trip
or in his March 7, 2001, testimony before the House International Relations
Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.8 After about a year of
negotiations among the Security Council permanent members, the major feature of
the smart sanctions plan — new procedures that virtually eliminate U.N. review of
civilian exports to Iraq — was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Security Council
Resolution 1409).
Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime
change policy, many of the questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy
that had faced previous administrations were debated early in the Bush
Administration.9 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush
Administration did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first year.
During his confirmation hearings as DeputySecretaryof Defense, a leading advocate
of overthrowing Iraq’s regime, Paul Wolfowitz, said that he did not yet see a
“plausible plan” for changing the regime. Like its predecessor, the Bush
Administration initially declined to provide the opposition with lethal aid, combat
training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the separate
State Department position of “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” further casting
doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy. On February 2, 2001, the Bush
Administration confirmed that, shortly after President Bush took office, the Treasury
Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted the INC a license to
proceed with information gathering inside Iraq only, and not actual distribution of
humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the Administration amounted to a
withholding of U.S. backing for the INC plan to rebuild its presence inside Iraq.
Many in Congress, on the other hand, continued to support the INC as the
primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional
sentiment, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite
doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television
broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the
7 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food
Program.
8 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times,
March 2, 2001.
9 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh,
Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002.
CRS-14
ESF aid appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an estimated
additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.10
Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime
Bush Administration policytoward Iraq became notablymore assertive after the
September 11, 2001 attacks, stressing regime change far more than containment.
Almost immediately after the U.S.-led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in
Afghanistan began in early October 2001, speculation began building that the
Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use of military force
as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism. Some U.S. officials reportedly
believed that the United States needed to respond to the September 11 attacks by
ending any or all regimes that support terrorist groups, including Iraq. As noted
above, in his January 29, 2002 State of the Union message, President Bush named
Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with North Korea and Iran. Vice President
Cheney visited the Middle East in March 2002 reportedly to consult regional
countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq militarily, although the countries
visited reportedlyurged greater U.S. attention to the Arab-Israeli dispute and opposed
confrontation with Iraq.
The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for
confronting Iraq were (1) its purported refusal to end its WMD programs, and (2) its
ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of
conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. The Administration added that
regime change would have the further benefit of liberating the Iraqi people and
promoting stability in the Middle East, possibly facilitating a resolution to the Arab-
Israeli dispute.
Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s
regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax
mailings, senior U.S. officials said in the runup to the war that there was evidence
of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. Secretary of State Powell, as noted above, cited
intelligence information that Ansar al-Islam and its enclave leader Abu Musab al-
Zarqawi (see above) had links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.11 Other senior officials
cited intelligence information that Iraq provided advice and training to Al Qaeda in
the manufacture and use of chemical weapons, although Administration information
appears to date to the early 1990s when Iraq, largely isolated after the first Gulf war,
was politically close to Sudan. Al Qaeda founder Osama Bin Laden was based in
Sudan during that time (1991-1996). The Bush Administration did not extensively
cite reports that Czech intelligence believed that Iraqi intelligence had met with lead
September 11 hijacker Mohammad Atta in Prague in spring 2001, suggesting official
skepticism of those reports. Some outside commentators believed that those reports
indicated a direct Iraqi connection to the September 11 attacks.
10 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001.
11 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002.
CRS-15
Some outside observers expressed skepticism about Iraq-Al Qaeda connections
because of the ideological differences between Saddam Hussein’s secular regime and
Al Qaeda’s Islamist character. Others noted that bin Laden sought to raise an Islamic
army to fight Saddam’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990, arguing against the need for U.S.
troops, and that he was more an enemy of Saddam Hussein than an ally. Those
differences were evident in a February 12, 2003, bin Laden statement referring to
Saddam Hussein’s regime as socialist and infidel, although the statement exhorted
Iraq to resist impending U.S. military action. In the Administration view, the two
shared similar anti-U.S. goals, which outweighed ideological differences and
propelled them into tactical or strategic cooperation.
WMD Threat Perception. In arguing for military action, U.S. officials
maintained that Iraq’s purported commitment to developing WMD — coupled with
its support for terrorist groups to which Iraq might transfer WMD — constituted an
unacceptable potential threat to the United States and that major U.S. military action
was justified if Iraq refused to disarm voluntarily. U.S. officials said the September
11, 2001 attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to
gather before acting, but must instead act preemptively or preventively. Senior U.S.
officials asserted a WMD threat as follows:
! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years
since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply
with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8,
2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs.
However, statements by U.N. weapons inspectors after inspections
resumed November 27, 2002 indicated they believed Iraq did not
have an active nuclear weapons program, and that inspections on
other weapons categories were making progress.
! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and
against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not
necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States
or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against
adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of
destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of
massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the
1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings of
retaliation and did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war.
! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who
could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths
in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of this view cited
presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in October 2002,
portions of which were released publicly, stating the CIA view that
Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to terrorists if the United States
were to attack Iraq. At that point, according to that argument,
Saddam Hussein would be left with little incentive not to cooperate
with terrorist groups capable of striking at U.S. interests. No WMD
was used against Iraq during Operation Iraqi Freedom, and little
evidence of in-country weapons of mass destruction have thus far
CRS-16
been found, although the Administration asserts that such weapons
will eventually be found in Iraq by the U.S.-led coalition.
Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam
As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action against Iraq, the
Bush Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its
capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002,
President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special
operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and
Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups — the INC, the
INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM — to Washington for meetings with
senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were
held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S.
government, which tended to favor different opposition groups.
In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August
15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in ESF to the Iraqi
National Congress (INC), funds that had been held up due to differences between the
State Department and the INC over what activities would be funded. The $8 million
was to be used to fund the INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its
offices in Washington, London, Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate
its Al Mutamar newspaper and Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund
the information gathering portion of the INC’s activities; the State Department had
refused to fund those activities, which are conducted inside Iraq, because of strains
between the INC and other opposition groups and questions about INC use of U.S.
funds.
In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and
to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic-
based groups. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had
increasing contact include the following:
! Iraqi National Movement. It formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the
INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib
(who was part of an early leadership body of the INC); Hatim
Mukhlis, who claimed support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan; and
ex-senior military officer Khalid al-Ubaydi.
! Iraqi National Front. Another grouping of ex-military officers,
founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite
Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and
participated and was wounded in the anti-Saddam uprisings
immediately following the 1991 Gulf war.
! Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement. Established in 1996 by
ex-military officer Najib al-Salhi. This group worked closely with
the INC. Salhi defected in 1995 after serving as commander of
several tank units in the Republican Guard and regular military.
CRS-17
! Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was
formally established on August 1, 2002, and was headed by Wafiq
al-Samarra’i, a former head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief
of staff of Iraq’s military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was
based in Denmark since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member.
Khazraji was placed under travel restrictions by Danish officials in
late November 2002 after saying he wanted to leave Denmark. He
is under investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of
chemical weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities
said on March 17, 2003 that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his
home there,12 although his current whereabouts are unknown.
! Iraqi Turkmen Front. A small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping,
generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq.
Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq.
! The Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another
Shiite Islamic Party, but it is considered substantially less pro-
Iranian than SCIRI or the Da’wa Party (see above). The Islamic
Accord is headed by Jamil Wakil. Many Accord members are
followers of Ayatollah Shirazi, an Iranian cleric who was the
spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation
of Bahrain (IFLB), which allegedly attempted to overthrow the
government of Bahrain in the early 1980s.
! The Assyrian Democratic Movement, an ethnic-based movement
headed by Secretary-General Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s
Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq. There is a
strong diaspora presence in the United States as well. After building
ties to this group over the past year, the Bush Administration
formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement
into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002.
(Kanna is on the 25-seat Governing Council.)
Second ILA Designations. The Bush Administration applauded efforts
during 2001 and 2002 by these groups to hold meetings to coordinate with each
other and with the INC and other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London
and jointly run with the INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers. However, since
the regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, virtually none of the ex-military led
groups listed above has openly sought a major role in post-Saddam Iraq.
On December 9, 2002, as the decision whether to launch military action
approached, President Bush issued a determination to draw down the remaining $92
million in defense articles and services authorized under the Iraq Liberation Act for
the INA, the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi
opposition groups designated byme under the Act before or after this determination.”
That same day, the Bush Administration added six of the factions discussed above
12 ‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper. Agence France Press, April 7, 2003.
CRS-18
(except the Higher Council for National Salvation) to the list of “democratic
opposition organizations” eligible to receive draw downs under the ILA. This latter
phrase suggested that some of the draw downs would go to the six additional groups
designated on December 9, 2002, as eligible to receive ILA draw downs. The
announcement appeared to be part of reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists
in tasks that could assist U.S. forces, possibly including combat units.13 An initial
group of 3,000 was selected, but only about 70 oppositionists completed training at
an air base (Taszar) in Hungary, according to press reports.14 These oppositionists
served with U.S. forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom as translators and mediators
between U.S. forces and local leaders, and most did not stay in Iraq, according to
observers.
As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began
planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002,
with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in
London. In advance of the meeting, the Bush Administration appointed NSC official
Zalmay Khalilzad to be a liaison to the Iraqi opposition. The conference was
organized by the same six groups whose leaders visited Washington in August 2002,
but included other groups as well, and they discussed whether the opposition should
declare a provisional government. The Administration opposed that step on the
grounds that doing so was premature and would give the impression that outside
powers were determining Iraq’s political structure.
The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65-member follow-up committee,
which some criticized as weighted heavily toward Shiite Islamist groups such as
SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24-27, 2003, in northern Iraq.
Against the urging of U.S. representatives at the meeting, the opposition agreed to
form a six man committee that would prepare for a transition regime, although it
stopped short of declaring a provisional government. The six-person committee
included PUK leader Jalal Talabani, KDP leader Masud Barzani, SCIRI leader
Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Iyad Alawi, and a former Iraqi
foreign minister Adnan Pachachi. All six groups of the above groups or personalities
are now on the U.S.-backed Governing Council named July 13, 2003.
Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the
new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete
disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if that country wanted to avert military
action. The Administration had been downplaying the goal of regime change after
President Bush’s September 12, 2002, speech before the United Nations General
Assembly, in which he focused on enforcing U.N. resolutions that require Iraqi
disarmament. However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change
goal after February 2002 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course. In the
Administration view, a friendly government in Baghdad was required if the
international community is to rid Iraq of WMD and links to terrorist groups.
13 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.”
Washington Post, October 19, 2002.
14 Williams, Daniel. “U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles.” Washington Post, December
18, 2002.
CRS-19
The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March breakdown of
U.N. diplomacyover whether the U.N. SecurityCouncil should authorize war against
Iraq for failing to complywith Resolution 1441. The diplomatic breakdown followed
several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by the director of the U.N. inspection
bodyUNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification, and Inspection Commission) Hans
Blix and the director of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA),
Mohammad al-Baradei, most recently on March 7, 2003. The briefings were
generally critical of Iraq for failing to pro-actively cooperate to clear up outstanding
questions about Iraq’s WMD program, but the latter two briefings (February 24 and
March 7) noted progress in clearing up outstanding WMD questions. The
Blix/Baradei briefings said Iraq had not accounted for its past WMD, but the two did
not state that they were certain that Iraq had retained WMD, or that they had
uncovered any banned WMD. Iraq declared short range ballistic missiles that were
determined by Blix to be of prohibited ranges, and Blix ordered Iraq to destroy them.
Iraq began the destruction prior to the launching of the U.S.-led war. (For more
detail on the final round of inspections and evidence of WMD programs found in the
post-war period, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117: Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N.
Requirements, and U.S. Policy.)
Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and
Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that
inspections should be given more time. They noted that Iraq was well contained by
sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones. Those who agreed with this
view maintained that, as long as Iraq allowed access to U.N. weapons inspections
under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national
security. The inspectors reported few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700
inspections of about 400 different sites, as of mid-March 2003. Others experts
believed that, even if Iraq were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could
have been deterred by U.S. overall strategic superiority, presumably including the
U.S. nuclear arsenal.
The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq
had not fundamentally decided to disarm, and was attempting to preserve WMD
capabilities. The Administration asserted on March 17, 2003, that diplomatic options
to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full attention to military action.
That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and his sons, Uday and Qusay,
an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war. They refused the
ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003.
In the war, Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and
British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the Iraqi military, at times, put
up stiff resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi militarycommanders
or Baathist political figures came forward to try to establish a post-Saddam
government, but senior regime leaders fled Baghdad, and the whereabouts of some
of the top leadership, including Saddam Hussein, is unknown. The outcome of a
post-war debate on the results of the war might depend on such factors as the pace
of reconstruction; the degree of resistance to the U.S.-led occupation; the amount
of WMD ultimately found, if any; and whether a new government is stable and
democratic.
CRS-20
Post-War Governance Issues
Since Saddam Hussein’s regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, there has
been increasing debate about governing post-war Iraq. The same U.S. concerns about
fragmentation of and instability in Iraq that existed in prior years are present in the
current debate over how to establish a post-war interim regime. Although some Iraqi
civilians have welcomed U.S. and British troops in areas captured, many Iraqis now
want U.S. and British forces to leave Iraq, and the top U.S. military commander in
the Persian Gulf theater, General John Abizaid, says that U.S. forces now face a
“classic guerrilla war.” Other experts fear that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall
under control of SCIRI and other Shiite Islamist forces who, as noted above, are well-
organized and are asserting growing control over areas inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites.
Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s population but have traditionally been under-
represented in Iraq’s Sunni Muslim-dominated government.
Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule
The Administration says that it will stay in Iraq until there is a stable,
democratic successor regime that is at peace with its neighbors. However, there has
been some debate between U.S. authorities and key anti-Saddam groups over how
and when to establish a successor regime. Senior U.S. officials, including deputy
Defense Secretary Paul Wolfowitz, had said in early April 2003 that they hoped to
have a successor regime in place within six months of the fall of the regime.
However, in mid-May 2003, U.S. officials, apparently fearing that existing major
groups could not form a stable regime, or that Shiite Islamists would dominate a
successor authority, backed away from any deadlines for establishing an Iraqi self-
rule authority. The anti-Saddam groups, led by the seven most active exile
opposition parties, asserted that Iraqis are sufficiently competent and unified to
rebuild Iraq after a war with the United States.
Shortly after the war, the United States began a process of establishing a
successor regime. The Administration organized an April 15 meeting, in Nasiriyah,
of about 100 Iraqis of varying ideologies, present by U.S. invitation. Many of the
attendees were representatives of Iraqi tribal groupings that had not been politically
active before. However, SCIRI, along with several Shiite clerics that have
appropriated authority throughout much of southern Iraq since the fall of the regime,
boycotted the meeting and called for an Islamic state and the withdrawal of U.S.
forces. Another meeting of about 250 delegates was held in Baghdad on April 26,
which ended in agreement to hold a broader meeting, within a month, to name an
interim Iraqi administration.
In parallel with the late April meeting in Baghdad, the five most prominent
exiled opposition groups met, with U.S. envoys present: SCIRI, the INC, the INA,
the PUK, and the KDP. At a subsequent meeting on May 9, 2003, the five agreed to
expand their grouping to seven, adding to their ranks the little known Nasir al-
Chadirchy, head of a party called the National Democratic Party of Iraq, as well as
the Da’wa Party. The “seven-party grouping” strongly criticized the U.S. decision
in mid-May 2003 to delay the formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority indefinitely
and to instead establish a purely advisory body of 25 to 30 Iraqis. The grouping
CRS-21
subsequently began meeting among itself and with U.S. occupation authorities to try
to obtain at least a partial reversal of that decision.
With U.S. casualties in Iraq mounting and a growing sense of resentment among
the Iraqi population, the U.S.-led occupation authority (Coalition Provisional
Authority, CPA) incorporated the views of the seven-party grouping. U.S.
administrator for Iraq Paul Bremer (see below) said on June 23, 2003, that the
planned 25-30 member body would have “real authority” from its first days. He said
it would nominate ministryheads, recommend policies, and convene a “constitutional
conference” to draft a new constitution.15
The Governing Council. On July 13, 2003, a Governing Council was
unveiled to the Iraqi public, appointed by the U.S.-led Coalition Provisional
Authority (CPA) but reflecting the influence of the seven-party grouping, as well as
prominent Iraqis who were never in exile and were not affiliated with the exiled
opposition. The Council has 25 members, of which 3 are women and 13 are Shiite
Muslims.
Of the 13 Shiite Muslims on the Council, one seat is held by SCIRI directly
(Abd al-Aziz Al Hakim, younger brother of Mohammad Baqr), one is held by a
guerrilla affiliated with SCIRI (Abdul Karim al-Muahmmadawi), two are Da’wa
Party (Ibrahim al-Jafari and Abdul Zahra Othman) leaders, and considered allies of
SCIRI, and one is a former Da’wa activist (Muwaffaq al-Ruba’i). Also on the
Council is a moderate Shiite cleric, Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum, considered pro-U.S.
and not affiliated with SCIRI or the Da’wa. He headed the Ahl al-Bayt charity center
in London since the 1980s. The remaining Shiite Muslims, such as Chalabi and Iyad
al-Alawi, are mostly considered secular. Appointed to the Council was one Sunni
Muslim Islamist, Muhsin Abdul Hamid, who heads the Iraqi Islamic Party, but he
does not have a clear affiliation or relationship with the Shiite Islamists on the
Council.
The Council includes five Kurds, including the two main Kurdish leaders Jalal
Talabani and Masud Barzani. The Kurds are generally considered pro-U.S. and
might be expected to vote the way the U.S.-led coalition wants.
Although not a cohesive bloc, the Council includes exiles and non-exiles who
generally want a liberal democracy and would be considered pro-U.S. Most
prominent among them is Chalabi, but this grouping includes National Democratic
Party leader Nasir al-Chadirchy and former foreign minister Adnan Pachachi, both
of whom are Sunni Muslims, as well as former foreign ministry official Akila al-
Hashimi, a Shiite woman. Others most likely to affiliate with this bloc include
Sunni businessman Samir Shakir al-Sumaidy; Sunni civil engineer Ghazi al-Yawar,
who is president of Saudi-based Hicap Technology; the Shiite coordinator for the
Human Rights Association of Babel, Ahmad al-Barak; and the two other women
Council members — Songul Chapouk, a member of the Turkomen minority, who
15 Transcript: Bremer Reviews Progress, Plans for Iraq Reconstruction. Washington File,
June 23, 2003.
CRS-22
heads the Iraqi Women’s Association, and Raja al-Khuza’i, a Shiite who heads the
maternity hospital in Diwaniyah.
A member of the Assyrian Christian community is on the Council. Yonadam
Kanna, the secretary-general of the Democratic Assyrian Movement, is on the body.
It is not known what other members of the Council, if any, he might be aligned with,
although it is reasonable to believe that he might have an affinity for fellow residents
of northern Iraq, the Kurds. Also unclear is whether or not Hamid al-Musa, the
Shiite head of the Iraqi Communist Party, is allied with anyone else on the Council.
In late July 2003, the Council decided that nine Council members will rotate as
chairpersons, each for one month. Ibrahim al-Jafari of the Da’wa Party is the first
chairman. The other eight who will rotate that post are Chalabi, Alawi of the INA,
Hakim of SCIRI, Pachachi, Barzani of the KDP, Talabani of the PUK, Bahr al-Ulum,
and Abdul Hamid, the Sunni Islamist figure.
Among its first actions, the Council has authorized the establishment of an Iraqi
war crimes tribunal for Saddam and associates accused of major human rights abuses.
It also has empowered a three member delegation to seek formal U.N. recognition.
The grouping, Chalabi, Pachachi, and Akila Hashimi, traveled to the United Nations
in July 2003 and received a supportive statement from Secretary General Kofi
Annan. No decision on seating the Governing Council at the United Nations was
announced.
The Governing Council is expected to work with the Coalition Provisional
Authority to appoint a constitutional drafting commission. On July 17, 2003, CPA
head Bremer said that a constitution could conceivably be drafted in time to have
national elections by summer of 2004. He has linked the potential length of the U.S.
occupation to the completion of successful national elections and the restoration of
security in Iraq.
As part of the planning process that took place before the war, the U.S. State
Department supported a group of Iraqi exiles to address issues that would confront
a successor government.16 However, the State Department working group (the
“Future of Iraq Project”) does not appear to have significant influence on any post-
war regime decision-making in Iraq. Some experts believe the Defense Department
was promoting a competing or separate group of exiles.17 The State Department
project, which cost $5 million, consisted of working groups that discussed (1)
transitional justice; (2) public finance; (3) public and media outreach; (4) democratic
principles; (5) water, agriculture, and the environment; (6) health and human
services; (7) economy and infrastructure; (8) education; (9) refugees, internally-
displaced persons, and migration policy; (10) foreign and national security policy;
(11) defense institutions and policy; (12) free media; (13) civil society capacity-
building; (14) anti-corruption measures; and (15) oil and energy.
16 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,”
Washington File, December 11, 2002.
17 Fineman, Mark, Robin Wright, and Doyle McManus. Preparing for War, Stumbling to
Peace. Los Angeles Times, July 18, 2003.
CRS-23
Post-War U.S. Operations and the Coalition Provisional
Authority (CPA)
Experts note that projections about U.S. operations in post-war Iraq, including
the duration of the U.S. military occupation and the numbers of occupation troops,
are largely dependent on the amount of continuing Iraqi resistance, the number of
U.S. casualties taken, and the rate at which such U.S. objectives as the establishment
of a stable and democratic successor regime are accomplished. At present, about
160,000 U.S. and British troops remain in Iraq, according to a June 2003 report to
Congress mandated by P.L. 108-11. Of those, 148,000 are U.S. personnel and 12,000
are British. There were 2,000 Australian troops as part of the war fighting coalition,
but many of those are now on their way home. Earlier press reports said the
Administration wanted to draw the U.S. force level down to about 35,000 by the end
of 2003, but continued unrest and insecurity in Iraq appears to have made that goal
untenable, and some U.S. commanders do not rule out an increase in U.S. force
levels if necessary.
There are indications that resistance to the U.S. governance of Iraq is growing,
judging by the frequency of attacks on U.S. forces over the past few weeks. U.S.
military operations are focused on hunting down guerrilla resistance leaders and their
suspected Baathist financiers, as well as finding former leader Saddam Hussein. The
new Centcom commander John Abizaid said on July 17, 2003, that the United States
faces a “classic guerrilla war” led by “mid-level Baath Party activists organized
regionally.” Such attacks have killed 54 U.S. militarypersonnel since President Bush
declared an end to “major combat operations” in Iraq on May 1, 2003. The Bush
Administration says resistance comes not only from remnants of the Baath Party but
also from Arab volunteers — possibly linked to or supportive of Al Qaeda — who
have come to Iraq from other countries to fight the U.S. occupation. Attacks have
been more frequent in the Sunni areas of central Iraq, where support for Saddam
Hussein’s regime was traditionally stronger than elsewhere. Some elements of the
resistance appear to want to restore the old regime, while others appear to be
motivated by opposition to foreign rule. Others appear to be motivated by the
difficulty the U.S. and British authorities have had in restoring civilian services. U.S.
military officials put the resistance numbers at about 5,000, although they do not
explain precisely how they arrive at that figure. In late June, some opponents of the
occupation began identifying themselves as distinct groups, scribbling graffiti
warnings and faxing statements to the Arab satellite television network Al Jazeera,
UAE-based Al Arabiya TV, and other outlets. They are using such names as:
! Al Awda (the Return);
! the Snakes;
! the Movement of the Victorious Sect;
! Iraq’s Revolutionaries - Al Anbar’s Armed Brigades;
! The Popular Resistance for the Liberation of Iraq;
! the Salafist Jihad Group (Salafi is a Sunni extremist Islamic
movement): and
! Armed Islamic Movement for Al Qaeda - Falluja Branch. Actual
linkages to Al Qaeda, if any, are not known.
CRS-24
The continuing resistance has complicated the U.S. mission. In addition to
targeting U.S. forces, resistance fighters have assassinated Iraqis who are
cooperating with the United States. In addition, U.S. officials say that the costs of
the ongoing U.S. operations are about $3.9 billion per month, about double what was
anticipated for the occupation period. On the other hand, CPA said on July 18 that
acts of sabotage against pipelines and other infrastructure appears to have declined
over the past six weeks.
The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA). The Bush Administration
initially tasked Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) to direct civilian reconstruction, working
through a staff of U.S. diplomats and other U.S. government personnel who are
serving as advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various ministries. He headed the
Office of Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance (ORHA), within the
Department of Defense, created by a January 20, 2003 executive order. After
spending the combat phase of the war in neighboring Kuwait, Garner and some of his
staff of about 200 deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003, to begin work. Former
Ambassador to Yemen Barbara Bodine was responsible for a “central” region; and
retired generals Buck Walters and Bruce Moore were responsible for “southern” and
“northern” regions, respectively.
Press reports said that senior U.S. officials were dissatisfied with the slow pace
of reconstruction under Garner, and on May 6, 2003, the Administration appointed
former ambassador L. Paul Bremer to lead the overall reconstruction effort, with a
focus on political reconstruction. He arrived on May 12 to head the Coalition
Provisional Authority (CPA), which subsumed ORHA, and Bodine and then Garner
departed shortly thereafter. The appointment represented an apparent adjustment
from the original structure of the U.S. reconstruction effort, although the
Administration stated that it was always envisioned that a civilian would eventually
take over the U.S. effort. U.S. officials now refer to the CPA as an occupying
authority legitimized by U.N. Security Council Resolution 1483 of May 22, 2003.
Among other provisions, the resolution lifted U.N. sanctions on Iraq. U.S. officials,
including President Bush, have expressed confidence in Ambassador Bremer,
although a Washington Post article on July 26, 2003, said the Administration was
considering appointing a well known former official such as former Secretary of
State James Baker to help the CPA by coordinating international assistance to Iraq.
U.S. officials later said such a move is not now under consideration.
Building Security Institutions. While attempting to restore securityto Iraq,
the CPA is beginning to build new Iraqi institutions that can eventually take over the
security function from the United States. The United States is planning to train a
40,000 person Iraqi army, about 10% the size of the pre-war Iraqi force. About
12,000 are expected to be in the force by mid-2004. Former Defense Department
official Walter Slocombe is in charge of forming the new Iraqi army. The CPA is
also trying to turn basic policing functions over to Iraqis. Overall, about 32,000 Iraqi
policemen have returned to their jobs, about half the total goal. The CPA official
responsible for the new police force, former New York City police commissioner
Bernard Kerik, says it will take about 18 months (end of 2004) to reach the goal of
CRS-25
65,000 policemen nationwide.18 The CPA is also recruiting a 7,000 man, all- Iraqi
civil defense force to guard installations.
Searching for Regime Violations. Organs of the CPA and the U.S.
government are attempting to uncover abuses and violations of the regime of Saddam
Hussein. A 1,500 person “Iraq Survey Group,” headed bya U.S. militarycommander
but composed of many civilian technical experts, including former U.N. weapons
inspector David Kay, is attempting to uncover alleged weapons of mass destruction.
The Survey Group, commanded by Major General Keith Dayton, is also searching
for mass graves of victims of the former regime. Kay and Dayton briefed Members
of Congress on July 30, 2003, saying they were making substantial progress in
uncovering the fate of suspected WMD programs. Thus far, the Survey Group has
found at least 60 mass graves, some with hundreds of corpses. Most appear to
contain bodies of Kurdish and Shiite opponents of the former regime, but some
might contain the bodies of about 600 Kuwaitis missing from the first Gulf war.
(The fate of the Kuwaiti missing is discussed in CRS Issue Brief IB92117.)
Recruiting Other Peacekeepers. The relatively slow pace of establishing
Iraqi security institutions, coupled with ongoing security difficulties and continued
U.S. casualties, has led to calls from Members of Congress and others to try to enlist
other countries to help with the stabilization of Iraq. Negotiations with other
countries is proceeding for a multinational peacekeeping force in Iraq that would
presumably spread some of the peace-keeping and stabilization burden now borne
mostly by U.S. forces. According to the Administration, more than 30 countries are
discussing offers of forces for a multilateral stabilization force, and several countries
have made begun implementing pledges of troops and or police or support personnel.
The commitments of several nations, including Germany, France, India, and Turkey
appear to be dependent on whether the U.N. SecurityCouncil authorizes such a force,
and several nations appear to require U.S. or other funding in order to participate.
Secretary of State Powell said on July 16 that the United States is discussing with
other countries the possibility of seeking formal U.N. backing for a multilateral
peacekeeping force.
The United Kingdom and Poland have offered to lead multinational divisions
in that mission in southern Iraq and central Iraq, respectively. The United States and
Poland reached agreement in late July 2003 for the United States to fund the
deployment of the Polish force, support valued at about $250 million. The UK-led
force is to number about 14,000, of which all but 2,000 are British forces. The
Polish-led force is to number about 9,200, of which 2,300 will be Polish. The
pledged forces listed below have begun deploying to Iraq as of early August 2003,
and U.S. officials say there are now 13,400 non-U.S. troops on the ground, as of July
31, 2003. Confirmed pledges include those shown in Table 1.
18 Schmitt, Eric. Wolfowitz on Visit to Iraq to Assess Rebuilding Effort. New York Times,
July 18, 2003.
CRS-26
Table 1. Multinational Division Force Pledges
Azerbaijan 150
Bulgaria 500
Czech Republic 400
Denmark 380
Dominican Republic 300
El Salvador 300
Estonia 55
Georgia 100
Honduras 300
Hungary 300
Italy 3,000 (mostly military police)
Japan 1,000 (logistics and combat support)
Latvia 150
Lithuania 85
Macedonia 28
Mongolia 200
Netherlands 1,100
Nicaragua 300
Norway 150
Philippines 500
Poland 2,300
Portugal 120
Romania 150
Slovakia 85
South Korea 700 (mostly medical)
Spain 1,300
Ukraine 1650
Total Non-U.S./U.K 16,600
CRS-27
The United States has discussed with NATO whether it would take on Iraq as
a fifth peacekeeping mission. However, on July 17, NATO secretary general George
Robertson said the body had no plans for a greater role beyond providing logistical
help to the Polish-led force in Iraq. On July 10, 2003, the Senate adopted an
amendment, by a vote of 97-0, to a State Department authorization bill (S. 925)
calling on the Administration to formally ask NATO to lead a peacekeeping force for
Iraq. A related bill (H.R. 2112) was introduced in the House on May 15, 2003.
Other countries have also agreed to provide funding for reconstruction.
According to the June 30, 2004, report to Congress by the Administration, the
following countries have made financial pledges for Iraq reconstruction: United
Kingdom ($177.1 million); Japan ($101.8 million); Australia ($60.5 million); UAE
($47.6 million); Canada ($41.2 million); Saudi Arabia ($36.6 million); Spain ($32.2
million); Kuwait ($27.5 million); the European Commission ($26.3 million); and
Italy ($22.4 million).
U.N. Role. Just after the fall of Saddam Hussein’s regime, the United States
and its European allies and other countries reached a measure of agreement on a
U.N. role in post-war Iraq. Resolution 1483, which was adopted unanimously,
provides for a U.N. special representative to coordinate the activities of U.N.
personnel in Iraq and to help establish a successor government. The Secretary
General subsequently (May 27, 2003) appointed Brazilian diplomat Sergio Vieira
de Mello for that post. The resolution also gave the United Nations a monitoring role
over the Development Fund for Iraq, a fund that will handle Iraq’s oil revenues until
there is a successor government. The resolution did not authorize a return to Iraq of
U.N. weapons inspectors, although the resolution provides for deliberations on that
issue. Some International Atomic Energy Agency inspectors returned to Iraq in June
2003 on a limited nuclear mission in Baghdad. As noted above, some countries are
conditioning any contribution of peacekeeping troops to Iraq on a formal U.N.
authorization, a step the Administration now appears to be weighing. On the other
hand, the Washington Post reported on August 2, 2003, that the Administration does
not want to agree to a U.N. resolution that dilutes its prerogatives in Iraq, particularly
its authority in determining a new political structure. The World Bank, which visited
Iraq in late July 2003, said it would resume lending to Iraq after it conducts national
elections.
Reviving the Oil Industry.19 As the driver of Iraq’s economy, the rebuilding
of the oil industry is receiving substantial U.S. attention. Ambassador Bremer said
in a press interview on July 31, 2003, that it could take $50 - $100 billion to
reconstruct Iraq, and a $1.6 billion plan to rehabilitate Iraq’s oil industry was agreed
in late July. It has been widely assumed that Iraq’s vast oil reserves, believed second
only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be used to fund much of the costs of
reconstruction. Presidential spokesman Ari Fleischer said on February 18, 2003,
referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a variety of means ... to shoulder much
of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.” Many observers had been concerned that
an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could destroy its own oil fields, but coalition
19 For information on the prospects for Iraq’s post-war economy, see CRS Report RL31944.
Iraq’s Economy: Past, Present, Future.
CRS-28
forces quickly secured Iraq’s southern oil fields after combat began. Only about 9
oil wells were set on fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that region, and all were
put out quickly. The northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul were not set afire.
In early May 2003, the U.S.-led coalition set up an advisory board, headed by
former Shell executive Phillip Carroll, to oversee the rebuilding of Iraq’s oil sector.
An Iraqi oil industry professional, Thamer Ghadhban, was named to serve as head
of the interim management team that will run Iraq’s oil ministry and report to the
advisory board. The first exports began in late June 2003, and Ghadhban said that
Iraq would be up to about 1 million barrels per day of exports by mid-July. In late
July, Iraq contracted to sell oil, about 750,000 barrels per day, slightly below the
target rate. Its pre-war export rate was about 2.2 million barrels per day, a level that
U.S. officials and Iraqi oil appointees hope to reach by late 2003. The CPA-produced
budget for Iraq assumes that oil exports will yield about $3.6 billion through the end
of 2003, and provide about half of the approximately $6.6 billion budget for Iraq for
the period. The deficit will be covered from funds in the Development Fund for Iraq,
set up by the post-war Resolution 1483 (see below).
A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which
foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s
vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will
seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other
countries.
Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have
been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program.
The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put
in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was
suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various
aspects of the program departed Iraq. As of the start of the war, about $9 billion
worth of humanitarian goods were in the process of being delivered or in production.
(See CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, Sanctions, and Illicit
Trade.)
On March 28, 2003, the U.N. SecurityCouncil unanimouslyadopted Resolution
1472 that restarted the program’s operations and empowered the United Nations, for
a 45-day period (until May 12), to take direct control of all aspects of the program.
Under the new resolution, the United Nations is setting priorities for and directing the
delivery of already contracted supplies. The enhanced U.N. authority was extended
on April 25, 2003, to last at least until the six-month phase of the program expired
on June 3, 2003.
On April 17, 2003, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions
against Iraq, signaling that the Administration wanted to focus on restoring normal
international commerce with Iraq rather than extending the oil-for-food program.
Resolution 1483 lifted sanctions and provided for the phasing out of the oil for food
program within six months after adoption of that resolution on May 22. The
resolution also provided for the United Nations to transfer to the new Development
Fund for Iraq $1 billion in funds held by the oil-for-food program escrow fund. That
Development Fund contained about $7 billion in June 2003, consisting of captured
CRS-29
Iraqi assets, Iraqi assets abroad, the monies transferred from the oil-for-food account,
and U.S. funds available for reconstruction. (For more information, see CRS Report
RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, International Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.)
War Crimes. An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is
whether Saddam Hussein and his associates should be prosecuted for war crimes and
crimes against humanity, if and when they are caught. The Administration said in
early April 2003 that Saddam and his inner circle should be tried by Iraqis if they are
captured, although others might be tried by a U.S.-led process for any crimes
committed in the course of the 2003 war. In the year prior to the war, the
Administration was gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his
associates. Those it had sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and
Qusay (killed after discovery by and a firefight with U.S. forces in Mosul on July 22,
2003); Ali Hassan al-Majid, for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (he was
reported by British officers to have died in an early April air strike on his home in
Basra, although that is now in question); Muhammad Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered
in mid-April 2003); Taha Yasin Ramadan; first Vice President and number three in
the regime; Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council
and formally number two in the regime; Barzan al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother
(captured in mid-April 2003); Watban al-Tikriti (captured in April 2003) and Sabawi
al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam and former leaders of regime
intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputy Prime Minister and foremost regime
spokesman (surrendered in May 2003); and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait
during Iraq’s occupation of that country (apprehended in May 2003).
Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials
sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured
or surrendered. As of mid-July 2003, according to Coalition Provisional Authority
officials, more than half of the Iraqis on the list of 55 are now in custody or are
confirmed killed. Among the others apprehended are Amir al-Saadi, chief science
adviser to Saddam; Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti, a son-in-law of Saddam; Vice President
Taha Muhi ad-Din Ma’ruf; and suspected WMD manager Hoda Mahdi Salih al-
Ammash.
The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and
the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29,
1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related
atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for
FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress
that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal
for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137
(passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March
13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October
31, 1998).
A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993,
after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the United States has supported
INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the
arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the
Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer,
CRS-30
said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established,
focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical
weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds)
and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which
an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against
Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes
against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations.
In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a
U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war
crimes is formed.
Congressional Reactions
Congress, like the Administration, had divergent views on the mechanisms for
promoting regime change, although there was widespread agreement in Congress that
regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S. policy. There was substantial
disagreement over whether a major military offensive was the most desirable option
for achieving that objective. On December 20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75,
by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a
“mounting threat” to the United States. The resolution did not call for new U.S. steps
to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few Members called for the overthrow of
Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in support of the resolution.
In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq,
some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint
appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on
Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations
Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the
opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an
option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In
early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members — Senators John
McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and
Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr.
— wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for
operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter,
Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S.
assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish
areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and
other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to
accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.”
As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002,
Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result.
Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force
against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce
U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on
October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote
of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243).
CRS-31
The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. Prior to the war, it held
several hearings on the progress of post-war reconstruction. During the war and in
its aftermath, several Members applauded the performance of the U.S. military and
the overthrow of the regime. Some Members, however, have criticized the
Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war period in light of major
looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the regime. Criticism of post-war
planning has escalated as attacks on U.S. occupation forces have mounted, although
the Administration and others say U.S. casualties are relatively light and that the
resistance is not jeopardizing overall U.S. objectives for Iraq. Several Committees
are conducting inquiries into why substantial amounts of WMD have not been found
in Iraq to date. Some Members of both parties have also expressed concern about the
costs of the U.S. occupation, and several Members have called on the Administration
to take greater steps to persuade other countries to share the burden of peacekeeping
in and reconstruction of Iraq.
CRS-32
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition
Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.)
to the Opposition
(Figures in millions of dollars)
INC War
Crimes Broadcasting
Unspecified
Opposition
Activities
Total
FY 1998
(P.L. 105-174)
2.0 5.0
(RFE/RL)
3.0 10.0
FY 1999
(P.L. 105-277)
3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0
FY 2000
(P.L. 106-113)
2.0 8.0 10.0
FY 2001
(P.L. 106-429)
12.0
(aid
distribution
inside Iraq)
2.0 6.0
(INC radio)
5.0 25.0
FY 2002
(P.L. 107-115)
25.0 25.0
Total,
FY1998-FY2002
15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0
FY2003
(no earmark)
3.1
(announced
April 2003)
6.9
(remaining
to be
allocated)
10.0
FY2004
(request)
0 0
Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq
Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97
million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent,
as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided,
the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and
FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be
used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N.
programs.
Another version (English): 18 July 2003 — RL31339_2003-07-18.pdf
Order Code RL31339
CRS Report for Congress
Received through the CRS Web
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
Updated July 18, 2003
Kenneth Katzman
Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs
Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division
Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
Summary
In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized
Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to abandon
its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs as required by U.N. Security
Council resolutions and the potential for it to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. In
September 2002, the President told the U.N. General Assembly that unless Iraq fully
disarmed in cooperation with United Nations weapons inspectors, the United States
would lead a coalition to achieve that disarmament militarily, making clear that this
would include the ouster of Iraq’s President Saddam Hussein’s regime. After a
November 2002 - March 2003 round of U.N. inspections in which Iraq’s cooperation
was mixed, on March 19, 2003, the United States launched “Operation Iraqi
Freedom,” to disarm Iraq and change its regime. The regime fell on April 9, 2003.
In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change
through U.S.-led militaryaction would yield benefits beyond disarmament, including
liberation of the Iraqi people from an oppressive regime, and enhancement of the
prospects for peace and democracy throughout the Middle East. The goal of regime
change in Iraq had been declared U.S. policy since November 1998, and U.S. efforts
to oust Saddam had been pursued, with varying degrees of intensity, since the end of
the Gulf war in 1991. These efforts primarily involved U.S. financial backing for
opposition groups inside and outside Iraq, several of which are now contending for
power in post-Saddam Iraq. Past efforts to change the regime floundered because of
limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the Iraqi opposition, and the efficiency
and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping intelligence and security forces.
Previous U.S. administrations ruled out major U.S. military action to change Iraq’s
regime, believing such action would be costly, risky, and not necessarily justified by
the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament.
The leadership and precise shape of the permanent government that will replace
Saddam Hussein’s Baath Party is yet to be determined. Some Administration
officials reportedly had hoped that major military and governmental defections from
the Hussein regime would serve as the core of a successor government. However,
no senior Hussein regime figures defected, and exiled opposition groups form the
core of a U.S.-appointed 25-seat “governing council” that was unveiled on July 13,
2003. It is hoped by the Administration that the formation of the council will signal
that Iraq is moving toward self rule and calm some of the resistance against U.S.
occupation forces in Iraq; the resistance has killed 33 U.S. soldiers since President
Bush declared major combat operations ended on May 1, 2003.
This report will be updated as warranted by major developments.
Contents
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Sadr Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
The First Eligibility Designations Under the ILA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups . . . 11
Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Post-War Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
The Governing Council . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Post-War U.S. Operations and the Coalition Provisional Authority
(CPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Building Security Institutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Searching for Regime Violations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Recruiting Other Peacekeepers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
U.N. Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Reviving the Oil Industry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
War Crimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Congressional Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
The United States has sought to change Iraq’s regime since the 1991 Persian
Gulf war, although achieving this goal was not declared policy until 1998. In
November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass destruction
(WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United States would
seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A regime change
policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, October 31, 1998).
Bush Administration officials have emphasized regime change as the cornerstone of
U.S. policy toward Iraq since shortly after the September 11, 2001, attacks.
Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 17, 2003, and achieved the
objective of regime change by April 9, 2003.
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam
Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an
operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George
H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end
of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and
Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope
of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions. The revolt in southern Iraq reached
the suburbs of Baghdad, but the well-trained and loyal Republican Guard forces had
survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from battle prior to the U.S.
ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid-March 1991. Many Shiites
blamed the United States for not supporting their uprising and standing aside as the
regime retaliated against those who participated in the rebellion. Kurds, benefitting
from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991, were able to drive Iraqi
troops out of much of northern Iraq and establish an autonomous zone there and
subsequently remained largely free of Baghdad’s rule.
According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite
uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding
stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup
against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that
purpose. The Administration apparently believed — and this view apparently still
is shared by many experts and U.S. officials — that a coup by elements within the
current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq.
Manyobservers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and
Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and
tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria.
CRS-2
Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition
Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that
the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment
within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision
was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the
diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the
Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and
diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This
opposition coalition seemed to provide a vehicle for the United States to build a
viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert
support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.1
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi
The growing opposition coalition took concrete shape in an organization called
the Iraqi National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two
main Kurdish militias, the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic
Union of Kurdistan (PUK), participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens
of opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came into the
coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq.
The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi
ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military
officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC
with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups
publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests,
including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the
preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. SecurityCouncil
resolutions on Iraq.2 However, many observers doubted its commitment to
democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and
because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies. The
INC’s first Executive Committee consisted of KDP leader Masud Barzani, ex-Baath
Party and military official Hassan Naqib, and moderate Shiite cleric Mohammad
Bahr al-Ulum.
Ahmad Chalabi. Selected to run the INC on a day-to-day basis was Ahmad
Chalabi, who is about 58 years old, a secular Shiite Muslim from a prominent
banking family. He was educated in the United States as a mathematician. He fled
Iraq to Jordan in 1958, when the Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military
coup. This coup occurred 10 years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July
1968). In 1978, he founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian
authorities on charges of financial malfeasance and he left Jordan, possibly with
1 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2,
1992.
2 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by
INC representatives, February 1993.
CRS-3
some help from members of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989. The Jordanian
government subsequently re-capitalized the bank with national funds. In 1992, he
was convicted in absentia of embezzling $70 million from the bank and sentenced
to 22 years in prison. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government was
pressured by Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to
the Jordanian government. In April 2003, senior Jordanian officials, including King
Abdullah, called Chalabi “divisive” and stopped just short of saying he would be
unacceptable to Jordan as leader of Iraq. Chalabi’s critics acknowledge that, despite
allegations about his methods, he has been single-minded in his determination to
overthrow Saddam Hussein, and he is said to be the favorite of those Administration
officials, particularly in the Department of Defense, that were the most supportive of
changing Iraq’s regime by force.
Since Chalabi returned to Iraq, there have been no large public demonstrations
supportive of him or the INC, indicating that he does not have a large following
inside Iraq. However, anecdotal press reporting suggest that he has attracted some
support from those Iraqis that most welcome the U.S. military offensive against Iraq
as liberation from Saddam Hussein’s regime and who believe the U.S. presence is
needed to ensure security and facilitate reconstruction. On April 6, Chalabi and
about 700 INC fighters (“Free Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by the U.S. military from
their base in the north to the Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs
in southern Iraq. Chalabi and some Free Iraqi Forces later deployed to Baghdad and
other parts of Iraq. Since establishing his headquarters in Baghdad, Chalabi has tried
to build support by searching for members of the former regime and arranging for
U.S. military forces in Iraq to provide security or other benefits to his potential
supporters. However, the Free Iraqi Forces accompanying Chalabi have largely
disbanded following the U.S. decisions in mid-May 2003 to disarm independent
militias and to temporarily delay the formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority.
A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book
“Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq,” detailing alleged Iraqi regime
human rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracyfor Iraq, including
full rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he teaches
Middle Eastern politics at Brandeis University. Another INC activist, Mohammed
al-Zubaidi, declared himself in charge of Baghdad in mid-April, but U.S. officials did
not recognize him as mayor and detained him in April 2003.
Chalabi is part of a grouping of seven major party leaders that have been
meeting since the period prior to the war. As discussed below, the seven party
leadership council has hoped to become the core of a successor regime, and the seven
parties are represented on the 25 seat Governing Council unveiled on July 13, 2003.
The Kurds/KDP and PUK. The Kurds, probably the most pro-U.S. of all
the groups in Iraq, do not have ambitions to play a major role in governing Arab Iraq,
but Iraq’s neighbors have always been fearful that the Kurds might still seek outright
independence. In committing to the concept of federalism, the INC platform
assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq. Turkey, which
has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly
fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into
a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy
CRS-4
since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War
I. (Iraq became an independent Kingdom in 1932, although it remained under British
influence until the 1958 fall of the British-installed monarchy.) In 1961, the KDP,
then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP leader Masud Barzani’s
father, began an insurgency that has continued until today, although interrupted by
periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud Barzani’s brother, Idris,
commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the Iran-Iraq war but was killed in
that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from the KDP in 1965; the
PUK’s members are generally more well-educated, urbane, and left-leaning than
those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000-60,000 fighters,
some of which are trained in conventional military tactics. Both the KDP and the
PUK are part of the seven party grouping that has now been incorporated into the
official 25-seat U.S.-backed Governing Council unveiled on July 13, 2003.
Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties
enjoyed good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement
of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaykh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in
Halabja, Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical
attack on that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998.
A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam
(Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam).
This faction, led by Mullah Krekar (who was detained in Europe in August 2002 and
now lives in Norway), reportedly is associated with Al Qaeda and hosted in its
northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters who fled the U.S.-led war in Afghanistan.
Mullah Krekar reportedly studied under Shaykh Abdullah al-Azzam, an Islamic
theologian of Palestinian origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama bin Laden.
Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, during which its base was captured, about 8,000
people were in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, located near the town of Khurmal. This
included about 600 fighters.3 Fighters of Ansar al-Islam clashed with the PUK
around Halabja in December 2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedly responsible for
an assassination attempt against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002.
The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials
to be Abu Musab Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in
Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the
millennium celebration, the assassination in Jordan of U.S. diplomat Lawrence Foley
(2002), and to reported attempts in 2002 to spread the biological agent ricin in
London and possibly other places in Europe. In a presentation to the U.N. Security
Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied Zarqawi and Ansar al-
Islam to the Iraqi regime, which might have viewed Ansar al-Islam as a means of
pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents. Many experts believed Baghdad-Ansar
links were tenuous or even non-existent; Baghdad did not control northern Iraq even
before Operation Iraqi Freedom.4 Zarqawi’s current whereabouts are unknown,
3 Chivers, C.J. Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.”
New York Times, December 6, 2002.
4 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire,
(continued...)
CRS-5
although some unconfirmed press reports indicate he might have fled to Iran after the
fall of the Ansar camp to U.S.-led forces.
Shiite Islamist Organizations
Some outside experts have had concerns about the potential strength and
ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups in post-
Saddam Iraq. Shiite Islamist factions hold at least five seats on the Governing
Council unveiled July 13, 2003.
SCIRI/Badr Corps. The most well known among these is called the Supreme
Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member of the INC
in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC banner.
SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition groups
in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad Baqr al-
Hakim, was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head an Islamic Republic of
Iraq, a vision that, if realized, might conflict with U.S. plans to forge a democratic
Iraq. Baqr Al Hakim and his family fled Iraq to Iran in 1980, during a major
crackdown on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam feared that Iraqi
Shiite Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution in Iran in 1979,
posed a major threat to his regime. Prior to the formation of SCIRI, Hakim and his
family were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party (see below). Mohammed Baqr
is the son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a prominent Shiite leader
in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini when Khomeini was in exile
in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. In early May 2003, there were press reports that
Mohammed Baqr might resign from his formal SCIRI leadership post and try to
establish himself in the Shiite holy city of Najaf, Iraq, as an overarching Shiite
authority figure in the image of the late Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran. He returned to
Iraq on May 10, welcomed by large crowds in Basra and Najaf, where he is now
based.
In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about
10,000-15,000 fighters/activists organized into a “Badr Corps” (named after a major
battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from Iran
into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. The Badr Corps is headed by
Mohammed Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim, who returned to Iraq on
April 20, 2003, to pave the way for Mohammed Baqr’s return. (Another Hakim
brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan in May 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s
security services.) Iran’s Revolutionary Guard, which is politically aligned with
Iran’s hard line civilian officials, has been the key patron of the Badr Corps,
providing it with weapons, funds, and other assistance. The Badr Corps fought
alongside the Guard against Iraqi forces during the Iran-Iraq war. However, many
Iraqi Shiites view SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr Corps operations in
southern Iraq prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark broad popular unrest
against the Iraqi regime. Some Badr fighters deployed inside northern Iraq on the eve
4 (...continued)
March 18, 2002.
CRS-6
of Operation Iraqi Freedom, and the New York Times reported on May 7, 2003, that
many Badr activists have infiltrated into Iraq to build support for SCIRI.
A variety of press reports say that individual militias now providing security in
many towns in southern Iraq are linked to the Badr Corps. One such militia is
derived from the fighters who challenged Saddam Hussein’s forces in the marsh
areas of southern Iraq, around the town of Amara, north of Basra. It goes by the
name Hizbollah (Party of God)-Amara, and it is headed by marsh guerrilla leader
Abdul Karim Muhammadawi, nicknamed “Prince of the Marshes” who was named
to the Governing Council on July 13, 2003. He is widely perceived as an ally of
SCIRI.
Until August 2002 when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures
for meetings in Washington, D.C., SCIRI had publicly refused to work openly with
the United States or accept U.S. assistance. Since the fall of the regime on April 9,
SCIRI leaders have criticized what they called an illegitimate U.S. occupation of Iraq
and have called for the rapid establishment of an Iraqi self-rule authority, while at the
same time opposing the use of violence against the occupation. Even though
Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim says he is for a democracy and would not seek to
establish an Iranian-style Islamic republic, U.S. officials are said to be mistrustful
of SCIRI and have been seeking to disarm its fighters. Suggesting that SCIRI sees
its interests in a degree of cooperation with the occupation, Abd al-Aziz al Hakim did
meet with other opposition leaders in late April 2003 at a post-war governance
planning session sponsored by U.S. officials. He has since helped constitute the
seven party grouping that now constitutes a part of the 25-seat Governing Council.
Abd al-Aziz is on the Council. Unlike some other Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI has
had good working relations with some Sunni oppositionists and the Kurds.
Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, perhaps Iraq’s oldest Shiite Islamist grouping,
continues to exist as a separate group, but many Da’wa activists appear to be at least
loosely allied with SCIRI. The party was founded in 1957 by a revered Iraqi Shiite
cleric, Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of Ayatollah
Khomeini. Baqr Al Sadr was hung by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the Da’wa’s
alleged responsibility in fomenting Shiite anti-regime unrest following Iran’s 1979
Islamic revolution. That unrest included an attempted assassination of senior Iraqi
leader Tariq Aziz. Da’wa was part of the seven-party council grouping that is now
been incorporated into the Governing Council. Da’wa’s spokesman, Ibrahim Jafari,
and its leader in Basra, Abdal Zahra Othman, are on the Governing Council, as is a
former Da’wa activist turned human rights activist, Muwaffaq Al-Ruba’i.
The Kuwaiti branch of the Da’wa Party allegedly was responsible for a May
1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks
on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The Hizballah organization in Lebanon
was founded by Lebanese clerics loyal to Ayatollah Baqr Al Sadr and the late
Ayatollah Khomeini, and there continue to be linkages between Hizballah and the
Da’wa Party. The Hizballah activists who held U.S. hostages in that country during
the 1980s often linked release of the Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party
prisoners held by Kuwait for those offenses. Some Iraqi Da’wa members look to
Lebanon’s senior Shiite cleric Mohammed Hossein Fadlallah, who was a student and
protege of Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, for spiritual guidance.
CRS-7
Sadr Grouping. Members of the clan of the late Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr
Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq. Although the Al Sadr clan
has been closely identified with the Da’wa Party, it appears that members of the clan
and their followers currently are operating in post-war Iraq as grouping separate from
the Da’wa. Another revered member of the clan, Mohammed Sadiq Al Sadr, and
two of his sons, were killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999. A surviving son,
Moqtada al-Sadr, who is about 27 years old, has attempted to rally his followers to
attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite politics. He and his clan apparently
have a large following in the Shiite neighborhoods of Baghdad, which, after the fall
of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr City,” from the former name
of “Saddam City.” However, Moqtada is viewed by Iran and many Iraqi Shiites as
a young radical who lacks religious and political weight. To compensate for his lack
of religious credentials, he has sought spiritual authority for his actions from exiled
Iraqi senior cleric, Ayatollah Kazem Haeri, who is living in Qom, Iran. An alternate
interpretation by some experts is that Haeri is acting at the direction of Iran’s
leadership to keep Moqtada Sadr under a measure of control. Moqtada’s reputation
may have been tarnished in early April when Moqtada al Sadr reportedly killed Abd
al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Abdol Qasem Musavi-Khoi,
shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al-Majid Khoi headed the
Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq after U.S.-led forces took
Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political doctrines of Ayatollah
Khomeini of Iran.
The Sadr grouping was not part of the seven party grouping that has been
incorporated into the U.S.-backed Governing Council. Neither Moqtada nor any
other known Sadr faction members are on the Governing Council.
Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah. The revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al-
Sistani, based in Najaf, is also emerging as a major potential force in post-war Iraq.
He is the most senior of the four Shiite clerics that lead the Najaf- based “Hawza al-
Ilmiya,” a major grouping of seminaries and Shiite clerics. The Hawza, which is well
funded through donations, is becoming an important source of political authority in
the Shiite regions of Iraq, hiring Iraqis to perform functions performed by the former
regime and issuing directives, often obeyed, for some Iraqi civil servants to return to
work. Sistani himself, now free of a long house arrest at the hands of Baghdad, has
a large following of former students throughout the Shiite portions of Iraq. During
the U.S.-led war against Iraq, Moqtada al-Sadr and his followers reportedly tried to
intimidate Sistani by surrounding his office in Najaf with armed gunmen, a tactic that
many experts say is leading Sistani and the Hawza to ally with the Hakims in the
intra-Shiite power struggle. Sistani, who is said to be of Iranian ethnicity, is
considered to be in the tradition of Ayatollah Khoi in opposing a direct role for
clerics in governmental affairs, and it is therefore likely that Sistani and the Hawza
would not seek a direct role in the post-war regime. However, in early July 2003,
Sistani began to take a more active role in Iraq’s post-war politics by issuing a
statement that only elected Iraqis — not a U.S.-appointed governing council —
should draft a constitution.
Islamic Amal. SCIRI has been allied with another Shiite Islamist organization
called the Islamic Amal (Action) Organization. It is headed by Mohammed Taqi
Modarassi. Islamic Amal conducted attacks against Saddam Hussein’s regime in the
CRS-8
1980s, although it does not appear to have a following nearly as large as SCIRI or the
other Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s brother, Abd al-Hadi, headed the Islamic
Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, which tried to stir up Shiite unrest against the
Bahrain regime in the 1980s and 1990s (see below).
Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups
The differences among the various anti-Saddam organizations led to the near
collapse of the U.S. regime change effort the mid-1990s. In May 1994, the KDP and
the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs revenues levied at
border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s government based in
Irbil. The PUK lined up support from Iran while the KDP sought and received
countervailing backing from its erstwhile nemesis, the Baghdad government. The
infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC offensive against Iraqi troops in March
1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at the last minute. Although it was
repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of the less well-trained and poorly
motivated Iraqi units facing the Kurds. Some INC leaders point to the battle as an
indication that the INC could have succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. military
help, had it been given additional resources and training in the 1990s.
The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition in the
mid-1990s caused the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by
renewing ties to a non-INC group, Iraq National Accord (INA).5 The INA, originally
founded in 1990 with Saudi support, consists of military and security defectors who
were perceived as having ties to disgruntled officials currently serving within their
former organizations. It is headed by Dr. Iyad Alawi, former president of the Iraqi
Student Union in Europe and a physician by training. He is a secular Shiite Muslim,
but most of the members of the INA are Sunni Muslims. The INA’s prospects
appeared to brighten in August 1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al-
Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons of mass destruction programs — defected to
Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip on the military and security services was
weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate from there.
The INA became penetrated by Iraq’s intelligence services and, in June 1996,
Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by arresting or executing over 100 INA
sympathizers in the military.
Iraq’s counteroffensive against the opposition was completed two months after
the arrests of the INA sympathizers. In late August 1996, the KDP asked Baghdad
to provide armed support for its capture of Irbil from the rival PUK. Iraq took
advantage of the request to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in
northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout northern Iraq.
In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred
oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated
from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists,
mostly from the INC.
5 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret
War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997.
CRS-9
Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA continued to
operate throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt itself to some extent since the
June 1996 arrests. However, it does not appear to have a large following in the Iraqi
regime and did not announce any key defections from the regime during Operation
Iraqi Freedom, nor has it since found or captured any former regime leaders.
Although it has was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war,
there is a history of friction between the two groups; the INA reportedly bombed an
INC facility in northern Iraq in October 1995. Iyad Alawi represents the INA in the
seven party grouping that has become part of the U.S.-backed Governing Council.
Alawi is a member of the Governing Council.
Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks
For the two years following the anti-Saddam opposition groups’ 1996 setbacks,
the Clinton Administration had little contact with these groups. In those two years,
the INC, INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations
and their ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998,
then Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations
subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations”
about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish.
Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections
during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam
Hussein. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with an
FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, signed May1, 1998) that, among
other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the
opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free
Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October
1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to
coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to
highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions. The remaining $2 million was used
to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the
documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes,
and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In
subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for
war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix. Some of the war crimes funding has
gone to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War
Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues.
Iraq Liberation Act
The clearest indication of congressional support for a more active U.S.
overthrow effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998: the Iraq
Liberation Act (ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998).
The ILA gave the President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles
(and authorized $2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be
designated by the Administration. (An FY2003 supplemental appropriations, P.L.
108-11, added $86.5 million to the allowed draw-down ceiling to enable additional
funds to flow to groups helping the United States in Operation Iraqi Freedom. The
CRS-10
supplemental brought the total authorized under the Act to $183 million.) The Act’s
passage was widely interpreted as an expression of congressional support for the
concept of promoting an insurgency by using U.S. air-power to expand opposition-
controlled territory. This idea was advocated by Chalabi and some U.S. experts, such
as General Wayne Downing, who subsequently became a National Security Council
official on counter-terrorism in the first two years of the George W. Bush
Administration. President Clinton signed the legislation despite reported widespread
doubts within the Clinton Administration about the chances of success in promoting
an opposition insurgency inside Iraq.
The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting
regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it
should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime
headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly
articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq.
The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the
height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in
which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United
Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were
withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign
against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December
160-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq:
Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.)
The First Eligibility Designations Under the ILA. Further steps to
promote regime change followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, a career
diplomat, Frank Ricciardone, was named as a State Department’s “Coordinator for
the Transition in Iraq” — the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999,
after consultations with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13)
that the following organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance
under the Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the
Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the Movement for Constitutional
Monarchy (MCM), which is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a relative of the
Hashemite monarchs that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. The
IMIK and the MCM, in particular, were considered small movements that cannot
contribute much to an overthrow effort. Because of its possible role in contributing
to the formation of Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001,
although it was not formally taken off the ILA eligibility list.
Sharif Ali returned to Iraq on June 10 to a small but apparently enthusiastic
welcome. He did not participate in the seven-party grouping that negotiated with the
U.S.-led occupation authority on the formation of the Governing Council, and Sharif
Ali was not placed on the Governing Council.
In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton
Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and
“non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999 - 2000, about 150
opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in
Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses provided civil affairs
CRS-11
training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers,
communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However,
the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficientlyorganized
to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This
restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the
effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United
States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The trainees during
1999-2000 are not believed to have been brought into the Operation Iraqi Freedom
effort against the regime, or into the Free Iraqi Forces that deployed to Iraq toward
the end of the active combat phase of the war.
Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam
Groups
During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end
the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of
Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed
disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the
opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an
indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical that a renewed overthrow
effort would fare better than previous attempts. The Clinton Administration
maintained that that the Iraqi opposition would not succeed unless backed by direct
U.S. military involvement, and that direct U.S. military action was risky and not
justified by the degree of threat posed by Iraq. Critics of the Clinton Administration
policy on Iraq maintained that the potential threat from Saddam Hussein’s regime
was sufficiently grave that direct U.S. military action should be taken. Others
suggested the Clinton Administration should focus instead on rebuilding containment
of Iraq by threatening force if Iraq refused to permit re-entry into Iraq of the U.N.
weapons inspectors that left Iraq in December 1998.
As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a
provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed
November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the
Iraqi people,” of which at least $12 million was for the INC to distribute
humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million
was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million
could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive
assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC
distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000, the Clinton Administration
reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in
FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop an aid distribution plan
and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before
it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that
noted that any INC effort to distribute aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control
would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and
to any relief distributors with which the INC contracts.6
6 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.”
(continued...)
CRS-12
Bush Administration Policy
Bush Administration policy toward Iraq changed after the September 11, 2001
terrorist attacks, even though no significant evidence linking Iraq to those attacks
came to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in
President Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he
characterized Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea.
Pre-September 11 Policy
Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic
elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus
within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow
strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq,
which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its
taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist
regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan: a modification of the U.N.
sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technologyreaches Iraq. His plan
offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N.
restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military
technology.7
The Administration believed that the proposal, by easing the suffering of the
Iraqi people, would cause Iraq’s neighbors and other countries to cease unilateral
violations of the sanctions regime. Powell, who had openly expressed skepticism
about the opposition’s prospects, barelyraised the regime change issue during his trip
or in his March 7, 2001, testimony before the House International Relations
Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.8 After about a year of
negotiations among the Security Council permanent members, the major feature of
the smart sanctions plan — new procedures that virtually eliminate U.N. review of
civilian exports to Iraq — was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Security Council
Resolution 1409).
Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime
change policy, many of the questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy
that had faced previous administrations were debated early in the Bush
Administration.9 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush
Administration did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first year.
During his confirmation hearings as Deputy Secretary of Defense, a reported strong
6 (...continued)
January 17, 2001.
7 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food
Program.
8 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times,
March 2, 2001.
9 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh,
Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002.
CRS-13
advocate of overthrow, Paul Wolfowitz, said that he did not yet see a “plausible plan”
for changing the regime. Like its predecessor, the Bush Administration initially
declined to provide the opposition with lethal aid, combat training, or a commitment
of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the separate State Department position of
“Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” further casting doubt on its enthusiasm for
the overthrow strategy. On February 2, 2001, the Bush Administration confirmed
that, shortly after President Bush took office, the Treasury Department’s Office of
Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted the INC a license to proceed with
information gathering inside Iraq only, and not actual distribution of humanitarian
aid inside Iraq. This decision by the Administration amounted to a withholding of
U.S. backing for the INC plan to rebuild its presence inside Iraq.
Many in Congress, on the other hand, continued to support the INC as the
primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional
sentiment, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite
doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television
broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the
ESF aid appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an estimated
additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.10
Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime
Bush Administration policytoward Iraq became notablymore assertive after the
September 11, 2001 attacks, stressing regime change far more than containment.
Almost immediately after the U.S.-led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in
Afghanistan began in early October 2001, speculation began building that the
Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use of military force
as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism. Some U.S. officials reportedly
believed that the United States needed to respond to the September 11 attacks by
ending any or all regimes that support terrorist groups, including Iraq. As noted
above, in his January 29, 2002 State of the Union message, President Bush named
Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with North Korea and Iran. Vice President
Cheney visited the Middle East in March 2002 reportedly to consult regional
countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq militarily, although the countries
visited reportedlyurged greater U.S. attention to the Arab-Israeli dispute and opposed
confrontation with Iraq.
The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for
confronting Iraq were (1) its alleged refusal to end its WMD programs, and (2) its
ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of
conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. The Administration added that
regime change would have the further benefit of liberating the Iraqi people.
Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s
regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax
mailings, senior U.S. officials said in September 2002, and again in January and
February 2003, that there was evidence of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. The Bush
10 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001.
CRS-14
Administration did not extensively cite reports that Czech intelligence believed that
Iraqi intelligence had met with lead September 11 hijacker Mohammad Atta in
Prague in spring 2001, suggesting some official skepticism. However, some outside
commentators believed that those reports indicated a direct Iraqi connection to the
September 11 attacks. Some outside observers expressed skepticism about Iraq-Al
Qaeda connections because of the ideological differences between Saddam Hussein’s
secular regime and Al Qaeda’s Islamist character. Secretary of State Powell, as noted
above, cited intelligence information that Ansar al-Islam and its enclave leader Abu
Musab al-Zarqawi (see above) had links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.11 Other senior
officials cited intelligence information that Iraq provided advice and training to Al
Qaeda in the manufacture and use of chemical weapons, although Administration
information appears to date to the early 1990s when Iraq, largely isolated after the
first Gulf war, was politically close to Sudan. Al Qaeda founder Osama Bin Laden
was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996).
Others noted that bin Laden sought to raise an Islamic army to fight Saddam’s
invasion of Kuwait in 1990, arguing against the need for U.S. troops, and that he was
more an enemy of Saddam Hussein than an ally. In the Administration view, the two
shared similar anti-U.S. goals, which outweighed ideological differences and
propelled them into tactical or strategic cooperation. Those differences were evident
in a February 12, 2003, bin Laden statement referring to Saddam Hussein’s regime
as socialist and infidel, although the statement exhorted Iraq to resist impending U.S.
military action.
WMD Threat Perception. In arguing for military action, U.S. officials
maintained that Iraq’s purported commitment to developing WMD — coupled with
its support for terrorist groups to which Iraq might transfer WMD — constituted an
unacceptable potential threat to the United States and that major U.S. military action
was justified if Iraq refused to disarm voluntarily. U.S. officials said the September
11, 2001 attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to
gather before acting, but must instead act preemptively or preventively. Senior U.S.
officials asserted a WMD threat as follows:
! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years
since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply
with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8,
2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs.
However, statements by U.N. weapons inspectors after inspections
resumed November 27, 2002 indicated they believed Iraq did not
have an active nuclear weapons program, and that inspections on
other weapons categories were making progress.
! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and
against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not
necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States
or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against
adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of
11 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002.
CRS-15
destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of
massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the
1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings of
retaliation and did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war.
! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who
could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths
in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of this view cited
presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in October 2002,
portions of which were released publicly, stating the CIA view that
Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to terrorists if the United States
were to attack Iraq. At that point, according to that argument,
Saddam Hussein would be left with little incentive not to cooperate
with terrorist groups capable of striking at U.S. interests. (No WMD
was used against Iraq during Operation Iraqi Freedom, and little
evidence of actual WMD weapons have thus far been found,
although the Administration asserts that such weapons will
eventually be found in Iraq by the U.S.-led coalition.)
Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam
As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action against Iraq, the
Bush Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its
capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002,
President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special
operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and
Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups — the INC, the
INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM — to Washington for meetings with
senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were
held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S.
government, which tended to favor different opposition groups.
In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August
15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in ESF to the INC, funds
that had been held up due to differences between the State Department and the INC
over what activities would be funded. The $8 million was to be used to fund the
INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its offices in Washington, London,
Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate its Al Mutamar newspaper and
Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund the information gathering
portion of the INC’s activities; the State Department had refused to fund those
activities, which are conducted inside Iraq, because of strains between the INC and
other opposition groups and questions about INC use of U.S. funds.
In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and
to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic-
based groups. On December 9, 2002, the Bush Administration added six of the
factions discussed below (except the Higher Council for National Salvation) to the
list of “democratic opposition organizations” eligible to receive draw downs under
the ILA. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had
increasing contact include the following:
CRS-16
! Iraqi National Movement. It formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the
INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib
(who was part of an early leadership body of the INC); Hatim
Mukhlis, who claimed support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan; and
ex-senior military officer Khalid al-Ubaydi.
! Iraqi National Front. Another grouping of ex-military officers,
founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite
Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and
participated and was wounded in the anti-Saddam uprisings
immediately following the 1991 Gulf war.
! Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement. Established in 1996 by
ex-military officer Najib al-Salhi. This group worked closely with
the INC. Salhi defected in 1995 after serving as commander of
several tank units in the Republican Guard and regular military.
! Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was
formally established on August 1, 2002. It is headed by Wafiq al-
Samarra’i, a former head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of
staff of Iraq’s military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was
based in Denmark since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member.
Khazraji was placed under travel restrictions by Danish officials in
late November 2002 after saying he wanted to leave Denmark. He
is under investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of
chemical weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities
said on March 17, 2003 that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his
home there, raising questions about whether he is defying the travel
restrictions placed on him. A press report on April 7, 2003, said he
went to Kuwait, possibly to play a part in a post-Saddam regime
there,12 although his current whereabouts are unknown.
! Iraqi Turkmen Front. A small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping,
generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq.
Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq.
! The Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another
Shiite Islamic Party, but it is considered substantially less pro-
Iranian than SCIRI or the Da’wa Party (see above). The Islamic
Accord is headed by Jamil Wakil. Many Accord members are
followers of Ayatollah Shirazi, an Iranian cleric who was the
spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation
of Bahrain (IFLB), which allegedly attempted to overthrow the
government of Bahrain in the early 1980s.
! The Assyrian Democratic Movement, an ethnic-based movement
headed by Secretary-General Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s
12 ‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper. Agence France Press, April 7, 2003.
CRS-17
Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq. There is a
strong diaspora presence in the United States as well. After building
ties to this group over the past year, the Bush Administration
formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement
into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002.
(Kanna is on the 25-seat Governing Council inaugurated July 13,
2003.)
Second ILA Designations. The Bush Administration applauded efforts
during 2001 and 2002 by these groups to hold meetings to coordinate with each
other and with the INC and other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London
and jointly run with the INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers. However, since
the regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, virtually none of the groups listed
immediately above has openly sought a major role in post-Saddam Iraq, and the
whereabouts of many of their leaders are not known.
As the decision whether to launch military action approached, on December 9,
2002, President Bush issued a determination to draw down the remaining $92 million
in defense articles and services authorized under the Iraq Liberation Act for the INA,
the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi
opposition groups designated byme under the Act before or after this determination.”
This latter phrase suggested that some of the draw downs would go to the six groups
designated above as eligible to receive ILA draw downs. The announcement
appeared to be part of reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists in tasks that
could assist U.S. forces, possibly including combat units.13 An initial group of 3,000
was selected, but only about 70 oppositionists completed training at an air base
(Taszar) in Hungary, according to press reports.14 These oppositionists served with
U.S. forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom as translators and mediators between U.S.
forces and local leaders, and most did not stay in Iraq, according to observers.
As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began
planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002,
with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in
London. In advance of the meeting, the Bush Administration appointed NSC official
Zalmay Khalilzad to be a liaison to the Iraqi opposition. The conference was
organized by the same six groups whose leaders visited Washington in August 2002,
but included other groups as well, and they discussed whether the opposition should
declare a provisional government. The Administration opposed that step on the
grounds that doing so was premature and would give the impression that outside
powers were determining Iraq’s political structure.
The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65-member follow-up committee,
which some criticized as weighted heavily toward Shiite Islamist groups such as
SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24-27, 2003 in northern Iraq.
13 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.”
Washington Post, October 19, 2002.
14 Williams, Daniel. U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles. Washington Post, December
18, 2002.
CRS-18
Against the urging of U.S. representatives at the meeting, the opposition agreed to
form a six man committee that would prepare for a transition regime, although it
stopped short of declaring a provisional government. The six included PUK leader
Jalal Talabani, KDP leader Masud Barzani, SCIRI leader Mohammed Baqr Al
Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Iyad Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign minister Adnan
Pachachi. Iran allowed Iraqi oppositionists to cross from Iran into northern Iraq to
hold that session. All six groups of the above groups or personalities are now on the
U.S.-backed Governing Council named July 13, 2003.
Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the
new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete
disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if that country wanted to avert military
action. The Administration had been downplaying the goal of regime change after
President Bush’s September 12, 2002 speech before the United Nations General
Assembly, in which he focused on enforcing U.N. resolutions that require Iraqi
disarmament. However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change
goal after February 2002 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course. In the
Administration view, a friendly government in Baghdad was required if the
international community is to rid Iraq of WMD and links to terrorist groups.
The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March breakdown of
U.N. diplomacyover whether the U.N. SecurityCouncil should authorize war against
Iraq for failing to complywith Resolution 1441. The diplomatic breakdown followed
several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by the director of the U.N. inspection
bodyUNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification, and Inspection Commission) Hans
Blix and the director of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA),
Mohammad al-Baradei, most recently on March 7, 2003. The briefings were
generally critical of Iraq for failing to pro-actively cooperate to clear up outstanding
questions about Iraq’s WMD program, but the latter two briefings (February 24 and
March 7) noted progress in clearing up outstanding WMD questions. The
Blix/Baradei briefings said Iraq had not accounted for its past WMD, but the two did
not state that they were certain that Iraq had retained WMD, or that they had
uncovered any banned WMD. Iraq declared short range ballistic missiles that were
determined by Blix to be of prohibited ranges, and Blix ordered Iraq to destroy them.
Iraq began the destruction prior to the launching of the U.S.-led war.
Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and
Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that
inspections should be given more time. They noted that Iraq was well contained by
sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones. Those who agreed with this
view maintained that, as long as Iraq allowed access to U.N. weapons inspections
under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national
security. Inspections encountered few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700
inspections of about 400 different sites, as of mid-March 2003. Others experts
believed that, even if Iraq were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could
have been deterred by U.S. overall strategic superiority, presumably including the
U.S. nuclear arsenal.
The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq
had not fundamentally decided to disarm, and was attempting to preserve WMD
CRS-19
capabilities. The Administration asserted on March 17, 2003, that diplomatic options
to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full attention to military action.
That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and his sons, Uday and Qusay,
an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war. They refused the
ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003.
In the war, Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and
British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the regime, at times, put up stiff
resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi military commanders or
Baathist political figures came forward to tryto establish a post-Saddam government,
but senior regime leaders fled Baghdad, and the whereabouts of the top leadership,
including Saddam Hussein, is unknown. The outcome of a post-war debate on the
results of the war might depend on such factors as the pace of reconstruction; the
degree of resistance to the U.S.-led occupation; the amount of WMD ultimately
found, if any; and whether a new government is stable and democratic.
Post-War Governance Issues
Since the fall of Saddam Hussein’s regime on April 9, 2003, there has been
increasing debate about governing post-war Iraq. The same U.S. concerns about
fragmentation of and instability in Iraq that existed in prior years are present in the
current debate over how to establish a post-war interim regime. Although some Iraqi
civilians have welcomed U.S. and British troops in areas captured, many Iraqis now
want U.S. and British forces to leave Iraq, and U.S. military officials say that they
now face a “classic guerrilla war” against U.S. occupation forces. Other experts fear
that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall under control of SCIRI and other Shiite
Islamist forces who, as noted above, are well-organized and are asserting growing
control over areas inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites. Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s
population but have traditionally been under-represented in Iraq’s Sunni Muslim-
dominated government.
Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule
The Administration asserts that it will stay in Iraq until there is a stable,
democratic successor regime that is at peace with its neighbors. However, there has
been some debate between U.S. authorities and key anti-Saddam groups over how
and when to establish a successor regime. Senior U.S. officials, including deputy
Defense Secretary Paul Wolfowitz, had said in early April 2003 that they hoped to
have a successor regime in place within six months of the fall of the regime.
However, in mid-May, U.S. officials, apparently fearing that existing major groups
could not form a stable regime, or that Shiite Islamists would dominate a successor
authority, backed away from any deadlines for establishing an Iraqi self-rule
authority. The anti-Saddam groups, led bythe seven partygrouping discussed below,
asserted that Iraqis are sufficiently competent and unified to rebuild Iraq after a war
with the United States.
Shortly after the war, the United States began a process of establishing a
successor regime. The Administration organized an April 15 meeting, in Nasiriyah,
CRS-20
of about 100 Iraqis of varying ideologies, present by U.S. invitation. Many of the
attendees were representatives of Iraqi tribal groupings that had not been politically
active before. However, SCIRI, along with several Shiite clerics that have
appropriated authority throughout much of southern Iraq since the fall of the regime,
boycotted the meeting and called for an Islamic state and the withdrawal of U.S.
forces. Another meeting of about 250 delegates was held in Baghdad on April 26,
which ended in agreement to hold a broader meeting, within a month, to name an
interim Iraqi administration.
In parallel with the late April meeting in Baghdad, the five most prominent
exiled opposition groups met, with U.S. envoys present: SCIRI, the INC, the INA,
the PUK, and the KDP. At a subsequent meeting on May 9, 2003, the five agreed to
expand their grouping to seven, adding to their ranks the little known Nasir al-
Chadirchy, head of a party called the National Democratic Party of Iraq, as well as
the Da’wa Party. The seven party grouping strongly criticized the U.S. decision in
mid-May 2003 to delay the formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority indefinitely and
to instead establish a purely advisory body of 25 to 30 Iraqis. The seven party
grouping subsequently began meeting among itself and with U.S. occupation
authorities to try to obtain at least a partial reversal of that decision.
With U.S. casualties in Iraq mounting and a growing sense of resentment among
the Iraqi population, the U.S.-led occupation authority (Coalition Provisional
Authority, CPA) incorporated the views of the seven party grouping. U.S.
administrator for Iraq Paul Bremer (see below) said on June 23, 2003 that the planned
25-30 member body would have “real authority” from its first days. He said it would
nominate ministry heads, recommend policies, and convene a “constitutional
conference” to draft a new constitution.15
The Governing Council. On July 13, 2003, a Governing Council was
unveiled to the Iraqi public, appointed by the U.S.-led CPA but reflecting the
influence of the seven party grouping, as well as prominent Iraqis who were never in
exile and were not affiliated with the exiled opposition. The Council has 25
members, of which 3 are women and 13 are Shiite Muslims.
Of the 13 Shiite Muslims on the Council, one seat is held by SCIRI directly
(Abd al-Aziz Al Hakim, younger brother of Mohammad Baqr), one is held by a
guerrilla affiliated with SCIRI (Abdul Karim al-Muahmmadawi), two are Da’wa
Party (Ibrahim al-Jafari and Abdul Zahra Othman) leaders, and considered allies of
SCIRI, and one is a former Da’wa activist (Muwaffaq al-Ruba’i). Also on the
Council is a moderate Shiite cleric, Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum, but he is considered
pro-U.S. and not affiliated with SCIRI or the Da’wa. He headed the Ahl al-Bayt
charity center in London since the 1980s. The remaining Shiite Muslims, such as
Chalabi and Iyad al-Alawi, are mostly considered secular. Appointed to the Council
was one Sunni Muslim Islamist, Muhsin Abdul Hamid, who heads the Iraqi Islamic
Party, but he does not have a clear affiliation or relationship with the Shiite Islamists
on the Council.
15 Transcript: Bremer Reviews Progress, Plans for Iraq Reconstruction. Washington File,
June 23, 2003.
CRS-21
The Council includes five Kurds, including the two main Kurdish leaders Jalal
Talabani and Masud Barzani. The Kurds are generally considered pro-U.S. and
might be expected to vote the way the U.S.-led coalition wants.
Although not a cohesive bloc, the Council includes exiles and non-exiles who
generally want a liberal democracy and would be considered pro-U.S. Most
prominent among them is Chalabi, but this grouping includes National Democratic
Party leader Nasir al-Chadirchy and former foreign minister Adnan Pachachi, both
of whom are Sunni Muslims, as well as former foreign ministry official Akila al-
Hashimi, a Shiite woman. Others most likely to affiliate with this bloc include
Sunni businessman Samir Shakir al-Sumaidy; Sunni civil engineer Ghazi al-Yawar,
president of Saudi-based Hicap Technology; the Shiite coordinator for the Human
Rights Association of Babel, Ahmad al-Barak; and the two other women Council
members — Songul Chapouk, a member of the Turkomen minority, who heads the
Iraqi Women’s Association, and Raja al-Khuza’i, a Shiite who heads the maternity
hospital in Diwaniyah.
A member of the Assyrian Christian community is on the Council. Yonadam
Kanna, the secretary-general of the Democratic Assyrian Movement, is on the body.
It is not known what other members of the Council, if any, he might be aligned with.
Also unclear is whether or not Hamid al-Musa, the Shiite head of the Iraqi
Communist Party, is allied with anyone else on the Council.
The Council has not yet selected a chairperson, but it has taken a few decisions.
It has authorized the establishment of an Iraqi war crimes tribunal for Saddam and
associates accused of major human rights abuses. It also has empowered a three
member delegation to seek formal U.N. recognition.
The Governing Council is expected to work with the Coalition Provisional
Authority to appoint a constitutional drafting commission. On July 17, CPA head
Bremer said that a constitution could conceivably be drafted in time to have national
elections by summer of 2004. He has linked the potential length of the U.S.
occupation to the completion of successful national elections and the restoration of
security in Iraq.
As part of the planning process that took place before the war, the U.S. State
Department supported a group of Iraqi exiles to address issues that would confront
a successor government.16 However, the State Department working group (the
“Future of Iraq Project”) does not appear to have significant influence on any post-
war regime decision-making in Iraq. Some experts believe the Defense Department
was promoting a competing or separate group of exiles.17 The State Department
project, which cost $5 million, consisted of working groups that discussed (1)
transitional justice; (2) public finance; (3) public and media outreach; (4) democratic
principles; (5) water, agriculture, and the environment; (6) health and human
16 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,”
Washington File, December 11, 2002.
17 Fineman, Mark, Robin Wright, and Doyle McManus. Preparing for War, Stumbling to
Peace. Los Angeles Times, July 18, 2003.
CRS-22
services; (7) economy and infrastructure; (8) education; (9) refugees, internally-
displaced persons, and migration policy; (10) foreign and national security policy;
(11) defense institutions and policy; (12) free media; (13) civil society capacity-
building; (14) anti-corruption measures; and (15) oil and energy.
Post-War U.S. Operations and the Coalition Provisional
Authority (CPA)
Experts note that projections about U.S. operations in post-war Iraq, including
the duration of the U.S. military occupation and the numbers of occupation troops,
are largely dependent on the amount of continuing Iraqi resistance, the number of
U.S. casualties taken, and the rate at which such U.S. objectives as the establishment
of a stable and democratic successor regime are accomplished. At present, about
160,000 U.S. and British troops remain in Iraq, according to a June 2003 report to
Congress mandated byP.L. 108-11. Of those, 148,000 are U.S. personnel and 12,000
are British. There were 2,000 Australian troops as part of the war fighting coalition,
but many of those are now on their way home. Earlier press reports said the
Administration wanted to draw the U.S. force level down to about 35,000 by the end
of 2003, but continued unrest and insecurity in Iraq appears to have made that goal
untenable, and some U.S. commanders do not rule out an increase in U.S. force
levels if necessary.
There are indications that resistance to the U.S. governance of Iraq is growing,
judging by the frequency of attacks on U.S. forces over the past few weeks. The new
Centcom commander John Abizaid said on July17, 2003, that the United States faces
a “classic guerrilla war” led by “mid-level Baath Party activists organized
regionally.” Such attacks have killed 33 U.S. militarypersonnel since President Bush
declared an end to “major combat operations” in Iraq on May 1, 2003. The Bush
Administration says resistance comes not only from remnants of the Baath Party but
also from Arab volunteers — possibly linked to or supportive of Al Qaeda — who
have come to Iraq from other countries to fight the U.S. occupation. Attacks have
been more frequent in the Sunni areas of central Iraq than elsewhere, where support
for Saddam Hussein’s regime was traditionally the strongest. Some elements of the
resistance appear to want to restore the old regime, while others appear to be
motivated by opposition to foreign rule. Others appear to be motivated by the
difficulty the U.S. and British authorities have had in restoring civilian services. In
late June, some opponents of the occupation have identified themselves as distinct
groups, scribbling graffiti warnings and faxing statements to the Arab satellite
television network Al Jazeera and elsewhere. They have used such names as:
— Al Awda (the Return);
— The Snakes;
— The Movement of the Victorious Sect;
— Iraq’s Revolutionaries - Al Anbar’s Armed Brigades;
— The Popular Resistance for the Liberation of Iraq; and
CRS-23
— Armed Islamic Movement for Al Qaeda - Falluja Branch. Actual linkages to Al
Qaeda, if any, are not known.
The continuing resistance has complicated the U.S. mission. In addition to
targeting U.S. forces, resistance fighters are assassinating Iraqis who are cooperating
with the United States. In addition, U.S. officials say that the costs of the ongoing
U.S. operations are about $3.9 billion per month, about double what was anticipated
for the occupation period. On the other hand, CPA said on July 18 that acts of
sabotage against pipelines and other infrastructure appears to have declined over the
past six weeks.
The Bush Administration initially tasked Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) to direct
civilian reconstruction, working through a staff of U.S. diplomats and other U.S.
government personnel who are serving as advisers and administrators in Iraq’s
various ministries. He headed the Office of Reconstruction and Humanitarian
Assistance (ORHA), within the Department of Defense, created by a January 20,
2003 executive order. After spending the combat phase of the war in neighboring
Kuwait, Garner and some of his staff of about 200 deployed to Baghdad on April 21,
2003, to begin work. Former Ambassador to Yemen Barbara Bodine was responsible
for a “central” region; and retired generals Buck Walters and Bruce Moore were
responsible for “southern” and “northern” regions, respectively.
Press reports said that senior U.S. officials were dissatisfied with the slow pace
of reconstruction under Garner, and on May 6, 2003, the Administration appointed
former ambassador L. Paul Bremer to lead the overall reconstruction effort, with a
focus on political reconstruction. He arrived on May 12 to head the Coalition
Provisional Authority, which subsumed ORHA, and Bodine and then Garner
departed shortly thereafter. The appointment represented an apparent adjustment
from the original structure of the U.S. reconstruction effort, although the
Administration stated that it was always envisioned that a civilian would eventually
take over the U.S. effort. U.S. officials now refer to the CPA as an occupying
authority legitimized by U.N. Security Council Resolution 1483 of May 22, 2003.
Among other provisions, the resolution lifted U.N. sanctions on Iraq.
Building Security Institutions. While attempting to restore securityto Iraq,
the CPA is beginning to build new Iraqi institutions that can eventually take over the
security function from the United States. The United States is planning to train a
40,000 person Iraqi army, about 10% the size of the pre-war Iraqi force. About
12,000 are expected to be in the force by mid-2004. Former Defense Department
official Walter Slocombe is in charge of forming the new Iraqi army. The CPA is
also trying to turn basic policing functions over to Iraqis. Overall, about 32,000 Iraqi
policemen have returned to their jobs, about half the total goal. The CPA official
responsible for the new police force, former New York City police commissioner
Bernard Kerik, says it will take about 18 months (end of 2004) to reach the goal of
65,000 policemen nationwide.18
18 Schmitt, Eric. Wolfowitz on Visit to Iraq to Assess Rebuilding Effort. New York Times,
July 18, 2003.
CRS-24
Searching for Regime Violations. Organs of the CPA and the U.S.
government are attempting to uncover abuses and violations of the regime of Saddam
Hussein. A 1,500 person “Iraq SurveyGroup,” headed by a U.S. militarycommander
but composed of many civilian technical experts, including former U.N. weapons
inspector David Kay, is attempting to uncover alleged weapons of mass destruction.
The Survey Group is also searching for mass graves of victims of the former regime.
Thus far, U.S. military personnel have found at least 60 mass graves, some with
hundreds of corpses. Most appear to contain bodies of Kurdish and Shiite opponents
of the former regime, but some might contain the bodies of about 600 Kuwaitis
missing from the first Gulf war.
Recruiting Other Peacekeepers. The relatively slow pace of establishing
Iraqi security institutions, coupled with ongoing security difficulties and continued
U.S. casualties, has led to calls from Members of Congress and others to try to enlist
other countries to help with the stabilization of Iraq. Negotiations with other
countries is proceeding for a multinational peacekeeping force in Iraq that would
presumably spread some of the peace-keeping and stabilization burden now borne
mostly by U.S. forces. According to the Administration, more than 30 countries are
discussing offers of forces for a multilateral stabilization force, and several countries
have made pledges of troops and or police or support personnel. The commitments
of several nations, including Germany, France, and India, appear to be dependent on
whether the U.N. Security Council authorizes such a force, and several nations
appear to require U.S. or other funding in order to participate. Secretary of State
Powell said on July 16 that the United States is discussing with other countries the
possibility of seeking formal U.N. backing for a multilateral peacekeeping force.
The United Kingdom and Poland have offered to lead multinational divisions
in that mission in southern Iraq and central Iraq, respectively. The UK-led force is
to number about 14,000, of which all but 2,000 are British forces. The Polish-led
force is to number about 9,000, of which 2,300 will be Polish. Polish forces have
begun deploying to Iraq. Other major pledges include the following:
— Spain 1,300
— Italy 3,000 military police and civilian relief workers
— the Netherlands 1,100
— Japan 1,000, mostly combat support/logistics
— Czech Republic 400
— Ukraine 1,800
— Denmark 380
— Hungary 300
— Bulgaria about 500
— El Salvador 300 (as part of 1,200 person force with Honduras,
Nicaragua, and Dominican Republic, each
contributing about 300)
— Portugal 120 paramilitary police
–– Azerbaijan 150
CRS-25
The United States has discussed with NATO whether or not it would take on
Iraq as a fifth peacekeeping mission. However, on July 17, NATO secretary general
George Robertson said the body had no plans for a greater role beyond providing
logistical help to the Polish-led force in Iraq. On July 10, 2003, the Senate adopted
an amendment to a State Department authorization bill (S. 925) calling on the
Administration to formally ask NATO to lead a peacekeeping force for Iraq. A
related bill (H.R. 2112) was introduced in the House on May 15, 2003.
U.N. Role. Just after the fall of Saddam Hussein’s regime, the United States
and its European allies and other countries reached a measure of agreement on a
U.N. role in post-war Iraq. Resolution 1483, which was adopted unanimously,
provides for a U.N. special representative to coordinate the activities of U.N.
personnel in Iraq and to help establish a successor government. The Secretary
General subsequently (May 27) appointed Brazilian diplomat Sergio Vieira de Mello
for that post. The resolution also gave the United Nations a monitoring role over the
Development Fund for Iraq, a fund that will handle Iraq’s oil revenues until there is
a successor government. The resolution did not authorize a return to Iraq of U.N.
weapons inspectors, although the resolution provides for deliberations on that issue.
Some International Atomic Energy Agency inspectors returned to Iraq in June 2003
on a limited nuclear mission in Baghdad. As noted above, some countries are
conditioning any contribution of peacekeeping troops to Iraq on a formal U.N.
authorization, a step the Administration now appears to be weighing.
Reviving the Oil Industry.19 As the driver of Iraq’s economy, the rebuilding
of the oil industry is receiving substantial U.S. attention. It has been widely assumed
that Iraq’s vast oil reserves, believed second only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be
used to fund much of the costs of reconstruction. Presidential spokesman Ari
Fleischer said on February 18, 2003, referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a
variety of means ... to shoulder much of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.”
Many observers had been concerned that an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could
destroy its own oil fields, but coalition forces quickly secured Iraq’s southern oil
fields after combat began. Only about 9 oil wells were set on fire, of a total of over
500 oil fields in that region, and all were put out quickly. The northern oil fields in
Kirkuk and Mosul were not set afire.
In early May 2003, the U.S.-led coalition set up an advisory board, headed by
former Shell executive Phillip Carroll, to oversee the rebuilding of Iraq’s oil sector.
An Iraqi oil industry professional, Thamer Ghadhban, was named to serve as head
of the interim management team that will run Iraq’s oil ministry and report to the
advisory board. The first exports began in late June 2003, and Ghadhban said that
Iraq would be up to about 1 million barrels per day of exports by mid-July. Its pre-
war export rate was about 2.2 million barrels per day, a level that U.S. officials and
Iraqi oil appointees hope to reach by late 2003. However, press reports in mid-July
say that Iraq is only exporting about 250,000 barrels per day because attacks on oil
infrastructure has slowed its recovery. The CPA-produced budget for Iraq assumes
that oil exports will yield about $3.6 billion through the end of 2003, and provide
19 For information on the prospects for Iraq’s post-war economy, see CRS Report RL31944.
Iraq’s Economy: Past, Present, Future.
CRS-26
about half of the approximately $6.6 billion budget for Iraq for the period. The
deficit will be covered from funds in the Development Fund for Iraq, set up by the
post-war Resolution 1483 (see below).
A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which
foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s
vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will
seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other
countries.
Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have
been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program.
The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put
in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was
suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various
aspects of the program departed Iraq. As of the start of the war, about $9 billion
worth of humanitarian goods were in the process of being delivered or in production.
(See CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, Sanctions, and Illicit
Trade.)
On March 28, 2003, the U.N. SecurityCouncil unanimouslyadopted Resolution
1472 that restarted the program’s operations and empowered the United Nations, for
a 45-day period (until May 12), to take direct control of all aspects of the program.
Under the new resolution, the United Nations is setting priorities for and directing the
delivery of already contracted supplies. The enhanced U.N. authority was extended
on April 25, 2003, to last at least until the six-month phase of the program expired
on June 3, 2003.
On April 17, 2003, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions
against Iraq, signaling that the Administration wanted to focus on restoring normal
international commerce with Iraq rather than extending the oil-for-food program.
Resolution 1483 lifted sanctions and provided for the phasing out of the oil for food
program within six months after adoption of that resolution on May 22. The
resolution also provided for the United Nations to transfer to the new Development
Fund for Iraq $1 billion in funds held by the oil-for-food program escrow fund. That
Development Fund contained about $7 billion in June 2003, consisting of captured
Iraqi assets, Iraqi assets abroad, the monies transferred from the oil-for-food account,
and U.S. funds available for reconstruction. (For more information, see CRS Report
RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, International Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.)
War Crimes. An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is
whether Saddam Hussein and his associates should be prosecuted for war crimes and
crimes against humanity, if and when they are caught. The Administration said in
early April 2003 that Saddam and his inner circle should be tried by Iraqis if they are
captured, although others might be tried by a U.S.-led process for any crimes
committed in the course of the 2003 war. In the year prior to the war, the
Administration was gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his
associates. Those it had sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and
Qusay; Ali Hassan al-Majid, for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (he was
reported by British officers to have died in an early April air strike on his home in
CRS-27
Basra, although that is now in question); Muhammad Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered
in mid-April 2003); Taha Yasin Ramadan; first Vice President and number three in
the regime; Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council
and formally number two in the regime; Barzan al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother
(captured in mid-April 2003); Watban al-Tikriti (captured in April 2003) and Sabawi
al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam and former leaders of regime
intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputy Prime Minister and foremost regime
spokesman (surrendered in May 2003); and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait
during Iraq’s occupation of that country (apprehended in May 2003).
Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials
sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured
or surrendered. As of mid-July 2003, according to Coalition Provisional Authority
officials, more than half of the Iraqis on the list of 55 are now in custody or are
confirmed killed. Among the others apprehended are Amir al-Saadi, chief science
adviser to Saddam; Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti, a son-in-law of Saddam; Vice President
Taha Muhi ad-Din Ma’ruf; and suspected WMD manager Hoda Mahdi Salih al-
Ammash.
The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and
the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29,
1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related
atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for
FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress
that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal
for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137
(passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March
13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October
31, 1998).
A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993,
after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the Administration has supported
INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the
arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the
Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer,
said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established,
focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical
weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds)
and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which
an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against
Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes
against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations.
In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a
U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war
crimes is formed.
CRS-28
Congressional Reactions
Congress, like the Administration, had divergent views on the mechanisms for
promoting regime change, although there was widespread agreement in Congress that
regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S. policy. There was substantial
disagreement over whether a major military offensive was the most desirable option
for achieving that objective. On December 20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75,
by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a
“mounting threat” to the United States. The resolution did not call for new U.S. steps
to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few Members called for the overthrow of
Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in support of the resolution.
In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq,
some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint
appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on
Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations
Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the
opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an
option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In
early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members — Senators John
McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and
Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr.
— wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for
operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter,
Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S.
assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish
areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and
other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to
accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.”
As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002,
Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result.
Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force
against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce
U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on
October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote
of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243).
The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. Prior to the war, it held
several hearings on the progress of post-war reconstruction. During the war and in
its aftermath, several Members applauded the performance of the U.S. military and
the overthrow of the regime. Some Members, however, have criticized the
Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war period in light of major
looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the regime. Criticism of post-war
planning has escalated as attacks on U.S. occupation forces have mounted, although
the Administration and others say U.S. casualties are relatively light and that the
resistance is not jeopardizing overall U.S. objectives for Iraq. Several Committees
are conducting inquiries into why substantial amounts of WMD have not been found
in Iraq to date.
CRS-29
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition
Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.)
to the Opposition
(Figures in millions of dollars)
INC War
Crimes Broadcasting
Unspecified
Opposition
Activities
Total
FY 1998
(P.L. 105-174)
2.0 5.0
(RFE/RL)
3.0 10.0
FY 1999
(P.L. 105-277)
3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0
FY 2000
(P.L. 106-113)
2.0 8.0 10.0
FY 2001
(P.L. 106-429)
12.0
(aid
distribution
inside Iraq)
2.0 6.0
(INC radio)
5.0 25.0
FY 2002
(P.L. 107-115)
25.0 25.0
Total,
FY1998-FY2002
15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0
FY2003
(no earmark)
3.1
(announced
April 2003)
6.9
(remaining
to be
allocated)
10.0
FY2004
(request)
0 0
Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq
Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97
million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent,
as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided,
the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and
FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be
used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N.
programs.
Another version (English): 27 June 2003 — RL31339_2003-06-27.pdf
Order Code RL31339
CRS Report for Congress
Received through the CRS Web
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
Updated June 27, 2003
Kenneth Katzman
Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs
Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division
Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
Summary
In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized
Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to abandon
its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs as required by U.N. Security
Council resolutions and the potential for it to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. In
September 2002, the President warned that unless Iraq fully disarmed in cooperation
with United Nations weapons inspectors, the United States would lead a coalition to
achieve that disarmament militarily. U.S. officials made clear that this would
include the ouster of Iraq’s President Saddam Hussein’s regime. After making a
final demand that Iraq fully rid itself of WMD, on March 19, 2003, the United States
launched “Operation Iraqi Freedom,” a war effort to disarm Iraq and change its
regime. The regime fell on April 9.
In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change
through U.S.-led military action would yield benefits beyond disarmament, including
liberation of the Iraqi people from an oppressive regime and enhancement of the
prospects for peace and democracy throughout the Middle East. The goal of regime
change in Iraq had been declared U.S. policy since November 1998, and U.S. efforts
to oust Saddam had been pursued, with varying degrees of intensity, since the end of
the Gulf war in 1991. These efforts primarily involved U.S. financial backing for
opposition groups inside and outside Iraq, several of which are now contending for
power in post-Saddam Iraq. Past efforts to change the regime floundered because of
limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the Iraqi opposition, and the efficiency
and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping intelligence and security forces.
Previous U.S. administrations ruled out major U.S. military action to change Iraq’s
regime, believing such action would be costly, risky, and not necessarily justified by
the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament.
The character of the government that will replace Saddam Hussein’s Baath
Party, and the exact process by which that government will be chosen, are yet to be
determined. Some Administration officials reportedly had hoped that major military
and governmental defections from the Hussein regime would serve as the core of a
successor government. However, no senior Hussein regime figures defected, and
established opposition groups and emerging local leaders will likely form the core
of a new regime. Some of these groups are urging the United States to begin
establishing a self-rule authority soon, but the Bush Administration has delayed plans
to do so, apparently believing that democratic institutions must be built before power
can be handed to an all-Iraqi authority.
This report will be updated as warranted by major developments.
Contents
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Ansar al-Islam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Sadr Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
The First Eligibility Designations Under the ILA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups . . . 10
Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Post-War Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Establishing an Iraqi Interim Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
“Leadership Council” of Seven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Post-War U.S. Operations in Iraq/Coalition Provisional Authority . . . 20
Recruiting Other Peacekeepers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
U.N. Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Reviving the Oil Industry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
War Crimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Congressional Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
The United States has been attempting to change Iraq’s regime since the 1991
Persian Gulf war, although achieving this goal was not declared policy until 1998.
In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass destruction
(WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United States would
seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A regime change
policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, October 31, 1998).
Bush Administration officials have emphasized regime change as the cornerstone of
U.S. policy toward Iraq since shortly after the September 11, 2001, attacks.
Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 17, 2003, and achieved the
objective of regime change by April 9, 2003.
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam
Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an
operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George
H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end
of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and
Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope
of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions. The revolt in southern Iraq reached
the suburbs of Baghdad, but the well-trained and loyal Republican Guard forces had
survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from battle prior to the U.S.
ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid-March 1991. Many Shiites
blamed the United States for not supporting their uprising and standing aside as the
regime retaliated against those who participated in the rebellion. Kurds, benefitting
from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991, were able to drive Iraqi
troops out of much of northern Iraq and establish an autonomous zone there and
subsequently remained largely free of Baghdad’s rule.
According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite
uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding
stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup
against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that
purpose. The Administration apparently believed — and this view apparently still
is shared by many experts and U.S. officials — that a coup by elements within the
current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq.
Many observers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and
Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and
tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria.
CRS-2
Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition
Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that
the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment
within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision
was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the
diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the
Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and
diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This
opposition coalition seemed to provide a vehicle for the United States to build a
viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert
support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.1
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi
The growing opposition coalition took concrete shape in an organization called
the Iraqi National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two
main Kurdish militias, the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic
Union of Kurdistan (PUK), participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens
of opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came into the
coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq.
The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi
ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military
officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC
with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups
publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests,
including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the
preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. Security Council
resolutions on Iraq.2 However, many observers doubted its commitment to
democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and
because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies.
Ahmad Chalabi. Selected to chair the INC’s Executive Committee was
Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 58 years old, a secular Shiite Muslim from a prominent
banking family. He was educated in the United States as a mathematician. He fled
Iraq to Jordan in 1958, when the Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military
coup. This coup occurred 10 years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July
1968). In 1978, he founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian
authorities on charges of financial malfeasance and he left Jordan, possibly with
some help from members of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989. The Jordanian
government subsequently re-capitalized the bank with national funds. In 1992, he
was convicted in absentia of embezzling $70 million from the bank and sentenced
1 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2,
1992.
2 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by
INC representatives, February 1993.
CRS-3
to 22 years in prison. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government was
pressured by Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to
the Jordanian government. In April 2003, senior Jordanian officials, including King
Abdullah, called Chalabi “divisive” and stopped just short of saying he would be
unacceptable to Jordan as leader of Iraq. Chalabi’s critics acknowledge that, despite
allegations about his methods, he has been single-minded in his determination to
overthrow Saddam Hussein, and he is said to be the favorite of those Administration
officials, particularly in the Department of Defense, that were the most supportive of
changing Iraq’s regime by force.
Since Chalabi returned to Iraq, there have been no large public demonstrations
supportive of him or the INC, indicating that he does not have a large following
inside Iraq. However, anecdotal press reporting suggest that he has attracted some
support from those Iraqis that most welcome the U.S. military offensive against Iraq
as liberation from Saddam Hussein’s regime and who believe the U.S. presence is
needed to ensure security and facilitate reconstruction. On April 6, Chalabi and
about 700 INC fighters (“Free Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by the U.S. military from
their base in the north to the Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs
in southern Iraq. Chalabi and some Free Iraqi Forces later deployed to Baghdad and
other parts of Iraq. Since establishing his headquarters in Baghdad, Chalabi has tried
to build support by searching for members of the former regime and arranging for
U.S. military forces in Iraq to provide security or other benefits to his potential
supporters. However, the Free Iraqi Forces accompanying Chalabi have largely
disbanded following the U.S. decisions in mid-May 2003 to disarm independent
militias and to delay the formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority.
A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book
“Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq,” detailing alleged Iraqi regime
human rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracy for Iraq, including
full rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he teaches
Middle Eastern politics at Brandeis University. Another INC activist, Mohammed
al-Zubaidi, declared himself in charge of Baghdad in mid-April, but U.S. officials did
not recognize him as mayor and detained him in April 2003.
Chalabi is part of a grouping of major party leaders, now numbering seven, that
have been meeting since prior to the war. As discussed below, the seven-party
leadership council hopes to become the core of a successor regime, although the
United States has, for now, prevented the grouping from assuming any formal powers
inside Iraq.
The Kurds/KDP and PUK. The Kurds, probably the most pro-U.S. of all
the groups in Iraq, do not have ambitions to play a major role in governing Arab Iraq,
but Iraq’s neighbors have always been fearful that the Kurds might still seek outright
independence. In committing to the concept of federalism, the INC platform
assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq. Turkey, which
has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly
fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into
a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy
since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War
I. (Iraq became an independent Kingdom in 1932, although it remained under British
CRS-4
influence until the 1958 fall of the British-installed monarchy.) In 1961, the KDP,
then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP leader Masud Barzani’s
father, began an insurgency that has continued until today, although interrupted by
periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud Barzani’s brother, Idris,
commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the Iran-Iraq war but was killed in
that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from the KDP in 1965; the
PUK’s members are generally more educated, urbane, and left-leaning than those of
the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000-60,000 fighters, some of
which are trained in conventional military tactics. Both the KDP and the PUK are
on the seven-party “leadership council.”
Ansar al-Islam. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties enjoyed good
relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement of Iraqi
Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaykh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in Halabja,
Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical attack on
that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998.
A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam
(Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam).
This faction, led by Mullah Krekar (who was detained in Europe in August 2002 and
now lives in Norway), reportedly is associated with Al Qaeda and hosted in its
northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters who fled the U.S.-led war in Afghanistan.
Mullah Krekar reportedly studied under Shaykh Abdullah al-Azzam, an Islamic
theologian of Palestinian origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama bin Laden.
Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, during which its base was captured, about 8,000
people were in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, located near the town of Khurmal. This
included about 600 fighters.3 Fighters of Ansar al-Islam clashed with the PUK
around Halabja in December 2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedly responsible for
an assassination attempt against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002.
The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials
to be Abu Musab Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in
Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the
millenium celebration, the assassination in Jordan of U.S. diplomat Lawrence Foley
(2002), and to reported attempts in 2002 to spread the biological agent ricin in
London and possibly other places in Europe. In a presentation to the U.N. Security
Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied Zarqawi and Ansar al-
Islam to the Iraqi regime, which might have viewed Ansar al-Islam as a means of
pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents. Many experts believed Baghdad-Ansar
links were tenuous or even non-existent; Baghdad did not control northern Iraq even
before Operation Iraqi Freedom.4 Zarqawi’s current whereabouts are unknown,
although some unconfirmed press reports indicate he might have fled to Iran after the
fall of the Ansar camp to U.S.-led forces.
3 Chivers, C.J. Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.”
New York Times, December 6, 2002.
4 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire,
March 18, 2002.
CRS-5
Shiite Islamist Organizations
Some outside experts have had concerns about the potential strength and
ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups in post-
Saddam Iraq.
SCIRI/Badr Corps. The most well known among these is called the Supreme
Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member of the INC
in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC banner.
SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition groups
in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad Baqr al-
Hakim, was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head an Islamic Republic of
Iraq, a vision that, if realized, might conflict with U.S. plans to forge a democratic
Iraq. Baqr Al Hakim and his family fled Iraq to Iran in 1980, during a major
crackdown on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam feared that Iraqi
Shiite Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution in Iran in 1979,
posed a major threat to his regime. Prior to the formation of SCIRI, Hakim and his
family were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party (see below). Mohammed Baqr
is the son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a prominent Shiite leader
in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini when Khomeini was in exile
in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. In early May 2003, there were press reports that
Mohammed Baqr might resign from his formal SCIRI leadership post and try to
establish himself in the Shiite holy city of Najaf, Iraq, as an overarching Shiite
authority figure in the image of the late Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran. He returned to
Iraq on May 10, welcomed by large crowds in Basra and Najaf, where he is now
based.
In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about
10,000-15,000 fighters/activists organized into a “Badr Corps” (named after a major
battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from Iran
into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. The Badr Corps is headed by
Mohammed Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim, who returned to Iraq on
April 20, 2003, to pave the way for Mohammed Baqr’s return. (Another Hakim
brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan in May 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s
security services.) Iran’s Revolutionary Guard, which is politically aligned with
Iran’s hard line civilian officials, has been the key patron of the Badr Corps,
providing it with weapons, funds, and other assistance. The Badr Corps fought
alongside the Guard against Iraqi forces during the Iran-Iraq war. However, many
Iraqi Shiites view SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr Corps operations in
southern Iraq prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark broad popular unrest
against the Iraqi regime. Some Badr fighters deployed inside northern Iraq on the eve
of Operation Iraqi Freedom, and the New York Times reported on May 7, 2003, that
many Badr activists have infiltrated into Iraq to build support for SCIRI.
Until August 2002 when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures
for meetings in Washington, SCIRI had publicly refused to work openly with the
United States or accept U.S. assistance. Since the fall of the regime on April 9,
SCIRI leaders have criticized what they called an illegitimate U.S. occupation of Iraq
and have called for the rapid establishment of an Iraqi self-rule authority. SCIRI
initially refused to join a U.S.-led process to establish an interim post-Saddam
CRS-6
government. However, suggesting that SCIRI does not want to confront the United
States, Abd al-Aziz al Hakim did meet with other opposition leaders in late April
2003 at a post-war governance planning session sponsored by U.S. officials. He has
since helped constitute the seven-party “leadership council” that is discussing Iraqi
self-rule with U.S. occupation authorities. Even though Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim
says he is for a democracy and would not seek to establish an Iranian-style Islamic
republic, U.S. officials are said to be mistrustful of SCIRI and have been seeking to
disarm its fighters. Unlike some other Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI has had good
working relations with some Sunni oppositionists and the Kurds. On June 27,
Muhammad Baqr told his followers that the U.S. occupation of Iraq should be
resisted by peaceful means only.
Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, perhaps Iraq’s oldest Shiite Islamist grouping,
continues to exist as a separate group, but it lacks its own strong, visible leadership,
and many Da’wa activists appear to be at least loosely allied with SCIRI. Da’wa
was given a place on the seven-party “leadership council” in May 2003. The party
was founded in 1957 by a revered Iraqi Shiite cleric, Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al
Sadr, a like-minded associate of Ayatollah Khomeini. Baqr Al Sadr was hung by the
Iraqi regime in 1980 for the Da’wa’s alleged responsibility in fomenting Shiite anti-
regime unrest following Iran’s 1979 Islamic revolution. That unrest included an
attempted assassination of senior Iraqi leader Tariq Aziz.
The Kuwaiti branch of the Da’wa Party allegedly was responsible for a May
1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks
on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The Hizballah organization in Lebanon
was founded by Lebanese clerics loyal to Ayatollah Baqr Al Sadr and the late
Ayatollah Khomeini, and there continue to be linkages between Hizballah and the
Da’wa Party. The Hizballah activists who held U.S. hostages in that country during
the 1980s often linked release of the Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party
prisoners held by Kuwait for those offenses. Some Iraqi Da’wa members look to
Lebanon’s senior Shiite cleric Mohammed Hossein Fadlallah, who was a student and
protege of Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, for spiritual guidance.
Sadr Grouping. Members of the clan of the late Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr
Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq. Although the Al Sadr clan
has been closely identified with the Da’wa Party, it appears that members of the clan
and their followers currently are operating in post-war Iraq as grouping separate from
the Da’wa. Another revered member of the clan, Mohammed Sadiq Al Sadr, and
two of his sons, were killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999. A surviving son,
Moqtada al-Sadr, who is about 27 years old, has attempted to rally his followers to
attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite politics. He and his clan apparently
have a large following in the Shiite neighborhoods of Baghdad, which, after the fall
of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr City,” from the former name
of “Saddam City.” However, he is viewed by Iran and many Iraqi Shiites as a young
radical who lacks religious and political weight. To compensate for his lack of
religious credentials, he has sought spiritual authority for his actions from exiled Iraqi
senior cleric, Ayatollah Kazem Haeri, who is living in Qom, Iran. An alternate
interpretation by some experts is that Haeri is acting at the direction of Iran’s
leadership to keep Moqtada Sadr under a measure of control. Moqtada’s reputation
may have been tarnished in early April when Moqtada al Sadr reportedly killed Abd
CRS-7
al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Abdol Qasem Musavi-Khoi,
shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al-Majid Khoi headed the
Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq after U.S.-led forces took
Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political doctrines of Ayatollah
Khomeini of Iran.
Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah. The revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al-
Sistani, based in Najaf, is also emerging as a major potential force in post-war Iraq.
He is the most senior of the four Shiite clerics that lead the Najaf- based “Hawza al-
Ilmiya,” a major grouping of seminaries and Shiite clerics. The Hawza, which is well
funded through donations, is becoming an important source of political authority in
the Shiite regions of Iraq, hiring Iraqis to perform functions performed by the former
regime and issuing directives, often obeyed, for some Iraqi civil servants to return to
work. Sistani himself, now free of a long house arrest at the hands of Baghdad, has
a large following of former students throughout the Shiite portions of Iraq. During
the U.S.-led war against Iraq, Moqtada al-Sadr and his followers reportedly tried to
intimidate Sistani by surrounding his office in Najaf with armed gunmen, a tactic that
many experts say is leading Sistani and the Hawza to ally with the Hakims in the
intra-Shiite power struggle. Sistani, who is said to be of Iranian ethnicity, is
considered to be in the tradition of Ayatollah Khoi in opposing a direct role for
clerics in governmental affairs, and it is therefore likely that Sistani and the Hawza
would not seek a direct or public role in the post-war regime. Some Sistani
pronouncements suggest he is increasingly willing to defer to Mohammed Baqr Al
Hakim in political decision-making.
Islamic Amal. SCIRI has been allied with another Shiite Islamist organization
called the Islamic Amal (Action) Organization. It is headed by Mohammed Taqi
Modarassi. Islamic Amal conducted attacks against Saddam Hussein’s regime in the
1980s, although it does not appear to have a following nearly as large as SCIRI or the
other Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s brother, Abd al-Hadi, headed the Islamic
Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, which tried to stir up Shiite unrest against the
Bahrain regime in the 1980s and 1990s (see below).
Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups
The differences among the various anti-Saddam organizations led to the near
collapse of the U.S. regime change effort the mid-1990s. In May 1994, the KDP and
the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs revenues levied at
border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s government based in
Irbil. The PUK lined up support from Iran while the KDP sought and received
countervailing backing from its erstwhile nemesis, the Baghdad government. The
infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC offensive against Iraqi troops in March
1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at the last minute. Although it was
repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of the less well-trained and poorly
motivated Iraqi units facing the Kurds. Some INC leaders point to the battle as an
indication that the INC could have succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. military
help, had it been given additional resources and training in the 1990s.
CRS-8
The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition in the
mid-1990s caused the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by
renewing ties to a non-INC group, Iraq National Accord (INA).5 The INA, originally
founded in 1990 with Saudi support, consists of military and security defectors who
were perceived as having ties to disgruntled officials currently serving within their
former organizations. It is headed by Dr. Iyad Alawi, former president of the Iraqi
Student Union in Europe and a physician by training. He is a secular Shiite Muslim,
but most of the members of the INA are Sunni Muslims. The INA’s prospects
appeared to brighten in August 1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al-
Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons of mass destruction programs — defected to
Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip on the military and security services was
weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate from there.
The INA became penetrated by Iraq’s intelligence services and, in June 1996,
Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by arresting or executing over 100 INA
sympathizers in the military.
Iraq’s counteroffensive against the opposition was completed two months after
the arrests of the INA sympathizers. In late August 1996, the KDP asked Baghdad
to provide armed support for its capture of Irbil from the rival PUK. Iraq took
advantage of the request to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in
northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout northern Iraq.
In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred
oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated
from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists,
mostly from the INC.
Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA continued to
operate throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt itself to some extent since the
June 1996 arrests. However, it does not appear to have a large following in the Iraqi
regime and did not announce any key defections from the regime during Operation
Iraqi Freedom, nor has it since found or captured any former regime leaders.
Although it has was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war,
there is a history of friction between the two groups; the INA reportedly bombed an
INC facility in northern Iraq in October 1995. Iyad Alawi represents the INA on the
seven-party “leadership council” that is discussing self rule with the U.S. occupation
authorities. However, since the fall of Saddam Hussein’s regime, there has been little
evident popular support for Alawi.
Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks
For the two years following the anti-Saddam opposition groups’ 1996 setbacks,
the Clinton Administration had little contact with these groups. In those two years,
the INC, INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations
and their ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998,
then Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations
5 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret
War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997.
CRS-9
subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations”
about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish.
Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections
during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam
Hussein. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with an
FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, signed May 1, 1998) that, among
other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the
opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free
Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October
1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to
coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to
highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions. The remaining $2 million was used
to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the
documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes,
and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In
subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for
war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix. Some of the war crimes funding has
gone to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War
Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues.
Iraq Liberation Act
The clearest indication of congressional support for a more active U.S.
overthrow effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998: the Iraq
Liberation Act (ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998).
The ILA gave the President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles
(and authorized $2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be
designated by the Administration. (An FY2003 supplemental appropriations, P.L.
108-11, added $86.5 million to the allowed draw-down ceiling to enable additional
funds to flow to groups helping the United States in Operation Iraqi Freedom. The
supplemental brought the total authorized under the Act to $183 million.) The Act’s
passage was widely interpreted as an expression of congressional support for the
concept of promoting an insurgency by using U.S. air-power to expand opposition-
controlled territory. This idea was advocated by Chalabi and some U.S. experts, such
as General Wayne Downing. President Clinton signed the legislation despite
reported widespread doubts within the Clinton Administration about the chances of
success in promoting an opposition insurgency inside Iraq.
The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting
regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it
should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime
headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly
articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq.
The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the
height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in
which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United
Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were
withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign
CRS-10
against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December
160-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq:
Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.)
The First Eligibility Designations Under the ILA. Further steps to
promote regime change followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, a career
diplomat, Frank Ricciardone, was named as a State Department’s “Coordinator for
the Transition in Iraq” — the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999,
after consultations with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13)
that the following organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance
under the Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the
Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the Movement for Constitutional
Monarchy (MCM), which is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a relative of the
Hashemite monarchs that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. The
IMIK and the MCM, in particular, were considered small movements that cannot
contribute much to an overthrow effort. Because of its possible role in contributing
to the formation of Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001,
although it was not formally taken off the ILA eligibility list.
welcome. Sharif Ali returned to Iraq on June 10 to a small but apparently enthusiastic
He does not have a seat on the seven-party “leadership council.”
In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton
Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and
“non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999 - 2000, about 150
opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in
Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses provided civil affairs
training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers,
communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However,
the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficiently organized
to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This
restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the
effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United
States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The trainees during
1999-2000 are not believed to have been brought into the Operation Iraqi Freedom
effort against the regime, or into the Free Iraqi Forces that deployed to Iraq toward
the end of the active combat phase of the war.
Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam
Groups
During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end
the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of
Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed
disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the
opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an
indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical that a renewed overthrow
effort would fare better than previous attempts. Most of those who argued against
increased U.S. support for the opposition maintained that the Iraqi opposition would
CRS-11
not succeed unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement, and that direct U.S.
military action was risky and not justified by the threat posed by Iraq. Some
observers maintained that the potential threat from Saddam Hussein’s regime was
sufficiently grave that direct U.S. military action should be taken. Other critics
suggested the United States focus instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq by
threatening force against Iraq in order to obtain re-entry into Iraq of the U.N.
weapons of mass destruction inspectors that had been absent from Iraq since
December 15, 1998.
As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a
provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed
November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the
Iraqi people,” of which at least $12 million was for the INC to distribute
humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million
was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million
could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive
assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC
distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000, the Clinton Administration
reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in
FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop an aid distribution plan
and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before
it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that
noted that any INC effort to distribute aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control
would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and
to any relief distributors with which the INC contracts.6
Bush Administration Policy
Bush Administration policy toward Iraq changed after the September 11 terrorist
attacks, even though no significant evidence linking Iraq to those attacks came to
light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in President Bush’s
State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he characterized Iraq as part
of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea.
Pre-September 11 Policy
Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic
elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus
within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow
strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq,
which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its
taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist
regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan: a modification of the U.N.
sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technology reaches Iraq. His plan
offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N.
6 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.”
January 17, 2001.
CRS-12
restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military
technology.7
The Administration believed that the proposal, by easing the suffering of the
Iraqi people, would cause Iraq’s neighbors and other countries to cease unilateral
violations of the sanctions regime. Powell, who had openly expressed skepticism
about the opposition’s prospects, barely raised the regime change issue during his trip
or in his March 7, 2001, testimony before the House International Relations
Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.8 After about a year of
negotiations among the Security Council permanent members, the major feature of
the smart sanctions plan — new procedures that virtually eliminate U.N. review of
civilian exports to Iraq — was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Security Council
Resolution 1409).
Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime
change policy, many of the questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy
that had faced previous administrations were debated early in the Bush
Administration.9 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush
Administration said and did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first
year. During his confirmation hearings as Deputy Secretary of Defense, a reported
strong advocate of overthrow, Paul Wolfowitz, said that he did not yet see a
“plausible plan” for changing the regime. Like its predecessor, the Bush
Administration initially declined to provide the opposition with lethal aid, combat
training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the separate
State Department position of “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” further casting
doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy. On February 2, 2001, the Bush
Administration confirmed that, shortly after President Bush took office, the Treasury
Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted the INC a license to
proceed with information gathering inside Iraq only, and not actual distribution of
humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the Administration amounted to a
withholding of U.S. backing for the INC plan to rebuild its presence inside Iraq.
Many in Congress, on the other hand, continued to support the INC as the
primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional
sentiment, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite
doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television
broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the
ESF aid appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an estimated
additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.10
7 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food
Program.
8 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times,
March 2, 2001.
9 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh,
Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002.
10 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001.
CRS-13
Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime
Bush Administration policy toward Iraq became notably more assertive after the
September 11, 2001 attacks, stressing regime change far more than containment.
Almost immediately after the U.S.-led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in
Afghanistan began in early October 2001, speculation began building that the
Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use of military force
as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism. Some U.S. officials reportedly
believed that the United States needed to respond to the September 11 attacks by
ending any or all regimes that support terrorist groups, including Iraq. As noted
above, in his January 29, 2002 State of the Union message, President Bush named
Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with North Korea and Iran. Vice President
Cheney visited the Middle East in March 2002 reportedly to consult regional
countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq militarily, although the countries
visited reportedly urged greater U.S. attention to the Arab-Israeli dispute and opposed
confrontation with Iraq.
The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for
confronting Iraq were (1) its alleged refusal to end its WMD programs, and (2) its
ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of
conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. The Administration added that
regime change would have the further benefit of liberating the Iraqi people.
Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s
regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax
mailings, senior U.S. officials said in September 2002, and again in January and
February 2003, that there was evidence of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. Some outside
observers expressed skepticism about such connections because of the ideological
differences between Saddam Hussein’s secular regime and Al Qaeda’s Islamist
character. Secretary of States Powell, as noted above, cited intelligence information
that Ansar al-Islam (see above) had links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.11 Other
senior officials cited intelligence information that Iraq provided advice and training
to Al Qaeda in the manufacture and use of chemical weapons, although
Administration information appears to date to the early 1990s when Iraq, largely
isolated after the first Gulf war, was politically close to Sudan. Al Qaeda founder
Osama Bin Laden was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996).
Others noted that bin Laden sought to raise an Islamic army to fight Saddam’s
invasion of Kuwait in 1990, arguing against the need for U.S. troops, and that he was
more an enemy of Saddam Hussein than an ally. In the Administration view, the two
shared similar anti-U.S. goals, which outweighed ideological differences and
propelled them into tactical or strategic cooperation. Those differences were evident
in a February 12, 2003, bin Laden statement referring to Saddam Hussein’s regime
as socialist and infidel, although the statement exhorted Iraq to resist impending U.S.
military action.
11 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002.
CRS-14
WMD Threat Perception. In arguing for military action, U.S. officials
maintained that Iraq’s purported commitment to developing WMD — coupled with
its support for terrorist groups to which Iraq might transfer WMD — constituted an
unacceptable potential threat to the United States and that major U.S. military action
was justified if Iraq refused to disarm voluntarily. U.S. officials said the September
11, 2001 attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to
gather before acting, but must instead act preemptively or preventively. Senior U.S.
officials asserted a WMD threat as follows:
! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years
since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply
with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8,
2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs.
However, statements by U.N. weapons inspectors after inspections
resumed November 27, 2002 indicated they believed Iraq did not
have an active nuclear weapons program, and that inspections on
other weapons categories were making progress.
! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and
against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not
necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States
or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against
adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of
destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of
massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the
1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings and
did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war.
! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who
could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths
in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of this view cited
presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in late 2002,
stating the CIA view that Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to
terrorists if the United States were to attack Iraq. At that point,
according to that argument, Saddam Hussein would be left with little
incentive not to cooperate with terrorist groups capable of striking
at U.S. interests. (No WMD was used against Iraq during Operation
Iraqi Freedom, although the Administration asserts that such
weapons will eventually be found in Iraq by the U.S.-led coalition.)
Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam
As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action against Iraq, the
Bush Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its
capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002,
President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special
operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and
Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups — the INC, the
INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM — to Washington for meetings with
senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were
CRS-15
held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S.
government, which tended to favor different opposition groups.
In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August
15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in ESF to the INC, funds
that had been held up due to differences between the State Department and the INC
over what activities would be funded. The $8 million was to be used to fund the
INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its offices in Washington, London,
Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate its Al Mutamar newspaper and
Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund the information gathering
portion of the INC’s activities; the State Department had refused to fund those
activities, which are conducted inside Iraq, because of strains between the INC and
other opposition groups and questions about INC use of U.S. funds.
In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and
to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic-
based groups. On December 9, 2002, the Bush Administration added six of the
factions discussed below (except the Higher Council for National Salvation) to the
list of “democratic opposition organizations” eligible to receive draw downs under
the ILA. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had
increasing contact include the following:
! Iraqi National Movement. It formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the
INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib
(who was part of an early leadership body of the INC); Hatim
Mukhlis, who claimed support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan; and
ex-senior military officer Khalid al-Ubaydi.
! Iraqi National Front. Another grouping of ex-military officers,
founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite
Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and
participated and was wounded in the anti-Saddam uprisings
immediately following the 1991 Gulf war.
! Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement. Established in 1996 by
ex-military officer Najib al-Salhi. This group worked closely with
the INC. Salhi defected in 1995 after serving as commander of
several tank units in the Republican Guard and regular military.
! Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was
formally established on August 1, 2002. It is headed by Wafiq al-
Samarra’i, a former head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of
staff of Iraq’s military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was
based in Denmark since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member.
Khazraji was placed under travel restrictions by Danish officials in
late November 2002 after saying he wanted to leave Denmark. He
is under investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of
chemical weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities
said on March 17, 2003 that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his
home there, raising questions about whether he is defying the travel
CRS-16
restrictions placed on him. A press report on April 7, 2003, said he
went to Kuwait, possibly to play a part in a post-Saddam regime
there,12 although his current whereabouts are unknown.
! Iraqi Turkmen Front. A small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping,
generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq.
Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq.
! The Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another
Shiite Islamic Party, but it is considered substantially less pro-
Iranian than SCIRI or the Da’wa Party (see above). The Islamic
Accord is headed by Jamil Wakil. Many Accord members are
followers of Ayatollah Shirazi, an Iranian cleric who was the
spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation
of Bahrain (IFLB), which allegedly attempted to overthrow the
government of Bahrain in the early 1980s.
! The Assyrian Democratic Movement, an ethnic-based movement
headed by Secretary-General Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s
Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq. There is a
strong diaspora presence in the United States as well. After building
ties to this group over the past year, the Bush Administration
formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement
into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002.
Second ILA Designations. The Bush Administration applauded efforts
during 2001 and 2002 by these groups to hold meetings to coordinate with each
other and with the INC and other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London
and jointly run with the INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers. However, since
the regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, none of the groups listed immediately
above has openly sought a major role in post-Saddam Iraq, and the whereabouts of
many of their leaders are not known.
As the decision whether to launch military action approached, on December 9,
2002, President Bush issued a determination to draw down the remaining $92 million
in defense articles and services authorized under the Iraq Liberation Act for the INA,
the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi
opposition groups designated by me under the Act before or after this determination.”
This latter phrase suggested that some of the draw downs would go to the six groups
designated above as eligible to receive ILA draw downs. The announcement
appeared to be part of reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists in tasks that
could assist U.S. forces, possibly including combat units.13 An initial group of 3,000
was selected, but only about 70 oppositionists completed training at an air base
12 ‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper. Agence France Press, April 7, 2003.
13 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.”
Washington Post, October 19, 2002.
CRS-17
(Taszar) in Hungary, according to press reports.14 These oppositionists served with
U.S. forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom as translators and mediators between U.S.
forces and local leaders.
As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began
planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002,
with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in
London. In advance of the meeting, the Bush Administration appointed NSC official
Zalmay Khalilzad to be a liaison to the Iraqi opposition. The conference was
organized by the same six groups whose leaders visited Washington in August 2002,
but included other groups as well, and they discussed whether the opposition should
declare a provisional government. The Administration opposed that step on the
grounds that doing so was premature and would give the impression that outside
powers were determining Iraq’s political structure.
The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65-member follow-up committee,
which some criticized as weighted heavily toward Shiite Islamist groups such as
SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24-27, 2003 in northern Iraq.
Against the urging of U.S. representatives at the meeting, the opposition agreed to
form a six man committee that would prepare for a transition regime, although it
stopped short of declaring a provisional government. The six included PUK leader
Jalal Talabani, KDP leader Masud Barzani, SCIRI leader Mohammed Baqr Al
Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Iyad Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign minister Adnan
Pachachi. Iran allowed Iraqi oppositionists to cross from Iran into northern Iraq to
hold that session. With the exception of Pachachi, these groups and figures are the
core five figures in the current seven-party “leadership council” that is pushing U.S.
authorities to speed the transition to Iraqi self-rule.
Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the
new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete
disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if Iraq wanted to avert military action. The
Administration had been downplaying the goal of regime change after President
Bush’s September 12, 2002 speech before the United Nations General Assembly, in
which he focused on enforcing U.N. resolutions that require Iraqi disarmament.
However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change goal after
February 2002 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course. In the
Administration view, a friendly government in Baghdad was required if the
international community is to rid Iraq of WMD and links to terrorist groups.
The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March breakdown of
U.N. diplomacy over whether the U.N. Security Council should authorize war against
Iraq for failing to comply with Resolution 1441. The diplomatic breakdown followed
several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by the director of the U.N. inspection
body UNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification, and Inspection Commission) Hans
Blix and the director of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), most
recently on March 7, 2003. The briefings were generally critical of Iraq for failing
14 Williams, Daniel. U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles. Washington Post, December
18, 2002.
CRS-18
to pro-actively cooperate to clear up outstanding questions about Iraq’s WMD
program, but the latter two briefings (February 24 and March 7) noted progress in
clearing up outstanding WMD questions.
Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and
Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that
inspections should be given more time. They noted that Iraq was well contained by
sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones. Those who agreed with this
view maintained that, as long as Iraq allowed access to U.N. weapons inspections
under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national
security. Inspections encountered few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700
inspections of about 400 different sites, as of mid-March 2003. Others experts
believed that, even if Iraq were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could
have been deterred by U.S. overall strategic superiority, presumably including the
U.S. nuclear arsenal.
The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq
had not fundamentally decided to disarm, and was attempting to preserve WMD
capabilities. The Administration asserted on March 17, 2003, that diplomatic options
to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full attention to military action.
That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and his sons, Uday and Qusay,
an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war. They refused the
ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003.
In the war, Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and
British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the regime, at times, put up stiff
resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi military commanders or
Baathist political figures came forward to try to establish a post-Saddam government,
but senior regime leaders fled Baghdad, and the whereabouts of many of them, as
well as the fate of Saddam Hussein, are unknown. The outcome of a post-war debate
on the results of the war might depend on such factors as the pace of reconstruction;
the future degree of resistance, if any, to a U.S. and British occupation; the amount
of WMD ultimately found, if any; and whether a new government is democratic.
Post-War Governance Issues
After the fall of Saddam Hussein’s regime on April 9, 2003, there is increasing
debate about governing post-war Iraq. The same U.S. concerns about fragmentation
of and instability in Iraq that existed in prior years are present in the current debate
over how to establish a post-war interim regime. Although some Iraqi civilians have
welcomed U.S. and British troops in areas captured, many Iraqis now want U.S. and
British forces to leave Iraq. Other experts fear that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall
under control of SCIRI and other Shiite Islamist forces who, as noted above, are well-
organized and are asserting growing control over areas inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites.
Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s population but have traditionally been under-
represented in Iraq’s Sunni Muslim-dominated government.
CRS-19
Establishing an Iraqi Interim Administration. The Administration
asserts that it will do what is necessary to bring about a stable, democratic successor
regime that complies with all applicable U.N. resolutions. However, there appears
to be some debate between U.S. authorities and key anti-Saddam groups over how
and when to establish a successor regime. Senior U.S. officials, including deputy
Defense Secretary Paul Wolfowitz, had said in early April 2003 that they hoped to
have a successor regime in place within six months of the fall of the regime.
However, in mid-May, U.S. officials, apparently fearing that existing major groups
could not form a stable regime or that Shiite Islamists would dominate a successor
authority, backed away from any deadlines for establishing an Iraqi self-rule
authority. The anti-Saddam groups assert that Iraqis are sufficiently competent and
unified to rebuild Iraq after a war with the United States.
Shortly after the war, the United States began a process of establishing a
successor regime. The Administration organized an April 15 meeting, in Nasiriyah,
of about 100 Iraqis of varying ideologies, present by U.S. invitation. Many of the
attendees were representatives of Iraqi tribal groupings that had not been politically
active before. However, SCIRI, along with several Shiite clerics that have
appropriated authority throughout much of southern Iraq since the fall of the regime,
boycotted the meeting and called for an Islamic state and the withdrawal of U.S.
forces. Another meeting of about 250 delegates was held in Baghdad on April 26,
which ended in agreement to hold a broader meeting, within a month, to name an
interim Iraqi administration.
“Leadership Council” of Seven. In parallel with the late April meeting in
Baghdad, the five most prominent opposition groups met, with U.S. envoys present:
SCIRI, the INC, the INA, the PUK, and the KDP. At a subsequent meeting on May
9, 2003, the five agreed to expand their grouping to seven, adding to their ranks the
little known Nasir al-Chadirchy, head of a party called the National Democratic Party
of Iraq, as well as the Da’wa Party. The council of seven strongly criticized the U.S.
decision in mid-May 2003 to delay the formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority
indefinitely and to instead establish a purely advisory body of 25 to 30 Iraqis. The
leadership council has since been meeting among itself and with U.S. occupation
authorities to try to obtain at least a partial reversal of that decision. The exact
motivations for the delay were not announced, but press reports indicate that U.S.
officials believed that a self-rule authority dominated by the seven parties in the
leadership council would be unstable and insufficiently committed to democracy.
At the same time, there are indications the U.S. occupation authorities
(Coalition Provisional Authority) are incorporating the views of the seven parties.
U.S. administrator for Iraq Paul Bremer (see below) said on June 23, 2003, that the
planned 25-30 member body would have “real authority” from its first days. He said
it will nominate ministry heads, recommend policies, and convene a “constitutional
conference” to draft a new constitution.15
15 Transcript: Bremer Reviews Progress, Plans for Iraq Reconstruction. Washington File,
June 23, 2003.
CRS-20
As part of the planning process that took place before the war, the U.S. State
Department and the Defense Department supported groups of Iraqi exiles to address
issues that will confront a successor government.16 It is not yet known what
influence, if any, these working groups are having on any post-war regime decision-
making in Iraq. The U.S. State Department project, which cost $5 million, consisted
of working groups that discussed (1) transitional justice; (2) public finance; (3)
public and media outreach; (4) democratic principles; (5) water, agriculture, and the
environment; (6) health and human services; (7) economy and infrastructure; (8)
education; (9) refugees, internally-displaced persons, and migration policy; (10)
foreign and national security policy; (11) defense institutions and policy; (12) free
media; (13) civil society capacity-building; (14) anti-corruption measures; and (15)
oil and energy.
Post-War U.S. Operations in Iraq/Coalition Provisional Authority.
Experts note that projections about U.S. operations in post-war Iraq, including the
duration of the U.S. military occupation and the numbers of occupation troops, were
largely dependent on the amount of Iraqi resistance, if any, the number of U.S.
casualties taken, and the speed with which a successor regime is chosen. At present,
about 160,000 U.S. and British troops remain in Iraq, according to a June 2003 report
to Congress mandated by P.L. 108-11. Earlier press reports said the Administration
wanted to draw the U.S. force level down to about 35,000 by the end of 2003, but
continued unrest and insecurity in Iraq appears to have made that goal untenable.
There are indications that resistance to the U.S. governance of Iraq is growing,
judging by the frequency of attacks on U.S. forces over the past few weeks. Such
attacks have killed more than 20 U.S. military personnel since President Bush
declared an end to “major combat operations” in Iraq on May 1, 2003. There is a
debate within the Administration over whether the resistance to the U.S. occupation
is organized or random. The Administration says resistance is coming from remnants
of the Baath Party, from former criminals, and from Arab volunteers who have come
to Iraq from other countries to fight the U.S. occupation. Attacks have been more
frequent in the Sunni areas of central Iraq than elsewhere, suggesting that Baathist
resistance elements are the most active, possibly in combination with foreign Arab
fighters. Some elements of the resistance might want to restore the old regime, while
others appear to be motivated by opposition to the concept of foreign rule. Others
appear to be motivated by the difficulty the U.S. and British authorities have had in
restoring civilian services. There are some indications that Shiite Islamists might
now be joining the violence against U.S. military personnel. In late June, some
opponents of the occupation have identified themselves as distinct groups, scribbling
graffiti warnings and faxing statements to the Arab satellite television network Al
Jazeera and elsewhere. They have used such names as:
! Al Awda (the Return);
! The Snakes;
! The Movement of the Victorious Sect; and
! The Popular Resistance for the Liberation of Iraq.
16 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,”
Washington File, December 11, 2002.
CRS-21
The Bush Administration initially tasked Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) to direct
civilian reconstruction, working through a staff of U.S. diplomats and other U.S.
government personnel who will serve as advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various
ministries. He headed the Office of Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance
(ORHA), within the Department of Defense, created by a January 20, 2003 executive
order. After spending the combat phase of the war in neighboring Kuwait, Garner
and some of his staff of about 200 deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003, to begin
work. Former Ambassador to Yemen Barbara Bodine was responsible for a “central”
region; and retired generals Buck Walters and Bruce Moore are responsible for
“southern” and “northern” regions, respectively.
Press reports said that senior U.S. officials were dissatisfied with the slow pace
of reconstruction under Garner, and on May 6, 2003, the Administration appointed
former ambassador L. Paul Bremer to lead the overall reconstruction effort, with a
focus on political reconstruction. He arrived on May 12 to head what is called the
Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA), which subsumes ORHA, and Bodine and
then Garner departed shortly thereafter. The appointment represented an apparent
adjustment from the original structure of the U.S. reconstruction effort, although the
Administration stated that it was always envisioned that a civilian would eventually
take over the U.S. effort. U.S. officials now refer to the CPA as an occupying
authority legitimized by U.N. Security Council Resolution 1483 of May 22, 2003.
Among other provisions, the resolution lifted U.N. sanctions on Iraq.
Recruiting Other Peacekeepers. As of late June, organizing proceeds for
a multinational peacekeeping force in Iraq. According to the Administration, more
than 30 countries are discussing offers of forces for a multilateral stabilization force.
The commitments of several nations appear to be dependent on whether the U.N.
Security Council authorizes such a force, and several nations appear to require U.S.
or other funding in order to participate. The United Kingdom and Poland have
offered to lead multinational divisions in that mission. Currently about 13,000 non-
U.S. troops are in Iraq, mostly British. Some pledges were announced shortly after
the “Interim Coalition Stability Operations Conference” of 16 nations, held in
London on April 30, 2003, and hosted by the British Minister of Defence, Geoff
Hoon. (A follow-up meeting was held in London on May 8.) Other nations are
contributing relief supplies and field hospital facilities and services.
The United States has urged NATO to take on Iraq as a fifth peacekeeping
mission, but thus far, NATO has only informally discussed the U.S. proposal.
Reportedly, French president Jacques Chirac has said that formal consideration
requires an authorizing resolution from the U.N. Security Council. Neither France
nor Germany has agreed to participate outside of a NATO framework.
U.N. Role. The United States and its European allies and other countries have
reached a measure of agreement on a U.N. role in post-war Iraq. Resolution 1483,
which was adopted unanimously, provides for a U.N. special representative to
coordinate the activities of U.N. personnel in Iraq and to help establish a successor
government. The Secretary General subsequently appointed Brazilian diplomat
Sergio Vieira de Mello for that post. The resolution also gives the United Nations
a monitoring role over the Development Fund for Iraq, a fund that will handle Iraq’s
oil revenues until there is a successor government. The resolution did not authorize
CRS-22
a return to Iraq of U.N. weapons inspectors, although the resolution provides for
deliberations on that issue. Some International Atomic Energy Agency inspectors
returned to Iraq in June 2003 on a limited nuclear mission in Baghdad.
Reviving the Oil Industry.17 As the driver of Iraq’s economy, the rebuilding
of the oil industry is receiving substantial U.S. attention. It has been widely assumed
that Iraq’s vast oil reserves, believed second only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be
used to fund much of the costs of reconstruction. Presidential spokesman Ari
Fleischer said on February 18, 2003, referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a
variety of means ... to shoulder much of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.”
Many observers had been concerned that an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could
destroy its own oil fields, but coalition forces quickly secured Iraq’s southern oil
fields since combat began on March 19, 2003. Only about 9 oil wells were set on
fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that region, and all were put out quickly. The
northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul were not set afire. In early May 2003, the
U.S.-led coalition set up an advisory board, headed by former Shell executive Phillip
Carroll, to oversee the rebuilding of Iraq’s oil sector. An Iraqi oil industry
professional, Thamer Ghadhban, was named to serve as head of the interim
management team that will run Iraq’s oil ministry and report to the advisory board..
The first exports began in late June 2003, and Ghadhban has said that Iraq will be up
to about 1 million barrels per day of exports by mid-July. Its pre-war export rate was
about 2.2 million barrels per day, a level that U.S. officials and Iraqi oil appointees
hope to reach by late 2003.
A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which
foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s
vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will
seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other
countries.
Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have
been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program.
The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put
in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was
suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various
aspects of the program departed Iraq. As of March 14, 2003, about $9 billion worth
of humanitarian goods were in the process of being delivered or in production. (See
CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.)
On March 28, 2003, the U.N. Security Council unanimously adopted Resolution
1472 that restarted the program’s operations and empowered the United Nations, for
a 45-day period (until May 12), to take direct control of all aspects of the program.
Under the new resolution, the United Nations is setting priorities for and directing the
delivery of already contracted supplies. The enhanced U.N. authority was extended
on April 25, 2003, to last at least until the six-month phase of the program expired
on June 3, 2003.
17 For information on the prospects for Iraq’s post-war economy, see CRS Report RL31944.
Iraq’s Economy: Past, Present, Future.
CRS-23
On April 17, 2003, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions
against Iraq, signaling that the Administration wanted to focus on restoring normal
international commerce with Iraq rather than extending the oil-for-food program.
Resolution 1483 provides for the phasing out of the oil for food program within six
months after adoption of that resolution on May 22. The resolution also provided for
the United Nations to transfer to the new Development Fund for Iraq $1 billion in
funds held by the oil-for-food program escrow fund. That Development Fund
contained about $7 billion in June 2003, consisting of captured Iraqi assets, Iraqi
assets abroad, the monies transferred from the oil-for-food account, and U.S. funds
available for reconstruction. (For more information, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq:
Oil-for-Food Program, International Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.)
War Crimes. An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is
whether Saddam Hussein and his associates should be prosecuted for war crimes and
crimes against humanity, if and when they are caught. The Administration said in
early April 2003 that Saddam and his inner circle should be tried by Iraqis if they are
captured, although others might be tried by a U.S.-led process for any crimes
committed in the course of the 2003 war. Over the past year, the Administration had
been gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those
it had sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay; Ali Hassan al-
Majid, for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (he was reported by British
officers to have died in an early April air strike on his home in Basra); Muhammad
Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered in mid April 2003); Taha Yasin Ramadan; first Vice
President and number three in the regime; Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the
Revolutionary Command Council and formally number two in the regime; Barzan
al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother (captured in mid April 2003); Watban al-Tikriti
(captured in April 2003) and Sabawi al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam
and former leaders of regime intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputy Prime Minister
and foremost regime spokesman (surrendered in May 2003); and Aziz Salih Noman,
governor of Kuwait during Iraq’s occupation of that country (apprehended in May
2003).
Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials
sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured
or surrendered. As of early June 2003, according to Coalition Provisional Authority
officials, about half of the Iraqis on the list of 55 are now in custody or are confirmed
killed. Among the apprehended are Amir al-Saadi, chief science adviser to Saddam;
Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti, a son-in-law of Saddam; Vice President Taha Muhi ad-Din
Ma’ruf; and suspected WMD manager Hoda Mahdi Salih al-Ammash .
The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and
the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29,
1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related
atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for
FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress
that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal
for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137
(passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March
13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October
31, 1998).
CRS-24
A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993,
after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the Administration has supported
INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the
arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the
Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer,
said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established,
focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical
weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds)
and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which
an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against
Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes
against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations.
In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a
U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war
crimes is formed.
Congressional Reactions
Congress, like the Administration, appears to have had divergent views on the
mechanisms for promoting regime change, although there appears to be widespread
agreement in Congress that regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S.
policy. However, there was substantial disagreement over whether a major military
offensive was the most desirable option for achieving that objective. On December
20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75, by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal
to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a “mounting threat” to the United States. The
resolution did not call for new U.S. steps to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few
Members called for the overthrow of Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in
support of the resolution.
In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq,
some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint
appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on
Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations
Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the
opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an
option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In
early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members — Senators John
McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and
Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr.
— wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for
operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter,
Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S.
assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish
areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and
other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to
accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.”
As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002,
Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result.
CRS-25
Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force
against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce
U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on
October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote
of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243).
The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. Prior to the war, it held
several hearings on the progress of post-war reconstruction. During the war and in
its aftermath, several Members applauded the performance of the U.S. military and
the overthrow of the regime. Some Members, however, have criticized the
Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war period in light of major
looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the regime. Several Committees
are discussing the scope of inquiry into why substantial amounts of WMD have not
been found in Iraq to date.
CRS-26
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition
Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.)
to the Opposition
(Figures in millions of dollars)
INC War
Crimes Broadcasting
Unspecified
Opposition
Activities
Total
FY 1998
(P.L. 105-174)
2.0 5.0
(RFE/RL)
3.0 10.0
FY 1999
(P.L. 105-277)
3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0
FY 2000
(P.L. 106-113)
2.0 8.0 10.0
FY 2001
(P.L. 106-429)
12.0
(aid
distribution
inside Iraq)
2.0 6.0
(INC radio)
5.0 25.0
FY 2002
(P.L. 107-115)
25.0 25.0
Total,
FY1998- FY 2002
15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0
FY2003
(no earmark)
3.1
(announced
April, 2003 )
6.9 (remaining
to be
allocated)
10.0
FY2004
(request)
0 0
Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq
Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97
million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent,
as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided,
the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and
FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be
used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N.
programs.
Another version (English): 12 June 2003 — RL31339_2003-06-12.pdf
Order Code RL31339
CRS Report for Congress
Received through the CRS Web
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
Updated June 12, 2003
Kenneth Katzman
Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs
Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division
Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
Summary
In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized
Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to abandon
its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs as required by U.N. Security
Council resolutions and the potential for it to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. In
September 2002, the President warned that unless Iraq fully disarmed in cooperation
with United Nations weapons inspectors, the United States would lead a coalition to
achieve that disarmament militarily. U.S. officials made clear that this would
include the ouster of Iraq’s President Saddam Hussein’s regime. On March 19,
2003, the United States launched “Operation Iraqi Freedom,” a war effort to disarm
Iraq and change its regime. The regime fell on April 9.
In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change
through U.S.-led militaryaction would yield benefits beyond disarmament, including
liberation from an oppressive regime for the Iraqi people and enhancement of the
prospects for peace and democracy throughout the Middle East. The goal of regime
change in Iraq had been declared U.S. policy since November 1998, and U.S. efforts
to oust Saddam had been pursued, with varying degrees of intensity, since the end of
the Gulf war in 1991. These efforts primarily involved U.S. financial backing for
opposition groups inside and outside Iraq, several of which are now contending for
power in post-Saddam Iraq. Past efforts to change the regime floundered because of
limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the Iraqi opposition, and the efficiency
and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping intelligence and security forces.
Previous U.S. administrations ruled out major U.S. military action to change Iraq’s
regime, believing such action would be costly, risky, and not necessarily justified by
the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament.
The character of the government that will replace Saddam Hussein’s Baath
Party, and the exact process by which that government will be chosen, are yet to be
determined. Some Administration officials reportedly had hoped that major military
and governmental defections from the Hussein regime would serve as the core of a
successor government. However, no senior Hussein regime figures defected, and
established opposition groups and emerging local leaders will likely form the core
of a new regime. Some of these groups are urging the United States to begin
establishing a self-rule authoritysoon, but the Bush Administration has delayed plans
to do so, apparently believing that democratic institutions must be built before power
can be handed to an all-Iraqi authority.
This report will be updated as warranted by major developments.
Contents
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Ansar al-Islam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Sadr Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Development of Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
The First Eligibility Designations Under the ILA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups . . . 10
Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Post-War Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Establishing an Iraqi Interim Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
“Leadership Council” of Seven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Post-War U.S. Operations in Iraq/Coalition Provisional Authority . . . 19
Recruiting Other Peacekeepers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
U.N. Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Reviving the Oil Industry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
War Crimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Congressional Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
The United States has been attempting to change Iraq’s regime since the 1991
Persian Gulf war, although achieving this goal was not declared policy until 1998.
In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass destruction
(WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United States would
seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A regime change
policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, October 31, 1998).
Bush Administration officials have emphasized regime change as the cornerstone of
U.S. policy toward Iraq since shortly after the September 11, 2001, attacks.
Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 17, 2003, and achieved the
objective of regime change by April 9, 2003.
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam
Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an
operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George
H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end
of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and
Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope
of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions. The revolt in southern Iraq reached
the suburbs of Baghdad, but the well-trained and loyal Republican Guard forces had
survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from battle prior to the U.S.
ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid-March 1991. Many Shiites
blamed the United States for not supporting their uprising and standing aside as the
regime retaliated against those who participated in the rebellion. Kurds, benefitting
from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991, were able to drive Iraqi
troops out of much of northern Iraq and establish an autonomous zone there and
subsequently remained largely free of Baghdad’s rule.
According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite
uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding
stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup
against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that
purpose. The Administration apparently believed — and this view apparently still
is shared by many experts and U.S. officials — that a coup by elements within the
current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq.
Manyobservers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and
Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and
tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria.
CRS-2
Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition
Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that
the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment
within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision
was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the
diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the
Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and
diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This
opposition coalition seemed to provide a vehicle for the United States to build a
viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert
support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.1
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi
The growing opposition coalition took concrete shape in an organization called
the Iraqi National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two
main Kurdish militias, the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic
Union of Kurdistan (PUK), participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens
of opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came into the
coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq.
The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi
ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military
officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC
with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups
publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests,
including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the
preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. SecurityCouncil
resolutions on Iraq.2 However, many observers doubted its commitment to
democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and
because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies.
Ahmad Chalabi. Selected to chair the INC’s Executive Committee was
Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 58 years old, a secular Shiite Muslim from a prominent
banking family. He was educated in the United States as a mathematician. He fled
Iraq to Jordan in 1958, when the Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military
coup. This coup occurred 10 years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July
1968). In 1978, he founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian
authorities on charges of financial malfeasance and he left Jordan, possibly with
some help from members of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989. The Jordanian
government subsequently re-capitalized the bank with national funds. In 1992, he
was convicted in absentia of embezzling $70 million from the bank and sentenced
1 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2,
1992.
2 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by
INC representatives, February 1993.
CRS-3
to 22 years in prison. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government was
pressured by Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to
the Jordanian government. In April 2003, senior Jordanian officials, including King
Abdullah, called Chalabi “divisive” and stopped just short of saying he would be
unacceptable to Jordan as leader of Iraq. Chalabi’s critics acknowledge that, despite
allegations about his methods, he has been single-minded in his determination to
overthrow Saddam Hussein, and he is said to be the favorite of those Administration
officials, particularly in the Department of Defense, that were the most supportive of
changing Iraq’s regime by force.
Since returning to Iraq, Chalabi has not mobilized large demonstrations
supportive of him or the INC. This would indicate that he does not have a large
following inside Iraq. However, anecdotal press reporting suggest that he has
attracted some support from those Iraqis that most welcome the U.S. military
offensive against Iraq as liberation from Saddam Hussein’s regime and who believe
the U.S. presence is needed to ensure security and facilitate reconstruction. On April
6, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters (“Free Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by the U.S.
military from their base in the north to the Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize
civil affairs in southern Iraq. Chalabi and some Free Iraqi Forces later deployed to
Baghdad and other parts of Iraq. Since establishing his headquarters in Baghdad,
Chalabi has tried to build support by searching for members of the former regime and
arranging for U.S. military forces in Iraq to provide security or other benefits to his
potential supporters. However, the Free Iraqi Forces accompanying Chalabi have
largely disbanded following the U.S. decisions in mid-May 2003 to disarm
independent militias and to delay the formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority.
A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book
“Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq,” detailing alleged Iraqi regime
human rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracyfor Iraq, including
full rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he teaches
Middle Eastern politics at Brandeis University. Another INC activist, Mohammed
al-Zubaidi, declared himself in charge of Baghdad in mid-April, but U.S. officials did
not recognize him as mayor and detained him in April 2003.
The Kurds/KDP and PUK. In committing to the concept of federalism, the
INC platform assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq.
The Kurds, probably the most pro-U.S. of all the groups in Iraq, do not have
ambitions to play a major role in governing Arab Iraq, but Iraq’s neighbors have
always been fearful that the Kurds might still seek outright independence. Turkey,
which has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq,
particularly fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort
to unify into a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently
for autonomy since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state
after World War I. (Iraq became an independent Kingdom in 1932, although it
remained under British influence until the 1958 fall of the British-installed
monarchy.) In 1961, the KDP, then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current
KDP leader Masud Barzani’s father, began an insurgency that has continued until
today, although interrupted by periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad.
Masud Barzani’s brother, Idris, commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the
Iran-Iraq war but was killed in that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split
CRS-4
off from the KDP in 1965; the PUK’s members are generally more educated, urbane,
and left-leaning than those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about
40,000-60,000 fighters, some of which are trained in conventional military tactics.
Both the KDP and the PUK are on the seven-party “leadership council.”
Ansar al-Islam. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties enjoyed good
relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement of Iraqi
Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaykh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in Halabja,
Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical attack on
that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998.
A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam
(Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam).
This faction, led by Mullah Krekar (who was detained in Europe in August 2002 and
now lives in Norway), reportedly is associated with Al Qaeda and hosted in its
northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters who fled the U.S.-led war in Afghanistan.
Mullah Krekar reportedly studied under Shaykh Abdullah al-Azzam, an Islamic
theologian of Palestinian origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama bin Laden.
Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, during which its base was captured, about 8,000
people were in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, located near the town of Khurmal. This
included about 600 fighters.3 Fighters of Ansar al-Islam clashed with the PUK
around Halabja in December 2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedly responsible for
an assassination attempt against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002.
The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials
to be Abu Musab Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in
Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the
millenium celebration, the assassination in Jordan of U.S. diplomat Lawrence Foley
(2002), and to reported attempts in 2002 to spread the biological agent ricin in
London and possibly other places in Europe. In a presentation to the U.N. Security
Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied Zarqawi and Ansar al-
Islam to the Iraqi regime, which might have viewed Ansar al-Islam as a means of
pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents. Many experts believed Baghdad-Ansar
links were tenuous or even non-existent.
Shiite Islamist Organizations
Some outside experts have had concerns about the potential strength and
ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups in post-
Saddam Iraq.
SCIRI/Badr Corps. The most well known among these is called the Supreme
Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member of the INC
in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC banner.
SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition groups
in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad Baqr al-
3 Chivers, C.J. New York Times, December 6, 2002.
Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.”
CRS-5
Hakim, was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head an Islamic Republic of
Iraq, a vision that, if realized, might conflict with U.S. plans to forge a democratic
Iraq. Baqr Al Hakim and his family fled Iraq to Iran in 1980, during a major
crackdown on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam feared that Iraqi
Shiite Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution in Iran in 1979,
posed a major threat to his regime. Prior to the formation of SCIRI, Hakim and his
family were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party (see below). Mohammed Baqr
is the son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a prominent Shiite leader
in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini when Khomeini was in exile
in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. In early May 2003, there were press reports that
Mohammed Baqr might resign from his formal SCIRI leadership post and try to
establish himself in the Shiite holy city of Najaf, Iraq, as an overarching Shiite
authority figure in the image of the late Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran. He returned to
Iraq on May 10, welcomed by large crowds in Basra and Najaf, where he is now
based.
In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about
10,000-15,000 fighters/activists organized into a “Badr Corps” (named after a major
battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from Iran
into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. The Badr Corps is headed by
Mohammed Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim, who returned to Iraq on
April 20, 2003, to pave the way for Mohammed Baqr’s return. (Another Hakim
brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan in May 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s
security services.) Iran’s Revolutionary Guard, which is politically aligned with
Iran’s hard line civilian officials, has been the key patron of the Badr Corps,
providing it with weapons, funds, and other assistance. The Badr Corps fought
alongside the Guard against Iraqi forces during the Iran-Iraq war. However, many
Iraqi Shiites view SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr Corps operations in
southern Iraq prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark broad popular unrest
against the Iraqi regime. Some Badr fighters deployed inside northern Iraq on the eve
of Operation Iraqi Freedom, and the New York Times reported on May 7, 2003, that
many Badr activists have infiltrated into Iraq to build support for SCIRI.
Until August 2002 when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures
for meetings in Washington, SCIRI had publicly refused to work openly with the
United States or accept U.S. assistance. Since the fall of the regime on April 9,
SCIRI leaders have criticized what they called an illegitimate U.S. occupation of Iraq
and have called for the rapid establishment of an Iraqi self-rule authority. SCIRI
initially refused to join a U.S.-led process to establish an interim post-Saddam
government. However, suggesting that SCIRI does not want to confront the United
States, Abd al-Aziz al Hakim did meet with other opposition leaders in late April
2003 at a post-war governance planning session sponsored by U.S. officials. He has
since joined a grouping of seven on a “leadership council” that is discussing Iraqi
self-rule with U.S. occupation authorities. Even though Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim
says he is for a democracy and would not seek to establish an Iranian-style Islamic
republic, U.S. officials are said to be mistrustful of SCIRI and have been seeking to
disarm its fighters. Unlike some other Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI has had good
working relations with some Sunni oppositionists and the Kurds.
CRS-6
Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, perhaps Iraq’s oldest Shiite Islamist grouping,
continues to exist as a separate group, but it lacks its own strong, visible leadership,
and many Da’wa activists appear to be at least loosely allied with SCIRI. Da’wa
was given a place on the seven-party “leadership council” in May 2003. The party
was founded in 1957 by a revered Iraqi Shiite cleric, Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al
Sadr, a like-minded associate of Ayatollah Khomeini. Baqr Al Sadr was hung by the
Iraqi regime in 1980 for the Da’wa’s alleged responsibility in fomenting Shiite anti-
regime unrest following Iran’s 1979 Islamic revolution. That unrest included an
attempted assassination of senior Iraqi leader Tariq Aziz.
The Kuwaiti branch of the Da’wa Party allegedly was responsible for a May
1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks
on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The Hizballah organization in Lebanon
was founded by Lebanese clerics loyal to Ayatollah Baqr Al Sadr and the late
Ayatollah Khomeini, and there continue to be linkages between Hizballah and the
Da’wa Party. The Hizballah activists who held U.S. hostages in that country during
the 1980s often linked release of the Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party
prisoners held by Kuwait for those offenses. Some Iraqi Da’wa members look to
Lebanon’s senior Shiite cleric Mohammed Hossein Fadlallah, who was a student and
protege of Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, for spiritual guidance.
Sadr Grouping. Members of the clan of the late Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr
Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq. Although the Al Sadr clan
has been closely identified with the Da’wa Party, it appears that members of the clan
and their followers currently are operating in post-war Iraq as grouping separate from
the Da’wa. Another revered member of the clan, Mohammed Sadiq Al Sadr, and
two of his sons, were killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999. A surviving son,
Moqtada al-Sadr, who is about 27 years old, has attempted to rally his followers to
attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite politics. He and his clan apparently
have a large following in the Shiite neighborhoods of Baghdad, which, after the fall
of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr City,” from the former name
of “Saddam City.” However, he is viewed by Iran and many Iraqi Shiites as a young
radical who lacks religious and political weight. To compensate for his lack of
religious credentials, he has sought spiritual authorityfor his actions from exiled Iraqi
senior cleric, Ayatollah Kazem Haeri, who is living in Qom, Iran. An alternate
interpretation by some experts is that Haeri is acting at the direction of Iran’s
leadership to keep Moqtada Sadr under a measure of control. Moqtada’s reputation
may have been tarnished in early April when Moqtada al Sadr reportedly killed Abd
al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Abdol Qasem Musavi-Khoi,
shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al-Majid Khoi headed the
Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq after U.S.-led forces took
Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political doctrines of Ayatollah
Khomeini of Iran.
Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah. The revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al-
Sistani, based in Najaf, is also emerging as a major potential force in post-war Iraq.
He is the most senior of the four Shiite clerics that lead the Najaf- based “Hawza al-
Ilmiya,” a major grouping of seminaries and Shiite clerics. The Hawza, which is well
funded through donations, is becoming an important source of political authority in
the Shiite regions of Iraq, hiring Iraqis to perform functions performed by the former
CRS-7
regime and issuing directives, often obeyed, for some Iraqi civil servants to return to
work. Sistani himself, now free of a long house arrest at the hands of Baghdad, has
a large following of former students throughout the Shiite portions of Iraq. During
the U.S.-led war against Iraq, Moqtada al-Sadr and his followers reportedly tried to
intimidate Sistani by surrounding his office in Najaf with armed gunmen, a tactic that
many experts say is leading Sistani and the Hawza to ally with the Hakims in the
intra-Shiite power struggle. Sistani, who is said to be of Iranian ethnicity, is
considered to be in the tradition of Ayatollah Khoi in opposing a direct role for
clerics in governmental affairs, and it is therefore likely that Sistani and the Hawza
would not seek a direct or public role in the post-war regime. Some Sistani
pronouncements suggest he might be willing to defer to Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim
in political decision-making.
Islamic Amal. SCIRI has been allied with another Shiite Islamist organization
called the Islamic Amal (Action) Organization. It is headed by Mohammed Taqi
Modarassi. Islamic Amal conducted attacks against Saddam Hussein’s regime in the
1980s, although it does not appear to have a following nearly as large as SCIRI or the
other Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s brother, Abd al-Hadi, headed the Islamic
Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, which tried to stir up Shiite unrest against the
Bahrain regime in the 1980s and 1990s (see below).
Development of Schisms Among Anti-Saddam
Groups
The differences among the various anti-Saddam organizations led to the near
collapse of the U.S. regime change effort the mid-1990s. In May 1994, the KDP and
the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs revenues levied at
border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s government based in
Irbil. The PUK lined up support from Iran while the KDP sought and received
countervailing backing from its erstwhile nemesis, the Baghdad government. The
infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC offensive against Iraqi troops in March
1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at the last minute. Although it was
repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of the less well-trained and poorly
motivated Iraqi units facing the Kurds. Some INC leaders point to the battle as an
indication that the INC could have succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. military
help, had it been given additional resources and training in the 1990s.
The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition caused
the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by renewing ties to a non-INC
group, Iraq National Accord (INA).4 The INA, originally founded in 1990 with Saudi
support, consists of military and security defectors who were perceived as having ties
to disgruntled officials currently serving within their former organizations. It is
headed by Dr. Iyad Alawi, former president of the Iraqi Student Union in Europe and
a physician by training. He is a secular Shiite Muslim, but most of the members of
4 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret
War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997.
CRS-8
the INA are Sunni Muslims. The INA’s prospects appeared to brighten in August
1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al-Majid — architect of Iraq’s
weapons of mass destruction programs — defected to Jordan, suggesting that
Saddam’s grip on the military and security services was weakening. Jordan’s King
Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate from there. The INA became penetrated
by Iraq’s intelligence services and, in June 1996, Baghdad dealt it a serious setback
by arresting or executing over 100 INA sympathizers in the military.
Iraq’s counteroffensive against the opposition was completed two months after
the arrests of the INA sympathizers. In late August 1996, the KDP asked Baghdad
to provide armed support for its capture of Irbil from the rival PUK. Iraq took
advantage of the request to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in
northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout northern Iraq.
In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred
oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated
from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists,
mostly from the INC.
Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA continued to
operate throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt itself to some extent since the
June 1996 arrests. However, it does not appear to have a large following in the Iraqi
regime and did not announce any key defections from the regime during Operation
Iraqi Freedom, nor has it since found or captured any former regime leaders.
Although it has was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war,
there is a history of friction between the two groups; the INA reportedly bombed an
INC facility in northern Iraq in October 1995. Iyad Alawi represents the INA on the
seven-party “leadership council” that is discussing self rule with the U.S. occupation
authorities.
Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks
For the two years following the anti-Saddam opposition groups’ 1996 setbacks,
the Clinton Administration had little contact with these groups. In those two years,
the INC, INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations
and their ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998,
then Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations
subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations”
about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish.
Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections
during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam
Hussein. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with an
FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, signed May 1, 1998) that, among
other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the
opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free
Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October
1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to
coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to
highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions. The remaining $2 million was used
to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the
CRS-9
documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes,
and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In
subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for
war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix. Some of the war crimes funding has
gone to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War
Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues.
Iraq Liberation Act
The clearest indication of congressional support for a more active U.S.
overthrow effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998: the Iraq
Liberation Act (ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998).
The ILA gave the President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles
(and authorized $2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be
designated by the Administration. (An FY2003 supplemental appropriations, P.L.
108-11, added $86.5 million to the allowed draw-down ceiling to enable additional
funds to flow to groups helping the United States in Operation Iraqi Freedom. The
supplemental brought the total authorized under the Act to $183 million.) The Act’s
passage was widely interpreted as an expression of congressional support for the
concept of promoting an insurgency by using U.S. air-power to expand opposition-
controlled territory. This idea was advocated by Chalabi and some U.S. experts, such
as General Wayne Downing. President Clinton signed the legislation despite
reported widespread doubts within the Clinton Administration about the chances of
success in promoting an opposition insurgency inside Iraq.
The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting
regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it
should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime
headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly
articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq.
The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the
height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in
which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United
Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were
withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign
against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December
160-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq:
Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.)
The First Eligibility Designations Under the ILA. Further steps to
promote regime change followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, a career
diplomat, Frank Ricciardone, was named as a State Department’s “Coordinator for
the Transition in Iraq” — the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999,
after consultations with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13)
that the following organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance
under the Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the
Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the Movement for Constitutional
Monarchy (MCM), which is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a relative of the
Hashemite monarchs that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. The
CRS-10
IMIK and the MCM, in particular, were considered small movements that cannot
contribute much to an overthrow effort. Because of its possible role in contributing
to the formation of Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001,
although it was not formally taken off the ILA eligibility list.
Sharif Ali returned to Iraq on June 10 to a small welcome. He does not have a
seat on the seven-party “leadership council.”
In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton
Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and
“non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999 - 2000, about 150
opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in
Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses provided civil affairs
training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers,
communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However,
the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficientlyorganized
to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This
restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the
effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United
States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The trainees during
1999-2000 are not believed to have been brought into the Operation Iraqi Freedom
effort against the regime, or into the Free Iraqi Forces that deployed to Iraq toward
the end of the active combat phase of the war.
Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam
Groups
During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end
the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of
Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed
disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the
opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an
indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical that a renewed overthrow
effort would fare better than previous attempts. Most of those who argued against
increased U.S. support for the opposition maintained that the Iraqi opposition would
not succeed unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement, and that direct U.S.
military action was risky and not justified by the threat posed by Iraq. Some
observers maintained that the potential threat from Saddam Hussein’s regime was
sufficiently grave that direct U.S. military action should be taken. Other critics
suggested the United States focus instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq by
threatening force against Iraq in order to obtain re-entry into Iraq of the U.N.
weapons of mass destruction inspectors that had been absent from Iraq since
December 15, 1998.
As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a
provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed
November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the
Iraqi people,” of which at least $12 million was for the INC to distribute
humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million
CRS-11
was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million
could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive
assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC
distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000, the Clinton Administration
reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in
FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop an aid distribution plan
and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before
it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that
noted that any INC effort to distribute aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control
would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and
to any relief distributors with which the INC contracts.5
Bush Administration Policy
Bush Administration policytoward Iraq changed after the September 11 terrorist
attacks, even though no significant evidence linking Iraq to those attacks has come
to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in President
Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he characterized Iraq
as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea.
Pre-September 11 Policy
Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic
elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus
within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow
strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq,
which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its
taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist
regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan: a modification of the U.N.
sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technologyreaches Iraq. His plan
offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N.
restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military
technology.6
The Administration believed that the proposal, by easing the suffering of the
Iraqi people, would cause Iraq’s neighbors and other countries to cease unilateral
violations of the sanctions regime. Powell, who had openly expressed skepticism
about the opposition’s prospects, barelyraised the regime change issue during his trip
or in his March 7, 2001, testimony before the House International Relations
Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.7 After about a year of
5 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.”
January 17, 2001.
Program.
6 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food
7 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times,
(continued...)
CRS-12
negotiations among the Security Council permanent members, the major feature of
the smart sanctions plan — new procedures that virtually eliminate U.N. review of
civilian exports to Iraq — was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Security Council
Resolution 1409).
Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime
change policy, many of the questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy
that had faced previous administrations were debated early in the Bush
Administration.8 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush
Administration said and did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first
year. During his confirmation hearings as Deputy Secretary of Defense, a reported
strong advocate of overthrow, Paul Wolfowitz, said that he did not yet see a
“plausible plan” for changing the regime. Like its predecessor, the Bush
Administration initially declined to provide the opposition with lethal aid, combat
training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the separate
State Department position of “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” further casting
doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy. On February 2, 2001, the Bush
Administration confirmed that, shortly after President Bush took office, the Treasury
Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted the INC a license to
proceed with information gathering inside Iraq only, and not actual distribution of
humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the Administration amounted to a
withholding of U.S. backing for the INC plan to rebuild its presence inside Iraq.
Many in Congress, on the other hand, continued to support the INC as the
primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional
sentiment, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite
doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television
broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the
ESF aid appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an estimated
additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.9
Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime
Bush Administration policytoward Iraq became notablymore assertive after the
September 11, 2001 attacks, stressing regime change far more than containment.
Almost immediately after the U.S.-led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in
Afghanistan began in early October 2001, speculation began building that the
Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use of military force
as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism. As noted above, in his January 29,
2002 State of the Union message, President Bush named Iraq as part of an “axis of
evil,” along with North Korea and Iran. Vice President Cheney visited the Middle
East in March 2002 reportedly to consult regional countries about the possibility of
7 (...continued)
March 2, 2001.
8 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh,
Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002.
9 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001.
CRS-13
confronting Iraq militarily, although the countries visited reportedly urged greater
U.S. attention to the Arab-Israeli dispute and opposed confrontation with Iraq.
The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for
confronting Iraq were (1) its alleged refusal to end its WMD programs, and (2) its
ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of
conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. The Administration added that
regime change would have the further benefit of liberating the Iraqi people.
Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s
regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax
mailings, senior U.S. officials said in September 2002, and again in January and
February 2003, that there was evidence of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. Some outside
observers expressed skepticism about such connections because of the ideological
differences between Saddam Hussein’s secular regime and Al Qaeda’s Islamist
character. Secretary of States Powell, as noted above, cited intelligence information
that Ansar al-Islam (see above for the origins of the group) had links to Saddam
Hussein’s regime.10 Other senior officials cited intelligence information that Iraq
provided advice and training to Al Qaeda in the manufacture and use of chemical
weapons, although Administration information appears to date to the early 1990s
when Iraq, largely isolated after the first Gulf war, was politically close to Sudan. Al
Qaeda founder Osama Bin Laden was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996).
On the other hand, Baghdad did not control northern Iraq even before Operation
Iraqi Freedom, and some U.S. officials played down this theory.11 Others noted that
bin Laden sought to raise an Islamic army to fight Saddam’s invasion of Kuwait in
1990, arguing against the need for U.S. troops, and that he was more an enemy of
Saddam Hussein than an ally. In the Administration view, the two shared similar
anti-U.S. goals, which outweighed ideological differences and propelled them into
tactical or strategic cooperation. Those differences were evident in a February 12,
2003, bin Laden statement referring to Saddam Hussein’s regime as socialist and
infidel, although the statement exhorted Iraq to resist impending U.S. military action.
WMD Threat Perception. In arguing for military action, U.S. officials
maintained that Iraq’s purported commitment to developing WMD — coupled with
its support for terrorist groups to which Iraq might transfer WMD — constituted an
unacceptable potential threat to the United States and that major U.S. military action
was justified if Iraq refused to disarm voluntarily. U.S. officials said the September
11, 2001 attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to
gather before acting, but must instead act preemptively or preventively. Senior U.S.
officials asserted a WMD threat as follows:
! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years
since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply
with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8,
10 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002.
11 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire,
March 18, 2002.
CRS-14
2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs.
However, statements by U.N. weapons inspectors after inspections
resumed November 27, 2002 indicated they believed Iraq did not
have an active nuclear weapons program, and that inspections on
other weapons categories were making progress.
! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and
against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not
necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States
or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against
adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of
destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of
massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the
1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings and
did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war.
! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who
could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths
in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of this view cited
presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in late 2002,
stating the CIA view that Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to
terrorists if the United States were to attack Iraq. At that point,
according to that argument, Saddam Hussein would be left with little
incentive not to cooperate with terrorist groups capable of striking
at U.S. interests. (No WMD was used against Iraq during Operation
Iraqi Freedom, although the Administration asserts that such
weapons will eventually be found in Iraq by the U.S.-led coalition.)
Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam
As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action against Iraq, the
Bush Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its
capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002,
President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special
operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and
Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups — the INC, the
INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM — to Washington for meetings with
senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were
held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S.
government, which tended to favor different opposition groups.
In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August
15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in ESF to the INC, funds
that had been held up due to differences between the State Department and the INC
over what activities would be funded. The $8 million was to be used to fund the
INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its offices in Washington, London,
Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate its Al Mutamar newspaper and
Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund the information gathering
portion of the INC’s activities; the State Department had refused to fund those
CRS-15
activities, which are conducted inside Iraq, because of strains between the INC and
other opposition groups and questions about INC use of U.S. funds.
In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and
to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic-
based groups. On December 9, 2002, the Bush Administration added six of the
factions discussed below (except the Higher Council for National Salvation) to the
list of “democratic opposition organizations” eligible to receive draw downs under
the ILA. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had
increasing contact include the following:
! Iraqi National Movement. It formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the
INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib
(who was part of an early leadership body of the INC); Hatim
Mukhlis, who claimed support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan; and
ex-senior military officer Khalid al-Ubaydi.
! Iraqi National Front. Another grouping of ex-military officers,
founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite
Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and
participated and was wounded in the anti-Saddam uprisings
immediately following the 1991 Gulf war.
! Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement. Established in 1996 by
ex-military officer Najib al-Salhi. This group worked closely with
the INC. Salhi defected in 1995 after serving as commander of
several tank units in the Republican Guard and regular military.
! Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was
formally established on August 1, 2002. It is headed by Wafiq al-
Samarra’i, a former head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of
staff of Iraq’s military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was
based in Denmark since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member.
Khazraji was placed under travel restrictions by Danish officials in
late November 2002 after saying he wanted to leave Denmark. He
is under investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of
chemical weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities
said on March 17, 2003 that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his
home there, raising questions about whether he is defying the travel
restrictions placed on him. A press report on April 7, 2003, said he
went to Kuwait, possibly to play a part in a post-Saddam regime
there,12 although his current whereabouts are unknown.
! Iraqi Turkmen Front. A small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping,
generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq.
Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq.
12 ‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper. Agence France Press, April 7, 2003.
CRS-16
! The Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another
Shiite Islamic Party, but it is considered substantially less pro-
Iranian than SCIRI or the Da’wa Party (see above). The Islamic
Accord is headed by Jamil Wakil. Many Accord members are
followers of Ayatollah Shirazi, an Iranian cleric who was the
spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation
of Bahrain (IFLB), which allegedly attempted to overthrow the
government of Bahrain in the early 1980s.
! The Assyrian Democratic Movement, an ethnic-based movement
headed by Secretary-General Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s
Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq. There is a
strong diaspora presence in the United States as well. After building
ties to this group over the past year, the Bush Administration
formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement
into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002.
Second ILA Designations. The Bush Administration applauded efforts
during 2001 and 2002 by these groups to hold meetings to coordinate with each
other and with the INC and other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London
and jointly run with the INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers. However, since
the regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, none of the groups listed immediately
above has openly sought a major role in post-Saddam Iraq, and the whereabouts of
many of their leaders are not known.
As the decision whether to launch military action approached, on December 9,
2002, President Bush issued a determination to draw down the remaining $92 million
in defense articles and services authorized under the Iraq Liberation Act for the INA,
the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi
opposition groups designated byme under the Act before or after this determination.”
This latter phrase suggested that some of the draw downs would go to the six groups
designated above as eligible to receive ILA draw downs. The announcement
appeared to be part of reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists in tasks that
could assist U.S. forces, possibly including combat units.13 An initial group of 3,000
was selected, but only about 70 oppositionists completed training at an air base
(Taszar) in Hungary, according to press reports.14 These oppositionists served with
U.S. forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom as translators and mediators between U.S.
forces and local leaders.
As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began
planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002,
with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in
London. In advance of the meeting, the Bush Administration appointed NSC official
Zalmay Khalilzad to be a liaison to the Iraqi opposition. The conference was
13 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.”
Washington Post, October 19, 2002.
14 Williams, Daniel. U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles. Washington Post, December
18, 2002.
CRS-17
organized by the same six groups whose leaders visited Washington in August 2002,
but included other groups as well, and they discussed whether the opposition should
declare a provisional government. The Administration opposed that step on the
grounds that it was premature and would give the impression that outside powers
were determining Iraq’s political structure.
The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65-member follow-up committee,
which some criticized as weighted heavily toward Shiite Islamist groups such as
SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24-27, 2003 in northern Iraq.
Against the urging of U.S. representatives at the meeting, the opposition agreed to
form a six man committee that would prepare for a transition regime, although it
stopped short of declaring a provisional government. The six included PUK leader
Jalal Talabani, KDP leader Masud Barzani, SCIRI leader Mohammed Baqr Al
Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Iyad Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign minister Adnan
Pachachi. Iran allowed Iraqi oppositionists to cross from Iran into northern Iraq to
hold that session. With the exception of Pachachi, these groups and figures are the
core of the current seven-party “leadership council” negotiating with U.S. authorities
on Iraqi self-rule.
Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the
new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete
disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if Iraq wanted to avert military action. The
Administration had been downplaying the goal of regime change after President
Bush’s September 12, 2002 speech before the United Nations General Assembly, in
which he focused on enforcing U.N. resolutions that require Iraqi disarmament.
However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change goal after
February 2002 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course. In the
Administration view, a friendly government in Baghdad was required if the
international community is to rid Iraq of WMD and links to terrorist groups.
The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March breakdown of
U.N. diplomacyover whether the U.N. SecurityCouncil should authorize war against
Iraq for failing to complywith Resolution 1441. The diplomatic breakdown followed
several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by the director of the U.N. inspection
bodyUNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification, and Inspection Commission) Hans
Blix and the director of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), most
recently on March 7, 2003. The briefings were generally critical of Iraq for failing
to pro-actively cooperate to clear up outstanding questions about Iraq’s WMD
program, but the latter two briefings (February 24 and March 7) noted progress in
clearing up outstanding WMD questions.
Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and
Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that
inspections should be given more time. They noted that Iraq was well contained by
sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones. Those who agreed with this
view maintained that, as long as Iraq allowed access to U.N. weapons inspections
under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national
security. Inspections encountered few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700
inspections of about 400 different sites, as of mid-March 2003. Others experts
believed that, even if Iraq were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could
CRS-18
have been deterred by U.S. overall strategic superiority, presumably including the
U.S. nuclear arsenal.
The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq
had not fundamentally decided to disarm, and was attempting to preserve WMD
capabilities. The Administration asserted on March 17, 2003, that diplomatic options
to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full attention to military action.
That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and his sons, Uday and Qusay,
an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war. They refused the
ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003.
In the war, Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and
British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the regime, at times, put up stiff
resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi military commanders or
Baathist political figures came forward to tryto establish a post-Saddam government,
but senior regime leaders fled Baghdad, and the whereabouts of many of them, as
well as the fate of Saddam Hussein, are unknown. The outcome of a post-war debate
on the results of the war might depend on such factors as the pace of reconstruction;
the future degree of resistance, if any, to a U.S. and British occupation; the amount
of WMD ultimately found, if any; and whether a new government is democratic.
Post-War Governance Issues
After the fall of Saddam Hussein’s regime on April 9, 2003, there is increasing
debate about governing post-war Iraq. The same U.S. concerns about fragmentation
of and instability in Iraq that existed in prior years are present in the current debate
over how to establish a post-war interim regime. Although some Iraqi civilians have
welcomed U.S. and British troops in areas captured, many Iraqis now want U.S. and
British forces to leave Iraq. U.S. occupation forces are facing increasing guerrilla
attacks from remnants of the Iraqi regime or others opposed to the U.S. presence;
such attacks have killed more than 30 U.S. military personnel since President Bush
declared an end to “major combat operations” in Iraq on May 1, 2003. Other experts
fear that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall under control of SCIRI and other Shiite
Islamist forces who, as noted above, are well-organized and are asserting growing
control over areas inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites. Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s
population but have traditionally been under-represented in Iraq’s Sunni Muslim-
dominated government.
Establishing an Iraqi Interim Administration. The Administration
asserts that it will do what is necessary to bring about a stable, democratic successor
regime that complies with all applicable U.N. resolutions. However, there appears
to be some debate between U.S. authorities and key anti-Saddam groups over how
and when to establish a successor regime. Senior U.S. officials, including deputy
Defense Secretary Paul Wolfowitz, had said in early April 2003 that they hoped to
have a successor regime in place within six months of the fall of the regime.
However, in mid-May, U.S. officials, apparently fearing that existing major groups
could not form a stable regime, backed away from any deadlines for establishing an
CRS-19
Iraqi self-rule authority. The anti-Saddam groups assert that Iraqis are sufficiently
competent and unified to rebuild Iraq after a war with the United States.
Shortly after the war, the United States began a process of establishing a
successor regime. The Administration organized an April 15 meeting, in Nasiriyah,
of about 100 Iraqis of varying ideologies, present by U.S. invitation. Many of the
attendees were representatives of Iraqi tribal groupings that had not been politically
active before. However, SCIRI, along with several Shiite clerics that have
appropriated authority throughout much of southern Iraq since the fall of the regime,
boycotted the meeting and called for an Islamic state and the withdrawal of U.S.
forces. Another meeting of about 250 delegates was held in Baghdad on April 26,
which ended in agreement to hold a broader meeting, within a month, to name an
interim Iraqi administration. At that time, U.S. officials said that U.S. plans were for
the interim administration to serve for about two years, after which a constitution
would be adopted and national elections held.
“Leadership Council” of Seven. In parallel with the late April meeting in
Baghdad, the five most prominent opposition groups met, with U.S. envoys present:
SCIRI, the INC, the INA, the PUK, and the KDP. At a subsequent meeting on May
9, 2003, the five agreed to expand their grouping to seven, adding to their ranks the
little known Nasir al-Chadirchy, head of a party called the National Democratic Party
of Iraq, as well as the Da’wa Party. The council of seven strongly criticized the U.S.
decision in mid-May 2003 to delay the formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority
indefinitely and to instead establish a purely advisory body of 25 to 30 Iraqis. The
leadership council has since been meeting among itself and with U.S. occupation
authorities to try to obtain at least a partial reversal of that decision. The exact
motivations for the delay were not announced, but press reports indicate that U.S.
officials believed that a self-rule authority dominated by the seven parties in the
leadership council would be unstable and insufficiently committed to democracy.
As part of the planning process that took place before the war, the U.S. State
Department and the Defense Department supported groups of Iraqi exiles to address
issues that will confront a successor government.15 It is not yet known what
influence, if any, these working groups are having on any post-war regime decision-
making in Iraq. The U.S. State Department project, which cost $5 million, consisted
of working groups that discussed (1) transitional justice; (2) public finance; (3)
public and media outreach; (4) democratic principles; (5) water, agriculture, and the
environment; (6) health and human services; (7) economy and infrastructure; (8)
education; (9) refugees, internally-displaced persons, and migration policy; (10)
foreign and national security policy; (11) defense institutions and policy; (12) free
media; (13) civil society capacity-building; (14) anti-corruption measures; and (15)
oil and energy.
Post-War U.S. Operations in Iraq/Coalition Provisional Authority.
Experts note that projections about U.S. operations in post-war Iraq, including the
duration of the U.S. military occupation and the numbers of occupation troops, were
15 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,”
Washington File, December 11, 2002.
CRS-20
largely dependent on the amount of Iraqi resistance, if any, the number of U.S.
casualties taken, and the speed with which a successor regime is chosen. At present,
about 160,000 U.S. and British troops remain in Iraq, according to a June 2003 report
to Congress mandated by P.L. 108-11. Earlier press reports said the Administration
wanted to draw the U.S. force level down to about 35,000 by the end of 2003, but
continued unrest and insecurity in Iraq appears to have made that goal untenable.
The United States is discussing with about 40 other countries pledges and
mechanisms for a peacekeeping role that might share the burden of post-war security
in Iraq, according to the above mentioned report.
The Bush Administration initially tasked Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) to direct
civilian reconstruction, working through a staff of U.S. diplomats and other U.S.
government personnel who will serve as advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various
ministries. He headed the Office of Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance
(ORHA), within the Department of Defense, created by a January 20, 2003 executive
order. After spending the combat phase of the war in neighboring Kuwait, Garner
and some of his staff of about 200 deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003, to begin
work. Former Ambassador to Yemen Barbara Bodine was responsible for a “central”
region; and retired generals Buck Walters and Bruce Moore are responsible for
“southern” and “northern” regions, respectively.
Press reports said that senior U.S. officials were dissatisfied with the slow pace
of reconstruction under Garner, and on May 6, 2003, the Administration appointed
former ambassador L. Paul Bremer to lead the overall reconstruction effort, with a
focus on political reconstruction. He arrived on May 12 to head what is called the
Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA), which subsumes ORHA, and Bodine and
then Garner departed shortly thereafter. The appointment represented an apparent
adjustment from the original structure of the U.S. reconstruction effort, although the
Administration stated that it was always envisioned that a civilian would eventually
take over the U.S. effort. U.S. officials now refer to the CPA as an occupying
authority legitimized by U.N. Security Council Resolution 1483 of May 22, 2003.
Among other provisions, the resolution lifted U.N. sanctions on Iraq.
Recruiting Other Peacekeepers. As of earlyMay, organizing proceeds for
a multinational peacekeeping force in Iraq. According to the above-mentioned
report, more than 40 countries have offered, or are discussing offers of, forces for a
multilateral stabilization force. The commitments of several nations appear to be
dependent on whether the U.N. Security Council authorizes such a force. The United
Kingdom and Poland have offered to lead multinational divisions in that mission.
Currently about 13,000 non-U.S. troops are in Iraq, mostly British. Some pledges
were announced shortlyafter the “Interim Coalition StabilityOperations Conference”
of 16 nations, held in London on April 30, 2003, and hosted by the British Minister
of Defence, Geoff Hoon. (A follow-up meeting was held in London on May 8.)
Other nations are contributing relief supplies and field hospital facilities and services.
The United States has urged NATO to take on Iraq as a fifth peacekeeping
mission, but thus far, NATO has only informally discussed the U.S. proposal.
Reportedly, French president Jacques Chirac has said that formal consideration
requires an authorizing resolution from the U.N. Security Council. Neither France
nor Germany has agreed to participate outside of a NATO framework.
CRS-21
U.N. Role. The United States and its European allies and other countries have
reached a measure of agreement on a U.N. role in post-war Iraq. Resolution 1483,
which was adopted unanimously, provides for a U.N. special representative to
coordinate the activities of U.N. personnel in Iraq and to help establish a successor
government. The Secretary General subsequently appointed Brazilian diplomat
Sergio Vieira de Mello for that post. The resolution also gives the United Nations
a monitoring role over the Development Fund for Iraq, a fund that will handle Iraq’s
oil revenues until there is a successor government. The resolution did not authorize
a return to Iraq of U.N. weapons inspectors, although the resolution provides for
deliberations on that issue. Some International Atomic Energy Agency inspectors
returned to Iraq in June 2003 on a limited nuclear mission in Baghdad.
Reviving the Oil Industry.16 As the driver of Iraq’s economy, the rebuilding
of the oil industry is receiving substantial U.S. attention. It has been widely assumed
that Iraq’s vast oil reserves, believed second only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be
used to fund much of the costs of reconstruction. Presidential spokesman Ari
Fleischer said on February 18, 2003, referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a
variety of means ... to shoulder much of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.”
Many observers had been concerned that an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could
destroy its own oil fields, but coalition forces quickly secured Iraq’s southern oil
fields since combat began on March 19, 2003. Only about 9 oil wells were set on
fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that region, and all were put out quickly. The
northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul were not set afire. In early May 2003, the
U.S.-led coalition set up an advisory board, headed by former Shell executive Phillip
Carroll, to oversee the rebuilding of Iraq’s oil sector. An Iraqi oil industry
professional, Thamer Ghadhban, was named to serve as head of the interim
management team that will run Iraq’s oil ministry and report to the advisory board..
Some oil production resumed in late April, and Iraqi oil personnel say that the first
post-war oil exports will be shipped in mid June.
A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which
foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s
vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will
seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other
countries.
Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have
been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program.
The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put
in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was
suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various
aspects of the program departed Iraq. As of March 14, 2003, about $9 billion worth
of humanitarian goods were in the process of being delivered or in production. (See
CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.)
16 For information on the prospects for Iraq’s post-war economy, see CRS Report RL31944.
Iraq’s Economy: Past, Present, Future.
CRS-22
On March 28, 2003, the U.N. SecurityCouncil unanimouslyadopted Resolution
1472 that restarted the program’s operations and empowered the United Nations, for
a 45-day period (until May 12), to take direct control of all aspects of the program.
Under the new resolution, the United Nations is setting priorities for and directing the
delivery of already contracted supplies. The enhanced U.N. authority was extended
on April 25, 2003, to last at least until the six-month phase of the program expired
on June 3, 2003.
On April 17, 2003, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions
against Iraq, signaling that the Administration wanted to focus on restoring normal
international commerce with Iraq rather than extending the oil-for-food program.
Resolution 1483 provides for the phasing out of the oil for food program within six
months after adoption of that resolution on May 22. The resolution also provided for
the United Nations to transfer to the new Development Fund for Iraq $1 billion in
funds held by the oil-for-food program escrow fund. (For more information, see CRS
Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, International Sanctions, and Illicit
Trade.)
War Crimes. An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is
whether Saddam Hussein and his associates should be prosecuted for war crimes and
crimes against humanity, if and when they are caught. The Administration said in
early April 2003 that Saddam and his inner circle should be tried by Iraqis if they are
captured, although others might be tried by a U.S.-led process for any crimes
committed in the course of the 2003 war. Over the past year, the Administration had
been gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those
it had sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay; Ali Hassan al-
Majid, for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (he was reported by British
officers to have died in an early April air strike on his home in Basra); Muhammad
Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered in mid April 2003); Taha Yasin Ramadan; first Vice
President and number three in the regime; Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the
Revolutionary Command Council and formally number two in the regime; Barzan
al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother (captured in mid April 2003); Watban al-Tikriti
(captured in April 2003) and Sabawi al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam
and former leaders of regime intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputyPrime Minister
and foremost regime spokesman (surrendered in May 2003); and Aziz Salih Noman,
governor of Kuwait during Iraq’s occupation of that country (apprehended in May
2003).
Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials
sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured
or surrendered. As of early June 2003, according to Coalition Provisional Authority
officials, about half of the Iraqis on the list of 55 are now in custody or are confirmed
killed. Among the apprehended are Amir al-Saadi, chief science adviser to Saddam;
Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti, a son-in-law of Saddam; Vice President Taha Muhi ad-Din
Ma’ruf; and suspected WMD manager Hoda Mahdi Salih al-Ammash .
The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and
the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29,
1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related
atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for
CRS-23
FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress
that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal
for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137
(passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March
13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October
31, 1998).
A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993,
after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the Administration has supported
INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the
arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the
Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer,
said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established,
focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical
weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds)
and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which
an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against
Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes
against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations.
In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a
U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war
crimes is formed.
Congressional Reactions
Congress, like the Administration, appears to have had divergent views on the
mechanisms for promoting regime change, although there appears to be widespread
agreement in Congress that regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S.
policy. However, there was substantial disagreement over whether a major military
offensive was the most desirable option for achieving that objective. On December
20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75, by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal
to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a “mounting threat” to the United States. The
resolution did not call for new U.S. steps to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few
Members called for the overthrow of Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in
support of the resolution.
In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq,
some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint
appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on
Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations
Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the
opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an
option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In
early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members — Senators John
McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and
Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr.
— wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for
operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter,
CRS-24
Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S.
assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish
areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and
other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to
accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.”
As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002,
Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result.
Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force
against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce
U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on
October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote
of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243).
The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. Prior to the war, it held
several hearings on the progress of post-war reconstruction. During the war and in
its aftermath, several Members applauded the performance of the U.S. military and
the overthrow of the regime. Some Members, however, have criticized the
Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war period in light of major
looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the regime. Several Committees
are discussing the scope of inquiry into why substantial amounts of WMD have not
been found in Iraq to date.
CRS-25
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition
Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.)
to the Opposition
(Figures in millions of dollars)
INC War
Crimes Broadcasting
Unspecified
Opposition
Activities
Total
FY 1998
(P.L. 105-174)
2.0 5.0
(RFE/RL)
3.0 10.0
FY 1999
(P.L. 105-277)
3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0
FY 2000
(P.L. 106-113)
2.0 8.0 10.0
FY 2001
(P.L. 106-429)
12.0
(aid
distribution
inside Iraq)
2.0 6.0
(INC radio)
5.0 25.0
FY 2002
(P.L. 107-115)
25.0 25.0
Total,
FY1998- FY 2002
15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0
FY2003
(no earmark)
3.1
(announced
April, 2003 )
6.9 (remaining
to be
allocated)
10.0
FY2004
(request)
0 0
Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq
Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97
million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent,
as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided,
the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and
FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be
used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N.
programs.
Another version (English): 9 May 2003 — RL31339_2003-05-09.pdf
Order Code RL31339
Report for Congress
Received through the CRS Web
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
Updated May 9, 2003
Kenneth Katzman
Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs
Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division
Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
Summary
In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized
Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to abandon
its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs as required by U.N. Security
Council resolutions and the potential for it to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. In
September 2002, the President warned that unless Iraq fully disarmed in cooperation
with United Nations weapons inspectors, the United States would lead a coalition to
achieve that disarmament militarily. U.S. officials made clear that this would
include the ouster of Iraq’s President Saddam Hussein’s regime. On March 17,
2003, the United States launched “Operation Iraqi Freedom,” a war effort to disarm
Iraq and change its regime. The regime fell on April 9.
In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change
through U.S.-led military action would yield benefits beyond disarmament, including
liberation from an oppressive regime for the Iraqi people and enhancement of the
prospects for peace and democracy throughout the Middle East. The goal of regime
change in Iraq had been declared U.S. policy since November 1998, and U.S. efforts
to oust Saddam had been pursued, with varying degrees of intensity, since the end of
the Gulf war in 1991. These efforts primarily involved U.S. financial backing for
opposition groups inside and outside Iraq, several of which are now contending for
power in post-Saddam Iraq. Past efforts to change the regime floundered because of
limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the Iraqi opposition, and the efficiency
and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping intelligence and security forces.
Previous U.S. administrations ruled out major U.S. military action to change Iraq’s
regime, believing such action would be costly, risky, and not necessarily justified by
the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament.
The character of the government that would replace Saddam Hussein’s Baath
Party, and the exact process by which that government will be chosen, are yet to be
determined. Some Administration officials reportedly had hoped that major military
and governmental defections from the Hussein regime would serve as the core of a
successor government. However, no senior Hussein regime figures defected, and the
Bush Administration is expecting established opposition groups and emerging local
leaders to form the core of a new regime. Some of the pre-existing disputes and
schisms among the various anti-Hussein groups are already beginning to break out
into a post-war power struggle, and there is a debate among Iraqi groups over how
great a role the United States should play in the process of choosing a successor
government.
This report will be updated as warranted by major developments.
Contents
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
An Opposition Coalition Emerges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Ansar al-Islam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Sadr Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
The Fragmentation of the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Rebuilding an Opposition Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
The First Eligibility Designations Under the ILA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Continued Debate Over Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Policy Post-September 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Broadening the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Post-War Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Establishing an Iraqi Interim Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Post-War U.S. Operations in Iraq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Recruiting Other Peacekeepers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
U.N. Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Reviving the Oil Industry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
War Crimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Congressional Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
The United States has been attempting to change Iraq’s regime since the 1991
Persian Gulf war, although achieving this goal was not declared policy until 1998.
In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass destruction
(WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United States would
seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A regime change
policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, October 31, 1998).
Bush Administration officials have emphasized regime change as the cornerstone of
U.S. policy toward Iraq since shortly after the September 11, 2001, attacks, well
before the launch of Operation Iraqi Freedom on March 17, 2003.
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam
Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an
operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George
H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end
of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and
Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope
of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions. The revolt in southern Iraq reached
the suburbs of Baghdad, but the well-trained and loyal Republican Guard forces had
survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from battle prior to the U.S.
ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid-March 1991. Many Shiites
blamed the United States for not supporting their uprising and standing aside as the
regime retaliated against those who participated in the rebellion. Kurds, benefitting
from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991, were able to drive Iraqi
troops out of much of northern Iraq and establish an autonomous zone there and
subsequently remained largely free of Baghdad’s rule.
According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite
uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding
stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup
against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that
purpose. The Administration apparently believed — and this view apparently still
is shared by many experts and U.S. officials — that a coup by elements within the
current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq.
Many observers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and
Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and
tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria.
CRS-2
An Opposition Coalition Emerges
Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that
the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment
within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision
was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the
diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the
Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and
diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This
opposition coalition seemed to provide a vehicle for the United States to build a
viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert
support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.1
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi
The growing opposition coalition took concrete shape in an organization called
the Iraqi National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two
main Kurdish militias — the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic
Union of Kurdistan (PUK) — participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of
dozens of opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came
into the coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq.
The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi
ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military
officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC
with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups
publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests,
including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the
preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. Security Council
resolutions on Iraq.2 However, many observers doubted its commitment to
democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and
because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies.
Ahmad Chalabi. Selected to chair the INC’s Executive Committee was
Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 58 years old, a secular Shiite Muslim from a prominent
banking family. He was educated in the United States as a mathematician. He fled
Iraq to Jordan in 1958, when the Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military
coup. This coup occurred 10 years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July
1968). In 1978, he founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian
authorities on charges of financial malfeasance and he left Jordan, possibly with
some help from members of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989. The Jordanian
government subsequently re-capitalized the bank with national funds. In 1992, he
was convicted in absentia of embezzling $70 million from the bank and sentenced
1 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2,
1992.
2 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by
INC representatives, February 1993.
CRS-3
to 22 years in prison. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government was
pressured by Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to
the Jordanian government. In April 2003, senior Jordanian officials, including King
Abdullah, called Chalabi “divisive” and stopped just short of saying he would be
unacceptable to Jordan as leader of Iraq. Chalabi’s critics acknowledge that, despite
allegations about his methods, he has been single-minded in his determination to
overthrow Saddam Hussein, and he is said to be the favorite of those Administration
officials, particularly in the Department of Defense, that were the most supportive of
changing Iraq’s regime by force.
Chalabi does not appear to have a large following inside Iraq, although since his
return he appears to be attracting support from those Iraqis that most welcomed the
U.S. military offensive against Iraq as liberation from Saddam Hussein’s regime. On
April 6, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters (“Free Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by
the U.S. military from their base in the north to the Nasiriya area, purportedly to help
stabilize civil affairs in southern Iraq. Chalabi and some Free Iraqi Forces later
deployed to Baghdad and other parts of Iraq. Some of the Free Iraqi Forces are
believed to be Shiite Muslims who may retain loyalties to various Shiite Islamist
groups that may be competing with Chalabi for power in post-war Iraq. Since
establishing his headquarters in Baghdad, Chalabi has tried to build support by
searching for members of the former regime and arranging for U.S. military forces
in Iraq to provide security or other benefits to his potential supporters.
A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book
“Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq,” detailing alleged Iraqi regime
human rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracy for Iraq, including
full rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he teaches
Middle Eastern politics at Brandeis University. Another INC activist, Mohammad
al-Zubaidi, declared himself in charge of Baghdad in mid-April, but U.S. officials did
not recognize him as mayor and detained him in April 2003.
The Kurds/KDP and PUK. In committing to the concept of federalism, the
INC platform assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq.
The Kurds do not have ambitions to play a major role in governing Arab Iraq, but
Iraq’s neighbors fear the Kurds might still seek outright independence. Turkey,
which has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq,
particularly fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort
to unify into a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently
for autonomy since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state
after World War I. (Iraq became an independent Kingdom in 1932, although it
remained under British influence until the 1958 fall of the British-installed
monarchy.) In 1961, the KDP, then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current
KDP leader Masud Barzani’s father, began an insurgency that has continued until
today, although interrupted by periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad.
Masud Barzani’s brother, Idris, commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the
Iran-Iraq war but was killed in that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split
off from the KDP in 1965; the PUK’s members are generally more educated, urbane,
and left-leaning than those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about
40,000-60,000 fighters, some of which are trained in conventional military tactics.
CRS-4
Ansar al-Islam. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties enjoyed
good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement of Iraqi
Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaykh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in Halabja,
Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical attack on
that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998.
A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam
(Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam).
This faction, led by Mullah Krekar (who was detained in Europe in August 2002 and
now lives in Norway), reportedly is associated with Al Qaeda and hosted in its
northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters who fled the U.S.-led war in Afghanistan.
The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials to
be Abu Musab Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in
Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the
millenium celebration, as well as to recent attempts to spread the biological agent
ricin in London and possibly other places in Europe. Prior to Operation Iraqi
Freedom, during which its base has been captured, about 8,000 people were in the
Ansar al-Islam enclave, located near the town of Khurmal. This included about 600
fighters.3 Mullah Krekar reportedly studied under Shaykh Abdullah al-Azzam, an
Islamic theologian of Palestinian origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama bin
Laden. Fighters of Ansar al-Islam clashed with the PUK around Halabja in
December 2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedly responsible for an assassination
attempt against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002. In a presentation
to the U.N. Security Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied
Zarqawi and Ansar al-Islam to the Iraqi regime, which might have viewed Ansar al-
Islam as a means of pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents. Many experts
believed Baghdad-Ansar links were tenuous or even non-existent.
Shiite Islamist Organizations
Some outside experts have had concerns about the potential strength and
ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups in post-
Saddam Iraq.
SCIRI/Badr Corps. The most well known among these is called the Supreme
Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member of the INC
in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC banner.
SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition groups
in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad Baqr al-
Hakim, was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head an Islamic Republic of
Iraq, a vision that, if realized, might conflict with U.S. plans to forge a democratic
Iraq. Baqr Hakim and his family fled Iraq to Iran in 1980, during a major crackdown
on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam feared that Iraqi Shiite
Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution in Iran in 1979, posed
a major threat to his regime. Prior to the formation of SCIRI, Hakim and his family
were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party (see below). Mohammad Baqr is the
3 Chivers, C.J. New York Times, December 6, 2002.
Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.”
CRS-5
son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a prominent Shiite leader in
southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini when Khomeini was in exile
in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. In early May 2003, there were press reports that
Mohammad Baqr might resign from his formal SCIRI leadership post and try to
establish himself in the Shiite holy city of Najaf, Iraq, as an overarching Shiite
authority figure in the image of the late Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran. He is to return
to Iraq on May 10.
In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about
10,000-15,000 fighters/activists organized into a “Badr Corps” (named after a major
battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from Iran
into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. The Badr Corps is headed by
Mohammad Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim, who returned to Iraq on
April 20, 2003, to pave the way for Mohammad Baqr’s return. (Another Hakim
brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan in May 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s
security services.) Iran’s Revolutionary Guard — which is politically aligned with
Iran’s hard line civilian officials — has been the key patron of the Badr Corps,
providing it with weapons, funds, and other assistance. The Badr Corps fought
alongside the Guard against Iraqi forces during the Iran-Iraq war. However, many
Iraqi Shiites view SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr Corps operations in
southern Iraq prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark broad popular unrest
against the Iraqi regime.
Some Badr fighters deployed inside northern Iraq on the eve of Operation Iraqi
Freedom, and the New York Times reported on May 7, 2003, that many Badr activists
have infiltrated into Iraq to build support for SCIRI. Until August 2002 when Abd
al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures for meetings in Washington, SCIRI
had publicly refused to work openly with the United States or accept U.S. assistance.
Immediately after the fall of the regime on April 9, SCIRI leaders criticized what they
called an illegitimate U.S. occupation of Iraq, and they initially refused to join a
U.S.-led process to establish an interim post-Saddam government. However,
suggesting that SCIRI does not want to confront the United States, Abd al-Aziz al
Hakim did meet with other opposition leaders in late April 2003 at a post-war
governance planning session sponsored by U.S. officials. Nevertheless, U.S.
officials are said to be mistrustful of SCIRI and will likely try to prevent any attempt
by the movement to establish an Iranian-style Islamic republic. Unlike some other
Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI has had good working relations with some Sunni
oppositionists and the Kurds.
Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, perhaps Iraq’s oldest Shiite Islamist grouping,
continues to exist as a separate group, but it lacks its own strong, visible leadership,
and many Da’wa activists appear to be at least loosely allied with SCIRI. The party
was founded in 1957 by a revered Iraqi Shiite cleric, Ayatollah Mohammad Baqr Al
Sadr, a like-minded associate of Ayatollah Khomeini. Baqr Al Sadr was hung by the
Iraqi regime in 1980 for the Da’wa’s alleged responsibility in fomenting Shiite anti-
regime unrest following Iran’s 1979 Islamic revolution. That unrest included an
attempted assassination of senior Iraqi leader Tariq Aziz.
The Kuwaiti branch of the Da’wa Party allegedly was responsible for a May
1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks
CRS-6
on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The Hizballah organization in Lebanon
was founded by Lebanese clerics loyal to Ayatollah Baqr Al Sadr and the late
Ayatollah Khomeini, and there continue to be linkages between Hizballah and the
Da’wa Party. The Hizballah activists who held U.S. hostages in that country during
the 1980s often linked release of the Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party
prisoners held by Kuwait for those offenses. Some Iraqi Da’wa members look to
Lebanon’s senior Shiite cleric Mohammad Hossein Fadlallah, who was a student and
protege of Ayatollah Mohammad Baqr Al Sadr, for spiritual guidance.
Sadr Grouping. Members of the clan of the late Ayatollah Mohammad Baqr
Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq. Although the Al Sadr clan
has been closely identified with the Da’wa Party, it appears that members of the clan
and their followers currently are operating in post-war Iraq as grouping separate from
the Da’wa. Another revered member of the clan, Mohammad Sadiq Al Sadr, and
two of his sons, were killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999. A surviving son,
Moqtada al-Sadr, who is about 27 years old, has attempted to rally his followers to
attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite politics. He and his clan apparently
have a large following in the Shiite neighborhoods of Baghdad, which, after the fall
of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr City,” from the former name
of “Saddam City.” However, he is viewed by Iran and many Iraqi Shiites as a young
radical who lacks religious and political weight. To compensate for his lack of
religious credentials, he has sought spiritual authority for his actions from exiled Iraqi
senior cleric, Ayatollah Kazem Haeri, who is living in Qom, Iran. His reputation
may have been tarnished in early April when Moqtada al Sadr reportedly killed Abd
al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Abdol Qasem Musavi-Khoi,
shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al-Majid Khoi headed the
Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq after U.S.-led forces took
Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political doctrines of Ayatollah
Khomeini of Iran.
Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah. The revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al-
Sistani, based in Najaf, is also emerging as a major potential force in post-war Iraq.
He is the most senior of the four Shiite clerics that lead the Najaf- based “Hawza al-
Ilmiya,” a major grouping of seminaries and Shiite clerics. The Hawza, which is well
funded through donations, is becoming an important source of political authority in
the Shiite regions of Iraq, hiring Iraqis to perform functions performed by the former
regime and issuing directives, often obeyed, for some Iraqi civil servants to return to
work. Sistani himself, now free of a long house arrest at the hands of Baghdad, has
a large following of former students throughout the Shiite portions of Iraq. During
the U.S.-led war against Iraq, Moqtada al-Sadr and his followers reportedly tried to
intimidate Sistani by surrounding his office in Najaf with armed gunmen, a tactic that
many experts say is leading Sistani and the Hawza to ally with the Hakims in the
intra-Shiite power struggle. Sistani, who is said to be of Iranian ethnicity, is
considered to be in the tradition of Ayatollah Khoi in opposing a direct role for
clerics in governmental affairs, and it is therefore likely that Sistani and the Hawza
would not seek a direct or public role in the post-war regime.
Islamic Amal. SCIRI has been allied with another Shiite Islamist organization
called the Islamic Amal (Action) Organization. It is headed by Mohammad Taqi
Modarassi. Islamic Amal conducted attacks against Saddam Hussein’s regime in the
CRS-7
1980s, although it does not appear to have a following nearly as large as SCIRI or the
other Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s brother, Abd al-Hadi, headed the Islamic
Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, which tried to stir up Shiite unrest against the
Bahrain regime in the 1980s and 1990s (see below).
The Fragmentation of the Opposition
The differences among the opposition led to the near collapse of the U.S. regime
change effort the mid-1990s. In May 1994, the KDP and the PUK began clashing
with each other over territory, customs revenues levied at border with Turkey, and
control over the Kurdish enclave’s government based in Irbil. The PUK lined up
support from Iran while the KDP sought and received countervailing backing from
its erstwhile nemesis, the Baghdad government. The infighting contributed to the
defeat of an INC offensive against Iraqi troops in March 1995; the KDP pulled out
of the offensive at the last minute. Although it was repelled, the offensive did
initially overrun some of the less well-trained and poorly motivated Iraqi units facing
the Kurds. Some INC leaders point to the battle as an indication that the INC could
have succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. military help, had it been given
additional resources and training in the 1990s.
The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition caused
the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by renewing ties to a non-INC
group, Iraq National Accord (INA).4 The INA, originally founded in 1990 with Saudi
support, consists of military and security defectors who were perceived as having ties
to disgruntled officials currently serving within their former organizations. It is
headed by Dr. Iyad Alawi, former president of the Iraqi Student Union in Europe and
a physician by training. He is a secular Shiite Muslim, but most of the members of
the INA are Sunni Muslims. The INA’s prospects appeared to brighten in August
1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al-Majid — architect of Iraq’s
weapons of mass destruction programs — defected to Jordan, suggesting that
Saddam’s grip on the military and security services was weakening. Jordan’s King
Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate from there. The INA became penetrated
by Iraq’s intelligence services and, in June 1996, Baghdad dealt it a serious setback
by arresting or executing over 100 INA sympathizers in the military.
Iraq’s counteroffensive against the opposition was completed two months after
the arrests of the INA sympathizers. In late August 1996, the KDP asked Baghdad
to provide armed support for its capture of Irbil from the rival PUK. Iraq took
advantage of the request to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in
northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout northern Iraq.
In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred
oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated
from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists,
mostly from the INC.
4 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret
War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997.
CRS-8
Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA continued to
operate throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt itself to some extent since the
June 1996 arrests. However, it does not appear to have a large following in the Iraqi
regime and did not announce any key defections from the regime during Operation
Iraqi Freedom, nor has it since found or captured any former regime leaders.
Although it has was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war,
there is a history of friction between the two groups; the INA reportedly bombed an
INC facility in northern Iraq in October 1995.
Rebuilding an Opposition Strategy
For the two years following the opposition’s 1996 setbacks, the Clinton
Administration had little contact with the opposition. In those two years, the INC,
INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations and their
ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998, then
Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations
subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations”
about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish.
Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections
during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam
Hussein. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with a
FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, signed May 1, 1998) that, among
other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the
opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free
Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October
1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to
coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to
highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions. The remaining $2 million was used
to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the
documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes,
and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In
subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for
war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix. Some of the war crimes funding has
gone to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War
Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues.
Iraq Liberation Act
The clearest indication of congressional support for a more active U.S.
overthrow effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998 — the Iraq
Liberation Act (ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998).
The ILA gave the President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles
(and authorized $2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be
designated by the Administration. The Act’s passage was widely interpreted as an
expression of congressional support for the concept of promoting an insurgency by
using U.S. air-power to expand opposition-controlled territory. This idea was
advocated by Chalabi and some U.S. experts, such as General Wayne Downing.
CRS-9
President Clinton signed the legislation despite reported widespread doubts within
the Clinton Administration about the chances of success in promoting an opposition
insurgency inside Iraq.
The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting
regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it
should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime
headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly
articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq.
The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the
height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in
which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United
Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were
withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign
against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December
160-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq:
Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.)
The First Eligibility Designations Under the ILA. Further steps to
promote regime change followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, a career
diplomat, Frank Ricciardone, was named as a State Department’s “Coordinator for
the Transition in Iraq” — the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999,
after consultations with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13)
that the following organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance
under the Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the
Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the Movement for Constitutional
Monarchy (MCM), which is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a relative of the
Hashemite monarchs that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. The
IMIK and the MCM, in particular, were considered small movements that cannot
contribute much to an overthrow effort. Because of its possible role in contributing
to the formation of Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001,
although it was not formally taken off the ILA eligibility list.
In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton
Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and
“non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999 - 2000, about 150
opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in
Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses provided civil affairs
training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers,
communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However,
the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficiently organized
to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This
restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the
effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United
States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The trainees during
1999-2000 are not believed to have been brought into the Operation Iraqi Freedom
effort against the regime, or into the Free Iraqi Forces that deployed to Iraq toward
the end of the active combat phase of the war.
CRS-10
Continued Debate Over Policy
During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end
the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of
Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed
disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the
opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an
indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical that a renewed overthrow
effort would fare better than previous attempts. Most of those who argued against
increased U.S. support for the opposition maintained that the Iraqi opposition would
not succeed unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement, and that direct U.S.
military action was risky and not justified by the threat posed by Iraq. Some
observers maintained that the potential threat from Saddam Hussein’s regime was
sufficiently grave that direct U.S. military action should be taken. Other critics
suggested the United States focus instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq by
threatening force against Iraq in order to obtain re-entry into Iraq of the U.N.
weapons of mass destruction inspectors that had been absent from Iraq since
December 15, 1998.
As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a
provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed
November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the
Iraqi people,” of which at least $12 million was for the INC to distribute
humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million
was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million
could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive
assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC
distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000, the Clinton Administration
reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in
FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop an aid distribution plan
and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before
it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that
noted that any INC effort to distribute aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control
would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and
to any relief distributors with which the INC contracts.5
Bush Administration Policy
Bush Administration policy toward Iraq changed after the September 11 terrorist
attacks, even though no significant evidence linking Iraq to those attacks has come
to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in President
Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he characterized Iraq
as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea.
5 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.”
January 17, 2001.
CRS-11
Pre-September 11 Policy
Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic
elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus
within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow
strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq,
which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its
taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist
regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan: a modification of the U.N.
sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technology reaches Iraq. His plan
offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N.
restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military
technology.6
The Administration believed that the proposal, by easing the suffering of the
Iraqi people, would cause Iraq’s neighbors and other countries to cease unilateral
violations of the sanctions regime. Powell, who had openly expressed skepticism
about the opposition’s prospects, barely raised the regime change issue during his trip
or in his March 7, 2001, testimony before the House International Relations
Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.7 After about a year of
negotiations among the Security Council permanent members, the major feature of
the smart sanctions plan — new procedures that virtually eliminate U.N. review of
civilian exports to Iraq — was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Security Council
Resolution 1409).
Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime
change policy, many of the questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy
that had faced previous administrations were debated early in the Bush
Administration.8 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush
Administration said and did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first
year. During his confirmation hearings as Deputy Secretary of Defense, a reported
strong advocate of overthrow, Paul Wolfowitz, said that he did not yet see a
“plausible plan” for changing the regime. Like its predecessor, the Bush
Administration initially declined to provide the opposition with lethal aid, combat
training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the separate
State Department position of “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” further casting
doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy. On February 2, 2001, the Bush
Administration confirmed that, shortly after President Bush took office, the Treasury
Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted the INC a license to
proceed with information gathering inside Iraq only, and not actual distribution of
6 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food
Program.
7 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times,
March 2, 2001.
8 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh,
Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002.
CRS-12
humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the Administration amounted to a
withholding of U.S. backing for the INC plan to rebuild its presence inside Iraq.
Many in Congress, on the other hand, continued to support the INC as the
primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional
sentiment, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite
doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television
broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the
ESF aid appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an estimated
additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.9
Policy Post-September 11
Bush Administration policy toward Iraq became notably more assertive after the
September 11, 2001 attacks, stressing regime change far more than containment.
Almost immediately after the U.S.-led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in
Afghanistan began in early October 2001, speculation began building that the
Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use of military force
as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism. As noted above, in his January 29,
2002 State of the Union message, President Bush named Iraq as part of an “axis of
evil,” along with North Korea and Iran. Vice President Cheney visited the Middle
East in March 2002 to consult regional countries about the possibility of confronting
Iraq militarily, although the countries visited reportedly urged greater U.S. attention
to the Arab-Israeli dispute and opposed confrontation with Iraq.
The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for
confronting Iraq were (1) its alleged refusal to end its WMD programs, and (2) its ties
to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of conducting
a catastrophic attack on the United States. The Administration added that regime
change would have the further benefit of liberating the Iraqi people.
Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s
regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax
mailings, senior U.S. officials said in September 2002, and again in January and
February 2003, that there was evidence of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. Some outside
observers expressed skepticism about such connections because of the ideological
differences between Saddam Hussein’s secular regime and Al Qaeda’s Islamist
character. Secretary of States Powell, as noted above, cited intelligence information
that Ansar al-Islam (see above for the origins of the group) had links to Saddam
Hussein’s regime.10 Other senior officials cited intelligence information that Iraq
provided advice and training to Al Qaeda in the manufacture and use of chemical
weapons, although Administration information appears to date to the early 1990s
when Iraq, largely isolated after the first Gulf war, was politically close to Sudan. Al
Qaeda founder Osama Bin Laden was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996).
9 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001.
10 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002.
CRS-13
On the other hand, Baghdad did not control northern Iraq even before Operation
Iraqi Freedom, and some U.S. officials played down this theory.11 Others noted that
bin Laden sought to raise an Islamic army to fight Saddam’s invasion of Kuwait in
1990, arguing against the need for U.S. troops, and that he was more an enemy of
Saddam than a friend. In the Administration view, the two shared similar anti-U.S.
goals, which outweighed ideological differences and propelled them into tactical or
strategic cooperation. Those differences were evident in a February 12, 2003, bin
Laden statement referring to Saddam Hussein’s regime as socialist and infidel,
although the statement exhorted Iraq to resist impending U.S. military action.
WMD Threat Perception. In arguing for military action, U.S. officials
maintained that Iraq’s purported commitment to developing WMD — coupled with
its support for terrorist groups to which Iraq might transfer WMD — constituted an
unacceptable potential threat to the United States and that major U.S. military action
was justified if Iraq refused to disarm voluntarily. U.S. officials said the September
11, 2001 attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to
gather before acting, but must instead act preemptively or preventively. Senior U.S.
officials asserted a WMD threat as follows:
! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years
since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply
with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8,
2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs.
However, statements by U.N. weapons inspectors after inspections
resumed November 27, 2002 indicated they believed Iraq did not
have an active nuclear weapons program, and that inspections on
other weapons categories were making progress.
! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and
against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not
necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States
or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against
adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of
destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of
massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the
1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings and
did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war.
! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who
could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths
in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of this view cited
presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in late 2002,
stating the CIA view that Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to
terrorists if the United States were to attack Iraq. At that point,
according to that argument, Saddam Hussein would be left with little
incentive not to cooperate with terrorist groups capable of striking
11 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire,
March 18, 2002.
CRS-14
at U.S. interests. (No WMD was used against Iraq during Operation
Iraqi Freedom, although the Administration asserts that such
weapons will eventually be found in Iraq by the U.S.-led coalition.)
Broadening the Opposition. As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for
possible military action against Iraq, the Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi
opposition and build up its capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post
reported that, in early 2002, President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities
by the CIA and special operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early
August 2002, the State and Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition
groups — the INC, the INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM — to
Washington for meetings with senior officials, including a video link to Vice
President Cheney. The meetings were held to show unity within the opposition and
among different agencies of the U.S. government, which tended to favor different
opposition groups.
In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August
15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in ESF to the INC, funds
that had been held up due to differences between the State Department and the INC
over what activities would be funded. The $8 million was to be used to fund the
INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its offices in Washington, London,
Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate its Al Mutamar newspaper and
Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund the information gathering
portion of the INC’s activities; the State Department had refused to fund those
activities, which are conducted inside Iraq, because of strains between the INC and
other opposition groups and questions about INC use of U.S. funds.
In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and
to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic-
based groups. On December 9, 2002, the Bush Administration added six of the
factions discussed below (except the Higher Council for National Salvation) to the
list of “democratic opposition organizations” eligible to receive draw downs under
the ILA. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had
increasing contact include the following:
! Iraqi National Movement. It formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the
INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib
(who was part of an early leadership body of the INC); Hatim
Mukhlis, who claimed support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan; and
ex-senior military officer Khalid al-Ubaydi.
! Iraqi National Front. Another grouping of ex-military officers,
founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite
Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and
participated and was wounded in the anti-Saddam uprisings
immediately following the 1991 Gulf war.
! Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement. Established in 1996 by
ex-military officer Najib al-Salhi. This group worked closely with
CRS-15
the INC. Salhi defected in 1995 after serving as commander of
several tank units in the Republican Guard and regular military.
! Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was
formally established on August 1, 2002. It is headed by Wafiq al-
Samarra’i, a former head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of
staff of Iraq’s military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was
based in Denmark since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member.
Khazraji was placed under travel restrictions by Danish officials in
late November 2002 after saying he wanted to leave Denmark. He
is under investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of
chemical weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities
said on March 17, 2003 that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his
home there, raising questions about whether he is defying the travel
restrictions placed on him. A press report on April 7, 2003, said he
went to Kuwait, possibly to play a part in a post-Saddam regime
there,12 although his current whereabouts are unknown.
! Iraqi Turkmen Front. A small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping,
generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq.
Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq.
! The Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another
Shiite Islamic Party, but it is considered substantially less pro-
Iranian than SCIRI or the Da’wa Party (see above). The Islamic
Accord is headed by Jamil Wakil. Many Accord members are
followers of Ayatollah Shirazi, an Iranian cleric who was the
spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation
of Bahrain (IFLB), which allegedly attempted to overthrow the
government of Bahrain in the early 1980s.
! The Assyrian Democratic Movement, an ethnic-based movement
headed by Secretary-General Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s
Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq. There is a
strong diaspora presence in the United States as well. After building
ties to this group over the past year, the Bush Administration
formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement
into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002.
The Bush Administration applauded efforts over the past year by these groups
to hold meetings to coordinate with each other and with the INC and other groups.
One such meeting, in July 2002 in London and jointly run with the INC, attracted
over 70 ex-military officers. However, since the regime vacated Baghdad on April
9, 2003, none of the groups listed above has openly sought a major role in post-
Saddam Iraq, and the whereabouts of many of their leaders are not known.
12 ‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper. Agence France Press, April 7, 2003.
CRS-16
Second ILA Designations. As the decision whether to launch military
action approached, on December 9, 2002, President Bush issued a determination to
draw down the remaining $92 million in defense articles and services authorized
under the Iraq Liberation Act for the INA, the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and
the MCM “and to such other Iraqi opposition groups designated by me under the Act
before or after this determination.” This latter phrase suggested that some of the
draw downs would go to the six groups designated above as eligible to receive ILA
draw downs. The announcement appeared to be part of reported plan to train about
5,000 oppositionists in tasks that could assist U.S. forces, possibly including combat
units.13 An initial group of 3,000 was selected, but only about 70 oppositionists
completed training at an air base (Taszar) in Hungary, according to press reports.14
These oppositionists served with U.S. forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom as
translators and mediators between U.S. forces and local leaders.
As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began
planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002,
with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in
London. In advance of the meeting, the Bush Administration appointed NSC official
Zalmay Khalilzad to be a liaison to the Iraqi opposition. The conference was
organized by the same six groups whose leaders visited Washington in August 2002,
but included other groups as well, and they discussed whether the opposition should
declare a provisional government. The Administration opposed that step on the
grounds that it was premature and would give the impression that outside powers are
determining Iraq’s political structure.
The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65-member follow-up committee,
which some criticized as weighted heavily toward Shiite Islamist groups such as
SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24-27, 2003 in northern Iraq.
Against the urging of U.S. representatives at the meeting, the opposition agreed to
form a six man committee that would prepare for a transition regime, although it
stopped short of declaring a provisional government. The six included PUK leader
Jalal Talabani, KDP leader Masud Barzani, SCIRI leader Mohammad Baqr Al
Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Iyad Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign minister Adnan
Pachachi. Iran allowed Iraqi oppositionists to cross from Iran into northern Iraq to
hold that session.
Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the
new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete
disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if Iraq wanted to avert military action. The
Administration had been downplaying the goal of regime change after President
Bush’s September 12, 2002 speech before the United Nations General Assembly, in
which he focused on enforcing U.N. resolutions that require Iraqi disarmament.
However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change goal after
February 2002 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course. In the
13 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.”
Washington Post, October 19, 2002.
14 Williams, Daniel. U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles. Washington Post, December
18, 2002.
CRS-17
Administration view, a friendly government in Baghdad was required if the
international community is to rid Iraq of WMD and links to terrorist groups.
The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March breakdown of
U.N. diplomacy over whether the U.N. Security Council should authorize war against
Iraq for failing to comply with Resolution 1441. The diplomatic breakdown followed
several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by the director of the U.N. inspection
body UNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification, and Inspection Commission) Hans
Blix and the director of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), most
recently on March 7, 2003. The briefings were generally critical of Iraq for failing
to pro-actively cooperate to clear up outstanding questions about Iraq’s WMD
program, but the latter two briefings (February 24 and March 7) noted progress in
clearing up outstanding WMD questions.
Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and
Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that
inspections should be given more time. They noted that Iraq was well contained by
sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones. Those who agreed with this
view maintained that, as long as Iraq allowed access to U.N. weapons inspections
under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national
security. Inspections encountered few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700
inspections of about 400 different sites, as of mid-March 2003. Others experts
believed that, even if Iraq were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could
have been deterred by U.S. overall strategic superiority, presumably including the
U.S. nuclear arsenal.
The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq
had not fundamentally decided to disarm, and was attempting to preserve WMD
capabilities. The Administration asserted on March 17, 2003, that diplomatic options
to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full attention to military action.
That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and his sons, Uday and Qusay,
an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war. They refused the
ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003.
In the war, Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and
British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the regime, at times, put up stiff
resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi military commanders or
Baathist political figures came forward to try to establish a post-Saddam government,
but senior regime leaders fled Baghdad, and the whereabouts of many of them, as
well as the fate of Saddam Hussein, are unknown. The intensity of any post-war
debate on the outcome of the war might depend on such factors as the pace of
reconstruction; the degree of resistance, if any, to a U.S. and British occupation; the
amount of WMD found, if any, and whether a new government is democratic.
CRS-18
Post-War Governance Issues
After the fall of Saddam Hussein’s regime on April 9, there is increasing debate
about governing post-war Iraq. The same U.S. concerns about fragmentation of and
instability in Iraq that existed in prior years are present in the current debate over
how to establish a post-war interim regime. Although some Iraqi civilians have
welcomed U.S. and British troops in areas captured, many Iraqis now want U.S. and
British forces to leave Iraq. Some believe that U.S. occupation forces might face
increasing guerrilla attacks from remnants of the Iraqi regime or others opposed to
the U.S. presence; others say U.S. forces might become caught in the crossfire among
ethnic and political factions that might fight each other for power in post-war Iraq.
Other experts fear that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall under control of SCIRI and
other Shiite Islamist forces who, as noted above, are well organized and are asserting
growing control over areas inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites. Shiites constitute about 60%
of Iraq’s population but have traditionally been under-represented in Iraq’s Sunni
Muslim-dominated government.
Establishing an Iraqi Interim Administration. The Administration
asserts that it will do what is necessary to bring about a stable, democratic successor
regime that complies with all applicable U.N. resolutions. In press interviews on
April 6, 2003, Deputy Secretary of Defense Paul Wolfowitz indicated that the
Administration is hoping to turn post-war governance over to an Iraqi interim
administration within six months. The Iraqi opposition to Saddam Hussein, even
those groups that have most closely associated with the United States, generally
opposes a long-term role for U.S. officials in running a post-war Iraqi government.
The opposition groups assert that Iraqis are sufficiently competent and unified to
rebuild Iraq after a war with the United States. The Iraqi National Congress, in
particular, has complained that the Administration is handing too much power to
former Baathists, who are skilled organizers but who might harbor ambitions of
reconstituting Saddam Hussein’s regime.
To begin the process of establishing a successor regime, the Administration
organized an April 15 meeting, in Nasiriyah, of about 100 Iraqis of varying
ideologies, present by U.S. invitation. Many of the attendees were representatives
of Iraqi tribal groupings that had not been politically active before. However, SCIRI,
along with several Shiite clerics that have appropriated authority throughout much
of southern Iraq since the fall of the regime, boycotted the meeting and called for an
Islamic state and the withdrawal of U.S. forces. Another meeting of about 250
delegates was held in Baghdad on April 26, which ended in agreement to hold a
broader meeting, within a month, to name an interim Iraqi administration. Existing
U.S. plans are for the interim administration to serve for about two years, after which
a constitution would be adopted and national elections held.
In parallel with the late April meeting in Baghdad, the five most prominent
opposition groups met, with U.S. envoys present. The five groups that met are
SCIRI, the INC, the INA, the PUK, and the KDP. This grouping could, according
to many experts, become the core of an interim leadership council. At another
meeting on May 9, the five agreed to expand their grouping to seven, adding to their
ranks a little known Nasir al-Chadirchy of a party called the National Democratic
CRS-19
Party of Iraq, and the Da’wa Party. These meetings indicate that, despite their
statements opposing the U.S. occupation, some Shiite Islamists are, for now,
cooperating with the U.S.-led process for selecting a new government, perhaps to
send a signal that they do not necessarily want confrontation with the United States.
At the same time, U.S. officials have warned that they will not permit the
establishment of a Shiite Islamist theocracy modeled after that of Iran, although some
doubt the amount of leverage the United States might have to prevent that outcome.
As part of the planning process that took place before the war, the U.S. State
Department and the Defense Department supported groups of Iraqi exiles to address
issues that confront a successor government.15 It is not yet known what influence, if
any, these working groups are having on any post-war regime decision-making in
Iraq. The U.S. State Department project, which cost $5 million, consisted of
working groups that discussed (1) transitional justice; (2) public finance; (3) public
and media outreach; (4) democratic principles; (5) water, agriculture, and the
environment; (6) health and human services; (7) economy and infrastructure; (8)
education; (9) refugees, internally-displaced persons, and migration policy; (10)
foreign and national security policy; (11) defense institutions and policy; (12) free
media; (13) civil society capacity-building; (14) anti-corruption measures; and (15)
oil and energy.
Post-War U.S. Operations in Iraq. Experts note that projections about
U.S. operations in post-war Iraq, including the duration of the U.S. military
occupation and the numbers of occupation troops, were largely dependent on the
amount of Iraqi resistance, if any, the number of U.S. casualties taken, and the speed
with which a successor regime is chosen. At present, about 135,000 U.S. and British
troops remain in Iraq. Press reports say the Administration wants to draw the U.S.
force level down to about 35,000 by the end of 2003, and the United States is
discussing with other countries pledges and mechanisms for a peacekeeping role that
might share the burden of post-war security in Iraq (see below).
The Bush Administration initially tasked Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) to direct
civilian reconstruction, working through a staff of U.S. diplomats and other U.S.
government personnel who will serve as advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various
ministries. He heads the Office of Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance,
within the Department of Defense, created by a January 20, 2003 executive order.
After spending the combat phase of the war in neighboring Kuwait, Garner and some
of his staff of about 200 deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003, to begin work.
Former Ambassador to Yemen Barbara Bodine is responsible for a “central” region;
and retired generals Buck Walters and Bruce Moore are responsible for “southern”
and “northern” regions, respectively. During the occupation period, the United States
goals are to eliminate remaining WMD and terrorist cells in Iraq, begin economic
reconstruction, and purge Baath Party leaders. On May 6, 2003, the Administration
appointed former ambassador L. Paul Bremer to lead the overall reconstruction
effort, with a focus on political reconstruction. The appointment represented an
apparent adjustment from the original structure of the U.S. reconstruction effort,
15 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,”
Washington File, December 11, 2002.
CRS-20
although the Administration stated that it was always envisioned that a civilian
would eventually take over the U.S. effort.
Recruiting Other Peacekeepers.16 As of early May, organizing proceeds
for a multinational peacekeeping force in Iraq, which has yet to be named.
According to several news reports, the United States, the United Kingdom, and
Poland will each head up a peacekeeping presence in one of three Iraqi sectors.
(Some reports indicate that a fourth sector may be created.) Under current plans, the
U.S. force is to be headquartered in Baghdad, the U.K. force in Basra, and the Polish
force in a yet to be determined location. (According to one news report, the United
States has agreed to seek international donations to cover the estimated $90 million
cost to Poland of deploying 1,500 troops for its headquarters. The United States
reportedly will station some 20,000 in its sector. The British defense ministry
anticipates that some 35,000 British forces will remain in Iraq through the summer
and that some 10,000 British troops will remain as the British commitment for
perhaps one to two years.) The force is to deploy at the end of May, according to a
report quoting the Polish defense minister, although the commitments of several
nations appear to be dependent on whether the U.N. Security Council authorizes such
a force.
Albania, Bulgaria, Denmark, Italy, the Netherlands, Spain, and the Ukraine have
thus far agreed to contribute troops to the force, although few numbers have yet been
reported. Spain has agreed to send up to 1,500 troops, although they will be barred
from any combat missions. On May 7, Azerbaijan’s parliament approved the
deployment of 150 peacekeepers to Iraq. Pledges were announced shortly after the
“Interim Coalition Stability Operations Conference” of 16 nations, held in London
on April 30, 2003, and hosted by the British Minister of Defence, Geoff Hoon. (A
follow-up meeting is to be held in London on May 8.) Other nations — Estonia,
Lithuania, Japan, and Romania — have previously expressed interest in contributing,
but their names did not appear on the current list. Australia, which had contributed
troops for the combat phase of the Iraq war, reportedly will send a detachment of 75
soldiers to protect its Embassy in Baghdad but will not contribute troops to the
peacekeeping force, although it may provide some assistance. The Philippines,
Qatar, and South Korea reportedly will provide assistance.
The United States has urged NATO to take on Iraq as a fifth peacekeeping
mission, but thus far, NATO has only informally discussed the U.S. proposal.
Reportedly, French president Jacques Chirac has said that formal consideration
requires an authorizing resolution from the U.N. Security Council. Neither France
nor Germany has agreed to participate outside of a NATO framework.
U.N. Role. The United States and its European allies and other countries are
discussing, although without yet reaching agreement on, a possible U.N. role in post-
war Iraq. The debate over a U.N. role has revived differences that appeared over the
decision to go to war against Iraq; some of the countries that opposed the war have
objected to aspects of any U.N. resolution that they believe might legitimize a U.S.-
British occupation. Prior to the war, most European countries, including U.S.
16 This section provided by Nina Serafino, Specialist in International Affairs.
CRS-21
coalition partner Britain, believed that the Iraqi people would more easily adjust to
a U.N.- administered post-war Iraq than one administered primarily by the United
States and Britain. Senior U.S. officials, with the reported exception of Secretary of
State Powell, have wanted to keep the U.N. role limited to humanitarian relief and
economic reconstruction, reserving most decisions about a post-war Iraqi power
structure to the United States and Britain. However, in an effort to draw support to
a draft U.N. resolution that would lift U.N. sanctions, the U.S. draft, as circulated on
May 9, would give the United Nations some role in helping establish an Iraqi interim
government. In early April, Secretary-General Annan appointed an aide, Pakistani
diplomat Rafeuddin Ahmed, to advise him on U.N. operations in Iraq.
Reviving the Oil Industry. As the driver of Iraq’s economy, the rebuilding
of the oil industry is receiving substantial U.S. attention. It has been widely assumed
that Iraq’s vast oil reserves, believed second only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be
used to fund much of the costs of reconstruction. Presidential spokesman Ari
Fleischer said on February 18, 2003, referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a
variety of means ... to shoulder much of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.”
Many observers had been concerned that an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could
destroy its own oil fields, but coalition forces quickly secured Iraq’s southern oil
fields since combat began on March 19, 2003. Only about 9 oil wells were set on
fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that region, and all have now been put out.
The northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul were not set afire. In early May 2003,
the U.S.-led coalition set up an advisory board, headed by former Shell executive
Phillip Carroll, to oversee the rebuilding of Iraq’s oil sector. An Iraqi oil industry
professional, Thamer Ghadhban, was named to serve as head of the interim
management team that will run Iraq’s oil ministry and report to the advisory board..
Some oil production is reported to have resumed as of April 23, although not yet
enough to allow for export. The legal issues surrounding Iraq’s export of oil —
particularly the lack of a duly constituted Iraqi authority that can legally sell oil on
the world market — remain unresolved.
A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which
foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s
vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will
seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other
countries.
Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have
been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program.
The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put
in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was
suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various
aspects of the program departed Iraq. As of March 14, 2003, about $9 billion worth
of humanitarian goods were in the process of being delivered or in production. (See
CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.)
On March 28, 2003, the U.N. Security Council unanimously adopted Resolution
1472 that restarted the program’s operations and empowered the United Nations, for
a 45-day period (until May 12), to take direct control of all aspects of the program.
Under the new resolution, the United Nations is setting priorities for and directing the
CRS-22
delivery of already contracted supplies. The Bush Administration had envisioned
that a post-war Iraqi interim administration will reassume those functions from U.N.
staff when an interim administration is in place and able to perform these duties. The
enhanced U.N. authority was extended on April 25, 2003, to last at least until the
current six-month phase of the program expires on June 3, 2003. The program must
be renewed by U.N. Security Council resolution if it is to be continued.
On April 17, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions against
Iraq, suggesting the Administration wants to focus on restoring normal international
commerce with Iraq rather than extending the oil-for-food program. A draft U.N.
Security Council resolution lifting most U.N. sanctions was circulated on May 9.
Statements by France, Russia, and China during April indicated these governments
might go along with ending U.N. sanctions against Iraq if the United States shows
flexibility on allowing a greater U.N. role in post-war Iraq, but it is not clear whether
the U.S. draft resolution satisfies that demand. France and Russia said that U.N.
weapons inspectors should be allowed back in Iraq to oversee the search for weapons
of mass destruction (WMD), and they appeared to link their approval for ending
sanctions to U.S. agreement on this issue. The United States has said that it and
Britain are performing the WMD search now that the Iraqi regime has fallen and it
opposes a return of the inspectors, although some press reports in early May said the
United States might allow nuclear inspectors from the International Atomic Energy
Agency back into Iraq to resume work. The draft U.N. Security Council resolution
circulated May 9, referenced above, does not provide for a return of U.N. weapons
inspectors.
War Crimes. An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is
whether Saddam Hussein and his associates should be prosecuted for war crimes and
crimes against humanity, if and when they are caught. The Administration said in
early April 2003 that Saddam and his inner circle should be tried by Iraqis if they are
captured, although others might be tried by a U.S.-led process for any crimes
committed in the course of the 2003 war. Over the past year, the Administration had
been gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those
it had sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay; Ali Hassan al-
Majid, for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (he was reported by British
officers to have died in an early April air strike on his home in Basra); Muhammad
Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered in mid April 2003); Taha Yasin Ramadan; first Vice
President and number three in the regime; Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the
Revolutionary Command Council and formally number two in the regime; Barzan
al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother (captured in mid April 2003); Watban al-Tikriti
(captured in April 2003) and Sabawi al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam
and former leaders of regime intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputy Prime Minister
and foremost regime spokesman; and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait during
Iraq’s occupation of that country.
Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials
sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured
or surrendered. Among them are Amir al-Saadi, chief science adviser to Saddam;
Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti, a son-in-law of Saddam; Vice President Taha Muhi ad-Din
Ma’ruf; and suspected WMD manager Hoda Mahdi Salih al-Ammash .
CRS-23
The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and
the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29,
1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related
atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for
FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress
that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal
for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137
(passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March
13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October
31, 1998).
A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993,
after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the Administration has supported
INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the
arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the
Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer,
said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established,
focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical
weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds)
and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which
an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against
Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes
against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations.
In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a
U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war
crimes is formed.
Congressional Reactions
Congress, like the Administration, appears to have had divergent views on the
mechanisms for promoting regime change, although there appears to be widespread
agreement in Congress that regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S.
policy. However, there was substantial disagreement over whether a major military
offensive was the most desirable option for achieving that objective. On December
20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75, by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal
to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a “mounting threat” to the United States. The
resolution did not call for new U.S. steps to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few
Members called for the overthrow of Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in
support of the resolution.
In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq,
some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint
appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on
Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations
Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the
opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an
option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In
early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members — Senators John
McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and
Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr.
CRS-24
— wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for
operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter,
Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S.
assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish
areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and
other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to
accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.”
As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002,
Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result.
Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force
against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce
U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on
October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote
of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243).
The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. It has held some hearings
on issues of post-war reconstruction and the effects of a war on the Middle East
region as a whole, as well as the likely costs of the fighting and reconstruction. Some
Members made floor statements and given speeches and press conferences to state
their views on whether force should be used to obtain Iraq’s disarmament.
During the war and in its aftermath, several Members applauded the
performance of the U.S. military and the overthrow of the regime. Some Members,
however, have criticized the Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war
period in light of major looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the
regime. Some Members have said they believe that the formation of an Islamic state
led by Iraq’s Shiite community would be inconsistent with U.S. goals for Iraq.
CRS-25
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition
Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.)
to the Opposition
(Figures in millions of dollars)
INC War
Crimes Broadcasting
Unspecified
Opposition
Activities
Total
FY 1998
(P.L. 105-174)
2.0 5.0
(RFE/RL)
3.0 10.0
FY 1999
(P.L. 105-277)
3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0
FY 2000
(P.L. 106-113)
2.0 8.0 10.0
FY 2001
(P.L. 106-429)
12.0
(aid
distribution
inside Iraq)
2.0 6.0
(INC radio)
5.0 25.0
FY 2002
(P.L. 107-115)
25.0 25.0
Total,
FY1998- FY 2002
15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0
FY2003
(no earmark)
3.1
(announced
April, 2003 )
6.9 (remaining
to be
allocated)
10.0
FY2004
(request)
0 0
Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq
Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97
million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent,
as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided,
the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and
FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be
used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N.
programs.
Another version (English): 23 April 2003 — RL31339_2003-04-23.pdf
Order Code RL31339
Report for Congress
Received through the CRS Web
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
Updated April 23, 2003
Kenneth Katzman
Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs
Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division
Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
Summary
In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized
Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to abandon
its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs as required by U.N. Security
Council resolutions and the potential for it to transfer WMD to terrorist groups.
Since September 2002, the President has said that unless Iraq fully disarms in
cooperation with United Nations weapons inspectors, the United States would lead
a coalition to achieve that disarmament militarily. U.S. officials have made clear that
this would include the ouster of Iraq’s President Saddam Hussein’s regime. On
March 17, 2003, the United States launched “Operation Iraqi Freedom,” a war effort
to disarm Iraq and change its regime. The regime fell on April 9.
In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change
through U.S.-led military action would yield benefits beyond disarmament, including
liberation from an oppressive regime for the Iraqi people and enhancement of the
prospects for peace and democracy throughout the Middle East. The goal of regime
change in Iraq had been declared U.S. policy since November 1998. Even before
then, U.S. efforts to oust Saddam had been pursued, with varying degrees of
intensity, since the end of the Gulf war in 1991. These efforts primarily involved
U.S. backing for opposition groups inside and outside Iraq, some of which received
U.S. political and financial support and military training. Several of the groups
backed by the United States are now contending for power in post-Saddam Iraq. Past
efforts to change the regime floundered because of limited U.S. commitment,
disorganization of the Iraqi opposition, and the efficiency and ruthlessness of Iraq’s
several overlapping intelligence and security forces. Previous U.S. administrations
ruled out major U.S. military action to change Iraq’s regime, believing such action
would be costly, risky, and not necessarily justified by the level of Iraq’s lack of
compliance on WMD disarmament.
The character of the government that would replace Saddam Hussein’s Baath
Party, and the exact process by which that government will be chosen, are yet to be
determined. Some Administration officials reportedly had hoped that major military
and governmental defections from the Hussein regime would serve as the core of a
successor government. However, no senior Hussein regime figures defected, and the
Bush Administration is expecting established opposition groups and emerging local
leaders to form the core of a new regime. Some of the pre-existing disputes and
schisms among the various anti-Hussein groups are already beginning to break out
into a post-war power struggle, and there is a debate among Iraqi groups over how
great a role the United States should play in the process of choosing a successor
government.
This report will be updated as warranted by major developments.
Contents
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
An Opposition Coalition Emerges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Ansar al-Islam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Sadr Clan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Ayatollah Sistani . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
The Fragmentation of the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Rebuilding an Opposition Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
The First Eligibility Designations Under the ILA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Continued Debate Over Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Policy Post-September 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Broadening the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Assessments of the War . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Post-War Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Establishing an Iraqi Interim Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
U.S.-Led Post-War Operations in Iraq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Reconstruction and Oil Industry Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
War Crimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Congressional Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Governance
The United States has been attempting to change Iraq’s regime since the 1991
Persian Gulf war, although achieving this goal was not declared policy until 1998.
In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass destruction
(WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United States would
seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A regime change
policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, October 31, 1998).
Bush Administration officials have emphasized regime change as the cornerstone of
U.S. policy toward Iraq since shortly after the September 11, 2001, attacks, well
before the launch of Operation Iraqi Freedom on March 17, 2003.
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam
Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an
operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George
H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end
of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and
Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope
of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions.1 The revolt in southern Iraq reached
the suburbs of Baghdad, but the well-trained and loyal Republican Guard forces had
survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from battle prior to the U.S.
ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid-March 1991. Many Shiites
blamed the United States for not supporting their uprising and standing aside as the
regime retaliated against those who participated in the rebellion. Kurds, benefitting
from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991, were able to drive Iraqi
troops out of much of northern Iraq and establish an autonomous zone there and
subsequently remained largely free of Baghdad’s rule.
According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite
uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding
stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup
against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that
purpose.2 The Administration apparently believed – and this view apparently still is
shared by many experts and U.S. officials – that a coup by elements within the
1 Shiites constitute about 65% of Iraq’s population but historically have been repressed and
under-represented in governing bodies by the members of the Sunni Muslim sect. Kurds,
who are not Arabs, constitute about 20% of the population of about 20 million.
2 Tyler, Patrick. “Plan On Iraq Coup Told to Congress.” New York Times, Feb. 9, 1992.
CRS-2
current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq.
Many observers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and
Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and
tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria.
An Opposition Coalition Emerges
Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that
the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment
within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision
was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the
diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the
Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and
diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This
opposition coalition seemed to provide a vehicle for the United States to build a
viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert
support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.3
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi
The growing opposition coalition took concrete shape in an organization called
the Iraqi National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two
main Kurdish militias — the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic
Union of Kurdistan (PUK) — participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of
dozens of opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came
into the coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq.
The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi
ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military
officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC
with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups
publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests,
including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the
preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. Security Council
resolutions on Iraq.4 However, many observers doubted its commitment to
democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and
because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies.
Ahmad Chalabi. Selected to chair the INC’s Executive Committee was
Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 58 years old, a secular Shiite Muslim from a prominent
banking family. He was educated in the United States as a mathematician. He fled
Iraq to Jordan in 1958, when the Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military
3 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2,
1992.
4 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by
INC representatives, February 1993.
CRS-3
coup. This coup occurred 10 years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July
1968). In 1978, he founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian
authorities on charges of financial malfeasance (alleged embezzlement or, according
to some reports, facilitating loans to associates), and he left Jordan, possibly with
some help from members of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989. The Jordanian
government subsequently recapitalized the bank with national funds. Chalabi
maintains that the Jordanian government was pressured by Iraq to turn against him,
and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to the Jordanian government. His critics
acknowledge that, despite allegations about his methods, he has been single-minded
in his determination to overthrow Saddam Hussein, and he is said to be the favorite
of those Administration officials, particularly in the Department of Defense, that
were the most supportive of changing Iraq’s regime by force.
Chalabi does not appear to have a large following inside Iraq, although since his
return he appears to be attracting support from those Iraqis that most welcomed the
U.S. military offensive against Iraq as liberation from Saddam Hussein’s regime. On
April 6, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters (“Free Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by
the U.S. military from their base in the north to the Nasiriya area, purportedly to help
stabilize civil affairs in southern Iraq. Chalabi and some Free Iraqi Forces later
deployed to Baghdad and other parts of Iraq. Some of the Free Iraqi Forces are
believed to be Shiite Muslims who may retain loyalties to various Shiite Islamist
groups that may be competing with Chalabi for power in post-war Iraq.
A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book
“Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq,” detailing alleged Iraqi regime
human rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracy for Iraq, including
full rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he teaches
Middle Eastern politics at Brandeis University. Another INC activist, Mohammad
al-Zubaidi, declared himself in charge of Baghdad in mid-April, but U.S. officials say
they did not appoint him and do not recognize him as mayor or governor of Baghdad.
Some press reports say that he is more a rival of Chalabi than an ally.
The Kurds/KDP and PUK. In committing to the concept of federalism, the
INC platform assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq,
although some fear the Kurds might still seek outright independence. Turkey, which
has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly
fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into
a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy
since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War
I. (Iraq became an independent Kingdom in 1932, although it remained under British
influence until the 1958 fall of the British-installed monarchy.) In 1961, the KDP,
then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP leader Masud Barzani’s
father, began an insurgency that has continued until today, although interrupted by
periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud Barzani’s brother, Idris,
commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the Iran-Iraq war but was killed in
that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from the KDP in 1965; the
PUK’s members are generally more educated, urbane, and left-leaning than those of
the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000-60,000 fighters, some of
which are said to be increasingly well-trained in conventional military tactics.
CRS-4
Ansar al-Islam. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties enjoyed
good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement of Iraqi
Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaykh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in Halabja,
Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical attack on
that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998.
A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam
(Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam).
This faction, led by Mullah Krekar (who was detained in Europe in August 2002 and
now lives in Norway), reportedly is associated with Al Qaeda and hosted in its
northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters who fled the U.S.-led war in Afghanistan.
The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials to
be Abu Musab Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in
Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the
millenium celebration, as well as to recent attempts to spread the biological agent
ricin in London and possibly other places in Europe. Prior to Operation Iraqi
Freedom, during which its base has been captured, about 8,000 people were in the
Ansar al-Islam enclave, located near the town of Khurmal. This included about 600
fighters.5 Mullah Krekar reportedly studied under Shaykh Abdullah al-Azzam, an
Islamic theologian of Palestinian origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama bin
Laden. Fighters of Ansar al-Islam clashed with the PUK around Halabja in
December 2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedly responsible for an assassination
attempt against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002. In a presentation
to the U.N. Security Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied
Zarqawi and Ansar al-Islam to the Iraqi regime, which might have viewed Ansar al-
Islam as a means of pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents. Many experts
believed Baghdad-Ansar links were tenuous or even non-existent.
Shiite Islamist Organizations
Some outside experts have had concerns about the potential strength and
ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups in post-
Saddam Iraq.
SCIRI/Badr Corps. The most well known among these is called the Supreme
Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member of the INC
in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC banner.
SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition groups
in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad Baqr al-
Hakim, was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head an Islamic Republic of
Iraq, a vision that, if realized, might conflict with U.S. plans to forge a democratic
Iraq. Baqr Hakim and his family fled Iraq to Iran in 1980, during a major crackdown
on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam feared that Iraqi Shiite
Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution in Iran in 1979, posed
a major threat to his regime. Prior to the formation of SCIRI, Hakim and his family
were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party (see below). Mohammad Baqr is the
5 Chivers, C.J. New York Times, December 6, 2002.
Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.”
CRS-5
son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a prominent Shiite leader in
southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini when Khomeini was in exile
in southern Iraq during 1964-1978.
In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about
5,000 fighters organized into a “Badr Corps” (named after a major battle in early
Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from Iran into southern
Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. The Badr Corps is headed by Mohammad
Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim, who returned to Iraq on April 20,
2003, to pave the way for Mohammad Baqr’s return. (Another Hakim brother,
Mahdi, was killed in Sudan in May 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s security
services.) Iran’s Revolutionary Guard — which is politically aligned with Iran’s hard
line civilian officials — has been the key patron of the Badr Corps, providing it with
weapons, funds, and other assistance. The Badr Corps fought alongside the Guard
against Iraqi forces during the Iran-Iraq war. However, many Iraqi Shiites view
SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr Corps operations in southern Iraq prior
to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark broad popular unrest against the Iraqi
regime.
Some Badr fighters deployed inside northern Iraq on the eve of Operation Iraqi
Freedom, and the New York Times reported on April 23, 2003, that Badr activists are
infiltrating into Iraq to build support for SCIRI. Until August 2002 when Abd al-
Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures for meetings in Washington, it had
publicly refused to work openly with the United States or accept U.S. assistance.
Since the start of Operation Iraqi Freedom, SCIRI leaders have been increasingly
critical of what they call an illegitimate U.S. occupation of Iraq, and they have
refused to join a U.S.-led process to establish an interim post-Saddam government.
Unlike some other Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI has had good working relations with
some Sunni oppositionists and the Kurds.
Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, perhaps Iraq’s oldest Shiite Islamist grouping,
continues to exist as a separate group, but it appears to be allied with SCIRI. The
party was founded in 1957 by a revered Iraqi Shiite cleric, Ayatollah Mohammad
Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of Ayatollah Khomeini. Baqr Al Sadr was
hung by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the Da’wa’s alleged responsibility in fomenting
Shiite anti-regime unrest following Iran’s 1979 Islamic revolution. That unrest
included an attempted assassination of senior Iraqi leader Tariq Aziz. Its main
spokesman is Ibrahim al-Jafari. The Da’wa allegedly was responsible for a May
1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks
on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. Members of the Hizballah organization
in Lebanon that held U.S. hostages in that country during the 1980s often linked
release of the Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party prisoners held by Kuwait
for those offenses. Hizballah’s founders were followers of Ayatollah Khomeini and
Da’wa Party leaders such as Mohammad Baqr Al Sadr.
Sadr Clan. Members of the clan of the late Ayatollah Mohammad Baqr Al
Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq. Another revered member of
the clan, Mohammad Sadiq Al Sadr, and two of his sons, was killed by Saddam’s
security forces in 1999. Another son, Moqtada al-Sadr, who is about 30 years old,
has attempted to rally his followers to attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite
CRS-6
politics. He and his clan apparently have a large following in the Shiite
neighborhoods of Baghdad, which, after the fall of the regime on April 9, renamed
their district “Sadr City,” from the former name of “Saddam City.” However, he is
viewed by Iran and many Iraqi Shiites as a young radical who lacks religious and
political weight. His reputation may have been tarnished in early April when
Moqtada al Sadr reportedly killed Abd al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand
Ayatollah Khoi, shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al-Majid
Khoi headed the Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq after
U.S.-led forces took Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political
doctrines of Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran.
Ayatollah Sistani. Both the Sadr grouping and SCIRI are reportedly vying
for the backing of the revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al-Sistani, based in Najaf. Now
free of a long house arrest at the hands of Baghdad, he has a large following
throughout the Shiite portions of Iraq. Moqtada al-Sadr and his followers reportedly
are trying to intimidate Sistani by surrounding his office in Najaf with armed
gunmen, a tactic that many experts say will likely lead Sistani to ally with the Hakims
in any intra-Shiite power struggle. Sistani, who is said to be of Iranian ethnicity, is
considered to be in the tradition of Ayatollah Khoi in opposing a direct role for
clerics in governmental affairs.
Islamic Amal. SCIRI has been allied with another Shiite Islamist organization
called the Islamic Amal (Action) Organization. It is headed by Mohammad Taqi
Modarassi. Islamic Amal conducted attacks against Saddam Hussein’s regime in the
1980s, although it does not appear to have a following nearly as large as SCIRI or the
other Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s brother, Abd al-Hadi, headed the Islamic
Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, which tried to stir up Shiite unrest against the
Bahrain regime in the 1980s and 1990s (see below).
The Fragmentation of the Opposition
The differences among the opposition led the near collapse of the U.S. regime
change effort the mid-1990s. In May 1994, the KDP and the PUK began clashing
with each other over territory, customs revenues levied at border with Turkey, and
control over the Kurdish enclave’s government based in Irbil. The PUK lined up
support from Iran while the KDP sought and received countervailing backing from
its erstwhile nemesis, the Baghdad government. The infighting contributed to the
defeat of an INC offensive against Iraqi troops in March 1995; the KDP pulled out
of the offensive at the last minute. Although it was repelled, the offensive did
initially overrun some of the less well-trained and poorly motivated Iraqi units on the
front lines facing the Kurds. Some INC leaders point to the battle as an indication
that the INC could have succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. military help, had
it been given additional resources and training in the 1990s.
The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition caused
the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by renewing ties to a non-INC
CRS-7
group, Iraq National Accord (INA).6 The INA, originally founded in 1990 with Saudi
support, consists of military and security defectors who were perceived as having ties
to disgruntled officials currently serving within their former organizations. It is
headed by Dr. Iyad Alawi, former president of the Iraqi Student Union in Europe and
a physician by training. The INA’s prospects appeared to brighten in August 1995
when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al-Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons
of mass destruction programs — defected to Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip
on the military and security services was weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed
to allow the INA to operate from there. The INA became penetrated by Iraq’s
intelligence services and, in June 1996, Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by
arresting or executing over 100 INA sympathizers in the military.
Iraq’s counteroffensive against the opposition was completed two months after
the arrests of the INA sympathizers. In late August 1996, the KDP asked Baghdad
to provide armed support for its capture of Irbil from the rival PUK. Iraq took
advantage of the request to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in
northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout northern Iraq.
In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred
oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated
from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists,
mostly from the INC.
Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA continued to
operate throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt itself to some extent since the
June 1996 arrests. However, it does not appear to have a large following in the Iraqi
regime and did not announce any key defections from the regime during Operation
Iraqi Freedom, nor has it since found or captured any former regime leaders.
Although it has was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war,
there is a history of friction between the two groups; the INA reportedly bombed an
INC facility in northern Iraq in October 1995.
Rebuilding an Opposition Strategy
For the two years following the opposition’s 1996 setbacks, the Clinton
Administration had little contact with the opposition. In those two years, the INC,
INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations and their
ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998, then
Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations
subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations”
about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish.
Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections
during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam
Hussein. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with a
FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, signed May 1, 1998) that, among
6 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret
War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997.
CRS-8
other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the
opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free
Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October
1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to
coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to
highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions. The remaining $2 million was used
to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the
documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes,
and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In
subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for
war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix. Some of the war crimes funding has
gone to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War
Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues.
Iraq Liberation Act
The clearest indication of congressional support for a more active U.S.
overthrow effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998 – the Iraq
Liberation Act (ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998).
The ILA gave the President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles
(and authorized $2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be
designated by the Administration. The Act’s passage was widely interpreted as an
expression of congressional support for the concept of promoting an insurgency by
using U.S. air-power to expand opposition-controlled territory. This idea was
advocated by Ahmad Chalabi and some U.S. experts, such as General Wayne
Downing. President Clinton signed the legislation despite reported widespread
doubts within the Clinton Administration about the chances of success in promoting
an opposition insurgency inside Iraq.
The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting
regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it
should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime
headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly
articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq.
The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the
height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in
which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United
Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were
withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign
against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December
160-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq:
Weapons Programs, Compliance, and U.S. Policy.)
The First Eligibility Designations Under the ILA. Further steps to
promote regime change followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, career
diplomat Frank Ricciardone was named as the State Department’s “Coordinator for
the Transition in Iraq,” – the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999,
after consultations with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13)
that the following organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance
CRS-9
under the Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the
Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the Movement for Constitutional
Monarchy (MCM), which is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a relative of the
Hashemite monarchs that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. The
IMIK and the MCM, in particular, were considered small movements that cannot
contribute much to an overthrow effort. Because of its possible role in contributing
to the formation of Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001,
although it was not formally taken off the ILA eligibility list.
In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton
Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and
“non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999 - 2000, about 150
opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in
Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses provided civil affairs
training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers,
communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However,
the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficiently organized
to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This
restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the
effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United
States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The trainees during
1999-2000 are not believed to have been brought into the Operation Iraqi Freedom
effort against the regime, or the Free Iraqi Forces that deployed to Iraq toward the end
of the active combat phase of the war.
Continued Debate Over Policy
During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end
the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of
Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed
disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the opposition
lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an indication
that the Clinton Administration was skeptical that a renewed overthrow effort would
fare better than previous attempts. Most of those who argued against increased U.S.
support for the opposition maintained that the Iraqi opposition would not succeed
unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement, and that direct U.S. military
action was risky and not justified by the threat posed by Iraq. Some observers
maintained that the potential threat from Saddam Hussein’s regime was sufficiently
grave that direct U.S. military action should be taken. Other critics suggested the
United States focus instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq by threatening force
against Iraq in order to obtain re-entry into Iraq of the U.N. weapons of mass
destruction inspectors that had been absent from Iraq since December 15, 1998.
As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a
provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed
November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the
Iraqi people,” of which at least: $12 million was for the INC to distribute
humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million
CRS-10
was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million
could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive
assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC
distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000 the Clinton Administration
reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in
FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop an aid distribution plan
and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before
it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that
noted that any INC effort to distribute aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control
would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and
to any relief distributors with which the INC contracts.7
Bush Administration Policy
Bush Administration policy toward Iraq changed after the September 11
terrorist attacks, even though no hard evidence linking Iraq to those attacks has come
to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in President
Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he characterized Iraq
as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea.
Pre-September 11 Policy
Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic
elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus
within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow
strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq,
which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its
taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist
regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan – a modification of the U.N.
sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technology reaches Iraq. His plan
offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N.
restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military
technology.8 The United States asserted that this step would alleviate the suffering
of the Iraqi people. Powell, who has sometimes openly expressed skepticism about
the opposition’s prospects, barely raised the regime change issue during his trip or
in his March 7, 2001 testimony before the House International Relations Committee,
at which he was questioned about Iraq.9 After about a year of negotiations among the
Security Council permanent members, the major feature of the smart sanctions plan
– new procedures that virtually eliminate U.N. review of civilian exports to Iraq –
was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Security Council Resolution 1409).
7 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.”
January 17, 2001.
8 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food
Program.
9 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times,
March 2, 2001.
CRS-11
Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime
change policy, many of the questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy
that had faced previous administrations were debated early in the Bush
Administration.10 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush
Administration said and did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first
year. During his confirmation hearings as Deputy Secretary of Defense, a reported
strong advocate of overthrow, Paul Wolfowitz, said that if there were a real option
to overthrow Saddam Hussein, “I would think it was worthwhile,” although he also
stated that he did not yet see a “plausible plan” for changing the regime. Like its
predecessor, the Bush Administration declined to provide the opposition with lethal
aid, combat training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the
separate State Department position of “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,”
further casting doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy. On February 2,
2001, the Bush Administration confirmed that, shortly after President Bush took
office, the Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted
the INC a license to proceed with information gathering inside Iraq only, and not
actual distribution of humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the
Administration amounted to a withholding of U.S. backing for the INC plan to
rebuild its presence inside Iraq.
Many in Congress, on the other hand, continue to support the INC as the
primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional
sentiment, according to several observers, the Bush Administration continued to
expand its ties to the INC despite doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the
INC began satellite television broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV.
The station was funded by the ESF aid appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs
of $1 million and an estimated additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.11
Policy Post-September 11
Bush Administration policy toward Iraq became notably more assertive after
September 11, stressing regime change far more than containment. Almost
immediately after the U.S.-led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in Afghanistan
began in early October 2001, speculation began building that the Administration
might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use of military force as part of a
“phase two” of the war on terrorism. As noted above, in his January 29, 2002 State
of the Union message, President Bush named Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along
with North Korea and Iran. Vice President Cheney visited the Middle East in March
2002 to consult regional countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq militarily,
although the countries visited reportedly urged greater U.S. attention to the Arab-
Israeli dispute and opposed confrontation with Iraq.
The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for
confronting Iraq were (1) its refusal to verifiably end its WMD programs, and (2) its
ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of
10 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh,
Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002.
11 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001.
CRS-12
conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. The Administration added that
regime change would have the further benefit of freeing the Iraqi people of a brutal
regime.
Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s
regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax
mailings, senior U.S. officials said in September 2002, and again in January and
February 2003, that there was evidence of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. Some outside
observers expressed skepticism about such connections because of the ideological
differences between Saddam Hussein’s secular regime and Al Qaeda’s Islamist
character. Secretary of States Powell, as noted above, cited intelligence information
that Ansar al-Islam (see above for the origins of the group) had links to Saddam
Hussein’s regime.12 Other senior officials cited intelligence information that Iraq
provided advice and training to Al Qaeda in the manufacture and use of chemical
weapons, although Administration information appears to date to the early 1990s
when Iraq, largely isolated after the first Gulf war, was politically close to Sudan.
Bin Laden and Al Qaeda was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996).
On the other hand, Baghdad did not control northern Iraq even before Operation
Iraqi Freedom, and some U.S. officials played down this theory.13 Others noted that
Al Qaeda founder Osama bin Laden sought to raise an Islamic army to fight
Saddam’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990, arguing against the need for U.S. troops, and
that he was more an enemy of Saddam than a friend. In the Administration view, the
two shared similar anti-U.S. goals, which outweighed ideological differences and
propelled them into tactical or strategic cooperation. Those ideological differences
were evident in a February 12, 2003, statement by bin Laden referring to Saddam
Hussein’s regime as socialist and infidel, although the statement did express
solidarity with Iraq on the eve of U.S. military action.
WMD Threat Perception. In arguing for military action, U.S. officials
maintained that Iraq’s purported commitment to developing WMD — coupled with
its support for terrorist groups to which Iraq might transfer WMD — constituted an
unacceptable potential threat to the United States and that major U.S. military action
was justified if Iraq refused to disarm voluntarily. U.S. officials said the September
11, 2001 attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to
gather before acting, but must instead act preemptively or preventively. Senior U.S.
officials asserted a WMD threat as follows:
! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years
since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply
with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8,
2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs.
However, statements by U.N. weapons inspectors after inspections
beginning November 27, 2002 indicated they believe Iraq did not
have an active nuclear weapons program, and that inspections on
12 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002.
13 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire,
March 18, 2002.
CRS-13
other weapons categories were making progress even without total
Iraqi cooperation.
! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and
against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not
necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States
or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against
adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of
destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of
massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the
1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings and
did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war.
! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who
could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths
in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of the Administration
cited presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in late 2002,
stating the CIA view that Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to
terrorists if the United States were to attack Iraq. At that point,
according to that argument, Saddam Hussein would be left with little
incentive not to cooperate with terrorist groups capable of striking
at U.S. interests.
Broadening the Opposition. As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for
possible military action to disarm Iraq and change its regime, the Administration tried
to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the
Washington Post reported that, in early 2002, President Bush authorized stepped up
covert activities by the CIA and special operations forces to destabilize Saddam
Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and Defense Departments jointly invited
six major opposition groups – the INC, the INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the
MCM – to Washington for meetings with senior officials, including a video link to
Vice President Cheney. The meetings were held to show unity within the opposition
and among different agencies of the U.S. government, which have tended to favor
different opposition groups.
In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August
15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in ESF to the INC, funds
that had been held up due to differences between the State Department and the INC
over what activities would be funded. The $8 million was to be used to fund the
INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its offices in Washington, London,
Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate its Al Mutamar newspaper and
Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund the information gathering
portion of the INC’s activities; the State Department had refused to fund those
activities, which are conducted inside Iraq, because of strains between the INC and
other opposition groups and questions about INC use of U.S. funds.
In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and
to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic-
based groups. On December 9, 2002, the Bush Administration added six of the
factions discussed below (all except the Higher Council for National Salvation) to
CRS-14
the list of “democratic opposition organizations” eligible to receive drawdowns
under the ILA. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had
increasing contact include the following:
! Iraqi National Movement. It formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the
INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib
(who was part of an early leadership body of the INC); Hatim
Mukhlis, who claims support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan; and
ex-senior military officer Khalid al-Ubaydi.
! Iraqi National Front. Another grouping of ex-military officers,
founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite
Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and
participated and was wounded in the anti-Saddam uprisings
immediately following the 1991 Gulf war.
! Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement. Established in 1996 by
ex-military officer Najib al-Salhi. This group works closely with the
INC. Salhi defected in 1995 after serving as commander of several
tank units in the Republican Guard and regular military.
! Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was
formally established on August 1, 2002. It is headed by Wafiq al-
Samarra’i, a former head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of
staff of Iraq’s military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was
based in Denmark since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member.
Khazraji was placed under travel restrictions by Danish officials in
late November 2002 after saying he wanted to leave Denmark. He
is under investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of
chemical weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities
said on March 17, 2003 that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his home
there, raising questions about whether he is defying the travel
restrictions placed on him. A press report on April 7, 2003, said he
is now in Kuwait, possibly preparing, with U.S. help, to play a part
in a post-Saddam regime there,14 although his whereabouts are
unknown as of late April.
! Iraqi Turkmen Front. A small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping,
generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq.
Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq.
! The Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another
Shiite Islamic Party, but it is considered substantially less pro-
Iranian than SCIRI or the Da’wa Party (see above). The Islamic
Accord is headed by Jamil Wakil. Many Accord members are
followers of Ayatollah Shirazi, an Iranian cleric who was the
spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation
14 ‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper. Agence France Press, April 7, 2003.
CRS-15
of Bahrain (IFLB), which allegedly attempted to overthrow the
government of Bahrain in the early 1980s.
! The Assyrian Democratic Movement, an ethnic-based movement
headed by Secretary-General Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s
Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq. There is a
strong diaspora presence in the United States as well. After building
ties to this group over the past year, the Bush Administration
formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement
into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002.
The Bush Administration applauded efforts over the past year by these groups
to hold meetings to coordinate with each other and with the INC and other groups.
One such meeting, in July 2002 in London and jointly run with the INC, attracted
over 70 ex-military officers. However, since the fall of the regime on April 9, these
groups have not openly sought a major role in post-Saddam Iraq and the whereabouts
of many of their leaders are not known.
Second ILA Designations. As the decision whether to launch military
action approached, on December 9, 2002, President Bush issued a determination to
draw down the remaining $92 million in defense articles and services authorized
under the Iraq Liberation Act for the INA, the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and
the MCM “and to such other Iraqi opposition groups designated by me under the Act
before or after this determination.” This latter phrase suggested that some of the
draw downs would go to the six groups designated above as eligible to receive ILA
draw downs. The announcement appeared to be part of reported plan to train about
5,000 oppositionists in tasks that could assist U.S. forces, possibly including combat
units.15 An initial group of 3,000 was been selected, but only about 70 oppositionists
completed training at an air base (Taszar) in Hungary, according to press reports.16
These oppositionists served with U.S. forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom as
translators and mediators between U.S. forces and local leaders.
As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began
planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002,
with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in
London. In advance of the meeting, the Bush Administration appointed NSC official
Zalmay Khalilzad to be a liaison to the Iraqi opposition. The conference was
organized by the same six groups whose leaders visited Washington in August 2002,
but included other groups as well, and they discussed whether the opposition should
declare a provisional government. The Administration opposed that step on the
grounds that it was premature and would give the impression that outside powers are
determining Iraq’s political structure.
15 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.”
Washington Post, October 19, 2002.
16 Williams, Daniel. U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles. Washington Post, December
18, 2002.
CRS-16
The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65-member follow-up committee,
which some criticized as weighted heavily toward Shiite Islamist groups such as
SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24-27, 2003 in northern Iraq.
Against the urging of U.S. representatives at the meeting, the opposition agreed to
form a six man committee that would prepare for a transition regime, although it
stopped short of declaring a provisional government. The six included PUK leader
Jalal Talabani, KDP leader Masud Barzani, SCIRI leader Mohammad Baqr Al
Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Iyad Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign minister Adnan
Pachachi. Iran allowed Iraqi oppositionists to cross from Iran into northern Iraq to
hold that session.
Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the
new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete
disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if Iraq wanted to avert military action. The
Administration had been downplaying the goal of regime change after President
Bush’s September 12, 2002 speech before the United Nations General Assembly, in
which he focused on enforcing U.N. resolutions that require Iraqi disarmament.
However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change goal after
February 2002 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course. In the
Administration view, a friendly government in Baghdad was required if the
international community is to rid Iraq of WMD and links to terrorist groups.
The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March breakdown of
U.N. diplomacy over whether or not the U.N. Security Council should authorize war
against Iraq for failing to comply with Resolution 1441. The diplomatic breakdown
followed several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by the director of the U.N.
inspection body UNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification, and Inspection
Commission) Hans Blix and the director of the International Atomic Energy Agency
(IAEA), most recently on March 7, 2003. The briefings were generally critical of
Iraq for failing to pro-actively cooperate to clear up outstanding questions about
Iraq’s WMD program, but the latter two briefings (February 24 and March 7) noted
progress in clearing up outstanding WMD questions.
Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and
Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that
inspections should be given more time. The United States, Britain, Spain, and
Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq had not fundamentally decided to disarm,
and would continue only to try to divide the Council and avert war, while preserving
WMD capabilities. The Administration asserted on March 17, 2003, that diplomatic
options to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full attention to military
action. That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and his sons, Uday and
Qusay, an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war. They refused the
ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19.
Assessments of the War. A major issue in the military planning debate was
over whether Iraq’s military would quickly unravel or rebel against Saddam Hussein
in the face of U.S. military action or whether it would fight hard to defend the
regime. Some maintained that Iraqi forces would likely defect or surrender in large
numbers, as happened in the 1991 Gulf war, when faced with a militarily superior
force. Others contrasted the current situation with the 1991 war and argued that Iraqi
CRS-17
forces would hold together and fight fiercely because they were defending Iraq itself,
not an occupation of Kuwait. Some believed the Iraqi military would quickly retreat
into urban areas and hope to inflict large numbers of casualties on American forces.
Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and British forces in
Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the regime, at times, put up stiff resistance using
unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi military commanders or Baathist political
figures came forward to try to establish a post-Saddam government, but senior
regime leaders fled Baghdad, and their whereabouts, as well as the fate of Saddam
Hussein, are unknown.
The intensity of any post-war debate on the outcome of the war might depend
on such factors as humanitarian conditions, the degree of resistance, if any, to a U.S.
and British occupation, the amount of WMD found, if any, and whether a new
government is democratic. Prior to the war, many officials and experts had thought
the Administration would decide not to use military force to change Iraq’s regime or
reduce its WMD capabilities. Some Members of Congress, some outside experts,
and reportedly many senior military leaders believed Iraq was well contained by
sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones and that, as long as Iraq
continued to allow access to U.N. weapons inspections under Resolution 1441, Iraq
could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national security. Inspections
encountered few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700 inspections of about 400
different sites, as of mid-March 2003. Others believed that, even if Iraq were to
acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could have been deterred by U.S. overall
strategic superiority, presumably including the U.S. nuclear arsenal.
Post-War Governance Issues
After the fall of Saddam Hussein’s regime on April 9, there is increasing debate
about governing post-war Iraq. The same U.S. concerns about fragmentation of and
instability in Iraq that existed in prior years are present in the current debate over
how to establish a post-war interim regime. Although some Iraqi civilians have
welcomed U.S. and British troops in areas captured, many Iraqis now want U.S. and
British forces to leave Iraq. Some believe that U.S. occupation forces might face
guerrilla attacks from remnants of the Iraqi regime; others say U.S. forces might
become caught in the crossfire among ethnic and political factions that might fight
each other for power in post-war Iraq. Other experts fear that a post-war Iraq will
inevitably fall under control of SCIRI and other Shiite Islamist forces who, as noted
above, are well organized and are asserting growing control over areas inhabited by
Iraq’s Shiites. Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s population but have
traditionally been under-represented in Iraq’s Sunni Muslim-dominated government.
Establishing an Iraqi Interim Administration. The Administration
asserts that it will do what is necessary to bring about a stable, democratic successor
regime that complies with all applicable U.N. resolutions. In press interviews on
April 6, 2003, Deputy Secretary of Defense Paul Wolfowitz indicated that the
Administration is hoping to turn post-war governance over to an Iraqi interim
administration within six months. The Iraqi opposition to Saddam Hussein, even
those groups that have most closely associated with the United States, generally
CRS-18
opposes a major role for U.S. officials in running a post-war Iraqi government. The
opposition groups assert that Iraqis are sufficiently competent and unified to rebuild
Iraq after a war with the United States. The Iraqi National Congress, in particular,
fears that the Administration might hand too much power to former Baathists.
To begin the process of establishing a successor regime, the Administration
organized an April 15 meeting, in Nasiriyah, of about 100 Iraqis of varying
ideologies, present by U.S. invitation. Many of the attendees were representatives
of Iraqi tribal groupings that had not been politically active before. However, SCIRI,
along with several Shiite clerics that have appropriated authority throughout much
of southern Iraq since the fall of the regime, boycotted the meeting and called for an
Islamic state and the withdrawal of U.S. forces. Another meeting is to be held in
Baghdad on April 26, but SCIRI has said it will not attend. Some U.S. officials want
to bring the Shiite Islamists into the U.S.-led process, but, based on their statements,
most Shiite leaders appear to feel they can assert their authority in post-war Iraq apart
from the United States, and that participation in the U.S.-led process might discredit
them in the eyes of most Iraqis.
As part of the planning process that took place before the war, the U.S. State
Department and the Defense Department supported groups of Iraqi exiles to address
issues that confront a successor government.17 It is not yet known what influence, if
any, these working groups will have on any post-war regime decision-making in
Iraq. The U.S. State Department project, which cost $5 million, consisted of
working groups that discussed (1) transitional justice; (2) public finance; (3) public
and media outreach; (4) democratic principles; (5) water, agriculture, and the
environment; (6) health and human services; (7) economy and infrastructure; (8)
education; (9) refugees, internally-displaced persons, and migration policy; (10)
foreign and national security policy; (11) defense institutions and policy; (12) free
media; (13) civil society capacity-building; (14) anti-corruption measures; and (15)
oil and energy.
U.S.-Led Post-War Operations in Iraq. Experts note that all projections,
including the duration of the U.S. military occupation and the numbers of occupation
troops, could be determined by the amount of Iraqi resistance, if any, the number of
U.S. casualties taken, and the speed with which a successor regime is chosen. At
present, about 125,000 U.S. and British troops remain in Iraq. The Chief of Staff of
the Army, General Eric Shinseki, told the Senate Armed Services Committee on
February 24 that as many as 200,000 U.S. troops might be needed for a post-war
occupation, although other Administration officials, including Wolfowitz, have
disputed the Shinseki assessment. The United States is discussing with other
countries pledges and mechanisms for a peacekeeping role that might share the
burden of post-war security in Iraq. Some pledges, such as a contribution by Italy for
police to work in Iraq’s cities, have been made.
Under plans formulated before hostilities began, Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) is
directing civilian reconstruction, working through a staff of U.S. diplomats and other
17 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,”
Washington File, December 11, 2002.
CRS-19
U.S. government personnel who will serve as advisers and administrators in Iraq’s
various ministries. He heads the Office of Reconstruction and Humanitarian
Assistance, within the Department of Defense, created by a January 20, 2003,
executive order. After spending the combat phase of the war in neighboring Kuwait,
Garner and some of his staff of about 200 deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003,
to begin work. Former Ambassador to Yemen Barbara Bodine is responsible for a
“central” region; and retired generals Buck Walters and Bruce Moore are responsible
for “southern” and “northern” regions, respectively. During the occupation period,
the United States goals are to eliminate remaining WMD and terrorist cells in Iraq,
begin economic reconstruction, and purge Baath Party leaders. Iraq’s oil industry is
to be rebuilt and upgraded.
The United States and its European allies are discussing a possible U.N. role in
post-war Iraq, which was the focus of President Bush’s meeting in Belfast with
British Prime Minister Blair on April 7 and 8. Prior to the war, Britain and most
European countries believed that the Iraqi people would more easily accommodate
a U.N.- administered post-war Iraq than one administered primarily by the United
States and Britain. Senior U.S. officials, with the reported exception of Secretary of
State Powell, wanted to keep the U.N. role limited to humanitarian relief and
economic reconstruction, reserving most decisions about a post-war Iraqi power
structure to the United States and Britain. Thus far, there has been no agreement on
the exact nature of the U.N. role in post-war Iraq, and the U.N. does not at this time
have a role in the U.S.-led process of establishing a new government. However, U.S.
officials say they want a new U.N. Security Council resolution that would endorse
a new government when it is established. Secretary-General Annan has appointed
a U.N. coordinator, Pakistani diplomat Rafeuddin Ahmed, to run U.N. operations
in Iraq. However, the debate over a U.N. role has revived differences that appeared
over the decision to go to war against Iraq; some of the countries that opposed the
war are reportedly objecting to a resolution that they believe might legitimize a U.S.-
British occupation.
Reconstruction and Oil Industry Issues. It is widely assumed that Iraq’s
vast oil reserves, believed second only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be used to
fund reconstruction. Presidential spokesman Ari Fleischer said on February 18,
2003, referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a variety of means ... to shoulder
much of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.” Many observers have been
concerned that an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could destroy its own oil fields.
Iraq set Kuwait’s oil fields afire before withdrawing from there in 1991, but coalition
forces say they have secured Iraq’s southern oil fields since combat began on March
19, 2003. Only about 9 oil wells were set on fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in
that region, and all have now been put out. The northern oil fields in Kirkuk and
Mosul were not set afire. There is a debate within the Administration over how
direct will be the U.S. participation in running Iraq’s oil industry during the
occupation period. The outcome of that issue might hinge on the character of U.N.
involvement in post-war Iraq. Some oil production is reported to have resumed as
of April 23, although not yet enough to satisfy Iraq’s domestic needs, let alone allow
for export.
A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which
foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s
CRS-20
vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will
seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other
countries. Some press reports suggest the Administration is planning to exert such
control,18 although some observers speculate that the Administration had sought to
create such an impression in order to persuade Russia to support use of force against
Iraq.
Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have
been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program.
The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put
in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was
suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various
aspects of the program departed Iraq. As of March 14, 2003, about $9 billion worth
of humanitarian goods were in the process of being delivered or in production. (See
CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.)
On March 28, 2003, the U.N. Security Council unanimously adopted Resolution
1472 that restarts the program’s operations and empowers the United Nations, for a
45-day period, to take direct control of all aspects of the program. Under the new
resolution, the United Nations is to set priorities for and direct the delivery of already
contracted supplies. The Bush Administration had envisioned that a post-war Iraqi
interim administration might reassume those functions from U.N. staff when an
interim administration is in place and able to perform these duties. However, on
April 17, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions against Iraq,
suggesting the Administration wants to focus on restoring normal international
commerce with Iraq rather than reviving the oil-for-food program. The program
expires on June 3, 2003, and must be renewed by U.N. Security Council resolution
if it is to be continued.
War Crimes. An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is
whether Saddam Hussein and his associates should be prosecuted for war crimes and
crimes against humanity, if and when they are caught. The Administration said in
early April 2003 that Saddam and his inner circle should be tried by Iraqis if they are
captured, although others might be tried by a U.S.-led process for any crimes
committed in the course of the 2003 war. Over the past year, the Administration had
been gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those
it had sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay; Ali Hassan al-
Majid, for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (he was reported by British
officers to have died in an early April air strike on his home in Basra); Muhammad
Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered in mid April 2003); Taha Yasin Ramadan; first Vice
President and number three in the regime; Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the
Revolutionary Command Council and formally number two in the regime; Barzan
al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother (captured in mid April 2003); Watban al-Tikriti
(captured in April 2003) and Sabawi al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam
and former leaders of regime intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputy Prime Minister
and foremost regime spokesman; and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait during
Iraq’s occupation of that country.
18 “After Saddam, an Uncertain Future,” Insight Magazine, February 3, 2003.
CRS-21
Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials
sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured
or surrendered. Among them are Amir al-Saadi, chief science adviser to Saddam;
and Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti, a son-in-law of Saddam.
The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and
the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29,
1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related
atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for
FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress
that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal
for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137
(passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March
13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October
31, 1998).
A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993,
after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the Administration has supported
INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the
arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the
Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer,
said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established,
focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical
weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds)
and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which
an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against
Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes
against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations.
In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a
U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war
crimes is formed.
Congressional Reactions
Congress, like the Administration, appears to have had divergent views on the
mechanisms for promoting regime change, although there appears to be widespread
agreement in Congress that regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S.
policy. However, there was substantial disagreement over whether a major military
offensive was the most desirable option for achieving that objective. On December
20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75, by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal
to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a “mounting threat” to the United States. The
resolution did not call for new U.S. steps to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few
Members called for the overthrow of Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in
support of the resolution.
In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq,
some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint
appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on
Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations
Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the
CRS-22
opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an
option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In
early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members – Senators John McCain,
Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and Trent Lott
and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr. – wrote to
President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for operations
inside Iraq itself. According to the letter,
Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S.
assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish
areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and
other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to
accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.”
As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002,
Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result.
Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force
against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce
U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on
October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote
of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243).
The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. It has held some hearings
on issues of post-war reconstruction and the effects of a war on the Middle East
region as a whole, as well as the likely costs of the fighting and reconstruction. Some
Members made floor statements and given speeches and press conferences to state
their views on whether force should be used to obtain Iraq’s disarmament.
During the war and in its aftermath, several Members have applauded the
performance of the U.S. military and the overthrow of the regime. Some Members,
however, have criticized the Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war
period in light of major looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the
regime. Some Members have said they believe that the formation of an Islamic state
led by Iraq’s Shiite community would be inconsistent with U.S. goals for Iraq.
CRS-23
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition
Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.)
to the Opposition
(Figures in millions of dollars)
INC War
Crimes Broadcasting
Unspecified
Opposition
Activities
Total
FY 1998
(P.L. 105-174)
2.0 5.0
(RFE/RL)
3.0 10.0
FY 1999
(P.L. 105-277)
3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0
FY 2000
(P.L. 106-113)
2.0 8.0 10.0
FY 2001
(P.L. 106-429)
12.0
(aid
distribution
inside Iraq)
2.0 6.0
(INC radio)
5.0 25.0
FY 2002
(P.L. 107-115)
25.0 25.0
Total,
FY1998- FY 2002
15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0
FY2003
(no earmark)
3.1
(announced
April, 2003 )
6.9 (remaining
to be
allocated)
10.0
FY2004
(request)
0 0
Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq
Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97
million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent,
as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided,
the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and
FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be
used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N.
programs.
Another version (English): 7 April 2003 — RL31339_2003-04-07.pdf
Order Code RL31339
Report for Congress
Received through the CRS Web
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
And Post-War Iraq
Updated April 7, 2003
Kenneth Katzman
Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs
Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division
Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Iraq
Summary
In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized
Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to abandon
its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs as required by U.N. Security
Council resolutions and the potential for it to transfer WMD to terrorist groups.
Since September 2002, the President has said that unless Iraq fully disarms in
cooperation with United Nations weapons inspectors, the United States would lead
a coalition to achieve that disarmament militarily. U.S. officials have made clear that
this would include the ouster of Iraq’s President Saddam Hussein’s regime. On
March 17, 2003, the United States launched “Operation Iraqi Freedom,” a war effort
to disarm Iraq and change its regime.
Since February 2003, the Administration has stressed that regime change
through U.S.-led military action would yield benefits beyond disarmament, including
liberation from an oppressive regime for the Iraqi people and enhancement of the
prospects for peace and democracy throughout the Middle East. The goal of regime
change in Iraq has been declared U.S. policy since November 1998. Even before
then, U.S. efforts to oust Saddam had been pursued, with varying degrees of
intensity, since the end of the Gulf war in 1991. These efforts primarily involved
U.S. backing for opposition groups inside and outside Iraq, some of which have been
receiving U.S. political and financial support and military training. According to
several experts, past efforts to change the regime floundered because of limited U.S.
commitment, disorganization of the Iraqi opposition, and the efficiency and
ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping intelligence and security forces. Previous
U.S. administrations ruled out major U.S. military action to change Iraq’s regime,
believing such action would be costly, risky, and not necessarily justified by the level
of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament.
The character of the government that would replace Saddam Hussein’s Baath
Party, should Operation Iraqi Freedom succeed, is yet to be determined. Some
Administration officials had hoped that major military and governmental defections
from the Hussein regime would serve as the core of a successor government.
However, the Hussein regime has generally held together throughout Operation Iraqi
Freedom, and the Bush Administration is apparently turning to the exiled opposition
groups to form the core of a new regime, although Iraqis currently living within the
country are likely to be incorporated into a new government eventually. It is possible
that some of the pre-existing disputes and schisms within the opposition could break
out into a post-war power struggle.
This report will be updated as warranted by major developments.
Contents
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
An Opposition Coalition Emerges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Ansar al-Islam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
SCIRI/Badr Corps/Hakim Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Relations With Other Shiite Islamic Groups and Personalities . . . . . . . 5
The Fragmentation of the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Rebuilding an Opposition Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
The First Eligibility Designations Under the ILA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Continued Debate Over Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Policy Post-September 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Broadening the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Assessments of the War . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Post-War Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Iraqi Interim Administration? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Reconstruction and Oil Industry Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
War Crimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Congressional Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts
and Post-War Iraq
The United States has been attempting to change Iraq’s regime since the 1991
Persian Gulf war, although achieving this goal was not declared policy until 1998.
In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass destruction
(WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United States would
seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A regime change
policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, October 31, 1998).
Bush Administration officials have emphasized regime change as the cornerstone of
U.S. policy toward Iraq, even before the launch of Operation Iraqi Freedom on March
17, 2003.
Past Attempts to Oust Saddam
Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an
operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George
H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end
of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and
Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope
of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions.1 The revolt in southern Iraq reached
the suburbs of Baghdad, but the well-trained and loyal Republican Guard forces had
survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from battle prior to the U.S.
ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid-March 1991. The Kurds,
benefitting from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991, were able to
drive Iraqi troops out of much of northern Iraq and establish an autonomous zone
there; the Kurds remain largely free of Baghdad’s rule today.
According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite
uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding
stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup
against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that
purpose.2 The Administration apparently believed – and this view apparently still is
shared by many experts and U.S. officials – that a coup by elements within the
current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq.
Many observers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and
1 Shiites constitute about 65% of Iraq’s population but historically have been repressed and
under-represented in governing bodies by the members of the Sunni Muslim sect. Kurds,
who are not Arabs, constitute about 20% of the population of about 20 million.
2 Tyler, Patrick. “Plan On Iraq Coup Told to Congress.” New York Times, Feb. 9, 1992.
CRS-2
Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and
tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria.
An Opposition Coalition Emerges
Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that
the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment
within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision
was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the
diverse opposition groups that had led the postwar rebellions. At the same time, the
Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and
diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This
opposition coalition seemed to provide a vehicle for the United States to build a
viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert
support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.3
The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi
The growing opposition coalition took concrete shape in an organization called
the Iraqi National Congress (INC). The INC was formed when the two main Kurdish
militias — the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic Union of
Kurdistan (PUK) — participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens of
opposition groups. In October 1992, the major Shiite groups came into the coalition
when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq.
The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi
ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military
officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC
with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups
publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests,
including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the
preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. Security Council
resolutions on Iraq.4 However, many observers doubted its commitment to
democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and
because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies.
Ahmad Chalabi. Selected to chair the INC’s Executive Committee was
Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 58 years old, a secular Shiite Muslim and U.S.-
educated mathematician who had fled Iraq to Jordan in 1958, when the Hashemite
monarchy was overthrown in a military coup. This coup occurred 10 years before the
Baath Party took power in Iraq (July 1968). In 1978, he founded the Petra Bank in
Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian authorities on charges of financial
3 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2,
1992.
4 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by
INC representatives, February 1993.
CRS-3
malfeasance, and he left Jordan in 1989. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian
government was pressured by Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has
since rebuilt ties to the Jordanian government. He is said to be the favorite of those
Administration officials, particularly in the Department of Defense, that have been
the most supportive of changing Iraq’s regime by force. Chalabi does not appear to
have a large following inside Iraq, although his popularity could grow if he is seen
by anti-Saddam Iraqis as Washington’s candidate to head a post-war regime. On
April 6, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters were airlifted by the U.S. military from
their base in the north to the Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs
in southern Iraq.
A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book
“Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq,” detailing alleged Iraqi regime
human rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracy for Iraq, including
full rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he teaches
Middle Eastern politics at Brandeis University.
The Kurds/KDP and PUK. In committing to the concept of federalism, the
INC platform assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq,
although some fear the Kurds might seek outright independence. Turkey, which has
a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly fears
that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into a
broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy
since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War
I. In 1961, the KDP, then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP
leader Masud Barzani’s father, began an insurgency that has continued until today,
although interrupted by periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud
Barzani’s brother, Idris, commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the Iran-Iraq
war but was killed in that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from the
KDP in 1965; the PUK’s members are generally more educated, urbane, and left-
leaning than those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000-
60,000 fighters, some of which are said to be increasingly well-trained in
conventional military tactics.
Ansar al-Islam. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties enjoyed
good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement of Iraqi
Kurdistan (IMIK), is headed by Shaykh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in Halabja, Iraq, the
IMIK has publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical attack on that
city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998.
A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam
(Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam).
This faction, led by Mullah Krekar (who was detained in Europe in August 2002 and
now lives in Norway), reportedly is associated with Al Qaeda and has hosted in its
northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters who fled the U.S.-led war in Afghanistan.
The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials to
be Abu Musab Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in
Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the
millenium celebration, as well as to recent attempts to spread the biological agent
ricin in London and possibly other places in Europe. Prior to Operation Iraqi
CRS-4
Freedom, during which its base has been captured, about 8,000 people were in the
Ansar al-Islam enclave, located near the town of Khurmal. This included about 600
fighters.5 Mullah Krekar reportedly studied under Shaykh Abdullah al-Azzam, an
Islamic theologian of Palestinian origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama bin
Laden. Fighters of Ansar al-Islam clashed with the PUK around Halabja in
December 2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedly responsible for an assassination
attempt against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002. In his presentation
before the U.N. Security Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied
Zarqawi and Ansar al-Islam to the Iraqi regime, which might view Ansar al-Islam as
a means of pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents, although many experts believe
those links are tenuous or even non-existent. Some believe the Ansar enclave is
supported by Iran.
SCIRI/Badr Corps/Hakim Family. Some outside experts have concerns
about the alliance between Iran and another INC component, the Iraqi Shiite Islamic
fundamentalist group called the Supreme Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq
(SCIRI). SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition
groups in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad
Baqr al-Hakim, was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head an Islamic
Republic of Iraq. Prior to the formation of SCIRI, Hakim and his family were leaders
of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party, which allegedly was responsible for a May 1985
attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks on the
U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The involvement of Hakim in that event, if
any, is unclear. Mohammad Baqr is the son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim,
who was a prominent Shiite leader in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah
Khomeini when Khomeini was in exile in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. Members
of the Hizballah organization in Lebanon that held U.S. hostages in that country
during the 1980s often linked release of the Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa
Party prisoners held by Kuwait for those offenses.
SCIRI has about 5,000 fighters organized into a “Badr Corps” (named after a
major battle in early Islam) that conducts forays from Iran into southern Iraq to attack
the Iraqi military and officials there. The Badr Corps is headed by Mohammad
Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim. (Another Hakim brother, Mahdi,
was killed in Sudan in May 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s security services.)
Although Iran has improved relations with Iraq over the past few years, Iran’s
Revolutionary Guard – which is politically aligned with Iran’s hard line civilian
officials – reportedly continues to provide the Badr Corps with weapons and other
assistance. However, many Iraqi Shiites view SCIRI as an Iranian creation and
SCIRI/Badr Corps operations in southern Iraq prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did
not spark broad popular unrest against the Iraqi regime. SCIRI has periodically
distanced itself from the INC. Until August 2002 when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined
other opposition figures for meetings in Washington, it had publicly refused to work
openly with the United States or accept U.S. assistance. Press reports in late 2002
said that factions in Iran differ over whether SCIRI should be cooperating with the
United States and that some Iranian factions are supporting rival Shiite Islamist
5 Chivers, C.J. New York Times, December 6, 2002.
Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.”
CRS-5
groups less inclined to work with Washington. In March 2003, it was reported by a
number of press outlets that a few hundred Badr Brigade fighters are moving into the
Kurdish controlled areas of northern Iraq, possibly to help seize territory if Saddam
Hussein’s regime collapses at the hands of a U.S.-led offensive.
Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party continues to exist as a separate group, but it
is allied with SCIRI. The party was founded in the 1960s by an Iraqi Shiite cleric,
Ayatollah Mohammad Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of Ayatollah Khomeini.
Baqr Al Sadr was hung by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the Da’wa’s alleged
responsibility in fomenting Shiite anti-regime unrest following Iran’s 1979 Islamic
revolution. Its main spokesman is Ibrahim al-Jafari.
Relations With Other Shiite Islamic Groups and Personalities.
SCIRI is the dominant political faction in many cities of southern Iraq, but there are
other centers of power in that area. One prominent cleric in Najaf, now under the
control of U.S. forces, is Grand Ayatollah Ali al-Sistani. Now free of a long house
arrest at the hands of Baghdad, he has a large following throughout the Shiite
portions of Iraq. Another noteworthy leader is Abd al-Majid Khoi, the son of the
late Grand Ayatollah Khoi. Abd al-Majid Khoi heads the Khoi Foundation, based
in London, and he returned to Iraq after U.S.-led forces took Najaf. Grand Ayatollah
Khoi did not accept the political doctrines of Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran, but the
Khoi family has personal relations with the Hakim family, Ayatollah Sistani, and
other prominent Iraqi Shiites.
The Fragmentation of the Opposition
The differences within the INC led to its near collapse in the mid-1990s. In
May 1994, the KDP and the PUK began clashing with each other over territory,
customs revenues levied at border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish
enclave’s government based in Irbil. The PUK lined up support from Iran while the
KDP sought and received countervailing backing from its erstwhile nemesis, the
Baghdad government. The infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC offensive
against Iraqi troops in March 1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at the last
minute. Although it was repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of the less
well-trained and poorly motivated Iraqi units on the front lines facing the Kurds.
Some INC leaders have pointed to the battle as an indication that the INC could have
succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. military help, had it been given additional
resources and training in the 1990s.
The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the INC caused the
United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by renewing ties to a separate
group, Iraq National Accord (INA).6 The INA, originally founded in 1990 with Saudi
support, consists of military and security defectors who were perceived as having ties
to disgruntled officials currently serving within their former organizations. It is
headed by Dr. Iyad Alawi, former president of the Iraqi Student Union in Europe and
6 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret
War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997.
CRS-6
a physician by training. The INA’s prospects appeared to brighten in August 1995
when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al-Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons
of mass destruction programs — defected to Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip
on the military and security services was weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed
to allow the INA to operate from there. The INA became penetrated by Iraq’s
intelligence services and, in June 1996, Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by
arresting or executing over 100 INA sympathizers in the military. Prior to Operation
Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA continued to operate throughout Iraq, and
it apparently had rebuilt itself to some extent since the June 1996 arrests. However,
it does not appear to have a large following in the Iraqi regime and has not announced
any key defections from the regime since the start of Operation Iraqi Freedom.
Although it has been cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war,
there is a history of friction between the two groups; the INA reportedly bombed an
INC facility in northern Iraq in October 1995.
Iraq’s counteroffensive against the opposition was completed two months after
the arrests of the INA sympathizers. In late August 1996, the KDP asked Baghdad
to provide armed support for its capture of Irbil from the rival PUK. Iraq took
advantage of the request to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in
northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout northern Iraq.
In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred
oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated
from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists,
mostly from the INC.
Rebuilding an Opposition Strategy
For the two years following the opposition’s 1996 setbacks, the Clinton
Administration had little contact with the opposition. In those two years, the INC,
INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations and their
ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998, then
Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations
subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations”
about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish.
Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections
during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam
Hussein. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with a
FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, signed May 1, 1998) that, among
other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the
opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free
Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October
1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to
coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to
highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions. The remaining $2 million was used
to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the
documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes,
and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In
CRS-7
subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for
war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix. Some of the war crimes funding has
gone to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War
Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues.
Iraq Liberation Act
The clearest indication of congressional support for a more active U.S.
overthrow effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998 – the Iraq
Liberation Act (ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998).
The ILA gave the President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles
(and authorized $2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be
designated by the Administration. The Act’s passage was widely interpreted as an
expression of congressional support for the concept of promoting an insurgency by
using U.S. air-power to expand opposition-controlled territory. This idea was
advocated by INC executive director Ahmad Chalabi and some U.S. experts, such as
General Wayne Downing. President Clinton signed the legislation despite reported
widespread doubts within the Clinton Administration about the chances of success
in promoting an opposition insurgency inside Iraq.
The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting
regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it
should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime
headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly
articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq.
The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the
height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in
which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United
Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were
withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign
against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December
160-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq:
Weapons Programs, Compliance, and U.S. Policy.)
The First Eligibility Designations Under the ILA. Further steps to
promote regime change followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, career
diplomat Frank Ricciardone was named as the State Department’s “Coordinator for
the Transition in Iraq,” – the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999,
after consultations with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13)
that the following organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance
under the Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the
Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the Movement for Constitutional
Monarchy (MCM), which is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a relative of the
Hashemite monarchs that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. The
IMIK and the MCM, in particular, are considered small movements that cannot
contribute much to an overthrow effort. Because of its possible role in contributing
to the formation of Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK is no longer receiving U.S. support,
although it has not formally been taken off the U.S. list of organizations eligible for
assistance under the ILA.
CRS-8
In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton
Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and
“non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999 - 2000, about 150
opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in
Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses provided civil affairs
training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers,
communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However,
the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficiently organized
to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This
restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the
effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United
States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The trainees during
1999-2000 are not believed to have been brought into the Operation Iraqi Freedom
effort against the regime.
Continued Debate Over Policy
During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end
the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of
Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed
disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the opposition
lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an indication
that the Clinton Administration was skeptical that a renewed overthrow effort would
fare better than previous attempts. Most of those who argued against increased U.S.
support for the opposition maintained that the Iraqi opposition would not succeed
unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement, and that direct U.S. military
action was risky and not justified by the threat posed by Iraq. Some observers
maintained that the potential threat from Saddam Hussein’s regime was sufficiently
grave that direct U.S. military action should be taken. Other critics suggested the
United States focus instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq by threatening force
against Iraq in order to obtain re-entry into Iraq of the U.N. weapons of mass
destruction inspectors that had been absent from Iraq since December 15, 1998.
As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a
provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed
November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the
Iraqi people,” of which at least: $12 million was for the INC to distribute
humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million
was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million
could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive
assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC
distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000 the Clinton Administration
reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in
FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop an aid distribution plan
and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before
it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that
noted that any INC effort to distribute aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control
CRS-9
would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and
to any relief distributors with which the INC contracts.7
Bush Administration Policy
Bush Administration policy toward Iraq changed after the September 11
terrorist attacks, even though no hard evidence linking Iraq to those attacks has come
to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in President
Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he characterized Iraq
as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea.
Pre-September 11 Policy
Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic
elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus
within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow
strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq,
which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its
taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist
regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan – a modification of the U.N.
sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technology reaches Iraq. His plan
offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N.
restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military
technology.8 The United States asserted that this step would alleviate the suffering
of the Iraqi people. Powell, who has sometimes openly expressed skepticism about
the opposition’s prospects, barely raised the regime change issue during his trip or
in his March 7, 2001 testimony before the House International Relations Committee,
at which he was questioned about Iraq.9 After about a year of negotiations among the
Security Council permanent members, the major feature of the smart sanctions plan
– new procedures that virtually eliminate U.N. review of civilian exports to Iraq –
was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Security Council Resolution 1409).
Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime
change policy, many of the questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy
that had faced previous administrations were debated early in the Bush
Administration.10 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush
Administration said and did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first
year. During his confirmation hearings as Deputy Secretary of Defense, a reported
7 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.”
January 17, 2001.
8 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food
Program.
9 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times,
March 2, 2001.
10 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh,
Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002.
CRS-10
strong advocate of overthrow, Paul Wolfowitz, said that if there were a real option
to overthrow Saddam Hussein, “I would think it was worthwhile,” although he also
stated that he did not yet see a “plausible plan” for changing the regime. Like its
predecessor, the Bush Administration declined to provide the opposition with lethal
aid, combat training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the
separate State Department position of “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,”
further casting doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy. On February 2,
2001, the Bush Administration confirmed that, shortly after President Bush took
office, the Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted
the INC a license to proceed with information gathering inside Iraq only, and not
actual distribution of humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the
Administration amounted to a withholding of U.S. backing for the INC plan to
rebuild its presence inside Iraq.
Many in Congress, on the other hand, continue to support the INC as the
primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional
sentiment, according to several observers, the Bush Administration continued to
expand its ties to the INC despite doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the
INC began satellite television broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV.
The station was funded by the ESF aid appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs
of $1 million and an estimated additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.11
Policy Post-September 11
Bush Administration policy toward Iraq became notably more assertive after
September 11, stressing regime change far more than containment. Almost
immediately after the U.S.-led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in Afghanistan
began in early October 2001, speculation began building that the Administration
might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use of military force as part of a
“phase two” of the war on terrorism. As noted above, in his January 29, 2002 State
of the Union message, President Bush named Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along
with North Korea and Iran. Vice President Cheney visited the Middle East in March
2002 to consult regional countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq militarily,
although the countries visited reportedly urged greater U.S. attention to the Arab-
Israeli dispute rather than confrontation with Iraq.
The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for
confronting Iraq were (1) its refusal to verifiably end its WMD programs, and (2) its
ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of
conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States.
Iraq and Al Qaeda. Some in the Administration do not discount the
possibility that Iraq might have had a connection to the September 11 attacks or the
subsequent anthrax mailings, although that does not appear to be a mainstream view
in the Administration. Senior U.S. officials said in September 2002, and again in
January and February 2003, that there is evidence of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda,
although some observers have expressed skepticism about such connections because
11 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001.
CRS-11
of the ideological differences between Saddam Hussein’s secular regime and Al
Qaeda’s Islamist character. Secretary of States Powell, as noted above, has cited
intelligence information that Ansar al-Islam (see above for the origins of the group)
has links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.12 Other senior officials cited intelligence
information that Iraq has provided advice and training to Al Qaeda in the
manufacture and use of chemical weapons, although Administration information
appears to date to the early 1990s when Iraq was politically close to Sudan; bin Laden
and Al Qaeda was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996).
On the other hand, Baghdad did not control northern Iraq even before Operation
Iraqi Freedom, and some U.S. officials have played down this theory.13 Others note
that Al Qaeda founder Osama bin Laden sought to raise an Islamic army to fight
Saddam’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990, arguing against the need for U.S. troops, and
that he is more an enemy of Saddam than a friend. In the Administration view, the
two share similar anti-U.S. goals, which might outweigh ideological differences and
propel them into tactical or strategic cooperation. Those differences were evident
in a February 12, 2003 statement by bin Laden referring to Saddam Hussein’s regime
as socialist and infidel, although the statement did express solidarity with Iraq on the
eve of U.S. military action.
WMD Threat Perception. In arguing for military action, U.S. officials
maintained that Iraq’s purported commitment to developing WMD – coupled with
its support for terrorist groups to which Iraq might transfer WMD – constituted an
unacceptable potential threat to the United States and that major U.S. military action
was justified if Iraq refused to disarm voluntarily. U.S. officials said the September
11, 2001 attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to
gather before acting, but must instead act preemptively or preventively. Senior U.S.
officials asserted a WMD threat as follows:
! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years
since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply
with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8,
2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs.
However, statements by U.N. weapons inspectors after inspections
beginning November 27, 2002 indicated they believe Iraq did not
have an active nuclear weapons program, and that inspections on
other weapons categories were making progress even without total
Iraqi cooperation.
! Iraq has used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds)
and against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran). The implication of this assertion
is that Iraq would not necessarily be deterred from using WMD
against the United States or its allies. Others note that Iraq has not
used such weapons against adversaries, such as the United States,
that have the capability of destroying Iraq’s government in
12 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002.
13 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire,
March 18, 2002.
CRS-12
retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of massive retaliation, Iraq did not
use WMD against U.S. troops in the 1991 Gulf war. On the other
hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings and did burn Kuwait’s oil fields.
! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who
could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths
in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of the Administration cite
presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in late 2002,
stating the CIA view that Iraq is likely to transfer WMD to terrorists
if the United States were to attack Iraq. At that point, Saddam
Hussein would be left with little incentive not to cooperate with
terrorist groups capable of striking at U.S. interests.
Broadening the Opposition. As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for
possible military action to disarm Iraq and change its regime, the Administration tried
to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the
Washington Post reported that, in early 2002, President Bush authorized stepped up
covert activities by the CIA and special operations forces to destabilize Saddam
Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and Defense Departments jointly invited
six major opposition groups – the INC, the INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the
MCM – to Washington for meetings with senior officials, including a video link to
Vice President Cheney. The meetings were held to show unity within the opposition
and among different agencies of the U.S. government, which have tended to favor
different opposition groups. In advance of the visit, the Defense Department agreed
to fund the information gathering portion of the INC’s activities; the State
Department had refused to fund those activities, which are conducted inside Iraq,
because of strains between the INC and other opposition groups and questions about
INC use of U.S. funds.
On August 15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in ESF
to the INC, funds that had been held up due to differences between the State
Department and the INC over what activities would be funded. The $8 million was
to be used to fund the INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its offices
in Washington, London, Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate its Al
Mutamar newspaper and Liberty TV.
In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and
to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic-
based groups. On December 9, 2002, the Bush Administration added six of the
factions discussed below (all except the Higher Council for National Salvation) to
the list of “democratic opposition organizations” eligible to receive drawdowns
under the ILA. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had
increasing contact include the following:
! Iraqi National Movement. It formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the
INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib
(who was part of an early leadership body of the INC); Hatim
Mukhlis, who claims support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan; and
ex-senior military officer Khalid al-Ubaydi.
CRS-13
! Iraqi National Front. Another grouping of ex-military officers,
founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite
Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and
participated and was wounded in the anti-Saddam uprisings
immediately following the 1991 Gulf war.
! Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement. Established in 1996 by
ex-military officer Najib al-Salhi. This group works closely with the
INC. Salhi defected in 1995 after serving as commander of several
tank units in the Republican Guard and regular military.
! Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was
formally established on August 1, 2002. It is headed by Wafiq al-
Samarra’i, a former head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of
staff of Iraq’s military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was
based in Denmark since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member.
Khazraji was placed under travel restrictions by Danish officials in
late November 2002 after saying he wanted to leave Denmark. He
is under investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of
chemical weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities
said on March 17, 2003 that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his home
there, raising questions about whether he is defying the travel
restrictions placed on him. A press report on April 7, 2003 said he
is now in Kuwait, possibly preparing, with U.S. help, to play a part
in a post-Saddam regime there.14
! Iraqi Turkmen Front. A small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping,
generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq.
Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq.
! The Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another
Shiite Islamic Party, but it is considered substantially less pro-
Iranian than SCIRI or the Da’wa Party (see above), other Shiite
Islamic parties with which the Administration has had contact. The
Islamic Accord is headed by Jamil Wakil. Many Accord members
are followers of Ayatollah Shirazi, an Iranian cleric who was the
spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation
of Bahrain (IFLB), which allegedly attempted to overthrow the
government of Bahrain in the early 1980s.
! The Assyrian Democratic Movement, an ethnic-based movement
headed by Secretary-General Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s
Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq. There is a
strong diaspora presence in the United States as well. After building
ties to this group over the past year, the Bush Administration
formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement
into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002.
14 ‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper. Agence France Press, April 7, 2003.
CRS-14
The Bush Administration applauded efforts over the past year by these groups
to hold meetings to coordinate with each other and with the INC and other groups.
One such meeting, in July 2002 in London and jointly run with the INC, attracted
over 70 ex-military officers.
Second ILA Designations. As the decision whether to launch military
action approached, on December 9, 2002, President Bush issued a determination to
draw down the remaining $92 million in defense articles and services authorized
under the Iraq Liberation Act for the INA, the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and
the MCM “and to such other Iraqi opposition groups designated by me under the Act
before or after this determination.” This latter phrase suggested that some of the
draw downs would go to the six groups designated above as eligible to receive ILA
draw downs. The announcement appeared to be part of reported plan to train about
5,000 oppositionists in tasks that could assist U.S. forces, possibly including combat
units.15 An initial group of 3,000 was been selected, but only about 70 oppositionists
completed training at an air base (Taszar) in Hungary, according to press reports.16
These oppositionists are with U.S. forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, serving as
translators and mediators between U.S. forces and local leaders.
As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began
planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002,
with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in
London. In advance of the meeting, the Bush Administration appointed NSC official
Zalmay Khalilzad to be a liaison to the Iraqi opposition. The conference was
organized by the same six groups whose leaders visited Washington in August 2002,
but included other groups as well, and they discussed whether the opposition should
declare a provisional government. The Administration opposed that step on the
grounds that it was premature and would give the impression that outside powers are
determining Iraq’s political structure.
The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65-member follow-up committee,
which some criticized as weighted heavily toward Shiite Islamist groups such as
SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24-27, 2003 in northern Iraq.
Against the urging of U.S. representatives at the meeting, the opposition agreed to
form a six man committee that would prepare for a transition regime, although it
stopped short of declaring a provisional government. The six included PUK leader
Jalal Talabani, KDP leader Masud Barzani, SCIRI leader Mohammad Baqr Al
Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Iyad Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign minister Adnan
Pachachi. Iran allowed Iraqi oppositionists to cross from Iran into northern Iraq to
hold that session.
Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the
new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete
disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if Iraq wanted to avert military action. The
15 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.”
Washington Post, October 19, 2002.
16 Williams, Daniel. U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles. Washington Post, December
18, 2002.
CRS-15
Administration had been downplaying the goal of regime change after President
Bush’s September 12, 2002 speech before the United Nations General Assembly, in
which he focused on enforcing U.N. resolutions that require Iraqi disarmament.
However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change goal after
February 2002 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course. In the
Administration view, a friendly government in Baghdad was required if the
international community is to rid Iraq of WMD and links to terrorist groups.
The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March breakdown of
U.N. diplomacy over whether or not the U.N. Security Council should authorize war
against Iraq for failing to comply with Resolution 1441. The diplomatic breakdown
followed several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by the director of the U.N.
inspection body UNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification, and Inspection
Commission) Hans Blix and the director of the International Atomic Energy Agency
(IAEA), most recently on March 7, 2003. The briefings were generally critical of
Iraq for failing to pro-actively cooperate to clear up outstanding questions about
Iraq’s WMD program, but the latter two briefings (February 24 and March 7) noted
progress in clearing up outstanding WMD questions.
Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and
Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that
inspections should be given more time. The United States, Britain, Spain, and
Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq had not fundamentally decided to disarm,
and would continue only to try to divide the Council and avert war, while preserving
WMD capabilities. The Administration asserted on March 17, 2003, that diplomatic
options to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and reportedly began turning its attention
to military action. That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and his sons,
Uday and Qusay, an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war. They
refused the ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19.
Assessments of the War. A major issue in the military planning debate was
over whether Iraq’s military would quickly unravel or rebel against Saddam Hussein
in the face of U.S. military action or whether it would fight hard to defend the
regime. Some maintained that Iraqi forces would likely defect or surrender in large
numbers, as happened in the 1991 Gulf war, when faced with a militarily superior
force. Others contrasted the current situation with the 1991 war and argue that Iraqi
forces would hold together and fight fiercely because they are defending Iraq itself,
not an occupation of Kuwait. Some believed the Iraqi military would quickly retreat
into urban areas and hope to inflict large numbers of casualties on American forces.
Although Iraq’s conventional military forces have been overwhelmed by U.S. and
British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, the regime did not quickly collapse and,
at times, put up stiff resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi military
commanders or political figures have come forward to work with U.S. or British
forces to establish a post-Saddam government.
The intensity of any post-war debate on the wisdom and justification for the war
might depend on its military and political outcome. Factors such as the number of
U.S. casualties, post-war humanitarian conditions, the degree of resistance to a U.S.
and British occupation, and whether a new government is democratic, will likely be
factors considered. Some analysts had thought the Administration would decide not
CRS-16
to use military force to change Iraq’s regime or reduce its WMD capabilities. Some
Members of Congress, some outside experts, and reportedly many senior military
leaders believed Iraq was well contained by sanctions and the U.S./British enforced
no-fly zones and that, as long as Iraq continued to allow access to U.N. weapons
inspections under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S.
national security. Inspections encountered few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700
inspections of about 400 different sites, as of mid-March 2003. Others believed that,
even if Iraq were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could have been
deterred by U.S. overall strategic superiority, presumably including the U.S. nuclear
arsenal.
Post-War Governance Issues
As U.S. forces have reached Baghdad, there is increasing debate about
governing post-war Iraq. The same U.S. concerns about fragmentation of and
instability in Iraq that existed in prior years are present in the current debate over
regime change. Although some Iraqi civilians have welcomed U.S. and British
troops in areas captured, resistance has been stiffer than expected, raising questions
about the stability of Iraq in the post-war period. Some believe that U.S. occupation
forces might face protracted guerrilla attacks from remnants of the Iraqi military,
possibly fighting alongside Iraqi civilians against U.S. forces. Others say U.S. forces
might become caught in the crossfire among ethnic and political factions that might
fight each other for power in post-war Iraq. Other experts fear that a post-war Iraq
will inevitably fall under control of SCIRI and other Shiite Islamist forces who are
the best-organized opponents of the Iraqi regime. Shiites constitute about 60% of
Iraq’s population but have traditionally been under-represented in Iraq’s Sunni
Muslim-dominated government.
The Administration asserts that it will do what is necessary to bring about a
stable, democratic successor regime that complies with all applicable U.N.
resolutions. In press interviews on April 6, 2003, Deputy Secretary of Defense Paul
Wolfowitz indicated that the Administration is hoping to turn post-war governance
over to an Iraqi interim administration within six months. Experts note that all
projections, including the duration of the U.S. military occupation and the numbers
of occupation troops, could be determined by the amount of Iraqi resistance and U.S.
casualties. The Chief of Staff of the Army, General Eric Shinseki, told the Senate
Armed Services Committee on February 24 that as many as 200,000 U.S. troops
might be needed for a postwar occupation, although other Administration officials,
including Wolfowitz, have disputed the Shinseki assessment.
Under occupation plans formulated before hostilities began, U.S. officials said
that Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) is expected to direct U.S. civilian occupation forces,
which are to include U.S. diplomats and other U.S. government personnel serving as
advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various ministries. He heads the Office of
Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance, within the Department of Defense,
created by a January 20, 2003 executive order. He and most of his staff have
deployed to Kuwait in preparation to later take up positions in post-war Iraq. During
the interim period, the United States would eliminate remaining WMD, eliminate
CRS-17
terrorist cells in Iraq, begin economic reconstruction, and purge Baath Party leaders.
Iraq’s oil industry would also be rebuilt and upgraded.
The exact nature of post-war governance might depend on the outcome of a
discussion between the United States and its European allies over a U.N. role in post-
war Iraq, which will also be the focus of President Bush’s meeting in Belfast with
British Prime Minister Blair on April 7. Britain and most European countries believe
that the Iraqi people would more easily accommodate to a U.N.- administered post-
war Iraq. Senior U.S. officials, with the reported exception of Secretary of State
Powell, want to keep the U.N. role limited to humanitarian relief and economic
reconstruction, reserving most decisions about a post-war Iraqi power structure to the
United States and Britain. U.S. officials say they would support a new U.N. Security
Council resolution that would endorse a new government, and, with U.S. support,
Secretary-General Annan said on April 7 that he was appointing a U.N. coordinator,
Pakistani diplomat Rafeuddin Ahmedm, to run U.N. operations in Iraq. However,
U.S. officials note that some of the countries that opposed the war might object to
adopting a resolution that they believe might legitimize a U.S.-British occupation.
Iraqi Interim Administration? The exiled Iraqi opposition, including those
groups most closely associated with the United States, generally opposes a major role
for U.S. officials in running a post-war Iraqi government. The opposition groups
assert that Iraqis are sufficiently competent and unified to rebuild Iraq after a war
with the United States. The opposition groups that have been active over the past
few years, such as the Iraqi National Congress, believe that they are entitled to govern
post-Saddam Iraq, and fear that the Administration might hand too much power to
those who have been part of the current regime. Although the Administration asserts
that it wants Iraqis who stayed in Iraq and were not part of the exiled opposition to
participate in a new power structure, the U.S. military airlifted about 700 opposition
fighters, led by Chalabi, into the Nasiriyah area on April 6. The opposition fighters
are to begin stabilizing areas of southern Iraq that have been captured by U.S.-led
forces. Some analysts believe that the insertion of Chalabi into the war effort could
represent a U.S. effort to promote him as a possible head of an Iraqi interim
administration.
As part of the post-war planning process, the U.S. State Department and the
Defense Department have supported groups of Iraqi exiles in planning to address
issues that will confront a successor government.17 It is not yet known what
influence, if any, these working groups will have on any post-war regime decision-
making in Iraq. As part of the post-war planning process, the U.S. State Department
ran a $5 million “Future of Iraq” project in which Iraqi exiles are meeting in working
groups to address issues that will confront a successor government. The working
groups in phase one of the project have discussed (1) transitional justice; (2) public
finance; (3) public and media outreach; (4) democratic principles; (5) water,
agriculture, and the environment; (6) health and human services; and (7) economy
and infrastructure. Phase two, which reportedly will begin soon, includes working
groups on (1) education; (2) refugees, internally-displaced persons, and migration
17 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,”
Washington File, December 11, 2002.
CRS-18
policy; (3) foreign and national security policy; (4) defense institutions and policy;
(5) free media; (6) civil society capacity-building; (7) anti-corruption measures; and
(8) oil and energy.
Reconstruction and Oil Industry Issues. It is widely assumed that Iraq’s
vast oil reserves, believed second only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be used to
fund reconstruction. Presidential spokesman Ari Fleischer said on February 18,
2003, referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a variety of means ... to shoulder
much of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.” Many observers have been
concerned that an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could destroy its own oil fields.
Iraq set Kuwait’s oil fields afire before withdrawing from there in 1991, but coalition
forces say they have secured Iraq’s southern oil fields since combat began on March
19, 2003. Only about 9 oil wells were set on fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in
that region, and virtually all have now been put out. The northern oil fields in Kirkuk
and Mosul have not yet been captured by coalition forces, but there are no reports any
are afire in those areas. There is a debate within the Administration over how direct
will be the U.S. participation in running Iraq’s oil industry during the occupation
period. The outcome of that issue might hinge on the character of U.N. involvement
in post-war Iraq.
A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which
foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s
vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will
seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other
countries. Some press reports suggest the Administration is planning to exert such
control,18 although some observers speculate that the Administration had sought to
create such an impression in order to persuade Russia to support use of force against
Iraq.
Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis receive
all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program. The program,
which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put in place after
the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was suspended
just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various aspects of
the program departed Iraq. As of March 14, 2003, about $9 billion worth of
humanitarian goods were in the process of being delivered or in production.
On March 28, 2003, the U.N. Security Council unanimously adopted Resolution
1472 that restarts the program’s operations and empowers the United Nations, for a
45-day period, to take direct control of all aspects of the program. Under the new
resolution, the United Nations is to set priorities for and direct the delivery of already
contracted supplies. The Bush Administration envisions that a post-war Iraqi interim
administration would reassume those functions from U.N. staff when an interim
administration is in place and able to perform these duties. Press reports on March
27, 2003 said that British forces in southern Iraq were talking with Iraqi oil workers
to try to get them to return to work in Iraq’s oil industry. Coalition forces also
announced in late March that they would soon restart a major oil refinery near Basra.
18 “After Saddam, an Uncertain Future,” Insight Magazine, February 3, 2003.
CRS-19
There reportedly are still some Iraqi oil exports via Turkey, and the proceeds of these
sales continue to be deposited into the U.N. escrow account. No Iraqi oil is flowing
from the Gulf outlet at this time.
War Crimes. An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is
whether Saddam Hussein and his associates should be prosecuted for war crimes and
crimes against humanity. The Administration reportedly has decided that he and his
inner circle would be tried in Iraq if they are captured. The Administration has been
gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those
reportedly to be sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay; Ali
Hassan al-Majid, for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (he was reported by
British officers to have died in an early April air strike on his home in Basra);
Muhammad Hamza al-Zubaydi; Taha Yasin Ramadan; first Vice President and
number three in the regime; Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary
Command Council and formally number two in the regime; Barzan al-Tikriti,
Saddam’s half brother; Watban al-Tikriti and Sabawi al-Tikriti, both other half
brothers of Saddam and former leaders of regime intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz,
deputy Prime Minister and foremost regime spokesman; and Aziz Salih Noman,
governor of Kuwait during Iraq’s occupation of that country.
The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and
the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29,
1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related
atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for
FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress
that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal
for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137
(passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March
13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October
31, 1998).
A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993,
after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the Administration has supported
INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the
arrest of 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals, including Saddam and his two sons.
Although apparently lacking international support, in August 2000 then U.S.
Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes David Scheffer said that the United States
wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established, focusing on “nine major
criminal episodes.” These include the use of chemical weapons against Kurdish
civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds) and the forced relocation
of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which an estimated 50,000 to
182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against Iran; post-war crimes
against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes against Kuwait
(including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations. In FY2001 and
again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a U.N. “Iraq War
Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war crimes is formed.
CRS-20
Congressional Reactions
Congress, like the Administration, appears to have had divergent views on the
mechanisms for promoting regime change, although there appears to be widespread
agreement in Congress that regime change is desirable and an appropriate U.S.
policy. However, there was substantial disagreement over whether a major military
offensive is the most desirable option for achieving that objective. On December 20,
2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75, by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal to
readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a “mounting threat” to the United States. The
resolution did not call for new U.S. steps to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few
Members called for the overthrow of Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in
support of the resolution.
In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq,
some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint
appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on
Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations
Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the
opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an
option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In
early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members – Senators John McCain,
Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and Trent Lott
and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr. – wrote to
President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for operations
inside Iraq itself. According to the letter,
Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S.
assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish
areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and
other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to
accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.”
As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002,
Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result.
Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force
against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce
U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on
October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote
of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243).
The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. It has held some hearings
on issues of post-war reconstruction and the effects of a war on the Middle East
region as a whole, as well as the likely costs of the fighting and reconstruction. Some
Members have made floor statements and given speeches and press conferences to
state their views on whether force should be used to obtain Iraq’s disarmament.
CRS-21
Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition
Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.)
to the Opposition
(Figures in millions of dollars)
INC War
Crimes Broadcasting
Unspecified
Opposition
Activities
Total
FY 1998
(P.L. 105-174)
2.0 5.0
(RFE/RL)
3.0 10.0
FY 1999
(P.L. 105-277)
3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0
FY 2000
(P.L. 106-113)
2.0 8.0 10.0
FY 2001
(P.L. 106-429)
12.0
(aid
distribution
inside Iraq)
2.0 6.0
(INC radio)
5.0 25.0
FY 2002
(P.L. 107-115)
25.0 25.0
Total,
FY1998- FY 2002
15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0
FY2003
(no earmark)
10.0
(allocated)
10.0
FY2004
(request)
0 0
Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq
Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97
million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent,
as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided,
the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and
FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be
used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N.
programs.